Sei sulla pagina 1di 903

Project Manual for

Scofield Building Addition


Helper UT Stake
Scofield, Utah Project #503-6925-11010101 08.29.2011
Utah American Fork Project Management Office 110 East Main Street P.O. Box 268 American Fork, Utah 84003-0268 801.763.4520 801.763.4548 (fax) Architect: WPA Architecture 475 North Freedom Blvd. Provo, Utah 84601 801.374.0800 801.374.0805 (fax) Structural Engineer: WCA Structural Engineering 442 North Main Street, Suite 200 Bountiful, Utah 84010 801.298.1118 801.298.1122 (fax) Mechanical & Electrical Engineer: Royal Engineering 2335 South State Street, Suite 225 Provo, Utah 84606 801.375.2228 801.375.2676 (fax) Roofing Consultant: JSR Services, Inc. 546 West 8360 South Sandy, Utah 84070 801.748.1764 801.748.1765 (fax) Civil Engineer: Excel Engineering 12 West 100 North, Suite 201 American Fork, Utah 84003 801.756.4504 801.756.4511 (fax) Landscape Architect: Red Twig Land Design 3451 East Heyward Circle Eagle Mountain, Utah 84005 801.592.6490 801.789.8373 (fax) Fire Protection Consultant: RDF Engineering 3668 South Eastwood Drive Salt Lake City, Utah 84109 801.277.4933 Acoustical Consultant: Sound Design International 533 West 2600 South, Suite 110 Bountiful, Utah 84010 801.298.1113 801.298.1336 (fax)

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

Introductory Information

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

BLANK PAGE

Introductory Information

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

TABLE of CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00 0101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

D I V I S I 0 N 00: P R O C U R E M E N T A N D C O N T R A C T I N G R E Q U I R E M E N T S PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP


00 1000 SOLICITATION

00 1116 INVITATION TO BID 00 2000 I N S T R U C T I O N S FOR P R O C U R E M E N T

00 2113 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 3000 AVAILABLE INFORMATION

00 3127 EXISTING ASBESTOS INFORMATION 00 3132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 4000 P R O C U R E M E N T F O R M S AND S U P P L E M E N T S

00 4113 BID FORM 00 4334 EQUAL PRODUCT APPROVAL REQUEST FORM 00 4336 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR FORM 00 4500 R E P R E S E N T A T I O N S AND C E R T I F I C A T I O N S

004549 CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ASBESTOS REPRESENTATION

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP


00 5000 C O N T R A C T I N G F O R M S AND S U P P L E M E N T S

00 5214 SAMPLE AGREEMENT 00 6000 PROJECT FORMS

00 6211 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM 00 6333 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION FORM 00 7000 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

00 7213 GENERAL CONDITIONS: FIXED SUM (SINGLE-PRIME CONTRACT) 00 7301 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP
D I V I S I 0 N 01: G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S
01 1000 SUMMARY 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3100 01 3200 01 3300 01 3500 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SPECIAL PROCEDURES

01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 01 4100 01 4200 01 4301 01 4523 01 4546 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS REFERENCES QUALITY ASSURANCE - QUALIFICATIONS TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES DUCT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5100 01 5200 01 5400 01 5600 01 5700 01 5800 TEMPORARY UTILITIES CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION AIDS TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES TEMPORARY CONTROLS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6100 01 6200 01 6400 01 6600 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PRODUCT OPTIONS OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 01 7400 01 7700 01 7800 EXECUTION CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

01 8000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP


D I V I S I O N 02: E X I S T I N G C O N D I T I O N S

Table of Contents

-2-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101
02 4000

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING

02 4113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 6000 CONTAMINATED SITE MATERIAL REMOVAL

D I V I S I O N 03: C O N C R E T E
03 1000 C O N C R E T E F O R M I N G A N D A C C E S S O R I E S 03 1113 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING 03 1511 CONCRETE ANCHORS AND INSERTS 03 2000 C O N C R E T E R E I N F O R C I N G 03 2100 REINFORCING STEEL 03 3000 C A S T - I N - P L A C E C O N C R E T E 03 3053 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3111 NORMAL WEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03 3517 CONCRETE SEALER-HARDENER-WATERPROOFER

03 4000 P R E C A S T C O N C R E T E 03 4800 PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03 5000 C A S T D E C K S A N D U N D E R L A Y M E N T

03 6000 G R O U T I N G 03 6213 NON-METALLIC NON-SHRINK GROUT

D I V I S I O N 04: M A S O N R Y
04 0000 MASONRY CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING MASONRY GROUTING MASONRY REINFORCING MASONRY VENEER TIES MASONRY ACCESSORIES

04 0513 04 0516 04 0520 04 0521 04 0523

04 2000 U N I T M A S O N R Y 04 2113 BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 2223 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2713 COMPOSITE UNIT MASONRY 04 4000 S T O N E A S S E M B L I E S

D I V I S I O N 05: M E T A L S
05 0000 METALS

Table of Contents

-3-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101
05 0503 SHOP-APPLIED METAL COATINGS 05 0523 METAL FASTENINGS 05 1000 S T R U C T U R A L M E T A L F R A M I N G 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1223 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS 05 4000 C O L D - F O R M E D M E T A L F R A M I N G

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

05 5000 M E T A L F A B R I C A T I O N S 05 5133 WALL-MOUNTED LADDERS

05 7000 D E C O R A T I V E M E T A L

D I V I S I O N 06: W O O D, P L A S T I C S, A N D C O M P O S I T E S
06 0000 W O O D, P L A S T I C S, A N D C O M P O S I T E S

06 0573 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT 06 1000 R O U G H C A R P E N T R Y 06 1011 06 1100 06 1636 06 1712 06 1733 06 1753 WOOD FASTENINGS WOOD FRAMING WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER: SCL WOOD 'I' JOISTS SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES: TRUSSED RAFTERS

06 2000 F I N I S H C A R P E N T R Y 06 2001 COMMON FINISH CARPENTRY REQUIREMENTS 06 2024 DOOR, FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION 06 2210 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM 06 4000 A R C H I T E C T U R A L W O O D W O R K 06 4001 06 4005 06 4114 06 4115 06 4512 COMMON ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK REQUIREMENTS PLASTIC LAMINATE WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS ROSTRUM CASEWORK ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM

06 6000 P L A S T I C F A B R I C A T I O N S 06 6001 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06 8000 C O M P O S I T E F A B R I C A T I O N S

D I V I S I O N 07: T H E R M A L A N D M O I S T U R E P R O T E C T I O N
07 1000 D A M P P R O O F I N G A N D W A T E R P R O O F I N G 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 2000 T H E R M A L P R O T E C T I O N

Table of Contents

-4-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101
07 2113 07 2116 07 2123 07 2613 07 2719 BOARD INSULATION BLANKET INSULATION LOOSE-FILL INSULATION ABOVE-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

07 3000 S T E E P S L O P E R O O F I N G

07 4000 R O O F I N G A N D S I D I N G P A N E L S 07 4646 MINERAL FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 5000 M E M B R A N E R O O F I N G

07 6000 F L A S H I N G A N D S H E E T M E T A L 07 6100 07 6210 07 6311 07 6322 SHEET METAL ROOFING GALVANIZED STEEL FLASHING AND TRIM METAL SOFFIT PANELS STEEL FASCIA

07 7000 R O O F A N D W A L L S P E C I A L T I E S A N D A C C E S S O R I E S 07 7126 REGLETS 07 7226 RIDGE VENTS 07 8000 S M O K E A N D F I R E P R O T E C T I O N

07 9000 J O I N T P R O T E C T I O N 07 9213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 07 9219 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

D I V I S I O N 0 8: O P E N I N G S
08 0000 OPENINGS

08 0601 HARDWARE GROUP AND KEYING SCHEDULES 08 1000 D O O R S A N D F R A M E S 08 1213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 1313 HOLLOW METAL DOORS 08 1429 PRE-FINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS / CLEAR 08 3000 S P E C I A L T Y D O O R S A N D F R A M E S 08 3110 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 4000 E N T R A N C E S, S T O R E F R O N T S, A N D CURTAIN WALLS 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 5000 W I N D O W S 08 5313 VINYL WINDOWS 08 6000 R O O F W I N D O W S A N D S K Y L I G H T S

Table of Contents

-5-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101
08 7000 H A R D W A R E 08 7101 08 7102 08 7103 08 7104 08 7106 08 7107 08 7108 08 7109 08 7913 COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS HANGING DEVICES SECURING DEVICES OPERATING TRIM CLOSING DEVICES PROTECTIVE PLATES AND TRIM STOPS AND HOLDERS ACCESSORIES KEY STORAGE AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

08 8000 G L A Z I N G 08 8100 GLASS GLAZING 08 9000 L O U V E R S A N D V E N T S

D I V I S I O N 09: F I N I S H E S
09 0000 FINISHES

09 0503 FLOORING SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 09 2000 P L A S T E R A N D G Y P S U M B O A R D 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2226 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM: GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 3000 T I L I N G 09 3013 CERAMIC TILING 09 5000 C E I L I N G S 09 5116 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 6000 F L O O R I N G 09 6466 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 6813 TILE CARPETING 09 6816 SHEET CARPET / URETHANE CUSHION, DIRECT GLUE 09 7000 W A L L F I N I S H E S 09 7216 VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS 09 7226 SISAL WALL COVERINGS 09 8000 A C O U S T I C A L T R E A T M E N T 09 8413 FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS 09 9000 P A I N T S A N D C O A T I N G S 09 9001 09 9112 09 9113 09 9123 09 9124 09 9125 09 9324 09 9413 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS EXTERIOR PAINTED FERROUS METAL EXTERIOR PAINTED GALVANIZED METAL INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER INTERIOR PAINTED METAL INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD INTERIOR CLEAR-FINISHED HARDWOOD INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING

Table of Contents

-6-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D I V I S I O N 10: S P E C I A L T I E S
10 1000 I N F O R M A T I O N S P E C I A L T I E S 10 1113 10 1116 10 1123 10 1200 10 1424 10 1453 10 1495 FIXED CHALKBOARDS FIXED MARKERBOARDS FIXED TACKBOARDS DISPLAY CASES ENGRAVED STONE PANEL SIGNAGE TRAFFIC SIGNAGE MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE

10 2000 I N T E R I O R S P E C I A L T I E S 10 2113 10 2233 10 2813 10 2814 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES BABY-CHANGING STATION

10 4000 S A F E T Y S P E C I A L T I E S 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 5000 S T O R A G E S P E C I A L T I E S 10 5713 HAT AND COAT RACKS 10 7000 E X T E R I O R S P E C I A L T I E S 10 7430 ALUMINUM STEEPLE 10 7431 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED STEEPLE 10 7516 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES

D I V I S I O N 11: E Q U I P M E N T
11 3000 R E S I D E N T I A L E Q U I P M E N T 11 3114 SERVING AREA RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 5000 E D U C A T I O N A L A N D S C I E N T I F I C EQ U I P M E N T

11 6000 E N T E R T A I N M E N T E Q U I P M E N T

11 6500 A T H L E T I C A N D R E C R E A T I O N A L E Q U I P M E N T 11 6624 BASKETBALL EQUIPMENT OPTION ONE 11 6626 WALL PADDING 11 9000 O T H E R E Q U I P M E N T

D I V I S I O N 12: F U R N I S H I N G S
12 2000 W I N D O W T R E A T M E N T S 12 2200 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 12 6000 M U L T I P L E S E A T I N G

Table of Contents

-7-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101
12 9000 O T H E R F U R N I S H I N G S

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D I V I S I O N S 13 THROUGH 19: NOT USED

FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP


D I V I S I O N 20: NOT USED

D I V I S I O N 21: F I R E S U P P R E S S I O N
21 1000 W A T E R - B A S E D F I R E S U P P R E S S I O N S Y S T E M S 21 1313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

D I V I S I O N 22: P L U M B I N G
22 0000 PLUMBING COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

22 0501 22 0529 22 0553 22 0719 22 1000

PLUMBING PIPES AND PUMPS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS FACILITY SANITARY SEWER SPECIALTIES

22 1116 22 1119 22 1313 22 1319

22 3000 P L U M B I N G E Q U I P M E N T 22 3413 INSTANTANEOUS, TANKLESS, GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 4000 P L U M B I N G F I X T U R E S 22 4213 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS AND URINALS 22 4216 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS 22 4700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

D I V I S I O N 23: H E A T I N G, V E N T I L A T I N G, A N D A I R - C O N D I T I O N I N G
23 0000 H E A T I N G, V E N T I L A T I N G, A N D A I R - C O N D I T I O N I N G COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT DUCT INSULATION HVAC PIPING INSULATION ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC

23 0501 23 0529 23 0553 23 0713 23 0719 23 0933

23 1000 F A C I L I T Y F U E L S Y S T E M S 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 2000 H V A C P I P I N G A N D P U M P S

Table of Contents

-8-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101
23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2600 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING 23 3000 H V A C A I R D I S T R I B U T I O N 23 3001 23 3114 23 3300 23 3346 23 3400 23 3713 23 3714 COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS LOW-PRESSURE METAL DUCTS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES FLEXIBLE DUCTS HVAC FANS DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES LOUVERS AND VENTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

23 4000 H V A C A I R C L E A N I N G D E V I C E S 23 4100 AIR FILTERS 23 5000 C E N T R A L H E A T I N G E Q U I P M E N T 23 5135 AIR PIPING 23 5417 GAS-FIRED FURNACES 23 6000 C E N T R A L C O O L I N G E Q U I P M E N T 23 6213 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 23 7000 C E N T R A L H V A C E Q U I P M E N T

23 8000 D E C E N T R A L I Z E D H V A C E Q U I P M E N T 23 8333 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS

D I V I S I O N 24 & 25: NOT USED

D I V I S I O N 26: E L E C T R I C A L
26 0000 ELECTRICAL COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES LINE-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES HEATING CABLES WALKWAY SNOW MELT CABLE CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CABLES GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHT SCHEDULE

26 0501 26 0503 26 0519 26 0520 26 0521 26 0523 26 0526 26 0533 26 0613

26 2000 L O W (LINE) V O L T A G E D I S T R I B U T I O N 26 2417 CIRCUIT-BREAKER PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 4000 L I G H T N I N G P R O T E C T I O N 26 4100 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 5000 L I G H T I N G 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Table of Contents

-9-

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101
26 5200 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D I V I S I O N 27: C O M M U N I C A T I O N S
27 1000 S T R U C T U R E D C A B L I N G 27 1116 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 27 1501 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 4000 A U D I O - V I D E O C O M M U N I C A T I O N S

27 5000 D I S T R I B U T E D C O M M U N I C A T I O N S A N D M O N I T O R I N G S Y S T E M S 27 5117 SOUND SYSTEM

D I V I S I O N 28: E L E C T R O N I C S A F E T Y A N D S E C U R I T Y
28 1000 E L E C T R O N I C A C C E S S C O N T R O L A N D I N T R U S I O N D E T E C T I O N

28 3000 D E T E C T I O N A N D A L A R M 28 3101 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

D I V I S I O N 29: NOT USED

SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP


D I V I S I O N 30: NOT USED

D I V I S I O N 31: E A R T H W O R K
31 0000 EARTHWORK

31 0501 COMMON EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS 31 1000 S I T E C L E A R I N G 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 1123 AGGREGATE BASE 31 1413 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 31 2000 E A R T H M O V I N G 31 2213 31 2216 31 2316 31 2323 31 2500 ROUGH GRADING FINE GRADING EXCAVATION FILL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS

31 3000 E A R T H W O R K M E T H O D S

31 6000 S P E C I A L F O U N D A T I O N S A N D L O A D - B E A R I N G E L E M E N T S

Table of Contents

- 10 -

Document 00 0110

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D I V I S I O N 32: E X T E R I O R I M P R O V E M E N T S
32 1000 B A S E S, B A L L A S T S, A N D P A V I N G 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 3000 S I T E I M P R O V E M E N T S 32 3113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

32 8000 I R R I G A T I O N 32 8423 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 9000 P L A N T I N G 32 9001 32 9113 32 9119 32 9223 32 9300 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS SOIL PREPARATION LANDSCAPE GRADING SODDING PLANTS

D I V I S I O N 33: U T I L I T I E S
33 1000 W A T E R U T I L I T I E S 33 1116 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 1119 FIRE SUPPRESSION UTILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 2000 W E L L S

33 3000 S A N I T A R Y S E W E R A G E U T I L I T I E S 33 3313 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE 33 4000 S T O R M D R A I N A G E U T I L I T I E S 33 4116 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 5000 F U E L D I S T R I B U T I O N U T I L I T I E S 33 5613 ABOVE-GROUND FUEL-STORAGE TANKS: LPG

D I V I S I O N S 36 THROUGH 39: NOT USED

PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP


D I V I S I O N S 40 THROUGH 49: NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

- 11 -

Document 00 0110

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

GENERAL G101 Cover Sheet G102 Code Analysis CIVIL C101 C102 C103 C104 C701 C702 C703 C704

Utility Plan Demolition Plan Grading Plan Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Site Civil Details Site Civil Details Site Civil Details Stormtech Details

LANDSCAPE L1.1 Planting Plan L1.2 Planting Legend & Details L2.1 L2.2 L2.3 Irrigation Plan Irrigation Details Irrigation Details

ARCHITECTURAL A101 Site Plan A103 Floor Demolition Plan A104 Floor Plan A105 Wall Construction Plan A106 Wall Construction Types A107 Roof Plan A108 Roof Details A151 A152 A201 A301 A302 A303 A401 A402 A501 A601 A602 A603 A604 A605 A701 A702 A703 Reflected Ceiling Plan Light Cove & Ceiling Trim Exterior Elevations Building Sections Building Sections Building Sections Steeple Elevation and Sections Exterior Wall Sections Miscellaneous Details Finish Schedule Door & Window Schedules Door Details Folding Partition Details Window Schedule & Details Enlarged Branch President & Clerk Enlarged Restrooms & Custodial Area Enlarged Serving Area -100 0115

List of Drawing Sheets

Project # 503-6925-11010101 A704 A705 A801 A802 F101 F301 F302 Chapel Details Chapel Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details Furnishings Plan and Schedules Room Signage Location Plan Room Signage Schedule & Details

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

STRUCTURAL S1.0 General Structural Notes S1.1 Special Inspection & Testing S1.2 Schedules S1.3 Schedules S2.0 S3.0 S4.0 S5.0 S5.1 S5.2 S6.0 S6.1 S6.2 S6.3 S6.4 Footing & Foundation Plan Floor Framing Plan Roof Framing Plan Truss Profiles Truss Profiles Truss Steeple Details Framing Details Framing Details Framing Details Framing Details Framing Details

FIRE SPRINKLER FS101 Main Floor And Attic Fire Sprinkler Floor Plans FS501 Fire Sprinkler Riser And Details PLUMBING P101 Main Floor Plumbing Plan P401 P501 Plumbing Schedule and Schematics Plumbing Details

MECHANICAL MP101 Demolition Plan M101 M102 M501 M502 M503 M601 Crawl Space Mechanical Plan Main Floor Mechanical Plan Mechanical Details Mechanical Details Condensing Unit Snow Shed Mechanical Schedules

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ME101 Automatic Temperature Control Floor Plan ME201 Automatic Temperature Controls

List of Drawing Sheets

-2-

00 0115

Project # 503-6925-11010101 ME301 Automatic Temperature Controls ME401 Automatic Temperature Controls ELECTRICAL E101 Electrical Site Plan E102 Electrical Demolition Plan E103 Main Floor Lighting Plan E104 Main Floor Power Plan E501 E601 E602 E801 E802 E803 Electrical Details Electrical Schedules Electrical Schedules Electrical Equipment List & Details Floor Plan A/V & Data Layout Floor Plan A/V & Data Layout

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

FA101 Main Floor Fire Alarm Plan LP101 Lightning Protection Plan SOUND TA600 Audio, Video, Data Details & Audio Riser TA601 Data Riser TA602 Audio, Video, & Data Equipment List

END OF SECTION

List of Drawing Sheets

-3-

00 0115

BLANK PAGE

B I D D I N G R E Q U I R E M E N T S,
S A M P L E F O R M S, E T C FIXED SUM PROJECTS (U.S.)

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 1 of 21

BLANK PAGE

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 2 of 21

INVITATION TO BID
1. GENERAL CONTRACTORS INVITED TO BID THE PROJECT:

BC Builders Broderick & Henderson Construction Stallings Construction Warner Construction Westland Construction Zwick Construction

E-mail: bcbuilders5@msn.com E-mail: Gary@broderick-henderson.com E-mail: jed@stallings-construction.com E-mail: joel@warnerconstructioninc.net E-mail: stan@gowestland.com E-mail: ecalder@zwickconstruction.com

2.

PROJECT: Scofield-Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Project # 503-6925-11010101

3.

LOCATION: 165 North Union Street Scofield, Utah 84526

4.

OWNER: Corporation of the Presiding Bishop of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, A Utah Corporation Sole 50 East North Temple Street Salt Lake City, Utah 84150

5.

ARCHITECT: WPA Architecture 475 North Freedom Blvd. Provo, Utah 84601 801.374.0800 Fax: 801.374.0805

6.

DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: A. Products provided under Value Managed Relationships (VMRs) are specified for the following products or systems: 1. Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 2. Aluminum Windows 3. Standard Steel Doors 4. Standard Steel Frames 5. Flush Wood Doors 6. Factory-Finished Wood Doors 7. Finish Hardware 8. Wood Flooring Assemblies 9. Furnaces 10. Refrigerant Condensing Units Demolition of existing chapel, classrooms, branch presidents office, corridors, restrooms, materials center & serving area. Selective demolition of structural roofing components in existing cultural hall to remain. Construction of a new chapel connected to the existing Cultural Hall, Primary & Relief Society Rooms, Branch President & Clerks Offices, Material
13 July 2010 Page 3 of 21

B.

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

Center & Serving Area, Restrooms, and associated mechanical rooms & corridors. Wood framed construction over crawl space with a metal roof over pre-manufactured roof trusses. Exterior brick wainscot and finish with Mineral Fiber Cement siding. Aluminum framed storefront and windows. 7. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: A Pre-Bid Conference will be held at 10:00 am on Thursday, 15 September 2011 at the Scofield Branch Building (location noted above). TYPE OF BID: Bids will be on a lump-sum basis. Segregated bids will not be accepted. TIME OF COMPLETION: The time limit for completion of this Work will be 250 calendar days and as noted in the Agreement. BID OPENING: Sealed bids will be received until 2:00 pm on Thursday, 22 September 2011 at the UT American Fork Project Management Office located at 110 East Main Street, American Fork, Utah 84003. Bids will be publicly opened at that time. Late bids will be returned un-opened. BIDDING DOCUMENTS: A. Bidding Documents may be examined at the following plan room locations: 1. McGraw-Hill Plan Room 2195 West 5400 South, Suite 101 Salt Lake City, Utah 84129-1433 801.955.6837 Fax: 801.955.4335 Mountainlands Area Plan Room 1116 South State Street Orem, Utah 84097 801.226.2437 Fax: 801.226.0946 Southeastern Utah Association of Local Governments C/O Barbara Fausett 375 South Carbon Ave PO Box 1106 Price UT 84501 435 637-5444 Ext 406 Fax 435 637-5448

8. 8.

9.

10.

2.

3.

11.

BID BOND: Bid security in the amount of 5 percent of the bid will accompany each bid in accordance with the Instruction To Bidders. BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Bidding by the General Contractors will be by invitation only. OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS: The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any irregularity therein.

12. 13.

END OF DOCUMENT

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 4 of 21

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 5 of 21

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. DEFINITIONS: A. The definitions set forth in Section 1 of the General Conditions are applicable to the documents included under Bidding Requirements. Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the documents identified as Contract Documents in the Form of Agreement, except for Modifications. The Bidding Requirements are those documents identified as such in the proposed Project Manual. Addenda are written or graphic documents issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents. They become part of the Contract Documents as noted in the Form of Agreement upon execution of the Contract.

B.

C.

2.

BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS: A. By submitting a bid, the bidder represents that 1. Bidder has carefully studied and compared the Bidding Documents with each other. Bidder understands the Bidding Documents and the bid is fully in accordance with the requirements of those documents, 2. Bidder has thoroughly examined the site and any building located thereon, has become familiar with local conditions which might directly or indirectly affect the contract work, and has correlated its personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents, and 3. Bid is based on the materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception.

3.

BIDDING DOCUMENTS: A. Copies 1. Bidding Documents may be obtained as set forth in the Invitation to Bid. 2. Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be issued. 3. Bidders will use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing bids and make certain that those submitting sub-bids to them have access to all portions of the documents that pertain to the work covered by sub-bid, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01. Bidder assumes full responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from use of partial sets of Bidding Documents by itself or any sub-bidder. Interpretation or Correction Of Bidding Documents 1. Bidders will request interpretation or correction of any apparent errors, discrepancies and omissions in the Bidding Documents. 2. Corrections or changes to Bidding Documents will be made by written addenda. Substitutions and Equal Products 1. Generally speaking, substitutions for specified products and systems, as defined in the Uniform Commercial Code, are not acceptable. However, equal products may be approved upon compliance with Contract Document requirements. 2. The terms Acceptable Manufacturers, Approved Manufacturers Suppliers, Installers and VMR (Value Managed Relationship) Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers are used throughout the Project Manual to differentiate among the options available to Contractor regarding specified products, manufacturers, and suppliers. See Section 016000 for options available regarding acceptance of equal products. 3. Base bid only on materials, equipment, systems, suppliers or performance qualities specified in the Bidding Documents. 4. Architect is only authorized to consider requests for approval of equal products to replace specified products in Sections where the heading Acceptable Manufacturers
13 July 2010 Page 6 of 21

B.

C.

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

is used and statement, 'Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 016000' or 'Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 016000,' appears. In Sections where the afore-mentioned statements do not appear and a different heading is used, Architect is authorized as Owners representative to decline consideration of requests for approval of equal products. Approvals of equal products in such Sections must be made by Owner and will generally be for subsequent Projects. D. Addenda - Addenda will be sent to bidders and to locations where Bidding Documents are on file no later than one week prior to bid opening or by fax no later than 48 hours prior to bid opening.

4.

BIDDING PROCEDURES: A. Form and Style of Bids 1. Use Owners Bid Form. 2. Fill in all blanks on Bid Form by typewriter or by printing manually in ink. Signatures will be in longhand and executed by representative of bidder duly authorized to make contracts. 3. Bids will bear no information other than that requested on bid form. Do not delete from or add to the information requested on the bid form. Bid Security 1. Each bid will be accompanied by a bid bond naming Owner, as listed in the Agreement, as obligee. If Bidder refuses to enter into a Contract or fails to provide bonds and insurance required by the General Conditions, amount of bid security will be forfeited to Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. 2. Bid bond will be issued by a surety company meeting requirements of the General Conditions for surety companies providing bonds and will be submitted on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond or AIA authorized equivalent provided by surety company. The attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety will affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. 3. Owner may retain bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until a. Contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished, b. Specified time has elapsed so bids may be withdrawn, or c. All bids have been rejected. Submission of Bids 1. Submit bid in sealed opaque envelope containing only bid form and bid security. Envelopes will be sealed, bear bidder's name, and include the following: BID FOR Scofield-Bldg Addition - Helper UT Stake 503-6925-11010101 If bid is sent by mail, enclose sealed envelope in separate mailing envelope with notation 'SEALED BID ENCLOSED' on face. It is bidder's sole responsibility to see that its bid is received at specified time. Bids received after specified bid opening time will be returned to bidders unopened. No oral, facsimile transmitted, telegraphic, or telephonic bids, modifications, or cancellations will be considered.

B.

C.

2. 3.

D.

Modification or Withdrawal of Bid 1. Bidder guarantees there will be no revisions or withdrawal of bid amount for 45 days after bid opening. 2. Prior to bid opening, bidders may withdraw bid by written request or by reclaiming bid envelope. 3. Prior to bid opening, bidder may mark and sign on the sealed envelope that bidder acknowledges any or all Addenda.

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 7 of 21

5.

CONSIDERATION OF BIDS: A. B. Opening of Bids - See Invitation to Bid. Rejection of Bids - Owner reserves right to reject any or all bids and to waive any irregularity therein. Acceptance of Bid 1. No bidder will consider itself under contract after opening and reading of bids until Agreement between Owner and Contractor is fully executed. 2. Bidder's past performance, organization, subcontractor selection, equipment, and ability to perform and complete its contract in manner and within time specified, together with amount of bid, will be elements considered in award of contract.

C.

6.

POST-BID INFORMATION: A. The conditionally accepted bidder submitting a bid involving subcontractors will submit its list of proposed subcontractors in a meeting to be held immediately after bid opening.

7.

PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND: A. Bond Requirements - Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment bond will be required for this Project as specified in the General Conditions. Time of Delivery of Bonds - Bonds will be delivered to Owner with Agreement signed by bidder.

B.

8.

FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR: A. Agreement form will be similar to Owner's sample Form of Agreement included in Bidding Requirements.

9.

MISCELLANEOUS: A. Pre-Bid Conference 1. A pre-bid conference will be held at a time and place to be announced. Liquidated Damages - Conditions governing liquidated damages are specified in the General Conditions and in the Supplementary Conditions.

B.

C.

Examination Schedule for Existing Building and Site 1. To be held during the Pre-Bid Conference. Exemption from local taxes - See Supplementary Conditions

D.

END OF DOCUMENT

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 8 of 21

BLANK PAGE

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 9 of 21

INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS


1. GEOTECHNICAL DATA A. Geotechnical Report 1. Owner has secured the services of a geotechnical engineer to aid in design of the Project. Following conditions apply a. A geotechnical report has been prepared by Earthtec Engineering, Inc. , referred to as the Geotechnical Engineer. b. Copy of this report will be issued to each invited General Contractor. c. Copy of this report may also be inspected at office of Architect or Owner. d. This report was obtained solely for use in design by Architect and is not a part of the Contract Documents. It is not intended that Contractor rely on geotechnical engineer's report. e. Reports are provided for Contractor's information but are not a warranty of subsurface conditions. 2. Prior to bidding, Contractor may make his own subsurface investigations to satisfy himself with site and subsurface conditions.

2.

ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL (ACM) A. The building upon which work is being performed has been examined for asbestoscontaining material. The following have been identified as containing asbestos in the areas of the building being worked on as part of this Project: 1. Rolled vinyl flooring in mens and ladies restroom and adjacent hallway. 2. Floor tile in rooms located between chapel & cultural hall.

END OF DOCUMENT

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 10 of 21

BLANK PAGE

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 11 of 21

BID FORM
FOR GENERAL CONTRACT WORK (U.S.)
OWNER: Corporation of the Presiding Bishop of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, a Utah corporation sole (Owner) Architect: WPA Architecture __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ BID 1. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that: a. If this Bid is accepted, Bidder will enter into an agreement with Owner to perform and furnish the Work described in the Bidding Documents for the Bid Price and within the Time of Substantial Completion indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. b. Bidder has carefully examined Set(s) Number ____________________________________ of the Bidding Documents consisting of the Project Manual containing the Bidding Requirements, the Conditions of the Contract, and the Specifications, entitled

the Drawings entitled dated _________________________________, and including sheets numbered c. d. e. f. 2. ,

and addenda numbers Bidder has examined the site of the work, existing conditions, and all other conditions affecting the work on the above-named Project. Bidder has carefully correlated the information known to Bidder and information and observations obtained from visits to the site with the Bidding Documents. Bidder is familiar with federal, State, and local laws and regulations applicable to Project. Bidder guarantees there will be no revisions or withdrawal of bid amount for forty-five (45) days after the bid opening.

Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportations, services, licenses, fees, permits, etc, required by said documents to complete the Work described by the Contract Documents for the lump-sum of: Dollars ($___________________________________).

3. 4.

Bidder agrees to achieve substantial completion of the Work within the number of days indicated in the Invitation to Bid. Enclosed is a Bid Bond for not less than five percent (5%) of the bid. RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED: Company name Signature (print signor=s name) Title Business Address

_______________ Date _______________ License No.

City, State, and Zip Code Telephone FAX

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev C

13 July 2010

Page 12 of 21

BLANK PAGE

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B

19 June 2003

Page 13 of 21

EQUAL PRODUCT APPROVAL REQUEST FORM


Project Name: Scofield Bldg. Addition TO: FROM: BID DATE: A proposed product is not legally approved and cannot legally be included in a bid or used in the Work until it appears in an Addendum or other Contract Modification as defined in the General Conditions. See Instructions To Bidders Paragraph 3,C, General Conditions, and Section 016000. PROPOSED EQUAL PRODUCT: Specification Section: Specified Products: Proposed Product: The Undersigned certifies: 1. Proposed equal product has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified products. 2. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed equal product as for specified products. 3. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. 4. Proposed equal product will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. 5. Proposed equal product does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. ATTACHMENTS: Include the following attachments 1. Copy of the Project Manual Section where the proposed equal product would be specified, rewritten or red-lined to include any changes necessary to correctly specify the proposed equal product. Identify completely changes necessary to the original Project Manual Section. 2. Copies of details, elevations, cross-sections, and other elements of the Project Drawings redone as necessary to show changes necessary to accommodate proposed equal product. Identify completely the changes from the original Drawings. 3. Complete product literature and technical data, installation and maintenance instructions, test results, and other information required to show complete conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. SIGNED: Company Address City, State, Zip Telephone FAX Request Number:

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B

19 June 2003

Page 14 of 21

REVIEW COMMENTS: _____ Accepted. See Addenda Number _____. _____ Submission Not In Compliance With Instructions. Respond to attached comments and resubmit. _____ Proposed Equal Product Not Acceptable. Use specified products. _____ Not Reviewed. Submission received too late. Use specified products.

ADDITIONAL COMMENTS:

BY:

DATE:

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B

19 June 2003

Page 15 of 21

SUBCONTRACTORSANDMAJORMATERIALSSUPPLIERSLIST
ProjectName:____________________________________Date:________________________ Stake:__________________________________________ProjectNo:___________________ GeneralContractor:_____________________________________________________________ GeneralContractoristoprovidethenamesofthefollowingsubcontractorsandsupplierstothe ChurchProjectManagerimmediatelyfollowingthebidopening: VMRSUBCONTRACTORS Roofing_______________________________________________________________________ Doors,Frames&Hardware_______________________________________________________ Storefronts____________________________________________________________________ WoodFlooring_________________________________________________________________ Other_________________________________________________________________________ Other_________________________________________________________________________ SUBCONTRACTORSANDSUPPLIERS Grading/Sitework______________________________________________________________ SiteUtilities____________________________________________________________________ Demolition____________________________________________________________________ Paving________________________________________________________________________ TermiteControl________________________________________________________________ SiteConcrete__________________________________________________________________ Fencing_______________________________________________________________________ IrrigationSystem_______________________________________________________________ Landscaping___________________________________________________________________
CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B 19 June 2003 Page 16 of 21

BuildingConcrete_______________________________________________________________ Masonry______________________________________________________________________ StructuralSteel_________________________________________________________________ Framing_______________________________________________________________________ Trusses_______________________________________________________________________ Insulation_____________________________________________________________________ EIFS__________________________________________________________________________ Soffit/Fascia__________________________________________________________________ Steeple_______________________________________________________________________ Millwork______________________________________________________________________ Drywall_______________________________________________________________________ CeramicTile___________________________________________________________________ AcousticalTile__________________________________________________________________ Painting_______________________________________________________________________ WallCoverings_________________________________________________________________ Elevators/Lifts_________________________________________________________________ Draperies_____________________________________________________________________ FireSprinklers__________________________________________________________________ Plumbing______________________________________________________________________ HVAC_________________________________________________________________________ Electrical______________________________________________________________________ Controls______________________________________________________________________ Sound/Satellite________________________________________________________________
CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B 19 June 2003 Page 17 of 21

CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ASBESTOS STATEMENT (U.S.)

Project Name: Project Type: Building Address: Owner:

Scofield Bldg. Addition (Helper UT Stake) R&I 165 North Union Street, Scofield, Utah 84526

Corporation of the Presiding Bishop of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-days Saints, a Utah corporation sole

Property Number: 503-6925-11010101 Completion Date: As CONSULTANT and principal in charge; based on my best knowledge, information, inspection, and belief; I certify that on the above referenced Project, no asbestos containing building materials were specified in the construction documents or given approval in shop drawings or submittals.

Date WPA Architecture Company Name

Consultant and Principal in charge

As GENERAL CONTRACTOR in charge of construction; based on my best knowledge, information, inspection, and belief; I certify that on the above referenced building, no asbestos containing building materials were used in the construction.

Date

General Contractor in charge

Company Name

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B

19 June 2003

Page 18 of 21

BLANK PAGE

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B

19 June 2003

Page 19 of 21

FORM OF AGREEMENT

FIXED SUM PROJECTS (U.S.)

NOTE: The form outlined below is intended to be representative only of the type of Agreement to be used. The actual document to be executed by the parties will be prepared by the Owner and may vary somewhat in content and form from that shown below as circumstances require. Corporation of the Presiding bishop of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints a Utah corporation sole, (Owner) and ____________________________________ (Contractor) agree as follows: 1. Project Site.

Property Number: _______________________________ Address: __________________________________ Project Type: _________________________________ Project Name: _________________________________ 2. Scope of the Work. Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contract Documents. A. The Contract Documents consist of: 1. This Agreement; 2. The General Conditions for a Fixed Sum (U.S.), Supplementary Conditions, and the Specifications (Divisions 01 through 33) contained in the Project Manual entitled _______________________ _________________________________, dated ________________________, and prepared by __________________________ ________________________ (Architect); 3. The Drawings prepared by Architect entitled __________________________________, sheet numbers _______________________, dated ______________________________; 4. Addendum No. ______________________ dated _______________________________ ; and 5. All Modifications to the Contract Documents. B. C. D. E. The Contract Documents are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as if fully set forth herein. The definitions set forth in the General Conditions for A Fixed Sum (U.S.) will apply to the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents contain the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersede all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. Modifications or other amendments to the Contract Documents must be in writing and as provided in the General Conditions.

3.

4.

Time of Commencement and Substantial Completion. A. B. Contractor will commence the Work on the date for commencement set forth in the Written Notice to proceed from Owner to Contractor. Contractor will achieve Substantial Completion and have the Work ready for Owners inspection no later than________________________ (______) days from the date of commencement set forth in the Written Notice to proceed from Owner to Contractor, as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. Time is of the essence.

C. 5.

Contract Sum. A. Owner will pay Contractor for performance of Contractors obligations under the Contract Documents the Contract Sum in the amount of Dollars ($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. Owner will make payments to Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. 6.

Relationship of the Parties. Contractor is an independent contractor and is not the agent or employee of the Owner.

7.

Assignment. Neither party to this Agreement will assign any right or obligation hereunder without the prior written consent of the other, which consent may be granted or withheld in such party=s absolute discretion. Contractor will not assign moneys due or to become due to Contractor hereunder, nor will Contractor pledge the credit of Owner or bind Owner to any third party. Notice. The parties hereby designate the following addresses and facsimile numbers to be used for sending Written Notice to the other party: To Owner: ____________________

8.

To Contractor: Attention: _________________________________

10. Effective Date. The effective date of this Agreement is the date indicated by the Owners signature. CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B 19 June 2003 Page 20 of 21

OWNER:

CONTRACTOR:

Corporation of the Presiding Bishop of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, a Utah corporation sole

________________________________________
[company name]

_____________________________________________ [signature] By: _______________________________________________ Designated Representative or Authorized Agent

________________________________________
[print name] Title: _________________________________________ Address: _____________________________________________ ______________________________________________ Telephone No: ________________________________

_____________________________________________

Address: _______________________________________________ ________________________________________________ Telephone No: ________________________________________ Date: ___________________________________

License No: ________________________________ Reviewed by: __________________________________ Date: _______________________________

CON-FSU-0090-US Rev B

19 June 2003

Page 21 of 21

BLANK PAGE

ARCHITECTSSUPPLEMENTALINSTRUCTIONS

FROMARCHITECT: WPAArchitecture 475NorthFreedomBlvd Provo,UT84601


TOCONTRACTOR: GeneralContractor Address1 City,StateZip

ProjectManager
Superintendent

Fax:

xxx.xxx.xxxx xxx.xxx.xxxx

PROJECT: ScofieldBldg.Addition ProjectNo.503692511010101 Scofield,Utah

DATEOFISSUANCE:

BruceT.Fallon,AIA,LEEDAP 801.374.0800 Fax: 801.374.0805 DayMonthYear


OWNER: CorporationofthePresidingBishop TheChurchofJesusChristofLatter daySaints

SUPPLEMENTALINSTRUCTIONNO:ASI000

A total of ONE (1) 81/2 x 11 page(s) are included in thisASI.


cc:MilanMalkovich,JeddMorley

TheWorkshallbecarriedoutinaccordancewiththefollowingsupplementalinstructionsissuedinaccordancewith theContractDocumentswithoutchangeinContractSumorContractTime.ProceedingwiththeWorkinaccordance withtheseinstructionsindicatesyouracknowledgmentthattherewillbenochangeintheContractSumorContract Time.

DESCRIPTION:

EXPLANATION:

BLANK PAGE

GENERAL CONDITIONS
for a FIXED SUM (U.S.)
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 2 OWNER SECTION 3 CONTRACTOR SECTION 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT SECTION 5 SUBCONTRACTORS SECTION 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS SECTION 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK SECTION 8 TIME SECTION 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 A. DEFINITIONS Agreement: the document entitled "Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for a Fixed Sum (U.S.), executed by Owner and Contractor for performance of the Work. Architect: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. Change In The Work: a modification to the requirements of the Contract Documents or a delay in Substantial Completion resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect to Contractor or from another event or circumstance. Change Order: a written instrument prepared by Architect and signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon the following: (1) the occurrence of a Change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum as a result of the Change in the Work; and (3) the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time as a result of the Change in the Work. Construction Change Directive: a written order prepared by Architect and signed by Architect and Owner which: (1) orders a Change in the Work if the terms of a Change Order cannot be agreed upon prior to performance of a Change in the Work described in Section 7.1 or after occurrence of an event or circumstance described in Section 7.2; and (2) states a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum, the Contract Time, or both, resulting from the Change in the Work. Contract Documents: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. Contract Sum: the total amount set forth in the Agreement payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work. Contract Time: the period of time set forth in the Agreement for the Substantial Completion of the Work. Contractor: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. Day: calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. Direct Costs: actual costs for labor, materials, equipment, insurance, bonds, subcontract costs and onsite supervision relating to the Project. They do not include labor costs for project managers or other off-site administration. U. T. N.

SECTION 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION SECTION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY SECTION 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS SECTION 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK SECTION 13 RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES SECTION 14 TERMINATION SECTION 15 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
L. Drawings: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. Field Change: a written order prepared by Architect and signed by Architect and Contractor for a minor Change in the Work consistent with the general intent of the Contract Documents costing $1,000 or less, resulting in no time extension, and which is necessary to avoid delaying the Work. Modification: a written amendment to the Contract Documents in the form of a: 1. Change Order; 2. Construction Change Directive; or 3. Field Change. Owner: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. Project: the total construction designed by Architect of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. Product Data: standard illustrations, schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate details regarding materials or equipment to be used in the Work, or the manner of installation, operation, or maintenance of such materials or equipment. Project Manual: the document identified as such in the Agreement. Samples And Mock-ups: physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. Shop Drawings: drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, patterns, templates, and other data which illustrate some portion of the Work and confirm dimensions and conformance to the Contract Documents specially prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor. Specifications: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. Subcontractor: any entity supplying labor, materials, equipment, construction or services for the Work under separate contract with Contractor or any other Subcontractor.

M.

B. C.

D.

O. P.

Q.

E.

R.

S.

F.

G.

H.

I. J. K.

V.

CON-FSU-0022 Rev. L

November 16, 2005

Page 1 of 13

W.

Submittals: Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups and any other documents or items furnished by Contractor or its Subcontractors to Owner or Architect to demonstrate how any portion of the Work will be accomplished or the type of materials or products that will be used in the Work. Substantial Completion: Completion of the Work to a point where Owner can use the Work for its intended purposes. The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified as such by Architect in accordance with the Contract Documents. Work: all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services required by the Contract Documents. Written Notice: notice in writing given from one party to the other at the addresses or facsimile numbers listed in the Agreement, or at such other addresses or facsimile numbers as the parties will designate from time to time by Written Notice, and will be effective at the earliest of: 1. The date of personal delivery to the other party with signed acknowledgment of receipt; or 2. The date sent by facsimile transmission to the other party provided receipt of the facsimile is verified by an electronic confirmation report by the party sending the facsimile transmission and further provided that a confirmation copy is sent to the other party by courier or by registered or certified mail within twenty-four (24) hours after the time and date of the facsimile transmission; or 3. The date of receipt by the other party as stated on the return receipt if sent by registered or certified mail, or by courier. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The intent of the Contract Documents is to require Contractor to provide all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by any one will be as binding as if required by all. Contractor will perform the Work in accordance with the requirements expressly set forth in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. The organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or to establish the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. Words used in the Contract Documents that have well known technical or trade meanings are used therein in accordance with such recognized meanings. In the interest of brevity, the Contract Documents may omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Drawings, the Project Manual, and copies thereof are the property of Owner. Contractor will not use these documents on any other project. Contractor may retain one copy of the Drawings and the Project Manual as a contract record set and will return or destroy all remaining copies following final completion of the Work.

Owner will designate in writing a representative who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. 2.2 A. INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER Owner will be responsible for establishment of property lines and benchmarks for grading. Owner will furnish to Contractor any information or services it is required to furnish under the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. Owner will furnish to Contractor a reasonable number of copies of the Drawings, the Project Manual, and the Addenda. OWNER'S RIGHT TO INSPECT THE WORK Owner and its representatives will have the right to inspect any portion of the Work wherever located at any time. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If Contractor fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents in a timely manner, Owner may order Contractor in writing to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for that order has been eliminated.

X.

B.

Y.

C.

Z.

2.3

SECTION 3 - CONTRACTOR
3.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR By executing the Agreement, Contractor represents that it has visited the Project site, familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated its own observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor will carefully review and compare the Contract Documents and any other available information relating to the Project prior to commencing and during performance of each portion of the Work and will immediately report to Architect any errors, inconsistencies, and omissions it discovers. Should Contractor or any of its Subcontractors become aware of any question regarding the meaning or intent of any part of the Contract Documents prior to commencing that portion of the Work about which there is a question, Contractor will request an interpretation or clarification from Architect before proceeding. Contractor proceeds at its own risk if it proceeds with the Work without first making such a request and receiving an interpretation or clarification from Architect. If neither Contractor nor its Subcontractors become aware of the question until after work on the relevant portion of the Work has commenced, then the following precedence will govern for purposes of determining whether resolution of the question constitutes a Change in the Work: 1. The Agreement takes precedence over all other Contract Documents. 2. The Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the General Conditions. 3. The General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the Drawings and the Specifications. 4. An Addendum or a Modification take precedence over the document(s) modified by the Addendum or Modification. 5. The Specifications take precedence over the Drawings. Page 2 of 13

1.2

A.

A.

B.

B.

C.

C.

D.

1.3

SECTION 2 - OWNER
2.1 OWNERS DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

November 16, 2005

6.

Within the Drawings, larger scale drawings take precedence over smaller scale drawings, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications. D.

3.

Work on the property and the elevation of the Work in relation to grade; and Setting and maintaining construction stakes.

D.

Contractor will give Architect notice of any additional drawings, specifications, or instructions required to define the Work in greater detail, or to permit the proper progress of the Work, sufficiently in advance of the need for information so as not to delay the Work. It is not Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with requirements of applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations. However, if Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with those requirements, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing. Contractor will not proceed unless Owner and/or Architect effects Modifications to the Contract Documents required for compliance with such requirements. Contractor will be fully responsible for any work knowingly performed contrary to such requirements and will fully indemnify Owner against loss and bear all costs and penalties arising therefrom. Contractor will take field measurements and verify field conditions and will compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to Contractor with the Contract Documents before ordering any materials or commencing construction activities. Contractor will immediately report errors, inconsistencies, and omissions that it discovers to Architect. If Contractor orders materials or commences construction activities before taking field measurements and verifying field conditions, Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for additional costs to Contractor resulting from field measurements or conditions different from those anticipated by Contractor which would have been avoided had Contractor taken field measurements and verified field conditions prior to ordering the materials or commencing construction activities. If site conditions indicated in the Contract Documents or other information provided by Owner or Architect to Contractor differ materially from those Contractor encounters in performance of the Work, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing of such differing site conditions. SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Contractor will supervise and direct the Work. Contractor will be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work. All loss, damage, liability, or cost of correcting defective work arising from the use of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures will be borne by Contractor, notwithstanding that such construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are referred to, indicated or implied by the Contract Documents, unless Contractor has given timely notice to Owner and Architect in writing that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are not safe or suitable, and Owner has then instructed Contractor in writing to proceed at Owners risk. Contractor will utilize its best skill, efforts, and judgment to provide efficient business administration and supervision, to furnish at all times an adequate supply of workers and materials, and to perform the Work in an expeditious and economical manner consistent with the interests of Owner.

Contractor will be responsible to Owner for the acts and omissions of its employees and Subcontractors as well as persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. Contractor will not be relieved of its obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as a result of any tests, inspections, or approvals by Owner, Architect or their consultants. Contractor will be responsible for inspection of portions of the Work already completed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent portions of the Work. LABOR AND MATERIALS Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor will provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Contractor will at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among those performing the Work and will not permit employment of any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned to them. Contractor is fully responsible for the Project and all materials and work connected therewith until Owner has accepted the Work in writing. Contractor will replace or repair at its own expense any materials or work damaged or stolen, regardless of whether it has received payment for such work or materials from the Owner. Contractor will remedy all damage or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Contractor will be responsible for determining that all materials furnished for the Work meet all requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect may require Contractor to produce reasonable evidence that a material meets such requirements, such as certified reports of past tests by qualified testing laboratories, reports of studies by qualified experts, or other evidence which, in the opinion of Architect, would lead to a reasonable certainty that any material used, or proposed to be used, in the work meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. All such data will be furnished at Contractors expense. This provision will not require Contractor to pay for periodic testing of different batches of the same material, unless such testing is specifically required by the Contract Documents to be performed at Contractors expense. Contractor will coordinate and supervise the work performed by Subcontractors so that the Work is carried out without conflict between trades and so that no trade, at any time, causes delay to the general progress of the Work. Contractor and all Subcontractors will at all times afford each trade, any separate contractor, or Owner, reasonable opportunity for the installation of Work and the storage of materials. Contractor warrants to Owner that the materials and equipment furnished for the Work will be new unless otherwise specified by the Contract Documents, and that the Work will be free from defects, and will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective in the Page 3 of 13

E.

E.

F.

3.3 A.

F.

B.

C.

D.

G.

E.

3.2 A.

F.

B.

G. C. Contractor will be responsible for: 1. The proper observance of property lines and set back requirements as shown in the Contract Documents; 2. The location and layout of the Work as shown in the Contract Documents with respect to the position of the November 16, 2005

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

discretion of Owner. If required by Architect, Contractor will furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of the materials and equipment used in performing the Work. H. Owner may elect to purchase materials required for the Work. In that event, Contractor will comply with the procedures set forth in the Contract Documents relating to such materials. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Contractor will comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public authorities relating to performance of the Work. 3.5 A. TAXES

B.

3.4

Contractor will review, approve, and submit to Architect Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. By approving Submittals, Contractor represents that it has determined and verified field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that it has checked and coordinated each Submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents or will make such determination, verification, check, and coordination prior to commencing the relevant portion of the Work. In reviewing Submittals Architect will be entitled to rely upon Contractors representation that such information is correct and accurate. Contractor will inform Architect in writing at the time of submission of any Submittal or portion thereof which deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor will provide Architect with documentation demonstrating to Architect that the Submittal is equal to or better than the specified product or work. Contractor will not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by Architects acceptance of a Submittal unless Contractor has informed Architect in writing of the deviation and Architect has incorporated the deviation into the Contract Documents by a Modification. Contractor will not perform any portions of the Work requiring Submittals until the respective Submittal has been reviewed and accepted in writing by Architect. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, Owner will be entitled to rely upon such certifications, and neither Owner nor Architect will be expected to make any independent examination with respect thereto. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned to Contractor without action.

C. Contractor will pay all sales, use, consumer, payroll, workers compensation, unemployment, old age pension, surtax, and similar taxes assessed in connection with the performance of the Work. Owner will pay all taxes and assessments on the real property comprising the Project site. PERMITS AND FEES Owner will obtain and pay for all zoning and use permits and permanent easements necessary for completion of the Work. D. B. Contractor will obtain and pay for the building permit, and all other permits, governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Contractor will secure any certificates of inspection and of occupancy required by authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Contractor will deliver these certificates to Architect prior to issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion by Architect. F. 3.7 CONTRACTOR'S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE Contractor will employ a competent representative acceptable to Owner to supervise the performance of the Work. This representative will be designated in writing by Contractor prior to commencement of work and will not be changed prior to Final Inspection of the Work without prior written consent of Owner. This representative will represent Contractor for all purposes, including communication with Owner. 3.8 A. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Contractor will prepare and submit for Owner's and Architect's information Contractor's construction schedule for the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor will prepare and maintain a Submittal schedule which is coordinated with Contractor's construction schedule and sets forth specified times for Architect to review Submittals. DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS AT THE SITE Contractor will keep at the Project site for use by Owner, Architect, or their representatives, a record copy of the Project Manual, the Drawings, all Addenda, and all Modifications. These documents will be maintained in good order and currently marked to record changes and selections made during construction. In addition, Contractor will keep at the Project site one copy of all Submittals. 3.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals are not Contract Documents and do not alter the requirements of the Contract Documents unless incorporated into the Contract Documents by a Modification. November 16, 2005

B.

3.6 A.

E.

C.

3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING Contractor will be responsible for any cutting, fitting, and patching that may be required to complete the Work and make its parts fit together properly. 3.12 ACCESS TO WORK Contractor will permit Owner, Architect their representatives and consultants access to the Work wherever located at any time. 3.13 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Contractor will pay all royalties and license fees required by the Work or by Contractor's chosen method of performing the Work. Contractor will defend and hold Owner harmless from all suits or claims for infringement of any patent, license or other intellectual property rights or any loss on account thereof.

B.

3.9

3.14 INDEMNIFICATION

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

Page 4 of 13

A.

Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Owner's representatives, employees, agents, architects, and consultants from and against any and all claims, damages, liability, demands, costs, judgments, awards, settlements, causes of action, losses and expenses (collectively Claims or Claim), including but not limited to attorney fees, consultant fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of real or personal property, including loss of use resulting therefrom, except to the extent that such liability arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity includes, without limitation, indemnification of Owner from all losses or injury to Owners property, except to the extent that such loss or injury arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity applies, without limitation, to include Claims occurring both during performance of the Work and/or subsequent to completion of the Work. In the event that any Claim is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder, that party will bear the cost of such Claim to the extent it was the cause thereof. In the event that a claimant asserts a Claim for recovery against any party indemnified hereunder, the party indemnified hereunder may tender the defense of such Claim to Contractor. If Contractor rejects such tender of defense and it is later determined that the negligence of the party indemnified hereunder did not cause all of the Claim, Contractor will reimburse the party indemnified hereunder for all costs and expenses incurred by that party in defending against the Claim. Contractor will not be liable hereunder to indemnify any party for damages resulting from the sole negligence of that party. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will be liable to defend Owner in any lawsuit filed by any Subcontractor relating to the Project. Where liens have been filed against Owner's property, Contractor (and/or its bonding company which has issued bonds for the Project) will obtain lien releases and record them in the appropriate county and/or local jurisdiction and provide Owner with a title free and clear from any liens of Subcontractors. In the event that Contractor and/or its bonding company are unable to obtain a lien release, Owner in its absolute discretion may require Contractor to provide a bond around the lien or a bond to discharge the lien, at Contractor's sole expense. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any claim of any other contractor resulting from the performance, nonperformance or delay in performance of the Work by Contractor. The indemnification obligation herein will not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

4.2 A.

ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Architect will make frequent visits to the site to familiarize itself generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Although Architect is required to make periodic inspections, it is not required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections. On the basis of its observations while at the site, Architect will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Architects failure to observe a defect or deficiency in the Work will not relieve Contractor of its duty to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Architect will review Contractor's payment requests and determine the amounts due Contractor in accordance with Section 9. Communications between Contractor and Owner relating to the Work will be through Architect. Communications between Owner or Contractor with Architects consultants relating to the Work will be through Architect. Communications between Owner or Architect and subcontractors relating to the Work will be through Contractor. Communications between Contractor and any separate contractor will be through Architect, except as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. Architect will have the right to condemn and require removal of the following at Contractor's expense: 1. Any portion of the Work that does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Any portion of the Work damaged or rendered unsuitable during installation or resulting from failure to exercise proper protection. Architect will have authority to stop the Work, with concurrence of Owner, whenever such stoppage may be necessary in its reasonable opinion to insure the proper performance of the Work. Architect will review Contractors Submittals and will accept or take other appropriate action regarding the Submittals. Architect's review of the Submittals will be for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance with the Contract Documents and will not be conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor. Architect's review of Submittals will not relieve Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. Architect's review of Submittals will not constitute acceptance of safety precautions or construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. Architect's acceptance of a specific item will not indicate acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a component. Architect has authority to order Construction Change Directives and Field Changes in accordance with Section 7.

B.

C.

D.

B.

E.

F.

C.

D.

3.15 PROJECT MEETINGS Contractor will attend and participate in meetings as required by the Contract Documents.

G.

SECTION 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT


4.1 ARCHITECT In the event that Owner terminates its contractual relationship with Architect, Owner will appoint in writing another architect, whose status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Architect in all respects. I. H. Architect will conduct inspections to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and final completion, will receive and review written guarantees and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by Contractor, and will review and certify or reject Contractor's final payment request. Architect will be the interpreter of the performance and requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect's interpretations will be in writing or in the form of drawings. Page 5 of 13

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

November 16, 2005

J.

Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the Contract Documents.

6.2 A.

MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY Contractor will afford other contractors reasonable opportunity to place and store their materials and equipment on site and to perform their work and will properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs where applicable. If any part of Contractor's Work depends upon the work of any separate contractor for proper performance or results, Contractor will inspect and promptly report to Architect any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for proper performance and results. Failure of Contractor to so inspect and report will constitute an acceptance of the work of the separate contractor as fit and proper to receive Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. Contractor will promptly remedy damage caused by Contractor or any Subcontractor to the completed or partially completed work of other contractors or to the property of Owner or other contractors. OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among Contractor and separate contractors as to the responsibility under their separate contracts for maintaining the Project free from waste materials and rubbish, Owner may clean the Project, allocate the cost among those responsible as Owner and Architect determine to be just, and withhold such cost from any amounts due or to become due to Contractor.

SECTION 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Contractor will enter into contracts with Subcontractors to perform all portions of the Work that Contractor does not customarily perform with its own employees. Contractor will not contract with any Subcontractor who has been rejected by Owner. Contractor will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor against whom it has a reasonable objection. If Owner refuses to accept any Subcontractor proposed by Contractor, Contractor will propose an acceptable substitute to whom Owner has no reasonable objection. Contractor will not make any substitution for any Subcontractor that has been accepted by Owner and Architect without the prior written approval of Owner and Architect. SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS Contractor's responsibility for the Work includes the labor and materials of all Subcontractors, including those recommended or approved by Owner. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for proper completion and guarantee of all workmanship and materials under any subcontracts. Any warranties required for such work will be obtained by Contractor in favor of Owner and delivered to Architect. It is expressly understood and agreed that there is no contractual relationship between Owner and any Subcontractor, and under no circumstances will Owner be responsible for the non-performance or financial failure of any Subcontractor or any effects therefrom. Contractor agrees to pay the Subcontractors promptly upon receipt of payment from Owner for that portion of the funds received which represents the Subcontractor's portion of the Work completed to Contractor's satisfaction for which Owner made payment. Contractor will require each Subcontractor to: 1. Be licensed by the state in which the Project is located where such licensing is required by the governing authority; 2. Be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as far as they are applicable to the Subcontractor's work; 3. Assume toward Contractor the same obligations Contractor has assumed toward Owner, including the prompt payment of its Subcontractors; 4. Submit its applications for payment to Contractor in time to permit Contractor to make timely application to Owner; 5. Execute claim or lien releases or lien waivers for payments made by Contractor; and 6. Make all claims for Changes in the Work to Contractor in the same manner as Contractor is required to make such claims to Owner.

A.

B.

B.

C.

C.

D.

6.3

5.2 A.

SECTION 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK


7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN INSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR ARCHITECT TO CONTRACTOR If Owner or Architect gives Contractor an instruction that modifies the requirements of the Contract Documents or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. If compliance with the instruction affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work, the Contract Sum will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in cost subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1, Paragraphs B through G. If compliance with the instruction delays Substantial Completion, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1, Paragraphs B through G and Section 7.3, Paragraph A and Contractor will be paid liquidated damages for the delay as set forth in Section 7.3, Paragraph B. If Contractor receives an instruction from Owner or Architect that Contractor considers to be a Change in the Work, Contractor, before complying with the instruction, will notify Architect in writing that Contractor considers such instruction to constitute a Change in the Work. If Architect agrees that compliance with the instruction will constitute a Change in the Work, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Modification in accordance with Section 7.1, Paragraphs C. and D. within ten (10) days. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum (including without limitation costs related to a time extension) as a result of an instruction by Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order containing a price breakdown itemized as required by Owner. The breakdown will be in sufficient detail to allow Owner to determine any increase or decrease in Direct Costs as a result of compliance with the instruction. Any amount claimed for subcontracts will be supported by a similar price breakdown and will itemize the Subcontractors Page 6 of 13

B.

A.

C.

B.

SECTION 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS


6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK OR AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS Owner reserves the right to perform work itself or to award separate contracts in connection with the Project. When separate contracts are awarded, "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case will mean the contractor who signs each separate contract.

C.

A.

B.

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

November 16, 2005

profit and overhead charges. Profit and overhead will be subject to the following limitations: 1. The Subcontractors profit and overhead will not exceed twelve (12) percent of its Direct Costs. 2. Contractor's profit and overhead on work performed by its own crews will not exceed twelve (12) percent of its Direct Costs. 3. Contractor's profit and overhead mark up on work performed by its Subcontractors will not exceed five (5) percent of the Subcontractors charges for such work. 4. Amounts due Owner as a result of a credit change will be the actual net savings to Contractor from the Change in the Work as confirmed by Architect. On credit changes, profit and overhead on the originally estimated work will not be credited back to Owner. If both additions and credits are involved in a single Change in the Work, overhead and profit will be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, related to that Change in the Work. D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an instruction from Owner or Architect, Contractor will include in its proposal justification to support Contractor's claim that compliance with the instruction will delay Substantial Completion. Upon receipt of Contractors proposal for Modification, Architect and Owner will determine whether to proceed with the Change in the Work. If Architect and Owner determine to proceed with the Change in the Work, they will issue a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change as appropriate. Contractor agrees that if it complies with an instruction from Owner or Architect without first giving written notice to Architect as provided in Section 7.1., Paragraph B, and receiving a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or Field Change, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim therefor. If Contractor is instructed to perform work which it claims constitutes a Change in the Work but which Owner and Architect do not agree constitutes a Change in the Work, Contractor will comply with the instruction. Contractor may submit its claim for adjustment to the Contract Sum, the Contract Time, or both as a dispute pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction, then Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim therefor. CHANGE IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN EVENT OR CIRCUMSTANCE If an event or circumstance other than an instruction from Owner or Architect affects the cost to Contractor of performing the Work or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. If the circumstance or event affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work and is caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, the Contract Sum will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in Contractors cost to perform the Work resulting from the event or circumstance, subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.2, Paragraphs B through F. If the event or circumstance delays Substantial Completion and is described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in such section. If the circumstance or event delays Substantial Completion and is caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, then Contractor will be

compensated for costs incident to the delay in accordance with Section 7.3, Paragraph B. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment to the Contract Sum or other damages from Owner as a result of any event or circumstance unless the event or circumstance results from a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect. B. If a Change in the Work results from any event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will give Owner Written Notice of such event or circumstance within twentyfour (24) hours after commencement of the event or circumstance so that Owner can take such action as is necessary to mitigate the effect of the event or circumstance. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in either the Contract Time or the Contract Sum based on any damages or delays resulting from such event or circumstance during a period more than twenty-four (24) hours prior to Contractor giving such Written Notice to Owner. Contractor will submit in writing any claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Contract Sum resulting from an event or circumstance within the time limits set forth below. In the event that Contractor fails to submit its claim in writing within the time limits set forth below, then Contractor agrees it will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum or to any other damages from Owner due to the circumstance or event and waives any claim therefor. 1. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time due to inclement weather will be made by the tenth (10th) of the month following the month in which the delay occurred. 2. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Contract Sum due to any other circumstance or event will be submitted within seven (7) days after the occurrence of the circumstance or event. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum (including without limitation costs related to a time extension) because of an event or circumstance resulting from the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order containing a price breakdown as described in Section 7.1, Paragraph C. Any amount claimed for increased labor costs as a result of the event or circumstance must be supported by a certified payroll. Any claim for rented equipment or additional material costs must be supported by invoices. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance, Contractor will include with its claim copies of daily logs, letters, shipping orders, delivery tickets, Project schedules, and other supporting information necessary to justify Contractors claim that the event or circumstance delayed Substantial Completion. If Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance caused by the wilful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will be compensated for all costs related to the delay in accordance with Section 7.3, Paragraph B. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of Contractor's claim, Architect will either deny the claim or recommend approval to Owner. If Owner approves the claim, the adjustment in the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5 or a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 7.6. If Owner or Architect denies Contractor's claim, Contractor may submit its claim as a dispute pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of receipt of the denial of the claim. If Contractor fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 within the thirty (30) day time period, then Contractor agrees it is not entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Page 7 of 13

C.

E.

F.

D.

G.

E.

7.2

A.

F.

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

November 16, 2005

Time and/ or Contract Sum or any other damages as a result of the event or circumstance and waives any claim therefor. 7.3 A. EXTENSIONS OF TIME If Substantial Completion of the Project is delayed because of any of the following causes, then the Contract Time will be extended by Change Order for a period of time equal to such delay: 1. Labor strikes or lock-outs; 2. Inclement weather; 3. Unusual delay in transportation; 4. Unforeseen governmental requests or requirements; 5. A Change in the Work resulting from an instruction by Owner or Architect to Contractor subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1.; or 6. Any other event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect. Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for delay described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 1, 2, 3 and 4. For each day of delay in Substantial Completion described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 5 and 6, Contractor will be paid liquidated damages in the amount per day set forth in the Supplementary Conditions to compensate Contractor for all damages resulting from any delay including but not limited to damages for general conditions costs, additional job site costs, additional home office overhead costs, disruption costs, acceleration costs, increase in labor costs, increase in subcontract costs, increase in materials costs, and any other costs incident to the delay. Contractor will be entitled to no other compensation relating to the delay. DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGES IN THE WORK Every Change in the Work will be documented by a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change. If Owner, Architect and Contractor reach agreement regarding the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, resulting from a Change in the Work, then the parties will execute a Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5. If Owner, Architect and Contractor cannot reach agreement regarding the adjustment in Contract Sum or the adjustment in Contract Time resulting from a Change in the Work, then Owner and Architect will issue a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 7.6. Field Changes require the agreement of Architect and Contractor only. 7.5 CHANGE ORDERS Contractor's signature upon a Change Order is Contractor's acknowledgment that it is not entitled to any additional adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time or any other damages or compensation as a result of the Change in the Work other than that provided for in the Change Order, irrespective of whether a subsequent claim for additional compensation or time extensions relating to the Change in the Work is described as a change in the requirements of the Contract Documents, a delay, a disruption of the Work, an acceleration of the Work, an impact on the efficiency of performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment, or other claim and irrespective of whether the impact of the Change in the Work is considered singly or in conjunction with the impact of other Changes in the Work. 7.6 A. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES Contractor will promptly comply with all Construction Change Directives. Pending final resolution of any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time relating to a Construction Change Directive, the amounts proposed by Owner in the Construction Change Directive may be included in November 16, 2005 8.2 C.

Contractor's payment requests once the work relating thereto is completed. If after the work described in the Construction Change Directive is completed, Owner, Architect, and Contractor reach agreement on adjustments in the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both, such agreement will be reflected in an appropriate Change Order. If the parties do not reach agreement regarding an adjustment to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both relating to the Construction Change Directive within thirty (30) days of the completion of the work described therein, then Contractor may submit its claim for an adjustment pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of the completion of such work. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of completion of the work described in the Construction Change Directive, then it will not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting from such work except as set forth in the Construction Change Directive and waives any claim therefor. FIELD CHANGES Architect and Contractor will sign a Field Change order listing the Change In The Work and the Contract Sum including markups before Contractor proceeds with the Field Change. 7.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS Except as set forth in Section 7, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time or for any damages of any kind whatsoever resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect, any event or circumstance, or any act or omission of Owner or Architect and Contractor expressly waives any and all claims therefor.

D.

B.

7.7

7.4

SECTION 8 - TIME
8.1 TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. By executing the Agreement, Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. Contractor will proceed expeditiously with adequate resources and will achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK Contractor will not commence work on the Project site until the date set forth in the Written Notice to proceed. However, Contractor may enter into subcontracts and secure material for the Project after receipt of the Agreement with Owner's authorized signature. Owner will issue the Written Notice to proceed within forty-five (45) days after Owner receives acceptable bonds and evidence of insurance pursuant to Section 11 unless Owner earlier terminates the Agreement pursuant to Section 14. 8.3 A. DELAY IN COMPLETION OF THE WORK For each day after the expiration of the Contract Time that Contractor has not achieved Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay Owner the amount set forth in the Supplementary Conditions as liquidated damages for Owner's loss of use of the Project and the added administrative expense to Owner to administer the Project during the period of delay. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay. Owner may deduct any liquidated damages or reimbursable Page 8 of 13

B.

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

expenses from any money due or to become due to Contractor. If the amount of liquidated damages and reimbursable expenses exceeds any amounts due to Contractor, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request from Owner for payment. B. At the time Architect certifies that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion, Architect will identify the remaining items to be completed for final completion of the Work and will establish with Contractor a reasonable time for completion of those items. Architect will set forth the items to be completed and the time established for their completion in a Certificate of Substantial Completion. For each day that Contractor exceeds the time allowed for completion of the items set forth in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay to Owner as liquidated damages for additional administrative expenses the amount set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay in completing such items.

properly due. If Architect certifies less than the full amount of the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and Owner of Architect's reasons for withholding certification of the full amount requested. B. The certification of the payment request will constitute a representation by Architect to Owner based upon Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the payment request, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of Architect's knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by Architect. However, the certification of the payment request will not constitute a representation that Architect has: 1. Conducted exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quantity or quality of the Work; 2. Reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; 3. Reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors or other data requested by Owner to substantiate Contractor's right to payment; or 4. Made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. In taking action on Contractors payment request, Owner will be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by Contractor. DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION AND PAYMENT Architect may withhold certification of a payment request in whole or in part to the extent reasonably necessary to protect Owner if, in the opinion of Architect, the representations to Owner required by Section 9.3, Paragraph B cannot be accurately made. If Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.3, Paragraph A. If Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, Architect will promptly certify a payment request for the amount for which Architect is able to make such representations to Owner. Architect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a payment request previously certified, to such extent as may be necessary in Architect's opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: 1. Defective work not remedied; 2. Third-party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; 3. Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors for labor, materials, equipment, construction or services; 4. Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 5. Damage to Owner or another contractor for which Contractor is responsible; 6. Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance will not be adequate to cover the cost of completing the Work and damages for the anticipated delay; or 7. Contractor's persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner reserves the right to withhold payments to Contractor, subsequent to Architect's certification of any Page 9 of 13

SECTION 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION


9.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractor will submit to Architect a schedule of values which allocates the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work. The schedule of values will be supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as required by Architect. This schedule, when accepted by Owner and Architect, will be used as a basis for reviewing Contractor's payment requests. 9.2 A. PAYMENT REQUESTS Not more than once a month, Contractor will submit a payment request to Architect for Work completed, materials stored on the site, and for materials stored offsite as of the date of the payment request. The amount of the payment request will be based upon the schedule of values and will be equal to the value of the Work completed: 1. Less retention amounts specified in Supplementary Conditions; 2. Less all prior amounts paid by Owner to Contractor as part of the Contract Sum; and 3. Less offsets allowed under Section 9.4. The payment request may include Changes in the Work that have been performed by Contractor and authorized by Owner and/or Architect pursuant to Section 7. If a payment request includes materials stored offsite, Contractor will include with the payment request a list of the materials, the location where they are stored and the written request of Contractor and its performance bond surety that payment be made for such materials. Contractor warrants and guarantees that upon the receipt of payment for materials and equipment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, title to such materials and equipment will pass to Owner free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances. Notwithstanding this payment and passage of title, Contractor will remain responsible for all such materials and equipment until actual delivery to the project site, incorporation into the Work, and final acceptance by Owner. Contractor further warrants that no material or equipment covered by a payment request is subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or any other person or entity. PAYMENT REQUEST CERTIFICATION Architect will, within seven (7) days after receipt of Contractor's payment request, forward to Owner the payment request certified for such amount as Architect determines is B.

C.

9.4

A.

B.

9.3 A.

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

November 16, 2005

payment request, in order to protect Owner from loss due to any condition described in Section 9.4, Paragraph A, Subparagraphs 1 through 7. Upon satisfactory resolution of any such conditions, payments so withheld will be made. 9.5 A. PROGRESS PAYMENTS Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the parameters of Section 9.2 within fifteen (15) days after Owner receives the certified payment request from Architect. Owner will pay any unpaid retention less any amounts withheld pursuant to Section 9.4 within fifteen (15) days after Contractor achieves Substantial Completion, submits its payment request for retained funds and delivers to Architect Owners form entitled Contractors Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety fully executed by Contractor and its surety. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the payments in the United States mail addressed to Contractor or by electronic transfer at Owners discretion. Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay to each Subcontractor the amount paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at the Project site for review by the Subcontractors. No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in whole or in part, will be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or workmanship. FINAL PAYMENT A. Owner will make full and final payment of the Contract Sum within thirty (30) days of the completion of all of the following requirements: 1. Contractor has submitted its final payment request; 2. Architect has declared to Owner in writing that the Work is complete; and 3. Architect has received conditional releases or releases or waivers of lien from all Subcontractors. B. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcontractor will constitute a waiver of claims by the payee except for those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 7 and identified by Contractor in its affidavit as still pending. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner exceeds the amount due Contractor, Contractor will reimburse the difference to Owner.

of public authorities bearing on the safety or protection of persons and property. C. Contractor will designate a responsible member of its organization at the site whose duty will be the prevention of accidents. This person will be Contractor's onsite representative unless otherwise designated in writing by Contractor to Owner and Architect. 10.3 EMERGENCIES In case of an emergency endangering life or threatening the safety of any person or property, Contractor may, without waiting for specific authorization from Architect or Owner, act at its own discretion to safeguard persons or property. Contractor will immediately notify Architect of such emergency action and make a full written report to Architect within five (5) days after the event.

B.

C.

SECTION 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS


11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Contractor will obtain the following insurance and provide evidence thereof as described below prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier: 1. Workers Compensation Insurance. 2. Employers Liability Insurance with minimum limits of the greater of $500,000 per accident/disease or as required by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 3. Commercial General Liability Insurance - ISO Form CG 00 01 (10/93) or equivalent Occurrence Policy which will provide primary coverage in the event of any Occurrence Claim, or Suit, with: a. Limits of not less than: 1) $2,000, 000 General Aggregate; 2) $2,000, 000 Products - Comp/OPS Aggregate: 3) $1,000, 000 Personal and Advertising Injury: 4) $1,000, 000 Each Occurrence; 5) $50,000 Fire Damage (any one fire); and 6) $5,000 Medical Expense (any one person). b. Endorsements attached thereto including the following or their equivalent: 1) ISO Form CG 25 03 (10/93), Amendment Of Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or Premises), describing the Agreement and specifying limits as shown above. 2) ISO Form CG 20 10 (10/93), Additional Insured -- Owners, Lessees, Or Contractors (Form B), naming Owner and Architect as additional insureds. 4. Automobile Liability Insurance, with: a. A minimum limit of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit per accident; and b. Coverage applying to "Any Auto." Contractor will provide evidence of such insurance to Owner as follows: 1. Deliver to Owner a Certificate of Insurance, on ACORD 25-S (3/93) Form, or equivalent: a. Listing Owner as a Certificate Holder and Additional Insured on general liability and any excess liability policies; b. Attaching the endorsements set forth above. (Note: If forms other than ISO forms are used, copies of the non-ISO forms will be attached to this certificate); c. Identifying the Project; d. Containing a cancellation clause of the certificate amended to read: Should any of the above described policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing insurer will Page 10 of 13

D.

E.

F.

9.6

C.

SECTION 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY


10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS Contractor will be responsible to Owner for initiating and supervising all safety programs in connection with the performance of the Work. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Contractor will take reasonable precautions to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. All persons on the site; 2. The Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and 3. Other property at the site or adjacent to it. Contractor will give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and other lawful requirements November 16, 2005 B.

B.

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

e.

f.

mail 30 days prior written notice to the certificate holder names to the left; Listing the insurance companies providing coverage (All companies listed must be rated "B+ Class VII" or better in the A.M. Best Company Key Rating Guide-Property-Casualty, current edition); and Bearing the name, address and telephone number of the producer and an original signature of the authorized representative of the producer. Facsimile or mechanically reproduced signatures will not be accepted.

C.

Contractor will maintain, from commencement of the Work, Insurance coverage required in Section 11.1 as follows: 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance through expiration of warranty period specified in Section 12.2, Paragraph B. including completion of any warranty repairs; and 2. All other insurance through Final Payment. Owner reserves the right to reject any insurance company, policy, endorsement, or certificate of insurance with or without cause. The cost of insurance as required above will be the obligation of Contractor. Contractor will be responsible for payment of all deductible amounts under all insurance. Owner will provide builders risk insurance for the cost of the Project. The policy will be written on an all risk basis with coverage for perils of wind, flood, earthquake, and terrorism, with exclusions standard for the insurance industry. The policy will be subject to a $5,000 deductible per occurrence which will be the responsibility of Contractor and will not be a reimbursable expense. Owner will provide a copy of the terms and conditions of the builders risk policy to Contractor upon Contractors request. Contractor will comply with terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy. The terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy shall govern coverage. In addition, when there is a loss which may be covered by the builders risk insurance policy, Contractor will comply with the following: 1. Contractor will report the loss immediately to builders risk commercial insurer by calling 1-877-NEWLOSS (659-5677) and shall make such further written submissions as required and otherwise comply with all requirements of the builders risk policy. 2. Contractor will report the loss immediately to the Owner. 3. Contractor will immediately notify its general liability insurance carrier of the loss. 4. Contractor will take all necessary and appropriate actions to protect the property and individuals from further loss, harm, and injury. In the event there are damages resulting from fire or water, restoration shall be performed only by a certified restoration contractor. 5. To the extent possible, Contractor will preserve and not disturb the evidence of the loss until after the builders risk commercial insurer and all interested parties and their insurance carriers have had the opportunity to view and investigate the site and loss. 6. Contractor will cooperate with Owner and the builders risk commercial insurer in the investigation, documentation, and settlement of loss claims, including without limitation promptly responding to all requests for information and documentation from the builders risk commercial insurer and/or Owner.

hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum as security for all obligations arising under the Contract Documents. Such bonds will: 1. Be written on Form AIA Document A312 (1987). 2. Be issued by a surety company or companies licensed in the state in which the Project is located and holding valid certificates of authority under Sections 9304 to 9308, Title 31, of the United States Code as acceptable sureties or reinsurance companies on federal bonds. 3. Have a penal sum obligation not exceeding the authorization shown in the current revision of Circular #670 as issued by the United States Treasury Department, i.e. Treasury List. 4. Be accompanied by a certified copy of the power of attorney stating the authority of the attorney-in-fact executing the bonds on behalf of the surety. B. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety company, performance bond, or labor and material payment bond with or without cause. The cost of the bonds as required above will be the obligation of Contractor.

D.

C.

E.

SECTION 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK


12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK Contractor will notify Architect at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of performing work that would cover up work or otherwise make it difficult to perform inspections required by the Specifications or by applicable governing authorities. Should any such work be covered without proper notification having been given to Architect, Contractor will uncover that work for inspection at its own expense. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK A. Contractor will promptly correct any portion of the Work that is rejected by Architect or which fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor will bear the cost of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspection costs, compensation for Architect's services, and any other expenses made necessary thereby. Contractor will remedy any defects due to faulty materials, equipment, or workmanship which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. Contractor will pay all costs of correcting faulty work, including additional Architect's fees, attorneys fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses when incurred. Nothing in the Contract Documents will be construed to establish a period of limitation within which Owner may enforce the obligation of Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents. The one-year period specified above has no relationship to the time within which compliance with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations.

F.

B.

C.

11.2 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A. Prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier, Contractor will furnish to Owner a performance bond and a labor and material payment bond each in an amount equal to one

12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK A. If Owner prefers to accept any portion of the Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring removal and correction of the Page 11 of 13

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

November 16, 2005

nonconforming Work. In that event, the Contract Sum will be reduced by an amount agreed upon by the parties that reflects the difference in value to Owner between the Work as specified and the nonconforming Work. Such adjustment may consider increased maintenance costs, early replacement costs, increased inefficiency of use, and the like and will be effective whether or not final payment has been made. Such adjustment will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5. B. Temporary or trial usage by Owner or Architect of mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment, or other work or materials supplied under the Contract Documents prior to written acceptance by Architect, will not constitute Owner's acceptance.

provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 14.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE Should Contractor fail to provide Owner with the bonds and certificates of insurance required by Section 11 within the time specified therein, make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, fail to apply enough properly skilled workmen or specified materials to properly prosecute the Work in accordance with Contractors schedule, or otherwise materially breach any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without any prejudice to any other right or remedy, give Contractor Written Notice thereof. If Contractor fails to cure its default within ten (10) days, Owner may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Contractor. In such case, Owner may, in Owners sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor and/or take possession of the premises and all materials, tools, equipment, and appliances thereon, and finish the Work by whatever method Owner deems expedient. Contractor will not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation for additional administrative, architectural, consultant, and legal services (including without limitation attorneys fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses), such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such expense exceeds the unpaid balance, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractors indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 14.3 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Notwithstanding any other provision contained in the Contract Documents, Owner may, without cause and in its absolute discretion, terminate the Agreement at any time. In the event of such termination, Contractor will be entitled to recover from Owner the percentage of the Contract Sum equal to the percentage of the Work which Architect determines has been completed on the Project site as of the date of termination together with any out of pocket loss Contractor has sustained with respect to materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion of the Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Owner may, in Owners sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor. Without limitation, Contractors indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder.

SECTION 13 - RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES


13.1 SUBMITTAL OF DISPUTE In the event there is any dispute arising under this Agreement which cannot be resolved by agreement between the parties, either party may submit the dispute with all documentation upon which it relies to Director of Project Construction, Physical Facilities Department, 50 East North Temple, 11th Floor, Salt Lake City, Utah 84150, who will convene a dispute resolution conference within thirty (30) days. The dispute resolution conference will constitute settlement negotiations and any settlement proposal made pursuant to the conference will not be admissible as evidence of liability. In the event that the parties do not resolve their dispute pursuant to the dispute resolution conference, either party may commence legal action to resolve the dispute. Any such action must be commenced within six (6) months from the first day of the dispute resolution conference or be time barred. Submission of the dispute to the Director as outlined above is a condition precedent to the right to commence legal action to resolve any dispute. In the event that either party commences legal action to adjudicate any dispute without first submitting the dispute to the Director, the other party will be entitled to obtain an order dismissing the litigation without prejudice and awarding such other party any costs and attorneys fees incurred by that party in obtaining the dismissal, including without limitation copy costs, and expert and consultant fees and expenses. 13.2 CONTRACTOR TO PROCEED WITH DILIGENCE Pending final resolution of a dispute hereunder, Contractor will proceed diligently with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement.

SECTION 14 - TERMINATION
14.1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR In the event Owner materially breaches any term of the Contract Documents, Contractor will promptly give Written Notice of the breach to Owner. If Owner fails to cure the breach within ten (10) days of the Written Notice, Contractor may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Owner and recover from Owner the percentage of the Contract Sum represented by the Work completed on the Project site as of the date of termination together with any out of pocket loss Contractor has sustained with respect to materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion of the Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation or damages as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractors indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

SECTION 15 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS


15.1 GOVERNING LAW The parties acknowledge that the Contract Documents have substantial connections to the State of Utah. The Contract Documents will be deemed to have been made, executed, and delivered in Salt Lake City, Utah. To the maximum extent permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters related to their creation and performance will be governed by and enforced in Page 12 of 13

November 16, 2005

accordance with the laws of the State of Utah, excluding conflicts of law rules; and (ii) all disputes arising from or related to the Contract Documents will be decided only in a state or federal court located in Salt Lake City, Utah and not in any other court or state. Toward that end, the parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Salt Lake City, Utah and waive any other venue to which they might be entitled by virtue of domicile, habitual residence, place of business, or otherwise. 15.2 NO WAIVER No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect, or Contractor will constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor will such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 15.3 RULE OF CONSTRUCTION

15.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Owner and Architect have the right to have tests made when they deem it necessary. Tests conducted by Owner or Architect will be paid for by Owner. Should a test reveal a failure of the Work to meet Contract Document requirements, the cost of the test as well as subsequent tests related to the failure necessary to determine compliance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by Owner, with the cost thereof deducted from the Contract Sum by Modification. Tests will be made in accordance with recognized standards by a competent, independent testing laboratory. Materials found defective or not in conformity with Contract Document requirements will be promptly replaced or repaired at the expense of Contractor. Owner and Architect have the right to obtain samples of materials to be used in the Work and to test samples for determining whether they meet Contract Document requirements. Samples required for testing will be furnished by Contractor and selected as directed by Architect. Samples may be required from the sample's source, point of manufacture, point of delivery, or point of installation at Architect's discretion. Samples not required as a Submittal in the Specifications will be paid for by Owner. Should tests reveal a failure of the Sample to meet the Contract Document requirements, Contractor will provide other Samples that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

C. Owner and Contractor agree that the Contract Documents will be deemed to have been drafted by both Owner and Contractor and will not be construed against either Owner or Contractor because of authorship. 15.4 ENFORCEMENT In the event either party commences legal action to enforce or rescind any term of the Contract Documents, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover its attorneys fees and costs, including without limitation all copy costs and expert and consultant fees and expenses, incurred in that action and on all appeals, from the other party.

END OF DOCUMENT

CON-FSU-0022-US Rev L

November 16, 2005

Page 13 of 13

BLANK PAGE

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
FIXED SUM (U.S.) ITEM 1 - GENERAL 1. 2. Conditions of the Contract apply to each Division of the Specifications. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to Divisions 02 through 33 of the Specifications.

ITEM 2 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGE AMOUNTS: 1. The amount of liquidated damages to be paid to the Contractor for delays under General Conditions Section 7.3, Paragraph B is $500 per day. The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in Substantial Completion of the Work under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph A is $500 per day.

2.

3.

The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in completing work itemized on the Substantial Completion Certificate under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph B is $250 per day.

ITEM 3 - PERMITS 1. Delete Section 3.6, Paragraph B and replace with the following: B. Building permit will be applied prior to bid opening and costs are to be included in bid proposal as an Allowance. The permit will be issued by Carbon County.

ITEM 4 - MISCELLANEOUS CHANGES IN GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. Make the following changes as follows Section 7.1, Paragraph B - Decrease ten (10) days to seven ( 7 ) days.

ITEM 5 - RETENTION APPLIED TO CONTRACTOR PAYMENTS: Add the following to Section 9.5 : G. In addition and notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner will also withhold and retain 10% of payments made to Contractor.

ITEM 6 - UTAH STATE SALES TAX: 1. Contractors should be exempt on purchases of material installed or converted into real property to be used by the Owner. The Contractor will furnish each vendor with a completed Exemption Certificate Form TC-721. The certificate will be prepared by the Contractor for each vendor in order to obtain the exemption. The Owners tax exempt number is N10081.

2.

ITEM 8 - UTAH STATE NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT: NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT

CON-FSUU-0072-US Rev N

8 January 2010

Page 1 of 3 4844-4784-3588.2

A. In compliance with Section 38-1-31 Utah Code Annotated (UCA), Contractor shall file with the State Construction Registry (the database) and with the County Clerk of county in which Project is located (and copy to Owner) a notice of commencement within the earlier of: (a) fifteen (15) days after the issuance of the building permit or (b) fifteen (15) days after commencement of physical construction work at the project site if no building permit has issued. The notice of commencement will include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. The name and address of the owner of the project, 2. The name and address of the original contractor, 3. The name and address of the Surety providing any payment bond for the project, or if none exists, a statement that a payment bond was not required for the work being performed; 4. The project address if the project can be reasonably identified by an address; or the name and general description of the location of the project if the project cannot be reasonably identified by an address; and. 5. The lot or parcel number, and any subdivision, development, or other project name of the real property upon which the project is to be constructed. In addition, Contractor shall ensure that electronic notice of the filing of a notice of commencement or alternate notice as prescribed by law shall be provided to at least the following: 1. All persons who have filed notices of commencement for the project, and 2. All interested persons who have requested notices concerning the project. B. Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Contract Documents to the contrary, the parties to the Contract agree that any breach or failure to comply with this Section by the Contractor will constitute a breach of Contract and the Contractor will be liable for any direct, indirect, or consequential damages to the Owner flowing from this breach.

ITEM 9 - UTAH STATE NOTICE OF COMPLETION: NOTICE OF COMPLETION A. Within five (5) days of final completion of the project and in compliance with Section 38-133 Utah Code Annotated (UCA), Contractor shall file with the State Construction Registry (the database) and with the County Clerk of county in which Project is located (and copy to Owner) a notice of completion which shall include, without limitation, the following: 1. The building permit number for the project (or the number assigned to the project by the designated agent); 2. The name, address, and telephone number of the person filing the notice of completion; 3. The name of the original contractor for the project; 4. The address of the project or a description of the location of the project; 5. The date on which final completion is alleged to have occurred; and 6. The method used to determine final completion. Contractor shall ensure that a copy of the notice of completion is promptly provided at least to the following by electronic notification and/or alternate notice as prescribed by law: 1. All persons who filed a notice of commencement for the project; 2. All persons who filed a preliminary notice for the project; and 3. All interested persons who have requested notices concerning the project. B. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents to the contrary, the parties to the Contract agree that any breach or failure to comply with this Section by the Contractor will constitute a breach of Contract and the Contractor will be liable for any direct, indirect, or consequential damages to the Owner flowing from this breach.

ITEM 10 - UTAH STATE PROGRESS PAYMENTS AND FINAL PAYMENT: The following provisions are to replace the existing sections 9.5 and 9.6 of the General Conditions for Fixed Sum project:

CON-FSUU-0072-US Rev N

8 January 2010

Page 2 of 3 4844-4784-3588.2

9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the parameters of Section 9.2 within fifteen (15) days after: 1. Contractor has submitted a progress payment request; 2. Contractor has submitted Conditional Waiver and Release Upon Progress Payment documents (in content complying with Utah Code 38-1-39(4)) executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the Contractors progress payment request; and 3. Owner receives the certified payment request from Architect. B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion and submits its payment request for retained funds and delivers to the Architect Owners form entitled Contractors Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety fully executed by Contractor and its surety, if any, and provides statutory Conditional Waiver and Release documents executed by all subcontractors and suppliers having claim against the retained funds, Owner will pay any unpaid retention less any amounts withheld pursuant to Section 9.4 within forty-five (45) days from the later of (a) the date Owner received Contractors payment request for retained funds and fully executed Contractors Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety, (b) the date a certificate of occupancy is issued; (c) the date that a building inspector having authority to issue its own certificate of occupancy does not issue that certificate but permits occupancy. C. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the payments in the United States mail addressed to Contractor or by electronic transfer at Owners discretion. D. Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay to each Subcontractor the amount paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. E. Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at the Project site for review by the Subcontractors. F. No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in whole or in part, will be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or workmanship. G. In addition and notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner will also withhold and retain 5% of payments made to Contractor. These retention funds will be held in an interest bearing account. 9.6 FINAL PAYMENT

A. Owner will make full and final payment of the Contract Sum within thirty (30) days of the completion of all of the following requirements: 1. Contractor has submitted its final payment request; 2. Contractor has submitted Waiver and Release Upon Final Payment documents (in content complying with Utah Code 38-1-39(4)) executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the Contractors final payment request; and 3. Architect has declared to Owner in writing that the Work is complete. B. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcontractor will constitute a waiver of claims by the payee except for those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 7 and identified by Contractor in its affidavit as still pending. C. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner exceeds the amount due Contractor, Contractor will reimburse the difference to Owner. END OF DOCUMENT

CON-FSUU-0072-US Rev N

8 January 2010

Page 3 of 3 4844-4784-3588.2

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I 0 N 01: G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S
01 1000 SUMMARY 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3100 01 3200 01 3300 01 3500 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SPECIAL PROCEDURES

01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 01 4100 01 4200 01 4301 01 4523 01 4546 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS REFERENCES QUALITY ASSURANCE - QUALIFICATIONS TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES DUCT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5100 01 5200 01 5400 01 5600 01 5700 01 5800 TEMPORARY UTILITIES CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION AIDS TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES TEMPORARY CONTROLS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6100 01 6200 01 6400 01 6600 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PRODUCT OPTIONS OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 01 7400 01 7700 01 7800 EXECUTION CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

01 7000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

01 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements Summary of Work requirements.

1.2

WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to Sections of Divisions 02 through 49 of Specifications. Instructions contained in Specifications are directed to Contractor. Unless specifically provided otherwise, obligations set forth in Contract Documents are obligations of Contractor. Contractor shall furnish total labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to perform The Work in accordance with Contract Documents. Building and site shall not meet Sustainable Design Requirements.

B.

C.

1.3

WORK BY OWNER A. Owner will furnish and install some portions of The Work with its own forces. Contractor will be provided with schedule of when these items are to be performed. 1. General: a. Complete work necessary to accommodate work to be performed by Owner before scheduled date for performance of such work. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to timely complete such work. b. Store and protect completed work provided by Owner until date of Substantial Completion. 2. Work furnished and installed by Owner include, but are not limited to, following: a. High Security Cylinders and Cores: b. Selected Commercial Toilet Accessories. c. Carpet and Carpet Base. d. Owner will terminate building telephone cables at terminal board.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Summary of Work

-1-

01 1100

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Multiple Contracts.

1.2

SUMMARY OF CONTRACTS A. Owner may issue separate contracts for operations scheduled to precede and be substantially completed before beginning of The Work under this Contract. 1. Contractor will be given written notice from such contractors of any revisions to scheduled completion of their work at least 30 days in advance. Owner will reimburse Contractor for expenses incurred by Contractor by failure to be properly notified. Owner has issued or will issue separate contracts for operations scheduled to be completed between Notice to Proceed and Substantial Completion. 1. General: a. Schedule performance of work covered by such separate contracts in Contractor's Construction Schedule so as to avoid delays in Substantial Completion. Give written notice to such contractors and to Owner of any revisions to scheduled delivery and work dates at least 90 days in advance. b. Complete work necessary to accommodate items provided under such separate contracts before scheduled date for performance of such work. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to timely complete such work including, but not limited to, cost of crews during downtime or for call backs and costs to correct substrate deficiencies. c. Store and protect completed work provided under separate contracts until date of Substantial Completion. 2. Accordion Folding Partitions. See Section 10 2233. 3. Basketball Equipment. See Section 11 6624. 4. Folding Panel Partitions. See Section 10 2239. 5. Sheet Carpeting. See Section 09 6816. 6. Testing and Inspection. See Section 01 4523 Testing and Inspection for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods: a. Aggregate Base. See Section 31 1123. b. Air System Testing, Adjusting, and Balance. See Section 01 4546. c. Asphalt Paving. See Section 32 1216. d. Concrete. See Section 03 3053 and Section 03 3111. e. Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission and Alkalinity level. See Section 09 0503, Section 09 6466, Section 09 6519, Section 09 6813, and Section 09 6816. f. Concrete Paving. See Section 32 1313. g. Drill-In Mechanical Anchors / Adhesive Anchors / Screw Anchors. See Section 03 1511 and Section 04 0519. h. Fill / Engineering Fill. See Section 31 2323. i. Headed Concrete Anchor Studs / Deformed Bar Anchors. j. Masonry (Masonry Units, Reinforcement, Mortar and Grout). See Section 04 0513, Section 04 0515, Section 04 0519, Section 04 2113, Section 04 2114, Section 04 2223, Section 04 2723 and Section 32 1416. k. Prefabricated Metal Plate Wood Trusses. See Section 06 1753.

B.

Multiple Contract Summary

-1-

01 1200

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

7. C.

l. Reinforcing Steel. See Section 03 2100. m. Structural Steel General. See Section 05 1200. Tile Carpeting. See Section 09 6813.

Owner has issued or will issue separate contracts for operations normally scheduled to follow Substantial Completion. 1. General: a. Give written notice to such contractors and to Owner of any revisions of scheduled date of Substantial Completion at least 90 days in advance. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to accurately report date of Substantial Completion. b. Complete work necessary to accommodate items provided under such separate contracts before Substantial Completion. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to complete such work before Substantial Completion. 2. Furnishings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Multiple Contract Summary

-2-

01 1200

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Work Restrictions.

1.2

PROJECT CONDITIONS A. During construction period, Contractor will have use of premises for construction operations. Contractor will ensure that Contractor, its employees, subcontractors, and their employees comply with following requirements: 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits shown on Drawings. Do not disturb portions of site beyond Contract limits. 2. Do not allow alcoholic beverages, illegal drugs, or persons under their influence on Project site. 3. Do not allow use of tobacco in any form on Project Site. 4. Do not allow pornographic or other indecent materials on site. 5. Do not allow work on Project site on Sundays except for emergency work. 6. Refrain from using profanity or being discourteous or uncivil to others on Project Site or while performing The Work. 7. Wear shirts with sleeves, wear shoes, and refrain from wearing immodest, offensive, or obnoxious clothing, while on Project Site. 8. Do not allow playing of obnoxious and loud music on Project Site. Do not allow playing of any music within existing facilities. 9. Do not build fires on Project Site. 10. Do not allow weapons on Project Site, except those carried by law enforcement officers or other uniformed security personnel who have been retained by Owner or Contractor to provide security services. Do not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with a weight that will endanger its safety. Questions of structural loading as part of construction means and methods shall be addressed by a licensed structural engineer engaged by Contractor, subject to the review by Architect.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Work Restrictions

-1-

01 1400

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract Modifications.

1.2 A.

REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATIONS (RFI's) General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. RFI Forms: Form bound in Project Manual. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

B.

C. D.

Contract Modification Procedures

-1-

01 2600

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

08.29.11

E.

RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

F.

1.3 A.

MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on ASI form included in Project Manual.

1.4 A.

CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on form included in Project Manual. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

B.

1.5 A.

PROPOSAL REQUESTS Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

Contract Modification Procedures

-2-

01 2600

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b. c. d.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

08.29.11

B.

Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

1.6 A.

CHANGE ORDERS On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included in Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Contract Modification Procedures

-3-

01 2600

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements to prepare and process Applications for Payments.

1.2

PAYMENT REQUESTS A. B. Use Payment Request forms provided by Owner. Each Payment Request will be consistent with previous requests and payments certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. Request Preparation: 1. Complete every entry on Payment Request form. 2. Entries will match data on approved schedule of values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 3. Submit signed Payment Request to Architect with current Construction Schedule. Provide following submittals before or with submittal of Initial Payment Request: 1. List of Subcontractors. 2. Initial progress report. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Submittal Schedule. Provide Affidavit of Contractor and Consent of Surety with Payment Request following Substantial Completion.

C.

D.

E.

1.3

SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit schedule of values on Owners standard form to Architect 20 days minimum before submission of Initial Payment Request as a necessary condition before payment will be processed. Coordinate preparation of schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Correlate line items in Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Payment Request form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Payment Procedures

-1-

01 2900

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Project Management and Coordination on Projects.

1.2

PROJECT COORDINATION A. B. Project designation for this Project is LDS 503-6925-11010101, Helper UT Stake (Helper Utah Stake) This Project designation will be included on documents generated for Project by Contractor and Subcontractors, or be present on a cover letter accompanying such documents.

1.3

MULTIPLE CONTRACT COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for accurately maintaining and reporting schedule of The Work from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall be responsible for providing Temporary Facilities And Controls for those who perform work on Project from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall be responsible for providing Construction Waste Management And Disposal services for those who perform work on Project from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall be responsible for Final Cleaning for entire Project.

B.

C.

D.

1.4

PROJECT MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES A. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Attend preconstruction conference and organizational meeting scheduled by Architect at Project site or other convenient location. 2. Be prepared to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including such topics as: a. Construction schedule. b. Critical Work sequencing. c. Current problems. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Distribution of Contract Documents. f. Equipment deliveries and priorities. g. General schedule of inspections by Architect and its consultants. h. General inspection of tests. i. Office, work, and storage areas. j. Preparation of record documents and O & M manuals. k. Procedures for processing interpretations and Modifications. l. Procedures for processing Payment Requests. m. Project cleanup. n. Security. -101 3100

Project Management and Coordination

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

o. Status of permits. p. Submittal of Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, Quality Assurance / Control submittals. q. Use of the premises. r. Work restrictions. s. Working hours. Architect will record minutes of meetings and distribute copies to Owner and Contractor within three working days.

B.

Progress Meetings: 1. Attend progress meetings at Project site at regularly scheduled intervals determined by Architect, at least once a month. 2. Progress meetings will be open to Owner, Architect, Subcontractors, and anyone invited by Owner, Architect, and Contractor. 3. Be prepared to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including following: a. Progress since last meeting. b. Whether Contractor is on schedule. c. Activities required to complete Project within Contract Time. d. Labor and materials provided under separate contracts. e. Off-site fabrication problems. f. Access. g. Site use. h. Temporary facilities and services. i. Hours of work. j. Hazards and risks. k. Project cleanup. l. Quality and Work standards. m. Status of pending modifications. n. Documentation of information for Payment Requests. o. Maintenance of Project records. 4. Architect will prepare minutes of progress meetings and distribute copies of minutes to Owner and Contractor within three working days. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Attend pre-installation conferences specified in Contract Document. a. If possible, schedule these conferences on same day as regularly scheduled Progress Meetings. If this is not possible, coordinate scheduling with Architect. b. Request input from attendees in preparing agenda. 2. Be prepared to discuss following items: a. Requirements of Contract Documents. b. Completed work necessary for installation of items or systems. c. Conditions not in compliance with installation requirements. d. Installation and inspection schedule. e. Coordination between trades. f. Space and access limitations. g. Testing. 3. Architect will prepare meeting minutes and distribute minutes to Owner and Contractor within three working days.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Project Management and Coordination

-2-

01 3100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work.

1.2

SCHEDULING OF WORK A. Bar Chart Schedule: 1. Submit horizontal bar chart schedule before Preconstruction Conference. Provide separate time bar for each construction activity listed on Owners payment request form. Within each time bar, show estimated completion percentage. Provide continuous vertical line to identify first working day of each week. Show each activity in chronological sequence. Show graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of The Work. As The Work progresses, place contrasting mark in each bar to indicate actual completion. 2. Provide copies of schedule for Architect and Owner and post copy in field office. 3. Revise schedule monthly. Send copy of revised schedule to Owner and Architect and post copy in field office. Daily Construction Reports: 1. Prepare daily reports of operations at Project including at least following information: a. List of Subcontractors at site. b. Approximate count of personnel at site by trade. c. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. d. Major items of equipment on site. e. Materials, equipment, or Owner-furnished items arriving at or leaving site. f. Accidents and unusual events. g. Site or structure damage by water, frost, wind, or other causes. h. Meetings, conferences, and significant decisions. i. Visitors to the job including meeting attendees. j. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. k. Any tests made and their result if known. l. Meter readings and similar recordings. m. Emergency procedures. n. Orders and requests of governing authorities. o. Modifications received, carried out. p. Services connected, disconnected. q. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. r. Brief summary of work accomplished that day. s. Signature of person preparing report. 2. Submit daily reports to Architect at least weekly. 3. Maintain copies of daily reports at field office.

B.

Construction Progress Documentation

-1-

01 3200

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Construction Progress Documentation

-2-

01 3200

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Submittal Procedures.

1.2

SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Furnish submittal schedule within 20 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, listing items specified to be furnished for review to Architect including product data, shop drawings, samples, and Informational submittals. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Enclose the following information for each item: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category. d. Name of Subcontractor. e. Description of part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal. g. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. Print and distribute copies to Architect and Owner and post copy in field office. When revisions are made, distribute to same parties and post in same location. Revise schedule monthly. Send copy of revised schedule to Owner and Architect and post copy in field office.

B.

C.

1.3

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently before performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. a. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. b. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals required for related elements of The Work so processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 2. Processing Time: a. Allow sufficient review time so installation will not be delayed by time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1) Allow 21 days for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to allow coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will promptly advise Contractor when submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2) If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process same as initial submittal. 3) Allow 10 days for reprocessing each submittal.

Submittal Procedures

01 3300

Project # 503-6925-11010101

3.

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 4) No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to Architect in sufficient time before work is to be performed to allow processing. Identification: a. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Include name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 1) Provide space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken. 2) Include following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a) Project name. b) Date. c) Name and address of Architect. d) Name and address of Contractor. e) Name and address of Subcontractor. f) Name and address of supplier. g) Name of manufacturer. h) Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Transmittal: a. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using transmittal letter. On transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements, or, on form or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. b. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor or not marked with Contractor's approval will be returned without action.

08.29.11

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit Product Data, as required by individual Sections of Specifications. 2. Mark each copy of each set of submittals to show choices and options used on Project. Where printed Product Data includes information on products that are not required for Project, mark copies to indicate information relating to Project. 3. Certify that proposed product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. List any deviations from those requirements on form or separate sheet. 4. Submit five copies of each required submittal unless otherwise required. Architect will return three copies marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. 5. Submit electronic files PDF: Architect will return a PDF copy marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit newly prepared graphic data to accurate scale. Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 36 by 48 inches (915 by 1 200 mm). Highlight, encircle, or otherwise show deviations from Contract Documents. Include following information as a minimum: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products and materials included. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. Standard printed information prepared without specific reference to Project is not acceptable as Shop Drawings. 3. Review and designate (stamp) approval of shop drawings. Unless otherwise specified, submit to Architect six copies of shop drawings required by Contract Documents. Shop drawings not required by Contract Documents, but requested by Contractor or supplied by Subcontractor, need not be submitted to Architect for review.

B.

Submittal Procedures

01 3300

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Samples: 1. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. a. Mount, display, or package Samples so as to ease review of qualities specified. Prepare Samples to match samples provided by Architect, if applicable. Include following: 1) Generic description of Sample. 2) Sample source. 3) Product name or name of manufacturer. 4) Compliance with recognized standards. 5) Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variations in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in material or product represented, submit set of three samples minimum that show approximate limits of variations. b. Refer to other specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to Contractor for incorporation into The Work. Such Samples shall be undamaged at time of use. On transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. 3. Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit full set of choices for material or product. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. 4. Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit three sets. One will be returned marked with action taken. 5. Samples, as accepted and returned by Architect, will be used for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed, submittal may serve as final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

1.5

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Informational submittals are design data, test reports, certificates, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other documentary data affirming quality of products and installations. Submit five copies of each required submittal unless otherwise required. Architect will return three copies marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. [or] Submit electronic files: PDF. Architect will return a PDF copy marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. 1. Certificates: Describe certificates intended to document affirmations by Contractor or others that the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, but do not repeat provisions of Parts 2 or 3. 2. Delegated Design Submittals / Design Data: Describe submittals intended to demonstrate design work prepared by Contractors licensed professionals. 3. Test And Evaluation Reports: Describe submittal of test reports or evaluation service reports intended to document required tests. 4. Manufacturer Instructions: Describe submittals intended to document manufacturer instructions. 5. Source Quality Control Submittals: Describe submittal of source quality control documentation. 6. Field Quality Control Submittals: Describe submittal of field quality control documentation. 7. Manufacturer Reports: Describe submittal of Manufacturer reports as documentation of manufacturer activities. 8. Special Procedure Submittals: Describe submittals intended to document special procedures. An example would be construction staging or phasing for remodeling an existing facility while 3 01 3300

Submittal Procedures

Project # 503-6925-11010101

9.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake keeping it in operation. While the Contractor would normally be responsible for managing this, submittal of his plan as documentation could be specified. Qualification Statements: Describe submittals intended to document qualifications of entities employed by Contractor.

08.29.11

1.6

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. This title groups submittals that occur during project closeout. Coordinate with section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals. 1. Maintenance Contracts: Describe submittal of the maintenance contract. 2. Operations & Maintenance Data: Describe submittal of operation and maintenance data necessary for products of the Section. 3. Bonds: Describe submittals of bonds specific to this Section. 4. Warranty Documentation: Describe submittal of final executed warranty document. 5. Record Documentation: Describe submittal of record documentation specific to this Section. 6. Sustainable (LEED) Design Closeout Documentation: Describe submittal intended to document sustainable design requirements that cannot be submitted until closing or later. 7. Software: Describe submittal of extra copy operating system and other utility software necessary to operate and maintain software during life of product.

1.7

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. This title groups maintenance material submittals required by Section. 1. Spare Parts: Describe spare parts necessary for Owners use in facility operation and maintenance. Parts are generally understood to be items such as filters, motor drive belts, lamps, and other similar manufactured items that require only simple replacement. 2. Extra Stock Materials: Describe extra stock materials to be provided for Owners use in facility operation and maintenance. Extra stock materials are generally understood to be items such as ceiling tiles, flooring, paint etc. 3. Tools and Software: a. Describe tools to be provided for Owners use in facility operation and maintenance. Tools are generally understood to be wrenches, gauges, circuit setters, etc, required for proper operation or maintenance of a system. b. If necessary, describe submittal of an extra copy of operating system and other utility software necessary to operate and maintain the software during expected life of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Submittal Procedures

01 3300

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 3500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Special Procedures.

1.2

ACCELERATION OF WORK A. Complete The Work in accordance with Construction Schedule. If Contractor falls behind schedule, take such actions as are necessary, at no additional expense to Owner, to bring progress of The Work back in accordance with schedule. Owner may request proposal for completion of The Work at date earlier than expiration of Contract Time. Promptly provide requested proposal showing cost of such acceleration of The Work. Consult with Owner and Architect regarding possible options to decrease cost of such acceleration. If Owner determines to order acceleration of The Work, change in Contract Sum and Contract Time resulting from acceleration will be included in a Change Order.

B.

1.3

OWNERS SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Personal Protection: 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Positive means of fall protection, such as guardrails system, safety net system, personal fall arrest system, etc, is provided to employees whenever exposed to a fall six feet or more above a lower level. b. Personnel working on Project shall wear hard hats and safety glasses as required by regulation and hazard. c. Personnel working on Project shall wear long or short sleeve shirts, long pants, and hardtoed boots or other sturdy shoes appropriate to type and phase of work being performed. Contractor Tools And Equipment: 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Tools and equipment are in good working condition, well maintained, and have necessary guards in place. b. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) is utilized on power cords and tools. c. Scaffolding and man lifts are in good working condition, erected and maintained as required by governmental regulations. d. Ladders are in good condition, well maintained, used as specified by Manufacturer, and secured as required. Miscellaneous: 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Protection is provided on protruding rebar and other similar objects. b. General Contractor Superintendent has completed the OSHA 10-hour construction outreach training course or equivalent. c. Implementation and administration of safety program on Project. d. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are provided for substances or materials for which an MSDS is required by governmental regulations before bringing on site. -101 3500

B.

C.

Special Procedures

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

e. Consistent safety training is provided to employees on Project. Report accidents involving injury to employees on Project that require off-site medical treatment to Owners designated representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Special Procedures

-2-

01 3500

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. Testing and inspecting services are used to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality assurance and quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in Sections that specify those activities and Section 01 4523. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and quality control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for Pre-Installation Conferences for testing and inspection. 2. Section 01 3200: Construction Progress Documentation for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 3. Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7300: Executions for cutting and patching for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 7. Divisions 02 thru 49 establish responsibility for providing specific testing and inspections.

B.

C.

1.3

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. 3. The American Institute of Architects. AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Washington, DC. 2007. 4. The Construction Specifications Institute. Project Resource Manual/CSI Manual of Practice, 5th Edition. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2005.

Quality Requirements

-1-

01 4000

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Definitions: 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Contract Documents: Engineering and Architectural Drawings and Specifications issued for construction, plus clarification drawings, addenda, approved change orders and contractor designed elements. 4. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 6. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 7. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the work has been or is being performed and at completion of the work. 8. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. a. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of corresponding generic name. 9. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which the Work will be judged. 10. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 11. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. 12. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 13. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by Testing Agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. 14. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. 15. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. 16. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. 17. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 18. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship.

Quality Requirements

-2-

01 4000

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 19. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. 20. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

1.4

CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for decision before proceeding.

B.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Testing Agency to demonstrate their capabilities and experience per Article 1.7 Quality Assurance. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. Certified written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service will include, but not be limited: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of Testing Agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B.

C.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to verify compliance and guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. -301 4000

Quality Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Activities performed by Owners Quality Assurance Testing Agency include, but are not limited to following: 1. Preconstruction: a. Review inspection requirements. b. Review inspection frequency. c. Review concrete mix design submittals. d. Review other material submittals. e. Review contractors welding certificates. f. Prepare non-compliance log to track non-compliant testing or inspections. g. Review Quality Assurance personnel qualifications. 2. Excavation Support and Protection: a. Anchor tie-back System: 1) Observe and record proof tests. b. Soil Nail Systems: 1) Observe and record proof tests. 2) Observe drilling for changes in soil type, hole diameter, length, and cleanliness. 3) Periodically observe placement of drainage materials, reinforcing, and shotcrete. 4) Review compressive strength test results of grout and shotcrete. 3. Fill / Engineered Fill, Aggregate Base: a. Review Quality Assurance coverage of earthwork required observation and testing. b. Provide periodic Quality Assurance testing to confirm accuracy of Quality Assurance test reports. c. Review Quality Assurance testing and observation reports. d. Review Quality Assurance personnel qualifications. 4. Reinforced Concrete: a. Set up concrete placement pour card system and verify that all relevant trades have signed off prior to concrete placement. b. Obtaining trade sign-offs on each pour card will be responsibility of General Contactors foreman or whoever is in charge of ordering concrete. c. Pour cards will be turned in to Quality Assurance representative after the work has been completed so that they can be reviewed and filed. d. Verify Quality Assurance coverage of reinforced concrete testing or inspections. e. Provide periodic Quality Assurance testing or inspections of concrete elements. f. Review Quality Assurance reports from previous day. g. Review laboratory test results. h. Obtain Contractor placement schedules. i. Review Quality Assurance personnel qualifications. 5. Structural Masonry Units, Reinforcing, Mortar, and Grout: a. Review inspection requirements. b. Review inspection frequency. c. Review masonry design material submittals. d. Review other material submittals. e. Prepare non-compliance log to track non-compliant testing or inspections. f. Review Quality Assurance personnel qualifications. 6. Steel: a. Review inspection requirements. b. Review inspection frequency. c. Review contractors welding certificates. d. Prepare non-compliance log to track non-compliant testing or inspections. e. Review Quality Assurance personnel qualifications. 7. Asphalt Paving: a. Review inspection requirements. b. Review inspection frequency. c. Review design material submittals. d. Prepare non-compliance log to track non-compliant testing or inspections. e. Review Quality Assurance personnel qualifications. 8. Weekly Activities: a. Summarize and track any non-compliance issues. b. Provide summary report of previous weeks performed Work.

08.29.11

Quality Requirements

-4-

01 4000

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c. d.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Visit contractors periodically to find out if they have any concerns with Quality Assurance inspectors and check on any schedule changes. Visit Owners representatives periodically to find out if they have any concerns with how project is progressing.

08.29.11

1.7

QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements performed by Contractor. They do not include inspections, tests or related actions performed by Architect, Owner, governing authorities or independent agencies hired by Owner or Architect. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified Testing Agency to perform these quality control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same testing entity engaged by Owner, without Owners written approval. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed condition as standard for judging completed Work. a. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 3300: "Submittal Procedures." Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and quality control services with minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist Testing Agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require quality control by Testing Agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Structural Masonry Units, Reinforcing, Mortar, and Grout: a. Review inspection requirements. b. Review inspection frequency. c. Review masonry design material submittals. d. Review other material submittals.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

Quality Requirements

-5-

01 4000

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake e. Prepare non-compliance log to track non-compliant testing or inspections. Reinforced Concrete: a. Obtain daily concrete placement schedule from Contractor. b. Verify that reinforcing has been placed as per Contract Documents. c. Sign concrete placement pour card prior to concrete placement. d. Monitor concrete placement to ensure that concrete is properly consolidated and reinforcing steel is not displaced. e. Sample and place concrete according to required frequency stated in project specifications. f. Sample at point of placement. g. Test slump, air content, air temperature, concrete temperature, unit weight (if required), and cast required number of test cylinders. h. Record test results and communicate to designated parties. i. Report non-compliant tests or inspections to contractor, Quality Assurance Manager, and other designated parties. 1) Transport test cylinders to laboratory for curing and compressive strength testing Aggregate Base: a. Provide required observation and testing of placed fill. b. Become familiar with geotechnical report recommendations. c. Verify material compaction requirements. d. Verify that materials used for fill meet qualifications. e. Obtain representative samples of fill materials for proctor value determination and classification. f. Provide density testing of placed fill at specified frequency. g. Obtain occasional samples of fill to verify that correct proctor value is being used. h. Document every test performed. i. Report test locations with building gridlines (if possible). j. Document failing tests and report retests when performed. k. Provide copy of daily report and test results to Quality Assurance manager. l. Distribute daily reports and test results to designated parties. Steel: a. Review inspection requirements. b. Review inspection frequency. c. Review welding certificates. d. Prepare non-compliance log to track non-compliant testing or inspections. Asphalt Paving: a. Review inspection requirements. b. Review inspection frequency. c. Review design material submittals. d. Prepare non-compliance log to track non-compliant testing or inspections. Weekly Activities: a. Ensure that non-compliance log is current. b. Provide summary reports of performed Work.

08.29.11

1.8

SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified Testing Agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Requirements of Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services apply.

Quality Requirements

-6-

01 4000

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Section 01 7300 Execution for Cutting and Patching. Protect construction exposed by or for Quality Assurance and Quality Control activities. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services.

B. C.

END OF SECTION

Quality Requirements

-7-

01 4000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 4100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Regulatory Requirements.

1.2 A.

ASBESTOS Contract Documents for this Project have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted professional architectural and engineering practices. Accordingly, no asbestos or products containing asbestos have been knowingly specified for this Project. Notify Architect immediately for instructions if materials containing asbestos are brought to site for inclusion in the Work. At Architect's direction and with Owner's approval, a certified asbestos inspector will collect samples and an independent testing laboratory will perform testing procedures on suspect materials. Certify that based upon best knowledge, information, inspection, and belief no building materials containing asbestos were used in construction of Project. Submit certification on form provided by Owner.

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Regulatory Requirements

-1-

01 4100

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 4200 REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Reference standards, definitions, specification format, and industry standards.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Approved: The term "approved," when used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. 2. Directed: The term "directed" is a command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." 3. Experienced: The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully completed a minimum often previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authority having jurisdiction. 4. Furnish: The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. 5. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 6. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to requirements expressed by graphic representations, or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. 7. Install: The term "install" describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 8. Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 9. Project Site: The term "Project site" means the space available for performing construction activities. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and mayor may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. 10. Provide: The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 11. Regulations: The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. 12. Submitted: The terms "submitted," "reported," "satisfactory" and similar words and phrases means submitted to Architect, reported to Architect and similar phrases. 13. Testing Agencies: A "testing agency" is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, or to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 14. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

References

-1-

01 4200

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

References Standards: 1. Specification Format: Specifications will follow MasterFormat 2004 for organizing numbers and titles. (The Construction Specifications Institute, Project Resource Manual/CSI Manual of Practice, 5th Edition. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2005). a. Specification Identifications: 1) The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross referencing in the Contract Documents. 2) Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. b. Specification Language: 1) Specifications should be prepared, with concern and respect for their legal status. Specifications should be Clear, Concise, Correct and Complete. 2) Streamlining: Streamlining is used to list products, materials, reference standards, and other itemized specifications. This technique places the subject first and provides keywords for quick reference c. Sentence Structure: 1) Specifications to be written in the Imperative Mood. a) The verb that clearly defines the action becomes the first word in the sentence. b) The imperative sentence is concise and readily understandable. 2) Streamlining is used to list products, materials, reference standards, and other itemized specifications. This technique places the subject first and provides keywords for quick reference. d. Abbreviated Language: 1) Abbreviations should be used only on drawings and schedules where space is limited. 2) Abbreviations with multiple meanings should be avoided, unless used in different disciplines where their meaning is clear from the context in which they are used. 3) Abbreviations should be limited to five or fewer letters a) The verb that clearly defines the action becomes the first word in the sentence. e. Symbols: 1) Caution should apply to symbols substituted for words or terms. f. Numbers: 1) The use of Arabic numerals rather that words for numbers is recommended. Industry Standards: 1. Except where Contract Documents specify otherwise, construction industry standards will apply and are made a part of Contract Documents by reference. 2. Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards apparently establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer to Architect for decision before proceeding. Quantity or quality level shown or specified will be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for decision before proceeding. 3. Each entity engaged in construction on Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, Contractor will obtain copies directly from publication source. 4. Trade Association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in Contract Documents, are defined to mean association names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents.

C.

AABC AAMA AASHTO

Associated Air Balance Council American Architectural Manufacturers Association American Association of State Highway & Transporta-

Washington Schaumburg Washington

DC IL DC

(202) 737-0202 (847) 303-5664 (202) 624-5800

www.aabchq.com www.aamanet.org www.aashto.org

References

-2-

01 4200

Project # 503-6925-11010101 tion Officials American Architectural Manufacturers Association American association of State Highways and Transportation Officials American Concrete Institute International American Gas Association Air Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute American Institution of Architects American Institute of Steel Construction American Iron & Steel Institute American Institution of Timber Construction Air Movement & Control Association International American National Standards Institute APA-Engineered Wood Association American Petroleum Institute South Coast Air Quality Management District American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, & AirConditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers International ASTM International Architectural Woodwork Institute American Wood Protection Association American Welding Society American Water Works Assoc Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association Brick Industry Association International Certified Floorcovering Installers, Inc. Carpet & Rug Institution Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Door & Hardware Institute Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association. EIFS Industry Members Association FM Global

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake IL DC (847) 303-5774 www.aamanet.org www.transportation.org www.aashto.org (248) 848-3700 (202) 824-7000 (703) 524-8800 (202) 626-7300 (312) 670-2400 (202) 452-7100 (303) 792-9559 (847) 394-0150 (212) 642-4900 (253) 565-6600 (202) 682-8000 (909) 396-2000 (404) 636-8400 www.aci-int.org www.aga.org www.ari.org www.aia.org www.aisc.org www.steel.org www.aitc-glulam.org www.amca.org www.ansi.org www.apawood.org www.api.org www.aqmd.gov www.ashrae.org

AAMA AASHTO

Schamumburg Washington

ACI AGA AHRI AIA AISC AISI AITC AMCA ANSI APA API AQMD ASHRAE

Farmington Hills Washington Arlington Washington Chicago Washington Englewood Arlington Heights New York Tacoma Washington Diamond Bar Atlanta

MI DC VA DC IL DC CO IL NY WA DC CA GA

ASME

New York

NY

(800) 843-2763

www.asme.org

ASTM AWI AWPA AWS AWWA BHMA BIA CFI CRI CRSI CISPI DHI DIPRA EIMA FM

West Conshohocken Potomac Falls Birmingham Miami Denver New York Reston Kansas City Dalton Schaumburg Chattanooga Chantilly Birmingham Morrow Johnston

PA VA AL FL CO NY VA MO GA IL TN VA AL GA RI

(610) 832-9500 (571) 323-3636 (205) 733-4077 (800) 443-9353 (303) 794-7711 (212) 297-2122 (703) 620-0010 (816) 231-4646 (706) 278-3176 (847) 517-1200 (423) 892-0137 (703) 222-2010 (205) 402-8700 (800) 294-3462 (401) 275-3000

www.astm.org www.awinet.org www.awpa.com www.aws.org www.awwa.org www.buildershardware.com www.bia.org www.cfi-installers.org www.carpet-rug.com www.crsi.org www.cispi.org www.dhi.org www.dipra.org www.eima.com www.fmglobal.com

References

-3-

01 4200

Project # 503-6925-11010101 FSC GA GS HPVA ICC ICC-ES ICBO ISO ISSA KCMA LPI MFMA MSS Forest Stewardship Council Gypsum Association Green Seal Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association International Code Council ICC Evaluation Service International Conference of Building Officials International Organization for Standardization International Slurry Surfacing Association Kitchen Cabinet Manufactures Association Lightning Protection Institute Maple Flooring Manufacturers' Association Manufacturer's Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers National Electric Code National Electrical Manufacturer's Association National Fire Protection Association National Fenestration Rating Council NSF International Portland Cement Association Precast / Prestressed Concrete Institute Porcelain Enamel Institute Resilient Floor Covering Institute Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers Steel Deck Institute Steel Door Institute Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's Association Steel Joist Institute Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Steel Stud Manufacturer's Association Tile Council of North America Truss Plate Institute

08.29.11 Bonn, Germany Hyattsville Washington Reston Washington Whittier +49 (0) 228 367 66 0 (301) 277-8686 (202) 872-6400 (703) 435-2900 (888) 422-7233 (562) 699-0543

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake www.fsc.org www.gypsum.org www.greenseal.org www.hpva.org www.iccsafe.org www.icc-es.org (See ICC) www.iso.org

MD DC VA DC CA

Geneva, Switzerland Annapolis Reston Maryville Deerfield Vienna

MD VA MO IL VA

(410) 267-0023 (703) 264-1690 (800) 488-6864 (888) 480-9138 (703) 281-6613

www.slurry.org www.kcma.org www.lightning.org www.maplefloor.org www.mss-hq.com

NAAMM

Glen Ellyn

IL

(630) 942-6591

www.naamm.org

NEC NEMA NFPA NFRC NSF PCA PCI PEI RFCI SCTE SDI SDI SIGMA SJI SMACNA

(from NFPA). Rosslyn Quincy Greenbelt Ann Arbor Skokie Chicago Norcross LaGrange Exton Fox River Grove Westlake Chicago Myrtle Beach Chantilly

VA MA MD MI IL IL GA GA PA IL OH IL SC VA

(703) 841-3200 (800) 344-3555 (301) 589-1776 (734) 769-8010 (847) 966-6200 (312) 786-0300 (770) 676-9366 (706) 882-3833 (800) 542-5040 (847) 458-4647 (440) 899-0010 (312) 644-6610 (843) 293-1995 (703) 803-2980

www.nema.org www.nfpa.org www.nfrc.org www.nsf.org www.cement.org www.pci.org www.porcelainenamel.com www.rfci.com www.scte.org www.sdi.org www.steeldoor.org www.arcat.com www.steeljoist.org www.smacna.org

SPIB SSMA TCNA TPI

Pensacola Glen Ellyn Anderson Alexandria

FL IL SC VA

(850) 434-2611 (630) 942-6592 (864) 646-8453 (703) 683-1010

www.spib.org www.ssma.com www.tileusa.com www.tpinst.org

References

-4-

01 4200

Project # 503-6925-11010101 TPI Turfgrass Producers International (formally American Sod Producers Association) Underwriters Laboratories Window and Door Manufacturer's Association Western Wood Products Association

08.29.11 East Dundee IL (847) 649-5555

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake www.turfgrasssod.org

UL WDMA WWPA

Camas Chicago Portland

WA IL OR

(877) 854-3577 (312) 321-6802 (503) 224-3930

www.ul.com www.nwwda.org www.wwpa.org

D.

CS EPA FCC FS MIL

NIST

OSHA

PS

Federal Government Agencies: 1. Names and titles of federal government standard or specification producing agencies are often abbreviated. Following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in Contract Documents represent names of standard or specification producing agencies of federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. Commercial Standard (U S Washington DC (202) 512-0000 www.doc.gov Department of Commerce) Environmental Protection Washington DC (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov Agency Federal Communications Washington DC (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov Commission Federal Specifications Unit Washington DC (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov (Available from GSA) Military Standardization Philadelphia PA (215) 697-2179 www.dod.gov Documents (U S Department of Defense) National Institute of StanGaithersburg MD (301) 975-4500 www.ts.nist.gov dards and Technology, technology Administration (US Department of Commerce) Occupational Safety & Washington DC 202) 219-8148 www.osha.gov Health Administration (U S Department of Labor) Product Standard of NBS (U Washington DC (202) 512-1800 www.doc.gov S Department of Commerce) Governing Regulations / Authorities: 1. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the Work. 2. Obtain copies of regulations required to be retained at Project Site, available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need for such reference.

E.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

References

-5-

01 4200

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 4301 QUALITY ASSURANCE - QUALIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Related Documents: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. 3. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 4. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E329-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing.

B.

1.3

QUALIFICATIONS A. Qualifications: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements: 1. Fabricator / Supplier / Installer Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. a. Where heading 'VMR (Value Managed Relationship) Suppliers / Installers' is used to identify list of specified suppliers or installers, Owner has established relationships that extend beyond requirements of this Project. No other suppliers / installers will be acceptable. Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified suppliers / installers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. b. Where heading 'Acceptable or Approved Suppliers / Installers / Fabricators' is used to identify list of specified suppliers / installers / fabricators, use only one of listed suppliers / installers / fabricators. No others will be acceptable. c. Acceptable / Approved Suppliers / Installers:

Quality Assurance - Qualifications

-1-

01 4301

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 1) Following areas of the Work have restrictions on sub-bids which may be accepted by Contractor: a) Architectural Woodwork, Sections 06 4114 and 06 4512: Suppliers approved by Architect before bidding. b) Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts, Section 08 4113: VMR, no other Supplier / Installers accepted. c) Ceramic Tiling, Section 09 3013: No other Suppliers accepted. d) Ceramic Tiling, Section 09 3013: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. e) Electrical, Division 26: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. f) HVAC, Division 23: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. g) Painting And Coating, Sections Under 09 9000 heading of Table of Contents: Applicators approved by Architect before bidding. h) Planting, Sections under 32 9000 heading of Table of Contents: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. i) Plumbing, Division 22: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. j) Rough Carpentry, Sections 06 1100, 06 1636, 06 1712, 06 1733, 06 1753, and 06 1800: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. k) Rough Carpentry, Sections 06 1100, 06 1636, 06 1712, 06 1733, 06 1753, and 06 1800: Suppliers approved by Architect before bidding. l) Sisal Wall Coverings, Section 09 7226: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. m) Sound, Division 27: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. n) Underground Sprinklers, Section 32 8423: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. o) Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems, Sections 21 1313: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. 2) Except where above list indicates No other accepted, other installers may apply for approval to participate in bidding for this Project by complying with submitting following information 10 days minimum before bid date: a) Cover letter requesting opportunity to bid Project. b) Evidence that licensing requirements required by AHJ have been complied with and other requirements of relevant portions of bidding documents have been met. c) List of five recently completed projects of similar size and scope of this Project with following information appended for each project: (1) Project name, address, and date of installation. (2) Names, addresses, and other contact information of General Contractor, Architect, and Owner. (3) Three letter of recommendation from satisfied clients. 3) Architect will review submittals which have been properly submitted and identify approved installers by Addendum. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: a. Authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Installer Qualifications: a. Firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Manufacturers Field Services Qualifications: a. Experienced authorized representative of manufacturer to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Professional Engineer Qualifications: a. Professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. -201 4301

08.29.11

Quality Assurance - Qualifications

Project # 503-6925-11010101 7.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

8.

Specialists: a. Certain sections of Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. b. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for activities indicated. c. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. Testing Agency Qualifications: a. Independent Testing Agency with experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1) Testing Laboratory: a) AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) Accreditation Program. b) Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL). c) Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL): Nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. d) National Voluntary Laboratory (NVLAP): Testing Agency accredited according to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Technology Administration, U. S. Department of Commerce Accreditation Program.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Quality Assurance - Qualifications

-3-

01 4301

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 4523 TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. This Section includes testing, inspections, special testing, special inspections, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods as specified hereafter for the Work. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractors quality control procedures to fully comply with Contract Document requirements in all regards. Costs: Costs of initial services for testing and inspection personnel will be paid by Owner unless otherwise noted. 1. If initial tests indicate non-compliance with contract document requirements, any subsequent testing will be performed by same personnel and paid for by Contractor. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 3. Divisions 02 thru 49 Establish responsibility for providing specific testing and inspections and Field Tests and Inspections.

B.

C.

D.

1.3

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions: 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Contract Documents: Engineering and Architectural Drawings and Specifications issued for construction, plus clarification drawings, addenda, approved change orders and contractor designed elements. 4. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 01 4523

B.

Testing and Inspection Services

Project # 503-6925-11010101 5. 6. 7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

21.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. a. Using term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of corresponding generic name. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation. They are not samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which the Work will be judged. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Relative Compaction: Ratio of field dry density as determined by ASTM D6938 or ASTM D2216, and laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C1021-08, Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants.

Testing and Inspection Services

01 4523

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b. c. d. e.

f. g. h.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake ASTM C1077-09b, Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. ASTM C1093-09, Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry. ASTM D3666-09a, Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials. ASTM D3740-08, Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies.

08.29.11

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Testing Agency will submit certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service. Tests and Evaluation Reports: 1. Testing and Inspection Reports: a. Testing Agency or Agencies will prepare logs, test reports, and certificates applicable to specific tests and inspections and deliver copies (or electronic record) distributed as follows: 1) 1 copy to Owners Representative. 2) 1 copy to Architect. 3) 1 copy to Consulting Engineers (Engineer of Record). 4) 1 copy to General Contractor. 5) 1 copy to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (if required). b. Other tests, certificates, and similar documents will be obtained by Contractor and delivered to Owners Representative and Architect in such time as not to delay progress of the Work or final payment therefore. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Testing Agency will submit following prior to commencing the Work: 1) Qualifications of Testing Agency management and personnel designated to project. 2) Testing Agency Written Practice for Quality Assurance. 3) Qualification records for Inspector and non-destructive testing technicians designated for project. 4) Testing Agency non-destructive testing procedures, equipment calibration records, and personnel training records. 5) Testing Agency Quality Control Plan for monitoring and control of testing operations. 6) Welding Inspection Procedures (Structural Steel testing). 7) Bolting Inspection Procedures (Structural Steel testing). 8) Shear Connector Stud Inspection Procedures (Structural Steel testing). 9) Seismic Connections Inspection Procedures (Structural Steel testing). Additional submittal requirements are specified in Individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 49.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Owner or Owners designated representative(s) will perform quality assurance. Owners quality assurance procedures may include observations, inspections, testing, verification, monitoring and any other procedures deemed necessary by Owner to verify compliance with Contract Documents. Owner will employ independent Testing Agencies to perform certain specified testing, as Owner deems necessary. Owners employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve

B.

Testing and Inspection Services

01 4523

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Contractor of Contractors obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

08.29.11

C.

Certification: Product producers and associations, which have instituted approved systems of quality control and which have been approved by document approval agencies, are not required to have further testing. Concrete mixing plants, plants producing fabricated concrete and wood or plywood products certified by agency, lumber, plywood grade marked by approved associates, and materials or equipment bearing underwriters laboratory labels require no further testing and inspection. Written Practice for Quality Assurance: Testing Agency will maintain written practice for selection and administration of inspection personnel, describing training, experience, and examination requirements for qualification and certification of inspection personnel. Written practice will describe testing agency procedures for determining acceptability of structure in accordance with applicable codes, standards, and specifications. Written practice will describe Testing Agency inspection procedures, including general inspection, material controls, visual welding inspection, and bolting inspection.

D.

1.6

QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control will be sole responsibility of Contractor. Contractor will be responsible for testing, coordination, start-up, operational checkout, and commissioning of all items of the Work included in Project. All costs for these services will be included in Contractors cost of the Work. Contractor will assign one employee to be responsible for Quality Control. This individual may have other responsibilities and may be Contractors Project superintendent or Contractors Project Manager. Notify results of all Testing and Inspection performed by Contractors independent Testing Agencies to Architect and Owners Representative within 24 hours of test or inspection having been performed. 1. Testing and Inspection Reports will be distributed as follows: a. 1 copy to Owners Representative. b. 1 copy to Architect. c. 1 copy to Consulting Engineer(s) (Engineer of Record). d. 1 copy to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (if required).

B.

C.

1.7

TESTS AND INSPECTIONS - GENERAL A. Testing specifically identified to be conducted by Owner, will be performed by an independent entity and will be arranged and paid for by Owner. Individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 49 indicate if Owner will provide testing and inspection of the Work of that Section. Owner may engage additional consultants for testing, air balancing, commissioning, or other special services. Activities of any such Owner consultants are in addition to Contractor testing of materials or systems necessary to prove that performance is in compliance with Contract requirements. Contractor must cooperate with persons and firms engaged in these activities. Scheduling Testing Agency: 1. Contractor will coordinate the Work and facilitate timeliness of such testing and inspecting services so as not to delay the Work. 2. Contractor will notify Testing Agency and Architect to schedule tests and / or inspections. a. Architect will notify Owners Representative before each test and / or inspection. For building-wide and/or life safety systems, such as emergency lighting, emergency power uninterruptible power supply systems, fire alarm, fire sprinkler systems, smoke evacuation systems, toxic gas monitoring, capturer exhaust systems, etc. formal start-up inspection will be completed prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection for any area of Project:

B.

C.

D.

E.

Testing and Inspection Services

01 4523

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Manufacturer's representatives and installing contractor will demonstrate both operation and compliance to Owner's agents and consultants. If coordinated and scheduled appropriately by Contractor, these equipment and/or systems inspections may also serve to provide required Owner training, if approved in advance by Owner. Contractor responsible for requesting that Architect arrange for inspection of materials, equipment, and work prior to assembly or enclosure that would make materials, equipment, or work inaccessible for inspection and at other times as may be required.

08.29.11

1.8

ARCHITECTS RESPONSIBILTY A. Architect Duties: 1. Notify Owners Representative before each test and/or inspection.

1.9

CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY A. Owners employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of Contractors obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Tests and inspections that are not explicitly assigned to Owner are responsibility of Contractor. Cooperate with Testing Agency(s) performing required inspections, tests, and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify Testing Agency before operations to allow assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: 1. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor, equipment, and facilities deemed necessary by Testing Agency to facilitate inspections and tests at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or helping Testing Agency in taking samples. 3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. 4. Providing Testing Agency with preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by Testing Agency. Contractor will integrate Owners independent Testing Agency services within Baseline Project Schedule and with other Project activities. For any requested inspection, Contractor will complete prior inspections to ensure that items are ready for inspection. All Work is subject to testing and inspection and verification of correct operation prior to 100% payment to Contractor of line item(s) pertaining to that aspect of the Work. For Mechanical Equipment, inspection and documented approval of individual equipment and/or system(s) must be accomplished prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection for any area affected by said equipment and/or system. 1. Contractor will perform thorough checkout of operations with manufacturers representatives prior to requesting formal inspection by Owner. Contractor must notify Owners Representative, in advance, as to when manufacturers representative is scheduled to arrive at Site. Comply: 1. Upon completion of Testing Agencys inspection, testing, sample-taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. 2. Comply with Contract Documents in making such repairs. Data: Furnish records, drawings, certificates, and similar data as may be required by testing and inspection personnel to assure compliance with Contract Documents.

B. C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

Testing and Inspection Services

01 4523

Project # 503-6925-11010101 J.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Defective Work (Non-Conforming Work): Non-conforming Work as covered in General Conditions applies, but is not limited to following requirements: 1. Where results of inspections, tests, or similar services show that the Work does not comply with Contract Document requirements, correct deficiencies in the Work promptly to avoid Work delays. 2. Where testing personnel take cores or cut-outs to verify compliance, repair prior to acceptance. 3. Contractor responsible for any and all costs incurred resulting from inspection that was scheduled prematurely or retesting due to failed tests. 4. Remove and replace any Work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to Owner. 5. Should test return unacceptable results, Contractor will bear all costs of retesting and reinspection as well as cost of all material consumed by testing, and replacement of unsatisfactory material and/or workmanship. Protection: 1. Protect construction exposed by or for quality assurance and quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. Scheduling: Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. 1. Schedule testing and inspections in advance so as not to delay the Work and to eliminate any need to uncover Work for testing or inspection. 2. Notify Testing Agency and Architect as noted in Sections in Divisions 02 thru 49 prior to any time required for such services. 3. Incorporate adequate time for performance of all inspections and correction of noted deficiencies. 4. Schedule sequence of activities to accommodate required services with minimum of delay. 5. Schedule sequence of activities to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspections. Test and Inspection Log: 1. Provide system of tracking all field reports, describing items noted, and resolution of each item. Prepare record of tests and inspections. Include following: a. Date test or inspection was conducted. b. Description of the Work tested or inspected. c. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. d. Identification of Testing Agency or inspector conducting test or inspection. 2. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

08.29.11

K.

L.

M.

1.10 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Testing Agency, including independent testing laboratories, will be licensed and authorized to operate in jurisdiction in which Project is located. 1. Approved Testing Agency Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 apply. Testing and Inspection Services: 1. Testing Agency will not release, revoke, alter, or increase Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 2. Testing Agency will not give direction or instruction to Contractor. 3. Testing Agency will have full authority to see that the Work is performed in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and directions of Owners Representative and/or Architect. 4. Testing Agency will not provide additional testing and inspection services beyond scope of Work without prior approval of Owners Representative and / or Architect. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Independent Testing Agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual specification Sections will cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties and will provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.

B.

C.

Testing and Inspection Services

01 4523

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Testing Agency will test or obtain certificates of tests of materials and methods of construction, as described herein or elsewhere in technical specification. Testing Agency will provide management, personnel, equipment, and services necessary to perform testing functions as outlined in this section. Testing Agency must have experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated by ASTM standards and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. Testing Agency will comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, ASTM D3666, ASTM D3740, and other relevant ASTM standards. Testing Agency must calibrate all testing equipment at reasonable intervals (minimum yearly) with accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. Welding Procedure Review: Testing Agency will provide review and approval or rejection of all welding procedures to be used and will verify compliance with all reference standard requirements.

08.29.11

D.

Testing and Inspection Reports: 1. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected the Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 2. Laboratory Reports: Testing Agency will furnish reports of materials and construction as required, including: a. Description of method of test. b. Identification of sample and portion of the Work tested. 1) Description of location in the Work of sample. 2) Time and date when sample was obtained. 3) Weather and climatic conditions at time when sample was obtained. c. Evaluation of results of tests including recommendations for action. 3. Inspection Reports: Testing Agency will furnish Inspection at Site reports for each site visit documenting activities, observations, and inspections. Include notation of weather and climatic conditions, time and date conditions and status of the Work, actions taken, and recommendations or evaluation of the Work. 4. Reporting Testing and Inspection (Conforming Work): a. Submit testing and inspection reports as required within 24 hours of test or inspection having been performed. 5. Reporting Testing and Inspection Defective Work (Non-Conforming Work): a. Testing Agency, upon determination of irregularities, deficiencies observed or test failure(s) observed in the Work during performance of its services of test or inspection having been performed, will: 1) Verbally notify results to Architect, Contractor, and Owners Representative within one hour of test or inspection having been performed (if Defective Work (NonConforming Work) is incorporated into project). 2) Submit written inspection report and test results as required within 24 hours of test or inspection having been performed. 6. Final Report: a. Submit final report of tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which identify unresolved deficiencies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Field Tests and Inspections requirements are described in Field Quality Control in Divisions 02 thru 49 Sections.

Testing and Inspection Services

01 4523

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 END OF SECTION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Testing and Inspection Services

01 4523

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 4546 DUCT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Test, balance, and adjust air duct systems as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 3. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 4. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 5. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 6. Division 23: a. Completing installation and start-up of mechanical systems, and changing sheaves, belts, and dampers as required for correct balance. b. Maintain HVAC system and equipment in full operation each working day of testing, balancing, and adjusting.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 2. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 3. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 4. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 5. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 6. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 7. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization.

Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing

-1-

01 4546

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 8. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. 9. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 10. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. 11. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

B.

Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for Testing Agencies): a. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Assisting Testing Agency in testing and balancing of mechanical system. Scheduling: 1. Schedule this work in cooperation with other Sections involved and to comply with completion date for test, balance, and adjust air duct systems as described in Contract Documents. 2. Contact Testing Agency and coordinate: a. One inspection when 60 percent of ductwork is installed. b. One inspection when 90 percent of equipment and ductwork is installed. 3. Contact Testing Agency and coordinate date(s) for test and balance work when following is completed: a. HVAC and exhaust systems including installation of specialties, devices, and new filters. b. Proper function of control system components including electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water reset, and fire and freeze stats has been verified. c. Automatic temperature controls have been calibrated and set for design operating conditions. d. Verification of proper thermostat calibration and setting of control components such as static pressure controllers and other devices that may need set points changed during process of balancing system. 4. If, in opinion of Testing Agency, systems are not ready for test and balance, reschedule as required.

B.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Preliminary Report(s): 1) Four copies to be given to Owners Representative. b. Final Report : 1) Four copies to be given to Owners Representative. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Evaluation Final Report of testing, balancing, and adjusting air duct systems. Bind approved copy of Testing and Evaluation Report in Operations And Maintenance Manual for Division 23.

B.

Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing

-2-

01 4546

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Qualifications: 1. Approved Testing Agency. Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: a. Testing Agency shall specialize in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating, and cooling systems to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment, air distribution, and exhaust systems. b. Testing Agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five years of specialized experience in air and hydronic system balancing. c. Testing Agency shall provide testing under direct supervision of qualified heating and ventilating engineer. d. Neither Architect's engineering consultant nor anyone performing work on this Project under other Sections of Division 23 shall be permitted to do this work. 2. Testing and Inspection. a. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for testing, balancing, and adjusting air duct systems: 1) See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Air System Testing, Adjusting, And Balance: a. Inspections and site visits. (For paragraph a thru c, note deficiencies, if any, that needs to be corrected and report this to Owners Representative, Architect, and Mechanical Engineer): 1) One inspection when ductwork installation is 60% complete. 2) One inspection when ductwork is installation is 90% complete. 3) One inspection when potable hot and cold water system is 90% complete. 4) Site visit for test and balance. Before commencing test and balance, perform an inspection to verify 100% completion of system. Confirm completion of work, correction of previously noted deficiencies, and look for new deficiencies not noted in previous inspections. If the work is complete, then proceed with test and balance. If the work is not complete and ready for test and balance, inform Contractor and submit an invoice to Owners Representative for compensation for travel time, expenses, and time on site. Report deficiencies or incomplete work to Owners Representative, Architect, and Mechanical Engineer. 5) Additional site visits (beyond those set forth above) to complete the work after issues are resolved may be needed and will be paid for separately from compensation for services set forth in this Agreement, pursuant to hourly rates and conditions set forth in Attachment A. b. Checklist for Inspections and site visits: 1) Pre-Startup Inspection use for inspections and site visits a thru d in paragraph 1 above. All pertinent items shall be checked, including but not limited to following: a) Removal of shipping blocks and stops. b) Vibration isolators alignment and adjustment. c) Flexible connections properly installed and aligned. d) Safety controls, safety valves and high or low limits in operation. e) All systems properly filled. f) Filters in place and seal provided around edges. g) Filters and strainers are clean. h) Fire damper installation and operation, and access door installation. i) Installation of all gauges on equipment. j) Control system is operating.

Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing

-3-

01 4546

Project # 503-6925-11010101

c.

d.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake k) All dampers, valves, and operators are properly installed and operating. l) All ductwork is installed and sealed. m) Voltage to unit matches nameplate voltage. 2) First Run Inspection use for inspections and site visits d and e in paragraph 1 above. Recheck items in Pre-Startup list, and check for following items: a) Excessive vibration or noise. b) Loose components. c) Initial control settings. d) Motor amperages. e) Heat buildup in motors. f) Control system is calibrated and functioning as required. 3) System Operation Inspection use for inspections and site visits d and e in paragraph 1 above. Observe mechanical systems under operation for sufficient amount of time to ensure proper operation in all running modes. Check following items periodically. a) Filters and strainers. b) Filters and strainers. c) Check for system leaks at seals and valves. Performance Requirements: 1) Testing and balancing in complete accordance with Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Standards for Field Measurement & Instructions, Form P1266, Volume I. 2) Noise level in chapel and / or cultural hall shall not exceed NC 35 with all HVAC equipment operating in full or second stage cooling mode. Site tests: Air Test and Balancing Procedure: 1) Instruments used by Consultant shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. 2) All supply air and return air fans in all HVAC zone systems, energy recovery ventilators, and exhaust fans in building shall be operating when final setup of all units is performed. 3) Perform tests at high and low speeds of multi-speed systems and single speed systems. 4) Perform following testing and balancing functions in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council National Standards. a) Fan Speeds - Air handling units (with variable pitch pulleys and sheaves): Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements. b) Fan Speeds - Furnaces (with direct drive motors): Set fan speed to lowest possible setting that will achieve design CFM requirements. Adjust down from Contractor setting, if necessary. Adjust low voltage fan speed jumpers (provided and installed by installing contractor) as necessary to achieve design cooling air flow at lowest possible setting. An exception to this would be when furnace is variable speed blower for dehumidification applications. c) Current And Voltage: Measure and record motor current and voltage. d) Pitot-Tube Traverse Method: (1) Make measurements in duct where velocity is uniform, 7-1/2 duct diameters downstream and 2 duct diameters minimum upstream from any turbulence, i.e., elbow, damper, take-off, etc. (2) Perform pitot-tube traverse of outdoor ventilation air duct serving each piece of air moving equipment. (3) Where single outdoor ventilation air trunk duct serves multiple pieces of equipment, perform pitot-tube traverse of duct branch serving each piece of equipment as well as pitot-tube traverse of total air flow in trunk with all pieces of equipment operating. e) Where pitot-tube traverse is not possible or if pitot-tube traverse is unreliable, flow hood measurement over exterior intake louver or grille is acceptable for measuring outdoor ventilation air. f) Use proportionate method of air balance leaving fan at lowest possible speed and at least one branch balance damper fully open. 5) Static Pressure: Test and record system static pressures, including suction and discharge static pressure of each fan.

08.29.11

Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing

-4-

01 4546

Project # 503-6925-11010101

e.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 6) Air Temperature: Take wet and dry bulb air temperatures on entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry bulb temperatures shall be taken on entering and leaving side of each heating unit. 7) Zone Ducts: Adjust zone ducts to within design CFM requirements. At least one zone balancing damper shall be completely open. 8) Branch Ducts: Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open. 9) Tolerances: Test and balance all fans, zone ducts, registers, diffusers etc. to + or 5% of design. When multiple registers and/or diffusers serve common space tolerances can be + or 10% for outlet to outlet balance, but total air flow in space shall be + or 5% of design requirements. 10) Identification: Identify location and area of each grille, diffuser, register, and terminal box. Record on air outlet data sheets. 11) Description: Record size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register on air outlet data sheets. 12) Drafts: Adjust diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts. For high sidewall supply air diffusers install horizontal blade core to direct air flow upward 15 and set adjustable vertical blades to spread air flow horizontally and evenly in fan pattern. 13) Permanently mark all outside air, supply air, and return air damper positions after balancing has been completed. 14) Smoke testing: Smoke testing, or some other approved means, may be required to determine leak locations if air balance report indicates that any system's CFM total is less than 90 percent of design CFM. Prior to test, verify that system's duct joints have been sealed as specified and that air moving device in question is supplying required design system air flow. Mechanical Engineer will approve test method required. If smoke test is selected, use following procedure. Provide necessary precautions to protect those performing or observing test from being exposed to smoke. a) Use zinc chloride smoke candles, titanium tetrachloride ampules or sticks, or other devices acceptable to Mechanical engineer to generate smoke. b) Close openings in duct except for one opening at farthest end of duct run. c) Circulate smoke at pressurized condition of 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum water gauge static pressure. d) Report findings to mechanical engineer in writing. Air System Test and Evaluation Report: 1) Record test data on AABC standard forms or facsimile. 2) Preliminary Report: Provide and deliver four copies of complete data for evaluation and approval to Owner. 3) Final report: Provide and deliver complete four copies of final report to Owner prior to project Substantial Completion date. 4) Complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. Print logs, data, and records on white bond paper bound together in report form. 5) Certified accurate and complete by Consultants certified test and balance engineer. 6) Contain following general data in format selected by Consultant: a) Project Number. b) Project Title. c) Project Location. d) Project Architect and Mechanical Engineer. e) Consultant and Certified Engineer. f) Contractor and mechanical sub-contractor. g) Dates tests were performed. h) Certification Document. i) Report Forms similar to AABC Standard format. 7) Report shall include following: a) Instrumentation List including type, model, manufacturer, serial number, and calibration dates. b) HVAC zone identification to include reduced ductwork floor plan from project documents with outlets and inlets numbered to match written test and balance report. This page may be oversized but it should fold up neatly within standard 81/2 x 11 report paper size. c) Record following for each piece of air handling equipment: -501 4546

08.29.11

Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing

Project # 503-6925-11010101 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Manufacturer, model number, and serial number. Design and manufacture rated data. Actual CFM. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. Outdoor-ventilation-air and return-air total CFM. Final RPM of each motor or speed tap. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model, size, number of grooves and center distance. Belt size and quantity.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Heating, ventilating, and cooling systems and equipment shall be in full operation and continue in operation during each working day of testing and balancing.

END OF SECTION

Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing

-6-

01 4546

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 5100 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Temporary Utilities.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Where necessary, engage appropriate local utility companies to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of service, provide remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company's recommendations. 1. Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 3. Arrange with utility company and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 4. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 5. Obtain construction easements necessary to bring temporary and/or permanent utilities to site. 6. Use qualified personnel for installation and maintenance of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with the Work of Owner or other Contractors on Project Site. Relocate and modify facilities as required. 7. Pay cost and use charges for temporary facilities and utilities. Prepare schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At earliest feasible time and when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. Keep temporary utilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or allow them to interfere with progress of The Work. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on Project site. Limit availability of temporary utilities to essential and intended uses to reduce waste and abuse. Maintain utilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. Remove each temporary utility and control when need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of permanent utility, or by Substantial Completion. Complete permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary utility. Repair damaged work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that make up temporary utilities are property of Contractor.

B.

C.

D. E.

F.

Temporary Utilities

-1-

01 5100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake By Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent utilities used during construction period, including but not limited to: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subjected to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dimmed by substantial hours of use.

08.29.11

1.3

TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER A. Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period.

1.4

TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to protect against predictable and controllable fire losses. At a minimum, provide and maintain in working order two Standard UL Labeled ABC all-purpose 10 lb fire extinguishers. Do not incorporate these extinguishers into final Project. 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.

1.5

HEATING, COOLING, AND VENTILATING: A. Install and operate temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating units including fuel, temporary piping, fittings, wiring, and connections necessary to provide environmental conditions specified for various portions of the Work. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient conditions required and reduce consumption of energy. Repair damage to building and contents caused by cold, heat, dampness, and/or heating, cooling, and ventilating equipment. Select equipment that will not have harmful effect on completed installations or on elements being installed. Maintain safe conditions for use of temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating systems including, but not limited to, following requirements: 1. Operate equipment according to equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide fresh air ventilation required by equipment manufacturer. 3. Keep temperature of fuel containers stabilized. 4. Secure fuel containers from overturning. 5. Operate equipment away from combustible materials. Permanent mechanical system may be operated subject to the following conditions: 1. Do not operate system when work causing air-borne dust is occurring or when dust caused by such work is present without installation of temporary filtering system approved by Architect. 2. Operate system at no cost to Owner, including cost of fuel. 3. Assume all responsibility and risk for operation of system. 4. Return permanent mechanical equipment to 'like-new' condition for Substantial Completion Inspection.

B.

C.

D.

Temporary Utilities

-2-

01 5100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.6 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Install and operate temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

1.7

TEMPORARY TELEPHONES A. Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout construction period. Contractor will pay for Local calls. Party making call will pay for long-distance and toll calls. At each telephone, post list of important telephone numbers.

B. C.

1.8

TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Temporary Utilities

-3-

01 5100

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 5200 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Construction Facilities.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. B. Prepare schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary facility. Keep temporary facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or allow them to interfere with progress of The Work. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on Project site. Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Remove each temporary facility when need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of permanent facility, or by Substantial Completion. Complete permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that make up temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2. By Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period.

C. D.

1.3

FIELD OFFICES A. Provide and maintain insulated, weather tight temporary office of sufficient size to accommodate Contractor's personnel at Project site and for use by Owner, Architect and Subcontractors. 1. Keep office clean and orderly. 2. Heat and cool office as needed. 3. Furnish office with locking door, light(s), table(s), bench(es), rack(s) for drawings, telephone, and FAX machine. 4. Make office available for progress meetings. 5. Provide an operable fire extinguisher in facility. 6. Provide hardhats for Owners Representatives for site visits. If Owner agrees to permit removal of temporary office before Substantial Completion, Contractor may use a room as an office after temporary office is removed. Equip room as specified above and restore to 'like-new' condition before Substantial Completion.

B.

1.4

SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide temporary sanitary toilet. Service and maintain temporary toilet in a clean, sanitary condition.

Construction Facilities

-1-

01 5200

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Construction Facilities

-2-

01 5200

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 5400 CONSTRUCTION AIDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Construction Aids.

1.2

SCAFFOLDING, PLATFORMS, STAIRS, ETC A. Furnish and maintain equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, platforms, scaffolds, hoists, runways, derricks, chutes, and elevators as required for proper execution of The Work. Apparatus, equipment, and construction shall meet requirements of applicable laws and safety regulations.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Construction Aids

-1-

01 5400

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 5600 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

1.2

GENERAL A. Protection Of Existing Improvements: Protect streets, private roads, and sidewalks, including overhead protection where required. Repair damage to existing improvements caused by construction activities. Protection Of Adjacent Property: Provide necessary protection for adjacent property and lateral support thereof.

B.

1.3

TEMPORARY BARRICADES A. B. Comply with standards and code requirements in erecting barricades, warning signs, and lights. Take necessary precautions to protect persons, including members of the public, from injury or harm.

1.4

TEMPORARY FENCING A. Before construction begins, install 6 foot high enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where shown on Drawings. If not shown on Drawings, enclose entire site or portion sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

1.5

TEMPORARY SECURITY BARRIERS A. Install temporary enclosures of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and other violations of security. Secure materials and equipment stored on site. Secure building at the end of each work day. Maintain exterior building security until Substantial Completion.

B. C. D.

1.6

TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Protection: 1. Before commencing site work, build and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and vegetation as shown on the drawings. 2. Individual trees will have protective fencing built beyond drip line. 3. Build protective fencing around groups of trees and other vegetation as indicated on Drawings. -101 5600

Temporary Barriers and Enclosures

Project # 503-6925-11010101 4. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Keep areas within protective fencing undisturbed and do not use for any purpose.

08.29.11

Maintenance: 1. Maintain existing tree, shrubs, and vegetation as indicated in Contract Documents: a. Remove and replace vegetation that dies or is damaged beyond repair due to construction activities. b. Damage to any tree, shrub, or vegetation that has been indicated to remain and be protected, will have a cost associated with it. This includes branches, trunk and root systems: 1) Trees: $1,000.00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Temporary Barriers and Enclosures

-2-

01 5600

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 5700 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Temporary Controls.

1.2

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Take precautions necessary to prevent erosion and transportation of soil downstream, to adjacent properties, and into on-site or off-site drainage systems. Develop, install, and maintain an erosion control plan if required by law. Repair and correct damage caused by erosion.

B. C.

1.3

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and reduce possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result: 1. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. 2. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near site. Provide protection against weather (rain, winds, storms, frost, or heat) to maintain all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage. Protect excavation, trenches, and building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water: 1. For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with requirements of applicable local regulations. Where feasible, use permanent facilities. 2. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. Comply with governing ordinances relating to weed control and removal.

B.

C.

D.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Temporary Controls

-1-

01 5700

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 5800 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Project Identification.

1.2

TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE A. Contractor may, at its option, erect a temporary project identification sign. 1. Sign may be free-standing or attached to temporary field office or storage shed. 2. No other signs or advertisements are allowed on building site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Project Identification

-1-

01 5800

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 6100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Common Product Requirements.

1.2

GENERAL A. Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and, unless otherwise indicated, new and unused at time of installation. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended use and effect. Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on building exterior. 1. Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Provide permanent nameplates on items of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. Nameplate will contain following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. Where specifications describe a product or assembly by specifying exact characteristics required, with or without use of brand or trade name, provide product or assembly that provides specified characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by manufacturer for application described. General overall performance of product is implied where product is specified for specific application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by manufacturer's certification of performance. Where specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select product that complies with standards, codes or regulations specified. Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, Architect's decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily. Where no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily nor complies with other specified requirements, refer to Architect. Where specified product requirements include phrase ` . . . as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures . . . ' or similar phrase, select product and manufacturer that comply with other specified requirements. Architect will select color, pattern, and texture from product line selected.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

Common Product Requirements

-1-

01 6100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 H.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Remove and replace products and materials not specified in Contract Documents but installed in the Work with specified products and materials at no additional cost to Owner and for no increase in Contract time.

08.29.11

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Common Product Requirements

-2-

01 6100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Product Options.

1.2

GENERAL A. Product Selection: 1. When option of selecting between two or more products is given, product selected will be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Non-conforming work as covered in Article 12.3 of General Conditions applies, but is not limited, to use of non-specified products or manufacturers. Product selection is governed by Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include: 1. Substitutions And Equal Products: a. Generally speaking, substitutions for specified products and systems, as defined in the Uniform Commercial Code, are not acceptable. However, equal products may be approved upon compliance with Contract Document requirements. b. Approved Products / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers: 1) Category One: a) Owner has established Value Managed Relationships that extend beyond requirements of this Project. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. b) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified manufacturers / suppliers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. 2) Category Two: a) Owner has established National Contracts that contain provisions extending beyond requirements of this Project. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. b) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified manufacturers / suppliers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. 3) Category Three: a) Specified products are provided to Church Projects under a National Account Program. Use these products to preserve advantages that accrue to Owner from those programs. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. 4) Category Four: a) Provide only specified products available from manufacturers listed. No substitutions, private-labeled, or equal products, or mixing of manufacturers products is allowed on this Project. b) In Sections where lists recapitulating Manufacturers previously mentioned in Section are included under heading Manufacturers or Approved Manufacturers, this is intended as a convenience to Contractor as a listing of contact information -101 6200

B.

C.

Product Options

Project # 503-6925-11010101

c.

d.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake only. It is not intended that all manufacturers in list may provide products where specific products and manufacturers are listed elsewhere in Section. Acceptable Products / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers: 1) Type One: Use specified products / manufacturers unless approval to use other products / manufacturers has been obtained from Architect by Addendum. 2) Type Two: Use specified products / manufacturers unless approval to use other products and manufacturers has been obtained from Architect in writing before installing or applying unlisted or private-labeled products. 3) Use Equal Product Approval Request Form to request approval of equal products, manufacturers, or suppliers before bidding or before installation, as noted in individual Sections. Quality / Performance Standard Products / Manufacturers: 1) Class One: Use specified product / manufacturer or equal product from specified manufacturers only. 2) Class Two: Use specified product / manufacturer or equal product from any manufacturer. 3) Products / manufacturers used shall conform to Contract Document requirements.

08.29.11

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Product Options

-2-

01 6200

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 6400 OWNER - FURNISHED PRODUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Owner-Furnished Products. Install items furnished by Owner or receive and store in safe condition items purchased directly by Owner according to requirements of Contract Documents: 1. Baby Changing Station. See Section 10 2814. 2. Display Cases. See Section 10 1200. 3. Fixed Chalkboards. See Section 10 1113. 4. Fixed Markerboards. See Section 10 1116. 5. Fixed Tackboards. See Section 10 1123. 6. Interior Signage. See Section 10 1495. 7. Projection Screens. See Section 11 5213. 8. Rostrum Casework. See Section 06 4115. 9. Serving Area Appliances. See Section 11 3114. 10. Volleyball Equipment. See Section 11 6626. 11. Wall Padding. See Section 11 6626. 12. Windows. See Section 08 5113 or 08 5313.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Review 'Contractor Notification Report' listing Owner-furnished products to be delivered for Project: a. Review delivery dates and vendor lead times for each item and coordinate with construction schedule. Immediately report recommended changes to Owners Purchasing Coordinator listed in Contractor Notification Report. Contact vendors directly if changes to delivery dates become necessary during construction. b. Report problems in coordinating delivery dates with construction schedule to Architect and Owners Purchasing Coordinator. 2. Receive and unload Owner-furnished materials and products. a. Provide labor and equipment necessary to receive, unload, and store materials and products. b. Verify that number of packages received matches number listed on bill of lading. c. Check for external damage. d. Note discrepancies between pieces received and pieces listed on bill of lading as well as instances of visible damage on bill of lading before signing. Include Project Name and Project Number on bill of lading e. Store and protect deliveries. Report deliveries made outside of delivery schedule to Owners Purchasing Coordinator. 3. Within 24 hours of delivery: a. Open and inspect each piece of freight delivered. Note concealed damage not observed at time of delivery. b. Compare 'Contractor Notification Report' with packing slips. Note discrepancies in number, size, color, model numbers, etc. c. Deliver bills of lading on which loss or damage is recorded, or copy, to Owners Purchasing Coordinator together with report of concealed damage and discrepancies.

Owner-Furnished Products

-1-

01 6400

Project # 503-6925-11010101

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake d. Notify Owners Purchasing Coordinator immediately of damage and discrepancies. As directed by Owner, either repair or replace shortages and damaged items not recorded and reported as specified above at no additional cost to Owner.

08.29.11

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Owner-Furnished Products

-2-

01 6400

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 6600 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling Requirements.

1.2

GENERAL A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.

1.3

DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule delivery to reduce long-term storage at site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

B.

C.

D.

1.4

STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Store products at site in manner that will simplify inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store heavy materials away from Project structure so supporting construction will not be endangered. Store products subject to damage by elements above ground, under cover in weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

B. C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Delivery, Storage, and Handling Requirements

-1-

01 6600

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 7300 EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for governing Execution of the Work.

1.2

COMMON INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations to extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. Notify Architect of conflicts between Manufacturers installation instructions and Contract Document requirements. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure work true to line and level. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located, and aligned with other Work. Allow for expansion and building movement. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to Architect for final decision. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure best possible results. Isolate each part of completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to reduce necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not shown, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry or local codes for that application. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to Architect for final decision.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Execution

-1-

01 7300

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 7400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Cleaning and Waste Management as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Coordination of responsibilities for waste management. 2. Section 01 6400: Waste removal of Owner furnished products. 3. In addition to standards described in this section, comply with all requirements for cleaning-up as described in various other Sections of these Specifications.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Asphalt Pavement, Brick, and Concrete (ABC) Rubble: Rubble that contains only weathered (cured) asphalt pavement, clay bricks and attached mortar normally used in construction, or concrete that may contain rebar. The rubble shall not be mixed with, or contaminated by, another waster or debris. 2. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. 3. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. 4. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 6. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. 7. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PROGRESS CLEANING A. B. C. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Keep premises broom clean during progress of the Work. Keep site and adjoining streets reasonably clean. If necessary, sprinkle rubbish and debris with water to suppress dust.

Cleaning and Waste Management

-1-

01 7400

Project # 503-6925-11010101 D.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake During handling and installation, protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from soiling, damage, or deterioration until Substantial Completion. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure ability to operate without damaging effects.

08.29.11

E.

F.

Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction period. Before and during application of painting materials, clear area where such work is in progress of debris, rubbish, and building materials that may cause dust. Sweep floors and vacuum as required and take all possible steps to keep area dust free. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to avoid damage and deterioration. Place extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become Owner's property as directed by Owner or Architect. Construction Waste Management And Disposal: 1. Remove waste materials and rubbish caused by employees, Subcontractors, and contractors under separate contract with Owner and dispose of legally. Remove unsuitable or damaged materials and debris from building and from property. a. Provide adequate waste receptacles and dispose of materials when full. b. Properly store volatile waste and remove daily. c. Do not deposit waste into storm drains, sanitary sewers, streams, or waterways. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. 2. Do not burn waste materials or build fires on site. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property.

G.

H. I.

J.

3.2

FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately before Substantial Completion, thoroughly clean building and area where The Work was performed. Remove all rubbish from under and about building, landscaped areas and parking lot and leave building and Project Site ready for occupancy by Owner. Comply with individual manufacturer's cleaning instructions. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program, including but not limited to: 1. Interior Cleaning: a. Clean inside glazing, exercising care not to scratch glass. b. Remove marks, stains, fingerprints and dirt. c. Clean and polish woodwork and finish hardware. d. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. e. Clean plumbing fixtures and tile work. Remove spots, soil or paint. f. Clean surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean light fixtures and lamps. g. Clean other fixtures and equipment and remove stains, paint, dirt, and dust. h. Remove temporary floor protection and clean floors. 2. Exterior Cleaning: a. Clean outside glazing, exercising care not to scratch glass. b. Remove marks, stains, and dirt from exterior surfaces. c. Clean and polish finish hardware. d. Remove temporary protection systems. e. Clean dirt, mud, and other foreign material from paving, sidewalks, and gutters. -201 7400

B. C.

Cleaning and Waste Management

Project # 503-6925-11010101 f. g.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Clean drop inlets, through-curb drains, and other drainage structures. Remove trash, debris, and foreign material from landscaped areas.

END OF SECTION

Cleaning and Waste Management

-3-

01 7400

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Closeout Procedures.

1.2

GENERAL A. Schedule closeout procedures in the three weeks before expiration of Contract Time. Weeks will be marked by two Architects weekly visits before Final Closeout Review, Final Closeout Review, and expiration of Contract Time. Date of Substantial Completion shall fall within week between Architects final weekly visit and Final Closeout Review. Date of Substantial Completion shall not occur until Construction Schedule shows completion of construction work, unless agreed to by Architect and included on Certificate of Substantial Completion.

B.

1.3

PRELIMINARY CLOSEOUT REVIEWS A. Confirm with Architect when Substantial Completion of The Work will be achieved. 1. Final three Architects weekly visits will serve as Preliminary Closeout Reviews to determine if Final Closeout Review will occur as scheduled and that Substantial Completion of the Work will be achieved by that date. 2. By final weekly Architect visit, notify Owner and Architect of date when Substantial Completion of The Work will be achieved. Arrange with Architect date for Final Closeout Review to confirm Substantial Completion.

B.

1.4

CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Before Final Closeout Review: 1. Deliver Closeout Submittals to Architect. 2. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items as required by the Contract Documents. 3. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of Owner's maintenance personnel as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. 5. Complete final cleaning requirements.

1.5

FINAL CLOSEOUT REVIEW A. B. Participate in Final Closeout Review. When Owner and Architect have confirmed that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of The Work, Owner, Architect, and Contractor will execute Certificate of Substantial Completion that contains: -101 7700

Closeout Procedures

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Date of Substantial Completion. Punch List of Work not yet accepted. Amount to be withheld for completion of Punch List work. Time period for completion of Punch List work. Amount of liquidated damages set forth in Supplementary Conditions to be assessed if Contractor fails to complete Punch List work within time set forth in Certificate.

C.

Final Acceptance Conference: 1. Notify Architect in writing when work on Punch List has been completed. 2. Arrange with Architect date and time for Final Acceptance Conference. 3. When Owner and Architect have confirmed that Contractor has completed Punch List work, Architect will issue letter to Owner authorizing final payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Closeout Procedures

-2-

01 7700

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Closeout Submittals.

1.2

GENERAL A. B. Workmanship bonds, final certifications, equipment check-out sheets, and similar documents. Releases enabling Owner unrestricted use of The Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. Project photographs, damage or settlement survey, and similar record information required by Contract Documents.

C.

1.3

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operations And Maintenance Manuals that include: 1. Copy of Soils Report. 2. Copy of complete Project Manual including Addenda, Modifications as defined in General Conditions, and other interpretations issued during construction. a. Mark these documents to show variations in actual Work performed in comparison with text of specifications and Modifications. Show substitutions, selection of options, and similar information, particularly on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. b. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 3. Operations and maintenance submittals required by Contract Documents. 4. Certifications required by Contract Documents. 5. Copies of warranties required by Contract Documents. 6. Testing and Inspection Reports required by Contract Documents.

1.4

WARRANTIES A. When written guarantees beyond one year after substantial completion are required by Contract Documents, secure such guarantees and warranties properly addressed and signed in favor of Owner. Include these documents in Operations & Maintenance Manuals specified above. Delivery of guarantees and warranties will not relieve Contractor from obligations assumed under other provisions of Contract Documents.

B.

1.5

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect from deterioration and loss in secure, fire-resistive location. Provide access to record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. -101 7800

Closeout Submittals

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Maintain clean, undamaged set of Drawings. Mark set to show actual installation where installation varies from the Work as originally shown. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to Owner, but was not shown on Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.

08.29.11

1.6

SPARE PARTS A. Provide items that are indicated in individual Sections.

1.7

EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS A. Provide items that are indicated in individual Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Closeout Submittals

-2-

01 7800

D I V I S I O N 02: E X I S T I N G C O N D I T I O N S
02 4000 DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING

02 4113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 6000 CONTAMINATED SITE MATERIAL REMOVAL

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

02 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 02 4113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Demolish and remove portions of existing site facilities as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Sections.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Identify abandoned utility and service lines and capping locations on record drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Notify corporations, companies, individuals, and local authorities owning conduits running to property. 1. Protect and maintain conduits, drains, sewers, pipes, and wires that are to remain on the property. 2. Arrange for removal of wires running to and on property. Remove pipes and sewers in accordance with instructions of above owners.

3.2

PERFORMANCE A. B. Execute work in orderly and careful manner, with due consideration for neighbors and the public. Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in completed work. Coordinate with Owner for equipment and materials to be removed by Owner. Concrete And Paving Removal: 1. Saw cut joints between material to be removed and material to remain to full depth. 2. Hand-excavate trench 12 inches (300 mm) wide and 16 inches (400 mm) deep along concrete or paving to be removed. Cut roots encountered with saw, axe, or pruner. Do not cut roots with excavating equipment. Remove roots under concrete and paving to be replaced down to 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade.

C.

Selective Site Demolition

-1-

Section 02 4113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.3 CLEANING A. B. C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Keep streets and roads reasonably clean, and sweep daily. Sprinkle demolition rubbish and debris as necessary to lay dust. Promptly remove demolition materials, rubbish, and debris from property.

END OF SECTION

Selective Site Demolition

-2-

Section 02 4113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. Reference Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute: a. NFPA 241, Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations, 2009 Edition. 2. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Safety Engineers: a. ANSI / ASSE A10.6-2006, Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Storage or sale of removed items or materials will not be permitted on-site. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Before beginning Selective Demolition work, in addition to requirements of Section 01 3100, meet on site to confirm work to be demolished, items to be salvaged or reused, and coordination with Owner. Scheduling: 1. Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, on Schedule specified in Section 01 3200.

B.

C.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Special Procedure Submittals: 1. Inventory: a. After selective demolition is complete, submit list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. 2. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

1.5

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

Selective Structure Demolition

-1-

02 4119

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. a. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Hazardous Materials: a. It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. Identified hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. b. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb and immediately notify Architect. 2. Inventory and record condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. 3. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit written report to Architect. 4. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. 5. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

B.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Temporary Facilities: 1. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 2. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. Temporary Shoring: 1. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 2. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. Utility Services: 1. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 2. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. a. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. b. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

B.

C.

3.3

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: -202 4119

Selective Structure Demolition

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. Demolish and remove existing construction only to extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: a. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. b. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. c. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. d. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. e. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. f. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. g. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. h. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

08.29.11

B.

Selective Demolition Procedures For Specific Materials: 1. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. 2. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. a. Clean salvaged items as directed by Owner. b. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. c. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. d. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. e. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. Existing Items to Remain: 1. Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. 2. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

C.

D.

E.

Selective Structure Demolition

-3-

02 4119

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.4 CLEANING A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

General: 1. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. 2. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. Waste Management: 1. Disposal of Demolished Materials: a. Remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPAapproved landfill. Do not burn demolished materials. 1) Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2) Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3) Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B.

END OF SECTION

Selective Structure Demolition

-4-

02 4119

D I V I S I O N 03: C O N C R E T E
03 1000 C O N C R E T E F O R M I N G A N D A C C E S S O R I E S 03 1113 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING 03 1511 CONCRETE ANCHORS AND INSERTS 03 2000 C O N C R E T E R E I N F O R C I N G 03 2100 REINFORCING STEEL 03 3000 C A S T - I N - P L A C E C O N C R E T E 03 3053 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3111 NORMAL WEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03 3517 CONCRETE SEALER-HARDENER-WATERPROOFER 03 4000 P R E C A S T C O N C R E T E 03 4800 PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03 5000 C A S T D E C K S A N D U N D E R L A Y M E N T

03 6000 G R O U T I N G 03 6213 NON-METALLIC NON-SHRINK GROUT

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

03 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 03 1113 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Design, construction, and safety of formwork. 2. Furnish and install required formwork ready for placing of concrete. 3. Strip and dispose of formwork. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 03 3111: Tolerances for placing normal weight structural concrete. 8. Section 32 3213: Cast-In-Place Concrete Retaining Walls.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 4. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 5. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed.

B.

Structural Cast-In-Place Concrete Forming

-1-

03 1113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

17.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. a. Using term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of corresponding generic name. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 318-08, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 2. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for Testing Agencies): a. ASTM D1751-04 (2008), 'Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).' b. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. a. Review frequency of testing and inspections. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect as directed in Section 03 3053 and / or Section 03 3111.

B.

Structural Cast-In-Place Concrete Forming

-2-

03 1113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Printed application instructions for form release agents. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Inspecting Reports of concrete formwork.

B.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for inspection of concrete formwork: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Forms: Wood, metal, or plastic as arranged by Contractor. 1. Forming material shall be compatible with specified form release agents and with finish requirements for concrete to be left exposed or to receive a smooth rubbed finish.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Form Release Agents: 1. Unexposed Surfaces Only: Contractor's option. Form Release / Finish Agent: 1. Vertical, Exposed Surfaces or Unexposed Surfaces: a. Chemically acting type. b. Type Two Acceptable Products. 1) Crete-Lease 727 or 20-VOC by Cresset Chemical Co, Weston, OH www.cresset.com. 2) Clean Strip (J-1 or J-3 VOC) by Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals, Kansas City, KS www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. 3) E-Z Strip or DEBOND Form Coating by L & M Construction Chemicals, Omaha, NE www.lmcc.com. 4) Q-2 by Unitex, Kansas City, MO www.unitex-chemicals.com. 5) U S Spec SlicKote by U S Mix Products Co www.usspec.com. 6) Duogard or Duogard II by W R Meadows, Elgin, IL www.wrmeadows.com. 7) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. Expansion / Contraction Joints: 1. 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2. Manufactured commercial fiber type: a. Meet requirements of ASTM D1751. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Conflex by Knight-Celotex, Northfield, IL www.aknightcompany.com. 2) Sealtight by W R Meadows Inc, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 3. Recycled Vinyl: a. Light gray color. -303 1113

B.

C.

Structural Cast-In-Place Concrete Forming

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Proflex by Oscoda Plastics Inc, Oscoda, MI www.oscodaplastics.com. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before Installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Forms: 1. Assemble forms so forms are sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. 2. Properly brace and tie forms. 3. Provide temporary cleanouts at base of tall forms to facilitate cleaning and inspection. 4. Make proper form adjustments before, during, and after concreting. 5. Use new forms, or used forms that have been cleaned of loose concrete and other debris from previous concreting and repaired to proper condition. Use APA Plyform B-B Class I, or APA HDO Plyform B-B Class I, on exposed to view concrete that do not receive a smooth rubbed finish. 6. Use metal cold joint forms when unable to place concrete for footings, foundations, and slabs in continuous pours. Accessories: 1. General: a. Provide for installation of inserts, templates, fastening devices, sleeves, and other accessories to be set in concrete before placing. b. Position anchor bolts for hold-down anchors and columns and securely tie in place before placing concrete. 2. Form Release / Finish Agents: a. Film thickness shall be no thicker than as recommended by Manufacturer. b. Allow no release / finish agent on reinforcing steel or footings. Form Removal: 1. Removal of forms can usually be accomplished in 12 to 24 hours. 2. If temperature is below 50 deg F (10 deg C) or if concrete depends on forms for structural support, leave forms intact for sufficient period for concrete to reach adequate strength. 3. For exposed to view surfaces that receive a smooth rubbed finish, remove forms while concrete is still green. 4. Metal bars or prys should not be used. Use wood wedges, tapping gradually when necessary.

B.

C.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Concrete Formwork: a. Inspections are not required and will be performed at discretion of Architect. b. Inspections, if performed, will include following: 1) Concrete Formwork: a) Certified Inspector shall inspect forms for general location, configuration, camber, shoring, sealing of form joints, correct forming material, concrete accessories, and form tie locations.

END OF SECTION

Structural Cast-In-Place Concrete Forming

-4-

03 1113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 03 1511 CONCRETE ANCHORS AND INSERTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Cast-in anchors for concrete. 2. Headed concrete anchor studs for concrete. 3. Deformed bar anchors for concrete. 4. Adhesive anchors and inserts for concrete. 5. Drilled-in mechanical anchors for concrete. 6. Screw anchors for concrete. 7. Concrete anchors and inserts not specified elsewhere. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 03 3111: Installation of cast-in-place anchors and inserts. 8. Section 06 1100: Installation of drilled in anchors.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 4. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 5. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code

B.

Concrete Anchors And Inserts

-1-

03 1511

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

17.

provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

C.

Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A108-07, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished.' b. ASTM A307-07b, 'Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength.' c. ASTM A325-10, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. d. ASTM A490-10, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. e. ASTM A490M-09a, Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints [Metric]. f. ASTM A496/A496M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. g. ASTM A563-07a, 'Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.' h. ASTM A615/A615M-09b, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. i. ASTM A706/A706M-09b, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. j. ASTM C1077-10d, Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.

Concrete Anchors And Inserts

-2-

03 1511

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

k.

2.

ASTM D3666-09a, Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials. l. ASTM D3740-10, Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. m. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. n. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. o. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies. p. ASTM F1554-07a, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. International Code Council (ICC): a. ICC / ES AC193, Acceptance Criteria For Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements (November 1, 2010). b. ICC / ES AC308 Acceptance Criteria For Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors In Concrete Elements (November 1, 2009).. c. ICC / ESR-1056, Titen HD Screw Anchors (March 1, 2010). d. ICC / ESR-1967, Hilti HIT HY 150 Max Adhesive Anchoring Systems (January 1, 2009).

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling: 1. Inspection shall be performed according to Manufacturers submitted ICC ES Evaluation Report. 2. Notify Testing Agency and Architect one week before installing anchors so testing may be scheduled.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's product literature for each item. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. ICC ES Evaluation Report indicating conformance with current applicable ICC ES Acceptance Criteria. 2. Manufacturers Instructions: a. Manufacturer's published installation recommendations for each item.

B.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency testing and inspecting reports of Drilled-In Mechanical Anchors / Adhesive Anchors / Screw Anchors and / or Headed Concrete Anchor Studs / Deformed Bar Anchors.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications:

Concrete Anchors And Inserts

-3-

03 1511

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

1.

2.

Manufacturer: a. Having sufficient capacity to produce and deliver required materials without causing delay in work. Installer: a. Acceptable to Manufacturer, experienced in performing work of this section and has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

B.

Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for Drilled-In Mechanical Anchors / Adhesive Anchors / Screw Anchors and / or Headed Concrete Anchor Studs / Deformed Bar Anchors. a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

1.7

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and as directed by Manufacturer.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Manufactured Units: 1. General: a. Use hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel with matching nuts and washers in exterior and moist interior applications unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. b. Nut: Conform to requirements of ASTM A563, Grade A, Hex. 2. Threaded rod for adhesive anchors and cast-in anchors: a. Conform to requirements of ASTM A307, Grade A or ASTM F1554. 3. Anchor Bolts: a. J-Bolts: 1) Non-headed type threaded 2 inches (50 mm) minimum conforming to requirements of ASTM F1554, Grade A. 2) Anchor hook to project 2 inches (50 mm) minimum including bolt diameter. b. Headed Bolts: 1) Headed type threaded 2 inches (50 mm) minimum conforming to requirements of ASTM F1554, Grade A. 4. Rebar: a. Composed of deformed carbon steel meeting requirements of ASTM A706/A706M, Grade 60. 5. Adhesive Anchors: a. Cartridge Injection Adhesive Anchors. b. Products shall have current ICC ES Evaluation report conforming to current ICC ES Acceptance Criteria AC308 for concrete. c. Rod diameter and embedment length as indicated on Drawings. d. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) HIT-RE 500-SD Epoxy by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK www.us.hilti.com. 2) SET-XP Epoxy by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA www.simpsonanchors.com. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 6. Drilled-In Mechanical Anchors (Expansion Bolts):

Concrete Anchors And Inserts

-4-

03 1511

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

7.

Products shall have current ICC ES Evaluation report conforming to current ICC ES Acceptance Criteria AC193 for concrete. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Kwik Bolt TZ, HSL-3, HDA by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK www.us.hilti.com. 2) Strong-Bolt by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA www.simpsonanchors.com. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Screw Anchors: a. Provide anchors with length identification markings conforming to ICC ES AC 193 for concrete. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Titen HD Screws by Simpson Strong Tie Co, Dublin, CA www.strongtie.com. 2) Equals as approved by Architect through shop drawing submittal before installation. See Section 01 6200.

a.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Embedded Items: a. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items before drilling holes for anchors: 1) Exercise care in coring or drilling to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. 2) Take precautions as necessary to avoid damaging pre-stressing tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. b. Notify Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. 2. Base Material Strength: a. Unless otherwise specified, do not drill holes in concrete until concrete has achieved full design strength.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Clean surfaces prior to installation. 2. Prepare surface in accordance with Manufacturers written recommendations.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Drilled-In Anchors: 1. General: a. Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using carbide-tipped bits or core drills using diamond core bits. b. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, drill holes perpendicular to concrete surface. c. Where anchors are to be installed in cored holes, use core bits with matched tolerances specified by Manufacturer. Cores holes may only be used if acceptable to Manufacturer. d. Perform anchor installation in accordance with Manufacturers published instructions. 2. Adhesive Anchors: a. Clean holes in accordance with Manufacturers published instructions before installation of adhesive: 1) Follow Manufacturers recommendations to ensure proper mixing of adhesive components. b. Adhesive:

Concrete Anchors And Inserts

-5-

03 1511

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

4.

Inject adhesive into holes proceeding from bottom of hole and progressing toward surface so as to avoid introduction of air pockets into adhesive. 2) Inject sufficient adhesive into hole to ensure that annular gap is filled to surface. 3) Remove excess adhesive from surface. c. Shim anchors with suitable device to center anchor in hole. Do not disturb or load anchors before Manufacturers specified cure time has elapsed. d. Temperature: 1) Observe Manufacturers recommendations with respect to installation temperatures for adhesive anchors. 2) Base material temperatures must be maintained above minimum temperatures allowed by Manufacturer for full required epoxy cure time. Drilled-in Mechanical Anchors (Expansion Bolts): a. Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. b. Set anchors to Manufacturers recommended torque, using a torque wrench. Following attainment of 10 percent of specified torque, 100 percent of specified torque shall be reached within 7 or fewer complete turns of nut. If specified torque is not achieved within required number of turns, remove and replace anchor, unless otherwise directed by Architect. Screw Anchors: a. Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. b. Set anchors to Manufacturers recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

1)

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Drill-In Mechanical Anchors / Adhesive Anchors / Screw Anchors: a. Certified Inspector from Testing Agency shall verify procedures used for installation of all concrete anchors and monitor their installation for compliance with Manufacturers requirements. b. Inspections: 1) Inspections shall include required verification and inspection of anchors as referenced in IBC Table 1704.4 and in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable ASTM material standards. Periodic and continuous inspections include: a) Inspection of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete (continuous). b) Inspection of anchors installed in hardened concrete (periodic). c. Testing: 1) Ten percent (10%) of each type and size of drilled-in anchor shall be proof loaded by Testing Agencys testing laboratory or as directed by Architect. Adhesive anchors will not be torque tested unless otherwise directed by Architect. If more than 10 percent of tested anchors fail to achieve specified torque or proof load within limits defined on Drawings, all anchors of same diameter and type as failed anchors shall be tested at Contractors expense, unless otherwise instructed by Architect. a) Torque will be applied with calibrated torque wrench. b) Proof loads will be applied with calibrated hydraulic ram. Displacement of adhesive anchors at proof load shall not exceed D/10, where D is nominal anchor diameter. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace misplaced or malfunctioning anchors. 2. Fill empty anchor holes and patch failed anchor locations with high-strength, non-shrink, nonmetallic grout acceptable to Architect. 3. Anchors that fail to meet proof load or installation torque requirements will be regarded as malfunctioning. 4. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by product installation.

B.

Concrete Anchors And Inserts

-6-

03 1511

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.5

CLEANING A. Waste Management: 1. Disposal of rubbish, debris, and packaging materials.

3.6

PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect installed products from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION

Concrete Anchors And Inserts

-7-

03 1511

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 03 2100 REINFORCING STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install concrete reinforcing steel as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 03 0353: Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete. 8. Section 03 3111: Normal Weight Structural Concrete. 9. Section 32 3213: Cast-In-Place Concrete Retaining Walls.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 3. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 4. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. An inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by contract documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by contract documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the work has been or is being performed and at completion of the work.

B.

Reinforcing Steel

-1-

03 2100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 5.

6.

7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

14.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Service Provider: An agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: An agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by contract documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by contract documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 318-08, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. b. ACI SP-04, ACI Detailing Manual 2004 edition. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A615 / A615M-09b, 'Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.' 3. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for Reinforcing Steel testing): a. ASTM A615 / A615M-09b, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for Testing Agencies): a. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. b. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. c. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 2213, Section 03 3053, and / or Section 03 3111. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Installation scheduling and reinforcing placement. b. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review frequency of testing and inspections. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect as directed in Section 03 3053 and / or Section 03 3111.

B.

Reinforcing Steel

-2-

03 2100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Reinforcing placement drawings. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Mill certificates for mill tests for reinforcing in accordance with ASTM A615/A615M. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Inspection Reports of reinforcing steel.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for inspection of reinforcing steel: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver bars separated by size and tagged with manufacturer's heat or test identification number. 2. Reinforcing steel shall be free of heavy rust scales and flakes, or other coating at time of delivery and placing. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Properly protect rebar on site after delivery.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Reinforcing bars shall have grade identification marks and conform to ASTM A615/A615M. a. Grade 60 minimum. Field bent dowels may be Grade 40. b. Bars shall be deformed type. 2. Bars shall be free of heavy rust scales and flakes, or other bond-reducing coatings.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Concrete 'dobies' or blocks wired to reinforcing. b. Manufactured chairs with 4 sq in (2 580 mm) bearing surface on sub-grade, or other feature to prevent chair from being pushed into sub-grade or damaging vapor retarder under slabs on grade. c. Equals as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

Reinforcing Steel

-3-

03 2100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.3 FABRICATION A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Fabricate reinforcing steel according to ACI SP-04, 'ACI Detailing Manual, and details on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Site Tolerances: 1. Provide following minimum concrete cover for reinforcement (ACI 318): a. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 1) Exterior Slabs on Grade (where shown): 2 inches (50 mm). 2) Sections other than Slabs: 3 inches (75 mm). b. Concrete Exposed to Earth or Weather: 1) No. 6 and Larger Bars: 2 inches (50 mm). 2) No. 5 and Smaller Bars, W31 and D31 Wire: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Bend bars cold. Accurately place and support with chairs, bar supports, spacers, or hangers as recommended by 'ACI Detailing Manual,' 2004 edition, except slab on grade work. Support bars in slabs on grade and footings with specified bar supports around perimeter and at 4-1/2 feet (1 370 mm) on center each way maximum to maintain specified concrete cover. Install bar supports at bar intersections. Dowel vertical reinforcement for formed concrete columns or walls out of footing or structure below with rebar of same size and spacing required above. Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels before placing concrete. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Avoid splices of reinforcing bars at points of maximum stress. Lap bars 40 bar diameters minimum unless dimensioned otherwise on Drawings. Run steel reinforcing bars continuous through cold joints.

B. C.

D.

E.

F.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Reinforcing Steel: a. Inspections are not required and will be performed at discretion of Architect. b. Inspections, if performed, will include following: 1) Periodic inspection of reinforcement steel and placement. a) Inspect that all steel bars must be positively identified as to heat number and mill analysis. b) All steel bars that cannot be identified by heat number and mill analysis shall have one tensile and one bend test made for each 2 metric tons or fraction thereof, of each size and kind of reinforcing steel.

END OF SECTION

Reinforcing Steel

-4-

03 2100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 03 3053

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

MISCELLANEOUS EXTERIOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Compact sub-base for miscellaneous cast-in-place concrete as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install miscellaneous cast-in-place concrete and equipment pads as described in Contract Documents. 3. Furnish and install sealants and curing compounds as described in Contract Documents. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Detectable warning panels. 2. Flagpole base and foundation sleeve. 3. Light pole base anchors. 4. Entrance ramps to Storage Building 5. Mechanical equipment house-keeping pads Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 03 1113: Structural Cast-In-Place Concrete Forms. 8. Section 03 3111: Concrete mix information and use admixtures. 9. Section 03 3923: Membrane concrete curing application. 10. Section 03 4800: Precast Concrete Specialties for detectable warning panels. 11. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants. 12. Section 10 7516: Furnishing of flagpole base and foundation sleeve. 13. Section 26 5600: Furnishing of light pole base anchors. 14. Section 31 1123: Installation of aggregate base under concrete. 15. Section 31 2213: Rough Grading. 16. Section 31 2323: Compaction procedures and tolerances. 17. Section 32 8423: Sleeves for underground irrigation system.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 224R-01, Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures (Reapproved 2008). b. ACI 224.1R-07, Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete Structures (March 1, 2007). c. ACI 224.2R-92: Cracking of Concrete Members in Direct Tension (Reapproved 2004) d. ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete Construction (Reapproved 2008). e. ACI 302.1R-04: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction' (March 23, 2004).

Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete

-1-

03 3053

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections.

08.29.11

B.

Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 117-06: Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. b. ACI 301-05, Specification for Structural Concrete. c. ACI 305, Standard Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. d. ACI 306.1-90, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. e. ACI 318-08, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1751-04 (2008), 'Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).' b. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 2213. 2. Schedule concrete site element pre-installation conference after installation of sleeves, placing of aggregate base, and installation of forms, but before placing of concrete. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Approved mix design and use of admixtures. b. Installation scheduling, coordination, and placement of concrete. c. Placement, finishing, and curing of concrete including cold and hot weather requirements. d. Smooth rubbed concrete finish procedures and requirements (applied immediately after removing concrete formwork while concrete is green). e. Review joint layout plan for control and expansion joints for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. f. Review layout plan, scheduling, coordination, and placement requirements of detectable warning panels. g. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review frequency of testing and inspections. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing concrete for exterior site work concrete (sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc.), footings, foundation walls, and building slabs.

B.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Joint layout plan for control and expansion joints for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters for written approval before starting work on this Section. 2. Detectable warning panels: a. Layout plan and joints location for written approval before starting work on this Section. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of concrete for exterior site work.

B.

Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete

-2-

03 3053

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for concrete for exterior site work: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Cold Weather Limitations: a. Follow requirements of ACI 306 for cold weather concreting. 2. Hot Weather Limitations: a. Follow requirements of ACI 305 for hot weather concreting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Concrete: a. Meet requirements specified in Section 03 3111 for exterior concrete.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Formwork: 1. Meet requirements specified in Section 03 1113. Expansion Joint Material: 1. 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick. 2. Manufactured commercial fiber type: a. Meet requirements of ASTM D1751. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Conflex by Knight-Celotex, Northfield, IL www.aknightcompany.com. 2) Sealtight by W R Meadows Inc, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 3. Recycled Vinyl: a. Light gray color. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Proflex by Oscoda Plastics Inc, Oscoda, MI www.oscodaplastics.com. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Finishing Material: 1. Finishing Material available in multiple concrete shades to closely match concrete surface. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Mixture of 1 part cement (using same cement as used in concrete foundations), 1 part sand with 95% passing #50 sieve. b. RapidSet WunderFixx by CTS Cement Manufacturing Corporation, Cypress, CA www.rapidset.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

B.

C.

Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete

-3-

03 3053

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Inspection: a. Examine substrate and verify substrate is suitable for installation of detectable warning panels: 1) Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. 2) Do not install detectable warning panels over unsuitable conditions. 3) Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Sub-Base: a. Compact sub-base as specified in Section 31 2213. Concrete Slab Thickness: 1. Increase thickness of concrete beneath detectable warning panels one inch (25 mm).

B.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Form vertical surfaces full depth. Do not allow concrete to flow out from under forms in any degree into landscaped areas. Sidewalks, Exterior Stairs, And Landings: 1. Slope sidewalks with cross slope of 1/8 to 1/4 inch per ft (3 to 6 mm per 300 mm) in direction of intended drainage. 2. Slope sidewalks away from building one percent minimum. 3. Do not dust with cement. Mow Strips and Aprons: 1. Aggregate base not necessary under mow strips and aprons. 2. Form and cast mow strips in place. 3. Set top of mow strip 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) above finish grade. 4. Compact topsoil underneath mow strips and aprons to density of undisturbed earth. Light Pole Bases, Mow Strips, and Aprons: 1. Install bond breaker consisting of three layers of 30 lb (13.6 kg) roofing felt between pole base and adjoining sidewalk, mow strip and building foundations, and aprons and building foundations. Detectable Warnings Panels: 1. Follow Manufacturers recommendations on following: a. Temperature requirements. b. Expansion and control joint requirements. c. Installation of panels. d. Curing of panels. Joints: 1. Expansion Joints: a. Install so top of expansion joint material is 1/4 inch (6 mm) below finished surface of concrete. b. No expansion joint required between curbs and sidewalks parallel to curb.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete

-4-

03 3053

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c.

d. e.

f.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Provide expansion joints at ends of exterior site concrete elements that are perpendicular to and terminate at curbs, building foundations or other concrete elements (i.e. sidewalks, mow strips, aprons). Provide expansion joints between sidewalks that are parallel, and adjacent, to the storage building or main building. Provide expansion joints around perimeter of concrete slab on grade at mechanical enclosure, around perimeter of slab on grade at dumpster enclosure and at top and bottom of exterior stairs. Spacing On Center (+/-): Sidewalks, Curbs and Gutters Mow Strips and Aprons Flat Drainage Structures Retaining Walls w/guardrails Retaining Walls w/chain link fencing 40 feet to 100 feet 20 feet 50 feet 36 feet 50 feet 12 meters to 30 meters 6 meters 15 meters 11 meters 15 meters

08.29.11

2.

Seal expansion joints as specified in Section 07 9213 for following areas: 1) Between entryway slabs and building foundations. 2) Between sidewalks and building foundations. 3) Between entryway slabs and building foundations. 4) Retaining walls. 5) Within concrete driveways and concrete paving. 6) Within curbs and gutters. 7) Within flat drainage structures and at joints between flat drainage structures and other concrete elements. h. Expansion joints are not required to be sealed for following areas: 1) Within aprons and where apron abuts building foundation and sidewalks. 2) Within mow strips and where mow strip abuts building foundation and sidewalks. 3) Within sidewalks. Scored Control Joints: a. Depth of control joints shall be approximately one quarter of concrete slab thickness, but not less than one inch (25 mm). b. Spacing On Center (+/-): Sidewalks Curbs and Gutters Mow Strips Flat Drainage Structures Retaining Walls w/guardrails Retaining Walls w/chain link fencing 4 feet to 6 feet 5 feet 3 feet to 5 feet 10 feet Align with posts Align with posts 12 meters to 18 meters 1.50 meters 0.90 meters to 1.50 meters 3 meters

g.

G.

Finish: 1. Flatwork: a. Curb, Gutter Sidewalks, Mow Strips, Flat Drainage Structures, Stairs, And Miscellaneous: 1) After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: a) Provide fine hair finish where grades are less than 6 percent. b) Provide rough hair finish where grades exceed 6 percent. c) Broom finish, by drawing broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide fine line texture acceptable to Architect. At curb and gutter, apply broom finish longitudinal to curb and gutter flowline. d) On inclined slab surfaces, provide coarse, non-slip finish by scoring surface with stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. At curb and gutter, apply broom finish longintudinal to curb and gutter flowline. e) Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect.

Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete

-5-

03 3053

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake f) Round edges exposed to public view to 1/2 inch (13 mm) radius, including edges formed by expansion joints. g) Remove edger marks. Vertical Surfaces (Exposed To View Vertical Surfaces, Exposed Retaining Walls, Exposed Foundation Walls, Concrete Piers, and etc.): a. General: 1) Finishing Material to fill and smooth interior and exterior concrete surface defects such as spalls, gouges, cracks, dents, chips, bug holes, stone pockets, honeycombs, voids and other defective areas. b. Surface preparation: 1) Formwork shall be stripped from concrete while concrete is still green. 2) Concrete surface to be finished immediately after formwork has been removed. a) Immediately after removing forms, remove joints, marks, bellies, projections, loose materials and other irregularities, and cut back metal ties from surfaces to be exposed. b) Repair defective areas and voids or stone pockets with Finishing Material and smooth to even surface matching surrounding undamaged area. 3) Smooth Rubbed Finish. a) Thoroughly wet with water, apply Finishing Material in thin layer, rub in circular motion to smooth uniform finish. b) Entire surface shall be protected from rapid drying for not less than three days. c) Surfaces shall be cleaned of drip marks and discolorations. d) Concrete surface shall be left with clean, neat, uniform finish, free from form markings and shall be uniform in color and texture. 4) Chamfer lines shall be finished. Light Pole And Flagpole Bases: a. Exposed portion to have smooth rubbed finish.

08.29.11

3.4

APPLICATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Sealer-Hardener-Waterproofer: a. Apply product specified in Section 03 3517 on exterior concrete walking surfaces for safety purposes. 2. Membrane Curing Compound: a. Apply product specified in Section 03 3923 to curbs, gutters, sidewalks, flat drainage structures, stairs, landings, and pads approximately 1/2 hour after application of sealerhardener-waterproofer.

3.5

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Concrete: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for Miscellaneous Exterior Concrete. See Section 03 3111 for Testing and Inspection requirements. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

B.

3.6

CLEANING A. General: 1. Detectable Warnings Panels: a. Clean the panel in accordance with Manufacturers cleaning instructions.

Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete

-6-

03 3053

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.7 PROTECTION A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

General: 1. Protect concrete that has not received its initial set from precipitation to avoid excess water in mix and unsatisfactory surface finish. Detectable Warnings Panels: 1. Protect installed panels from damage and until completion of project. 2. Protect installed panels from traffic until desired concrete strength is achieved.

B.

END OF SECTION

Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete

-7-

03 3053

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 03 3111 NORMAL WEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install Project concrete work as described in Contract Documents. 2. Quality of concrete used on Project but furnished under other Sections. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, and fastening devices for other work, including those for bases only for Mechanical and Electrical. 2. Concrete accessories. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 03 1113: Structural Cast-In-Place Concrete Forming. 8. Section 03 1511: Concrete Anchors and Inserts. 9. Section 03 2100: Reinforcement Steel. 10. Section 03 3913: Water Concrete Curing. 11. Section 03 3913: Membrane Concrete Curing. 12. Divisions 22, 23, And 26: Mechanical and electrical devices including boxes, conduits, pipes, hangers, inserts, and other work to be embedded in concrete work before placing. 13. Section 31 1123: Aggregate base under miscellaneous cast-in-place concrete and exterior slabs, under interior slabs-on-grade concrete, and concrete paving. 14. Section 31 2323: Compaction procedures and tolerances. 15. Section 32 1313: Concrete paving. 16. Furnishing of items to be embedded in concrete specified in Section involved.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 224R-01, Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures (Reapproved 2008). b. ACI 224.1R-07, Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete Structures (March 1, 2007). c. ACI 224.2R-92: Cracking of Concrete Members in Direct Tension (Reapproved 2004) d. ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete Construction (Reapproved 2008). e. ACI 302.1R-04: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction (March 23, 2004). f. ACI 302.2R-06, Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials (August 15, 2006). g. ACI CP-1-08, Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1 (Jan 01, 2008). h. ACI Flatwork Finisher Certification Program. -103 3111

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3.

i. ACI Field Technician Certification Program. j. SP-204-01, Design and Construction Practices to Mitigate Cracking. k. SP-231R-10, Report on Early-Age Cracking: Causes, Measurement and Mitigation. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections.

B.

Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 4. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 5. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 6. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 7. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 8. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation. They are not samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which the Work will be judged. 9. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 10. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. 11. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 12. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. 13. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. 14. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. 15. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. 16. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

-2-

03 3111

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 17. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. 18. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. 19. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C. Reference Standards: 1. American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials: a. AASHTO M 213-01 (2010), Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). b. AASHTO T 318-02, Standard Method of Test for Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying. 2. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 117-06: Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. b. ACI 301-05, Specification for Structural Concrete. c. ACI 318-08, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 3. ASTM International: a. ASTM A615/A615M-09b, 'Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.' b. ASTM C31/C31M-10, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. c. ASTM C33/C33M-08, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. d. ASTM C39/C39M-10, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. e. ASTM C42/C42M-10, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. f. ASTM C94/C94M-10, 'Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.' g. ASTM C140-10, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. h. ASTM C143/C143M-10, 'Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.' i. ASTM C150/C150M-09, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' j. ASTM C171-07, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. k. ASTM C172/C172M-10, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. l. ASTM C173/C173M-10b, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. m. ASTM C192/C192M-07, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. n. ASTM C231/C231M-10, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. o. ASTM C260-06, 'Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.' p. ASTM C494/C494M-10a, 'Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. q. ASTM C567-05a, Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete. r. ASTM C595/C595M-10, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. s. ASTM C597-09, Standard Test Method for Pulse Velocity Through Concrete. t. ASTM C618-08a, 'Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.' u. ASTM C803/C803M-03(2010), Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete. v. ASTM C805/C805M-08, Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete. w. ASTM C989-09a, Standard Specification for Slag Cement for use in Concrete and Mortars. x. ASTM C1077-10c, 'Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.' y. ASTM C1157/C1157M-10, Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement.

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

-3-

03 3111

Project # 503-6925-11010101

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake z. ASTM C1688/C1688M-08, Standard Test Method for Density and Void Content of Freshly Mixed Pervious Concrete. aa. ASTM D1751-04(2008), 'Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).' bb. ASTM D3666-09a, Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials. cc. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. dd. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. ee. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies. ff. ASTM F710-08, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. gg. ASTM F1869-10, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. hh. ASTM F2170-09, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. Corps of Engineers: a. CRD-C 508 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

08.29.11

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference prior to placing of footings, installation of foundation forms and reinforcing steel, and installation of anchors, dowels, inserts, and block outs in foundation walls and slabs. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Installation scheduling, coordination, placement of concrete, and placement of items installed in and under floor slab. b. Review requirements for preparation of subgrade. c. Review aggregate base requirements. d. Review formwork requirements. e. Review approved mix design requirements and use of admixtures. f. Review placement, finishing, and curing of concrete including cold and hot weather requirements. g. Review jointing requirements and joint layout. h. Review concrete slab tolerances and corrective measures if tolerances not met. i. Review safety issues. j. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review frequency of testing and inspections. B. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing concrete.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Show dimensioned locations of anchor bolts for hold-down anchors and columns. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Installers: 1) Certification for National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA).

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

-4-

03 3111

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3.

2) Certification for ACI-certified Flatwork Finishers and Technicians. Design Data: a. Mix Design: 1) Furnish proposed mix design to Architect for review prior to commencement of Work. a) Include density (unit weight) and void content determined per ASTM C1688/C1688M for fresh mixed properties and per ASTM C140 for hardened concrete properties. b) Mix design shall show proposed admixture, amount, usage instructions, and justification for proposed use. b. Ready-Mix Supplier: 1) Require mix plant to furnish delivery ticket for each batch of concrete. Keep delivery tickets at job-site for use of Owner or his representatives. Tickets shall show following: a) Name of ready-mix batch plant. b) Serial number of ticket. c) Date and truck number. d) Name of Contractor. e) Name and location of Project. f) Specific class or designation of concrete conforming to that used in Contract Documents. g) Amount of concrete. h) Amount and type of cement. i) Total water content allowed by mix design. j) Amount of water added at plant. k) Sizes and weights of sand and aggregate. l) Time loaded. m) Type, name, manufacturer, and amount of admixtures used. n) Design Data. 2) Provide certificates with supporting testing reports verifying compliance with Contract Document requirements and that materials provided are from single source for following: a) Cement. b) Aggregate. c) Fly Ash. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Concrete mix design: Submit mix designs to meet following requirements: 1) Proportions: a) Mix Type A: (1) 3000 psi (20.68 MPa) minimum at 28 days. (2) Water / Cement Ratio: 0.45 to 0.50 by weight. b) Mix Type B: (1) 3500 psi (24.13 MPa) minimum at 28 days. (2) Water / Cement Ratio: 0.45 to 0.50 maximum by weight. c) Mix Type C: (1) 4000 psi (27.58 MPa) minimum at 28 days. (2) Water / Cement Ratio: 0.45 to 0.50 maximum by weight. d) Mix Type D (also to be used for exterior concrete subject to freeze thaw conditions): (1) 4500 psi (31.03 MPa) minimum at 28 days. (2) Water / Cement Ratio: 0.45 maximum by weight. e) Do not add water any time during mixing cycle above amount required to meet specified water / cement ratio. No reduction in amount of cementitious material is allowed. 2) Slump: a) 4 inch (100 mm) slump maximum before addition of high range water reducer. b) 8 inch (200 mm) slump maximum with use of high range water reducer. c) Slump not required for Mix Type F. 3) Admixtures: a) Mix design shall show proposed admixture, amount, usage instructions, and justification for proposed use. Do not use any admixture without Architect's written approval. -503 3111

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b)

c)

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Mineral: An amount of specified fly ash not to exceed 20 percent of weight of cement may be substituted for cement. If substituted, consider fly ash with cement in determining amount of water necessary to provide specified water / cement ratio. Chemical: Specified accelerator or retarder may be used if necessary to meet environmental conditions.

08.29.11

C.

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Pour Reports: a) Provide report that records following information: b) Date and time of start of pour, Date and time of end of pour, and Date and time of end of finishing procedures. c) Temperature at start of pour, Temperature at end of Pour, and Maximum temperature during performance of finishing procedures. d) Wind speed at start of pour, Wind speed at end of pour, and Maximum wind speed during performance of finishing procedures. e) Humidity at start of pour, Humidity at end of pour, and High and low humidity during performance of finishing procedures. f) Cloud cover at start of pour, Cloud cover at end of pour, and High and low cloud cover during performance of finishing procedures. g) Screeding method and equipment used. h) Saw cut method and equipment used. 2) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of concrete.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: 1. Installers and Installation Supervisor: a. ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. 2. Ready-Mix Supplier: a. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M requirements and be certified according to NRMCA's 'Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.' 3. Testing Agencies: a. Independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329. 1) Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technicians, Grade I according to ACI CP-1 or equivalent certification program. 2) Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II. B. Testing and Inspection: 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection on concrete: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Expansion Filler Material: a. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage And Handling Requirements:

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

-6-

03 3111

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Expansion Filler Material: a. Store materials in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. BASF Admixtures, Cleveland, OH www.basf-admixtures.com. b. Bonsal American, Charlotte, NC www.bonsal.com. c. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals, Kansas City, KS www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. d. Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH www.euclidchemical.com. e. Fritz-Pak Concrete Admixtures, Dallas, TX www.fritzpak.com. f. Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, MA www.graceconstruction.com and Grace Canada Inc, Ajax, ON (905) 683-8561. g. L & M Construction Chemicals, Omaha, NE www.lmcc.com. h. Larsen Weldcrete by Larsen Products Corp, Rockville, MD www.larsenproducts.com. i. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ www.sikaconstruction.com and Sika Canada, Pointe Claire, QC www.sika.ca. j. Sonneborn / BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN www.chemrex.com. k. Unitex, Kansas City, MO www.unitex-chemicals.com. l. U S Mix Products Co, Denver, CO www.usspec.com. m. W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: Conform to requirements of ASTM C94/C94M unless specified otherwise. a. Floor Slab for interior concrete slabs: 1) Class 1 Floor: a) Anticipated type of traffic: exposed surface foot traffic. b) Special considerations: Uniform finish, nonslip aggregated in specific areas, curing. c) Final finish: Normal steel-troweled finish, nonslip finish where required. 2. Capacities: a. For testing purposes, following concrete strengths are required: 1) At 7 days: 60 percent minimum of 28 day strengths. 2) At 28 days: 100 percent minimum of 28 day strengths. C. Materials: 1. Table One: Portland Cement / Blended Hydraulic Cement Equivalencies ASTM C150/C150M (Low Alkali) ASTM C595/C595M ASTM C1157/C1157M Type I IP GU Type II IP (MS) MS Type III HE Type V HS 2. Hydraulic Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II. a. Meet requirements of ASTM C595/C595M, Type I or II. b. Meet requirements of ASTM C1157/C1157M, Type I or II. Aggregates: a. Coarse: 1) Meet requirements of ASTM C33/C33M or nonconforming aggregate that by test or actual service produces concrete of required strength and conforms to local governing codes. -703 3111

3.

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Aggregate shall be uniformly graded by weight as follows: a) Table Two: Flat Work, Size No. 67. Sieve Percent Passing Sieve One Inch 100 25 mm 3/4 Inch 90 - 100 19 mm 3/8 Inch 20 - 55 9 mm No. 4 0 - 10 4.75 mm No. 8 0-5 2.36 mm Table Three: Sieve 1-1/2 Inch One Inch 1/2 Inch No. 4 No. 8 All Other, Size No. 57. Percent Passing Sieve 100 38 mm 95 - 100 25 mm 25 - 60 12 nm 0 - 10 4.75 mm 0-5 2.36 mm

Percent Passing 100 90 - 100 20 - 55 0 - 10 0-5

b)

Percent Passing 100 95 - 100 25 - 60 0 - 10 0-5

b.

Fine: 1) Meet requirements of ASTM C33/C33M. 2) Aggregate shall be uniformly graded by weight as follows: a) Table Four: Sieve 3/8 Inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100

Percent Passing 100 95 - 100 80 - 100 50 - 85 25 - 60 10 - 30 2 - 10

Sieve 9 mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm 1.18 mm 0.60 mm 0.30 mm 0.15 mm

Percent Passing 100 95 - 100 80 - 100 50 - 85 25 - 60 10 - 30 2 - 10

4. 5.

Water: Clear, apparently clean, and potable. Admixtures And Miscellaneous: a. Mineral: 1) Fly Ash Pozzolan: Meet requirements of ASTM C618, Class F or C and with loss on ignition (LOI) of 3 percent maximum. b. Chemical: 1) No admixture shall contain calcium chloride nor shall calcium chloride be used as an admixture. All chemical admixtures used shall be from same manufacturer and compatible with each other. 2) Air Entraining Admixture: a) Meet requirements of ASTM C260. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) MB-VR, MB-AE or Micro Air by BASF. d) Air Mix 200 Series or AEA-92 Series by Euclid. e) Air Plus or Super Air Plus by Fritz-Pak. f) Sika Air by Sika. g) Daravair or Darex II AEA by W R Grace. h) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 3) Water Reducing Admixture: a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type A and containing not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) Pozzolith Series by BASF. d) Eucon WR 75 or Eucon 91 by Euclid. e) FR-2 or FR-3 by Fritz-Pak. f) Plastocrete 160 by Sika. g) Daracem 50/55, WRDA-64, or WRDA-82 by W R Grace. -803 3111

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake h) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 4) Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type D and contain not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) Pozzolith Series by BASF. d) Eucon Retarder 75 by Euclid. e) FR-1 or Modified FR-1 by Fritz-Pak. f) Plastiment by Sika. g) Daratard-17 or Daratard-40 by W R Grace. h) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 5) High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type F or G and containing not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) Rheobuild 1000 or Glenium Series by BASF. d) Eucon 37 or Eucon 537 by Euclid. e) Supercizer 1 through 7 by Fritz-Pak. f) Sikament 300 by Sika. g) Darachem-100 or WRDA-19 by W R Grace. h) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 6) Non-Chloride, Non-Corrosive Accelerating Admixture: a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type C or E and containing not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) Accelguard 80 by Euclid. d) Pozzolith NC 534 or 122HE or Pozzutec 20+ e) Daraset or Polarset by W R Grace. f) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 7) Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture: a) Liquid admixture to inhibit corrosion of steel reinforcement in concrete by introducing proper amount of anodic inhibitor. Admixture shall contain 30% calcium nitrite solution and shall be used where called for in specifications or on drawings. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) Eucon CIA by Euclid. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 8) Alkali-Silica Reactivity Inhibiting Admixture: a) Specially formulated lithium nitrate admixture for prevention of alkali-silica reactivity (ASR) in concrete. Admixture must have test data indicating conformance to ASTM C1293, Standard Test Method for Concrete Aggregates by Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) Eucon Integral ARC by Euclid. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 9) Viscosity Modifying Admixture (VMA): a) Liquid admixture used to optimize viscosity of Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC). Subject to compliance with requirements, provide following at dosage rates per manufacturers recommendation. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) Visctrol by Euclid. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 10) Shrinkage Reducing Admixture (SRA): a) Liquid admixture specifically designed to reduce drying shrinkage and potential for cracking. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: c) Eucon SRA by Euclid. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.

08.29.11

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

-9-

03 3111

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.2 ACCESSORIES

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

A. Bonding Agents: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Acrylic Additive by Bonsal American. b. Day Chem Ad Bond (J-40) by Dayton Superior. c. Flex-Con by Euclid Chemical Co. d. Larsen Weldcrete by Larsen Products Corp. e. Everbond by L & M Construction Chemicals. f. Acryl Set by BASF. g. Sonocrete by Sonneborn. h. U S Spec Multicoat by U S Mix Products. i. Intralok by W R Meadows. j. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. B. Evaporation Retardant: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Confilm by BASF. b. Sure Film J-74 by Dayton Superior. c. Eucobar By Euclid Chemical Co. d. E-Con by L & M Construction Chemicals. e. Pro Film by Unitex. f. U S Spec Monofilm ER by U S Mix Products. g. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. C. Expansion Filler Material: 1. Expansion Filler Material: a. Design Criteria: 1) Resilient, flexible, non-extruding, expansion-contraction joint filler meeting requirements of ASTM D1751 and AASHTO M-213. 2) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick. 3) Resilience: a) When compressed to half of original thickness, recover to minimum of 70 percent of original thickness. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Fiber Expansion Joint by W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pipes, conduits, and other accessories required by Divisions 22, 23, and 26 shall be installed and inspected before placing concrete. 2. Install inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pipes, conduits, and other accessories furnished under other Sections to be installed as part of work of this Section. a. Tie anchor bolts for hold-down anchors and columns securely to reinforcing steel. B. Removal: 1. Remove water and debris from space to be placed.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Cold Weather Concreting Procedures:

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

- 10 -

03 3111

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

General Requirements: 1) Materials and equipment required for heating and protection of concrete shall be approved and available at Project site before beginning cold weather concreting. 2) Forms, reinforcement, metallic embedments, and fillers shall be free from snow, ice, and frost. Surfaces that will be in contact with newly placed concrete, including subgrade materials, shall be 35 deg F (2 deg C) minimum at time of concrete placement. 3) Thaw sub-grade 6 inches (150 mm) deep minimum before beginning concrete placement. If necessary, re-compact thawed material. 4) Use no frozen materials or materials containing ice. b. Requirements When Average 24 Hour Temperature, midnight to midnight, Is Below 40 deg F (4 deg C): 1) Temperature of concrete as placed and maintained shall be 55 deg F (13 deg C) minimum and 75 deg F (27 deg C) maximum. 2) Heat concrete for 72 hours minimum after placing if regular cement is used; for 48 hours if high early strength cement is used; or longer if determined necessary by Architect. a) During this period, maintain concrete surface temperature between 55 and 75 deg F (13 and 27 deg C). 3) Vent flue gases from combustion heating units to outside of enclosure to prevent carbonation of concrete surface. 4) Prevent concrete from drying during heating period. Maintain housing, insulation, covering, and other protection 24 hours after heat is discontinued. 5) After heating period, if temperature falls below 32 deg F (0 deg C), protect concrete from freezing until strength of 2000 psi (13.79 MPa) minimum is achieved. a) Protect flatwork exposed to melting snow or rain during day and freezing during night from freezing until strength of 3500 psi (24.13 MPa) minimum is achieved. c. Requirements When Average 24 Hour Temperature, midnight to midnight, Is Above 40 deg F (4 deg C), but when temperature falls below 32 deg F (0 deg C): 1) Protect concrete from freezing for 72 hours after placing, or until strength of 2000 psi (13.79 MPa) is achieved, whichever is longer. 2) Protect flatwork exposed to melting snow or rain during day and freezing during night from freezing until strength of 3500 psi (24.13 MPa) minimum is achieved. d. Protect soil supporting concrete footings from freezing under any circumstances. Hot Weather Concreting Procedures: a. Maximum concrete temperature allowed is 90 deg F (32 deg C) in hot weather. b. Cool aggregate and subgrades by sprinkling. c. Avoid cement over 140 deg F (60 deg C). d. Use cold mixing water or ice. e. Use fog spray or evaporation retardant to lessen rapid evaporation from concrete surface.

B. Tolerances: 1. Tolerances shall conform to requirements of ACI 117, except where specified differently. 2. Local Flatness / Levelness of Interior Slabs: a. Specified Overall Value of FF30 / FL24 and Minimum Local Value of FF20 / FL15 when tested in accordance with ASTM E1155. b. Table Five: Maximum Variation Tolerances. Thickness, standard Thickness, footings Plan, 0 - 20 feet Plan, 40 feet or greater Plan, footings Eccentricity, footings Openings, size Openings, location Plumb Consecutive Steps, treads Consecutive Steps, risers Normal Weight Structural Concrete plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch minus 0 inch 1/2 inch 3/4 inch plus 1/2 inch 2 inch max standard, 1/2 inch at masonry minus 1/4 inch, plus One inch plus / minus 1/2 inch at center 1/2 inch max 1/4 inch 1/8 inch - 11 plus 9.5 mm, minus 3 mm minus 0 mm 12.7 mm 19 mm plus 12.7 mm 50 mm max standard, 12.7 mm at masonry minus 6 mm, plus 25.4 mm plus / minus 12.7 mm at center 12.7 mm max 6 mm 3 mm 03 3111

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

3.

1/4 inch in total run Flight of Stairs, treads Flight of Stairs, risers 1/8 inch in total height Remedy For Out-of-Tolerance Building Slabs: a. Sections of slabs to be covered by carpet, which do not meet specified tolerances but are within 10 percent of specified tolerances, may be corrected by grinding or filling, at Owner's option. b. Remove and replace sections of slabs measuring outside specified correctable tolerances.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 6 mm in total run 3 mm in total height

C. Placing: 1. General: a. Place as soon after mixing as possible. b. Deposit as nearly as possible in final position. c. Placing of concrete shall be continuous until panel or section is complete. d. In order to avoid overloading of forms and ties, observe following rate of filling for various air temperatures: 1) Table Six: Placing Rate. Temperature 40 deg F 50 deg F 60 deg F 70 deg F e. Rate of Fill per Hour 2 feet 3 feet 4 feet 5 feet Temperature 4 deg C 10 deg C 16 deg C 21 deg C Rate of Fill per Hour 600 mm 900 mm 1 200 mm 1 500 mm

2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7.

8.

Compact concrete in forms by vibrating and other means where required. 1) Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcing bars (Consolidation not required in concrete around reinforcing bars with Mix Type F). f. Consolidate concrete thoroughly. g. Do not embed aluminum in concrete. h. Do not use contaminated, deteriorated, or re-tempered concrete. i. Avoid accumulation of hardened concrete. Footings: a. Bear 12 inches (300 mm) minimum into undisturbed earth or on mechanically compacted engineered fill. Step footings at ratio of 1-1/2 horizontal to One vertical unless detailed otherwise. Exterior wall footing shall bear 36 inches minimum below finish grades. b. Level top of finish footing and leave rough. c. Where joints are required, bulkhead, key horizontally, and dowel with two No. 5 reinforcing bars, 48 inches (1 200 mm) long. Foundations And Walls: Leave steel projecting where required for floor tie. Exterior Slabs: a. Dusting with cement not permitted. b. For continuous placing and where shown on Drawings, saw cut one inch deep control joints before shrinkage occurs (2 inches at 6 inches slabs) (50 mm at 150 mm slabs). Equipment Bases: Coordinate with appropriate Sections for locations and dimensions. Joints: a. Where possible, locate joints under partitions or where joints will cause least disruption to floor coverings. b. Construction Joints: Locate where shown on Drawings to least impair strength of completed structure. Construction joints in foundation walls shall not occur within 6 feet (1.80 meters) of corner and be keyed. Bonding Fresh And Hardened Concrete: a. Re-tighten forms. b. Roughen surfaces. c. Clean off foreign matter and laitance. d. Wet but do not saturate. e. Slush with neat cement grout or apply bonding agent. f. Proceed with placing new concrete. Anchor Bolts: a. Place anchor bolts not tied to reinforcing steel immediately following leveling of concrete. Reconsolidate concrete around bolt immediately after placing bolt. - 12 03 3111

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Do not disturb bolts during finishing process.

D. Finishing: 1. Rubbed Finish, Exposed Vertical Surfaces: a. Smooth Rubbed Finish shall be as specified in Section 03 3053. 2. Steel Trowel Finishes, Interior Flatwork: a. Float and steel trowel interior slabs after concrete has set enough to avoid bringing water and fines to surface. b. If power troweling is used, get approval of finish from Architect. 3. Broom Finishes, Exterior Flatwork Not Specified in Section 03 3053: a. Broom finish exterior slabs. b. Round edges including edges formed by expansion joints. c. Remove edger marks. 4. Rough: Top of slabs to receive setting bed for ceramic or paver tile. E. Curing: 1. Concrete Paving: Membrane cure as specified in Section 03 3923. 2. All Other Concrete Flatwork And Curbs: Membrane cure as specified in Section 03 3923.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Concrete: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for concrete as per ASTM C1077. b. Testing Agency will sample and test for quality control during placement of concrete as directed by Architect. c. Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. d. Testing and inspections, if performed, will include following: 1) Periodic inspection of reinforcement steel and placement. a) Inspect that all steel bars must be positively identified as to heat number and mill analysis. b) All steel bars that cannot be identified by heat number and mill analysis shall have one tensile and one bend test made for each 2 metric tons or fraction thereof, of each size and kind of reinforcing steel. 2) Inspection of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete. 3) Periodic inspection of anchors installed in hardened concrete. 4) Periodic inspection verifying use of required design mix. 5) Inspection at time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine temperature of concrete. 6) Inspection of concrete and shotcrete placement for proper application techniques. 7) Periodic inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques. 8) Periodic inspect of formwork for shape, location and dimensions of concrete member being formed. a) Certified Inspector shall inspect forms for general location, configuration, camber, shoring, sealing of form joints, correct forming material, concrete accessories, and form tie locations. 9) Concrete floor flatness and floor levelness or interior slabs as per ASTM E1155. 10) Concrete moisture and alkalinity testing. See Section 09 0503 Flooring Substrate Preparation. e. Testing Agency will sample and test during placement of concrete as directed by Architect and may include following: 1) Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172/C172M, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94/C94M. a) Slump: ASTM C143/C143M, Test each time set of compressive specimens are made. b) Air Content: ASTM C173/C173M, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231/C231M pressure method for normal weight concrete each time set of compression test specimens are made. c) Concrete Temperature: Test each time set of compressive specimens are made. - 13 03 3111

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake d) Unit Weight: ASTM C567, Test each time set of compressive specimens are made. f. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31/C31M; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required. g. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; Provide six random sets for site cast concrete (sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc.), two random sets for footings, two random sets for foundation walls and two random sets for interior concrete slabs on grade. 1) One specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 2) If strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 3) Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.45 MPa). Concrete Paving: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection including following: 1) Obtain one composite sample for each days pour of each concrete plus one set for each 50 cu. yd (38 cu m) or fraction thereof. 2) One specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 3) If strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 4) Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.45 MPa). Precast Concrete: a. Testing Agency shall provide inspection including following: 1) Review all precast plant test reports. 2) Provide inspection of all precast during construction, transportation, and erection, verifying precast is undamaged, and installed in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 3) Provide inspection of precast concrete anchorages to other components of structure.

08.29.11

3.4

PROTECTION A. Protect concrete that has not received its initial set from precipitation to avoid excess water in mix and unsatisfactory surface finish. B. Do not allow materials resulting from construction activities, which will affect concrete or application of finish floor systems adversely, to come in contact with interior concrete slabs. C. Protect interior concrete floors from stains, paint, mortar and other construction activities.

END OF SECTION

Normal Weight Structural Concrete

- 14 -

03 3111

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 03 3517 CONCRETE SEALER HARDENER WATERPROOFER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install lithium-based exterior concrete sealer-hardener-waterproofer as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3111: Concrete mix information and use admixtures. 2. Section 03 3053: Coordination with Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 03 3923: Use of Membrane Concrete Curing.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 302.1R-04: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction' (March 23, 2004). 2. National Cooperative highway Research Program, Washington DC http://www.trb.org/NCHRP/Public/NCHRP.aspx. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C78-09, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). b. ASTM C779 / C779M-05, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. c. ASTM C1028-07e1, Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. d. ASTM E96 / E96M-05, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 2. US Army Corps of Engineers (USACE): a. CRD C 48-92, Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Written preparation and application instructions.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. Storage And Handling Requirements:

B.

Concrete Sealer-Hardener-Waterproofer

-1-

03 3517

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Follow Manufacturers written instructions for handling, preparation, and application of product.

08.29.11

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PRODUCTS A. Design Criteria: 1. Description: a. Clear, odorless V.O.C. compliant, water-based, environmentally safe-to use salt protectant and dust proofer that hardens, seals, and densifies concrete and masonry surfaces. 2. Protect concrete surface from Alkali-Silica Reaction (ASR) that does not contribute to alkalinity and prevent surface ASR. 3. Abrasion resistance as per ASTM C779/C779M and ASTM C1028. 4. Flexural strength as per ASTM C78. 5. Water permeability in accordance with CRD C-48. 6. Water vapor transmission as per ASTM E96/E96M. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: 1. Pentra-Sil (244+) by Convergent Concrete Technologies, Orem, UT www.convergentconcrete.com.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION A. New concrete (wet): 1. Apply sealer-hardener-waterproofer as per Manufacturers recommendations. 2. Apply sealer-hardener-waterproofer over cast-in-place concrete sidewalks & cast-in-place concrete paving. Interface With Other Work: 1. Apply sealer-hardener-waterproof approximately 1/2 hour before application of Membrane Concrete Curing.

B.

END OF SECTION

Concrete Sealer-Hardener-Waterproofer

-2-

03 3517

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 03 4800 PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install precast concrete elements as described in Contract Documents. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Precast concrete wall caps 2. Detectable warning panels. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3053: Installation of detectable warning panels. 2. Section under 04 2000 heading: Installation of precast members.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A185/A185M-07, 'Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete.' b. ASTM A615/A615M-09b, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.' c. ASTM C33/C33M-08, 'Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.' d. ASTM C150/C150M-09, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' 2. ASTM International (following are referenced specifically for detectable warning panels): a. ASTM C39/C39M-09a, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. b. ASTM C140-10, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. c. ASTM C293-08, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading). d. ASTM C418-05, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete by Sandblasting. e. ASTM C496/C496M-04e1, Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. f. ASTM C672/C672M-03, Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals. g. ASTM C779/C779M-05, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. h. ASTM C947-03(2009), Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Thin-Section GlassFiber-Reinforced Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Third-Point Loading). i. ASTM C979-05, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. j. ASTM C1028-07e1, Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. k. ASTM C1262-10, Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Freeze-Thaw Durability of DryCast Segmental Retaining Wall Units and Related Concrete Units. l. ASTM C1645/C1645M-09, Standard Test Method for Freeze-thaw and De-icing Salt Durability of Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.

Precast Concrete Specialties

-1-

03 4800

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.3 SUBMITTALS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer product literature for each type of product indicated. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Architectural precast concrete elements: 1) Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. 2) Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. 3) Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at building corners. a) Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses. 4) Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or attached to structure or other construction. 5) Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is proposed. 6) Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special conditions. 7) Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on panel. 8) Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials. 9) Indicate locations and details of stone facings, anchors, and joint widths. b. Detectable warning panels: 1) Detail fabrication details and installation of detectable warning panels. 2) Indicate locations on site, plans, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. 3) Indicate joints locations and placement. 3. Samples: a. Architectural precast concrete elements: 1) For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm). a) When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete. (1) Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing manufacturer's full range of colors. (2) Grout Samples for Verification: Showing color and texture of joint treatment. b. Detectable warning panels. 1) Provide 4 inch (100 mm) by 4 inch (100 mm) minimum sample of detectable warning panel representing actual finish, color, texture, and patterns. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Architectural precast concrete elements: 1) Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers: a) Cementitious materials. b) Reinforcing materials. c) Admixtures. d) Bearing pads. e) Brick units and accessories. 2. Design Submittals: a. Architectural precast concrete elements: 1) Design Modifications: a) If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. b) Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept. 3. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Material Test Reports: 1) Architectural precast concrete units: Precast Concrete Specialties -203 4800

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

4.

5.

6.

7.

a) Aggregates. Detectable warning panels: a) Test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating that material proposed for use meets physical properties indicated herein. Manufacturers Instructions: a. Detectable warning panels: 1) Storage and handling requirements. 2) Preparation and installation instructions. 3) Cleaning and maintenance instructions. Source Quality Control Submittals. a. Architectural precast concrete units: 1) Control test reports. 2) Precast Concrete mix design: Submit compressive strength and water-absorption tests for each precast concrete mix design. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Architectural precast concrete units: 1) Provide special inspection reports. Qualification Statements: a. Architectural precast concrete units: 1) Installer and Fabricator: a) Letter certifying level of training and experience of Installer and Fabricator. 2)

C.

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Detectable Warning Panels: Maintenance instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Detectable Warning Panels: Final, executed copy of Warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Detectable Warning Panels: Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act 28 CFR Part 35 Title II and 28 CFR 36 Title II: a. Comply with requirements of detectable warning surfaces.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Check, carefully unload, and deliver material to site in such manner as to avoid soiling and damaging. 2. Detectable warning panels: a. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store material on planks clear of ground and protect from damage. 2. Detectable warning panels: a. Store pallets on supported flat surface. Do not double stack pallets.

1.6

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Detectable Warning Panels: a. Provide Manufacturer Five Year limited Warranty.

Precast Concrete Specialties

-3-

03 4800

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

PERFORMANCE A. Precast concrete elements: 1. Capacities: a. 4000 psi (27.58 MPa) concrete minimum.

2.2

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Materials: 1. Precast Concrete: a. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II. b. Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. 2. Reinforcing: a. Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60. b. Reinforcing Mesh: ASTM A185/A185M. 3. Color: a. Add Natural Grey color to mix. b. Integral Color: Concentrated dry powder iron oxide pigments designed to meet samples and mock-up.

2.3

ACCESSORIES A. Cap And Joint Covers: 30 lb (13.6 kg) asphalt impregnated felt. B. Mastic: Asphalt based plastic roofing cement. C. Detectable Warnings Panels: 1. ADA compliant. 2. Cementitious high strength reinforced concrete panel. 3. Meet requirements of following: a. ASTM C39/C39M or ASTM C140 for compressive strength requirements. b. ASTM C140 for water absorption requirements. c. ASTM C293 or ASTM C947 for flexural strength requirements. d. ASTM C418 or C779 for abrasion resistance requirements. e. ASTM C1028 for slip resistance requirements. f. ASTM C1262 for freeze thaw requirements. 4. Dome spacing: standard spacing approved by code. 5. Colors: Select color from Manufacturers available colors. 6. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. TekWay Dome Tiles by StrongGo Industries, Tucson, AZ www.stronggo.com. b. CASTinTACT by Masons Supply Co., Portland OR www.masco.net/castintactweb.

2.4

FABRICATION A. General: 1. Chamfered edges. 2. Smooth finish free from pits and rock pockets.

Precast Concrete Specialties

-4-

03 4800

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Detectable warning panels: 1. Follow Manufacturers installation instructions.

END OF SECTION

Precast Concrete Specialties

-5-

03 4800

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 03 6213 NON-METALLIC NON-SHRINK GROUTING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install structural grout as described in Contract Documents. a. For securing anchor bolts and hardware in concrete. b. For grout base for structural columns. c. For grout base for exterior light poles. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 0516: Masonry grout.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C1107 / C1107M-08, 'Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink).'

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Commercial non-shrink grout conforming to requirements of ASTM C1107/C1107M, Type B or Type C and providing compressive strength of 6000 psi (41 MPa) minimum. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1. Normal Construction Grout A by Bonsal American, Charlotte, NC www.bonsal.com. 2. Advantage 1107 Grout by Dayton Superior Corporation, Oregon, IL www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. 3. NS Grout by Euclid Chemical Co, Cleveland, OH www.euclidchemical.com. 4. Construction Grout by Five Star Products Inc, Fairfield, CT www.fivestarproducts.com. 5. Duragrout by L&M Construction Chemicals Inc, Omaha, NE www.lmcc.com. 6. Sonneborn / deGussa Building Systems, Shakopee, MN www.chemrex.com. 7. Horn Grout by TAMMS Industries Inc, Kirkland IL www.tamms.com. 8. U S Spec MP Grout by U S Mix Products Co, Denver, CO www.usspec.com. 9. CG-86 Grout by W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. 10. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Completely eliminate air pockets and provide full contact between grout and item being grouted. Do not exceed Manufacturers recommended thickness.

Non-Metallic Non-Shrink Grouting

-1-

03 6213

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 END OF SECTION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Non-Metallic Non-Shrink Grouting

-2-

03 6213

D I V I S I O N 04: M A S O N R Y
04 0000 MASONRY CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING MASONRY GROUTING MASONRY REINFORCING MASONRY VENEER TIES MASONRY ACCESSORIES

04 0513 04 0516 04 0520 04 0521 04 0523

04 2000 U N I T M A S O N R Y 04 2113 BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 2223 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2713 COMPOSITE UNIT MASONRY 04 4000 S T O N E A S S E M B L I E S

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

04 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 04 0513 CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of masonry mortar used on Project. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 2. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 3. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 4. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 5. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 6. Sections Under 04 2000 Heading: Furnish and install mortar.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 4. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 5. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 6. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

B.

Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring

-1-

04 0513

Project # 503-6925-11010101 7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

18.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation. They are not samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which the Work will be judged. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C144-04, 'Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.' b. ASTM C150 / C150M-09, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' c. ASTM C207-06, 'Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.' d. ASTM C1093-09, Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry. e. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. f. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. g. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies. 2. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) - The Masonry Society (TMS) / American Concrete Institute (ACI) / American Society of Civil Engineers (SEI/ASCE): a. TMS 402-08/ACI 530-08/ASCE 5-08, Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Commentary. b. TMS 602-08/ACI 530.1-08/ASCE 6-08, Specification for Masonry Structures and Commentary.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1. Coordinate pre-installation conference in conjunction with all other Division 04 Specifications in this Project that require pre-installation conferences. 2. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. a. Review frequency of testing and inspections. -204 0513

Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing mortar.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. If pre-mixed wet mortar or pre-blended dry mortar mix are to be used, provide certification from Manufacturer or Supplier verifying that mixes meet specification requirements. b. If site mixed / blended mortar is to be used, provide written description of proposed method of measuring and mixing of materials. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Inspecting Reports of mortar.

B.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for mortar: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Performance: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: a. Type S: 1800 psi (12.4 MPa). Materials: 1. Portland Cement: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C150, Type II Low Alkali unless approved otherwise in writing by Architect. 2. Hydrated Lime: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C207, Type S. 3. Aggregate: a. Standard Mortar: 1) Natural or manufactured sand meeting requirements of ASTM C144 and following: a) Fineness modulus: 1.6 to 2.5 percent b) Water demand, ratio by weight: 0.65 percent maximum c) Grading: Percent Passing Sieve Sieve Natural Sand Manufactured Sand No. 4 4.750 mm 100 100 No. 8 2 360 mm 95 to 100 95 to 100 No. 16 1.191 mm 70 to 100 70 to 100 No. 30 0.594 mm 40 to 75 40 to 75 No. 50 0.297 mm 10 to 35 20 to 40 No. 100 0.150 mm 2 to 15 10 to 25 No. 200 0.075 mm none 0 to 10

B.

Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring

-3-

04 0513

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

4. 5.

6.

Water: a. Clean and free of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. Admixtures: a. Use no admixtures, except for color pigments specified below, without Architect's written permission. Use of any admixture to meet cold weather requirements and admixtures that increase air entrainment are expressly forbidden under all circumstances. Mortar Color Pigment: a. High purity, chemically inert, unfading, alkali-fast mineral oxides, finely ground and especially prepared for mortar. b. Color Standard: To be selected by Architect from manufacturers full line. c. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) True Tone Mortar Colors by Davis Colors, Los Angeles, CA www.daviscolors.com. 2) SGS Mortar Colors by Solomon Colors, Springfield, IL www.solomoncolors.com. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

C.

Mixes: 1. General: a. Heat water and sand to 140 deg F (60 deg C) maximum if temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Unit Masonry Mortar: Type S a. Parts by Volume: Portland Cement 1 Hydrated Lime 1/2 Damp Loose Sand: 2-1/4 minimum to three maximum, times sum of volumes of cement and lime used. Maintain sand piles in damp, loose condition. b. Parts by Weight: Portland Cement Hydrated Lime Dry Sand 94 lbs 20 lbs 360 lbs min. to 480 lbs max. 43 kg 9 kg 163 kg min. to 218 kg max.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

FIELD QUALTY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Masonry (Mortar): a. General: Testing Agency shall check mortar work; in accordance to Level 1 requirements of International Building Code (IBC). b. Inspections shall include placement of mortar. Required verification and inspection Level 1 of masonry construction as referenced in Table 1704.5.1 and IBC required and in accordance with TMS 402/ACI 530.1/ASCE 5 and TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Periodic and continuous inspections include: 1) Compliance with required inspection provisions of construction documents and approved submittals shall be verified (periodic). 2) Verification of m and AAC prior to construction except where specifically exempted by code (periodic). 3) As masonry construction begins, following shall be verified to ensure compliance: (a) Proportions of site-prepared mortar (periodic). (b) Construction of mortar joints (periodic). (c) Location of reinforcement, connectors, prestressing tendons and anchorages (periodic). (d) Prestressing technique (periodic). (e) Grade and size of prestressing tendons and anchorages (periodic). 4) During construction, inspection program shall verify: -404 0513

Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring

Project # 503-6925-11010101 (a) (b)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c. d.

Size and location of structural elements (periodic). Type, size and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames or other construction (periodic). (c) Specified size, grade and type of reinforcement, anchor bolts, prestressing tendons and anchorages (periodic). (d) Welding of reinforcing bars (continuous). (e) Preparation, construction and protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C)) or hot weather (temperature above 90 deg F (32 deg C)) (periodic). (f) Application and measurement of prestressing force (continuous. 5) Preparation of any required mortar specimens shall be observed (periodic): During construction, masonry units and masonry mortar shall be tested for every 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m), or portion thereof, of masonry constructed. Inspection and test results will be reported in writing to Owners Representative, Architect, Consulting Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection or test. Reports shall contain project identification number and date of service, location of service.

B.

Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace defective material at Architect's direction and at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION

Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring

-5-

04 0513

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 04 0516 MASONRY GROUTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of masonry grout used on Project. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 3. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Furnish and install masonry grout.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C94 / C94M-09a, 'Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. b. ASTM C150 / C150M-09, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' c. ASTM C207-06, 'Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. d. ASTM C404-07, 'Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. e. ASTM C1019-09, 'Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. If pre-blended dry grout is to be used, provide certification from Manufacturer or Supplier verifying that mixes meet specification requirements. b. If grout is to be mixed in field, provide written description of proposed procedure for measuring and mixing of materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Performance 1. Minimum Compressive Strength for laboratory cured specimens at 28 Days: a. 2000 psi (13.8 MPa). Materials: 1. Portland Cement: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M. b. Use Type II Low Alkali in exterior walls and in walls subject to moisture, unless approved otherwise in writing by Architect. 2. Hydrated Lime: -104 0516

B.

Masonry Grouting

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

a. Meet requirements of ASTM C207, Type S. Aggregate: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C404, Table 1. 1) Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregate, Natural, Size 2. Sieve No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 2) Sieve 4.750 mm 2 360 mm 1 191 mm 0.595 mm 0.297 mm 0.150 mm Percent Passing 100 95 - 100 60 - 100 35 - 70 15 - 35 2 - 15

Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate, Size 8. Sieve 1/2 Inch 3/8 Inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 Sieve 12 7 mm 9.5 mm 4.750 mm 2 360 mm 0.150 mm Percent Passing 100 85 - 100 10 - 30 0 - 10 0 - 5

4. 5.

Water: a. Clean and free of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. Admixtures: a. No additives are allowed which will increase air entrainment. Other additives may be used as approved in writing by Architect before use.

C.

Mixes: 1. Procedure: a. Use of pre-blended dry grout mix is allowed only with submission of certification that material specification requirements have been complied with. b. Use method of measuring and mixing materials that will ensure consistently proportioned grout batches throughout installation of masonry work. No measuring of materials by 'shovels full' is permitted for field mixed grout. c. Batch, mix, and deliver transit-mixed grout in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94/C94M. 2. Proportions by Volume: a. Water: Enough to give creamy pouring consistency, usually slump of between 8 and 10. Material Portland Cement Hydrated Lime
(optional)

Fine Grout One cu ft 1/10 cu ft 2-1/4 to 3 cu ft none 0.028 cu m 0.0028 cu m 0.063 to 0.084 cu m none One cu ft 1/10 cu ft

Coarse Grout 0.028 cu m 0.0028 cu m 0.063 to 0.084 cu m 0.028 to 0.056 cu m

Damp, Loose Sand Pea Gravel

2-1/4 to 3 cu ft 1 to 2 cu ft

Masonry Grouting

-2-

04 0516

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Use fine grout for cavities 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller in smallest dimension. Use coarse grout for cavities greater than 2 inches (50 mm) in smallest dimension.

END OF SECTION

Masonry Grouting

-3-

04 0516

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 04 0520 MASONRY REINFORCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Masonry horizontal joint reinforcing. 2. Steel masonry reinforcing bars. Related Requirements: 1. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Installation.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A82 / A82M-07, 'Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.' b. ASTM A153 / A153M-09, 'Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.' c. ASTM A615 / A615M-09b, 'Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.' d. ASTM A641 / A641M-09a, 'Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.' e. ASTM D1784-08, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. f. ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 2. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) - The Masonry Society (TMS) / American Concrete Institute (ACI) / American Society of Civil Engineers (SEI/ASCE): a. ACI 530-05 / ASCE 5-05 / TMS 402-05, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. b. ACI 530.1-05 / ASCE 6-05 / TMS 602-05, Specification for Masonry Structures. c. ACI 530-05 / ASCE 5-05 / TMS 402-05, Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. d. ACI 530-01 / ASCE 6-05 / TMS 602-05, Commentary on Specification for Masonry Structures.

1.3

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Steel reinforcing bars shall be free of heavy rust scales and flakes, and other bond-reducing coatings at time of delivery and placing. 2. Separate steel reinforcing bars by size and tag with manufacturer's heat or test identification number. 3. Tag continuous joint reinforcing with Manufacturer's name, wire size, and ASTM / CSA specification. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Properly protect reinforcing on site after delivery.

B.

Masonry Reinforcing

-1-

04 0520

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Materials: 1. Design Criteria: a. Steel reinforcing bars shall have grade identification marks and meet requirements of ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 minimum. All but No. 2 bars shall be deformed type. b. Continuous Joint Reinforcing: 1) Conform to ASTM A82/A82M. Exterior wall reinforcing shall be galvanized to meet requirements of ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2. Interior wall reinforcing shall be galvanized to meet requirements of ASTM A641/A641M, Class A. 2) Size: 2 inches (50 mm) less than nominal thickness of wall. 3) Rod Size: a) Side rods: 9 gauge (3.7 mm). b) Cross rods: 9 gauge (3.7 mm). 4) Cross Rods: Cross rods that serve as metal ties in exterior cavity and other multi-wythe walls shall be drip crimped. 5) Corners And Tee Sections: Prefabricated of material and design similar to main reinforcement. c. Multi-Wythe Masonry: 1) Seismic Design Category C, D, or E: a) Design Criteria: (1) Comply with Seismic Zone Conformance of IBC, ASCE/ACI 530, and ASTM A951/A951M. (2) Seismiclip: Impact resistant as per ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2240. (3) Cold-drawn steel conforming to ASTM A82/A82M. (4) Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized as per ASTM A153/A153M (1.5 oz/ft (42.5 grams/305 mm). b) Class One Quality Standards: (1) Where wythes do not course out: No. 170 Lox-All Truss Adjustable Eye-Wire with S.I.S. (SHD) by Hohmann & Barnard. (2) Where withes do course out: No. 230 Ladder-Tri-Mesh by Hohmann & Barnard. d. Single-Wythe Masonry 1) Seismic Design Category. All seismic zones except where preferred grouted re-bars and bond beams are used: a) Design Criteria: (1) Comply with Seismic Zone Conformance of IBC, ASCE/ACI 530, and ASTM A951/A951M. (2) Cold-drawn steel conforming to ASTM A82/A82M. (3) Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized as per ASTM A153/A153M (1.5 oz/ft (42.5 grams/305 mm). b) Class One Quality Standard: (1) No. 120 Truss-Mesh by Hohmann & Barnard. e. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Heckman Building Products Inc, Chicago, IL www.heckmannbuildingprods.com. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Hauppauge, NY www.h-b.com. 3) Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, Charlotte, NC www.wirebond.com. 4) Equal system as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate and bend steel reinforcing bars according to 'ACI Detailing Manual (2004 edition or latest available) and details on Drawings.

B.

Masonry Reinforcing

-2-

04 0520

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.2 ACCESSORIES A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Rebar Positioners: 1. Design Criteria: a. Position rebar vertically in cell of CMU. b. Cold-drawn steel conforming to ASTM A82/A82M. c. Wire diameter: 9 gauge (1.48 inch or 3.7 mm). d. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized as per ASTM A153/A153M (1.5 oz/ft (42.5 grams/305 mm). 2. Class One Quality Standards: a. Single Curtain: No. RB Rebar Positioners by Hohmann & Barnard. b. Double Curtain: No. RB-Twin Rebar Positioners by Hohmann & Barnard. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Heckman Building Products Inc, Chicago, IL www.heckmannbuildingprods.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Hauppauge, NY www.h-b.com. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, Charlotte, NC www.wirebond.com. d. Equal system as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Division 03 for placement of dowels out of foundations for masonry reinforcing.

3.2

CLEANING A. Waste Management: 1. Disposal of rubbish, debris, and packaging materials.

END OF SECTION

Masonry Reinforcing

-3-

04 0520

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 04 0521 MASONRY VENEER TIES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Ties for veneering masonry on framed walls. 2. Dovetail anchors and slots for veneering masonry on cast-in-place concrete. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3111: Installation of dovetail slots. 2. Section 04 2223: Installation of anchor and tie system.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact Information: a. Heckman Building Products Inc, Chicago, IL www.heckmannbuildingprods.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Hauppauge, NY www.h-b.com. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, Charlotte, NC www.wirebond.com. Unit Masonry Over Framing: 1. Brick Ties: a. Class One Quality Standard: 1) HB 200 Adjustable Veneer Anchor by Hohmann & Barnard. a) Finish: Hot dipped galvanized. b) Accommodate 0 inch to 4 inch 0.00 inches (0.00 mm to 100mm) insulation thickness. 2) Equal from Heckman and Masonry Reinforcing. See Section 01 6200. 2. Fasteners: a. Class Two Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200: 1) Wood Framing: Non-corrosive wood screws of length, type, and quantity recommended by Manufacturer. 2) Steel Framing: Non-corrosive screws of length, type, and quantity recommended by Manufacturer. Dovetail Anchors: 1. Class Two Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200: a. Dovetail Slots: 305 by Hohmann & Barnard. 1) Finish: Hot dipped galvanized. b. Dovetail Anchors: 303 by Hohmann & Barnard. 1) Finish: Hot dipped galvanized.

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Masonry Veneer Ties

-1-

04 0521

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 04 0523 MASONRY ACCESSORIES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Flexible flashing for bottom of masonry veneer. 2. Flexible flashing for brick sills. 3. Mortar guard materials. 4. Weep vents. Related Requirements: 1. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Installation.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's product literature for each item. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturers Instructions: a. Manufacturer's published installation recommendations for each item.

B.

1.3

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and as directed by manufacturer.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Advanced Building Products Inc, Springvale, ME www.advancedflashing.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Haupauge, NY www.h-b.com. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, Roundtree, NC www.wirebond.com. d. Masonry Technology Inc, Cresco, IA www.masonrytechnology.com. e. Mortar Net USA Ltd, Burns Harbor, IN www.mortarnet.com. f. Sandell Manufacturing Co, Schenectady, NY www.sandellmfg.com. g. York Manufacturing Inc, Sanford, ME www.yorkflashings.com. Materials: 1. Flexible Flashing:

B.

Masonry Accessories

-1-

04 0523

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake a. 5 ounces (142 grams) copper per one sq ft (0.093 on sq m) of material with two layers of kraft paper. b. Type Two Acceptable Product: 1) Cop-R-Kraft Duplex by Advanced Building Products. 2) Copper Kraft Duplex by Sandell Manufacturing Co. 3) Cop-R-Tex Duplex by York. 4) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Weep Vents: a. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Cell Vent: a) #QV - Quadro-Vent by Hohmann & Barnard. b) #3601 Cell Vent by Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. 2) Cavity Vent by Masonry Technology. b. Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Mortar Guard: a. Thickness as recommended by Manufacturer for air space. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories. 1) Mortar Net by Hohmann & Barnard. 2) Mortar Net by Mortar Net.

08.29.11

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Masonry Accessories

-2-

04 0523

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 04 2113 BRICK VENEER MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install masonry units as veneer on framing as described in Contract Documents. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Engraved Stone Panel Signage. 2. Masonry Accessories: a. Flexible flashing. b. Mortar guard materials. c. Weep vents. 3. Masonry Veneer Ties. 4. Metal Lintels. 5. Reglets. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications for minimum qualification levels required. 3. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 4. Section 04 0523: Masonry Accessories. 5. Section 04 0513: Quality of mortar. 6. Section 04 0521: Quality of masonry veneer ties. 7. Section 05 1223: Structural Steel for Buildings. 8. Section 07 7126: Reglets. 9. Section 10 1424: Engraved Stone Panel Signage.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Cold Weather, as referred to in this Section, is four hours with ambient temperature below 40 deg F (4 deg C) in 24-hour period. 2. Hot Weather, as referred to in this Section, is ambient air temperature above 100 deg F (38 deg C) or ambient air temperature above 90 deg F (32 deg C) with wind velocity 8 mph (13 kph) or greater. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute / American Society of Civil Engineers / The Masonry Society: a. ACI 530-05 / ASCE 5-05 / TMS 402-05, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. b. ACI 530.1-05 / ASCE 6-05 / TMS 602-05, Specification for Masonry Structures. c. ACI 530-05 / ASCE 5-05 / TMS 402-05, Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. d. ACI 530-01 / ASCE 6-05 / TMS 602-05, Commentary on Specification for Masonry Structures. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM C216-07a, 'Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Made from Clay or Shale).'

B.

Brick Veneer Masonry

-1-

04 2113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Pre-Installation Conference: In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference during construction of mockup panel.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. One full size brick minimum, one sample of each special shape, and physical samples which demonstrate full range of color and texture. b. Type of veneer tie used. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b) Color and type selection.

B.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: 1. Panel 4 feet (1.20 m) long by 3 feet (900 mm) high of proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar, and workmanship. Include mock-up framing and sheathing to show wall construction to be used on Project, including anchor and tie systems, seismic reinforcing, etc. 2. Do not start work of this Section until Architect has accepted sample panel. 3. Use panel as standard of comparison for masonry work built of same material.

1.6

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Check, carefully unload, and deliver material to site in such manner as to avoid soiling, damaging, or chipping. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store material on planks clear of ground and protect from damage, dirt, or disfigurement.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBX. 1) Rating for efflorescence shall be 'Not Effloresced.' 2) Exposed faces shall be finished and have less than 5 percent chippage and have crackfree appearance when viewed from 15 feet (4.5 meters) away. b. Brick shall be cleanable using standard method specified below when using specified mortar. Materials: 1. Mortar: Type 'N' as specified in Section 04 0513. -204 2113

B.

Brick Veneer Masonry

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Brick: a. Brick shall be true to size and shape. No warped brick permitted. Brick for Project shall be fired in same run. b. 3-5/8 inches (90 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (56 mm) high by 7-5/8 inches (190 mm) long modular brick. c. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers, Style, And Color: 1) Interpace Brick, Velour Brick, color to be Architect from manufacturers full line. 2) Interstate Brick, , color to be selected by Architect from manufacturers full line. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Cleaning Compounds: 1. Use type of compound recommended by Brick Manufacturer based on minerals present in masonry units. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 202 or 202V by Diedrich Technologies, Oak Creek, WI www.diedrichtechnologies.com. b. Surekleen No. 600 or Vana-Trol by ProSoCo Inc, Kansas City, KS www.prosoco.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Cold Weather Requirements: a. Do not lay masonry in Cold Weather unless authorized by Architect. b. Heat mixing water and sand as required during Cold Weather to produce mortar temperatures at application of between 70 and 120 deg F (21 and 49 deg C). c. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F 4 deg C minimum when ambient temperature is below 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C). d. Provide windbreaks during construction if ambient temperature is 35 deg F (2 deg C) or below and wind velocities exceed 15 mph (24 kph). e. If ambient temperature is 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C) or below, provide enclosure for masonry under construction with heat sources and maintain temperature in enclosure at 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum. Maintain temperature around masonry at 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum for first 48 hrs after construction. f. Keep materials free of ice and snow. Do not lay masonry on frozen material. 2. Hot Weather Requirements: a. In Hot Weather, cool mixing water as necessary to maintain mortar and grout temperatures below 90 deg F (32 deg C). b. In Hot Weather, prevent rapid drying of walls by using fog spray or by covering wall with plastic or wet canvas or burlap. Interface With Other Work: 1. Make cuts proper size to accommodate work of other trades. Cut openings for electrical devices using cover plates no larger than can be covered by standard size plate. 2. Replace unit masonry in which larger than necessary openings are cut. Do not patch openings with mortar or other material. Tolerances: 1. Masonry shall be laid true to vertical and horizontal planes within 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 meters), non-cumulative. Recess masonry where indicated. 2. Maintain 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) mortar joints throughout. Masonry Veneer Ties: -304 2113

B.

C.

D.

Brick Veneer Masonry

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

Free of material that may destroy bond. Install as detailed by screwing through sheathing into framing. Begin approximately 8 inches (200 mm) from base of masonry and with maximum spacing of 16 inches (400 mm) vertically and at each vertical stud horizontally. Install final row of ties within 8 inches (200 mm) of top course of brick. Seismic Reinforcing: a. Install in same course as masonry ties on centerline of brick width. b. Attach reinforcing to ties in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. c. Lap ends of horizontal joint reinforcing 8 inches (200 mm) at joints.

E. F.

Flashing: Install embedded flashing behind lower edge of air infiltration barrier. Laying: 1. Layout: a. Running bond except where noted otherwise. Select brick so there is uniform distribution of hues. b. Use solid brick where brick coursing would otherwise show cores. 2. Joints: a. Do not tool until mortar has taken initial set. b. Tool concave. When tooling joints, squeeze mortar back into joint. c. Point holes in joints. Fill and tool properly. 3. Use mortar within two hours of initial mixing. Discard mortar that has begun to set. 4. Wet each brick to saturation. Lay brick when surface is dry. Brick absorption when laid should not exceed 0.025 oz/sq inch (457 g/sq mm) maximum. 5. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. Shove brick into place in full mortar bed, do not lay. 6. Completely fill horizontal and vertical joints. Do not furrow bed joints. 7. Strike back-side joints on brick flush. Do not allow mortar build-up in cavity between masonry veneer and stud wall sheathing. 8. Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Use toothing only with Architect's approval. Weep Holes: 1. Install weep holes at 33 inches (875 mm) on center maximum at bottom masonry course at foundation and above windows and doors. Mortar Guard: 1. Place mortar guard continuously between brick (or CMU) and sheathing at bottom masonry course at foundation and above windows, and doors.

G.

H.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace defective material at Architect's direction and at no additional cost to Owner.

3.3

CLEANING A. After mortar has hardened, wet masonry and clean with specified cleaning compound. Use stiff fibered brush for application. Rinse masonry surfaces with water immediately after cleaning. Leave masonry clean, free of mortar daubs, and with tight mortar joints. Waste Management: 1. Clean up masonry debris and remove from site.

B.

3.4

PROTECTION A. Protect masonry with cover during rainy weather. -404 2113

Brick Veneer Masonry

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 END OF SECTION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Brick Veneer Masonry

-5-

04 2113

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 04 2223 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install architectural concrete unit masonry for window sills, exterior trim and wall cap as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install embedded anchors as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications for minimum qualification levels required. 3. Section 04 0513: Quality of mortar. 4. Section 04 0516: Quality of grout. 5. Section 04 0519: Quality of masonry anchors.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Cold Weather, as referred to in this Section, is four hours with ambient temperature below 40 deg F (4 deg C) in 24-hour period. 2. Hot Weather, as referred to in this Section, is ambient air temperature above 100 deg F (38 deg C) or ambient air temperature above 90 deg F (32 deg C) with wind velocity 8 mph (13 kph) or greater. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C331-05, 'Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.'

B.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1. Coordinate pre-installation conference in conjunction with all other Division 04 Specifications in this Project that require pre-installation conferences.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hot and Cold Weather Requirements: 1. In accordance with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

1.5

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Check, carefully unload, and deliver material to site in such manner as to avoid soiling, damaging, or snipping.

Architectural Concrete Unit Masonry

-1-

04 2223

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store material on planks clear of ground and protect from damage, dirt, or disfigurement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Performance: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa). Materials: 1. Mortar: Type 'S' mortar as specified in Section 04 0513. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: 3. Meet requirements of ASTM C90, Type I, moisture control units, lightweight classification. a. 85 lbs per cu ft (126 kg per cu meter) minimum weight classification. b. Lightweight aggregates conforming to ASTM C331. c. Do not use re-crushed masonry units as aggregate. 4. Outside Corners: a. Square-edged, except where bull nose is indicated on Drawings. 5. Uniform color and textures with unbroken edges. Smooth face, except where shown otherwise on Drawings.

B.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Construction Cleaning Compounds: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 202 or 202V by Diedrich Technologies, Oak Creek, WI www.diedrichtechnologies.com. b. Surekleen No. 600 or Vana-Trol by ProSoCo Inc, Kansas City, KS www.prosoco.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify substrates have been properly prepared. 2. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry. 3. Notify Architect of any unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 4. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of anchors and accessories, flashings and moisture control products specified in other sections.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Place masonry, mortar and grout in accordance with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Laying: 1. Joints: -204 2223

B.

Architectural Concrete Unit Masonry

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

a. Tool concave: Fill completely except where indicated differently. b. Do not tool until mortar has taken initial set. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Lay hollow masonry units dry. Do not lay masonry on frozen material.

C.

Special Techniques: 1. Cold Weather Requirements: a. Do not lay masonry in Cold Weather unless authorized by Architect. b. Heat mixing water and sand as required during Cold Weather to produce mortar temperatures at application of between 70 and 120 deg F (21 and 49 deg C). c. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum when ambient temperature is below 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C). d. Provide windbreaks during construction if ambient temperature is 35 deg F (2 deg C) or below and wind velocities exceed 15 mph (24 kph). e. If ambient temperature is 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C) or below, provide enclosure for masonry under construction with heat sources and maintain temperature in enclosure at 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum. Maintain temperature around masonry at 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum for first 48 hrs after construction. f. Keep materials free of ice and snow. Do not lay masonry on frozen material. 2. Hot Weather Requirements: a. In Hot Weather, cool mixing water as necessary to maintain mortar and grout temperatures below 90 deg F (32 deg C). b. In Hot Weather, prevent rapid drying of walls by using fog spray or by covering wall with plastic or wet canvas or burlap. Tolerances: 1. Masonry work shall be true to vertical and horizontal planes within 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 meters), non-cumulative. 2. Maintain 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) mortar joints throughout.

D.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace defective material at Architect's direction and at no additional cost to Owner.

3.5

PROTECTION A. Protect masonry with cover during rainy weather: 1. Cover top of unfinished masonry work to protect from weather and to prevent accumulation of water in cores of CMU.

3.6

CLEANING A. General: 1. After mortar has hardened, wet masonry and clean with specified cleaning compound. 2. Use stiff fibered brush for application. 3. Rinse masonry surfaces with water immediately after cleaning. 4. Leave masonry clean, free of mortar daubs, and with tight mortar joints. Waste Management: 1. Clean up masonry debris and remove from site.

B.

END OF SECTION

Architectural Concrete Unit Masonry

-3-

04 2223

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 04 2713 COMPOSITE UNIT MASONRY

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install bonded wall unit masonry as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install anchor bolts as described in Contract Documents. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Section 04 2113: Brick veneer. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications for minimum qualification levels required. 3. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 4. Section 04 0513: Quality of mortar. 5. Section 04 0516: Quality of grout. 6. Section 04 0519: Quality of masonry anchors. 7. Section 04 0520: Quality of masonry reinforcing. 8. Section 04 0521: Quality of masonry veneer ties. 9. Section 04 2223: Precast concrete cap. 10. Section 05 0523: Quality of anchor bolts.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Cold Weather, as referred to in this Section, is four hours with ambient temperature below 40 deg F (4 deg C) in 24-hour period. 2. Hot Weather, as referred to in this Section, is ambient air temperature above 100 deg F (38 deg C) or ambient air temperature above 90 deg F (32 deg C) with wind velocity 8 mph (13 kph) or greater. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute / American Society of Civil Engineers / The Masonry Society: a. ACI 530-05 / ASCE 5-05 / TMS 402-05, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. b. ACI 530.1-05 / ASCE 6-05 / TMS 602-05, Specification for Masonry Structures. c. ACI 530-05 / ASCE 5-05 / TMS 402-05, Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. d. ACI 530-01 / ASCE 6-05 / TMS 602-05, Commentary on Specification for Masonry Structures. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A153 / A153M-09, 'Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.' b. ASTM C90-09, 'Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.' c. ASTM C216-07a, 'Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Made from Clay or Shale).' d. ASTM C331-05, 'Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.' e. ASTM C1019-09, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.

B.

Composite Unit Masonry

-1-

04 2713

Project # 503-6925-11010101

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake f. ASTM D1187-97 (2002)e1, 'Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal.' Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) - The Masonry Society (TMS) / American Concrete Institute (ACI) / American Society of Civil Engineers (SEI/ASCE): a. TMS 402-08/ACI 530-08/ASCE 5-08, Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Commentary. b. TMS 602-08/ACI 530.1-08/ASCE 6-08, Specification for Masonry Structures and Commentary.

08.29.11

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 04 2113. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Schedule pre-installation conference during construction of mockup panel.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: As required in Section 04 2113. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Report: a. Certification that CMU meet specified compressive strength requirements. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Brick Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b) Brick color and type selection.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hot and Cold Weather Requirements: 1. In accordance with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Mockups: As required in Section 04 2113.

B.

1.6

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Check, carefully unload, and deliver material to site in such manner as to avoid soiling, damaging, or snipping. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store material on planks clear of ground and protect from damage, dirt, or disfigurement.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Materials: -204 2713

Composite Unit Masonry

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

Mortar: Type 'N' as specified in Section 04 0513. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C90, Type I, moisture control units, lightweight classification. 1) 85 lbs per cu ft (126 kg per cu meter) minimum weight classification. 2) Lightweight aggregates conforming to ASTM C331. 3) Do not use re-crushed masonry units as aggregate. b. Outside Corners: Square-edged, except where bull nose is indicated on Drawings. c. Use special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, etc, as required. d. Uniform color and textures with unbroken edges. Smooth face, except where shown otherwise on Drawings. Brick: As specified in Section 04 2113.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Cleaning Compounds: 1. Use type of compound recommended by Brick Manufacturer based on minerals present in masonry units. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 202 or 202V by Diedrich Technologies, Oak Creek, WI www.diedrichtechnologies.com. b. Surekleen No. 600 or Vana-Trol by ProSoCo Inc, Kansas City, KS www.prosoco.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify substrates have been properly prepared. 2. Notify Architect of any unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of reinforcement, anchors and accessories, flashings and weep holes and other moisture control products specified in other sections.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Place masonry, mortar and grout in accordance with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 3. Masonry cutting: a. Make cuts proper size to accommodate work of other trades. 4. Built-In Work: a. As work progresses, install masonry flashings and weep holes and other built-in work specified in other sections. Special Techniques: 1. Cold Weather Requirements: a. Do not lay masonry in Cold Weather unless authorized by Architect. b. Heat mixing water and sand as required during Cold Weather to produce mortar temperatures at application of between 70 and 120 deg F (21 and 49 deg C). -304 2713

B.

Composite Unit Masonry

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake c. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum when ambient temperature is below 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C). d. Provide windbreaks during construction if ambient temperature is 35 deg F (2 deg C) or below and wind velocities exceed 15 mph (24 kph). e. If ambient temperature is 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C) or below, provide enclosure for masonry under construction with heat sources and maintain temperature in enclosure at 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum. Maintain temperature around masonry at 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum for first 48 hrs after construction. f. Keep materials free of ice and snow. Do not lay masonry on frozen material. Hot Weather Requirements: a. In Hot Weather, cool mixing water as necessary to maintain mortar and grout temperatures below 90 deg F (32 deg C). b. In Hot Weather, prevent rapid drying of walls by using fog spray or by covering wall with plastic or wet canvas or burlap.

08.29.11

C.

Tolerances: 1. Masonry work shall be true to vertical and horizontal planes within 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 meters), non-cumulative. 2. Maintain 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) mortar joints throughout. Laying: 1. Layout: a. Running bond except where indicated otherwise. Select brick so there is uniform distribution of hues. b. Use solid brick where brick coursing would otherwise show cores. 2. Joints: a. Tool concave. Fill completely except where indicated differently. b. Do not tool until mortar has taken initial set. c. Point holes in joints. Fill and tool properly. 3. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Lay hollow masonry units dry. Do not lay masonry on frozen material. b. Align cells or cavities to preserve an unobstructed cavity for grouting installed in cells. c. Full bedding required on both webs and face shell under first course. Other courses need only face shell bedding except where bedding is needed to control flow of grout. 4. Brick Masonry Units: a. Wet each brick to saturation. Lay brick when surface is dry. Brick absorption when laid should not exceed 0.025 oz per sq in (1.1 kg per sq m) maximum. b. Shove brick into place in full mortar bed, do not lay. c. Completely fill horizontal and vertical joints. Do not furrow bed joints. d. Strike backside joints on brick flush. Do not allow mortar build-up in cavity between brick veneer and CMU. 5. Use mortar within two hours of initial mixing. Discard mortar that has begun to set. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. Reinforcing: 1. Reinforcing shall be free of material that may destroy bond. 2. Continuous Joint Reinforcing: a. Beginning approximately 8 inches (200 mm) from base of masonry, provide joint reinforcing 16 inches (400 mm) on center vertically, except 8 inches (200 mm) on center if drip crimped. b. Maximum offset between brick and block coursing is 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) using Ladur-Eye or Seismic-Eye type reinforcing. If brick and block coursing is exactly lined up, standard Ladur type Dur-O-Wal type reinforcing may be used. However, such reinforcing may not be bent to fit coursing that does not line up. c. Lap splices and intersections minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Masonry Reinforcing Steel: a. Place steel as shown on Drawings. b. Splice 48 bar diameters minimum. c. Place reinforcing and dowels before pouring grout. d. Dowel vertical reinforcing bars out of structure below with bars of same size and spacing.

D.

E.

Composite Unit Masonry

-4-

04 2713

Project # 503-6925-11010101 e.

f. g. F.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Place horizontal bars in 8 inch 200 mm deep bond beam units at top of wall and at 48 inches (1 200 mm) on center between. Continue bond beam units and reinforcement uninterrupted around corners. Place special vertical bars of same size as normal vertical reinforcement at corners and openings. Hold vertical reinforcing in place every 32 inches (800 mm).

08.29.11

Grouting: 1. Fully grout cells containing reinforcing bars. a. Grout solid all CMU cells. b. Grout solid between CMU wall and brick. c. Place grout in 48 inch (1 200 mm) maximum lifts. d. Consolidate grout by means of mechanical vibrator. Do not use cell reinforcing to rod grout. e. Before loss of plasticity, mechanically reconsolidate grout.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace defective material at Architect's direction and at no additional cost to Owner.

3.5

PROTECTION A. Protect masonry with cover during rainy weather: 1. Cover top of unfinished masonry work to protect from weather and to prevent accumulation of water in cores of CMU.

3.6

CLEANING A. General: 1. After mortar has hardened, wet masonry and clean with specified cleaning compound. 2. Use stiff fibered brush for application. 3. Rinse masonry surfaces with water immediately after cleaning. 4. Leave masonry clean, free of mortar daubs, and with tight mortar joints. Waste Management: 1. Clean up masonry debris and remove from site.

B.

END OF SECTION

Composite Unit Masonry

-5-

04 2713

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I O N 05: M E T A L S
05 0000 METALS

05 0503 SHOP-APPLIED METAL COATINGS 05 0523 METAL FASTENINGS 05 1000 S T R U C T U R A L M E T A L F R A M I N G 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1223 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS 05 4000 C O L D - F O R M E D M E T A L F R A M I N G

05 5000 M E T A L F A B R I C A T I O N S 05 5133 WALL-MOUNTED LADDERS 05 7000 D E C O R A T I V E M E T A L

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

05 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 05 0503 SHOP-APPLIED METAL COATINGS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of factory or shop-applied priming applied to steel supplied to Project without finish coat. 2. Quality of and procedures for field touch-up and repair of factory-applied priming and galvanizing. 3. Quality of and procedures for shop-applied finish applied to steel supplied to Project for Steeple Base Support as described in contract documents. Related Requirements: 1. Sections under 09 9000 heading: Finish painting.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A780/A780M-09, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.' b. ASTM B695-04, 'Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel.'

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. In addition to requirements of Section 01 3100, Meet with Architect before commencing repair of galvanized surfaces to establish extent of repairs required and, if applicable, choice of methods to be used.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Product data and samples, if requested by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

FINISHES A. Factory And Shop-Applied Primer: 1. Compatible with and of equal or better quality than finish paint system to be applied by Sections under 09 9000 heading. 2. Primer on unexposed, unfinished surfaces may be fabricator's standard shop coat. Repairs To Primed Surface:

B.

Shop-Applied Metal Coatings

-1-

05 0503

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Unless otherwise specified, use primer which matches characteristics of original primer and is compatible with and of equal or better quality than finish paint system to be applied by Sections under 09 9000 heading.

08.29.11

D.

Material For Repairs Of Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Non-Structural, Non-Load-Bearing Items Not Exposed To Weather: a. Zinc-Rich Paints: 1) Zinc-Dust Content: Dried film shall contain 94 percent minimum of zinc-dust by weight. 2) Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Galvax by Alvin Products Inc, Everett, MA www.alvinproducts.com. b) ZRC Galvilite by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA www.zrcworldwide.com. c) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2. Structural, Load-Bearing Items And Items Exposed To Weather: a. Zinc-Based Solders, Powder, Or Rod: 1) Zinc-Cadmium solder with liquidus temperature range from 518 to 527 deg F (270 to 275 deg C), or 2) Zinc-Tin-Lead alloy with liquidus temperature range from 446 to 500 deg F (230 to 260 deg C). b. Sprayed Zinc: Wire, ribbon, or powdered zinc suitable for process. Steeple Base Support: 1. Finish: a. Corlar 2.1-ST satin high solids epoxy mastic by Dupont Industrial Coatings. 1) Thickness: Apply 10 mils thick. b. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Dupont Industrial Coatings, Wilmington, DE www.dupont.com. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

E.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. General: a. Clean, grind, or otherwise prepare welds in steel that is to be coated within limits acceptable to welder responsible for structural integrity. b. Surfaces to be coated shall be clean, dry and free of oil, grease, and corrosion products. 2. Preparation Of Primed, Ungalvanized Surfaces: a. Clean welds and grind serious abrasions. 3. Preparation Of Galvanized Surfaces: a. Follow requirements of ASTM A780/A780M and following: b. For Repair Using Zinc-Rich Paints: 1) Blast clean surfaces to near-white metal, in accordance with SSPC-SP10 (1 to 2 mil anchor pattern), as minimum. 2) Where circumstances do not allow blast cleaning, power disk sand to bright metal finish. 3) Extend surface preparation into undamaged galvanized area. 4) Remove flux residue and weld spatter from welded areas. c. For Repair Using Zinc-Based Alloys: 1) Clean surface to be reconditioned using wire brush, light grinding action, or mild blasting. 2) Extend surface preparation into surrounding, undamaged galvanized areas. 3) Remove flux residue and weld spatter from welded areas. 4) Preheat cleaned area to at least 600 deg F (316 deg C). a) Do not overheat surface beyond 750 deg F (400 deg C) or allow surrounding galvanized coatings to be burned. b) Wire brush surface during preheating.

Shop-Applied Metal Coatings

-2-

05 0503

Project # 503-6925-11010101 d.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

For Repair Using Sprayed Zinc (Metallizing): 1) Blast clean surfaces to near-white metal, in accordance with SSPC-SP5 as minimum. 2) Extend surface preparation into undamaged galvanized area. 3) Remove flux residue and weld spatter from welded areas.

3.2

REPAIR / RESTORATION A. Repairs To Primed, Ungalvanized Surfaces: 1. Thoroughly clean metal and give one prime coat of specified material, well-worked into metal joints and open spaces. Match existing primed finish as required. a. Do not apply primer at temperatures below 45 deg F (7 deg C). b. Protect un-primed machine-finished surfaces against corrosion by priming. Repairs To Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Non-Structural, Non-Load-Bearing Items Not Exposed To Weather: a. Repair Using Zinc-Rich Paints: Spray- or brush-apply zinc-rich paint to prepared area. Apply paint in single application employing multiple spray passes to achieve dry film thickness of 2 mils. 2. Structural, Load-Bearing Items And Items Exposed To Weather: a. Repair Using Zinc-Based Alloys: 1) Rub cleaned, pre-heated areas with repair stick to deposit evenly distributed layer of zinc alloy. If powdered zinc alloys are used, sprinkle powder on surface and spread out with spatula or similar tool. 2) Remove flux residue by rinsing with water or wiping with damp cloth. b. Repair Using Sprayed Zinc (Metallizing): Apply 2 mil minimum coating by means of metalspraying pistols fed with either zinc wire or zinc powder in accordance with requirements of ASTM B695, Type I. 3. All Items: a. Apply repair materials immediately after surface preparation is complete. b. Take thickness measurements, with either magnetic or electromagnetic gauge, to ensure applied coating is as specified or agreed to.

B.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Steeple Base: a. Touch-up damaged coatings.

3.4

PROTECTION A. Steeple Base: 1. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.

END OF SECTION

Shop-Applied Metal Coatings

-3-

05 0503

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 05 0523 METAL FASTENING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of structural metal-to-metal, wood-to-metal, and wood-to-wood bolts used on Project. 2. Requirements and standards for site welded metal-to-metal connections. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 1511: Cast-in-place and drilled-in anchor bolts. 2. Furnishing and installing of structural bolts specified under Section concerned. 3. Performance of welding specified under Section concerned.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A36 / A36M-08, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.' b. ASTM A307-07b, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. c. ASTM A325-09a, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.' 2. American National Standards Institute / American Welding Society:: a. ANSI / AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008 02-Jul-2008, Structural Welding Code - Steel, Second Printing, Includes Errata (2009).' b. ANSI / AWS D1.3/D1.3M:2008 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel, Fifth Edition, with Errata.'

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. Welders shall be certified 30 days minimum before beginning work on Project. If there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Architect may require welder to take another test, at no expense to Owner. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Laboratories or other authority approved by Architect. Certifications: 1. Maintain welder's certifications on job-site.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Materials: 1. Bolts And Threaded Fasteners: a. Anchor Rods For Steeple Base Connections: Conform to requirements of ASTM A36. b. Bolts: Conform to requirements of ASTM A307, Grade A.

Metal Fastening

-1-

05 0523

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.2 ACCESSORIES A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Arc-Welding Electrodes: Type E70XX AWS Iron and Steel Arc-welding electrodes and meeting current AISC Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PERFORMANCE A. B. Welding shall meet requirements of ANSI / AWS D1.1 and D1.3. Minimum weld sizes, unless detailed otherwise. 1. Weld pipe columns to base plates and top plates with 1/4 inch (6 mm) fillet weld all around. 2. Weld glu-lam connection side plates to base plates with 1/4 inch (6 mm) fillet weld all along outside edges. 3. Weld stiffeners to pipe columns with 1/4 inch (6 mm) fillet weld all around.

END OF SECTION

Metal Fastening

-2-

05 0523

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install structural steel framing as part of building structure as described in Contract Documents. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Structural anchors, plates, channels, angles, etc, to be cast into concrete. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 03 3111: Installation of structural items to be cast into concrete. 8. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Installation of structural items to be embedded in masonry.

B. C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 4. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 5. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. -105 1200

B.

Structural Steel Framing

Project # 503-6925-11010101

6. 7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. C.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

Reference Standards: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction: a. AISC 303-05, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. American National Standards Institute / American Institute of Steel Construction: a. ANSI / AISC 341-05, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings (including Supplement No. 1 (ANSI / AISC 341s1-05). b. ANSI / AISC 358-05, Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications. c. ANSI / AISC 360-05, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 3. American National Standards Institute / American Society for Nondestructive Testing (Following are specifically referenced for Structural Steel testing): a. ANSI / ASNT CP-189-2006, Standard for Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel. b. ANSI / ASNT SNT-TC-1A-2006, Non-Destructive Testing. 4. American Welding Society. (Following are specifically referenced for Structural Steel testing): a. AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008, Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. AWS D1.3/D1.3M:2008, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. c. AWS D1.4:2005, Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. d. AWS QC1:2007, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors. 5. ASTM International: a. ASTM A36/A36M-08, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.' b. ASTM A53/A53M-07, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, ZincCoated, Welded and Seamless.' c. ASTM A500/A500M-09, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.' d. ASTM A992/A992M-06a, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.'

Structural Steel Framing

-2-

05 1200

Project # 503-6925-11010101

6.

7. 8.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake e. ASTM D412 - 06ae2, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic ElastomersTension. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for Structural Steel testing): a. ASTM A324-08, Standard Specification for Ferrotitanium. b. ASTM A325-09a, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. c. ASTM A435 / A435M-90(2007), Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates. d. ASTM A898 / A898M-07, Standard Specification for Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural Shapes. e. ASTM A490-09, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. f. ASTM A490M-09a, Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints [Metric]. g. ASTM E114-95(2005), Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Straight-Beam Examination by the Contact Method. h. ASTM E164-08, Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments. i. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. j. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. k. ASTM E587-00(2005), Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination by the Contact Method. l. ASTM E709-08, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing. m. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies. Code of Federal Regulations: a. 29 CFR 1910, Subpart A, Section 1910.7, Definition and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) - (Following are specifically referenced for Structural Steel testing): a. FEMA 350, Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel Moment-Frame Buildings, dated July 2000. b. FEMA 353 Appendix E, Recommended Specifications and Quality Assurance Guidelines for Steel Moment-Frame Construction for Seismic Applications, dated July 2000.

08.29.11

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 2. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. a. Review frequency of testing and inspections. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing structural steel framing.

B.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Submit product data and samples, if requested by Architect. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Shop drawings and calculations, prepared and stamped by structural engineer, shall include, but not be limited to, plans, elevations, and large scale details of typical sections, connections, joining, and accessories. b. Show other fabricated work.

Structural Steel Framing

-3-

05 1200

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Fabricator certificates. b. Welding certificates.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

C.

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Inspection Reports of structural steel framing.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: 1. Inspector Qualifications: a. All inspectors shall be trained and competent in accordance with quality assurance plan in Section 01 4523. b. Bolting Inspector Qualifications: 1) Each bolting Inspector shall be trained and qualified to inspect bolting operations and high strength bolted connection for compliance with RCSC Specification and Quality Assurance Plan. 2) Competency shall be demonstrated through administration of written examination and through hands-on demonstration by Inspector of methods to be used for bolt installation and inspection. c. Non-destructive testing Personnel Qualifications: 1) NDT personnel shall be qualified under either ANSI / ASNT CP-189 or ANSI / ASNT SNT-TC-1A. 2) Ultrasonic Testing (UT) shall be performed only by certified ASNT Level III technicians or by certified ASNT Level II technicians acting under direct supervision of ASNT Level III technician. 3) Technicians who perform flaw detection or sizing shall be trained in applicable procedures and authorized to operate in jurisdiction in which Project is located and shall demonstrate their competence through testing as prescribed in FEMA 353 Appendix E for all connections that are part of SFRS. d. Welding Inspector Qualifications: 1) All Welding Inspectors shall meet qualification as set forth in ANSI / AWS D1.1. 2) For welds in SWD Categories A and B, Welding Inspectors shall be AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI) or Senior Certified Welding Inspectors (SCWI) as defined in AWS QC1, Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. 3) Bolting Inspectors shall be ICC Structural Steel Inspectors. 2. Fabricator Qualifications: a. Qualified Fabricator who participates in AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for inspection of Structural Steel Framing: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Materials: 1. Beams, Columns, Angles, Channels, and Miscellaneous steel parts of steel framing systems. a. Meet requirements of ASTM A36/A36M. -405 1200

Structural Steel Framing

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2. 3.

4. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake b. S, HP, C, or TEE shapes in horizontal or vertical application, together with angles, plates, etc, as shown on Drawings. Beams 'W' shapes: Meet requirements of ASTM A992/A992M without supplementary requirements. Structural Pipe: a. Meet requirements of ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1) Weight Class, STD, Schedule 40. 2) Weight Class, XS, Schedule 80. Structural Tubing: Meet requirements of ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.

08.29.11

Fabrication: 1. Requirements: Structural metal shall be product of domestic mill. 2. ANSI / AISC 360 shall serve as minimum standard. 3. Fabricate items to be embedded in concrete or masonry according to approved details of work to be connected. Finishes: Shop prime structural steel.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Do not begin structural steel framing erection until structural support components have been installed and are in suitable condition to receive framing.

3.2

ERECTION A. Special Techniques: 1. Standards: a. AISC's 'Specification for Structural Steel Buildings' March 2005 and 'Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges' March 2005 shall serve as minimum standards. Erection includes setting, aligning, and bracing as necessary. 2. Do not overload or exceed carrying capacity of any structural steel element during construction period. 3. Bridging installation shall proceed concurrently with truss erection and be completed before trusses are subjected to construction loads. a. Do not remove bridging after construction is complete. 4. Plates or Channels Embedded in Concrete: a. Tack weld bolts to plates or channels to prevent bolts from turning when nuts are tightened. 5. Immediately after erection, clean completed field connections and damaged surfaces with solvents and hand or power tools. After cleaning, apply corrosion-resistant primer compatible with factory-applied primer. Interface With Other Work: 1. Furnish items to be embedded in concrete or masonry to Division 03 or 04 respectively in time to be securely tied in place before placing concrete and grout.

B.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. 1. Field Tests And Inspections: Structural Steel - General: a. Inspection during fabrication is not required if fabricator is registered and approved to perform such work without inspection. Field testing and field inspection of steel is not required. -505 1200

Structural Steel Framing

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Structural Steel - General: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection of structural steel including following: b. Mill Certificates: 1) Mill certificates or affidavits and manufacturers certification shall be supplied to inspector for verification of steel materials. 2) Testing laboratory shall be notified at least three weeks in advance of fabrication and supplied with reports so that shop inspection may be performed. c. General Inspection: 1) Testing Agency shall be at fabricators plant to verify that materials used match mill tests or affidavits of test reports; that fabrication, welding procedures, surface preparation, and shop painting meet specifications; and that work in progress conforms to project requirements. 2) Testing Agency shall visually check fabricated steel delivered to job to confirm that work is in compliance with approved shop drawings and shall make any physical tests, measurements, etc., believed to be necessary. 3) Testing Agency shall witness and report all corrections performed by steel fabricator occurring on fabricators own initiative. d. Bolting Requirements: All inspection shall conform to requirements of current edition of Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. 1) Miscellaneous Metal: Where miscellaneous angles, channels, studs, and similar shapes are detailed for support of major components of work, welds, bolts, and material are subject to same testing requirement as other structural supporting members. 2) Inspections shall include required verification and inspection of steel construction as referenced in IBC Table 1704.3 and in accordance with AISC 360 and applicable ASTM material standards, and AISC 360, Section M2.5. Periodic and continuous inspections include: a) Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts and washers: (1) Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards specified in approved construction documents (periodic). (2) Manufacturers certificate of compliance required (periodic). b) Inspection of high-strength bolting: (1) Snug-tight joints. (2) Pretensioned and slip-criteria joints using turn-of-nut with matchmarking, twist-off bolt or direst tension indicator methods of installation (periodic). (3) Pretension and slip-critical joints using turn-of-nut without matchmarking or calibrated wrench methods of installation (continuous). e. Welding Requirements: Inspection shall be provided by Testing Agency for all welding in accordance with Building Code. 1) Nondestructive testing shall be performed as required by Building Code and ANSI / AWS D1.1 as specified herein for all shop and field welds. 2) All welds shall be visually inspected. Welds considered suspect shall be further checked by other means deemed necessary by welding inspector. 3) Ultrasonically test 100 percent of all complete penetration welds and 100 percent of all partial-penetration column splice welds. 4) Ultrasonically test all joints where base metal is thicker than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), when subjected to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains. Joint shall be ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly behind such welds after joint completion. 5) When ultrasonic indications arising from weld root cannot be interpreted as either weld defect or backing strip itself, backing strip shall be removed at expense of Contractor, and if no root defect is visible, weld shall be re-tested. If no defect is indicated on this re-test, and no significant amount of weld metal has been removed, no further repair of welding is necessary. If defect is indicated, it shall be repaired at no expense to Owner. 6) Perform Magnetic Particle (MP) tests of fillet welds larger than 5/16 inch (8 mm). 7) Inspector shall perform magnetic particle testing in accordance with ASTM E709 for any questionable welds. 8) Exceptions: a) When approved by Owner and/or Architect and Structural Engineer, rate of testing for ultrasonic testing of complete-penetration welds may be reduced in accordance with following: -605 1200

Structural Steel Framing

Project # 503-6925-11010101

f.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake (1) Nondestructive testing rate for individual welder or welding operator may be reduced to 25 percent, provided reject rate is demonstrated to be 5 percent or less of welds tested for welder or welding operator. Sampling of at least 40 completed welds for job shall be made for such reduction evaluation. Reject rate is defined as number of welds containing rejectable defects divided by number of welds completed. (2) For complete penetration groove welds on materials less than 5/16 inch (8 mm) thick, nondestructive testing is not required provided continuous inspection is provided. (3) When approved by building official, nondestructive ultrasonic testing may be performed in shop of AISC approved fabricator utilizing qualified test techniques in employment of fabricator. b) Other ultrasonic or magnetic particle testing may be reduced by approval of Owner and/or Architect and Structural Engineer upon presentation of satisfactory documentation submitted by Contractor. c) There shall be no exceptions to testing requirements for SFRS. 9) Inspections shall include required verification and inspection of steel construction as referenced in IBC Table 1704.3 and in accordance with AISC 360, Section A3.5 and applicable AWS A5 documents, AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.4, and ACI 318, Section 3.5.2. Periodic and continuous inspections include: a) Material verification of weld filler materials: (1) Identification markings to conform to AWS designation listed in WPS (periodic). (2) Manufacturers certificated of compliance required (periodic). b) Inspection of welding: (1) Structural steel and cold-formed steel deck. (a) Complete and partial joint penetration groove welds (continuous). (b) Multipass fillet welds (continuous). (c) Single-pass fillet welds > 5/16 inch (8 mm) (continuous). (d) Plug and slot welds (continuous). (e) Single-pass fillet welds 5/16 inch (8 mm) (periodic). (2) Reinforcing steel. (a) Verification of weldability of reinforcing steel other than ASTM A706 (periodic). (b) Reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames, and boundary elements of special structural walls of concrete and shear reinforcement (continuous). (c) Shear reinforcement (continuous). (d) Other reinforcing steel (periodic). Steel Frame Requirements: 1) Inspections shall include required verification and inspection of steel frame as referenced in IBC Table 1704.3 and in accordance with AISC 360 and Applicable ASTM material standards. Periodic inspections include: a) Inspection of steel frame joint details compliance with approved construction documents: (1) Details such as bracing and stiffening (periodic). (2) Member locations (periodic). (3) Applications of joint details at each connection (periodic).

08.29.11

END OF SECTION

Structural Steel Framing

-7-

05 1200

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 05 1223 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Miscellaneous structural steel. 2. Lintels. 3. Structural pipe for bollards. 4. Structural pipe for satellite dish base. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3053: Installation of bollards and satellite dish base. 2. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Installation of lintels, channel frames, and miscellaneous structural steel. 3. Section 05 0503: Quality of priming. 4. Section 05 0523: Quality of welding. 5. Section 06 1100: Installation of miscellaneous structural steel.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American Society For Testing And Materials: a. ASTM A36/A36M-08, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.' b. ASTM A53/A53M-07, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, ZincCoated, Welded and Seamless.' c. ASTM A500/A500M-09, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.'

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Materials: 1. Lintels, Glue-Laminated Structural Unit Connections, Under-Platform Door Frames, Channel Frames, And Miscellaneous Structural Steel: Meet requirements of ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Structural Pipe. a. Meet requirements of ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1) Weight Class, STD, Schedule 40. 2) Weight Class, XS, Schedule 80. 3) Weight Class, DXS. 3. Structural Tubing: Meet requirements of ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. Fabrication: 1. After fabrication and before shop priming, hot-dip or mechanically galvanize lintels to be installed in exterior walls, bollards, satellite dish base, and channel frames. 2. Shop prime steel provided under this Section. Finishes: 1. Shop Primer: a. Concealed Steel: Fabricator's standard shop coat. -105 1223

B.

C.

Structural Steel for Buildings

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Exposed Steel To Receive Finish: Primer shall be acceptable to Finish Manufacturer.

08.29.11

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Structural Steel for Buildings

-2-

05 1223

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 05 5133 WALL-MOUNTED LADDERS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Metal Ladders. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0503: Quality of priming. 2. Section 05 0523: Quality of welding. 3. Section 06 2001: Installation. 4. Section 09 9124: Painting of interior ladders.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American Ladder Institute / American National Standards Institute: a. ALI A 14.3-2008,American National Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements.' 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A36 / A36M-08, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.'

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Materials: 1. Stringers: 3/8 by 2-1/2 inch (9.5 by 63 mm) flat bar stock. 2. Treads: One inch (25 mm) round rungs. 3. Mounting Brackets: Drilled angles. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate ladders to comply with requirements of ALI A 14.3. 2. Weld joints. Grind joints to be smooth to the touch and finished to match adjoining surfaces. 3. Space treads 12 inches (300 mm) on centers. 4. Fabricate mounting brackets of drilled angles. 5. Prime interior ladders.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Support ladder with welded steel brackets located at top and bottom, and equally spaced but no more than 60 inches (15 000 mm) on center between top and bottom where ladder is installed against a wall. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ALI A 14.3.

END OF SECTION

Wall-Mounted Ladders

-1-

05 5133

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I O N 06: W O O D, P L A S T I C S, A N D C O M P O S I T E S
06 0000 W O O D, P L A S T I C S, A N D C O M P O S I T E S

06 0573 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT 06 1000 R O U G H C A R P E N T R Y 06 1011 06 1100 06 1636 06 1712 06 1733 06 1753 WOOD FASTENINGS WOOD FRAMING WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER: SCL WOOD 'I' JOISTS SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES: TRUSSED RAFTERS

06 2000 F I N I S H C A R P E N T R Y 06 2001 COMMON FINISH CARPENTRY REQUIREMENTS 06 2024 DOOR, FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION 06 2210 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM 06 4000 A R C H I T E C T U R A L W O O D W O R K 06 4001 06 4005 06 4114 06 4115 06 4512 COMMON ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK REQUIREMENTS PLASTIC LAMINATE WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS ROSTRUM CASEWORK ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM

06 6000 P L A S T I C F A B R I C A T I O N S 06 6001 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06 8000 C O M P O S I T E F A B R I C A T I O N S

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

06 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 06 0573 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of wood preservative treatment where specified. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: a. Characteristics of wood to be pressure-treated. b. Furnishing and installing of pressure-treated wood.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC 2303.1.8.17, Preservative-treated Wood. Definitions: 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Wood that is exposed to high levels of moisture or heat is susceptible to decay by fungus and other organisms, and to insect attack. The damage caused by decay or insects can jeopardize the performance of the wood members so as to reduce the performance below that required by the code. IBC Section 2304.11 identifies the locations where the use of preservative-treated wood is required. It is important to note that preservative treatment requires a pressure-treatment process. Painting, coating or other surface treatment does not produce preservative-treated wood that will perform as required. The treatment process uses pressure to achieve the depth of penetration of preservative into the wood which is needed to verify that the wood will be resistant to decay and insects over time. Surface treatments may be washed away by rain or ground water, or may chip or peel. The American Wood Preservers Association is the consensus standard writing organization for treated wood. 2. Treated Wood: Treated wood is manufactured to reduce the ability of the wood to propagate flame or to resist damage caused by fungus or insects. Several American Wood Preserver Association (A WP A) standards are prescribed in IBC Section 2303.1.8. These include water borne as well as several oil borne standards for treatment testing and quality control of various wood and wood-based products. The American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) also accredits third party inspection agencies, in a manner similar to their grading rules certification, for the quality control of preservative treated wood products. Facsimiles of accredited agencies' quality marks for treatment are available from ALSC. Reference Standards: 1. American Wood-Preserver's Association: a. AWPA C1-96, 'All Timber Products, Pressure Treatment.' b. AWPA C2-96, 'Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties, Pressure Treatment.' c. AWPA C31-xx, 'Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously Protected from Liquid Water.' d. AWPA C33-xx, 'Standard for Preservative Treatment of Structural Composite Lumber by Pressure Processes.' e. AWPA P5-xx. 'Waterborne Preservatives.'

B.

C.

Preservative Wood Treatment

-1-

06 0573

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Informational Submittals: 1. Certificate: Certificate of pressure treatment showing compliance with specification requirements and including information required under IBC Section 2303.1.8.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Arch Wood Protection Inc, Smyrna, GA www.wolmanizedwood.com. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Thomson, GA www.frtw.com. c. Osmose Inc, Griffin, GA www.osmose.com. d. U S Borax Inc, Valencia, CA www.borax.com/wood. e. VIANCE, Charlotte, NC www.treatedwood.com. f. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Performance: 1. Framing lumber grade and species shall be as specified in Section 06 1100 for particular use. 2. Interior Wood In Contact With Concrete or Masonry: a. Preservatives: 1) Disodium octoborate tetrahydrate (DOT / SBX) meeting requirements of AWPA C31 and with retention of 0.25 lbs per cu ft (4 kg per cu meter). 2) Zinc borate meeting requirements of AWPA C33 and with retention of 0.17 lbs per cu ft (2.7 kg per cu meter). b. Lumber: Treat in accordance with AWPA C31 or C33 and dry after treatment. 3. Exterior Wood Continuously Exposed To Weather: a. Preservatives: Waterborne preservatives meeting requirements of AWPA C2 with retention levels as required by AWPA C2 for specific application. b. Lumber: Treat in accordance with AWPA C2 and dry after treatment.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Preservative Wood Treatment

-2-

06 0573

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 06 1011 WOOD FASTENINGS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of wood fastening methods and materials used for Rough Carpentry unless specified otherwise. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 1511: Quality of Anchors and Inserts. 2. Section 05 0523: Quality of bolts used for Rough Carpentry. 3. Furnishing and installing of other fasteners are specified in individual Sections where installed.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards; 1. APA-The Engineered Wood Association: a. APA AFG-01: Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Wood Framing (September 1974). 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM D3498-03, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems b. ASTM F1667-05, Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature on framing anchors and powder actuated fasteners. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Submit diameter and lengths of fasteners proposed for use on Project. If length or diameter of proposed fasteners differ from specified fasteners, also include technical and engineering data for proposed fasteners including, but not limited to: 1) Adjusted fastener spacing where using proposed fasteners and, 2) Adjusted number of fasteners necessary to provide connection capacity equivalent to specified fasteners. b. Submit on powder-actuated fasteners other than those specified in Contract Documents showing design criteria equivalents at each application. c. Show type, quantity, and installation location of framing anchors. Where necessary, reference Drawing details, etc, for installation locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: 1. Nail Terminology: a. When following nail terms are used in relation to this Project, following lengths and diameters will be understood. Refer to nails of other dimensions by actual length and diameter, not by one of listed terms: -106 1011

Wood Fastenings

Project # 503-6925-11010101 Nail Term 8d Box 8d Common 10d Box 10d Common 16d Box 16d Sinker 16d Common B.

08.29.11 Length 2-1/2 inches 2-1/2 inches 3 inches 3 inches 3-1/2 inches 3-1/4 inches 3-1/2 inches Diameter 0.113 inch 0.131 inch 0.128 inch 0.148 inch 0.135 inch 0.148 inch 0.162 inch Length 63.5 mm 63.5 mm 76.2 mm 76.2 mm 88.9 mm 82.6 mm 88.9 mm

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Diameter 2.827 mm 3.389 mm 3.251 mm 3.759 mm 3.411 mm 3.759 mm 4.115 mm

Materials: 1. Fasteners: a. Fasteners in contact with preservative treated wood shall be hot-dipped galvanized or G-185 coated. b. Nails: 1) Meet requirements of ASTM F1667. 2) Unless noted otherwise, nails listed on Drawings or in Specifications shall be common nail diameter, except 16d nails, which shall be box diameter. c. Wood Screws: 1) SDS Screws: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of categories. (1) SDS Screws by Simpson Strong Tie Co, Dublin, CA www.strongtie.com. 2) All Other: Standard type and make for job requirements. d. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: 1) Type One Quality Standard: Hilti X-DNI 62P8. 2) Manufacturers: a) Hilti, Tulsa, OK www.us.hilti.com. b) Redhead Division of ITW, Wood Dale, IL www.itw-redhead.com and Markham, ON www.itwconstruction.ca. c) Equals as approved by Architect through shop drawing submittal before installation. See Section 01 6200. 2. Adhesives: a. Construction Mastics: 1) Meet requirements of APA-The Engineered Wood Association Specification AFG-01 or ASTM D3498. 2) Use phenol-resorcinol type for use on pressure treated wood products. 3. Framing Anchors: a. Framing anchors and associated fasteners in contact with preservative treated wood shall be hot-dipped galvanized, G-185 coated, or stainless steel. However, do not use stainless steel items with galvanized items. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) KC Metals Inc, San Jose, CA www.kcmetals.com. 2) Simpson Strong Tie Co, Dublin, CA www.strongtie.com. 3) United Steel Products Co Inc (USP), Montgomery, MN www.uspconnectors.com. 4) Equals as approved by Architect through shop drawing submittal before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

ERECTION A. Secure one Manufacturer approved fastener in each hole of framing anchor that bears on framing member unless approved otherwise in writing by Architect. Provide washers with bolt heads and with nuts bearing on wood.

B.

Wood Fastenings

-2-

06 1011

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 END OF SECTION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Wood Fastenings

-3-

06 1011

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 1100 WOOD FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wood framing and blocking as described in Contract Documents. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Hanger brackets with bolts, nuts, and washers for basketball standards. 2. Glue-laminated structural units. 3. Miscellaneous structural steel elements. 4. Roof related blocking, wood nailers, and curbs. 5. Structural composite lumber. 6. Wood 'I' joists. 7. Wood panel product sheathing. 8. Wood trusses. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 1223: Furnishing of miscellaneous structural steel. 2. Section 06 0573: Quality of Preservative Wood Treatment. 3. Section 06 1636: Furnishing of wood panel product sheathing. 4. Section 06 1712: Furnishing of structural composite lumber. 5. Section 06 1733: Furnishing of wood 'I' joists. 6. Section 06 1753: Shop fabricated wood trusses. 7. Section 06 1800: Furnishing of glue-laminated structural units. 8. Section 06 4313: Wood stair treads and risers. 9. Sections in Division 07: Roofing membranes for related blocking, wood nailers, and curbs. 10. Section 11 6624: Furnishing of hanger brackets with bolts, nuts, and washers for basketball standards.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Technology Administration, U. S. Department of Commerce: a. Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 20-05, 'American Softwood Lumber Standard.' 2. Truss Plate Institute / Wood Truss Council of America: a. TPI / WTCA Building Component Safety Information BCSI 2008, Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.'

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference immediately before beginning framing work. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Equipment and gypsum board blocking in wood framed walls. b. Operable partition headers. c. Rough opening requirements d. Shear walls and struts.

Wood Framing

-1-

06 1100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 e. f. g. Nails and nailing requirements. Truss installation. Connections.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Technical and engineering data on nails to be set by nailing guns for Architect's approval of types proposed to be used as equivalents to specified hand set nails and adjusted number and spacing of pneumatically-driven nails to provide equivalent connection capacity. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Copies of pamphlets specified in REFERENCE Article. After Architect's examination, keep pamphlets on Project site with approved shop drawings. Pamphlets may be obtained from Truss Plate Institute, Wood Truss Council of America, or from Truss Fabricator. 3. Qualification Statements: a. Alternate Supplier: See Section 01 4301 for supplier qualifications. 1) Provide documentation of the following: a) Firm experience in supplying products indicated for this Project. b) Financial stability. c) Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. d) Comply with specifications and contract documents. e) Agree to complete reporting documents, including: (1) Agree to provide total costs to the Church including breakdown costs of dimensional lumber, structural composite lumber, wood panel productsheathing, wood I joists and glued-laminated members.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at job site. 2. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store lumber and plywood on level racks and keep free of ground to avoid warping. 2. Stack to insure proper ventilation and drainage. 3. Handle and store wood trusses in accordance with ANSI / WTCA Booklet BSCI except trusses may be unloaded by dumping if trusses are shipped horizontally, are rolled off low profile roller bed trailer, and no part of any truss is required to drop more than 18 inches (450 mm).

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SUPPLIERS A. Suppliers: 1. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. J. M. Thomas Forest Products, Ogden, UT. www.thomasforest.com. Contact Tom Karren: 1) Office: (800) 962-8780. 2) FAX: 801-782-9652. 3) E-Mail: tom@thomasforest.com. b. Matheus Lumber, Inc. Vancouver, WA. www.matheuslumber.com. Contact Larry Tommerup: 1) Office: (360) 693-1702, (866) 693-0003. 2) Cell: (360) 921-1036. -206 1100

Wood Framing

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c.

d.

3) FAX: (360) 693-1884. 4) E-Mail: larry@matheuslumber.com. Shelter Products, Inc., Portland, OR www.shelter-products.com. Contact David M. Routt: 1) Office: (800) 881-3628. 2) Cell: (503) 807-5153. 3) FAX: (503) 238-2663. 4) E-Mail: droutt@shelter-products.com. Stock Building Supply, Roy, UT. www.stockbuildingsupply.com. Contact Craig Rees: 1) Office: (801) 436-2203. 2) Mobile: (801) 301-0326. 3) FAX: 801-436-2282. 4) E-Mail: craig.rees@stocksupply.com.

2.2

MATERIALS A. Wood Framing List: 1. Provide VMR Suppliers with wood framing list. Dimension Lumber: 1. Meet requirements of PS 20 and National Grading Rules for softwood dimension lumber. 2. Bear grade stamp of WWPA, SPIB, or other association recognized by American Lumber Standards Committee identifying species of lumber by grade mark or by Certificate of Inspection. 3. Lumber 2 inches (50 mm) or less in nominal thickness shall not exceed 19 percent in moisture content at time of fabrication and installation and be stamped 'S-DRY', 'K-D', or 'MC15.' 4. Lumber shall be S4S. 5. Preservative Treated Plates / Sills: a. 2x4 (38 mm by 64 mm): Standard and better Douglas Fir, Southern Pine, or HemFir, or StrandGuard by iLevel by Weyerhaeuser Boise, ID www.ilevel.com. (LSL 1.3 E) b. 2x6 (38 mm by 140 mm) And Wider: No. 2 or or MSR 1650f - 1.5e Douglas Fir, Southern Pine, HemFir, or StrandGuard by iLevel by Weyerhaeuser, Boise, ID www.ilevel.com. (LSL 1.3 E). Posts, Beams, And Timbers 5 Inches by 5 Inches (125 mm by 125 mm) And Larger: 1. No. 1 or better Douglas Fir or Southern Pine. Lumber Ledgers: 1. No. 2 Douglas Fir-Larch, or Southern Pine. See drawings for additional requirements.

B.

C.

D.

E.

2.3

ACCESSORIES A. Folding Partition Headers: 1. New, unused plywood conforming to plywood specification requirements of Section 06 1636. Blocking: 1. Sound lumber without splits, warps, wane, loose knots, or knots larger than 1/2 inch (13 mm). Furring Strips: 1. Utility or better. Sill Sealer: 1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by width of plate.

B.

C.

D.

Wood Framing

-3-

06 1100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Use preservative treated wood for wood members in contact with concrete or masonry, including wall, sill, and ledger plates, door and window subframes and bucks, etc. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with other Sections for location of blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties. Do not allow installation of gypsum board until required blocking is in place. 2. Where manufactured items are to be installed in framing, provide rough openings of dimensions within tolerances required by manufacturers of such items. Confirm dimensions where not shown on Drawings. Tolerances: 1. Walls: a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 20 feet (6 meters), non-cumulative in length of wall. b. 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 meters) with 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum in height of wall. c. Distances between parallel walls shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum along length and height of wall. Floors: 1. Place with crown side up. 2. Provide accurately fitted header and trimmer joists of same size as regular joists around floor openings, unless detailed otherwise, and support by steel joist hangers. 3. Double joists under partitions that parallel run of joists. Walls: 1. Openings: Single, bearing stud supporting header and one adjacent (king) stud continuous between top and bottom plates, unless shown otherwise. 2. Corners And Partition Intersections: Triple studs. 3. Top Plates In Bearing Partitions: Doubled or tripled and lapped. Stagger joints at least 48 inches (1 200 mm). 4. Ends Of Stud Wall To Masonry. Use one of the following methods: a. Connect with 1/2 inch (13 mm) machine bolts 6 inches (150 mm) from top, 6 inches (150 mm) from bottom, and 48 inches (1 200 mm) maximum on center. Use three bolts minimum in height of 6 foot (1 800 mm) or higher wall. b. Secure wood to masonry using continuous 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum bead of construction adhesive and powder actuated fasteners installed at 32 inches (800 mm) on center minimum. 5. Firestops: a. Horizontal or vertical concealed spaces in walls, light coves, soffits, drop ceilings, and other features over 10 feet (3 000 mm) in length or height, and at stairs, ceiling levels, floor levels, and other junctures of horizontal to vertical concealed spaces. b. Within concealed spaces of exterior wall finishes and exterior architectural elements, such as trims, cornices or projections, at maximum intervals of 20 feet (6 000 mm), length or height. 6. Sill Plates: a. Shear Walls And Bearing Walls: 1) Provide specified anchor 12 inches (300 mm) maximum and 4 inches (100 mm) minimum from each end of each plate. 2) Shear Walls: Fasten with anchor bolts embedded in concrete or with screw anchors. 3) Bearing Walls: Fasten with anchor bolts embedded in concrete, or with screw anchors or expansion bolts in drilled holes. b. Non-Structural Walls: Fasten with powder actuated fasteners.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Wood Framing

-4-

06 1100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

7.

8.

9.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake c. In addition to requirements of paragraphs 'a' and 'b' above, set sill plates of interior walls measuring less than 36 inches (900 mm) in length in solid bed of specified construction adhesive, except where sill sealer is used. d. Install specified seal sealer under sill plates of exterior walls of main building and of acoustically insulated interior walls. Posts And Columns: a. Unless shown otherwise, nail members of multiple member columns together with 16d at 6 inches (150 mm) on center from each side. Beams And Girders: a. Built-Up Members: 1) Stagger individual members of multiple span beams and girders so, over any one support, no more than half the members will have a joint. In all cases, however, joints shall occur over supports. 2) Unless shown otherwise on Drawings, nail two-ply built-up members with 10d nails 12 inches (300 mm) on center top and bottom, staggered on opposite sides. Nail three-ply built-up members with 16d nails at 12 inches (300 mm) on center, top and bottom, staggered, on opposite sides. Set with crown edge up with full bearing at ends and intermediate supports. b. Pre-Fabricated Members: 1) Solid glu-lam, LVL, LSL, or PSL members may be used in place of built-up 2x (38 mm) framing members. Size shall be same as built-up member. 2) Solid LVL or PSL members may be used in place of built-up LVL members. Size shall be same as sum of built-up members. c. Wood shims are not acceptable under ends. d. Do not notch framing members unless specifically shown in Drawing detail. Nailing: a. Stud to plate: 2 by 4 inch nominal 38 by 89 mm End nail, two 16d OR toe nail, four 8d 2 by 6 inch nominal 38 by 140 mm End nail, three 16d OR toe nail, four 8d 2 by 8 inch nominal 38 by 184 mm End nail, four 16d OR toe nail, six 8d 2 by 10 inch nominal 38 by 235 mm End nail, five 16d OR toe nail, six 8d 1-3/4 by 5-1/2 inch LVL 44 by 140 mm LVL End nail, three 16d OR toe nail, four 8d 1-3/4 by 7-1/4 inch LVL 44 by 184 mm LVL End nail, four 16d OR toe nail, six 8d 1-3/4 by 9-1/4 inch LVL 44 by 235 mm LVL End nail, five 16d OR toe nail, six 8d 1-3/4 by 11-1/4 inch LVL 44 by 286 mm LVL End nail, six 16d OR toe nail eight 8d b. Top plates: Spiked together, 16d, 16 inches (400 mm) on center. c. Top plates: Laps, lap members 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum and nail with 16d nails 4 inches (100 mm) on center d. Top plates: Intersections, three 16d. e. Backing And Blocking: Three 8d, each end. f. Corner studs and angles: 16d, 16 inches (400 mm) on center.

08.29.11

F.

Roof And Ceiling Framing: 1. Place with crown side up at 16 inches (400 mm) on center unless noted otherwise. 2. Install structural blocking and bridging as necessary and as described in Contract Documents. 3. Special Requirements: a. Roof And Ceiling Joists: Lap joists 4 inches (100 mm) minimum and secure with code approved framing anchors. b. Roof Rafters And Outlookers: 1) Cut level at wall plate and provide at least 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) bearing where applicable. Spike securely to plate with three 10d nails. 2) Attach to trusses or other end supports with framing anchors described in Contract Documents. 3) Provide for bracing at bearing partitions. 4. Installation of Wood Trusses: a. Handle, erect, and brace wood trusses in accordance with TPI / WTCA Booklet BCSI. b. Do not install damaged or broken wood trusses. Replace wood trusses that are broken, damaged, or have had members cut out during course of construction. c. Do not set trusses until masonry bearing walls and masonry shear walls are complete.

Wood Framing

-5-

06 1100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

5.

6.

7.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake d. Provide construction bracing for trusses in accordance with TPI DSB-89. e. Provide continuous 2x4 horizontal web bracing as shown on truss shop drawings. 1) Secure bracing to each truss with two 10d or 16d nails. 2) Lap splice bracing by placing bracing members side by side on common web member. Butt splices are not acceptable. f. Unless directed or shown otherwise, provide diagonal 2x4 bracing between trusses at each line of horizontal web bracing. 1) This diagonal bracing shall be continuous and extend from junction of web and top chord of one truss to junction of web and bottom chord of different truss. 2) Install bracing at approximately 45 degree angle. Bracing will extend over three trusses minimum or more as determined by height of trusses and 45 degree installation angle. 3) Install brace on side of web opposite horizontal web bracing and nail to each web with two 10d or 16d nails. 4) Install one brace every 20 feet as measured from top of brace to top of next brace. Installation of Glue-Laminated Structural Units: a. Install work in accordance with Fabricators instructions and Glue-Lam Erection Safety Practices. b. Adequately support and brace work until tied into building structure to insure against collapse due to wind or other forces. c. Maintain protection of beams until roofing has been installed. Installation of Structural Composite Lumber: a. Install temporary horizontal and cross bracing to hold members plumb and in safe condition until permanent bracing is installed. b. Install permanent bracing and related components before application of loads to members. Installation of wood Web Joists: a. Handle, erect, and brace plywood web joists in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. b. Do not install damaged or broken wood web joists. c. Install temporary horizontal and cross bracing to hold members plumb and in safe condition until permanent bracing is installed. d. Cut holes through webs at locations or of sizes shown on Drawings and as recommended by Manufacturer.

08.29.11

G.

Folding Partition Structural Headers: 1. Provide for double or single track as required by Folding Partition Manufacturer. 2. Stagger joints in plywood. 3. Glue plywood layers together with continuous bead 2 inches (50 mm) in from each edge and every 4 inches (100 mm) on center between. In addition, Screw layers together with 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) screws one inch (25 mm) in from each edge and 12 inches (300 mm) on center for length of header. 4. Secure headers and header backing to structure as described in Contract Documents. Accessory / Equipment Mounting And Gypsum Board Back Blocking (nailers): 1. Furnish and install blocking in wood framing required for hardware, specialties, equipment, accessories, and mechanical and electrical items, etc. Furring Strips 1. On Wood or Steel: Nail or screw as required to secure firmly. 2. On Concrete or Masonry: a. Back up furring strips on exterior walls or walls in contact with earth with 15 lb (6.8 kg) felt strip. b. Nail at 12 inches (300 mm) on center maximum.

H.

I.

END OF SECTION

Wood Framing

-6-

06 1100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 1636 WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wood panel product sheathing required for walls, roofs, and floors as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 6200: Administrative and procedural requirements for product options. 7. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 8. Section 06 1100: Wood Framing.

A.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions: 1. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 2. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 3. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 4. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 5. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant

B.

Wood Panel Product Sheathing

-1-

06 1636

Project # 503-6925-11010101

6.

7.

8. 9.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Technology Administration, U. S. Department of Commerce: a. Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 1-07. Structural Plywood. b. Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 2-04, Performance Standard for Wood-based Structural-Use Panels.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 06 1100. 2. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control inspection required of this section. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing sheathing.

B.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Statement: a. Alternate Supplier: See Section 01 4301 for supplier qualifications. 1) Provide documentation of the following: a) Firm experience in supplying products indicated for this Project. b) Financial stability. c) Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. d) Comply with specifications and contract documents. e) Agree to complete reporting documents, including: (1) Agree to provide total costs to the Church including breakdown costs of dimensional lumber, structural composite lumber, wood panel productsheathing, wood I joists and glued-laminated members. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Inspection Reports of sheathing.

B.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for inspection of sheathing: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary. -206 1636

Wood Panel Product Sheathing

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required. 2. Protect sheathing and keep under cover in transit and at job site. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store sheathing on level racks and keep free of ground. 2. Stack to insure proper ventilation and drainage.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Suppliers: 1. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. J. M. Thomas Forest Products, Ogden, UT. www.thomasforest.com. Contact Tom Karren: 1) Office: (800) 962-8780. 2) FAX: 801-782-9652. 3) E-Mail: tom@thomasforest.com. b. Matheus Lumber, Inc. Vancouver, WA. www.matheuslumber.com. Contact Larry Tommerup: 1) Office: (360) 693-1702, (866) 693-0003. 2) Cell: (360) 921-1036. 3) FAX: (360) 693-1884. 4) E-Mail: larry@matheuslumber.com. c. Shelter Products, Inc., Portland, OR www.shelter-products.com. Contact David M. Routt: 1) Office: (800) 881-3628. 2) Cell: (503) 807-5153. 3) FAX: (503) 238-2663. 4) E-Mail: droutt@shelter-products.com. d. Stock Building Supply, Roy, UT. www.stockbuildingsupply.com. Contact Craig Rees: 1) Office: (801) 436-2203. 2) Mobile: (801) 301-0326. 3) FAX: 801-436-2282. 4) E-Mail: craig.rees@stocksupply.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Meet requirements of PS 1, PS 2, PRP-108 (APA), or PRP-133 (TECO). Except where plywood is specifically indicated on Drawings, oriented strand board (OSB) is acceptable. Materials: 1. Wood framing list: a. Provide VMR Suppliers with wood framing list. 2. Sheathing: a. Sheathing shall bear grade stamp from American Plywood Association (APA) or equal grading organization. b. Sheathing shall not exceed 18 percent moisture content when fabricated or more than 19 percent when installed in Project. c. Sheathing 23/32 inch (18.3 mm) thick and thicker used for single-layer subflooring shall be tongue and groove. d. Sheathing used for same purpose shall be of same thickness. In all cases, thickness specified is minimum required regardless of span rating. e. Minimum span ratings for given thicknesses shall be as follows: Thickness Span Rating

B.

C.

Wood Panel Product Sheathing

-3-

06 1636

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3/8 inch 7/16 inch nominal 15/32 inch actual 1/2 inch nominal 19/32 inch actual 5/8 inch nominal 23/32 inch actual 3/4 inch nominal

08.29.11 9.5 mm 11 mm nominal 11.9 mm actual 12.5 mm nominal 15.1 mm actual 15.9 mm nominal 18.3 mm actual 19 mm nominal 24 / 0 24 / 16 32 / 16 32 / 16 40 / 20 40 / 20 48 / 24 48 / 24

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Nails: 1. As indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Top of nail heads shall be flush with sheathing surface. 2. Use of edge clips to provide spacing between sheathing panels is acceptable. Wall Sheathing: 1. Spacing: a. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) space between sheets at end and edge joints. 2. Edge Bearing And Blocking: a. Panel edges shall bear on framing members and butt along their center lines. b. Back block panel edges, which do not bear on framing members, with 2 inch nominal (45 mm) framing. 3. Nail Spacing: a. As indicated on Drawings. b. Place nails not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in from edge. 4. Thickness: a. As indicated on Drawings. 5. Do not install any piece of wall sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 12 inches (300 mm). Roof Sheathing: 1. Placing: a. Lay face grain at right angles to supports. Provide blocking for support if framing turns at roof overhang. b. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) space between sheets at end and side joints. c. Stagger panel end joints. d. Sheathing shall be continuous of two spans minimum. 2. Nail Spacing: a. As indicated on Drawings. b. Place nails at least 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in from edge. 3. Thickness: a. As indicated on Drawings. 4. Do not install any piece of roof sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 24 inches (600 mm) unless support is provided under all edges. Floor Sheathing: 1. Floor Sheathing: 1 Layer Subflooring. a. Apply bead of glue to structural supports. Lay face grain / strength axis across supports and with panel continuous over two supports minimum. -406 1636

B.

C.

D.

Wood Panel Product Sheathing

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b. c. d.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

Allow expansion gap of at least 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) at walls. Tongue and Groove. Nail Spacing. 1) As indicated on Drawings. e. Thickness: 1) As indicated on Drawings. f. Do not install any piece of bottom layer floor sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 24 inches (600 mm). Subflooring: 2 Layers Subflooring. a. Bottom layer: 1) Glue subflooring layers together along lines of structural supports. 2) Leave 1/32 inch (1 mm) gap at side and end joints. 3) Nail as per floor sheathing nailing requirements. 4) Thickness: a) 19/32 inch actual (15 mm) minimum thickness, except where specifically noted otherwise. 5) Do not install any piece of single layer floor sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 24 inches (600 mm). b. Top layer: 1) Stagger joints of second layer subflooring so they do not line up with joints of first layer subflooring, but do align with intermediate structural member (for example, align with field nailing of bottom subflooring layer). 2) Glue subflooring layers together along lines of structural supports. 3) Leave 1/32 inch (1 mm) gap at side and end joints. 4) Nail at 6 inch (150 mm) centers on ends and 12 inch (300 mm) centers on intermediate structural members. 5) Thickness: a) 19/32 inch actual (15 mm) minimum thickness, except where specifically noted otherwise. 6) Do not install any piece of single layer floor sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 24 inches (600 mm).

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspections: 1. Wood Sheathing: a. For walls and roof areas where nail spacing is 4 inches (100 mm) and less on center, the inspector shall verify wood panel sheathing, grade, thickness and nominal size of framing members, adjoining panel edges, nail size and spacing, bolting and other fastening of other components.

3.3

PROTECTION A. Protect roof sheathing from moisture until roofing is installed.

END OF SECTION

Wood Panel Product Sheathing

-5-

06 1636

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 1712 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER: SCL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL). 2. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL). 3. Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL). Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Installation.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. International Code Council (ICC): a. ICC-ES Evaluation Reports, www.icc-es.org. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D2559-04, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions.' b. ASTM D545608, Standard Specification for Evaluation of Structural Composite Lumber Products.'

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: Provide certification confirming that material structural design properties and design stresses have met or exceed requirements shown on Drawings. 2. Qualification Statements: a. Alternate Supplier: See Section 01 4301 for supplier qualifications. 1) Provide documentation of the following: a) Firm experience in supplying products indicated for this Project. b) Financial stability. c) Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. d) Comply with specifications and contract documents. e) Comply with specifications and contract documents. f) Agree to complete reporting documents, including: (1) Agree to provide total costs to the Church including breakdown costs of dimensional lumber, structural composite lumber, wood panel productsheathing, wood I joists and glued-laminated members.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store members on job site in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Keep dry and provide supports to keep members off floor or ground. -106 1712

Structural Composite Lumber: SCL

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Split plastic wrappers of members stored encased in plastic on bottom side to allow for air circulation.

08.29.11

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Suppliers: 1. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. J. M. Thomas Forest Products, Ogden, UT. www.thomasforest.com. Contact Tom Karren: 1) Office: (800) 962-8780. 2) FAX: 801-782-9652. 3) E-Mail: tom@thomasforest.com. b. Matheus Lumber, Inc. Vancouver, WA. www.matheuslumber.com. Contact Larry Tommerup: 1) Office: (360) 693-1702, (866) 693-0003. 2) Cell: (360) 921-1036. 3) FAX: (360) 693-1884. 4) E-Mail: larry@matheuslumber.com. c. Shelter Products, Inc., Portland, OR www.shelter-products.com. Contact David M. Routt: 1) Office: (800) 881-3628. 2) Cell: (503) 807-5153. 3) FAX: (503) 238-2663. 4) E-Mail: droutt@shelter-products.com. d. Stock Building Supply, Roy, UT. www.stockbuildingsupply.com. Contact Craig Rees: 1) Office: (801) 436-2203. 2) Mobile: (801) 301-0326. 3) FAX: 801-436-2282. 4) E-Mail: craig.rees@stocksupply.com. 5) Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of categories. a. Boise Cascade Corp, Boise, ID www.bc.com. b. iLevel by Weyerhaeuser, Boise, ID www.ilevel.com or Surrey, BC (604) 588-7878. c. Louisiana Pacific Corp, Portland, OR www.lpcorp.com. Design Criteria: 1. Materials shall be tested and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D5456. 2. Materials shall have current ICC-ES Evaluation Report, report approved by International Codes Council, or report issued by Architect approved model code evaluation service and shall comply with requirements of report. Materials: 1. Wood framing list: a. Provide VMR Suppliers with wood framing list. 2. Members: a. Identify materials by stamp or stamps indicating manufacturer's name, product trade name, grade, species (if applicable), evaluation report number, plant number, and name or logo of independent inspection agency. 3. Adhesive: Meet requirements of ASTM D2559. Fabrication: Materials shall be manufactured in a plant evaluated for fabrication by governing code evaluation service and under supervision of third party inspection agency listed by governing code evaluation service.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Structural Composite Lumber: SCL

-2-

06 1712

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

END OF SECTION

Structural Composite Lumber: SCL

-3-

06 1712

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 1733 WOOD 'I' JOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Plywood web 'I' joists, web stiffeners, and components. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Installing, securing, bracing, etc.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. International Code Council (ICC): a. ICC, 500 New Jersey Avenue, NW, 6th Floor, Washington, DC 20001, Phone (888) ICCSAFE (422-7233) www.iccsafe.org. b. ICC-ES Evaluation Reports, www.icc-es.org. 2. Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC): a. National Research Council of Canada, NRC Communications & Corporate Relations, 1200 Montreal Road, Bldg. M-58, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1A 0R6 www.nrc-cnrc.gc.ca.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Include following information on submitted shop drawings: 1) Show critical dimensions for determining fit and placement in building as well as loads joists are designed to support. 2) Flange material and sizes. 3) Size, thickness, and dimension of web. 4) Lumber species and grades used. 5) Web stiffener locations, make-up, and installation. 6) Name and trademark of Manufacturer. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: Copies of ICC reports showing approval of connections and webs. 2. Qualification Statements: a. Alternate Supplier: See Section 01 4301 for supplier qualifications. 1) Provide documentation of the following: a) Firm experience in supplying products indicated for this Project. b) Financial stability. c) Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. d) Comply with specifications and contract documents. e) Comply with specifications and contract documents. f) Agree to complete reporting documents, including: (1) Agree to provide total costs to the Church including breakdown costs of dimensional lumber, structural composite lumber, wood panel productsheathing, wood I joists and glued-laminated members.

B.

Wood 'I' Joists

-1-

06 1733

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store joists in vertical position protected from weather. 2. Handle with care to prevent damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Suppliers: 1. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. J. M. Thomas Forest Products, Ogden, UT. www.thomasforest.com. Contact Tom Karren: 1) Office: (800) 962-8780. 2) FAX: 801-782-9652. 3) E-Mail: tom@thomasforest.com. b. Matheus Lumber, Inc. Vancouver, WA. www.matheuslumber.com. Contact Larry Tommerup: 1) Office: (360) 693-1702, (866) 693-0003. 2) Cell: (360) 921-1036. 3) FAX: (360) 693-1884. 4) E-Mail: larry@matheuslumber.com. c. Shelter Products, Inc., Portland, OR www.shelter-products.com. Contact David M. Routt: 1) Office: (800) 881-3628. 2) Cell: (503) 807-5153. 3) FAX: (503) 238-2663. 4) E-Mail: droutt@shelter-products.com. d. Stock Building Supply, Roy, UT. www.stockbuildingsupply.com. Contact Craig Rees: 1) Office: (801) 436-2203. 2) Mobile: (801) 301-0326. 3) FAX: 801-436-2282. 4) E-Mail: craig.rees@stocksupply.com. 5) Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of categories. a. Boise Cascade Corp, Boise, ID www.bc.com. b. iLevel by Weyerhaeuser, Boise, ID www.ilevel.com or Surrey, BC (604) 588-7878. c. Louisiana Pacific Corp, Portland, OR www.lpcorp.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Provide joists that meet the load capacity and stiffness requirements shown on Drawings. b. Custom design joists under supervision of registered professional engineer. Designs shall be in accordance with allowable values assigned by building code approval. c. Only connections and webs currently approved by Research Committee of ICC are acceptable for use. Materials: 1. Wood framing list: a. Provide VMR Suppliers with wood framing list.

B.

C.

D.

Wood 'I' Joists

-2-

06 1733

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.2 FABRICATION A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Fabrication of joists shall be as approved by ICC, except where requirements of Contract Documents exceed ICC requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Wood 'I' Joists

-3-

06 1733

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 1753 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES: Trussed Rafters

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Wood roof trusses. 2. Trussed blocking for roof trusses. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary. 2. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 3. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 4. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 5. Section 06 1100: Wood Framing: a. Storage and handling of trusses on Project site. b. Installing, securing, bracing, etc. c. Required blocking other than trussed blocking.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Truss Plate Institute: a. ANSI / TPI 1-2007, National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction. 2. International Code Council (ICC): a. ICC / ESR-1082 (Reissued February 1, 2010), Eagle Metal Products Eagle 20, Eagle 18, Eagle 20HS and Eagle 18HS Metal Truss Connector Plates. b. ICC / ESR-1118 (Reissued January 1, 2009), Alpine Wave, H, S, K, Trulox, and Hinge Plate Metal Connector Plates for Wood Trusses. c. ICC / ESR-1988 (Reissued June 1, 2008), MiTek Truss Connector Plates: TL18, MT18, MT18HS, TL20 AND MT20. 3. International Standards Organization (ISO) 17020, General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection. 4. Truss Plate Institute / Structural Building Components Association (SBCA): a. TPI / SBCA Structural Building Components Association Components Safety Information BCSI 2008, Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.' 5. Wood Truss Council of America (WTCA).

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Truss design drawings:

Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

-1-

06 1753

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1)

2)

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Base truss design drawings on truss configurations and truss loads and requirements of Contract Documents. Joint configurations may be modified to allow double cut webs. Determine member forces from exact analysis method as defined by TPI. Include following information:: a) Allowable loads in lbs per effective nail or lbs per sq inch for lumber and plates used as allowed by ICBO and current ICBO report number. b) Stress reduction factors used for plates and lumber. c) Top and bottom chord design loads in psf. d) Size, thickness, and exact location by dimension of plates. e) Lumber species and grades used. f) Combine stress index for each member. g) Stamp and signature of Engineer responsible for preparation of drawings. h) Name and trademark of Plate Manufacturer if metal plates are used. i) Name and address of Truss Fabricator and Project name and address.

08.29.11

B.

Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Complete and provide copy of certification Truss Plant Certification Requirements Form to Architect before bid. b. Provide copy of truss plant certification with completed Truss Plant Certification Requirements Form to Architect and Testing Agency before commencing fabrication of Wood Trusses. 2. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Copies of previous four quarterly inspection reports verifying compliance with TPI regulations unless the Truss Fabricator provides proof that they are certified and in good standing with the In-Plant WTCA QC program certification.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Truss Fabricator shall have in place a program requiring fabrication plant to be inspected four times each year by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with TPI regulations. 2. Truss Fabricator must have a letter providing evidence that they are certified and in good standing with their third party accredited Quality Assurance business.

1.5

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Notify Architect two days minimum before arrival of trusses to allow for scheduling of truss inspection on site before unloading and for monitoring of unloading procedure. 2. Unload trusses by one of following methods. a. As outlined in TPI / SBCA Booklet BCSI. b. Trusses may be unloaded by dumping if trusses are shipped horizontally, are rolled off low profile roller bed trailer, and if no part of any truss is required to drop more than 18 inches (450 mm). 3. After delivery of trusses: a. Inspect for damage before installing trusses. b. Inspect for gaps between framing members.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Performance: -206 1753

Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Design Criteria: a. Top And Bottom Chords And Web Members: 1) 2 inch (50 mm) by 4 inch (100 mm) nominal minimum size. 2) Sizes, species, and grades of members shall be as required to provide combined stress indexes of less than one. 3) Designed in accordance with ANSI / TPI-1 for given design loads. b. Metal Gusset Plates: 1) Plate design and manufacture shall be as approved by 'The Research Committee for the ICC'. 2) Truss plates for symmetrical trusses shall be same size on both sides of truss. Determine size to be used by highest loading value on either side of truss.

B.

Materials: 1. Top And Bottom Chords And Web Members: Douglas Fir or Southern Pine No. 2 or better. 2. Metal Gusset Plates: a. Plates shall be galvanized or otherwise protected from corrosion. b. Manufacturer's name or trademark shall be visible on plates. c. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Eagle Metal Products, Dallas, TX www.eaglemetal.com. 2) ITW Building Components Group, Glenview, IL www.itwbcg.com. 3) MiTek Industries, Chesterfield, MO www.mii.com. Or MiTek Canada, Bradford ON www.mii.com/canada. Fabrication: 1. General: a. Fabrication of trusses shall be as approved by ICC except that this Specification shall govern when it exceeds ICC requirements. b. Fabricate trusses from approved shop drawings. c. Fabricate trusses in jigs with members accurately cut to provide good bearing at joints. Joints shall be acceptable if the average opening between ends of members immediately after fabrication is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). d. Each chord section shall be involved in two panel points before being spliced. 2. Metal Gusset Plates: a. No panel point shall have more than one plate per truss side b. Plates shall have minimum bite of 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) on members. Measure bite along center line of webs and perpendicular to chord axes. Orient plate axis parallel with truss chord axis except where chords change pitch or terminate. Plates may be placed parallel with webs at single web joints. c. Plate Sizes: 1) Minimum width of plates shall be 3 inches (75 mm). 2) Size plates, nail and steel section for 110% of member forces. 3) No increase in plate values will be allowed for duration of loading or other factors. d. Press plates into members to obtain full penetration without crushing outer surface of wood. Plate embedment is acceptable if opening between plate and wood surface is less than 1/32 inch (1 mm). e. Lumber defects and plate misplacement, in combination, shall not reduce plate area or number of effective teeth, prongs, or nails by more than ten percent. f. Do not apply metal gusset plates after shop fabrication.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Prefabricated Metal Plate Wood Trusses:

Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

-3-

06 1753

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Testing Agency will obtain Truss Plant Certification Requirements Form copy from Architect as per requirements of Section 06 1753 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses: Trusses Rafters.

08.29.11

END OF SECTION

ATTACHMENTS

Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

-4-

06 1753

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

BLANK PAGE

Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

-5-

06 1753

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Truss Plant Certification Requirements Form


Wood Truss suppliers shall be certified as evidenced by submittal of a copy of the truss plant certification with this completed form to the Architect and Testing Agency before commencing fabrication of Wood Trusses. Metal Plate Connected (MPC) wood truss operations must design, manufacture and provide quality control and quality audits that comply with the latest edition of ANSI/TPI-1 promulgated by the Truss Plate Institute. The truss plant must be certified by an independent third party accredited Quality Assurance business such as, but not limited to, the Truss Plate Institute (TPI); the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, the Timber Products Inspection Bureau or the PFS Corp. The third party accredited Quality Assurance business must be under the auspices of the International Accreditation Services (IAS) or the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and be ISO/IES Standard 17020 compliant. The inspection/audit process is to be completely independent of the truss manufacturer. Truss plant shall fulfill the following requirements (see www.sbcindustry.com and www.tpinst.org or www.tpic.ca): _____ Shall have an independent and accredited third party inspection agency (Quality Assurance business) staff member visit the truss plant for the certification, and shall have at least one inspection done quarterly by an independent third party inspection agency that is itself certified. _____ Shall meet all necessary in-plant requirements including: The Acceptance Criteria for Quality Documentation (ICC AC-10) by the ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. which shall include the quality control requirements of the Product Standard of ANSI / TPI. Meeting the ANSI / TPI standard includes having an in-plant quality control manual, quality control procedures in place, and meeting the weekly inspection frequency. _____ Do inspections at the required frequency and of the type established by the certification program. Specifically as a minimum, three trusses per set up location per shift per week. _____ Not manufacture trusses or use components that do not comply with the requirements of this form and of the Contract Documents. _____ Provide proof of compliance to the requirements of this form and provide the proof to the General Contractor who will forward it to the Architect prior to the truss plant providing a bid. OR Truss plant shall be certified and be in good standing with the In-Plant WTCA QC program. This includes the following requirements (see www.sbcindustry.com and www.tpinst.org or www.tpic.ca): _____ Truss plant has been trained by SBCA on the ANSI/TPI 1 QC standard. _____ Truss plant has quarterly third party inspections, and that the third party has been trained by SBCA. _____ Truss plant has quality control manual that meets the AC-10 requirements. _____ Truss plant has quality control procedures in place including: meeting the weekly inspection frequency, performing detailed inspections, and documenting any inspection problems and how they were resolved. _____ Truss plant is sending their data quarterly to SBCA for review. _____ Truss plant shall not manufacture trusses or use components that do not comply with the requirements of this form and of the Contract Documents. In-Plant WTCA QC certified plants are listed at www.sbcindustry.com/wtcaqccertco.php.

Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

-6-

06 1753

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 2001 COMMON FINISH CARPENTRY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sealants required for items installed under this Section, as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install following items as described in Contract Documents: a. Decoration anchors in Cultural Center. b. Coat and Hat Hooks. c. Site-built attic access doors. d. Site-built attic access panels. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Architectural Woodwork. 2. Casings, stops, handrails, and jambs. 3. Chair Rails. 4. Factory Manufactured Access Doors. 5. Fixed Sound-Absorptive Panels. 6. Folding Partition hardwood jambs and trim. 7. Hardwood Base. 8. Hardwood Trim at light coves, speaker cabinets, etc. 9. Hardwood Trim for wall covering. 10. Fixed Shelving not part of casework. 11. Miscellaneous Wood Trim. 12. Plastic Laminate Countertops. 13. Rostrum Casework. 14. Selected Building Specialties. 15. Selected Equipment. 16. Window Stools 17. Wood Trim at Ceiling Crowns. 18. Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets. 19. Miscellaneous as specified elsewhere. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Furring and blocking. 2. Section 06 2210: Miscellaneous Wood Trim. 3. Sections under 06 4000 heading: Furnishing of Architectural Woodwork. a. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. b. Section 06 4001: Quality of wood materials to be used in Finish Carpentry. c. Section 06 4005: Plastic laminate countertops. d. Section 06 4114: Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets. e. Section 06 4115: Rostrum Casework. f. Section 06 4313: Wood Stairs. g. Section 06 4512: Architectural Woodwork. 4. Section 06 6001: Quality of Window Stools 5. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants, submittal and installation requirements. 6. Section 08 3110: Furnishing of Factory Manufactured Access Doors. 7. Section 09 8413: Furnishing of Fixed Sound-Absorptive Panels. 8. Sections under 09 9000 heading: Back priming of work to be installed against concrete or masonry or subjected to moisture, and finishing of finish carpentry and architectural woodwork. 9. Sections in Division 10: Furnishing of Specialties. -106 2001

B.

C.

Common Finish Carpentry Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

10. Sections in Division 11: Furnishing of Equipment.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada: a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009.' Definitions: 1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Economy Grade: The lowest acceptable grade in both material and workmanship requirements, and is for work where price outweighs quality considerations. b. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a projects quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. c. Premium Grade: The highest Grade available in both material and workmanship where the highest level of quality, materials, workmanship, and installation is required. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C578-10, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.'

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. B. Glue: Waterproof and of best quality. Coat And Hat Hooks: 1. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 581 by Ives, Indianapolis, IN www.iveshardware.com. b. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Cultural Center Decoration Anchors: 1. Bright zinc plated lag eyebolts, wire size 4, 3-7/8 inches (100 mm) minimum total length. 2. Class Two Quality Standard: 8414 by Stanley, New Britain, CT www.stanleyhardware.com or Oakville, ON (800) 441-1759. Site-built attic access doors. 1. Materials: a. Wood Panel Product Sheathing: 1) 3/4 inch nominal (19 mm nominal) minimum thickness by width and length as identified in Contract Documents and as specified in Section 06 1636 Wood Panel Product Sheathing. b. Board Insulation (Rigid Foam): 1) Meet requirements of ASTM C578, Type X or IX. 2) Type One Acceptable Products: a) Foamular 150 by Owens Corning, Toledo, OH www.owens-corning.com. b) Grayboard by Dow Chemical, Midland, MI www.dow.com. c) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 3) Adhesive: Any adhesive safe to use with extruded polystyrene. 2. Accessories: a. Continuous Slotted Piano Hinge. 1) 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) by width of access door. 2) Screw-holes at 2 inch (50 mm) on center. -206 2001

C.

D.

Common Finish Carpentry Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

b. c.

3) Brass-plated steel. 4) #5 flat head screws. Neoprene Gasket: 1) 3/4 inch (19 mm) continuous around door edge between door stop and door. Handle: 1) Door Pull: Manufacture standard with rounded contour. Provide screws.

E.

Site-built attic access panels. 1. Materials: a. Wood Panel Product Sheathing: 1) 3/4 inch nominal (19 mm nominal) minimum by width and length as identified in Contract Documents and as specified in Section 06 1636 Wood Panel Product Sheathing. 2) Sheathing as specified in Section 06 1636 Wood Panel Product Sheathing. b. Board Insulation (Rigid Foam): 1) Meet requirements of ASTM C578, Type X or IX. 2) Type One Acceptable Products: a) Foamular 150 by Owens Corning, Toledo, OH www.owens-corning.com. b) Grayboard by Dow Chemical, Midland, MI www.dow.com. c) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 3) Adhesive: Any adhesive safe to use with extruded polystyrene. 2. Accessories: a. Neoprene Gasket: 1) 3/4 inch (19 mm) continuous around door edge between door stop and door.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify walls, ceilings, floors, and openings are plumb, straight, in-line, and square before installing Architectural Woodwork. 2. Report conditions that are not in compliance to Architect before starting installation.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Install Architectural Woodwork after wall and ceiling painting is completed in areas where Architectural Woodwork is to be installed.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. AWS Custom Grade is minimum acceptable standard, except where explicitly specified otherwise, for installation of architectural woodwork. General Architectural Woodwork Installation: 1. Fabricate work in accordance with measurements taken on Project site. 2. Scribe, miter, and join accurately and neatly to conform to details. 3. Exposed surfaces shall be machine sanded, ready for finishing. 4. Allow for free movement of panels. 5. Countersink nails. Countersink screws and plug those exposed to view. Installation for Accessories: 1. Coat And Hat Hooks: -306 2001

B.

C.

Common Finish Carpentry Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. D.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

As shown in Contract Drawings.

Items Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: Install in accordance with requirements specified in Section furnishing item. 1. Window Stool: a. Install window stool to structure with silicone sealant as specified in Section 07 9213 Elastomeric Joint Sealant.

END OF SECTION

Common Finish Carpentry Requirements

-4-

06 2001

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 06 2024

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

DOOR, FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sealants for caulking door frames as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install insulation in doorframes as described in Contract Documents. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Flush wood doors. 2. Hollow metal doors. 3. Hollow metal door frames. 4. Finish hardware. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 2116: Quality of fiberglass insulation. 2. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants. 3. Sections under 08 1000 heading: Furnishing of doors and metal frames. 4. Sections under 08 7000 heading: Furnishing of finish hardware.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) 14150 Newbrook Drive, Suite 200 Chantilly, VA www.dhi.org, Installation Guide for Doors & Hardware' by Door & Hardware Institute.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference. 1. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Schedule conference after hardware has been delivered to site and organized into hardware groups by door, but before installation of hardware. b. Check for appropriate blocking and for correct hardware models and fasteners for substrates. c. Review submittals and set of Manufacturer's installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions submitted under Section 08 7101. d. Review use of crowbar or other prying devices are not permitted to be used to set door frame into wall opening.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Installer Report: a. Report verifying correct operation and adjustment of installed hardware. 2. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Copy of 'Installation Guide for Doors & Hardware' by Door & Hardware Institute. Guide may be obtained from Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).

Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation

-1-

06 2024

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Fire door installations shall meet code requirements.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Wood Doors: a. Do not have doors delivered to building site until after plaster, cement, and taping compound are dry. b. If doors are to be stored at job-site for more than one week, seal top and bottom edges if not factory sealed. 2. Metal Frames: a. Examine door frames and note damage upon acceptance. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Wood Doors: a. Store flat on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated building. 1) Cover to keep clean but allow air circulation b. Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces. c. Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity or sudden changes therein 1) Condition doors to average prevailing humidity of locality before hanging. 2. Metal Frames: a. Protect metal frames from damage before and during installation.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Site Tolerances: a. Squareness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from top edge to opposite top edge. b. Plumbness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from top of jamb to bottom of jamb. c. Alignment: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from plane of left side face of jamb to right side face of jamb. d. Twist: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) across throat of jamb plane measured across each face to plane of opposite jamb throat. e. Finished Clearance Between Door And Frame: 1) 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) at head and hinge jamb plus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) maximum 2) 1/8 inch (3 mm) at strike jamb plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) maximum. 3) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) to top of finished floor surface or 1/4 inch (6 mm) to top of threshold, plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) maximum. 2. Set frame in location and level head. a. Use of crowbar or other prying device to set door frame into wall opening will damage door frames and are not permitted to be used. 3. Equalize with adjustable floor anchor. 4. Set spreaders and fasten jambs to floor and wall. a. Wood spreaders shall be square, fabricated from lumber one inch minimum thick, be same length as door opening at header, and same depth as frame. b. Cut notches for frame stops. c. Do not remove spreaders until frames are permanently anchored in wall. d. Use one spreader at base of frame and another at strike level. -206 2024

Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation

Project # 503-6925-11010101

5.

6.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake e. Do not use temporary spreaders welded to base of jambs during installation of frame. Fill gap between frame and framing with urethane foam or tightly-packed fiberglass insulation. If urethane foam is used, foam interior of frames before installing frame. Trim excess before installation of frame. Caulking: a. Caulk around both sides of frames of doors receiving acoustical seals with specified sealant.

08.29.11

B.

Doors: 1. When Project is completed, doors shall not bind, stick, or be mounted so as to cause future hardware difficulties. 2. Do not impair utility or structural strength of door in fitting of door, applying hardware, or cutting and altering door louvers, panels, or other special details. Hardware: 1. General: a. Install using set of Manufacturer's installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions submitted with hardware under Section 08 7101. Follow as closely as possible. b. Mount closers on jamb stop side of door in parallel arm configuration where it is physically possible to do so and not damage or hinder operation of door or closer. 2. Hardware for Wood Doors: a. If doors are not factory-machined, use hardware templates furnished by Hardware Manufacturer when mounting hardware. b. Set hinges flush with edge surface. Be sure that hinges are set in a straight line to prevent distortion. c. Mount door latches high in strike plate opening so when door later settles, latch will not bind.

C.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Arrange to have keys brought to Project site and, in meeting attended by local representatives and Architect, test every new key and locking mechanism. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Door frames: a. Door frames damaged by use of crowbar or other prying devices to set door frames shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to Owner.

B.

3.3

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction of Owner: 1. Using Owner's Operations And Maintenance Manual, explain keying systems at same time keys and locking mechanisms are tested. Key Delivery: 1. Immediately before Final Acceptance Meeting, turn change keys over to Owner properly organized, tagged, and placed in new or existing key cabinet.

B.

END OF SECTION

Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation

-3-

06 2024

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 2210 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wood trim not specified elsewhere as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation. 2. Section 06 2001: Common Finish Carpentry Requirements. 3. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 4. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. 5. Section 06 4512: Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim. 6. Section 09 9324: Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. Definitions: 1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a projects quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. 2. Plain-Sawn: A hardwood figure developed by sawing a log lengthwise at a tangent to the annual growth rings. It appears as U-shaped or straight markings in the boards face.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: -106 2210

B.

Miscellaneous Wood Trim

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a)

08.29.11 Owner will provide Control Sample for finish.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. Meet requirements of Section 06 4001. 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Design Criteria: 1) Match materials specified in Section 06 4512. 2) Match finish specified in Section 06 4512 and match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324.

B.

2.2

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Miscellaneous Wood Trim

-2-

06 2210

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 4001 COMMON ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General standards for materials and fabrication of Architectural Woodwork and for hardware associated with Architectural Woodwork. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Furring and blocking. 2. Section 06 2001: Installation. 3. Section 06 2210: Miscellaneous Wood Trim. 4. Section 06 4005: Plastic Laminate. 5. Section 06 4114: Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets. 6. Section 06 4115: Rostrum Casework. 7. Section 06 4512: Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim. 8. Section 06 6001: Miscellaneous Plastic Fabrications. 9. Section 09 9324: Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood for filling of nail holes and finishing.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. Definitions: 1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a projects quality of materials, workmanship, or installation.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature for specialty items and hardware not manufactured by Architectural Woodwork fabricator. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Statement: a. Alternate Fabricator: See Section 01 4301 for fabricator qualifications. 1) Provide documentation of the following: a) Firm experience in supplying products indicated for this Project. b) Financial stability. c) Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. d) Comply with specifications and Contract Documents. e) Agree to complete reporting documents, including: -106 4001

B.

Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101 (1)

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Agree to provide total costs to the Church including breakdown costs of Millwork.

08.29.11

1.4

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Assemble architectural woodwork at Architectural Woodwork Fabricator's plant and deliver ready for erection insofar as possible. 2. Protect architectural woodwork from moisture and damage while in transit to job site. 3. Report damaged materials received. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Unload and store in place where it will be protected from moisture and damage and convenient to use.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

FABRICATORS A. Approved Fabricators. See Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements. 1. Category Four Approved Fabricators. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements. a. Anderson Cabinet and Millwork, Rigby, ID. 1) Contact Information: Tim Adelivvi (208) 538-7415 tim@andersoncabinet.net. b. Granite Mill & Fixture Co., Salt Lake City, UT www.granitemill.com. 1) Contact Information: Chris Sandberg (801) 467-3222 csandberg@granitemill.com. c. Thompson and Sons Cabinets, Deweyville, UT. 1) Contact Information: David Thompson (435) 257-3233 zcabinets@comcast.net. 2. Same Approved Fabricator shall furnish following Meetinghouse Specification Sections: a. Section 06 2210: Miscellaneous Wood Trim. b. Section 06 4005: Plastic Laminate. c. Section 06 4114: Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets. d. Section 06 4115: Rostrum Casework. e. Section 06 4512: Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim. f. Section 06 6001: Miscellaneous Plastic Fabrications.

2.2

ASSEMBLIES A. Performance / Design Criteria: 1. AWS Custom Grade is minimum acceptable standard, except where explicitly specified otherwise, for materials, construction, and installation of architectural woodwork. Materials: 1. Lumber: a. Grade: 1) No defects in boards smaller than 600 sq in (3 871 sq cm). 2) One defect per additional 150 sq inches (968 sq cm) in larger boards. 3) Select pieces for uniformity of grain and color on exposed faces and edges. 4) No mineral grains accepted. b. Allowable Defects: 1) Tight knots not exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in diameter. No loose knots permitted. 2) Patches (dutchmen) not apparent after finishing when viewed beyond 18 inches (450 mm). 3) Checks or splits not exceeding 1/32 inch by 3 inches (1 mm by 75 mm) and not visible after finishing when viewed beyond 18 inches (450 mm). -206 4001

B.

Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101

c.

d.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 4) Stains, pitch pockets, streaks, worm holes, and other defects not mentioned are not permitted. 5) Normal grain variations, such as cats eye, bird's eye, burl, curl, and cross grain are not considered defects. Use maximum lengths possible, but not required to exceed 10 feet (3 meters) without joints. No joints shall occur closer than 72 inches (1 800 mm) in straight runs exceeding 18 feet (3 600 mm). Runs between 18 feet (3 600 mm) and 10 feet (3 meters) may have no more than one joint. No joints shall occur within 72 inches (1 800 mm) of outside corners nor within 18 inches (450 mm) of inside corners. Moisture content shall be 6 percent maximum at fabrication. No opening of joints due to shrinkage is acceptable.

08.29.11

C.

Fabrication: 1. Follow Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) for fabrication of Architectural Woodwork. 2. Tolerances: a. No planer marks (KCPI) allowed. Sand wood members and surfaces with 100 grit or finer. b. Maximum Gap: None allowed. c. Flushness Variation: 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) maximum. d. Sanding Cross Scratches: 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. e. Plug screw holes. Screw locations not to be visible beyond 18 inches (450 mm). 3. Fabricate work in accordance with measurements taken on job site. 4. 'Ease' sharp corners and edges of exposed members to promote finishing and protect users from slivers. Radius of 'easing' shall be uniform throughout Project and between 1/32 and 1/16th of an inch. 5. Fabricate so veneer grain is vertical. 6. Joints: a. Use lumber pieces with similar grain pattern when joining end to end. b. Compatibility of grain and color from lumber to panel products is required. 7. Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. Leave operating hardware operating smoothly and quietly. 8. Remove or repair damaged surface of or defects in exposed finished surfaces of architectural woodwork to match adjacent similar undamaged surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements

-3-

06 4001

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 4005 PLASTIC LAMINATE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Wall-hung counters. 2. Countertops for custom casework. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: a. Installation of wall-hung counters. b. Installation of countertops for custom casework. 2. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 3. Section 22 4200: Plumbing Fixtures.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade. a. Premium Grade: The highest Grade available in both material and workmanship where the highest level of quality, materials, workmanship, and installation is required. 2. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): Laminated thermosetting decorative sheets intended for decorative purposes. The sheets consist essentially of layers of a fibrous sheet material, such as paper, impregnated with a thermosetting condensation resin and consolidation under heat and pressure. The top layers have a decorative color or a printed design. The resulting product has an attractive exposed surface that is durable and resistant to damage from abrasion and mild alkalies, acids, and solvents, meeting the requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD-3. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute: a. ANSI A161.2-1998, 'Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate Countertops.' 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association / American National Standards Institute: a. ANSI / NEMA LD-3-2005, 'High Pressure Decorative Laminates.'

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Color selections. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature for plastic laminate. b) Color selections. -106 4005

B.

Plastic Laminate

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

MATERIALS A. Fabricators: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. Manufacturers: 1. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Formica, Cincinnati, OH www.formica.com or Formica Canada Inc, St Jean sur Richelieu, PQ (450) 347-7541, all matte finish. b. Nevamar, Odenton, MD www.nevamar.com. c. Pionite Decorative Surfaces, Auburn, ME www.pionite.com. d. WilsonArt, Temple, TX www.wilsonart.com or WilsonArt International Inc, Mississuaga, ON (905) 565-1255. e. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Plastic Laminates: 1. Quality: a. Countertops: 1) Post-formed front edge and backsplash, except where detailed otherwise, with plastic laminate meeting requirements of ANSI / NEMA LD 3: PF 42. a) Vertical Applications: GP 28. b) Horizontal (other than countertops): GP 38. 2) No raised lip on front edge. b. Balancing Material: BK 20. c. AWS Quality Grade: Premium. 2. Assemblies: a. Countertops shall meet requirements of ANSI A161.2. b. Adhesives for other than post-formed types shall be spray grade, high heat resistant, neoprene contact adhesive. 3. Category Four Acceptable Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories. Color scheme to be selected from the following options: Color Scheme a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Emerald One: Emerald Two: Emerald Three: Garnet One: Garnet Two: Garnet Three: Sapphire One: Sapphire Two: Sapphire Three: Material Center, Chapel, and Clerk Pionite AT951-5 Nevamar ES-2-1T Formica 300-58 Pionite LG110-S Formica 7217-58 WilsonArt 2932-60 WilsonArt 4810-60 Nevamar MR-7-1T Nevamar TQ-2-1T Restrooms and Serving Area Pionite AT161 Nevamar MR-7-2T Formica 300-58 Pionite AT161 Formica 300-58 WilsonArt 4170-60 WilsonArt 4170-60 Nevamar MR-7-2T Nevamar MR-7-2T

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Plastic Laminate

-2-

06 4005

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 4114 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Custom casework. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation. 2. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 3. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. 4. Section 09 9324: Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood. 5. Section 22 4200: Plumbing Fixtures.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. Definitions: 1. Adhesive, Type I (fully waterproof): Forms a bond that will retain practically all of its strength when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying; bond shall be of such quality that specimens will withstand shear and the two-cycle boil test specified in ANSI/HPVA HP (latest edition). 2. Adhesive, Type II (water-resistant): Forms a bond that will retain practically all of its strength when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying; bond shall be of such quality that specimens will withstand the three-cycle cold soak test specified in ANSI/HPVA HP (latest edition). 3. Book-Match: Matching between adjacent veneer leaves on one panel face. Every other piece of veneer is turned over so that the adjacent leaves are opened as two pages in a book. The fibers of the wood, slanting in opposite directions in the adjacent leaves, create a characteristic light and dark effect when the surface is seen from an angle. 4. Concealed Surfaces: Top and bottom edges of wood unless the top edge is visible from above. 5. Core: The material (typically, veneer, lumber, particleboard, medium-density fiberboard, or a combination of these) on which an exposed surface material (typically, veneer or HPDL) is applied. 6. Core, Solid: The innermost layer or section in flush door construction. Typical constructions are as follows: a. Fiberboard Core: Manufactured from wood reduced to fine fibers mixed with binders and formed by the use of heat and pressure into panels. b. Particleboard - A solid core of wood or other lignocellulose particles bonded together with a suitable binder, cured under heat, and pressed into a rigid panel in a flat-platen press. 7. Edge Banding: Method of concealing plies or inner cores of plywood or particleboard when edges are exposed. 8. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces normally visible after installation. 9. Face: The better side of any panel in which the outer plies are of different veneer grades; also either side of a panel in which there is no difference in veneer grade of the outer plies.

B.

Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork

-1-

06 4114

Project # 503-6925-11010101 10. 11. 12.

13. 14.

15. 16. 17.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Face Veneer: The outermost exposed wood veneer surface of a veneered wood door, panel, or other component exposed to view when the project is completed. Flitch: A hewn or sawn log made ready for veneer production or the actual veneer slices of one half log, kept in order, and used for the production of fine plywood panels. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a projects quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. Plain-Sawn: A hardwood figure developed by sawing a log lengthwise at a tangent to the annual growth rings. It appears as U-shaped or straight markings in the boards face. Plain Slicing: Most commonly used for hardwood plywood. The log is cut in half, and one half is placed onto a carriage and moved up and down past a fixed knife to produce the veneers. Veneer is sliced parallel to the pith of the log and approximately tangent to the growth rings to achieve flat-cut veneer. Each piece is generally placed in a stack and kept in order. One half log, sliced this way, is called a flitch. Running Match: Each panel face is assembled from as many veneer leaves as necessary. Any portion left over from one panel may be used to start the next. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces that are only visible under closer examination. Veneer: A thin sheet or layer of wood, usually rotary cut, sliced or sawn from a log or flitch. Thickness may vary from 1/100 inch (0.3 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association: a. ANSI / HPVA HP-1-2004 01-Jan-2004 American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets for hardware. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Confirm compliance with Contract Document requirements as to configuration and dimensions of custom casework. b. Include plan and elevation views, materials used, standing and running trim profiles, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessories, and hardware. 3. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample(s) of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: a) Owner will provide Control Sample for finish. 2. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Copy of AWS manual with shop drawing submission.

B.

Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork

-2-

06 4114

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Mockups: 1. Before fabrication of complete casework package, submit section or sections of cabinetry containing typical drawer, shelving, cabinet door panel, and hardware. 2. Match Owner provided selected sample finish specified in Section 09 9324. 3. Mockups may be installed in Project after approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. 2. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Accuride, Santa Fe Springs, CA www.accuride.com. b. CompX National, Mauldin, SC www.nclnet.com. c. Glynn Johnson, Chicago, IL www.glynn-johnson.com. d. Grass America Inc, Kernerville, NC www.grassusa.com. e. Hafele, Archdale, NC www.hafele.com or Burlington, ON www.hafele.com/ca/en. f. Hager Companies, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com or Hager Hinge (Canada) Ltd, Kitchener, ON (519) 893-7580. g. Hardware Resources, Bossier City, LA www.hardwareresources.com. h. Ives, Indianapolis, IN www.iveshardware.com. i. Julius Blum Inc, Stanley, NC www.blum.com. j. Knape & Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI www.knapeandvogt.com or Knape & Vogt Canada, Mississaugua, ON (905) 676-8972. k. Mckinney, Scranton, PA www.mckinneyhinge.com or Markham, ON (905) 940-2040. l. Mepla-Alfit Inc, Lexington, NC www.mepla-alfit.com. m. Olympus Lock Co, Seattle, WA www.olympus-lock.com. n. Pride Industrial, Rancho Cucamonga CA www.prideindustrial.com. o. Saliche America Inc, Charlotte, NC www.saliceamerica.com. p. Stanley, New Britain, CT www.stanleyhardware.com. q. Techna-Base Inc, Pleasant Grove, UT (801) 361-2289 or dlundahl@earthlink.net r. Trimco, Los Angeles, CA www.trimcobbw.com Materials: 1. Wood Materials: a. Exposed: Plain sawn Red Oak. b. Semi-exposed And Concealed: Species as acceptable for AWS custom grade. 2. Panel Product: a. Cores: 1) Cabinet Doors: Medium density fiberboard (MDF) with minimum density of 48 lbs per cu ft (769 kg per cu meter). 2) All Other: Industrial grade particle board with minimum density of 45 lbs per cu ft (721 kg per cu meter). b. Facings: 1) Hardwood veneer facings shall be plain sliced Red Oak AWS Grade A, or equal by HPVA, NWWDA, or APA. 2) All other facings shall be Melamine or Kortron. c. Edgings: 1) Cabinet Doors And Drawer Fronts Higher Than 8 Inches (200 mm): a) 3/4 inch by 1/8 to 1/4 inch (19 mm by 3 to 6 mm) edge-band of wood species matching hardwood face veneer. 2) Shelves And Exposed Panel Product Edges: a) Hot-glued, 2 mm thick minimum, PVC edge-banding. Wood-grain, except color matching Melamine or Kortron surface at shelf edges.

B.

Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork

-3-

06 4114

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

4.

Semi-Exposed Panel Product Edges: a) Hot-glued, 0.018 inch (0.46 mm) thick minimum, wood grained PVC edge-banding. d. Glues (adhesives) used in manufacture and fabrication of panel products shall be Type I or II. e. Moisture content shall be same as specified for lumber. Casework Doors: a. Face Veneer: 1) Plain sliced Red Oak meeting requirements of AWS Grade A, 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick minimum immediately before finishing. 2) Face veneers shall be running book matched. b. Doors under 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) thick: Panel Product. c. Doors 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) or more thick: 1) Door Grade: AWS Custom hollow-core. 2) Stiles: a) 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) deep minimum before fitting. b) 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum of stile face to be hardwood matching face veneer material. 3) Rails: a) 1-1/8 inches (28.5 mm). b) Mill option material. Cabinet And Drawer Hardware: a. Cabinet And Drawer Pulls: 1) US26D steel-plated, brass / bronze core bow handles, 4 inches (100 mm) long minimum. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) 4484 by Stanley. b) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. b. Cabinet And Drawer Locks: 1) Pin tumbler type suitable for location. Key individually by cabinet grouping shown on signage schedule. Stamp keys with Room number and cabinet designation as shown on signage schedule. 2) Key cabinets and drawers within an Office alike. 3) Crosskey knife drawer in Serving Area so all other cabinet and drawer keys will open drawer. 4) Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a) SC Advantage Series Door Lock by CompX National Lock. b) 100DR Series Door Lock by Olympus Lock Inc. c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. c. Cabinet Adjustable Shelf Supports: 1) Either of following systems are acceptable, at Fabricator's option: a) 32mm System: Casework Fabricator's standard. b) Traditional System: (1) Class Two Quality Standards: 255 and 256 by Knape & Vogt. d. Other Cabinet Hinges: 1) European style, self-closing. 2) Doors 48 inches (1 200 mm) High or Less: a) 120 degree opening minimum. b) Two hinges. c) Basis Of Design: C2RFA99 by Salice. d) Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (1) Julius Blum. (2) Grass America. (3) Hardware Resources. (4) Knape & Vogt. (5) Mepla-Alfit. (6) Pride Industrial. (7) Salice. e. Cabinet Hinges: 1) European style, self-closing. -406 4114

Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

f.

g.

Doors 48 inches (1 200 mm) High or Less: a) 120 degree opening minimum. b) Two hinges. c) Basis Of Design: C2R9A99 by Salice. d) Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (1) Julius Blum. (2) Grass America. (3) Hardware Resources. (4) Knape & Vogt. (5) Mepla-Alfit. (6) Pride Industrial. (7) Salice. Cabinet Inactive Leaf Catches: 1) Class Two Quality Standards: a) Full-Height Doors: Two Surface Bolts No 043 - 2 inch (50 mm) by Ives. b) All Other Doors: Elbow Catch No 2 by Ives. Drawer Guides: 1) Pencil Drawers: a) Steel ball bearings, 45 lb (20 kg) load rating. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (1) Series 2006 by Accuride. (2) Series KV8200 by Knape & Vogt. 2) Standard Drawers: a) Full extension, steel ball bearings, 100 lb (45 kg) load rating. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (1) Series 3832 by Accuride. (2) Vitus Series 310FU by Hardware Resources. (3) Series KV8400 by Knape & Vogt. 3) Lateral Files / Kitchen Drawers: a) Full extension, steel ball bearings, 150 lb (68 kg) load rating. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (1) Series 4034 by Accuride. (2) Series KV8505 by Knape & Vogt.

C.

Fabrication: 1. Cabinet Body: a. Use AWS Flush Overlay construction on cabinet bodies. b. If used, install Rail System adjustable shelf supports recessed. 2. Drawers: a. Fabricate with separate, screw-attached drawer front. b. Joints shall be dowel and pressure-glued, or lock shoulder, glued, and pin nailed. c. Set bottoms into sides, backs, and subfront with 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep groove with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum standing shoulder. d. Every drawer shall have specified drawer guides and pull installed. Install drawer guides with 'Euroscrews', and pulls with through-bolts passing through both front and sub-front. 3. Cabinet Doors: a. Full height, panel product cabinet doors may be fabricated in two pieces and joined on back with metal backplate. Backplate shall match interior door surface color. b. Hinges: Install hinges using plastic insertion dowels for hinges and 'Euroscrews' for baseplates. c. Every cabinet door shall have specified pull installed. 4. Cabinet Component Thickness And Material: a. Use hardwood veneer facing on panel product, except on following surfaces, where Kortron or Melamine shall be used. 1) Cabinet interiors, not including cabinet doors, and shelving faces behind cabinet doors in all rooms. -506 4114

Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork

Project # 503-6925-11010101

5. D.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2) Cabinet interiors and shelving faces exposed to view in Material Center, Sacrament Preparation Room, Serving Area, and Storage Rooms. 3) Cabinet exteriors permanently concealed. 4) Drawer sides, backs, bottoms, and subfronts. b. Ends, Divisions, Bottoms, Tops: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick panel product. c. Rails: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick panel product. d. Shelves: 1) Panel product. 2) Thickness: a) 30 Inch (750 mm) Span And Less: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. b) Spans Over 30 Inches (750 mm) To 42 Inches (1 050 mm): One inch (25 mm) thick. c) Spans Over 42 inches (1 050 mm): One inch (25 mm) thick and provide Hafele or equal center supports. e. Backs: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick panel product. f. Doors: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick panel product. g. Drawer Sides, Backs, And Subfronts: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick minimum panel product. h. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick panel product. i. Separate Drawer Front: 1) 8 Inches (200 mm) High And Less: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick solid hardwood 2) More Than 8 Inches (200 mm) High: 3/4 inch (19 mm) panel product j. Hardboard Dividers: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick panel product k. Hardboard Shelves: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick hardboard, smooth both sides Install plastic grommets in cable access holes in countertops.

08.29.11

Finishes: 1. Factory Finishing: a. Applied before leaving factory. b. Performance / Design Criteria: 1) Factory-finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. c. Color to be selected from the following options: 1) LDS 95. 2) LDS Cherry.

2.2

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork

-6-

06 4114

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 06 4115 ROSTRUM CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Rostrum casework as described in Contract Documents consisting of the following: a. Portable chapel pulpit. b. Rostrum rail. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation of Rostrum casework. 2. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 3. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. 4. Section 09 9324: Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. Definitions: 1. Flitch: A hewn or sawn log made ready for veneer production or the actual veneer slices of one half log, kept in order, and used for the production of fine plywood panels. 2. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a projects quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. 3. Plain-Sawn: A hardwood figure developed by sawing a log lengthwise at a tangent to the annual growth rings. It appears as U-shaped or straight markings in the boards face. 4. Plain Slicing: Most commonly used for hardwood plywood. The log is cut in half, and one half is placed onto a carriage and moved up and down past a fixed knife to produce the veneers. Veneer is sliced parallel to the pith of the log and approximately tangent to the growth rings to achieve flat-cut veneer. Each piece is generally placed in a stack and kept in order. One half log, sliced this way, is called a flitch. 5. International Organization for Standards (ISO): a. ISO 3746:2010, Acoustics - Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound pressure - Survey method using an enveloping measurement surface over a reflecting plane.

B.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the efforts of the various trades affected by the Work of this Section. 2. Coordinate completion of rostrum casework. 3. Coordinate completions of electrical and audio video wiring with rostrum casework.

Rostrum Casework

-1-

06 4115

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Sequencing: 1. Install rostrum casework after following as been completed: a. Carpet. b. Adjacent millwork. c. Adjacent walls and ceilings are finished.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Approval subject to Annual Review: a) Prepare sample to match Control Sample available from Owner to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. b) Approval of sample by Owner will establish performance standard of stain to be used until next annual review. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match stain Control Sample provided by Owner. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: a) Owner will provide Control Sample for finish. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty.

B.

C.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Assemble Rostrum Casework at Architectural Woodwork Fabricator's plant and deliver ready for erection insofar as possible. 2. Protect Rostrum Casework from moisture and damage while in transit to job site. 3. Report damaged materials received. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Unload and store in secure place where it will be protected from moisture and damage and convenient to use.

B.

1.6

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Rostrum Casework Fabricators written guarantee that system shall be free from defects and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of substantial completion of building.

Rostrum Casework

-2-

06 4115

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

MANUFACTURER A. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators for Utah Millwork Initiative:

2.2

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: 1. Rostrum casework consists of portable Chapel pulpit with rostrum rail. Performance / Design Criteria: 1. AWS Custom Grade is minimum acceptable standard for materials, construction, and installation of architectural woodwork. 2. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish. Furnish factory-finish matching Owner selected sample for Rostrum Casework: a. Design Criteria: 1) Factory-finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. b. Color to be selected from the following options: 1) LDS 95. 2) LDS Cherry. Materials: 1. Rostrum Casework as described in Contract Documents. a. Solid Wood: Plain sawn Red Oak. b. Paneling: Panel Product with plain sliced Red Oak veneer. 2. Wood handrails and brackets. Fabrication: 1. Following Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) for fabrication of Rostrum casework.

B.

C.

D.

2.3

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Rostrum Casework

-3-

06 4115

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 06 4512 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Chair rails. 2. Folding partition hardwood jambs and trim. 3. Hardwood trim at light coves, speaker cabinets, etc, 4. Hardwood trim for wall covering. 5. Fixed shelving not part of casework. 6. Wood trim at ceiling crowns. 7. Casings, stops, handrails, and jambs. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation. 2. Section 06 2001: Coat hats and hooks. 3. Section 06 2210: Remaining Wood Trim. 4. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. 5. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 6. Section 08 1429: Interior Flush Wood Doors. 7. Section 09 9324: Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. Definitions: 1. Flitch: A hewn or sawn log made ready for veneer production or the actual veneer slices of one half log, kept in order, and used for the production of fine plywood panels. 2. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade. a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a projects quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. 3. Plain Slicing: Most commonly used for hardwood plywood. The log is cut in half, and one half is placed onto a carriage and moved up and down past a fixed knife to produce the veneers. Veneer is sliced parallel to the pith of the log and approximately tangent to the growth rings to achieve flat-cut veneer. Each piece is generally placed in a stack and kept in order. One half log, sliced this way, is called a flitch. 4. Running Trim: Generally combined in the term standing and running trim and refers to random, longer length trims delivered to the jobsite (e.g., baseboard, chair rail, crown molding).

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Include materials used, standing and running trim profiles, joint details, and hardware. 2. Samples: -106 4512

Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided.

B.

Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: a) Owner will provide Control Sample for finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. Performance / Design Criteria: Conform to requirements of Section 06 4001 Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 1. Glue: Waterproof and of best quality. 2. Factory-finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim: 1. Interior Hardwood For Transparent Finish: a. Design Criteria: 1) Solid wood shall be plain sawn Red Oak. 2) Paneling shall be panel product with plain sliced Red Oak veneer. 3) Finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. b. Color to be selected from the following options: 1) LDS 95. 2) LDS Cherry. 2. Interior Wood For Opaque, Painted Finish: a. Applies to ceiling trim only. b. Solid wood shall be any species allowed by AWS Custom grade. Shelves: 1. Conform to applicable requirements of Sections 06 4001 and 06 4114. 2. Use 3/4 inch (19 mm) Kortron or Melamine faced Panel Product with 2 mm thick PVC 3062 banding with eased edges. Apply banding on exposed edges with one inch (25 mm) return onto unexposed edges. Edge banding color to match Panel Product.

B.

C.

D.

2.2

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324.

Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim

-2-

06 4512

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

END OF SECTION

Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim

-3-

06 4512

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 06 6001 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC FABRICATIONS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But not Installed Under This Section: 1. Furnish window stools as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Common Finish Carpentry Requirements and installation of Window Stools.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Solid Surface: Solid surface materials are manufactured from polymeric materials. Granules may also be added to enhance the color effects. Solid surface materials are non-porous and homogeneous, with the same composition throughout the thickness of the solid surface material. They are capable of being repaired, renewed to the original finish and fabricated into continuous surfaces with inconspicuous seams. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute/International Cast Polymer Alliance: a. ANSI/ICPA SS-1-2001, Performance Standard for Solid Surface Materials.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature. b. Color selections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Fabricators: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. Manufacturers: 1. Acrylic Solid Surface: a. Meet requirements of ANSI/ICPS SS-1. b. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Corian by DuPont Co, Wilmington, DE. Contact Ted A. Williams at (612) 819-8751 FAX (763) 495-5394 or Theodore.A.Williams@usa.dupont.com. 2) LG Hi-Macs Solid Surfacing by LG Solid Source LLC, Peoria, AZ www.lgcreate.com. 3) Staron Solid Surfacing by Cheil Industries / Samsung Chemical USA, La Mirada, CA www.staron.com. 4) 'Gibralter Solid Surface' by Wilsonart International Inc, Temple, TX www.wilsonart.com. Materials: -106 6001

B.

C.

Miscellaneous Plastic Fabrications

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Acrylic Solid Surface Window Stools: a. 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick 100 percent acrylic polymer. b. Approved Colors: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard solid (white or offwhite only) colors. 1) Glacier White by Corian. 2) Bisque by Corian. 3) Cameo White by Corian. 4) Vanilla by Corian.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Miscellaneous Plastic Fabrications

-2-

06 6001

D I V I S I O N 07: T H E R M A L A N D M O I S T U R E P R O T E C T I O N
07 1000 D A M P P R O O F I N G A N D W A T E R P R O O F I N G 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 2000 T H E R M A L P R O T E C T I O N 07 2113 07 2116 07 2123 07 2613 07 2719 BOARD INSULATION BLANKET INSULATION LOOSE-FILL INSULATION ABOVE-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS

07 3000 S T E E P S L O P E R O O F I N G

07 4000 R O O F I N G A N D S I D I N G P A N E L S 07 4646 MINERAL FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 5000 M E M B R A N E R O O F I N G

07 6000 F L A S H I N G A N D S H E E T M E T A L 07 6100 07 6210 07 6311 07 6322 SHEET METAL ROOFING GALVANIZED STEEL FLASHING AND TRIM METAL SOFFIT PANELS STEEL FASCIA

07 7000 R O O F A N D W A L L S P E C I A L T I E S A N D A C C E S S O R I E S 07 7126 REGLETS 07 7226 RIDGE VENTS 07 8000 S M O K E A N D F I R E P R O T E C T I O N

07 9000 J O I N T P R O T E C T I O N 07 9213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 07 9219 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

07 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and apply bituminous dampproofing to exterior foundation walls and top of footings as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Maintain dampproofing at 40 deg F (4 deg C) or above before application.

1.3

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not apply when ambient temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), surface temperature is below 33 deg F (one deg C), or when rain is expected before applied dampproofing will dry.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Bituminous Damproofing: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Ecomul-11 by Epro Waterproofing Systems, Derby, KS www.eproserv.com. b. Henry 788 by Henry Company, El Segundo, CA www.henry.com. c. Karnak 100 by Karnak Chemical Corp, Clark, NJ www.karnakcorp.com. d. Sealmastic Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing Type I by W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. e. Equal as approved by Architect before application. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION A. Spray Application: 1. Spray to a thickness of 10 mils minimum. Brush / Roller Application: 1. Apply two coats of dampproofing at rate recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Apply coats in cross hatch method so coats are applied perpendicular to each other. 3. Before applying second coat allow first coat to dry in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

B.

Bituminous Dampproofing

-1-

07 1113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Apply dampproofing to cover area from 6 inches (150 mm) below finish grade line down to and including top of footings. Do not backfill against bituminous dampproofing for 24 hours after application.

08.29.11

D.

END OF SECTION

Bituminous Dampproofing

-2-

07 1113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 07 2113 BOARD INSULATION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install board insulation on interior side of perimeter foundation walls as described in Contract Documents. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Polyethylene Film Vapor Retarder. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 2613: Furnishing and installation of polyethylene film vapor retarder.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. International Code Council (ICC) www.icc-es.org: a. ICC-ES Evaluation Report, www.icc-es.org. 1) ESR-1061, Foamular 150, 250, 400, 600, and 1000 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation Boards (Issued May 1, 2010). 2) ESR-2142, Styrofoam Brand Insulation Boards and DOW Fan-Fold Products (Issued January 1, 2009). 3) ESR-2912, Greenguard and Greenguard RCY extruded polystyrene insulation board (Issued August 1, 2010). Definitions: 1. Flame Spread: The propagation of flame over a surface. 2. Flame Spread Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C518-10, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. b. ASTM C578-10, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.' c. ASTM C1289-10, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. d. ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. a. UL 123: Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Tenth Edition Sep 10, 2008.

B.

C.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Installation of Polyethylene Film Vapor Retarder as specified in Section 07 2616 with Type 1 Insulation (Below Grade). -107 2113

Board Insulation

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Insulation shall be manufactured to be in compliance with International Code Council (IBC) or other applicable building codes. 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by test method indicated below by qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: 1) Insulation shall have Class A flame spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723, or UL 1715 Type 1. a) Class A (Flame spread index 0-25; Smoke-developed index 0-450). b) Flash point: None.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. Exercise care to avoid damage during unloading. 2. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities to allow continuity of work. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store, protect and handle materials in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations to prevent damage, contamination and deterioration. Keep material free of dirt and other foreign matter. 2. Store in cool, dry area away from sources of heat, flame, ignition and strong oxidizing agents. 3. Following Manufacturers instructions for protection when handling and cutting insulation.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Type 1 Insulation: Below Grade: 1. Description: a. Extruded polystyrene foam insulation. 2. Design Criteria: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C578, Type IV. b. Meet requirements of ASTM E84 or UL 723 for surface burning characteristics of building materials. 3. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Foamular 250 by Owens Corning, Toledo, OH www.owens-corning.com. b. GreenGuard 25 PSI by Pactiv Building Products, Lake Forest, IL www.pactiv.com/greenguard. c. Styrofoam SM by Dow Chemical, Midland, MI www.dow.com. d. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Tapping screws with washers.

Board Insulation

-2-

07 2113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to point where installation may properly commence. 2. Verify insulation may be installed in accordance with original design an manufacturers recommendations 3. Discrepancies: a. In event of discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. b. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation in compliance with International Code Council (IBC) or other applicable building codes and in accordance with Manufacturers current recommendations. Type 1 Insulation (Foundation Insulation): 1. Remove ties and concrete protrusions that would keep insulation from fully contacting foundation wall face. 2. Install against interior side of perimeter foundation walls extending downward from top of slab 48 inches (1 200 mm) or to top of footing, whichever is less. Install using 3/8 inch (9.5 mm beads of adhesive at 12 inches (300 mm) on center vertically and at each vertical and horizontal joint to completely seal insulation.

B.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Upon completion of installation, visually inspect each insulated area and verify that all insulation is complete and properly installed. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

B.

3.4

CLEANING A. Waste Management: 1. Remove from site debris resulting from work of this Section.

END OF SECTION

Board Insulation

-3-

07 2113

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 2116 BLANKET INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install faced thermal and acoustic batt insulation as described in Contract Documents. 2. Quality of insulation used in speaker enclosures. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2024: Furnishing and installing of insulation in ungrouted hollow metal door frames.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C665-06, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.'

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Insulation shall be manufactured to be in compliance with International Code Council (IBC) or other applicable building codes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Insulation: a. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Certainteed Corp, Valley Forge, PA www.certainteed.com. 2) FiberTEK, Salt Lake City, UT www.fibertekinsulation.com. 3) Guardian Fiberglass, Greer, SC www.guardianbp.com. 4) Knauf Fiber Glass, Shelbyville, IN www.knaufusa.com. 5) Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH www.owens-corning.com. 6) Johns Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com. 7) Thermafiber, Wabash, IL www.thermafiber.com. b. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Materials: 1. Thermal And Acoustic Insulation: a. Faced Insulation: 1) Kraft faced meeting requirements of ASTM C665, Type II, Class C. 2) Foil faced meeting requirements of ASTM C665, Type III. a) Class B: Enclosed insulation. -107 2116

B.

Blanket Insulation

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c. d.

Unfaced Insulation: Meet requirements of ASTM C665, Type I. 1) Support at trussed rafters: a) Provide stings/wires which run perpendicular to framing at attached at each trussed rafter and to framing at 32 inches (800 mm) O.C. Order insulation by 'R' factor rather than 'U' factor, rating, or thickness, either 16 or 24 inches (400 or 600 mm) wide according to framing spacing. 'R' Factor Required: 1) Acoustically Insulated Ceilings: a) Enclosed Spaces: Fill framed cavity with batt of appropriate thickness. b) Unenclosed Spaces: R38. 2) Wood or Metal Wall Stud Framing: R11 3-1/2 inches deep 89 mm deep R19 5-1/2 inches deep 140 mm deep R26 7-1/2 inches deep 191 mm deep 3) SCL Wall Framing: R26 7*1/4 inches deep 181 mm deep R32 9*1/4 inches deep 235 mm deep 4) Thermally Insulated Ceilings / Roof: a) R38 Cathedral / High Density: At 2x12 (50x300 mm) Overbuild Framing. b) R38 Standard: All Other. 5) Thermally Insulated Floor: a) R30 Standard

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Leave no gaps in insulation envelope. 2. If two layers of insulation are used to attain required 'R' factor, only layer towards interior of building shall have facing. 3. Provide minimum clearance around recessed lighting fixtures as approved by local code. In Framing: 1. Install insulation behind plumbing and wiring, around duct and vent line penetrations, and in similar places. 2. Fit ends of batts snug against top and bottom plates. 3. Fit batts snug against stud framing at each side. 4. Where insulation is not enclosed by structure or drywall, support in place with wire or other suitable material and use only foil-faced insulation. 5. Install baffles between trusses and rafters at ventilation spaces if necessary to prevent insulation from blocking airflow from soffit.

B.

END OF SECTION

Blanket Insulation

-2-

07 2116

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 2123 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install loose-fill insulation as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2221: Furnishing and installing insulation in speaker enclosures.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Flame Spread: The propagation of flame over a surface. 2. Flame Spread Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C518-04, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. b. ASTM C764-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation. c. ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. d. ASTM E136-09b, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750C.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturers literature describing products to be used, showing compliance with specified requirements. b. Manufacturers storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Manufacturers installation instructions.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Insulation shall be manufactured to be in compliance with International Code Council (IBC) or other applicable building codes.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: -107 2123

Loose-Fill Insulation

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. a. Labels to identify reference standards, type and class as applicable, minimum net weight of insulation, coverage, R values, and required warning statements.

08.29.11

B.

Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Protect from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. 2. Provide dry location with adequate ventilation for storage, not subject to open flames or sparks, and permitting easy access for inspection and handling. 3. Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling 4. Comply with Manufacturers recommendations for handling, storage, and personal protection during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Insulation: a. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Certainteed Corp, Valley Forge, PA www.certainteed.com. 2) FiberTEK, Salt Lake City, UT www.fibertekinsulation.com. 3) Guardian Fiberglass, Greer, SC www.guardianbp.com. 4) Johns Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com. 5) Knauf Fiber Glass, Shelbyville, IN www.knaufusa.com. 6) Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH www.owens-corning.com. b. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Materials: 1. Loose-Fill Insulation: a. Blown Insulation: 1) Fiber glass. 2) Comply with requirements of ASTM C764, Type I or II, non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. b. 'R' Factor Required: 1) Order insulation by 'R' factor rather than 'U' factor, rating, or thickness. a) Unenclosed Spaces: R38 minimum.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Inspection: a. Examine substrate and verify framing is suitable for installation of insulation: b. Verify that mechanical and electrical services have been installed and tested and, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. 1) Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. 2) Do not install insulation over unsuitable conditions. 3) Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. General: -207 2123

Loose-Fill Insulation

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in insulation in sufficient depth to provide thermal value specified after settlement of insulation. Do not blow insulation into electrical devices and vents.
Provide minimum clearance around recessed lighting fixtures as approved by local code.

Install baffles between trusses and rafters at ventilation spaces if necessary to prevent insulation from blocking airflow from soffit.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspections: 1. Insulation meets required thickness requirements. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

B.

3.4

PROTECTION A. B. Protect installed products until project completion. Repair or replace damaged products.

3.5

CLEANING A. Waste Management: 1. Disposal of rubbish, debris, and packaging materials in approved manner.

END OF SECTION

Loose-Fill Insulation

-3-

07 2123

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 2613 ABOVE-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install polyimide film vapor retarder on framed walls and ceilings as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Air Barrier Association of America (abaa), http://www.airbarrier.org: a. Difference between Air Barrier & Vapor Barrier & Water Resistive Barrier. b. Materials, Components, Assemblies & Systems. c. Why Use an Air Barrier? 2. Canadian Mortgage and Housing Corporation: a. Best Practice Guide, Building Technology Wood-frame Envelopes, Details: Wall Assembly A Basic Stud Wall with Polyethylene Air Barrier and Vapour Retarder, Canadian Mortgage and Housing Corporation (CMHC), pg 7-3 to 7-9, 2006. 3. National Research Council Canada: a. Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC): 1) CCMC Evaluation Report 13074-R (issued July 16, 2002): a) Durability Assessment of Bead-Applied Urethane-Based Sealant Foam for Air Barriers. 2) CCMC Evaluation Report 13278-R (issued June 27, 2007). a) Vapour Barrier with RH-Dependent Water Vapour Permeance. 4. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA): a. Use of Vapor Retarders. 5. Oak Ridge National Laboratory (Dr. Achilles Karagiozis): a. Comparison of Water Vapor Permeance Data of Common Interior Building Materials in North American Wall Systems,10th Canadian Conference on Building Science and Technology, Ottowa, May 2005. 6. US Department of Energy(DOE): a. Super Good Cents Builders Field Guide to Energy Efficient Construction Chapter 9, Air Tightening Specialists, Bonneville Power Administration, Publication #DOE/BP-2651, 1992. b. The Hygrothermal Performance of Wood Framed Wall Systems Using a Relative Humidity Dependent Vapor Retarder in the Pacific Northwest, Thermal Performance of the Exterior Envelopes of Buildings X, Proceedings of the DOE/ORNL/ASHRAE/BETEC International Conference 2007. Definitions: 1. Fire Hazard Classification: a. Flame Spread: The propagation of flame over a surface. b. Flame Spread Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84. c. Smoke-Developed Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. General Classification of Building Materials with Respect to Water Vapor Permeance: a. Vapor Barrier Materials: 0.1 perm or less (rubber membranes, polyethylene film, glass, aluminum foil, sheet metal, foil-faced insulating sheathings)

B.

Above-Grade Vapor Retarders

-1-

07 2613

Project # 503-6925-11010101

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake b. Vapor Retarder Materials: 0.1-1 perm (asphalt-backed kraft paper, vapor retarding paint, oilbased paints, vinyl wall coverings, extruded polystyrene, plywood, OSB). c. Semi-Vapor Permeable Materials: 1-10 perms (unfaced expanded polystyrene, fiberfaced isocyanurate, heavy asphalt impregnated building papers, some latex-based paints). d. Vapor Permeable Materials: 10+ perms (unpainted gypsum board and plaster, unfaced fiber glass insulation, cellulose insulation, unpainted stucco, cement sheathings, spun bonded polyolefin or some polymer-based exterior air barrier films). Perm: Unit of measurement typically used in characterizing water vapor permeance of materials. Measures flow of water vapor through material.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C665-06, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing (Section7.4, Water-Vapor). b. ASTM C755-03, Standard Practice for Selection of Water Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. c. ASTM C834-10, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. d. ASTM C920-10, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.' e. ASTM C1136-10, Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. f. ASTM C1338-08.Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings. g. ASTM D439709, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.' h. ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. i. ASTM E96 / E96M-05, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 2. National Standards of Canada / Canadian General Standards Board: a. CAN/CGSB 51.33-M89, Vapour Barrier Sheet, Excluding Polyethylene, for Use in Building Construction. b. CAN / CGSB 51.34-M86, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for use in Building Construction. c. CGSB 51-GP-51M, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. 3. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada: a. CAN/ULC-S710.1-05, Standard for Thermal Insulation Bead-Applied One Component Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Material Specification. (Feb 21, 2005). b. CAN/ULC-S710.2-05, Standard for Thermal Insulation Bead-Applied One Component Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 2: Installation. (Feb 21, 2005).

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1) Certify products are suitable for intended use and products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2) Certificate from Manufacturer indicating date of manufacture. 2. Manufacturers Instructions: a. Manufacturer's installation recommendations for each Product.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver and keep in original containers until ready for use. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Handle to prevent damage to material.

B.

Above-Grade Vapor Retarders

-2-

07 2613

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2. 3.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Store sealants in a cool dry location, but never under 40 deg F (4 deg C). Special care should be taken when working with open flame.

1.5

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Vapor retarder: a. Limitations: 1) For use in heating and mixed climates. 2) Not suited for cooling climates with high outdoor humidities. b. Installation: 1) Follow Manufacturers recommendations for installation of vapor retarder. 2. Sealants: a. Follow Manufacturers temperature recommendations for installing sealants.

1.6

WARRANTY A. Manufacturers Warranty: 1. Provide Manufacturers limited one-year warranty against Manufacturers defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIAL A. Sheet Retarder: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Certainteed MemBrain, The SMART Vapor Retarder:

2.2

DESIGN CRITERIA A. Material Standard: 1. 2 mil (0.05 mm) thick polyamide film vapor retarder meeting requirements of ASTM C665 and water-vapor pemeance of ASTM E96/E96M. 2. Used with unfaced, vapor permeable mass insulation in wall and ceiling cavities. Physical / Chemical Properties: 1. Water Vapor Permeance: a. Equal to or less than 1.0 perm (57ng/Pa*s*m2).as per ASTM E96/E96M desiccant method, or dry cup method and increases to greater than 10.0 perms (1144ng/Pa*s*m2) using wet cup method as per ASTM E96/E96M. 2. Fungi Resistance: a. No growth as per ASTM C1338. 3. Corrosivity: a. No unusual aspect of corrosion such as pitting, cracking and adhesive cure inhibition as per ASTM C665). Fire Hazard Classification: 1. Material surface burning characteristics shall have flame spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84: a. Flame spread index 20. b. Smoke-developed index 55. Air Barrier: 1. To be used as air barrier when installed with recommended tapes and sealants. -307 2613

B.

C.

D.

Above-Grade Vapor Retarders

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake See CCMC Evaluation Report 13278-R (Vapour Barrier with RH-Dependent Water Vapour Permeance).

08.29.11

2.3

ACCESSORIES A. Lap Sealant: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Tremco, Tremflex 834, siliconized acrylic latex sealant shall be used as specified caulking sealant conforming to ASTM C834 or CAN/CGSB-19.0-M77, or equivalent acoustical or silicone-based sealants conforming to ASTM C920 or ASTM C834 shall be used. b. Equal as approved by Manufacturer before use. See Section 01 6200. Tape: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. As approved by Manufacturer before use. See Section 01 6200. Window/Door Openings: 1. Sealant: 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. As approved by Manufacturer before use. See Section 01 6200.

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Do not use damaged or deteriorated materials. 2. Do not apply caulking at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 3. Do not use low permeance interior finishes such as vinyl wallpaper or vapor retarding paints. 4. Do not use with wet spray insulation systems. 5. Installation: a. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. b. Install in most areas, on warm-in-winter side of insulation (toward interior). For some warm and humid areas, vapor retarder should be installed towards exterior of building envelope. c. Installation in wood framing: Same as polyethylene sheeting. Installation as Air Barrier System: 1. Roof/Attic/Ceiling Applications: a. Staple to bottom of ceiling joists as recommended by Manufacturer. b. Seal retarder to interior and exterior wall top plates using recommended sealants. c. Fasten retarder through sealant to plates as recommended by Manufacturer. d. Allow retarder to overlap at corners as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Exterior Wall Applications: a. Install wall application as recommended by Manufacturer. b. Apply recommended sealant over ceiling overlapped retarder material at top plate, to frame around window and door rough openings and to bottom plate as recommended by Manufacturer to ensure an air-tight assembly. 3. Acoustical and Sealant Application at Sheet Terminations: a. Install sealants as recommended by Manufacturer to ensure an air-tight assembly. 4. Lapped Joint Treatment: a. Apply recommended sealant to wood stud surface. b. Overlap and as recommended by Manufacturer. c. Seal overlapped joint using recommended sheathing tape. d. All vertical and horizontal seams should be treated as described above. 5. Penetrations:

B.

Above-Grade Vapor Retarders

-4-

07 2613

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake a. Building envelope penetrations include windows, doors, electrical outlets, gas lines, plumbing, etc: 1) Cut and fit sheeting tightly around penetrations as recommended by Manufacturer. 2) Seal retarder around all electrical, HVAC and plumbing penetrations with recommended sealants or sheathing tapes. 6. Window and Door Treatment: a. Cut sheeting to fit rough opening as recommended by Manufacturer. b. Apply recommended sealant between retarder and window frame. c. Attach through sealant to window head, jambs and sill. Seal window to rough opening with recommended sealant. d. Apply recommended sealant between interior finishing material and attached sheeting. 7. Sheet Tears and Holes: a. Cover all tears and holes with recommended sheathing tape. b. Treat large holes (greater than 1 inch (25 mm)) like large penetrations using square patch. 8. Electrical Outlets: a. Wrap and seal electrical boxes using recommended sheathing tapes and sealants. b. Airtight plastic boxes are recommended. 9. Plumbing Penetrations: a. Secure plumbing lines to rigid mounting panel. b. Seal penetrations using recommended sealants. c. Attach sheeting to mounting panel using recommended sealants. 10. Air Barrier System Continuity: a. Install as continuous interior air barrier system: 1) Maintain air barrier system continuity at wall, ceiling, floor and foundation intersections. Use recommended sealants. Seal between framing and retarder overlaps. 2) Coordinate installation details with framing and insulation trade contractors. Fasteners: 1. Fasteners as approved by Manufacturer: a. Following recommendations for type, size, spacing and installation methods. b. To resist wind forces, fastened to supporting structure and supported by gypsum wallboard on one side and insulation on other. Seal penetrations through vapor retarder immediately before installation of gypsum board.

08.29.11

C.

D.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: 1. Vapor retarder is to be air tight and free from holes, tears, and punctures. a. Immediately before installation of gypsum board, inspect vapor retarder for holes, tears, and punctures and repair damaged areas. b. Immediately before completion of Project, inspect exposed vapor retarder for holes, tears, and punctures and repair damaged areas.

END OF SECTION

Above-Grade Vapor Retarders

-5-

07 2613

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 2719 PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install air infiltration barriers on exterior side of exterior wall sheathing as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E1677-05, 'Standard Specification for an Air Barrier (AB) Material or System for LowRise Framed Building Walls.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: Copy of test results showing performance characteristics. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty (if available from Manufacturer).

B.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Provide single source for all products of system.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's limited warranty (if available on product).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Styrofoam Weathermate Plus by Dow, Chemical Co, Midland, MI www.dow.com b. Tyvek HomeWrap by Du Pont Company, Wilmington, DE www.dupont.com c. DriShield Housewrap by Protecto Wrap, Denver, CO www.protectowrap.com -107 2719

Plastic Sheet Air Barriers

Project # 503-6925-11010101 d. e. B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Fortress Pro by Raven Industries, Sioux Falls, SD www.ravenind.com Typar Housewrap by Fiberweb, Old Hickory, TN www.typar.com.

Materials: 1. Air Retarder: a. Non-woven. b. Meet requirements of ASTM E1677, Type I. 2. Sealing Tape: a. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) DuPont Contractor Tape. 2) Fortress Pro Seaming Tape. 3) Typar Construction Tape. 4) 3M Contractor Sheathing Tape. 5) Protecto Wrap BT25 XL Window Sealing Tape. 6) As recommended in writing by Air Retarder Manufacturer. 3. Fasteners: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Wood Framing: Corrosion resistant roofing nails with 3/4 inch (19 mm) long shank minimum and one inch (25 mm) diameter plastic head or Tyvek Wrap Caps. Staples are only allowed to aid in installation with permanent fasteners installed immediately thereafter. 2) Metal Framing: Corrosion resistant, self-tapping screws and plastic washers or Tyvek Wrap Caps. Screws to be 3/4 inch (19 mm) long minimum and washers one inch (25 mm) diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Install over exterior wall sheathing. 1. Apply specified fasteners along stud lines at 18 inches (450 mm) maximum on center. Lap horizontal joints 6 inches (150 mm) minimum, with upper layer placed over lower layer. Lap vertical seams 16 or 24 inches (400 or 600 mm) as necessary to match framing spacing. Do not fasten at bottom where necessary to allow for installation of flashing behind air infiltration barrier at base of masonry veneer. 2. Seal joints and penetrations through air infiltration barrier with specified tape before installation of finish material. Air infiltration barrier shall be air tight and free from holes, tears, and punctures.

END OF SECTION

Plastic Sheet Air Barriers

-2-

07 2719

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 07 4646 MINERAL FIBER CEMENT SIDING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. B. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install exterior wood siding and trim as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Installation. 2. Section 07 2613: Above Grade Vapor Retarders.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C117-04, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. b. ASTM C920-08, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. c. ASTM C1185-08, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non-Asbestos FiberCement Flat Sheet, Roofing and Siding Shingles, and Clapboards. d. ASTM C1186-08, Standard Specification for Flat Fiber-Cement Sheets. e. ASTM E72-05, Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. f. ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. g. ASTM E119-09c, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. h. ASTM E136-09b, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750C.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. In addition to requirements of Section 01 3100, review manufacturers installation requirements to assure issuance of Manufacturers warranty. Sequencing: 1. Coordinate installation with above grade vapor retarder, flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.

B.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Manufacturers printed data sheets or catalog pages illustrating products to be incorporated into project. a. Preparation instructions and recommendations. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommencations. c. Installation methods, including nailing patterns. d. Construction details. e. Material descriptions. -107 4646

Mineral Fiber Cement Siding

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

f. Dimensions of individual components and profiles. g. Finishes. h. Applicable model code authority evaluation report if required. Samples: a. Siding and related accessories: 1) Submit samples with Product Data submittal. 2) 6 inch (150 mm) square sample showing actual product intended to be incorporated into the project including color, textures, and other appearance issues. 3) 6 inch (150 mm) long by actual width sample of each type of trim and accessories.

B.

Informational Submittals: Title that groups submittals not requiring Architects review action. 1. Certificates: a. Provide fiber cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C1186 by a qualified testing agency. b. Certified statement of company Field Advisor. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Manufacturers instructions for preparation, storage and handling requirements and recommendations. b. Manufacturers installation methods, including nailing patterns requirements. 3. Manufacturer Reports: a. Verification of existing conditions. 4. Qualification Statements: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to the following: a. Roofing membrane installer shall be able to document not less than three (3) years of experience with products similar to those specified. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) Manufacturers instructions for periodic inspection, cleaning and maintenance requirements. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranty stating that installed materials comply with specification. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature. b) Color and style selections.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding, including related accessories, from a single source and from a single manufacturer.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING: A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store product off the ground, on a smooth, flat surface. 2. Store in a dry well-ventilated area. 3. Store in weather tight location. 4. Protect edges and corners from chipping.

1.7

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: -207 4646

Mineral Fiber Cement Siding

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Comply with manufacturers written recommendations regarding environmental conditions under which siding can be installed.

08.29.11

1.8

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide Manufacturers 50 year limited written siding warranty. 2. Register manufacturers warranty, mode out in Owners name, with copy to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURE A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. CertainTeed Corporation, Siding Products Group, Valley Forge, Pennsylvania www.certainteed.com. b. JamesHardie, Mission Viejo, CA www.jameshardiecommercial.com.

2.2

MATERIALS A. Fiber Cement Board Panels: 1. Description: a. Fiber Cement Board Panels consist of cement, fly ash and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure into boards with integral surface texture. b. Comply with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II. c. Flammability: 1) Noncombustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. d. Surface Burning Characteristices: 1) Flame spread index of 0, smoke developed index of 6, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (Class 1/A). e. Machined edges for nail attachment. 2. Lap siding: a. Horizontal pattern: b. Style: 1) Beaded-edge. c. Texture: 1) Wood grain. d. Size: 1) Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm), nominal. 2) Width: 7-1/4 inch (185 mm) wide. 3) Length: 12 feet (3 657 m), nominal. e. Finish: 1) Prefinished: a) Factory finish color: White. 3. Trim: Fiber cement board. a. Prefinished to match siding. b. Size: 1) Thickness 7/16 inch (11 mm). 2) Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm). 3) Length: 12 feet (3.657 m). 4. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. HardiePlank by JamesHardie. b. WeatherBoards by CertainTeed.

Mineral Fiber Cement Siding

-3-

07 4646

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.3 ACCESSORIES A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Siding Accessories: 1. Starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding Manufacturer for building configuration. 2. Provide accessories made from same material as matching color and texture of adjacent siding. Flashing: 1. Provide 24 ga (0.635 mm) corrosion-resistant metal such as galvanized steel or stainless-steel where indicated. Sealant: 1. Paintable sealant: a. Sealant shall meet requirements of ASTM C920. b. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) GE Silicone II XST. Nails: 1. Length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) into solid backing 2. Non-corrosive, hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel, or aluminum 8d casing. 3. Nailing as per Manufacturers recommendations.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding and related accessories. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Substrate preparation: a. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. b. Repair punctures or tears in vapor retarder prior to the installation of siding. 2. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

B.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Drawing details. a. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. b. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to location of project. c. Use trim details indicated on drawings. d. Touch up all field cut edges before installing. e. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage. 2. Over Wood Sheathing: a. Fasten siding through sheathing into studs. -407 4646

Mineral Fiber Cement Siding

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3. 4. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are inevitable stagger joints between successive courses. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. Paint all exposed cut edges.

08.29.11

Tolerances: 1. Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal movement; seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant. 2. Do not install siding less than 6 inches (150 mm) from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to roofs and other surfaces where water may collect.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

3.5

CLEANING A. General: 1. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions 2. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. Waste Management: 1. At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project site.

B.

END OF SECTION

Mineral Fiber Cement Siding

-5-

07 4646

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 6100 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Mechanically seamed metal panel roofing system.

RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 6210 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

1.3

REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ASTM E 1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. FM 4471 - Class 1 Panel Roof (Uplift Evaluation); Factory Mutual Research Corporation. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. UL 790 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. FM 4471 - Class 1 Roofing Panels. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. NRCA - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; showing dimensions of metal roofing and accessories, fastening details and connections and interface with other products. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Certified and approved installer of the sheet metal roofing manufacturer.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Sheet Metal Roofing

-1-

07 6100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 A. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

08.29.11

Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Store materials above ground, on skids. 2. Protect material with waterproof covering and allow sufficient ventilation to prevent condensation buildup or moisture entrapment on the materials.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Provide warranties as follows: 1. Warranty covering the metal substrate against rupture, perforation and structural failure due to normal atmospheric corrosion. 2. Warranty on paint finish against cracking, peeling, blistering, chalk and color change. 3. Provide PermaColor 3500, 30-year Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 limited finish warranty. Manufacturer's Weathertightness Warranty: 1. Warranty: Provide the manufacturers limited warrantee for workmanship and material covering a period of 20 years from the date of substantial completion.

B.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Englert, Inc., 1200 Amboy Ave., Perth Amboy, NJ 08861; 800-364-5378; Web: www.englertinc.com. 2. Berridge Manufacturing Company 1720 Maury Street, Houston, TX 77026 800-669-0009 Web: www.berridge.com . 3. Drexel Metals 204 Railroad Drive Ivyland, PA 18974 888-321-9630 Web: www.drexmet.com . Provide all sheet metal roofing and accessories from a single manufacturer.

B. 2.2

ROOF SYSTEM A. Mechanically Seamed Panels: 1. Profile:2 inch standing seam, heavy duty interlock clips. a. Width: 18 inches b. Single-lock (90 degree seam). c. Striated pattern. d. Wind Uplift Resistance: UL 580; Class 90. e. Air Leakage: Passed when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680. f. Water Penetration: None, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1646. g. Flame Spread: Class 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. h. Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference: ASTM E 1592 and ASTM E 330. i. Dade County Florida Tested: Non-structural roofing systems. j. Class A Fire Rating, UL-790. k. Florida Building Code approval.

2.3

ACCESSORIES A. B. C. D. Fasteners: As recommended by panel manufacturer for the system specified. Base Sheet and Eave Protection Sheet: Sharkskin Ultra SA by Kirsch Building Products, 1464 Madera Rd. Suite 387, Simi Valley, CA 93065 Sealant: Sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer. Flashings and Trim: As recommended by panel manufacturer. -207 6100

Sheet Metal Roofing

Project # 503-6925-11010101 E.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Snow Retention Systems: SnoRail/SnoFence retention system S-5-ASF and SnoRod as manufactured by S-5! Attachment Solutions Metal Roof Innovations, LTD. 8655 Table Butte Road, Colorado Springs, CO 80908 (888) 825-3432 www.s-5.com or approved equal.

08.29.11

2.4

MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90/Z275 zinc coated, coil coated: 1. Base metal: Structural quality, 50ksi yield point, 52 ksi tensile strength. 2. Thickness: a. 24 Gauge. 3. Finish: a. Permacolor 3500: Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 coating, 0.8 to 0.9 mil (0.020 to 0.023 mm) fluorocarbon full strength 70 percent Kynar 500 finish coating over 0.2 to 0.3 mil (0.005 to 0.007 mm) urethane primer. 4. Color: a. Royal Blue. b. Pacific Blue. c. Slate Blue. d. Standard Teal. e. Turquoise. f. Hartford Green. g. Forest Green. h. Medium Bronze. i. Everglade Moss. j. Patina Green. k. Dark bronze. l. Matt Black. m. Charcoal Gray. n. State Gray. o. Dove Gray. p. Mansard Brown. q. Burgundy. r. Colonial Red. s. Deep Red. t. Seafog. u. Sierra Tan. v. Sandstone. w. Bone White. x. Champagne.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. Examine surfaces to receive sheet metal roofing. Notify the Architect in writing of any defective conditions encountered. Starting of work shall constitute acceptance of such conditions. Wood Deck Substrate: 1. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped. 2. Verify deck is dry and joints are solidly supported and fastened. 3. Verify wood nailers are installed and correctly located. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located. Correct defective conditions before beginning work.

C. D. 3.2

INSTALLATION A. Install in conformance with the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturers -307 6100

Sheet Metal Roofing

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

installation instructions and recommendations. B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.3 Form panel shape as indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. Install base sheet and eave protection sheet underlayment as recommended by the manufacturer. Install all panels continuous from ridge to eave. Transverse seams are not permitted. Where not otherwise indicated conform to SMACNA details including flashings and trim. Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids. Install snow retention system per manufacturers recommendations. Start first retention barrier at exterior wall line and space additional rows at 10 oc.

PROTECTION A. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

Sheet Metal Roofing

-4-

07 6100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 6210 GALVANIZED STEEL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install miscellaneous flashing, counterflashing, and hold-down clips as described in Contract Documents and not specified to be of other material. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Gravel stops, copings, scuppers, and miscellaneous sheet metal specialties not specified to be of other materials. Related Requirements: 1. Section under 07 5000 heading: Installation of gravel stops, copings, scuppers, and miscellaneous roofing related flashing.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A653/A653M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.' b. ASTM A792/A792M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. Federal Specifications: a. TT-S-00230C(2) Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component, (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers Of Metal: a. CMG Coated Metals Group, Denver, CO www.cmgmetals.com. b. Englert Inc, Perth Amboy, NJ www.englertinc.com. c. Fabral, Lancaster, PA www.fabral.com. d. Firestone Metal Producdts, Anoka, MN www.unaclad.com. e. MBCI, Houston, TX www.mbci.com. f. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp, Sellersburg, IN www.mtlsales.com. g. Petersen Aluminum Corp, Elk Grove, IL www.pac-clad.com. h. Ryerson, Chicago, IL www.ryerson.com. i. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Materials: 1. Sheet Metal: a. Galvanized iron or steel meeting requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, G 90 or Galvalume steel meeting requirements of ASTM A792/A792M AZ50, 50 ksi. -107 6210

B.

Galvanized Steel Flashing And Trim

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1) 2) C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

22 ga (0.792 mm) for hold-down clips. 24 ga (0.635 mm) for all other.

Fabrication: 1. Form accurately to details. 2. Profiles, bends, and intersections shall be even and true to line. 3. Fold exposed edges 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) to provide stiffness. Finish: 1. Metal exposed to view shall have face coating of polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVF2) Resin-base finish (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) containing 70 percent minimum PVF2 in resin portion of formula. Thermo-cured two coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and top coat factory applied over properly pre-treated metal. Reverse side coating shall be thermo-cured system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer applied over properly pre-treated metal. 2. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors.

D.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. B. Sealants: Rubber base type conforming to Fed Spec TT-S-00230C. Fasteners: 1. Of strength and type consistent with function. 2. Nails: Hot-dipped galvanized. 3. Screws, Bolts, And Accessory Fasteners: Galvanized or other acceptable corrosion resistant treatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. Install with small, watertight seams. Slope to provide positive drainage. Provide sufficient hold down clips to insure true alignment and security against wind. Provide 4 inch (100 mm) minimum overlap. Allow sufficient tolerance for expansion and contraction. Insulate work to prevent electrolytic action.

3.2

CLEANING A. Leave metals clean and free of defects, stains, and damaged finish.

END OF SECTION

Galvanized Steel Flashing And Trim

-2-

07 6210

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 6311 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install metal soffit panel system as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A653/A653M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.' b. ASTM A792/A792M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's written 20-year guarantee for finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers Of Metal: a. AEP / Span, Dallas, TX www.aep-span.com. b. ATAS Aluminum Products, Allentown, PA www.atas.com. c. Englert Inc, Perth Amboy, NJ www.englertinc.com. d. Fabral, Lancaster, PA www.fabral.com. e. Fashion Inc, Ottawa, KS www.fashioninc.com. f. Firestone Metal Products, Anoka, MN www.unaclad.com. g. MBCI, Houston, TX www.mbci.com. h. Petersen Aluminum Corp, Elk Grove, IL www.pac-clad.com. i. Ryerson, Chicago, IL www.ryerson.com. j. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Performance: -107 6311

B.

Metal Soffit Panels

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Design Criteria: a. Flush panel design with stiffening beads. Panels shall be interlocked full length of panel. Panel widths shall be Manufacturers standard. b. Performance Standard: Englert Series 4000 Soffit Panel System.

C.

Materials: 1. 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick minimum 3105-H24 alloy aluminum 2. 24 ga (0.0276 in) (0.7010 mm) galvanized iron or steel meeting requirements of A653/A653M, G 90. 3. 24 ga (0.0276 in) (0.7010 mm) minimum 50 ksi galvalume steel meeting requirements of ASTM A792/A792M AZ-55. Finish: 1. Polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVF2) Resin-base (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) finish for coil coating components containing 70 percent minimum PVF2 in resin portion of formula. Thermo-cured two coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and top coat factory applied over properly pre-treated metal. 2. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors.

D.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. B. Fastening Devices: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) cadmium or zinc plated ring shanked nails. Continuous Soffit Vent: 1. Type Three Acceptable Products: a. Vent-A-Strip by Alcoa Architectural Products, Eastman, GA www.alcoaarchitecturalproducts.com. b. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. C. Conceal fasteners where possible. Paint heads of exposed fasteners to match background. Isolate from dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action. Repair buckling or bowing due to improper installation at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION

Metal Soffit Panels

-2-

07 6311

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 6322 STEEL FASCIA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install metal fascia as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A653/A653M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.' b. ASTM A792/A792M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's written 20-year guarantee for finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers Of Metal: a. AEP / Span, Dallas, TX www.aep-span.com. b. ATAS Aluminum Products, Allentown, PA www.atas.com c. CMG Coated Metals Group, Denver, CO www.cmgmetals.com. d. Firestone Metal Products, Anoka, MN www.unaclad.com. e. Englert Inc, Perth Amboy, NJ www.englertinc.com. f. Fabral, Lancaster, PA www.fabral.com. g. Hunter-Douglas Canada Ltd, Brampton, ON www.hunterdouglasgroup.com. h. Ryerson, Chicago, IL www.ryerson.com. i. Kaycan Ltd, Montreal, PQ (514) 334-7550 www.kaycan.com. j. MBCI, Houston, TX www.mbci.com. k. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp, Sellersburg, IN www.mtlsales.com. l. Petersen Aluminum Corp, Elk Grove, IL www.pac-clad.com -107 6322

Steel Fascia

Project # 503-6925-11010101 m. n. B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

VicWest, Oakville, ON www.vicwest.ca Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

Materials: Minimum 24 ga (0.635 mm), hot-dipped galvanized to meet requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, 1.25 oz/sq ft or galvalume meeting requirements of ASTM A792/A792M AZ50, 50 ksi and complete with accessories recommended by Manufacturer for proper installation. Fabrication: Fascia may either be shop-fabricated using metal from a specified manufacturer, or a factory-fabricated standard system from a specified manufacturer. Finishes: 1. Face coating polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVF2) Resin-base finish (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) for coil coating components containing 70 percent minimum PVF2 in resin portion of formula. Thermocured two coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and top coat factory applied over properly pre-treated metal. 2. Reverse side coating thermo-cured system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer applied over properly pre-treated metal. 3. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors.

C.

D.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. B. Fastening Devices: Galvanized steel screws. Continuous Soffit Vent: 1. Type Three Acceptable Products: a. Vent-A-Strip by Alcoa Building Products, Sydney, OH www.alcoa.com/alcoahomes. b. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Conceal fasteners except where details might require a minimum number to be exposed. Paint heads of exposed fasteners to match background. Install with slip joints at each end. Screw to substrate through pre-drilled, over-size holes. Isolate from dissimilar metals not part of fascia system to prevent electrolytic action. Repair buckling or bowing due to improper installation at no cost to Owner.

B. C. D.

END OF SECTION

Steel Fascia

-2-

07 6322

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 7126 REGLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under this Section: 1. Reglets. Related Requirements: 1. Section under 04 2000 heading: Installation in masonry joints. 2. Section under 07 6000 heading: Surface-mounted Installation.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Galvanized Reglets: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Fry Springlock Reglets by Fry Reglet Corp, Alhambra, CA www.fryreglet.com. b. Equal as acceptable to Roofing System Manufacturer and approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Reglets

-1-

07 7126

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 7226 RIDGE VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Ridge vents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 6100: Installation on Sheet Metal Roofing.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A653/A653M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.' b. ASTM A792/A792M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. a. ANSI/UL 790 Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Design details. b. Published installation instructions. c. Storage and handling requirements. d. Environmental condition requirements.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: 1. Manufacturer's Certificates of compliance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Ridge vent and accessories: a. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Keller & Associates, Woods Cross, UT (801) 292-3613. 2) MBCI, Salt Lake City, UT (801) 530-4975. 3) Ridgeline Construction Inc, North Salt Lake , UT www.ridgelineroofing.com . 4) Smart Enterprises, St George, UT (800) 658-5368 or (435) 628-1843. -1 07 7226

Ridge Vents

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 5) Southam & Associates, Pleasant Grove, UT (800) 838-5816 or (801) 796-1600 www.southamandassociates.com. 6) Tricon Inc, Orem, UT (888) 565-9455 or (801) 765-9455. 7) Warburton's Inc, Pleasant Grove, UT (801) 785-9500 www.warburtonsinc.com. 8) Western Metal Products L.C., Woods Cross, UT (888) 298-3454 or (801) 298-3400. www.westernmetalproducts.com. 9) Other shop fabricated or manufactured product approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Ventilation core: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: 1) Cor-A-Vent, Inc. Mishawaka, IN www.cor-a-vent.com. 2) Trimline Building Products, Minneapolis, MN www.trimline-products.com. 3) Western Metal Products L.C., Woods Cross, UT (888) 298-3454 or (801) 298-3400. www.westernmetalproducts.com.

08.29.11

B.

Materials: 1. Ridge vent and accessories: a. Fabricated of 24 ga (0.0276 in) (0.7010 mm) minimum, hot-dipped galvanized to meet requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, 1.25 oz per sq ft (381.5 g per sq m) or galvalume meeting requirements of ASTM A792/A792M AZ50, 50 ksi or 0.032 inch (0.813 mm) thick aluminum minimum, with edges returned or hemmed. Provide hemmed baffle at downslope edge of skirt as shown on Drawings. b. Skirts and ridge cap connected through vent core with painted 3/16 by 2-1/2 inch (4.75 mm by 64 mm) Type A corrosion resistant screws with neoprene washers 8 inches (200 mm) on center each skirt. c. Accessories: End plugs, splice plates, seal tape, straps, fasteners, and other accessories necessary for proper installation. 2. Ventilation core: a. Provide 36 sq in (232 sq cm) net free area (NFA) minimum. b. Color: Black (Western Metal: White). 1) V-600T by Cor-A-Vent (V-600TE with enhanced snow screen for areas susceptible to drifting snow): a) Two (2) 1 inch (25 mm) high layers. b) Net free area: 20 inches (508 mm) per lineal foot (each side) per layer. 2) High Profile Rigid Vent Plus by Trimline: a) Two (2) 1 inch (25 mm) high layers. b) Net free area: 19 inches (483 mm) per lineal foot (each side) per layer. 3) PP.315/NFA-18 by Western Metal (PP.315/NFA-18-SV for areas susceptible to drifting snow): a) One (1) 2 inches (50 mm) high layer. b) Net free area: 18 inches (457 mm) per lineal foot (each side). Finishes: 1. Ridge vent and accessories: a. Polyvinyledene Fluoride (PV2) Resin-base finish (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) for coil coating components containing 70 percent minimum PVF2 in resin portion of formula. Thermo-cured two coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and top coat factory applied over properly pre-treated metal. b. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. c. Reverse Side: Coating shall pass requirements of paragraphs 1.1 through 1.4 of Test Method No. 6.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used:

END OF SECTION

Ridge Vents

-2

07 7226

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 07 9213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sealants not specified to be furnished and installed under other Sections. 2. Quality of sealants to be used on Project not specified elsewhere, including submittal, material, and installation requirements. Related Requirements: 1. Furnishing and installing of sealants is specified in Sections specifying work to receive new sealants. 2. Section 07 2419: Sealants for EIF Systems.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Adhesive: An adhesive, as defined by The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), is a substance capable of holding materials together by surface attachment 2. Caulk: Caulks have a variety of definitions but are generally recognized as materials used in applications where only minor elastomeric properties are needed. 3. Sealant. Sealants are generally used in applications where elastic properties are needed while adhesives are generally used in applications where bonding strength and rigidity are needed. With technology advancements both sealants and adhesives can be used interchangeably depending on the applications performance requirements. Association Publications: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants. 2. ASM International: a. Adhesives and Sealants, Volume 3, ASM International Handbook Committee, May 1999. b. Committee C24 on Building Seals and Sealants for various Specifications, Guides, Test Methods, and Practices related to sealant specifying and application. c. Committee E6 on Building Performance for various Specifications, Guides, Test Methods, and Practices related to sealant use with air barriers, vapor retarders, and exterior enclosure systems and materials. 3. The Adhesive and Sealing Council, Inc. (ASC) / Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute (SWR Institute): a. Sealants: The Professionals Guide. b. Joint Sealants, Whole Building Design Guide. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C920-08, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.' b. ASTM C1193-09, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

B.

C.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling: -107 9213

Elastomeric Joint Sealants

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Schedule work so waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes are installed after sealants, unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing. Ensure sealants are cured before covering with other materials.

08.29.11

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. b. Manufacturer's literature for each Product. c. Schedule showing joints requiring sealants. Show also backing and primer to be used. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1) Certify products are suitable for intended use and products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2) Certificate from Manufacturer indicating date of manufacture. 2. Manufacturers Instructions: a. Manufacturer's installation recommendations for each Product.

B.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver and keep in original containers until ready for use. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Handle to prevent inclusion of foreign matter, damage by water, or breakage. 2. Store in a cool dry location, but never under 40 deg F (4 deg C).

B.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not install sealant during inclement weather or when such conditions are expected. Allow wet surfaces to dry. 2. Follow Manufacturers temperature recommendations for installing sealants.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Dow Corning Corp, Midland, MI www.dowcorning.com. b. GE Sealants & Adhesives, Huntersville, NC www.gesealants.com or G E Silicone Canada, Mississauga, ON (905) 858-6744 or (800) 668-4644. c. Laticrete International Inc, Bethany, CT www.laticrete.com. -207 9213

Elastomeric Joint Sealants

Project # 503-6925-11010101 d. e. f.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Sherwin-Williams, Cleveland, OH www.sherwin-williams.com. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ www.sikaconstruction.com or Sika Canada Inc, Pointe Claire, QC www.sika.ca. Tremco, Beachwood, OH www.tremcosealants.com or Tremco Ltd, Toronto, ON (800) 3633213.

B.

Materials: 1. General: a. Sealants provided shall meet Manufacturer's shelf-life requirements. b. Sealants must adhere to and be compatible with specified substrates. c. Primers, if required, shall not stain and shall be compatible with substrates. d. Sealants shall be stable when exposed to UV, joint movements, and particular environment prevailing at project location. e. Sealant shall be a formulation meeting the performance requirements of ASTM C 920. 2. Sealants At Exterior Building Elements: a. Joints and cracks around windows. b. Aluminum entrance perimeters and thresholds. c. Door frames. d. Louvers. e. Wall penetrations. f. Connections. g. Other joints necessary to seal off building from outside air and moisture. h. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Dow Corning: a) Primer: 1200 Prime Coat. b) Sealant: 791 Silicone Weatherproofing Sealant. 2) GE Sealants & Adhesives: a) Primer: SS4044 Primer. b) Sealant: Silpruf SCS 2000 Silicone Sealant. 3) Tremco: a) Primer: (1) Metal surface: No. 20 primer. (2) Porous surfaces: No. 23 primer. b) Sealant: Spectrum 1 Silicone Sealant. 3. Sealants At Exterior Sheet Metal And Miscellaneous: a. Penetrations in soffits and fascias. b. Roof vents and flues. c. Flashings. d. Gutters. e. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) 791 Silicone Weatherproofing Sealant or 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning. 2) Sikaflex 15LM Sealant by Sika Corp. 3) Tremsil 600 Silicone Sealant by Tremco. 4. Sealants At Exterior Concrete: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Expansion joints in exterior site concrete elements: a) Dow Corning: (1) Primer: 1200 Prime Coat. (2) Sealant: 790 Silicone Building Sealant. b) GE Sealants & Adhesives: (1) Primer: SS4044 Primer. (2) Sealant: Silpruf SCS 2000 Silicone Sealant. 2) Expansion joints in Portland cement concrete driveways and parking lots: a) Dow Corning: (1) 888 Silicone Joint Sealant. (2) 890 SL Self-Leveling Silicone Joint Sealant may be used on non-sloping areas. 5. General Interior Sealants: a. Inside jambs and heads of exterior door frames. b. Both sides of interior door frames. -307 9213

Elastomeric Joint Sealants

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c. d. e.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

6.

7.

Inside perimeters of windows. Miscellaneous gaps between substrates. Paintable sealant: 1) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) GE Silicone II XST. f. Non-Paintable sealant: 1) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Tub, Tile, And Ceramic Silicone Sealant by Dow Corning. b) GE Silicone II - Window and Door with BioSeal. c) Latasil Silicone Sealant by Laticrete. d) Pro-Select Kitchen And Bath Silicone Sealant by Sherwin Williams. e) Tremsil 200 Silicone Sealant by Tremco. Sealants For Interior Joints Formed By: a. Countertops and backsplash to wall. b. Sinks and lavatories to countertops. c. Joints between plumbing fixtures and other substrates. d. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Tub, Tile, And Ceramic Silicone Sealant by Dow Corning. 2) GE Silicone II - Kitchen & Bath with BioSeal by GE Sealants & Adhesives. 3) Latasil Silicone Sealant by Laticrete. 4) Pro-Select Kitchen And Bath Silicone Sealant by Sherwin Williams. 5) Tremsil 200 Silicone Sealant by Tremco. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Backing: 1. Flexible closed cell, non-gassing polyurethane or polyolefin rod or bond breaker tape as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer for joints being sealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, oil, grease, dew, or frost. Apply primer, if required. Joint Backing: 1. Prepare joints in accordance with ASTM C1193. 2. Clean concrete joint surfaces to remove dirt, dust, oils, paints, curing agents and form release agents. 3. Rod for open joints shall be at least 1-1/2 times width of open joint and of thickness to give solid backing. Backing shall fill up joint so depth of sealant bite is no more than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) deep. 4. Apply bond-breaker tape in shallow joints as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer.

B. C.

3.2

APPLICATION A. B. Do not use damaged or deteriorated materials. Apply sealant with hand-caulking gun with nozzle of proper size to fit joints. Use sufficient pressure to insure full contact to both sides of joint to full depth of joint. Apply sealants in vertical joints from bottom to top. -407 9213

Elastomeric Joint Sealants

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Tool joints immediately after application of sealant if required to achieve full bedding to substrate or to achieve smooth sealant surface. Tool joints in opposite direction from application direction, i.e., in vertical joints, from the top down. Do not 'wet tool' sealants. Depth of sealant bite shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) maximum, but never more than one half or less than one fourth joint width. Do not apply caulking at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). Caulk gaps between painted or coated substrates and unfinished or pre-finished substrates. Caulk gaps larger than 3/16 inch (5 mm) between painted or coated substrates.

08.29.11

D.

E. F.

3.3

CLEANING A. Clean adjacent materials, which have been soiled, immediately (before setting) as recommended by Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Elastomeric Joint Sealants

-5-

07 9213

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 07 9219 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of sealants to be used at perimeters of and penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and associated ceilings. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900: Furnishing and installing of acoustical sealants.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Adhesive: An adhesive, as defined by The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), is a substance capable of holding materials together by surface attachment 2. Caulk: Caulks have a variety of definitions but are generally recognized as materials used in applications where only minor elastomeric properties are needed. 3. Sealant. Sealants are generally used in applications where elastic properties are needed while adhesives are generally used in applications where bonding strength and rigidity are needed. With technology advancements both sealants and adhesives can be used interchangeably depending on the applications performance requirements. Association Publications: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants. 2. ASM International: a. Adhesives and Sealants, Volume 3, ASM International Handbook Committee, May 1999. b. Committee C24 on Building Seals and Sealants for various Specifications, Guides, Test Methods, and Practices related to sealant specifying and application. c. Committee E6 on Building Performance for various Specifications, Guides, Test Methods, and Practices related to sealant use with air barriers, vapor retarders, and exterior enclosure systems and materials. 3. The Adhesive and Sealing Council, Inc. (ASC) / Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute (SWR Institute): a. Sealants: The Professionals Guide. b. Joint Sealants, Whole Building Design Guide.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature for each Product. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturers Certificate: 1) Certify products are suitable for intended use and products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2) Certificate from Manufacturer indicating date of manufacture. 2. Manufacturers Instructions: -107 9219

B.

Acoustical Joint Sealants

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Manufacturer's installation recommendations for each Product.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver and keep in original containers until ready for use. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Handle to prevent inclusion of foreign matter, damage by water, or breakage. 2. Store in cool, dry location, and at temperatures never under 40 deg F (4 deg C).

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Sealants: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. OSI Pro-Series SC-175 by OSI Sealants Inc, Mentor, OH www.osisealants.com. b. QuietZone Acoustic Caulk by Owens Corning, Toledo, OH www.owenscorning.com. c. QuietSeal Acoustical Sealant by Quiet Solution Inc, Santa Clara, CA www.quietsolution.com. d. Acoustical Sealant by Tremco, Beachwood, OH www.tremcosealants.com or Toronto, ON (800) 363-3213. e. Acoustical Sealant by U S Gypsum, Chicago, IL www.usg.com.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Backing: 1. Flexible closed cell polyurethane or polyolefin rod or bond breaker tape as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer for joints being sealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Sealants provided shall meet Manufacturer's shelf-life requirements.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, oil, grease, dew, or frost.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Joint Backing: 1. Rod for open joints shall be at least 1-1/2 times width of open joint and of thickness to give solid backing. Backing shall fill up joint so depth of sealant bite is no more than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) deep. 2. Apply bond-breaker tape in shallow joints as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer.

Acoustical Joint Sealants

-2-

07 9219

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Install at perimeter joints and mechanical and electrical penetrations in sound insulated rooms. Apply sealant with hand-calking gun with nozzle of proper size to fit joints. Use sufficient pressure to insure full contact to both sides of joint to full depth of joint.

08.29.11

C.

Tool joints immediately after application of sealant if required to achieve full bedding to substrate or to achieve smooth sealant surface. Depth of sealant bite shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) maximum, but never more than one half or less than one fourth joint width. Do not apply caulking at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

D.

E.

3.4

CLEANING A. Clean adjacent materials that have been soiled immediately (before setting) as recommended by Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Acoustical Joint Sealants

-3-

07 9219

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I O N 0 8: O P E N I N G S
08 0000 OPENINGS

08 0601 HARDWARE GROUP AND KEYING SCHEDULES 08 1000 D O O R S A N D F R A M E S 08 1213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 1313 HOLLOW METAL DOORS 08 1429 PRE-FINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS / CLEAR 08 3000 S P E C I A L T Y D O O R S A N D F R A M E S 08 3110 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 4000 E N T R A N C E S, S T O R E F R O N T S, A N D CURTAIN WALLS 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 5000 W I N D O W S 08 5313 VINYL WINDOWS 08 7000 H A R D W A R E 08 7101 08 7102 08 7103 08 7104 08 7106 08 7107 08 7108 08 7109 08 7913 COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS HANGING DEVICES SECURING DEVICES OPERATING TRIM CLOSING DEVICES PROTECTIVE PLATES AND TRIM STOPS AND HOLDERS ACCESSORIES KEY STORAGE AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

08 8000 G L A Z I N G 08 8100 GLASS GLAZING 08 9000 L O U V E R S A N D V E N T S

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

08 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 0601

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

HARDWARE GROUP AND KEYING SCHEDULES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install door hardware and keying as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Access Door Exit Device: See Exit Device. 2. Acoustic Seal: Attached to door to reduce external noise. Perimeter seals reduce potential for flanking noise, a term used to describe leakage of a sound across a barrier. 3. Active Door (or leaf): In paired or double doors, hinged door leaf that opens first and the one to which the lock is applied. 4. Astragal: Molding or strip whose purpose is to cover or close gap between edges of pair of doors. Astragals provide a weather or sound seal, minimize passage of light or retard passage of smoke or flame. a. Overlapping Astragal: One-piece astragal attached to one door only and overlapping other door when in closed position. b. Split Astragal: Two-piece astragal, one piece of which is surface mounted on each door and provided with means of adjustment to abut other piece and provide a seal. 5. Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association (BHMA) Hardware Functions: a. F-75 Passage Latch: Latch bolt operated by lever from either side at all times. b. F-76 Privacy Lock: Latch bolt operated by lever from either side. Outside lever locked by push button inside and unlocked by emergency key from outside or rotating lever from inside. c. F-81 Office Door Lock: Dead locking latch bolt operated by lever from either side, except when outside lever is locked by turn button in inside lever. When outside lever is locked, latch bolt is operated by key in outside lever or by rotating inside lever. Turn button must be manually rotated to unlock outside lever. d. F-84 Classroom Deadlock: Dead locking latch bolt operated by lever from either side, except when outside lever is locked, latch bolt is operated by key in outside lever or by rotating inside lever. e. F-86 Utility Space Door Lock: Dead locking latch bolt operated by key in outside lever or by rotating inside lever. Outside lever is always fixed. f. E-2142 Deadbolt: Dead bolt operated by key from either side. Bolt automatically dead locks when fully thrown. g. E-2152 Deadbolt: Dead bolt operated by key from outside and turn unit from inside. Bolt automatically dead locks when fully thrown. 6. Change Key: Key that operates only one cylinder or one group of keyed alike cylinders in a keying system. 7. Closer: Device or mechanism to control closing of swing door. May be overhead or floor mounted and either exposed or concealed. 8. Coordinator: Device or mechanism which controls order of closing of pair of swing doors; used with doors equipped with overlapping astragals and certain panic and fire exit hardware which requires inactive leaf to close before active leaf. 9. Cylinder: Cylindrical-shaped assembly (complete operating unit) containing tumbler mechanism and keyway (plug, shell, tumblers, springs and actuating device), into which key is inserted to operate lock and can only be actuated by correct key. a. Mortise: Threaded surface which screws directly into a lock case, with a cam engaging lock mechanism.

Hardware Group and Keying Schedules

-1-

08 0601

Project # 503-6925-11010101

10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

15. 16.

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake b. Rim: Mounted on surface of door independently of lock, usually by screws from reverse sid, and engaging with lock mechanism by means of tailpiece or metal extension. Deadbolt (of a lock): Lock bolt having no spring action nor bevel, and which is operated by key or turn piece. Dummy Trim: Trim only, without lock; usually used on inactive door in pair of doors. Dust-Proof Strike: Strike with spring plunger that completely fills bolt hole when bolt is not projected. Emergency Egress Exit Device: See Exit Device. Exit Device: Latching mechanism for swinging doors designed to be operable in direction of egress travel and to provide exiting for occupants in emergency. Latching mechanism release through pressure on touch or cross bar mortised or mounted on push side of door. There are two classifications: Panic Exit Hardware and Fire Exit Hardware, and three types within each classification: a. Mortise Type: Lock mechanism mortised into edge of door or concealed with door. b. Rim Type: Lock mechanism mounted on interior face of door. c. Vertical Rod: Surface or concealed, having latches in or on top and/or bottom of door and activated by cross bar through rod linkage extending vertically on or in lock stile of door. Fire Exit Hardware: Metal device attached to back of door frame jamb at its base, to secure frame to the floor, may be either fixed or adjustable in height. See Exit Device. Flush Bolt: Rods or bolts that are mounted flush with edge or face of inactive door to lock door to frame at head and/or sill. Flush bolt mounted in edge is operated by means of recessed lever. May be manual or automatic. Grand Master Key: Key that operates locks in several groups, each of which has its own master key. Handleset: Term describing lock trim with handle and thumbpiece on exterior of door, and knob/lever on interior. Hardware: Any mechanism which is designed to perform operable function in use of door and frame. Hinge: Two plates joined together by pin and attached to door and its frame whereby door is supported and is enabled to swing or move. Holder: Device that holds door open at one or more selected positions. Inactive Door (or leaf): Leaf of pair of doors that does not contain lock, but is bolted when closed, and to which strike is fastened to receive latch or bolt of active door. Kick Plate: Protective plate applied on lower rail of door to prevent door from being marred. Latch Bolt: Beveled spring bolt, usually operated when either knob or lever is turned, or when thumbpiece which operates handleset is pushed down. Latchset: Non-locking device which contains only a latch bolt, a means of operating said latch and all required trim. Leaf (of pair of doors): One of two doors forming pair of doors. Lever Handle: Bar-like grip which is rotated about horizontal axis at one of its ends to operate a latch. Lockset: Lock, complete with trim, such as knobs, escutcheons or handles. Low-Energy Swing Door Operators: Device that operates swing door that opens or helps open door automatically, waits then closes it at reduced speed to levels deemed safe for disabled users. Commonly referred to as a Handicap door operator. Master Key: Key that operates all master keyed locks or cylinders in group, each lock or cylinder usually operated by its own change key. Mullion: Fixed or movable post dividing opening vertically. Panic Exit Hardware: Hardware similar to Exit Hardware, but which has been tested and labeled or use only on emergency exit doors which are not fire doors. See Exit Device. Passage Function: Knob or lever set most commonly used in hallways where locking feature is not required. Pivot: Hinging device embodying fixed pin and single joint. Pull: Handle of grip designed for attachment to door to facilitate opening and closing. Push: Plate applied to lock stile to protect door against soiling and wear. Single Cylinder Entrance Handleset: Key operates deadbolt from outside; turnpiece operates deadbolt from the inside. Single Dummy: Knob/lever surface mounted on interior or exterior of door which does not turn any mechanism. Silencer: Small piece of resilient material attached to stop on door frame to cushion closing of door. -208 0601

08.29.11

Hardware Group and Keying Schedules

Project # 503-6925-11010101 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Smoke Gasket: Brush seal used on doors to reduce passage of smoke and gasses. Stop: Device to limit swing or movement of door at certain point. Threshold: Strip fastened to floor beneath door, usually required to cover joint where two types of floor material meet. Thumbpiece or Thumbturn: Lock trim component which typically is used to lock deadbolt from interior side of door. Turnpiece: Small knob, lever or tee turn with spindle attached for operating deadbolt of lock or mortise bolt. Also termed Thumb Turn. Used only on single cylinder operations. Weatherstrip: Material or device applied to door edges or to inner door frame edges to close clearance opening and minimize or restrict passage of air, moisture, sound, smoke, and/or dirt.

08.29.11

B.

Reference Standards: 1. Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association (BHMA): a. BHMA A156.1, Butts and Hinges. b. BHMA A156.16, Auxiliary Hardware. c. BHMA A156.18, Materials and Finishes. d. BHMA A156.2, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. e. BHMA A156.21, Thresholds. f. BHMA A156.22, Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems. g. BHMA A156.3, Exit Devices. h. BHMA A156.4, Door Controls - Closers. i. BHMA A156.5, Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. j. BHMA A156.6, Architectural Trim. k. BHMA A156.7, Template Hinge Dimensions. l. BHMA A156.8, Door Controls Overhead Stops and Holders. Holders.

1.3

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact.

PART 2 - HARDWARE GROUPS

2.1

STOREFRONT ENTRY DOORS A. Single Doors: 1. Group ST1: a. 1 set: Pivots. b. 1 each: Exit Door Exit Device. c. 1 each: Closer. d. 1 each: Pull. e. 1 each: Threshold. f. 1 set: Weatherstrip. g. 1 each: Stop. h. 1 each: Kick Plate. 2. Group ST3: a. 1 set: Pivots. b. 1 each: Closer. c. 1 each: Push. d. 1 each: Pull. e. 1 each: Threshold. f. 1 set: Weatherstrip. g. 1 each: Stop. h. 1 each: Kick Plate. Double Doors:

B.

Hardware Group and Keying Schedules

-3-

08 0601

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

Group ST5A: a. General: 1) 1 each: Threshold. 2) 1 set: Weatherstrip. b. Active Leaf: 1) 1 set: Pivots. 2) 1 each: Exit Door Exit Device. 3) 1 each: Low-Energy Swing Door Operator. 4) 1 each: Closer. 5) 1 each: Pull. 6) 1 each: Stop. 7) 1 each: Kick Plate. c. Inactive Leaf: 1) 1 set: Pivots. 2) 1 each: Access Door Exit Device. 3) 1 each: Closer. 4) 1 each: Kick Plate. Group ST7A: a. General: 1) 1 set: Weatherstrip. b. Active Leaf: 1) 1 set: Pivots. 2) 1 each: Low-Energy Swing Door Operator. 3) 1 each: Push. 4) 1 each: Pull. 5) 1 each: Closer. 6) 1 each: Stop. 7) 1 each: Kick Plate. c. Inactive Leaf: 1) 1 set: Pivots. 2) 1 each: Push. 3) 1 each: Pull. 4) 1 each: Closer. 5) 1 each: Stop. 6) 1 each: Kick Plate.

2.2

EXTERIOR DOORS A. Single Exterior Doors: 1. Group 3: a. 3 each: Hinges. b. 1 each: Lockset Function F-86. c. 1 each: Closer. d. 1 each: Stop. e. 1 each: Threshold. f. 1 set: Weatherstrip. Exterior Double Doors: 1. Group 10: a. General: 1) 1 each: Threshold. 2) 1 set: Weatherstrip. b. Inactive Leaf: 1) 3 each: Hinges. 2) 1 each: Stop and Holder. 3) 2 each: Flush Bolts (top and bottom). 4) 1 each: Dust proof strike. c. Active Leaf: 1) 3 each: Hinges. -408 0601

B.

Hardware Group and Keying Schedules

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2) 3)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

1 each: Lockset Function F-86. 1 each: Stop and Holder.

2.3

INTERIOR DOORS A. Single Interior Doors: 1. Group 20: a. 3 each: Hinges. b. 1 each: Latchset Function F-75. c. 1 each: Stop. d. 1 set: Smoke Gaskets. 2. Group 22: a. 3 each: Hinges. b. 1 each: Lockset Function F-81. c. 1 each: Stop. d. 1 set: Smoke Gaskets. 3. Group 23: a. 3 each: Hinges. b. 1 each: Lockset Function F-81. c. 1 each: Stop. d. 1 each: Threshold. e. 1 each: Acoustic Seal. f. 1 set: Smoke Gaskets. 4. Group 25: a. 3 each: Hinges. b. 1 each: Exit Device. c. 1 each: Closer with hold open function. d. 1 each: Kick Plate. e. 1 each: Stop. f. 1 set: Smoke Gaskets. 5. Group 26: a. 3 each: Hinges. b. 1 each: Closer. c. 1 each: Push. d. 1 each: Pull. e. 1 each: Kick Plate. f. 1 each: Stop. g. 1 set: Smoke Gaskets. Double Interior Doors: 1. Group 50: a. General: 1) 1 set: Smoke Gaskets. b. Active Leaf: 1) 3 each: Hinges. 2) 1 each: Lockset Function F-75. 3) 1 each: Stop. c. Inactive Leaf: 1) 3 each: Hinges. 2) 2 each: Flush Bolts. 3) 1 each: Stop. 2. Group 52: a. General: 1) 1 set: Smoke Gaskets. b. Active Leaf: 1) 3 each: Hinges. 2) 1 each: Closer with hold open function. 3) 1 each: Push. 4) 1 each: Pull. -508 0601

B.

Hardware Group and Keying Schedules

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c.

5) 1 each: Kick Plate. 6) 1 each: Stop. Inactive Leaf: 1) 3 each: Hinges. 2) 1 each: Closer with hold open function. 3) 1 each: Push. 4) 1 each: Pull. 5) 1 each: Kick Plate. 6) 1 each: Stop.

PART 3 - KEYING SCHEDULE for FINISH HARDWARE

3.1

KEYING SCHEDULE A. Meetinghouse Keying Schedule: 1. Branch Presidents Office: Key Stamped Amount AA2 BP 1 5

Doors Operated by Key Key AA2 will also open XAA5, AA8 and XAA12.

2.

Clerk's Office: Key Stamped Amount Doors Operated by Key XAA5 CLK 1 3 a. Keys to Bishop's Office will also open Clerk's Office. Auxiliary Organization Storage Spaces (Storage Building): Key Stamped Amount Doors Operated by Key AA8 AUX 1 6 a. Keys to Bishop's Office will also open Storage Building. Material Center: Key Stamped Amount Doors Operated by Key XAA12 MTL CTR 6 a. Keys to Bishop's Office will also open Material Center. Mechanical And Utility Rooms: Key Stamped Amount XAA13 MECH 2 Provide interior keying system that includes Master Key and Change Key levels. Pin locks so pins in Master Keys are two numbers minimum different between Master Keys and associated change keys. Provide six AA Master Keys.

3.

4.

5.

6.

END OF SECTION

Hardware Group and Keying Schedules

-6-

08 0601

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 1213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Hollow metal frames. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2024: Installation. 2. Section 08 4113: Aluminum Entry Frames.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Steel Door Institute: a. ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. ANSI/SDI A250.11-2002, 'Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.' 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A568/A 568M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for. b. ASTM A653/A653M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Copy of ANSI/SDI A250.11.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Suppliers: 1. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT Russ Farley Phone (800) 574-4369 FAX 801-484-6817 e-mail russf@absdoors.com. b. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT Alan John Phone (888) 823-2206, FAX 801-4857647, e-mail alan@beacon-metals.com. Manufacturers: 1. Category One Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Any current member of Steel Door Institute. Frames: 1. Cold rolled furniture steel. a. Interior Frames: 16 ga. (1.6 mm). b. Exterior Frames: 14 ga. (1.9 mm). 2. Provide labeled frame to match fire rating of door. -108 1213

B.

C.

Hollow Metal Frames

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

4.

Finish: a. Use one of following systems: 1) Prime surfaces with rust inhibiting primer. 2) Galvanize. Anchors: 16 US ga (1.6 mm) minimum meeting UL or other code acceptable requirements for door rating involved.

D.

Fabrication: 1. General Requirements: a. Frames shall be welded units. Provide temporary spreader on each welded frame. b. Provide Manufacturer's gauge label for each item. c. Make breaks, arrises, and angles uniform, straight, and true. Accurately fit corners. 2. Frame width dimension: a. Fabricate frame 1/8 inch (3 mm) wider than finished wall thickness as described in Contract Documents. 3. Provide mortar guards at strikes and hinges. 4. Anchors: a. Provide three jamb anchors minimum for each jamb. On hinge side, install one anchor at each hinge location. On strike side, install one anchor at strike level and anchors at same level as top and bottom hinges. Tack weld anchors on frames intended for installation in framed walls. b. Frames installed before walls are constructed shall be provided with extended base anchors in addition to other specified anchors. c. Anchor types and configurations shall meet wall conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Hollow Metal Frames

-2-

08 1213

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 08 1313 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Hollow metal doors. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2024: Door installation.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Steel Door Institute: a. ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003 (R2008), Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A568 / A 568M-07a, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for. b. ASTM A653 / A653M-08, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. c. ASTM C1036-06, Standard Specification for Flat Glass. d. ASTM C1048-04, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat GlassKind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.' 3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. HMMA 810-09, Hollow Metal Manual. b. HMMA 860-09, Hollow Metal Door and Frames.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Suppliers: 1. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT Russ Farley Phone (800) 574-4369 FAX 801-484-6817 e-mail russf@absdoors.com. b. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT Alan John Phone (888) 823-2206, FAX 801-4857647, e-mail alan@beacon-metals.com. Manufacturers: 1. Category One Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Any current member of Steel Door Institute. Doors: 1. Meet one of following requirements: a. Meet requirements of Steel Door Institute ANSI / SDI A250.8. b. Commercial grade steel meeting requirements of ASTM A568, Class 1. 1) Grade I for interior doors, Grade II for exterior doors. -108 1313

B.

C.

Hollow Metal Doors

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2) Model 1 Full Flush or Model 2 Seamless designs at Manufacturer's option. 3) Type F as required. 4) Finish: a) Interior doors primed or galvanized as per ASTM A653. b) Exterior doors galvanized and primed as per ASTM A653. Factory Glazing: a. Narrow Light: 1) Glazing: a) Tempered glazing meeting requirements of ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality q3. b) Thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm).

08.29.11

D.

Fabrication: 1. General: a. Mortise and reinforce doors for hinges and locks. b. Reinforce doors for closers and other surface applied hardware. c. Drill and tap on job. d. Seams along vertical edges of door need not be filled. e. Do not extend hinge cut out full width of door unless fill strip is inserted, weld filled, and ground smooth so no seam appears on back face plate.

2.2

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Verification of Performance: a. Label each door as conforming to above required standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Hollow Metal Doors

-2-

08 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 08 1429 FLUSH WOOD DOORS: Factory-Finished, Clear

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Factory-finished flush wood doors. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2024: Installation. 2. Section 06 4114: Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinet doors. 3. Section 09 9324: Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Abbreviations And Acronyms: 1. AWS: Architectural Woodwork Standards (formerly AWI). 2. FD: Fire-resistant core, fire-resistant materials assembled to stiles and rails according to methods prescribed by the testing agency to meet rigorous smoke, flame, and pressure tests. 3. FD-5: Core with 2 layers on each side. 4. ME: Matching edges, i.e., vertical edges same as decorative faces. 5. PC: Particleboard core, solid core door with stiles and rails bonded to the core and abrasive planed flat prior to the application of the faces. 6. PC-5: Core with 2 layers on each side. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. Definitions: 1. Adhesive, Type I (fully waterproof): Forms a bond that will retain practically all of its strength when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying; bond shall be of such quality that specimens will withstand shear and the two-cycle boil test specified in ANSI/HPVA HP (latest edition). 2. Book-Match: Matching between adjacent veneer leaves on one panel face. Every other piece of veneer is turned over so that the adjacent leaves are opened as two pages in a book. The fibers of the wood, slanting in opposite directions in the adjacent leaves, create a characteristic light and dark effect when the surface is seen from an angle. 3. Core: The material (typically, veneer, lumber, particleboard, medium-density fiberboard, or a combination of these) on which an exposed surface material (typically, veneer or HPDL) is applied. 4. Core, Solid: The innermost layer or section in flush door construction. Typical constructions are as follows: a. Core, Mineral: A fire-resistant core material generally used in wood doors requiring fire ratings of 3/4 hours or more. b. Particleboard - A solid core of wood or other lignocellulose particles bonded together with a suitable binder, cured under heat, and pressed into a rigid panel in a flat-platen press. 5. Face Veneer: The outermost exposed wood veneer surface of a veneered wood door, panel, or other component exposed to view when the project is completed.

B.

C.

Flush Wood Doors: Factory-Finished, Clear

-1-

08 1429

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 6. Flitch: A hewn or sawn log made ready for veneer production or the actual veneer slices of one half log, kept in order, and used for the production of fine plywood panels. 7. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade. a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a projects quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. b. Premium Grade: The highest Grade available in both material and workmanship where the highest level of quality, materials, workmanship, and installation is required. 8. Plain Slicing: Most commonly used for hardwood plywood. The log is cut in half, and one half is placed onto a carriage and moved up and down past a fixed knife to produce the veneers. Veneer is sliced parallel to the pith of the log and approximately tangent to the growth rings to achieve flat-cut veneer. Each piece is generally placed in a stack and kept in order. One half log, sliced this way, is called a flitch. 9. Running Match: Each panel face is assembled from as many veneer leaves as necessary. Any portion left over from one panel may be used to start the next. 10. Stile-and-Rail Construction: A technique often used in the making of doors, wainscoting, and other decorative features for cabinets and furniture. The basic concept is to capture a panel within a frame, and in its most basic form it consists of five members: the panel and the four members that make up the frame. The vertical members of the frame are called stiles, while the horizontal members are known as rails. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Composite Panel Association: a. ANSI A208.1-1999, Particleboard. 2. American National Standards Institute / Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association: a. ANSI / HPVA HP-1-2004 01-Jan-2004 American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.' 3. ASTM International: a. ASTM C1036-06, Standard Specification for Flat Glass. b. ASTM C1048-04, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat GlassKind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. a. UL 9, Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies (Eighth Edition Jul 2, 2009). b. UL 10B, Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (Ten Edition Feb 7, 2008).

08.29.11

D.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule showing type of door at each location. Included shall be size, veneer, core type, fire rating, hardware prep, openings, blocking, etc. b. Indicate factory finish color and type. 2. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Approval subject to Annual Review: a) Prepare sample to match Control Sample available from Owner to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. b) Approval of sample by Owner will establish performance standard of stain to be used until next annual review. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match stain Control Sample provided by Owner. Informational Submittals 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: -208 1429

B.

Flush Wood Doors: Factory-Finished, Clear

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a) C.

08.29.11 Owner will provide Control Sample for finish.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following information in Operations And Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's product literature on doors and factory finish. b) Maintenance and repair instructions.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver in clean truck and, in wet weather, under cover. 2. Deliver to building site only after plaster, cement, and taping compound are completed and dry and after interior painting operations have been completed. 3. Individually wrap in polyethylene bags for shipment and storage. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity range between 25 and 55 percent. 2. Store flat on level surface in dry, well ventilated space. 3. Cover to keep clean but allow air circulation. 4. Do not subject doors to direct sunlight, abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity. 5. Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces. 6. Leave shipping bag on door after installation until immediately before substantial completion inspection. 7. Doors have been acclimated to the field conditions for a minimum of 72 hours before installation is commenced.

B.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's standard full door warranty for lifetime of original installation. a. Warranty shall include finishing, hanging, and installing hardware if manufacturing defect was discovered after door was finished and installed. b. Warranty to include defects in materials including following: 1) Delaminating in any degree. 2) Warp or twist of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more in door panel at time of one-year warranty inspection. 3) Telegraphing of core assembly: Variation of 1/100 inch (0.25 mm) or more in 3 inch (75 mm) span.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Suppliers: 1. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT, Russ Farley, Phone (800) 574-4369, FAX 801-484-6817, e-mail russf@absdoors.com. b. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT, Alan John, Phone (888) 823-2206, FAX 801-4857647, e-mail alan@beacon-metals.com.

Flush Wood Doors: Factory-Finished, Clear

-3-

08 1429

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Graham Wood Doors, Mason City, IA. b. Marshfield Door Systems Inc, Marshfield, WI. c. VT Industries, Holstein, IA. Wood Doors: 1. Type: AWS PC-5ME or FD-5ME. 2. Grade: AWS Premium, except face veneer. 3. Fully Type I Construction: Adhere all glue lines with Type I adhesive, including veneer lay-up. 4. Face Veneer: a. Plain sliced Red Oak meeting requirements of AWS Grade A, 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick minimum immediately before finishing. b. Face veneers shall be running book matched. 5. Core: a. Fully bonded to stiles and rails and sanded as a unit before applying veneers. b. Non-Rated, AWS FD 1/3: 1) 32 lb density meeting requirements of ANSI A208.1 Mat Formed Wood Particle Board, Grade 1-L-1 minimum. 2) Stiles: a) 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) deep minimum before fitting. b) Stile face to be hardwood matching face veneer material, thickness manufacturer's standard. 3) Rails: a) 1-1/8 inches (28 mm). b) Manufacturer's option. 6. Factory Glazing: a. Glazing: Tempered glazing meeting requirements of ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality q3. Thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Lite Kit: 1) Design Criteria: a) Pre-finished wood or wood veneer frames. 2) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Profile M6G by Graham. b) Profile W6 by Marshfield. c) Profile VT1 by VT Industries. Fabrication: 1. Doors shall be factory-machined. Coordinate with Section 08 1213 and Sections under 08 7000. Finishes: 1. Factory Finishing: a. Applied by Door Manufacturer before leaving factory. b. Performance / Design Criteria: 1) Finish factory-finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Color to be selected from the following options: a) LDS 95. b) LDS Cherry. c. Finish: AWS Finish System TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane Premium Grade for unfilled, open-grain woods.

C.

D.

E.

2.2

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Verification of Performance: a. Doors shall have following information permanently affixed on top of door: 1) Manufacturer: 2) Door designation or model. 3) Veneer species. -408 1429

Flush Wood Doors: Factory-Finished, Clear

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

4) Factory finish. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Flush Wood Doors: Factory-Finished, Clear

-5-

08 1429

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 3110 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Manufactured access doors. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Babcock-Davis, Minneapolis, MN www.babcock-davis.com. 2. The Bilco Company, New Haven, CT www.bilco.com or Bilco Canada, London, ON (519) 6597331. 3. Dur-Red Products, Cudahy, CA www.dur-red.com. 4. Elmdor Stoneman, City of Industry, CA www.elmdorstoneman.com. 5. Jensen Industries, Los Angeles, CA www.jensen-ind.com. 6. Karp Associates Inc, Maspeth, NY www.karpinc.com. 7. Larsen's Manufacturing Co, Minneapolis, MN www.larsensmfg.com. 8. Mifab Manufacturing Co, Minneapolis, MN www.mifab.com. 9. Milcor, Bensenville, IL www.milcorinc.com. 10. Nystrom Inc, Brooklyn Park, MN www.nystrom.com. 11. Williams Brothers Corporation of America, Reno, NV www.wbdoors.com. 12. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Standard Ceiling or Wall Access Doors: 1. Manually operated with single key operated lock, interior latch release, and continuous piano hinge hardware. 2. Factory powder-coated prime finish. 3. Non-Fire-Rated, Class Two Quality Standards: a. Acoustical Tile: DSC-210 by Karp. b. Drywall: KDW or Sesame (KSTDW or KSTE) by Karp. 4. Insulated, Class Two Quality Standard: a. KRP-150 FR or KRP-350.FR by Karp.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Access Doors And Panels

-1-

08 3110

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install aluminum storefront entry and window systems, including hardware, glazing, and caulking, as described in Contract Documents and including the following: a. Low energy swinging operators for ADA compliance. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1100: Cores for High Security Cylinders are excluded from Contract and provided by Owner. This specification establishes quality of materials and installation of those items for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants. 3. Section 08 8100: Quality of glass glazing. 4. Division 26: Raceway, boxes, wiring for controls and operator.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA: a. AAMA 607.1-77, Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. b. AAMA 611-98. Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. c. AAMA 701/702-04 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals. 2. Glass Association of North America (GANA): a. Glazing Manual. 3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. Definitions: 1. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends electrical signal to door operator to open door. 2. Glass Surface: a. Insulated glass unit: 1) Surface 1: Exterior surface of outer lite. 2) Surface 2: Interspace-facing surface of outer lite. 3) Surface 3: Interspace-facing surface of inner lite. 4) Surface 4: Interior surface of inner lite. b. Monolithic glass: 1) Surface 1: Exterior surface. 2) Surface 2: Interior surface. 3. Safety Device: a. Device that prevents door from opening or closing, as appropriate. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association: a. ANSI / BHMA A156.18-2006, Materials and Finishes. b. ANSI / BHMA A156.19-2007, Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors.

B.

C.

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

-1-

08 4113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3. 4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake c. ANSI / BHMA A156.21-2009, American National Standard for Thresholds. d. ANSI / BHMA A156.5-2010, Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. ASTM International: a. ASTM B221-08, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. International Code Council / American National Standards Institute: a. ICC / ANSI A117.1-2009, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute: a. NFPA 1012009, Life Safety Code.

08.29.11

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 06 1100. 2. Schedule pre-installation conference for one week before scheduled installation of storefront system. 3. In addition to requirements of Section 01 3100, review following: a. Make certain rough openings are within tolerances required for installation of factoryfabricated frames. These dimensions have been agreed upon between Owner and Manufacturer and are shown on Standard Plan Drawings. b. Review installation scheduling, coordination, placement of doors. c. Review delivery, storage, and handling requirements. d. Review safety issues.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature. 1) Storefront entry system. 2) Low-energy door operator. b. Color and finish. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Show exact dimensions of factory-fabricated frames and required tolerances for rough openings. Submit shop drawings in time for Pre-Installation Conference specified in Section 06 1100. b. Show locations, sizes, etc, of hardware reinforcing. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Installer AAADM certification. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Maintenance, adjustment, and repair instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. a) Storefront warranty. b) Storefront closers. c) Low-energy door operator. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets for storefront system and for each item of hardware. b) Manufacturers literature of cut sheets for low-energy door operators. c) Color and finish selections.

B.

C.

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

-2-

08 4113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 d) Parts lists.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Provide wind load and impact testing by testing laboratory when required by local codes and jurisdictions. a. See Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities for Testing Agencies and Section 01 4301 for Testing Agency Qualifications. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in service performance. 2. Fabricator Qualifications: a. Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems fabricated by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project, and that have a record of successful in service performance. b. Fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce components required without causing delay in progress of the Work. 3. Installer Qualifications: a. Manufacturer's authorized representative who is AAADM certified and trained who has completed installations of aluminum entrances and storefront systems similar in design and extent to those required for this Project and whose Work has resulted in construction with record of successful in service performance. Certifications: 1. Installer: a. AAADM certification. 2. Manufacturer: a. Qualified manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM.

B.

C.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver all parts of door, together with hardware, in original, unopened packages with labels intact to Project at same time. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store in clean, dry location, indoors in Manufacturers unopened packaging until ready for installation and in accordance with Manufacturers instructions. 2. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage. 3. Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.

B.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Storefront Entrances: a. Manufacturers Warranty to be free of defects in material and workmanship. b. Manufacturers Warranty against deterioration or fading. c. Manufacturers Lifetime Warranty for Door Construction for normal use. 2. Closers: a. Closer Manufacturer's standard warranty, 10 years minimum. 3. Low-Energy Door Operator: -308 4113

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Manufacturers standard warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Category One VMR Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Kawneer North America, Norcross, GA, www.kawneer.com/kawneer/north_america. 1) Contact Information: Paul Cannon, West Valley City, UT (801) 201-1080, FAX 801768-4588 paul.cannon@kawneer.com. b. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope, Santa Monica, CA www.oldcastlebe.com. 1) Contact Information: Erick M. Loucel, Terrell, TX (800) 869-4567 ext 336, FAX 972551-6264 eloucel@oldcastlebe.com. Materials: 1. Frames: a. Aluminum: 1) 6063-T5 aluminum alloy or meet requirements of ASTM B221, alloy GS 10A-T6 or T6. b. Mullion: 1) Steel reinforced or heavy duty as necessary to prevent lateral flexing of mullion. c. Sills: 1) Match height of door bottoms. d. Sealer Tape: 1) 3M. e. Fasteners: 1) Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel. 2) Concealed fastenings shall be cadmium or zinc-plated steel. f. Finish: 1) Match doors. g. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Single Glazed: a) Trifab '450' by Kawneer. b) Series FG2000 1-3/4x4-1/2 by Oldcastle. 2) Double Glazed: a) Trifab '451' by Kawneer. b) Series FG3000 2x4-1/2 by Oldcastle. 2. Manually Operated Doors: a. Aluminum: 1) 6063 T5 aluminum alloy, or meet requirements of ASTM B221, alloy GS 10A-T6 or T6. b. Stiles: 1) 3-1/2 inches by 1-3/4 inches by 0.125 inches (89 mm by 45 mm by 3.175 mm) thick nominal. c. Top Rails: 1) 5-3/4 inches minimum by 1-3/4 inches by 0.125 inches (146 mm minimum by 45 mm by 3.175 mm) thick nominal. d. Bottom Rails: 1) 10 inches minimum by 1-3/4 inches by 0.125 inches (254 mm minimum by 45 mm by 3.175 mm) thick nominal. e. Construction: 1) Manufacturer's standard. f. Glazing Stops: 1) Snap-in type with neoprene bulb-type glazing. Units shall be glazed from exterior side. g. Weatherstripping: 1) Neoprene bulb-type. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Sealair by Kawneer. b) D125 by Oldcastle. -408 4113

B.

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

Project # 503-6925-11010101 h.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

Finish: 1) Polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVF2) Resin-base finish (Kynar or Hylar) containing 70 percent minimum PVF2 in resin portion of formula and providing a pencil hardness of 3H. Thermo-cured two-coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and topcoat factory-applied over properly pre-treated metal. 2) Category Four Approved Color. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Bone White by Kawneer. b) Bone White by Oldcastle. i. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) 350 Medium Stile by Kawneer. 2) Series 375 by Oldcastle. Hardware: a. Hinging: 1) Top and bottom offset, ball bearing pivots per door leaf. b. Overhead Door Closers: 1) Provide parallel arms on closers unless door position requires otherwise. 2) Where possible, closers shall allow for 180 degree opening and not be used as stop. Provide Cush-N-Stop or equivalent arm where wall stop cannot be used. 3) Adjust closers to provide maximum opening force as required by governing code authority. 4) Closers shall have following features: a) Adjustable sweep speed. b) Adjustable backcheck. c) Non-handed, non-sized. 5) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Surface mounted: b) 4041 Series parallel arm by LCN. c) 7500 Series Parallel arm by Norton. c. Exit Devices: 1) Entry Doors: a) Operation: (1) Entry shall be by key. Device shall be locked by cylinder from outside. Key shall be removable when cylinder is in locked or unlocked position. (2) Dogging operation shall be by manufacturers accessible thumbturn cylinder function. (3) Exterior Trim: Lever Handle or Pull equal to Kawneer CO-9 or Oldcastle PH12. (4) Types: Rim Type. Provide type of strike that will allow installation of specified panic devices on storefront system specified. 2) Access Doors: a) Operation: (1) Access accomplished by dogging device. Dogging operation shall be by accessible, permanent knob, not by removable allen wrench devices. (2) Exterior Trim: Match Entry Doors. (3) Types: Rim Type. Provide type of strike that will allow installation of specified panic devices on storefront system specified. 3) Emergency Egress Exit Doors: a) Operation: (1) Exit only with no dogging. (2) Exterior Trim: None. (3) Type: Rim Type with type of strike that will allow installation of specified panic devices on storefront system specified. 4) Color: a) Equivalent to clear anodized. 5) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Apex Series by Precision. b) 80 Series by Sargent. c) 98 or 99 Rim Series by Von Duprin. d. Low-Energy Swing Operator: 1) Meet requirements of ICC/ANSI 117.1 and ANSI A156.19. -508 4113

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

e.

f.

g.

h.

i.

j.

Wall-mounted push button operation. Solid state electronic control. Adjustable closing speed and hold-open range. Automatic and manual operating modes. Metal cover finished to match door. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Besam SW100 by Besam (subsidiary of ASSA ABLOY) US-Monroe, NC www.besam.us. b) Horton 7000 by Horton Automatics (Division of Overhead Door Corp.), Corpus Christi, TX www.hortondoors.com. c) Stanley Magic-Force by Stanley Access Technologies, Farmington, CT www.stanleyaccesstechnologies.com. Thresholds: 1) Exterior: a) Design Criteria: Meet handicap accessibility requirements. b) Exterior to Carpet Tile: Similar to Pemko 273 Profile. 2) Interior: a) Design Criteria: Meet handicap accessibility requirements. b) Carpet Tile / Carpet to Carpet: Similar to Pemko 236. Sweep Strips: 1) Class Two Quality Standard: a) Pemko 18041PWP. b) NGP 200NA. Stops: 1) Use wall stops, except where required otherwise on Door Schedule. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Wall Mounted: (1) WB35 by Glynn-Johnson. (2) 1205 by Trimco / BBW / Quality. (3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Push / Pulls: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Kawneer CPII and CO-9, clear anodized. b) Oldcastle PB16 and PH-12, clear anodized. High Security Cylinders And Cores: 1) Schlage cores with Primus Level 4+ keying system with special Church side bit milling: a) Church And Factory Authorized USA Distributors: (1) Architectural Building Supply, P O Box 65678, Salt Lake City, UT 841650678 or 2965 South Main St, Salt Lake City, UT 84115. (a) (801) 486-3481. (b) FAX: (801) 484-6817. Kick Plates: 1) Push side of Door only. 2) 10 inches (254 mm) high by width of door less 3/4 inch (19 mm) on each side. 3) Material: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick Stainless Steel. 4) Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com. b) Hager, St Louis, MO (800) 255-3590 or (314) 772-4400 www.hagerhinge.com. c) Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com. d) Rockwood Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. e) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

C.

Fabrication: 1. Construction shall meet Manufacturers recommendations. 2. Fabricate in factory to dimensions required to fit framed openings detailed on Contract Documents. Joints shall be tightly closed. 3. Mortise in manner to give maximum hardware-door connection strength and neatness of appearance. Adequately reinforce with backplates or rivnuts to hold pivots and closers. Hardware Finishes: -608 4113

D.

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Finishes for steel, brass, or bronze hardware items shall be US26D, Chromium plated, satin. Materials other than steel, brass, or bronze shall be finished to match the appearance of US26D.

08.29.11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLERS A. Category One Approved VMR Installers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Installer Qualifications and Part 1 Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications of this specification section: 1. Kawneer: a. Bountiful Glass, 801.295.3475 b. Mollerup Glass, 801.397.1177 c. Jones Paint & Glass, 801.374.6711. 2. Oldcastle: a. Bennets Contract Glazing, 801.466.8500, Contact: Ed Hymas b. Olympus Contract Glazing, 801.977.9570, Contact: David Hymas c. Polished Edge Glass, 801.975.7700.

3.2

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify that framed openings will accommodate factory-fabricated storefront entry and window frames of dimensions agreed upon by Owner and Manufacturer and shown on Standard Plan documents. 2. Verify floor is level across entire width of automatic door opening. 3. Verify sill conditions are level and/or sloped away from openings as specified. 4. Notify Architect and Owner in writing if framed openings are not as agreed upon. a. Do not install storefront entry and window frames until deficiencies in framed openings have been corrected to allow installation of standard entries and windows. b. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers published recommendations. 3. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints tight, free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 4. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by applying sealer tape to prevent electrolytic action. Set plumb, square, level, and in correct alignment and securely anchor to following tolerances: 1. Variation from plane: Limit to 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 12 feet (3.6 meters); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2. Offset from Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 3. Offset at Corners: For surfaces meeting at corner, limit offset to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 4. Diagonal measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. Sidelites: Line up horizontal rail in sidelight with door rail. Install doors without warp of rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide 90 degree operation, tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. Install exterior window units with through wall sill flashing. -708 4113

B.

C.

D.

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

Project # 503-6925-11010101 E.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Thresholds: 1. Accurately cut thresholds to fit profile of storefront frame. Bed exterior thresholds in specified sealant at contact points with floor and make watertight. Sealants: 1. Apply in accordance with Section 07 9213 Elastomeric Joint Sealant. 2. Caulk joints between frames and walls, both interior and exterior to provide weather tight installation. Glazing Characteristics: 1. Interior Vestibule Glazing: Clear. 2. Exterior Storefront Doors And Sidelights Opening Into Foyers And Corridors: a. Clear interior pane and Clear exterior pane with Low E treatment on surface 2. 3. All Other Exterior Storefront Doors And Storefront: a. Obscure interior pane with pattern on surface 3 and Clear exterior pane with Low E treatment on surface 2.

F.

G.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Pull test doors, especially pairs of single doors separated by permanent mullions, to ensure security of opening. Non-Conforming Work:: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements including removal and replacement of glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period at no additional cost to the Owner.

B.

3.5

ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for proper operation after glazing entry. After repeated operation of completed installation, re-adjust door for optimum operating condition and safety if required.

3.6

PROTECTION A. During Installation: 1. Installers Responsibility: a. During installation, all adjacent work shall be protected from damage. After Installation: 1. General Contractors Responsibility: a. Institute protective measures required throughout remainder of construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.

B.

3.7

CLEANING A. General: 1. Installers Responsibility: a. Follow Manufacturers written recommendations for cleaning and maintenance or guidelines of AAMA Publications #609 and #610-2 Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (combined documents).

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

-8-

08 4113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b.

c.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Clean glass and aluminum surfaces, inside and out, promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Exercise care to avoid damage to coatings. Remove nonpermanent labels, protective films, and clean surfaces following recommended procedures.

08.29.11

B.

Waste Management: 1. Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION

Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts

-9-

08 4113

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 08 5313 VINYL WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Window units. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish windows specified in this Section. PART 2 of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealant and backer rod. 3. Section 08 4113: Fixed storefront windows. 4. Section 08 8100: Quality of glass glazing.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association / Window & Door Manufacturers Association / Canadian Standards Association: a. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 (May 2009) North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights. b. FMA/AAMA100-07, Standard Practice for the Installation of Windows with Flanges or Mounting Fins in Wood Frame Construction. c. AAMA 701/702-04, Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals. d. AAMA 711-07, Voluntary Specification for Self-Adhering Flashing Used for Installation of Exterior Wall Fenestration Products, American Architectural Manufacturers Association. e. AAMA 851-09, Fenestration Sealants Guide for Windows, Window Walls and Curtain Walls. f. AAMA 902-07, Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances, g. AAMA 910-93, Life Cycle" Specifications and Test Methods for Architectural Grade Windows and Sliding Glass Doors. h. AAMA 1503-09, Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.' 2. National Fenestration Rating Council, Silver Spring, MD. a. NFRC 200-2009, Section 5.6 (Non-Residential Fenestration). Reference Standards: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: a. AAMA 1503-98, Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.'

B.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Review Installation scheduling, coordination, and placement of windows. b. Review Manufacturers installation requirements to assure issuance of Manufacturers warranty.

Vinyl Windows

-1-

08 5313

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Before installing windows, review Manufacturer's submitted installation requirements and install first window, including flashing and sealant, to demonstrate standard for installation of remaining windows.

08.29.11

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b. Literature on glazing. c. Color selection. d. Manufacturer's published installation instructions for windows, flashing, and sealants. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit before beginning framing. Show rough opening requirements. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Manufacturer's published installation instructions for windows, flashing, and sealants. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranty.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: 1. Confirmation of ICC report for flashing.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. 2. Examine and report damaged materials to Architect and/or Owner immediately. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Provide secure location protected from the weather and other trades.

B.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide written non-prorated Manufacturer's warranty including: a. 10 years for glass, parts and labor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category One VMR Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Montecito Window by Milgard Manufacturing Inc, Tacoma, WA www.milgard.com. a. Contact Information: 1) General Information: 1010 54th Ave East, Tacoma, WA 98424 Phone (253) 922-2030, www.milgard.com.

Vinyl Windows

-2-

08 5313

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2) 3) B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Primary Contact: Jeff Mead office (801).972-0715597 cell (801 597-2664 jeffmead@milgard.com. Inside Sales, (801) 975.1836, hollykimball@milgard.com.

08.29.11

Manufactured Window Units: 1. Fixed Window: a. Montecito Picture: 1) Model: 8320M. Design Criteria: 1. Performance: a. Comply with minimum test requirements of AAMA / WDMA / CSA 101 for classification of specified window in following: 1) Air infiltration. 2) Water Resistance. 3) Wind Load Resistance. 4) Condensation Resistance. 5) Uniform structural load. b. AAMA / WDMA / CSA 101 classification C30 minimum for windows, tested at 4 feet wide by 7 feet high minimum. c. Meet following thermal performance: 1) Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) of 48 minimum when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. 2) Thermal Transmittance of 0.65 maximum when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. Manufactured Units: 1. Windows: a. Factory glazed. b. Weatherstripped. c. Flanged for installation in framed buildings; Non-flanged for installation in masonry buildings. Installation method shall not require drilling into frame. d. Approved Color: 1) White. e. Muntin Pattern: 1) Determined by building style selection. Fabrication: 1. Corners shall be thermally fused. Glazing Requirements: 1. Glazing Characteristics: a. Obscure interior pane with pattern on surface 3 and Clear exterior pane with Milgard SunCoatMax 366 Low-E treatment on surface 2. 2. Glazing Beads: Manufacturer's standard.

C.

D.

E.

F.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Anchoring Devices: 1. Aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Other corrosion-resistant or insulated anchors as specifically approved by Architect in writing before use. Flashing: 1. Self-adhesive rubberized asphalt with protective sheet. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Flexwrap by duPont Tyvek, Wilmington, DE www.tyvek.com. b. Eternabond, Mundelein, IL www.eternabond.com. c. FortiFlash 20 mil by Fortifiber, Reno, NV www.fortifiber.com.

B.

Vinyl Windows

-3-

08 5313

Project # 503-6925-11010101 d. e. f. g. h.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Vycor Self-Adhered Flashing by Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, MA www.na.graceconstruction.com. Optiflash B-20 by Covalence Coated Products, Homer, LA www.covalencecoatedproducts.com. BT25XL Window Sealing Tape by Protecto Wrap, Denver, CO www.protectowrap.com. Rufco-Shield Window & Door Flashing by Raven Industries, Sioux Falls, SD www.ravenind.com. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

08.29.11

2.3

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Identification: 1. When delivered to Project site, windows shall bear permanent label stating model of window and Manufacturer's name, or AAMA label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Openings: a. Examine openings for adequacy in allowing successful installation and operation. b. Verify openings are prepared to specified dimensions and are plumb and level. 2. Notify Architect in writing of inadequate conditions. a. Do not install windows until conditions have been corrected. 3. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. B. C. Set window frame plumb, level, and in alignment. Secure window properly in opening. Apply specified sealant between window frame and building wall as specified in Section 07 9213. Apply flashing.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspections: 1. After installation of windows and before installation of exterior wall finish, inspect windows and compare to installation standard accepted at Pre-Installation Conference. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

B.

3.4

CLEANING A. After installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces of windows and accessories of mortar, plaster, paint, and other contaminants. Maintain protection and provide final cleaning.

END OF SECTION Vinyl Windows -408 5313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 08 7101 COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General requirements for finish hardware related to architectural wood and hollow metal doors. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2024: Installation. 2. Section 06 4124: Architectural Woodwork Hardware. 3. Section 08 0601: Hardware Group Schedules. 4. Section 08 4113: Aluminum-Framed Storefront Hardware.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA), 355 Lexington Avenue, 15th Floor, New York, NY 10017-6603, Tel: 212-297-2122 Fax: 212-370-9047, www.buildershardware.com.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Hardware Templates: a. Provide hardware templates to Sections 08 1213, 08 1313, and 08 1429 within 14 days after Architect approves hardware schedule. b. Supply necessary hardware installation templates to Section 06 2024 before pre-installation conference.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's cut sheets. b. Two copies of Manufacturers installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions for each piece of hardware. Include one set in Operations And Maintenance Manual and send one set with hardware when delivered. c. Copy of hardware schedule. d. Written copy of keying system explanation. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Submit hardware schedule indicating hardware to be supplied. b. Schedule shall indicate details such as proper type of strikeplates, spindle lengths, hand, backset, and bevel of locks, hand and degree opening of closer, length of kickplates, length of rods and flushbolts, type of door stop, and other necessary information necessary to determine exact hardware requirements. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: -108 7101

B.

Common Finish Hardware Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101

b.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 1) Manufacturers installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions for each piece of hardware. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature and/or cut sheets. b) Include keying plan and bitting schedule.

08.29.11

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Suppliers: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: a. Shall have two years minimum experience in providing, detailing, scheduling, and installing builders hardware and shall employ at least one full time DHI Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Neatly and securely package hardware items by hardware group and identify for individual door with specified group number and set number used on Supplier's hardware schedule. 2. Include fasteners and accessories necessary for installation and operation of finish hardware in same package.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SUPPLIERS A. Category One VMR Approved Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT Russ Farley, Phone (800) 574-4369, FAX 801484-6817, e-mail russf@absdoors.com. 2. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT Alan John Phone (888) 823-2206, FAX 801-485-7647, e-mail alan@beacon-metals.com.

2.2

FINISHES A. Hardware Finishes: 1. Finishes for steel, brass, or bronze hardware items shall be US26D, Chromium plated, satin, except flat goods which may be US32D, stainless steel, satin. 2. Materials other than steel, brass, or bronze shall be finished to match the appearance of US26D / 32D.

2.3

FASTENERS A. Fasteners shall be of suitable types, sizes and quantities to properly secure hardware. Fasteners shall be of same material and finish as hardware unless otherwise specified. Fasteners exposed to weather shall be non-ferrous or corrosion resisting steel.

Common Finish Hardware Requirements

-2-

08 7101

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

PREPARATION A. Before ordering materials, examine documents to be assured that material to be ordered is appropriate for substrate to which it is to be secured and will function as intended.

END OF SECTION

Common Finish Hardware Requirements

-3-

08 7101

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 7102 HANGING DEVICES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Hinges for flush wood and hollow metal doors. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Hager Companies, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. b. Ives, New Haven, CT www.iveshardware.com. c. McKinney, Scranton, PA www.mckinneyhinge.com. d. PBB, Ontario, CA www.pbbinc.com. e. Stanley, New Britain, CT www.stanleyworks.com. Hinges: 1. Sizes: a. 1-3/4 inch (45 mm) doors in metal frames: 1) Standard: 4-1/2 inches by 4-1/2 inches (115 mm by 115 mm). 2) Wide Throw: 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) by width required. 2. Use non-removable pins on exterior opening doors. 3. Hinges on exterior doors shall be solid brass, plated to achieve specified finish. 4. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Interior: 1) Hager: BB 1279. 2) Ives: 5BBI. 3) McKinney: TA 2714. 4) MacPro / McKinney: MPB79. 5) PBB: BB81. 6) Stanley: FBB 179. b. Exterior: 1) Hager: BB 1191. 2) Ives: 5BBI. 3) McKinney: TA 2314. 4) PBB: BB21. 5) Stanley: FBB 191.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Hanging Devices

-1-

08 7102

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 7103 SECURING DEVICES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Items for architectural wood or hollow metal doors: a. Flush bolts. b. Locksets and latchsets. c. Interior exit devices. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements. 2. Miscellaneous padlocks by local Church FM Group.

B.

1.2

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Standard Key Delivery: a. Include change keys with hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer List: a. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. b. Ives, New Haven, CT www.ives.ingersollrand.com c. Precision Hardware, Romulus, MI www.precisionhardware.com. d. Rockwood, Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. e. Sargent, New Haven, CT www.sargentlock.com. f. Schlage, Colorado Springs, CO www.schlage.com. g. Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN www.vonduprin.com. h. Yale Commercial Locks, Lenoir City, TN www.yalecommercial.com. General: 1. Backsets shall be 2-3/4 inches (70 mm). 2. Furnish lead shields where required. Flush Bolts: 1. Rod length: 12 inch (300 mm) minimum. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Manual Flushbolts: 1) Hager 282D. 2) Ives FB458. 3) Rockwood 555. b. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 3. Dust Proof Strike: a. Floor and/or threshold. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: -108 7103

B.

C.

Securing Devices

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1) 2) 3) 4) D.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Hager: 280X. Ives: DP2. Rockwood 570. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

Locksets And Latchsets: 1. Lever Operated: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) 7 Series by Sargent. 2) AL Series by Schlage. 3) 5300LN by Yale. Exit Devices: 1. Use operable lever trim. 2. Provide labeled hardware where required by local code authority. 3. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Apex Series by Precision. b. 80 Series by Sargent. c. 99 or 98 Series by Von Duprin. d. 7100 Series by Yale.

E.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

CLOSE-OUT ACTIVITIES A. Owners Instructions: 1. Before Final Acceptance Meeting, send master keys to Jedd Morley, Price Utah FM Group Facilities Manager.

END OF SECTION

Securing Devices

-2-

08 7103

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 7104 OPERATING TRIM

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Interior push / pulls. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements and VMR Suppliers.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Standard Door Push / Pulls: 1. Size: 15 inches (380 mm) by 3-1/2 inch (89 mm). 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. PS3515, PL3515 / 80301 by Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com. b. 39E, 30S by Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. c. 8200, 8302 by Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com. d. 70B, 105x70B by Rockwood Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. e. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Operating Trim

-1-

08 7104

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 7106 CLOSING DEVICES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Closers for flush wood doors and hollow metal doors. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Finish Hardware Requirements. 2. Section 08 7108: Stops And Holders.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Manufacturers final, executed copy of warranty.

1.3

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty, five (5) years minimum.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. 7900 Series by Dorma Architectural Hardware, Reamstown, PA www.dorma.com/usa. b. 1461 Series by LCN Closers, Princeton, IL www.lcnclosers.com. c. 8501 Series by Norton Door Controls, Charlotte, NC www.nortondoorcontrols.com. d. 1431 Series by Sargent, New Haven, CT www.sargentlock.com. Surface-Mounted Overhead Door Closers: 1. Closers provided under this Section shall be from same Manufacturer. 2. Provide parallel arms on closers unless door position in relation to adjacent wall requires otherwise. Provide covers. 3. Door Closers on doors that swing 180 degree as shown on Contract Documents: a. Closers shall allow for 180 degree opening and not be used as a stop. Wall stop or Floor stop is specified in Door Schedule and Section 08 7108, Stops And Holders. b. Closers shall have following features: 1) Adjustable sweep speed. 2) Adjustable backcheck. 3) Non-handed, non-sized. 4) Hold open arm function. 4. Door Closers on doors that swing 90 degree as shown on Contract Documents: a. Closers shall allow for 100 degree opening and not be used as a stop. b. Closers shall have following features: -108 7106

B.

Closing Devices

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1) 2) 3) 4)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Adjustable sweep speed. Adjustable backcheck. Non-handed, non-sized. Hold open arm function with thumb turn or handle control.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. Mount closers on stop side of door wherever conditions permit. Through-bolt hardware-to-door connections.

3.2

ADJUSTING A. Adjust closers to provide maximum opening force as required by governing code authority and proper backcheck and sweep speed.

END OF SECTION

Closing Devices

-2-

08 7106

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 08 7107 PROTECTIVE PLATES AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Kick plates. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements and VMR Suppliers.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com. b. Hager, St Louis, MO (800) 255-3590 or (314) 772-4400 www.hagerhinge.com. c. Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. e. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Protective Plates: 1. Material: 0.050 inch (1.27) mm thick Stainless Steel. 2. Sizes: a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (255) mm high by width of door less 3/4 inch (19 mm) on each side.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Protective Plates And Trim

-1-

08 7107

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 7108 STOPS AND HOLDERS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Door stops. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com. b. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. c. Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. e. Sargent, New Haven, CT (800) 906-6606 or (203) 562-2151 www.sargentlock.com. Stops: 1. Use wall type stops unless indicated otherwise on Door Schedule. 2. Provide model appropriate for substrate. Wall stops may be either cast or wrought. 3. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Interior Wall Exterior Wall Floor Mount Overhead. b. Hager 236W 255W 243F --c. Ives WS407CCV WS447 FS438 --d. Rockwood 409 474 / 475 440 / 441 --e. Glynn Johnson ------GJ 90S f. Sargent ------590S Series g. Equal as approved by Architect before Installation. See Section 01 6200.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: When using overhead stops, coordinate installation with door closer and other door hardware.

END OF SECTION

Stops And Holders

-1-

08 7108

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 7109 ACCESSORIES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Acoustical seals. 2. Smoke Gaskets. 3. Thresholds (metal) where required for wood doors and hollow metal doors. 4. Weatherstripping for exterior hollow metal doors. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 4113: Thresholds for Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts. 2. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements and Approved Suppliers. 3. Section 09 3013: Stone thresholds. 4. Section 09 6466: Wood flooring system thresholds.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA: a. AAMA 607.1-77, Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. b. AAMA 611-98. Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. c. AAMA 701/702-04 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals. 2. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association: a. ANSI / BHMA A156.18-2006, Materials and Finishes. b. ANSI / BHMA A156.21-2009, American National Standard for Thresholds.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. b. NGP - National Guard Products, Memphis, TN www.ngpinc.com. c. Pemko Manufacturing, Ventura, CA www.pemko.com. Acoustical Seals: 1. Color as selected by Architect. 2. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Door Bottom for Wood Door: 1) 13VDkB by NGP. 2) 211DV by Pemko. b. Door Bottom for Metal Door: -108 7109

B.

Accessories

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c. C.

1) 779S-A by Hager. 2) 35EV by NGP. 3) 217AV by Pemko. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

Smoke Gaskets: 1. Color as selected by Architect. 2. Type One Acceptable Products: a. 726 by Hager. b. 5050 by NGP. c. PK55 by Pemko. d. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Thresholds: 1. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Interior Doors at Acoustic Seals, Approved Products: 1) Carpet Both Sides: a) 505S-DBA by Hager. b) 414DKB by NGP. c) 236D by Pemko. b. Out swinging Exterior Doors, Approved Products: 1) 560SV by Hager. 2) 425 by NGP. 3) 185AV by Pemko. c. Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Weatherstripping: 1. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Perimeter: 1) 800S by Hager. 2) A625A by NGP. 3) 35041CP by Pemko. b. Bottom: 1) Equal by Hager. 2) 198NA by NGP. 3) Equal by Pemko. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

D.

E.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Install smoke gaskets and acoustical seals in manner to give continuous air-tight fit. 1. Install smoke gaskets as per Manufacturers installation requirements: a. Hinge Jamb: Install smoke gaskets on jamb face of door frame so door will compress smoke gasket. b. Header and Strike Jamb: Install smoke gaskets on face of stop of door frame so door will compress smoke gasket. 2. Install acoustical seal with seal under door.

END OF SECTION

Accessories

-2-

08 7109

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 08 7913 KEY STORAGE AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Key cabinet. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 0603: Keying schedule. 2. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Key Cabinet: 1. Provide cabinet with 40 hooks minimum. 2. 20 ga (0.95 mm) steel with prime coat and provided with lock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Turn key cabinet over to Owner's designated representative at Substantial Completion with all keys required for every locking device on Project identified by tags and on hooks. Owner will be responsible for installation.

END OF SECTION

Key Storage And Control Equipment

-1-

08 7913

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 08 8100 GLASS GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of glazing used in entries, doors, and windows. Related Requirements: 1. Sections Under 08 1000 Heading: Furnishing and installing of flush wood door lites in new doors. 2. Section 08 4113: Furnishing and installing of glazing in aluminum-framed storefront. 3. Section 08 5313: Furnishing and installing of glazing in windows.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Glass Association of North America (GANA): a. Glazing Manual. b. Laminated Glass Design Guide. c. Engineering Standards Manual. 2. The Insulating Glass Manufactures Alliance (IGMA): a. IGMA TB-3001 Sloped Glazing Guidelines. b. SIGMA TM-3000 Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. Definitions: 1. Airspace: Space between lites of insulating glass unit that contains dehydrated air or other inert specified gas. 2. Float Glass: Glass which has its bottom surfaces formed by floating on molten metal, top surface being gravity formed, producing high optical quality of glass with parallel surfaces and, without polishing and grinding, fire-finished brilliance of finest sheet glass. 3. Glass Surface: a. Insulated glass unit: 1) Surface 1: Exterior surface of outer lite. 2) Surface 2: Interspace-facing surface of outer lite. 3) Surface 3: Interspace-facing surface of inner lite. 4) Surface 4: Interior surface of inner lite. b. Monolithic glass: 1) Surface 1: Exterior surface. 2) Surface 2: Interior surface. 4. Heat-Strengthened Glass: Glass which is reheated, after forming, just below melting point and then cooled. Compressed surface is formed which increases its strength. Used for spandrel glass. 5. Insulation Glass: Two pieces of glass spaced apart and hermetically sealed to form single-glazed unit with air space between. Heat transmission through this type of glass may be as low as half that without air space. It is also called double glazing, double pane, insulated unit, and thermal pane. 6. Laminated Glass: Two or more sheets with inner layer of transparent plastic to which glass adheres if broken. Used for overhead, safety glazing, and sound reduction. 7. Low-Emissivity Glass (Low-E): Reduces wintertime heat loss from interior with thin, almost colorless metallic coating that reflects heat back inside structure. It allows moderate solar heat gain while reducing harmful ultraviolet light in any season. Minimizes summertime air

B.

Glass Glazing

-1-

08 8100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake conditioning loss by reflecting radiated heat to outside. It may be tempered for where safety glass is required. It is available in single strength clear, gray and bronze (brown) color. 8. Muntins: Decorative design in cut-ups of glass lites, such as painted muntin grids (enamelite) applied to interior lite of glass in sealed insulating glass unit to simulate cut-ups of glass lites either in colonial or diamond patterns, or use of aluminum muntin bar between lites of glass in sealed insulating glass unit to simulate glass cut-ups, or use of actual vertical and horizontal bars to divide windows into smaller lites of glass. Bars are termed muntin bars. 9. Obscure Glass: Adds privacy where window coverings are impractical or undesirable. Various colors and texture patterns provide translucent or semi-opaque effect. It may be tempered for use where safety glass is required. 10. Tempered Glass: Glass strengthened through process of heating, creating tensile strength that causes glass to resist breakage, yet disintegrate into small pieces if break occurs. Tempered glass is type of safety glass.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association / Window & Door Manufacturers Association: a. AAMA 800-10, Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM C1036-06, Standard Specification for Flat Glass.' b. ASTM C1048-04, 'Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind H, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. c. ASTM C1281-03(2009), Standard Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications. d. ASTM E2190-08, Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. 3. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): a. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties. b. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficients at Normal Incidence. c. NFRC 300 - Procedures for Determining Solar Optical Properties of Simple Fenestration Products. 4. U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): a. Code of Federal Regulations: 16 CFR 1201, Safety Standard For Architectural Glazing Materials.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturers data sheets for each glass product and glazing material. Informational Submittals: a. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: 1) For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty.

B.

C.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Glazing shall meet applicable requirements of Federal Consumer Product Safety Standard 16 CFR 1201.

Glass Glazing

-2-

08 8100

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Comply with published recommendations of glass product Manufacturers and organizations, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

08.29.11

B.

Qualifications: 1. Installer: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: a. Installer shall have performed at least three (3) installations of similar size, scope, and complexity in each of the past two (2) years and be approved by glass product Manufacturer. Certifications: 1. Labels showing strength, grade, thickness, type, and quality are required on each piece of glass. 2. Manufacturers/Fabricators certifying products furnished comply with project requirements. 3. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Indicate compliance with requirements of Insulating Glass Certification Council on applicable glazing products.

C.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Follow Manufacturers instruction for receiving, handling, and protecting glass & glazing materials to prevent breakage scratching, damage to seals, or other visible damage. 2. Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Follow Manufacturers instruction for storing and protecting glass & glazing materials. 2. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperatures and humidity conditions recommended by Manufacturer. 3. Protect edge damage to glass, and damage/deterioration to coating on glass.

B.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Insulating Glass Warranty: a. Manufacturers standard form, signed by insulating-glass product Manufacturer/Fabricator, agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that exhibit failure of hermetic seal under normal use evidenced by obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass, for ten [10] years of date of installation. 2. Installers Warranty: a. Form acceptable to Owner, signed by glass product Installer, agreeing to replace glass products that deteriorate, or that exhibit damage or deterioration of glass or glazing products due to faulty installation, for two (2) years from date of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List for Low E Glazing: -308 8100

Glass Glazing

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b. c. d. e. B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

AFG Industries, Kingsport, TN www.afg.com. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope, Santa Monica, CA www.oldcastlebe.com. Pilkington North America Inc., Toledo, OH www.pilkington.com. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, PA www.ppgglass.com or PPG Canada Ltd, Glass Division, Toronto, ON (416) 789-3331. Versalux, Tulsa, OK www.versaluxglass.com.

Exterior Window Glazing: 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum, Double Strength. 2. Insulated glazing to comply with ASTM E2190. 3. Glazing shall have following characteristics: a. Clear: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class I, Quality Q3. b. Low E: 1) Insulating glass. 2) 70 percent Visible light transmission. 3) 0.29 U-value winter, 0.28 U-value summer. 4) 0.38 SHGC. 5) 0.44 Shading coefficient. 6) 11 percent Outdoor visible light reflectance. 7) Apply to surface 2. 8) Class One Quality Standard: Solarban 60 (2) Clear by PPG: 9) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) AFG. b) LOF. c) PPG. d) Visteon. e) Other low E glazing system standard with window manufacturer that meets or exceeds performance characteristics of specified glazing is acceptable as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. c. Obscure: ASTM C1036, Type II, Class I, Form 3, Quality Q8, Pattern #62. d. Glazing in windows within 24 inches (600 mm) of exterior doors shall be tempered meeting requirements of ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality Q3. Storefront Glazing: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Glazing shall have following characteristics: a. Clear: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class I, Quality Q3. b. Low E: 1) Class One Performance Standard: Solarban 70 XL by PPG: a) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. b) Insulated Glass. c) 63 percent VLT. d) .29 U-value winter, .27 U-value summer. e) .27 SHGC. f) .27 Shading coefficient. g) 11 percent outdoor visible light reflectance. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) AFG. b) LOF. c) PPG. d) Visteon. e) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. c. Obscure: ASTM C1036, Type II, Class I, Form 3, Quality Q8, Pattern - #62. d. Glazing below door height shall be tempered meeting requirements of ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality Q3. Polycarbonate Sheet: 1. Description: Translucent, high impact and heat resistance, light weight, and no UV resistance to protect light fixtures in Cultural Hall light coves. -408 8100

C.

D.

Glass Glazing

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2. 3.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm). Acceptable Product: a. Lexan Protect-A-Glaze 90318 Pebble Finish. b. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

E.

Fabrication: 1. Except where glass exceeds 66 inches (1 675 mm) in width, cut clear glass so any wave will run horizontally when glazed. 2. Install muntins for exterior aluminum entries and aluminum windows between panes of insulating glazing units. No muntins on interior Vestibule storefront entries. 3. Sealed, Insulating Glazing Units: a. Double pane, sealed insulating glass units. Install at exterior windows and exterior aluminum-framed storefront. b. Unit Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm) minimum, one inch (25 mm) maximum. c. Insulated obscure units shall consist of one pane of specified obscure glass and one pane of standard glass. d. Type Seal: 1) Metal-to-glass bond and separated by 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) dehydrated air space. 2) Use non-hardening sealants. e. Category Four Approved Fabricators. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Members of Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's Association.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. Glazing Tape: Butyl-based elastomeric tape with integral resilient tube spacer, 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness, black color, coiled on release paper; widths required for specified installation, complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Glass Glazing

-5-

08 8100

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I O N 09: F I N I S H E S
09 0000 FINISHES

09 2000 P L A S T E R A N D G Y P S U M B O A R D 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2226 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM: GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 3000 T I L I N G 09 3013 CERAMIC TILING 09 5000 C E I L I N G S 09 5116 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 6000 F L O O R I N G 09 6466 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 6813 TILE CARPETING 09 6816 SHEET CARPET / URETHANE CUSHION, DIRECT GLUE 09 7000 W A L L F I N I S H E S 09 7216 VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS 09 7226 SISAL WALL COVERINGS 09 8000 A C O U S T I C A L T R E A T M E N T 09 8413 FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS 09 9000 P A I N T S A N D C O A T I N G S 09 9001 09 9112 09 9113 09 9123 09 9124 09 9125 09 9324 09 9413 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS EXTERIOR PAINTED FERROUS METAL EXTERIOR PAINTED GALVANIZED METAL INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER INTERIOR PAINTED METAL INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD INTERIOR CLEAR-FINISHED HARDWOOD INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 09 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install metal framing and furring systems and blocking as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 4010: Load-bearing metal framing. 2. Section 06 1100: Wood blocking. 3. Section 09 2226: Furring on suspended ceilings.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C 645-08a, 'Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.'

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference to be held after submittals have been reviewed and returned by Architect, but before beginning metal framing work. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Identify location of required blocking.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Show special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in Manufacturer's Product data. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. ICC Evaluation Report: 2. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Technical product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each component of system.

B.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. ICC approved.

Non-Structural Metal Framing

-1-

09 2216

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Allied Studco Inc, Phoenix, AZ www.studco.com. b. CEMCO, City of Industry, CA www.cemcosteel.com. c. Clark Western, Cincinnati, OH www.clarksteel.com. d. Dietrich Industries Inc, Pittsburgh, PA www.dietrichindustries.com. e. Steeler Inc, Seattle, WA www.steeler.com. Materials: 1. Framing: a. 20 ga (0.95 mm) minimum, unless noted greater on Drawings, meeting requirements of ASTM C645. b. Tracks, bridging, blocking, strapping, and other accessories shall be as described in Contract Documents or as required by Manufacturer's system. c. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) 3-5/8 IC 20 ga by American Studco. 2) 362DS20P by CEMCO. 3) Drywall Metal, 20 ga only, by Clark Western. 4) 20 Ga ProSTUD by Dietrich Industries. 5) 20 Ga 3-5/8 SS Series by Steeler Inc. 6) Any member of Steel Stud Manufacturer's Association (SSMA). 7) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

B.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Sill Sealer: Closed-cell polyethylene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by width of plate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with other Sections to provide blocking necessary for their work. 2. Coordinate with other Sections for location of blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties. Tolerances: 1. 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 20 feet (6 meters), non-cumulative in length of wall. 2. 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 meters) with 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum in height of wall. 3. Distances between parallel walls shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum along length and height of wall. Framing: 1. Specifications of Stud Wall Manufacturer shall govern this work unless more stringent requirements are required by Contract Documents. 2. Install specified sill sealer under sill plates of exterior walls and of acoustically insulated interior walls. 3. Stiffen metal-framed walls with 3/4 inch (19 mm) cold-rolled channels placed horizontally approximately 48 inch (1 200 mm) on center and securely attach to each stud. 4. Similarly reinforce door and window openings at headers with reinforcing channel extending 18 inches (450 mm) minimum each side of opening. -209 2216

B.

C.

Non-Structural Metal Framing

Project # 503-6925-11010101 5. 6.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Apply double framing members at openings. Wrap multiple, adjacent framing members with duct tape or otherwise secure to eliminate 'chattering.' Use grommets at framing penetrations where unsecured items pass through.

08.29.11

END OF SECTION

Non-Structural Metal Framing

-3-

09 2216

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 09 2226 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Gypsum Board

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install ceiling suspension system as described in Contract Documents to receive gypsum board and to support items penetrating ceiling.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. The Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA), Ceiling Systems Handbook. 405 Illinois Avenue, 2B, St Charles IL. www.cisca.org. Reference Standards: 1. American Society of Civil Engineers: a. ASCE / SEI 7-05 (Supplement No. 2), Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM C635 / C635M-07, Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.' b. ASTM C636 / C636M-08, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.' c. ASTM E580 / E580M-09, Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions. 3. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC 803.9.1.1, Suspended Acoustical Ceiling.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturers Instructions: a. Manufacturers details and installation instructions for seismic bracing. If requested, provide copy of code requirements applicable to Project.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Meet seismic bracing requirements of ASCE 7-05, ASTM C635 and ASTM C636 or equivalent governing standard for project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: -109 2226

Metal Suspension System: Gypsum Board

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Type One Acceptable Systems: a. Drywall Grid by Armstrong World Industries, Lancaster, PA www.armstrong.com. b. Drywall Furring Suspended Ceiling System by Chicago Metallic Corporation, Chicago, IL www.chicagometallic.com. c. Drywall Suspension System by USG, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. d. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

B.

Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Hanger Wire: 12 ga (2.6 mm) minimum galvanized carbon steel, soft tempered, pre-stretched unless thicker required by ceiling loading in accordance with Suspension System Manufacturer's Literature. 2. Joint Wire: 16 ga (1.6 mm) galvanized for joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions with modifications listed below, except where Manufacturer's instructions are more stringent. 1. Main runners hanger wires 48 inches (1 200 mm) on center maximum. 2. Cross runners hanger wires 24 inches (600 mm) on center maximum. 3. Maintain flatness of assembly to within 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 12 feet (3.600 meters). 4. Do not kink, twist, or bend hanger wires as a means of leveling assembly. 5. Do not attach suspension system to adjustable folding partition headers.

END OF SECTION

Metal Suspension System: Gypsum Board

-2-

09 2226

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install gypsum board as described in Contract Documents, except behind ceramic tile. 2. Furnish and install acoustical sealants as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9219: Quality of acoustical sealants. 2. Section 09 3013: Installation of backerboard joint reinforcing. 3. Section 09 9413: Textured finishing.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Accessories: Metal or plastic beads, trim, or moulding used to protect or conceal corners, edges, or abutments of the gypsum board construction. 2. Drywall Primer: Paint material specifically formulated to fill the pores and equalize the suction difference between gypsum board surface paper and the compound used on finished joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories and over skim coatings. 3. Skim Coat: Either a thin coat of joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose and applied in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, over the entire surface. 4. Texturing: Regular or irregular patterns typically produced by applying a mixture of joint compound and water, or proprietary texture materials including latex base texture paint, to a gypsum board surface previously coated with drywall primer. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C11-10, Standard Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems. b. ASTM C475/C475M-02(2007), Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.' c. ASTM C840-08, 'Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.' d. ASTM C1002-07, 'Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.' e. ASTM C1047-10, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. f. ASTM C1178/C1178M-08, Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel.' g. ASTM C1396/C1396M-09a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.' h. ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. i. ASTM E119-10a, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. Gypsum Association:

B.

Gypsum Board

-1-

09 2900

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b. c. d. 3.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

GA-214-07e, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. GA-216-07: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products. GA-600-09, Fire Reference Design Manual. GA-801-07, Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products: A Guide for Distributors, Retailers, and Contractors. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. a. UL 263: Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. b. UL 723: Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Tenth Edition September 10 2008.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference immediately before installation of gypsum wallboard. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Finish requirements necessary for installation of finish materials over gypsum wallboard, and location and installation of ceramic tile backerboard.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Fire test results or assembly diagrams and numbers confirming products used will provide required fire ratings with installation configurations used.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: 1. Following recommendations of GA-801 Guide for Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products unless local, state or federal laws or agency rules differing from the recommendations shall take precedence. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name, applicable standard designation, and Manufacturer's name. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store material under roof and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging.

B.

C.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Comply with ASTM C840 or GA-216 requirements, whichever are more stringent: a. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. 1) Temperature shall be 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C) maximum day and night during entire joint operation and until execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 2) Provide ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture. 3) Avoid hot air drafts that will cause too rapid drying. b. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

Gypsum Board

-2-

09 2900

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. American Gypsum, Dallas, TX www.americangypsum.com. b. CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc; Tampa, FL www.certainteed.com. c. Georgia Pacific, Atlanta, GA www.gp.com. d. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com. e. Pabco Gypsum, Newark, CA www.pabcogypsum.com. f. United States Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. Materials: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: a. General: 1) Size: a) Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2) Class Two Quality Standard: a) Core: Fire-resistant rated gypsum core. b) Complies with Type X requirements of ASTM C1396/C1396M (Section 5). c) Surface paper: Face paper suitable for painting. d) Long edges: Tapered edge. e) Overall thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer: a. Product meeting requirements of ASTM C1178/C1178M. b. 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). c. Square edges. d. Category Four Approved Manufacturer. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific. 2) GlasRoc Tilebacker by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

B.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, OH www.kineticsnoise.com. b. Magnum Products, Lenaxa, KS www.levelcoat.com. c. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com. d. Soundproofing Co, San Marcos, CA www.soundproofing.org. e. United States Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. f. Westpac Materials Inc, Orange, CA www.westpacmaterials.com. g. Wm. Zinsser & Co, Somerset, NJ www.zinsser.com. 2. Gypsum Board Mounting Accessories: a. Class Two Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200 for definitions. 1) Furring Channels: a) Walls: Galvanized DWFC-25. 3. Corner And Edge Trim: a. Metal, paper-faced metal, paper-faced plastic, or solid vinyl meeting requirements of ASTM C1047. Surfaces to receive bedding cement treated for maximum bonding. 4. Joint Compound: a. Best grade or type recommended by Board Manufacturer and meeting requirements of ASTM C475/C475M. 1) Use Taping Compound for first coat to embed tape and accessories.

Gypsum Board

-3-

09 2900

Project # 503-6925-11010101

5. 6.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2) Use Taping Compound or All-Purpose Compound for subsequent coats except final coat. 3) Use Finishing Compound for final coat and for skim coat. Joint Reinforcing: a. Paper reinforcing tape acceptable to Gypsum Board Manufacturer. Fasteners: a. Bugle head screws meeting requirements of ASTM C1002: 1) Gypsum Board: a) Type W: For fastening gypsum board to wood members, of length to penetrate wood framing 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) minimum. b) Type S: For fastening gypsum board to steel framing and ceiling suspension members, of length to penetrate steel framing 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum. 2) Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer: a) Wood Framing: 11 ga (0.1233 in) (3.1318 mm), galvanized with 7/16 inch (11 mm) head, hot dipped. Screws: Type W or Type S Hi-Lo, bugle head, rust resistant. b) Metal Framing: (1) Light-gauge metal framing: Type S Hi-Lo, bugle or wafer head, self-tapping, rust resistant. Hi-Lo screws. (2) Heavy-gauge metal framing: Type S-12 Hi-Lo, bugle or wafer head, rust resistant.

08.29.11

B.

Primer / Surfacer On Surfaces To Receive Texturing: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Sheetrock First Coat by USG. b. Prep Coat by Westpac Materials. c. Level Coat by Magnum Products. d. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Primer On Surfaces To Receive Wallcovering: 1. White, self-sizing, water based, all purpose wallcovering primer. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Shieldz Universal Pre-Wallcovering Primer by Wm. Zinsser and Company. b. Equal as approved by Architect before application. See Section 01 6200.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate and verify framing is suitable for installation of gypsum board. 2. Examine gypsum board before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 3. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. a. Do not install board over unsuitable conditions. 4. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Division 06 for location of backblocking for edges and ends of gypsum board and for blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties. 2. Do not install gypsum board until required blocking is in place. General: Install and finish as recommended in ASTM C840 or GA-216 unless specified otherwise in this Section.

B.

Gypsum Board

-4-

09 2900

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Interior Gypsum Board: 1. General: a. Install so trim and reinforcing tape are fully backed by gypsum board. No hollow spaces between pieces of gypsum board over 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide before taping are acceptable. b. Rout out backside of gypsum board to accommodate items that extend beyond face of framing, but do not penetrate face of gypsum board, such as metal door frame mounting brackets, etc. 2. Single Layer Application: a. Apply ceilings first using minimum of two men. b. Use board of length to give minimum number of joints. c. On walls over 108 inches (2 700 mm) high and on ceilings, apply board perpendicular to support. d. Stagger end joints. End and edge joints of board applied on ceilings shall occur over framing members or be back blocked with 2x4 (38 mm by 89 mm) blocking. End joints of board horizontally applied on walls shall occur over framing members. Edge joints of board vertically applied on walls shall occur over framing members. e. Butt edges in moderate contact. Do not force in place. Shim to level. f. Leave facings true with joint, finishing flush. Vertical work shall be plumb and ceiling surfaces level. g. Scribe work closely. Keep joints as far from openings as possible. If joints occur near an opening, apply board so vertical joints are centered over openings. No vertical joints shall occur within 8 inches (200 mm) of external corners or openings. h. Install board tight against support with joints even and true. Tighten loose screws. i. Caulk perimeter joints in sound insulated rooms with specified acoustical sealant. 3. Double Layer Application: a. Apply base layer as specified for single layer application, except edge joints need not occur over framing members or be back blocked. b. Apply face layer with joints staggered in relationship to base and occurring over supports. Use combination of adhesive and screws if required to meet Manufacturer's specifications for fire-rated assembly. Apply screws attaching face layer through base layer into support for specified penetration. 4. Fastening: a. Apply from center of board towards ends and edges. b. Apply screws 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum from ends and edges, one inch (25 mm) maximum from edges, and 1/2 inch (13 mm) maximum from ends. c. Spacing: 1) Ends: Screws not over 7 inches (175 mm) on center at edges where blocking or framing occurs. 2) Wood Framed Walls And Ceilings: Screws 7 inches (175 mm) on center in panel field. 3) Metal Framed Walls: Screws 12 inches (300 mm) on center in panel field. d. Set screw heads 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) below plane of board, but do not break face paper. If face is accidentally broken, apply additional screw 2 inches (50 mm) away. e. Screws on adjacent ends or edges shall be opposite each other. f. Drive screws with shank perpendicular to face of board. 5. Trim: a. Corner Beads: 1) Attach corner beads to outside corners. a) Attach metal corner bead with staples spaced 4 inches (100 mm) on center maximum and flat taped over edges of corner bead. Also, apply screw through edge of corner bead where wood trim will overlay corner bead. b) Set paper-faced trim in solid bed of taping compound. b. Edge Trim: Apply where gypsum board abuts dissimilar material. Hold channel and 'L' trim back from exterior window and door frames 1/8 inch (3 mm) to allow for caulking. 6. Finishing: a. General: 1) Tape and finish joints and corners throughout building as specified below to correspond with final finish material to be applied to gypsum board. When sanding, do not raise nap of gypsum board face paper or paper-faced trim.

Gypsum Board

-5-

09 2900

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

a.

First Coat: a) Apply tape over center of joint in complete, uniform bed of specified taping compound and wipe with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound. If metal corner bead is used, apply reinforcing tape over flange of metal corner bead and trim so half of tape width is on flange and half is on gypsum board. b) Completely fill gouges, dents, and fastener dimples. c) Allow to dry and sand lightly if necessary to eliminate high spots or excessive compound. 3) Second Coat: a) Apply coat of specified joint compound over embedded tape extending 3-1/2 inches (88 mm) on both sides of joint center. Use finishing compound only if applied coat is intended as final coat. b) Re-coat gouges, dents, and fastener dimples. c) Allow to dry and sand lightly to eliminate high spots or excessive compound. 4) Third Coat: Apply same as second coat except extend application 6 inches (150 mm) on both sides of joint center. Allow to dry and sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with damp sponge. 5) Fourth Coat: Apply same as second coat except extend application 9 inches (425 mm) on both sides of joint center. Allow to dry and sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with damp sponge. Finishing Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840, GA216 or GA-214: 1) Gypsum Board Surfaces not painted or finished: a) GA-214-07e Level 1: All joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 1) Gypsum Board Surfaces Under Acoustical Tile: a) GA-214-07e Level 2: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level. 2) Gypsum Board Surfaces to Receive Sisal Wall Covering: a) GA-214-07e Level 3: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat prepared surface with specified wallcovering primer.' 3) Gypsum Board Surfaces to Receive Vinyl Wall Covering, and Painted Texturing, and Smooth Gypsum Board Surfaces: a) GA-214-07e Level 4: 'All and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat prepared surface with specified primer.'

D.

Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer: 1. Apply glass mat gypsum tile backer to framing. Attach using specified fasteners spaced 6 inches (150 mm) on center on edges and into all framing members. Drive screws flush with surface of board. 2. Shim board to be plumb and flat or level and flat, depending on location. 3. Apply reinforcing only at joints where abutting different materials.

Gypsum Board

-6-

09 2900

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. a. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. b. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

3.4

CLEANING A. Remove from site debris resulting from work of this Section including taping compound spills.

END OF SECTION

Gypsum Board

-7-

09 2900

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install ceramic tile and tile setting materials and accessories as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900: Installation of backerboard behind ceramic tile, except for joint reinforcing. 2. Division 23: Floor drains.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. International Standards Organization (ISO) 13007, Classification for Adhesives and Grout. 2. Tile Council of North America: a. TCNA Handbook, 'Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 2009.' Reference Standard: 1. American National Standards Institute: a. ANSI A118.1-2008, Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. b. ANSI A118.4-2008, Specifications for Latex Portland Cement Mortar. c. ANSI A118.12-2008, Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installations. d. ANSI A118.10-2008, Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installations. e. ANSI A137.1-2008, 'Ceramic Tile.' 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A185 / A185M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.' b. ASTM C144-04, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.' c. ASTM C150-07, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' d. ASTM C206-03, Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.' e. ASTM C207-06, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.' f. ASTM C847-06, Standard Specification for Metal Lath.'

B.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference. 1. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Review Installation scheduling, coordination, and placement of tile. b. Review Manufacturers installation requirements to assure issuance of Manufacturers warranty. c. Review tile base installation requirements. d. Review floor tile grout thickness requirements.

Ceramic Tiling

-1-

09 3013

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. 24 inch (600 mm) square sample on specified tile backer showing all types of tile, grout, and colors specified in this Section. 1/2 of sample board shall show floor tile and 1/2 shall show wall tile. b. One sample of each type of base tile and trim piece to be used on Project. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Master grade certificate. 1) Conform to ANSI A137.1. 2. Manufacturers Instructions: a. Provide instructions for installation of tile-setting materials. b. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.3: 1) Including demonstration of compliance with VOC limits for adhesives and grout set by the South Coast Air Quality management District Rule 1168. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Cleaning and maintenance instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's cut sheets of materials used in installed system. b) Tile color and pattern selections.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Of Materials: 1. Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting materials. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications: a. Not less than 3 years experience in ceramic tile installations similar in size, scope, and installation procedures required for this project.

B.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Deliver and store packaged materials in their original unopened containers with labels intact until time of use. 2. Store and handle materials in a manner to prevent damage or contamination by water, freezing, or foreign matter. 3. Keep grade seals intact and cartons dry until tile are used.

1.7

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Keep ambient temperatures of area to receive tile work and surface temperatures of substrates at 50 deg F (10 deg C) minimum during preparation of mortar bed, laying of tile, and for 72 hours after completion of tile work. Use electric heat to prevent discoloration of grout. -209 3013

Ceramic Tiling

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.8 WARRANTY A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturers 25 year minimum warranty on tile-setting materials and grout; includes replacement of defective materials and replacement of tile, including labor and materials at original cost at time of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Category Two National Contract Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Contact following suppliers to procure components of tile assembly: a. Daltile And Stone, Salt Lake City, UT. LDS Project Coordinators: Russ Green and Larry McCleary, (801) 487-9901, Cell (801) 301 1461, FAX 801-487-0345 larry.mccleary@daltile.com - www.daltileproducts.com - www.daltilegreenworks.com b. Interceramic Tile and Stone Gallery, Salt Lake City, UT. LDS Project Coordinators: Mike Kelsch and Kari Bennett, (801) 915-6586, FAX (801) 467-8469 slc@interceramicusa.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Paver Tile: Standard grade porcelain tile, solid color throughout, graded in accordance with ANSI A137.1. b. Ceramic Tile: 1) Tile shall be standard quality, white or off-white body, square or cushion edge, graded in accordance with ANSI A137.1. 2) Square edge, white body, lug type wall tile. Field wall tile shall have two lugs on each edge to assure uniform joint, approximately 0.040 inch (one mm). 3) External and internal corner pieces shall be standard grade. 2. Capabilities: a. Paver Tile: 1) Water Absorption when tested in accordance with ASTM C373: 0.1 to 0.5 percent. 2) Abrasive Wear Resistance when tested in accordance with ASTM C 501: 275 minimum. 3) Breaking Strength when tested in accordance with ASTM C648: 300 lbs minimum. 4) Bond Strength when tested in accordance with ASTM C482: 200 psi minimum. 5) Coefficient of Friction when tested in accordance with ASTM C028: 0.6 COF minimum. Description: 1. Paver Tile: a. Tile Sizes: 1) Finished floor with no slope shown on Contract Documents: 12 inches (300 mm) square minimum. 2) Finished floor with slope shown on Contract Documents: 8 inches (200 mm) square. 3) Cove Base: 6 inches by 8 inches (150 mm by 200 mm) with bull-nosed top. b. Category Four Approved Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) CD05 Bianco Alpi by Daltile. 2) Dotti Ivory by Interceramic. 2. Ceramic Tile: a. Wall, And Ceiling Tile: 1) Walls: 6 inch by 6 inch (150 mm by 150 mm). 2) Category Four Approved Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Room Walls: 0135 Almond by Daltile; Canvas 112 by Interceramic. b) Accent Color: 0100 White by Daltile; Bone 110 by Interceramic. Materials: 1. Paver Tile:

B.

C.

D.

Ceramic Tiling

-3-

09 3013

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. 7.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories. 1) Porcealto Graniti by Daltile. 2) Intertech by Interceramic. Wall Tile: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories. 1) Semi-Gloss or Matte by Dal-Tile. 2) IC Brites or Mattes or Bold Tones Series by Interceramics. Setting Bed: a. Portland Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150, Type 1, designation shall appear on bag. b. Hydrated Lime: 1) Meet Requirements of one of following: a) ASTM C206. b) ASTM C207, Type S (designation shall appear on bag). c. Sand: Clean, washed, well-graded, meeting requirements of ASTM C144 with gradation of 100 percent passing No. 8 sieve with not over 5 percent passing No. 100 sieve. d. Latex Additive; in lieu of all water: 1) Meet warranty requirements. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Quality Standard: (1) MAPEI, Planicrete AC. b) CUSTOM: As recommended by Manufacturer. c) LATICRETE: As recommended by Manufacturer. d) MER-KRETE: As recommended by Manufacturer. Metal Trim: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Tile / Carpet Junction: Schluter-RENO-AETK. 2) Over Expansion Joints In Slabs: Schluter DILEX-BWS, color G, PG, or HB as selected by Architect. Joint Sealants: a. Standard color to closely match grout joints as selected by Architect. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Tub, Tile, And Ceramic Silicone Sealant by Dow Corning. 2) Sanitary 1700 by Momentive Performance Materials. 3) Latisil Sealant by Laticrete. 4) Pro-Select Kitchen And Bath Silicone Sealant by Sherwin Williams. Backer Board Joint Reinforcing: 2 inch (50 mm) wide glass fiber mesh tape. Tile Setting Products: a. Use only products of same Manufacturer to validate warranty, unless otherwise acceptable to VMR Supplier. b. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar For Floors: 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI A118.4 and ISO 13007 C2ES1P1 C2ES1P1 C2ES1P1 C2ES1P1C2ES1P1 for manufactured mortar. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 62 00 for definitions of Categories. a) CUSTOM: Custom Megalite. b) LATICRETE: 254 Platinum Thinset. c) MAPEI: Ultraflex 2. d) MER-KRETE: 735 Premium Flex. c. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar For Walls: 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI A118.4 and ISO 13007; C2ES1P1 for manufactured mortar. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) CUSTOM: Megalite Thinset. b) LATICRETE: 254 Platinum Thinset. c) MAPEI: Ultraflex 2. d) MER-KRETE: 735 Premium Flex. d. Floor Grout (Epoxy): 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI A118.3 and ISO 13007 RG. 2) Color: a) CUSTOM: No. 145 Light Smoke. -409 3013

08.29.11

Ceramic Tiling

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

e.

f.

g.

h.

b) LATICRETE: No. 24 Natural Grey. c) MAPEI: No. 11 Sahara Beige. d) MER-KRETE: Pro Epoxy D-153 Buckskin. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) CUSTOM: Custom 100 percent Solids Epoxy Grout. b) LATICRETE: SpectraLOCK PRO. c) MAPEI: Opticolor. d) MER-KRETE: Pro Epoxy. Wall Grout (Modified Polymer): 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI A118.6 and ISO 13007. 2) Color: a) CUSTOM: No. 381 Bright White. b) LATICRETE: No. 44 Bright White. c) MAPEI: No. 00 White. d) MER-KRETE: D-11 Snow White. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) CUSTOM: PolyBlend Non-Sanded Grout. b) LATICRETE: 1600 Series Unsanded Dry Set Wall Grout with 1776 Grout Admix Plus additive. c) MAPEI: Keracolor-U Unsanded Polymer-Modified Grout. d) MER-KRETE: Non-Sanded Color Grout, latex modified. Waterproofing Membrane: 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI A118.10. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions for Categories. a) Troweled applied, cement based: (1) Quality Standard: MAPEI, Mapelastic 315. b) Liquid applied, latex based: (1) Quality Standard: MAPEI, Mapelastic AquaDefense. c) Acceptable Products: (1) CUSTOM: As recommended by Manufacturer. (2) LATICRETE: As recommended by Manufacturer. (3) MER-KRETE: As recommended by Manufacturer. Crack Isolation Membrane: 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI A118.12. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions for Categories. a) Flexible, thin, load-bearing, fabric-reinforced: (1) Quality Standard: MAPEI, Mapeguard SM, and Primer SM. b) Liquid applied, latex based: (1) Quality Standard: MAPEI, Mapelastic AquaDefense. c) Acceptable Products: (1) CUSTOM: As recommended by Manufacturer. (2) LATICRETE: As recommended by Manufacturer. (3) MER-KRETE: As recommended by Manufacturer. Stone Thresholds: 1) Texture and color variation shall be within limits established by Architect's approved sample. 2) Free of defects that would materially impair strength, durability, and appearance. 3) Finish: 80 grit exterior hone. 4) White marble, one piece, 7/8 inch (22 mm) thick by 2 1/2 inches (64 mm) by door opening width. Cross-section to meet handicap accessibility requirements.

E.

Mixes: 1. Setting Beds: Floor Mix Wall Mix * Optional Portland Cement One Part One Part Dry Sand 5 Parts -Damp Sand 4 Part 5-1/2 to 7 Parts Hydrated Lime* 1/10 Part 1/2 Part

Ceramic Tiling

-5-

09 3013

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION:

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrates where tile will be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions effecting performance of installed tile. 2. Verify tile substrate is well cured, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films, and curing compounds. 3. Notify Architect in writing if surfaces are not acceptable to install tile. a. Do not lay tile over unsuitable surface. b. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces and approval of existing conditions.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Allow concrete to cure for 28 days minimum before application of setting bed. 2. Repair and clean substrate in accordance with installation standards and manufacturers instructions.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, door frames, electrical, mechanical, and other work in or behind tile shall be installed before tile work is started. Special Techniques: 1. Install in accordance with following latest TCNA installation methods: a. Flush Concrete Slabs without Isolation Membrane: TCNA F115. b. Flush Concrete Slabs with Isolation Membrane: TCNA F125A. c. Setting Bed on Concrete Slab: TCNA F111 without reinforcing. d. Framed Walls: TCNA W245. e. Tile Cove Base: TCNA Flush style. Tolerances: 1. Plane of Vertical Surfaces: a. 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.450 meters) from required plane shall be plumb and true with square corners. 2. Variation In Slab Grade: a. Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) in any 10 feet (3.050 m) of floor slab and distance between high point and low point of slab of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). b. Slab Testing Procedure: 1) Place ends of straightedge on 3/8 inch (10 mm) high shims. 2) Floor is satisfactory if 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter steel rod rolled under straightedge will not touch anywhere along 10 foot (3.050 m) length and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) diameter steel rod will not fit under straightedge anywhere along 10 foot (3.050 m) length. General: 1. Install tile in pattern indicated. a. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. b. Adjust to minimize tile cutting and to avoid tile less than half size. c. Center and balance areas of tile if possible. 2. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruption.

B.

C.

D.

Ceramic Tiling

-6-

09 3013

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

4.

5.

6. 7. 8.

9.

10.

11.

12. 13. 14.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Maintain heights of tilework in full courses to nearest obtainable dimension where heights are given in feet and inches (meters and millimeters) and are not required to fill vertical spaces exactly. Install cut tile with cuts on outer edges of field. a. Provide straight cuts that align with adjacent materials. b. When possible, smooth cut edges of tile or use appropriate cutter or wet saw to produce smooth cuts. c. Do not install tile with jagged or flaked edges. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of pattern or joint alignment. a. Fit tile closely where edges are to be covered by trim, escutcheons, or similar devices. Provide straight tile joints of uniform width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. a. Make joints smooth and even, without voids, cracks, or excess mortar or grout. Accessories in tilework shall be evenly spaced, properly centered with tile joints, and level, plumb, and true to correct projection. Do not spread more mortar than can be covered within 10 to 15 minutes. a. If 'skinning' occurs, remove mortar and spread fresh material. b. Spread mortar with notches running in one direction, perpendicular to pressing, pushing and pulling of tile during placement. Install tile before mortar has started initial cure. a. For thin set mortar application, use a notch trowel that will achieve the recommended coverage of mortar after tiles have been installed. Place tile in fresh mortar, press, push and pull tile slightly to achieve as near 100 percent coverage and contact of tile with setting material and substrate as possible. a. Coverage shall be 85 percent minimum and be sufficiently distributed to give full support of the tile. b. Support corners and edges with mortar leaving no hollow corners or edges. Install so there is 1/8 inch (3 mm) of mortar between tile and substrate after proper bedding. a. Periodically remove sheets or individual tiles to assure proper bond coverage consistent with industry specifications. b. If coverage is found to be insufficient, use a larger size notch trowel. Install floor tile with grout thickness of 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) maximum. Use a beating block and hammer or rubber mallet so faces and edges of individual tiles are flush and level with faces and edges of adjacent tiles, and to reduce lippage. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

08.29.11

E.

Application On Concrete Floor: 1. On Setting Bed: a. Apply setting bed to depth equal to depression in slab minus 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). b. Properly cure before installing tile. 2. Clean substrate surface thoroughly. a. Dampen if very dry, but do not saturate. 3. Install tile with 100 percent contact with mortar bed. a. Obtaining 100 percent contact may require troweling mortar layer on back of each tile before placing on mortar bed. 4. Install base by flush method (square or thin-lip method is not acceptable): a. Allow for expansion joint directly above any expansion or control joints in slab. 5. Insert temporary filler in expansion joints. Application on Walls: 1. On Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer Over Framing: a. Embed fiberglass reinforcing tape at joints with mortar used to adhere tile. 2. Dampen dry backings as determined by environmental conditions and Manufacturer's recommendations to achieve cure. 3. Allow for sealant joints full height at room corners in wall tile. Insert temporary filler in expansion joints. 4. Install wall tile directly atop bull-nosed paver tile base. Application of Joint Sealants And Grout: -709 3013

F.

G.

Ceramic Tiling

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2. 3. 4.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

5. 6.

7. 8. H.

Firmly set tile before applying joint sealants or grout. a. This requires forty eight (48) hours minimum. Remove spacers or ropes before applying joint sealants or grouting. a. Apply sealants before applying grout. Apply backer rod and joint sealants at expansion joints. a. Apply bead of sealant at junction of base and floor tile. Before grouting entire area, do a test area to assure there will be no permanent staining or discoloration of tile and to verify that excess grout can be easily removed from tile surface. a. If necessary, pre-coat exposed surfaces of tile with a grout release recommended by Grout Manufacturer to facilitate removal of excess grout. Use clean buckets and mixing tools. a. Use sufficient pressure and flow grout in progressively to avoid air pockets and voids. Apply grout to produce full, smooth grout joints of uniform width, and free of voids and gaps. a. Fill joints of cushion edge tile to depth of cushion. b. Fill joints of square edge tile flush with surface. c. Fill joint between wall tile and bull-nosed paver tile base with floor grout. Remove excess grout from surface of tile before it loses its plasticity or begins to set. Finished grout shall be uniform in color, smooth, and without voids, pin holes, or low spots.

Curing: 1. Keep installation at 65 to 85 deg F (18 to 30 deg C) during first 8 hours of cure. Shade area completely from sun during this period.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Correct any work found cracked, chipped, broken, unbounded and otherwise defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5

CLEANING A. If one has been used, remove grout release and clean tile surfaces so they are free of grout residue and foreign matter. 1. If a grout haze or residue remains, use a suitable grout haze remover or cleaner. 2. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.6

PROTECTION A. Close to traffic areas where tile is being set and other tile work being done: 1. Keep closed until tile is firmly set. 2. Before, during, and after grouting, keep area clean, dry, and free from foreign materials and airflow that will interfere with setting and curing of grout. Newly tiled floors shall not be walked on nor worked on without using kneeling boards or equivalent protection of tiled surface. After cleaning, provide protective covering and maintain conditions protecting tile work from damage and deterioration. 1. Where tiled surfaces will be subject to equipment or wheel traffic or heavy construction traffic, cover protective covering with 1/4 inch (6 mm) hardboard, plywood, or similar material.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

Ceramic Tiling

-8-

09 3013

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 5116 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install acoustical tile on backerboard as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2226: Gypsum board ceiling suspension system. 2. Section 09 2900: Gypsum backerboard.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International; a. ASTM E795-05, 'Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.' b. ASTM E1264-08e1, Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 09 2900 to review finish requirements for gypsum wallboard ceilings. 2. Schedule acoustical tile ceiling pre-installation conference after installation of gypsum wallboard but before beginning installation of tile. 3. In addition to items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Verify that tile comes from same dye lot and has same dye lot code.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. One sample of each variant of specified tile series. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Installations: a. Published installation recommendations. b. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: 1) For sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include final, executed copy of warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature on tile and adhesive. b) Color and pattern selection.

B.

C.

Acoustical Tile Ceilings

-1-

09 5116

Project # 503-6925-11010101 D.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Provide Owner with six cartons of each type of tile with same dye lot code.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials where protected from moisture. 2. Store adhesive on site at installation temperature, between 65 and 90 deg F (18 and 32 deg C), for one week before installation.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Building shall be enclosed, mechanical system operating with proper filters in place, and temperature and humidity conditions stabilized within limits under which Project will operate before, during, and after installation until Substantial Completion. 2. Temperature at time of setting tile shall be 65 deg F (18 deg C) minimum and 90 deg F (32 deg C) maximum.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide Manufacturers 10 year warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Armstrong World Industries, Strategic Accounts, Lancaster, PA www.ceilings.com. 1) For pricing and ordering of tile, contact Sherry Brunt, Phyllis Miller, or Beth Rinehart at (800) 442-4212, FAX 800-233-5598, or bpo_strategic_accounts@armstrong.com. 2) For Strategic Account information, contact Randy Lay at (303) 775-1409 ralay@armstrong.com. b. Franklin International, Inc, Columbus, OH www.titebond.com. c. TACC International Corp, Rockland, MA www.itwtacc.com. Materials: 1. Acoustic Tile: a. Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick minimum by 12 inches (300 mm) square. b. Finish: Abuse-resistant / durable. Color shall be as uniform as can be produced with same dye lot code. c. Category Three National Account Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) CSP BF 73394 by Armstrong. 2. Adhesive: a. Non-staining type suitable for work. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) ATA5495 Acoustical Tile Adhesive by TACC International Corp. 2) Titebond No. 2704 Solvent Free Acoustical Ceiling Tile Adhesive by Franklin International.

B.

Acoustical Tile Ceilings

-2-

09 5116

Project # 503-6925-11010101

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 3) Highest quality of adhesive from manufacturer recommended by Tile Manufacturer as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. Edge Molding: a. Steel 'U' molding with baked enamel finish. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) 7843 Series by Armstrong. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

08.29.11

2.2

PERFORMANCE: A. B. Use tile with same dye lot number throughout building. Durable: 1. Impact-resistant. 2. Scratch-resistant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Inspect for defects in backing and support that are not acceptable. 2. Notify Architect in writing of unacceptable conditions. 3. Do not apply ceiling tile until defects in backing and support are corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Materials shall be dry and clean at time of application.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations: a. Install tile running same direction with direction of pattern running parallel to long dimension of each room. b. Remove loose dust from back of tile and ceiling where adhesive is to be applied. c. Prime 3 inch (75 mm) minimum circle near each corner by buttering very thin coat of adhesive. d. Apply daub of adhesive to each corner. Daubs will be of sufficient size to form a circle 2-1/2 to 3 inches (63 to 75 mm) in diameter and 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) thick when tile is pressed firmly in place. Do not apply daubs so far in advance of installation that adhesive skins over. e. Install splines in kerfs at corners. 2. Tile Layout: a. Lay out tile symmetrically about center lines of room. b. Lay out so tiles at room perimeters are at least 1/2 full tile size. c. Leave tile in true plane with straight, even joints. d. Tile joints shall be straight and in alignment, and exposed surface flush and level. e. Furnish and install specified molding wherever tile has exposed edges or abuts walls, columns, and other vertical surfaces, except at curves of 3 inch (75 mm) radius or smaller. f. Cut around penetrations that are not to receive moldings cleanly with sharp knife and at a slight angle away from cutout. 3. Ceiling mounted items:

Acoustical Tile Ceilings

-3-

09 5116

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b. c.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Locate light fixtures, speakers, and mechanical diffusers and grilles symmetrically in room and centered on tile centers or tile joints insofar as possible, unless shown otherwise. Keep method of locating ceiling mounted items as consistent as possible throughout building. Ceiling mounted item location method within each room shall always be consistent.

08.29.11

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace discolored tile to match adjacent tile at no cost to Owner. 2. Remove and replace damaged or out-of-level tile at no cost to Owner.

3.5

ADJUSTING A. 'Touch-up' minor abraded surfaces.

3.6

CLEANING A. Remove from site debris connected with work of this Section.

END OF SECTION

Acoustical Tile Ceilings

-4-

09 5116

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 6466 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install hardwood floors complete with base, thresholds, and other items specified as described in Contract Documents. 2. Prepare and finish hardwood flooring system as described in Contract Documents. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section. 1. Volleyball Floor Plates. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 03 3111: Installation of volleyball anchor sleeve. 8. Section 03 3111: Provision of acceptable concrete substrate. 9. Section 07 2616: Installation of below grade vapor retarder. 10. Section 09 0503: Floor substrate preparation. 11. Section 11 6625: Furnishing of volleyball floor anchors.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 302.2R-06, Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials (August 15, 2006). Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM F1869-09, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. b. ASTM F2170-09, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

B.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate completion of flooring installation with other trades. Pre-Installation Conference: In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1. Participate in Pre-Installation Conference specified in Section 09 0503. -109 6466

B.

Athletic Wood Flooring

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3. 4.

In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Schedule conference after substrate preparation and TWO weeks before installation of flooring system. b. Review Testing Agency testing report of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 1) See Section 09 0503 for Options if concrete moisture tests of concrete slab exceeds Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture requirements for flooring. Review Flooring Manufacturer's installation conditions verification procedure and requirements. Review Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and flooring installation.

C.

Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect two weeks minimum before Pre-Installation Conference to allow testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 2. Notify Flooring Installer when Building Ambient Conditions requirements are met.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet for flooring system and for finish system. b. Maintenance instructions. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. Submit before pre-installation conference. b. Manufactures installation verification requirements and schedule. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature. 2) Testing Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing Reports of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture tests.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before installation of flooring: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Do not deliver wood materials to Project until interior painting and tile work is completed but before pre-installation conference. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store wood materials on premises in area with environmental conditions as specified in Field Conditions to allow acclimation to moisture content that will prevail under environmental conditions under which building will be operated. 2. Pile bundled wood materials loosely to allow uniform acclimation.

B.

Athletic Wood Flooring

-2-

09 6466

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Ambient Conditions: 1. Building Conditions: a. Conditions inside building shall be brought to levels to be normal at occupancy of building. b. Maintain these conditions from time flooring material is delivered to site to time Certificate of Substantial Completion is signed. c. Conditions include normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning. 2. Alkalinity: a. Do not install athletic wood flooring if alkalinity of concrete surface exceeds pH level 9. 3. Concrete Moisture (either test method acceptable): a. Do not install athletic wood flooring if moisture vapor emission rate (MVER) of concrete slab exceeds 4.5 lbs /1000 ft / 24 h (2.2 kg / 100 m / 24 h) as per ASTM F1869 or relative humidity (RH) of concrete slab exceeds 75% as per ASTM F2170.

1.8

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Flooring Company's two year written guarantee covering labor and materials. a. Follow Manufacturer's verification procedures of installation conditions necessary for issuance of warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturer: 1. Category One VMR Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Duracushion by Connor Sports Flooring Corp, Phoenix, AZ Jon Isaacs (800) 283-9522 FAX 847-290-9034, e-mail jisaacs@connorfloor.com.. b. Bio-Cushion by Robbins Sports Surfaces, Cincinnati, OH Todd Goodridge (800) 543 1913 ext 5933 FAX 513-871-7998, e-mail toddg@robbinsfloor.com. Components: 1. Vapor Retarder Membrane: a. 6 mil (0.152 mm) polyethylene. b. PVC tape or adhesive. 2. Resilient Pads: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) long by 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick PVC pads with slots or air cells. 3. Subfloor Plywood: Four-ply minimum, APA graded and stamped, 15/32 inch (12 mm) CDX plywood. 4. Finish Flooring: a. Hardwood: Northern Hard Maple, No. 2 and better grade MFMA trademarked and grade marked. 25/32 inch by 2-1/4 inch (19.8 mm by 57 mm) minimum, MFMA-RL or MFMA-FJ, with specially milled ends. b. Fasteners: Power-driven, 2 inch (50 mm) long barbed cleats or coated staples recommended by Flooring Manufacturer. 5. Base: 2-1/2 inches by 2-1/2 inches by 1/8 inch (64 mm by 64mm by 3 mm) aluminum angle in clear anodized finish. 6. Threshold Plate: 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick aluminum, fluted on top, slightly tapered both edges in finish selected by Architect. 7. Finish: a. Sealer: As recommended by Top Coat Manufacturer. b. Top Coats: 1) High gloss, high solids, oil modified urethane meeting VOC requirements of jurisdictions for pollution control or water based finish. -309 6466

B.

Athletic Wood Flooring

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c.

Oil Modified Urethane: a) All Conference 50 or Cure-O-Thane 40 by Magee Industries, Alsip, IL www.mageeindustries.com. b) Polyurethane 450 or Polyurethane 500 by JohnsonDiversey, Sturtevant, WI www.johnsondiversey.com or www.mageeindustries.com. c) 450 Gym Finish or Gold Medalist Wood Gym Finish by Hillyard Industries, St. Joseph, MO www.hillyard.com. Game Lines: 1) Colors: a) Basketball: Black. b) Volleyball: White, Grey or Blue. 2) Paint manufacturer as recommended by Floor Finish Manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLERS A. Category One VMR Installers. See Section 01 6200: 1. Connor: a. Mountain Heights Hardwoods, Contact: Kevin Hirschi (801-420-0917) b. Varsity Contractors, Contact: Jeff Adams (801-391-9858) c. United Services, Contact: Shane Matheson (208-589-9436) 2. Robbins a. Croft-Beck Floors, Inc., Contact: Gary Beck (801-973-6969)

3.2

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Follow Flooring Manufacturer's prescribed inspection procedure for determining acceptability of installation conditions, including environmental conditions in building during and after installation, moisture content of slab, flatness and levelness of slab, etc. 2. Verify concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and moisture content is within acceptable levels before beginning installation. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Verify before installing aluminum angle base, location of framing member base plate or vertical framing member if attachment to framing member base plate is not feasible.

B.

3.3

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Correct deficiencies identified during Pre-Installation Conference and confirm acceptance and approval of substrate with Architect before beginning installation of flooring system.

3.4

INSTALLATION A. Do not install wood flooring until interior 'wet type' systems are dried out and overhead trades have completed work in wood floor areas. Vapor Retarder Membrane: 1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and completely seal. 2. Allow membrane to extend up walls 2 inches (50 mm) minimum. 3. After installation of subfloor, overlap this extension onto subfloor and seal edges with approved adhesive. -409 6466

B.

Athletic Wood Flooring

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Cushioned Panels: 1. Place 32 resilient pads on under-side of first layer of plywood 6 inches (150 mm) in from edges of plywood and 12 inches (300 mm) on center each way. 2. Lay plywood parallel to short dimension of room with 1/4 inch (6 mm) spacing at joints. 3. Place second layer of plywood on diagonal with first layer, with 1/4 inch (6 mm) joints, and secure by screwing, nailing, or stapling, as acceptable to Flooring Manufacturer, at 12 inches (300 mm) on center. 4. Expansion Provisions: a. Leave 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) gap between flooring and walls for expansion at perimeters. Volleyball Floor Plates: 1. Install in accordance with Plate Manufacturer's instructions and as detailed. Laying And Power Nailing of Finish Flooring: 1. Lay flooring parallel to long dimension of room. 2. Tightly drive end joints and properly fit side joints to meet requirements of Manufacturer to meet humidity requirements. 3. Machine nail. Aluminum Angle Base: 1. Wood-Framed Walls: a. Firmly attach only to wall with panhead, cadmium plated, wood screws. b. Length of screws shall be sufficient to embed in substrate 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum. c. Attachment to wall: 1) Framing member base plate attachment: a) Locate screws 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from edge and 24 inches (600 mm) maximum on center spacing between screws into framing member base plate. 2) Vertical Framing member attachment: a) Match vertical framing member. 2. Placing screws: a. Place screws approximately one inch down from top of base. 1) If screw attachment will miss framing member base plate, locate attachment into vertical framing member. 3. Spacer: a. Attach one 3/16 inch by 1/2 inch by one inch (5 mm by 13 mm by 25 mm) masonite spacer to metal angle base immediately above each screw hole with contact cement. 4. Tighten screws to bring base into gentle contact with floor. a. Do not interfere with free movement of floor. 5. Miter corner joints and grind toe of base on outside corners to 1/2 inch (13 mm) radius. Grind or file down burrs and rough or sharp edges at joints. 6. Leave in true alignment with 3/16 inch (5 mm) space between wall and base. Aluminum Threshold: 1. Neatly and substantially anchor aluminum threshold plates located across expansion gaps at door and other floor surface openings with permanent type rust proof anchors. Do not fasten to wood floor. 2. Do not lag fixtures, equipment, plates, outlet boxes, or other items through subfloor to floor unless adequate provision is made for expansion. Sanding Sequence: 1. Make sure floor is free of moisture. 2. Sweep floors clean. 3. Sand with heavy, power driven type sander. Use dust accumulator on machine. 4. Begin sanding with No. 36 or No. 40 grit sandpaper. Sand on diagonal if required to level boards. 5. Proceed with medium grit, 50 or 60 grit sandpaper. Perform this sanding and subsequent sanding passes in direction of grain of floor. 6. Sand edges with No. 60 or 80 grit spinner paper. 7. Sand entire floor with No.80 or 100 grit sandpaper. 8. Disk and entire floor with No. 100 disk paper. Finish with 120 screens. 9. Scrape and hand-sand corners and other areas not reached by machine. -509 6466

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

Athletic Wood Flooring

Project # 503-6925-11010101 I.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Finishing: 1. Allow for adequate ventilation to insure proper curing. 2. Apply two coats of sealer at rate and instructions recommended by Finish Manufacturer. Vacuum, screen and tack between coats as recommended by Finish Manufacturer. (Note: solvent based sealer is preferred were feasible). 3. Proper screening, vacuuming and tacking procedures should be followed at each stage of finishing process. 4. Apply game lines. 5. Apply top coats with ample time between coats for material to properly dry before applying additional coats. Coverage per gallon shall be at rate and number of coats recommended by Finish Manufacturer to provide minimum 2.2 mil (0.056 mm) total top coat finish system thickness above game lines. (Oil finish typically two coats, Water based finish typically 3 coats).

3.5

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. See Section 09 0503 Flooring Substrate Preparation for Field Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab.

3.6

PROTECTION A. B. Keep floor free of traffic for 72 hours minimum after application of final coat. Protect floor finish until Substantial Completion. 1. Paint manufacturer as recommended by Floor Finish Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Athletic Wood Flooring

-6-

09 6466

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 09 6813 TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Coordination, sequencing, and scheduling for installation of Owner-Furnished carpet tiles and carpet base used in entry vestibules using walk-off carpet tile as described in contract documents and including following: a. Schedule Testing Agency testing of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before Pre-Installation Conference held in conjunction with Section 09 6816. b. Schedule Pre-Installation Conference held in conjunction with Section 09 6816. c. Maintain Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and carpet installation. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will furnish and install carpet tiles and carpet base. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 07 2616: Installation of below grade vapor retarder. 8. Section 09 0503: Floor substrate preparation. 9. Section 09 6816: Installation of Carpet Tile and Carpet Base and Cleaning and Disposal requirements.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. The Carpet and Rug Institute: a. Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial Carpet: 1) CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2009. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM F1869-09, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. b. ASTM F2170-09, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

B.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate completion of flooring installation with other trades.

Tile Carpeting

-1-

09 6813

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Pre-Installation Conference: In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1. Participate in Pre-Installation Conference specified in Section 09 0503. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Schedule conference after substrate preparation and TWO weeks before installation of flooring system. b. Review Testing Agency testing report of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 1) See Section 09 0503 for Options if concrete moisture tests of concrete slab exceeds Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture requirements for flooring. c. Review Owners Representative schedule for furnishing and installation carpet. d. Review Flooring Manufacturer's installation conditions verification procedure and requirements. e. Review Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and carpet installation. f. Review cleaning and disposal requirements. g. Review protection requirements of carpet after installation of carpeting.

08.29.11

C.

Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect two weeks minimum before Pre-Installation Conference to allow testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 2. Notify Owners Representative to coordinate installation of carpet.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature. b) Color and style selection. 2) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing Reports of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture testing. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Leave carpet tiles equivalent to 15 percent of number installed as attic stock. b. Tie securely and wrap in protective cover.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before installation of flooring: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Building Conditions:

Tile Carpeting

-2-

09 6813

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2. 3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake a. Conditions inside building shall be brought to levels to be normal at occupancy of building. Conditions include normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning. 1) Carpet installation is not to begin until HVAC system is operational and following conditions are maintained for at least 48 hours before, during and 72 hours after completion: a) Carpet is to be installed when indoor temperature is between 65 - 95 F (18 - 35 C) with maximum relative humidity of 65%. b) Substrate surface temperature should not be less than 65 F (18 C) at time of installation. c) Do not allow temperature of indoor carpeted areas to fall below 50 F (10 C), regardless of age of installation. 2) Maintain fresh air ventilation after installation for 72 hours minimum or until lingering odors are gone. Alkalinity: a. Do not install carpet tiles if alkalinity of concrete surface exceeds pH level 9. Concrete Moisture (either test method acceptable): a. Do not install carpet tiles if moisture vapor emission rate (MVER) of concrete slab exceeds 3.0 lbs /1000 ft / 24 h (1.5 kg / 100 m / 24 h).as per ASTM F1869 or relative humidity (RH) of concrete slab exceeds 75% as per ASTM F2170.

08.29.11

1.7

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide Carpet Manufacturer's 15-year warranty on carpet system including specific workmanship warranties for appearance retention, delamination, edge raveling, fuzzing, pilling, and other textural changes which can be controlled through proper manufacturing. a. Warranty shall also cover defects in installation workmanship and installation materials. b. Warranty terms will include inspection of defective area within 15 days of receipt of written notice from Owner and completion of corrective work within 45 days, unless other arrangements are made in writing with Owner on case-by-case basis. c. If carpet defect or installation defect continues to appear after two separate notices for correction from Owner, carpet where defects have occurred shall be replaced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category One VMR Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Lees Commercial Carpets, Greensboro, NC (800) 523-5647 or (336) 379-2000 www.leescarpets.com. 2. Mannington Commercial Carpets, Calhoun, GA (800) 241-2262 or (706) 629-7301. www.mannington.com. Description: a. Pattern And Color to be selected from the following options: 1) Garnet 4 Scheme: Mannington, LDS Axis Modular, Medallion. 2) Garnet 5 Scheme: Interface, Panorama, Red Rock. 3) Sapphire 4 Scheme: Mannington, LDS Axis Modular, Ocean. 4) Sapphire 5 Scheme: Interface, Panorama, Denim. 2. Carpet Tiles (walk-off) Vestibules only: a. Approved Product. 1) StepUp Modular DD762 by Lees Commercial Carpets. a) Color: 508 Mineral. 2) LDS Entry Guard by Mannington Commercial. a) Color: Black. b. Size: 18 inch or 24 inch (457 mm or 609 mm) square, at Manufacturers option. -309 6813

B.

Tile Carpeting

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Carpet Base (entry vestibules using walk-off carpet tile): a. 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) wide base without cushion backing. Top edge of base serged with 11/4 inch (32 mm) polyester binding fabric. Roll edges of binding fabric under and sew along top edge of carpet cove base. b. Approved product: 1) Manufacturer: Bigelow Commercial. a) Style Name: Preview III 30. b) Color: 1779 Matt Char. c) Provided by: (1) Lees Commercial Carpets. (2) Mannington Commercial Carpets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. See Section 09 0503 Flooring Substrate Preparation for Field Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab.

END OF SECTION

Tile Carpeting

-4-

09 6813

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 6816

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SHEET CARPETING: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Coordination, sequencing, and scheduling for installation of Owner-Furnished carpet, carpet base, carpet accessories, leveling compounds and resilient base and accessories if included in Project as described in contract documents and including following: a. Schedule Testing Agency testing of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before Pre-Installation Conference held in conjunction with Section 09 6813. b. Schedule Pre-Installation Conference held in conjunction with Section 09 6813. c. Maintain Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and carpet installation. d. Provide disposal dumpster. e. Protection of carpet after installation of carpeting as required. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will furnish and install carpet and carpet base. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Control. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications for minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout submittal. 7. Section 03 3111: Provision of acceptable concrete substrate. 8. Section 07 2616: Installation of below grade vapor retarder. 9. Section 09 0503: Floor substrate preparation. 10. Section 09 6813: Tile carpeting and carpet base used in entry vestibules using walk-off carpet tile.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. The Carpet and Rug Institute: a. Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial Carpet: 1) CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2009. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM F186108, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. b. ASTM F1869-09, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. c. ASTM F2170-09, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

B.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: -109 6816

Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Coordinate completion of carpet installation with other trades.

Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in Pre-Installation Conference specified in Section 09 0503. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Schedule conference after substrate preparation and TWO weeks before installation of flooring system. b. Review Testing Agency testing report of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 1) See Section 09 0503 for Options if concrete moisture tests of concrete slab exceeds Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture requirements for flooring. c. Review Owners Representative schedule for furnishing and installation carpet. d. Review Flooring Manufacturer's installation conditions verification procedure and requirements. e. Review Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and carpet installation. f. Review Resilient Base installation and location to be installed. g. Review cleaning and disposal requirements. h. Review protection requirements of carpet after installation of carpeting. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect two weeks minimum before Pre-Installation Conference to allow testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 2. Notify Owners Representative to coordinate installation of carpet.

C.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature. b) Color and style selection. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Leave excess pieces of carpet, 6 feet square (1 800 sq mm) or larger and 25 lineal feet (7.620 m) minimum of carpet cove base. b. Roll up and tie securely.

B.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: 1. Carpet installer shall be qualified and approved by Carpet Manufacturer.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver materials and accessories necessary for completion of carpet installation to site before beginning installation of carpet. 2. Do not deliver materials before date scheduled for installation. 3. Bending or folding individual carpet rolls or cuts from rolls are not recommended. 4. When bending or folding is unavoidable for delivery purposes, carpet is required to be unrolled and allowed to lie flat immediately upon arrival at installation site.

Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue

-2-

09 6816

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store carpet and related materials in climate-controlled, dry space. 2. Protect carpet from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants and store on flat surface. 3. Stacking heavy objects on top of carpet rolls or stacking more than three rolls is prohibited.

1.7

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Building Conditions: a. Conditions inside building shall be brought to levels to be normal at occupancy of building. Conditions include normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning. 1) Carpet installation is not to begin until HVAC system is operational and following conditions are maintained for at least 48 hours before, during and 72 hours after completion: a) Carpet is to be installed when indoor temperature is between 65 - 95 F (18 - 35 C) with maximum relative humidity of 65%. b) Substrate surface temperature should not be less than 65 F (18 C) at time of installation. c) Do not allow temperature of indoor carpeted areas to fall below 50 F (10 C), regardless of age of installation. 2) Maintain fresh air ventilation after installation for 72 hours minimum or until lingering odors are gone.

1.8

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide Carpet Manufacturer's 15-year warranty on carpet system including specific workmanship warranties for appearance retention, delamination, edge raveling, fuzzing, pilling, and other textural changes which can be controlled through proper manufacturing. a. Warranty shall also cover defects in installation workmanship and installation materials. b. Warranty terms will include inspection of defective area within 15 days of receipt of written notice from Owner and completion of corrective work within 45 days, unless other arrangements are made in writing with Owner on case-by-case basis. c. If carpet defect or installation defect continues to appear after two separate notices for correction from Owner, carpet where defects have occurred shall be replaced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category One VMR Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Materials supplied for carpet installation shall be complete package from specified Carpet Manufacturer. a. Mannington Commercial Carpets, Calhoun, GA: Help Line Voice Mail (800) 241-2262, ext 8045, (888) 487-3600, or (801) 487-3600. b. Lees, Division of Mohawk Carpets, Glasgow, VA: Help Line (800) 523-5555 or (801) 3975626. Description: 1. Colors / Patterns to be selected from the following options: a. Manufacturer and Color: 1) Emerald '1': Lees Nauvoo, 121 Forest. 2) Emerald '2': Lees Nauvoo, 407 Columbine. 3) Emerald '3': Mannington Horizon, Grove. 4) Garnet '1': Lees Nauvoo, 407 Columbine. -309 6816

B.

Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue

Project # 503-6925-11010101 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Garnet '2': Mannington Horizon, Medallion. Garnet '3': Mannington Horizon, Seasons. Sapphire '1': Lees Nauvoo, 405 Bountiful. Sapphire '2': Mannington Horizon, Ocean. Sapphire '3': Lees Nauvoo, 417 Meadow.

Materials: 1. General: Materials supplied for carpet installation shall be complete package from specified Carpet Manufacturer. Do not mix items from material packages of different carpet manufacturers. 2. Carpet Base: a. 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) wide base made of same carpet from manufacturer as used in each room, but without cushion backing. Top edge of base serged with 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) polyester binding fabric to coordinate with Owner's color scheme. Roll edges of binding fabric under and sew along top edge of carpet cove base. 3. Carpet Accessories: Snap-in vinyl reducer strips and vinyl track. 4. Floor Leveling Compound, Floor Patching Compound, And Latex Underlayment: As recommended and approved by Carpet Manufacturer: 5. Resilient Base And Accessories: a. General: 1) Molded or extruded meeting requirements of ASTM F1861, Type TS: a) Vulcanized SBR rubber, free from objectionable odors, blisters, cracks, and other defects affecting appearance or serviceability of rubber, and not containing fabric. b) Color pigments used shall be highly fade-resistant, insoluble in water, and resistant to light, alkali, and cleaning agents. b. Base: 1) Size: 1/8 inch by 4 inch (3 mm by 100 mm). 2) Style: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) standard toe. c. Stair Skirts: Cut from stock 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick by maximum length available to contour and profile of stairs. Gap between skirt and stair shall not exceed 3/16 inch (4.76 mm). d. Adhesive: 1) Best for work as recommended by Manufacturer. e. Category Four Approved Manufacturers And Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Wallflower TS, 014 Medium Gray by Flexco by ESD Flooring Systems, Tuscumbia, AL www.marleyflexco.com. 2) Pinnacle TS, RP150 Dark Gray by Roppe Rubber Corporation, Fostoria, OH www.roppe.com.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and moisture content is within acceptable levels before beginning installation. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Variation In Grade: a. Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) in any 10 foot (3 meter) of floor slab and distance between high point and low point of slab of 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Testing Procedure: a. Place ends of straightedge on 3/8 inch (10 mm) high shims. b. Floor is satisfactory if 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter steel rod rolled under straightedge will not touch anywhere along 10 foot (3 meter) length and 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter steel rod will not fit under straightedge anywhere along 10 foot (3 meter) length. 3. Notify Owners Representative in writing if floor surface is not acceptable to install carpet.

B.

Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue

-4-

09 6816

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Do not lay carpet over unsuitable surface. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of floor and approval of existing conditions.

08.29.11

3.2

PREPARATION A. Flooring Preparation: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Suppliers Responsibility: a. Prepare floor substrate in accordance with CRI Carpet Installation Standard best practices to receive carpet installation and to provide installation that meets warranty requirements. b. Verify concrete surface cured, clean, dry, and free of foreign substances that will compromise carpet and/or installation. Relaxing / Conditioning Carpet: 1. Highly recommended that carpet be unrolled and allowed to relax in installation area for time period that conforms to requirements of manufacturer of product being installed. 2. Protect carpet adequately from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants. 3. Sundry items, such as adhesives, should also be conditioned. Carpet Accessories: 1. Owner-Furnished Products Responsibility: a. Sundry items, such as adhesives, shall be conditioned to building ambient conditions before use.

B.

C.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Carpet: 1. General: a. Install carpet and carpet base in accordance with CRI Carpet Installation Standard (2009) and manufacturers written instructions supplied with product. b. Install carpet under edge of metal thresholds where possible. Use specified carpet accessories at exposed edges. c. Generally, install carpet on Rostrum first, Chapel second, Overflow third, and then remainder of building. 2. Seaming Requirements: a. Lay rooms parallel to respective Corridors. Seam to permit best use of available carpet. b. Quarter turning allowed only at cross-Corridors longer than 24 feet (7.315 m). c. Use single or double seams at doorways. Run nap of pieced carpet in same direction. d. Seal seams in accordance with Carpet Manufacturer's instructions and according to CRI Carpet Installation Standard (2009) as applicable. Seam carpet base only at inside corners. Carpet Base: 1. Precut base so seams occur only at inside corners. 2. Scribe base to floor. 3. Spread adhesive over back side of base up to bottom of serging on edge or apply three 3/16 inch (4.76 mm).minimum diameter beads of adhesive placed one inch apart on back of base with top bead placed 2 inch (50 mm) down from serged edge of base and spread adhesive over back surface of base up to bottom edge of serging. a. Birds mouth finish should only be required when door frame is flush with wall. b. If birds mouth is required, terminate at door frames or vertical trim with 45 degree angle, bird mouth cut so serged edge turns down to contact frame or trim. 4. Do not allow adhesive beyond edge of base. Remove excess adhesive. 5. Do not use staples, nails, screws or other mechanical fasteners. 6. Set carpet base on brick walls at height either above or below horizontal mortar joint line. Resilient Base And Accessories: 1. Install in manner to produce smooth, even finished surfaces tightly jointed and accurately aligned.

B.

C.

Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue

-5-

09 6816

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2. 3. 4. 5.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Fit specified items tightly. Use fillers where necessary. Fit neatly against projections, piping, electrical service outlets, etc. Secure specified items with specified adhesive. Cement substantially to vertical surfaces including rubber base to cabinet work base. Line up top and bottom lines of base throughout. Roll until firm bond has been established. Leave level, free from buckles, cracks, and projecting edges.

08.29.11

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. See Section 09 0503 Flooring Substrate Preparation for Field Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. Field Inspections: 1. Unacceptable carpet after installation shall include but not be limited to: a. Delaminating carpet from backings. b. Fiber loss less than specified. c. Edge raveling. d. Fuzzing of carpet fibers. e. Pilling of carpet fibers. f. Appearance retention less than control samples attached to Agreement. g. Dye bleeding. h. Zippering fibers in carpet. i. Color streaking. j. Irregular tufts of fiber. 2. Unacceptable workmanship shall include but not be limited to: a. Improper floor preparation before installation. b. Failure of adhesive to completely adhere carpet to floor resulting in bubbles, ridges, or ripples where carpet has separated from floor. c. Seams that do not comply with specified requirements. 1) Raveled or untrimmed seams. 2) Seams not sealed, level, straight, or even. 3) Open seams. 4) Seams visibly open when viewed by Project Manager from standing position. d. Failure to properly install carpet next to walls and door frames to eliminate gaps or puckering of carpet. e. Use of unspecified carpet. f. Carpet base ends not finished to terminate at door frames or vertical trim shall have 45 degree angle 'birdsmouth' finish. g. Adhesive exposed on carpet, on carpet base, beyond edges of carpet base, and on other surfaces of building. h. Carpet base that is not scribed to fit against floor with no gaps. i. Carpet base attached by means other than acceptable carpet base adhesive. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Unacceptable carpeting will be rejected and shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to Owner. Facilities Manager will determine reasonable location of acceptable transition points for removal of unacceptable carpet. Minimum replacement size shall be: a. Between nearest existing seams, b. Between natural transition points, or c. 12 feet (3.6 meters) of running length.

B.

C.

3.5

CLEANING A. General: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Suppliers Responsibility:

Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue

-6-

09 6816

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b. B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Remove any soiling and/or staining from carpet. Remove excessive adhesive with manufacturer recommended adhesive removers.

Damage to building: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Suppliers Responsibility: a. Carpet Installer responsible for cleaning and repair of all damaged surfaces to their original condition from carpet installation. Waste Management: 1. Contractors Responsibility: a. Provide Dumpster as specified in Section 01 7400. 2. Owner-Furnished Product Suppliers Responsibility: a. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times. b. Disposal of rubbish, wrapping paper, scraps, and trimmings.

C.

3.6

PROTECTION A. Protection of Carpeting: 1. Contractors Responsibility: a. No traffic of any kind on newly installed carpet for minimum of 24 hours after installation is completed. b. No wheeled traffic of any kind placement of furniture or equipment on carpet for minimum of 48 hours after completion of carpet installation. c. Protect carpet adequately from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants after carpet installation.

END OF SECTION

Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue

-7-

09 6816

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 7216 VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wall covering 'Type B' as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900: Priming of gypsum board surfaces.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Sample: a. Color and pattern selection. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Cleaning and maintenance instructions. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b) Color and pattern selection.

B.

C.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Meet or exceed Fed Spec CCC-W-408A Type II, Class A. Requirements of this standard restrict approvals to flame spread no higher than 25. 2. Manufacturer shall meet governing codes requiring higher than specified standards. Qualifications. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. Installer: Shall have satisfactorily completed at least one project of comparable quality and scope within two years before bidding and be approved by Architect.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Supplier List: a. Essex Commercial Wallcoverings, distributed by LBI-Boyd Wallcoverings, Glendora, CA. 1) Contact Michelle Hermsen (303) 961-7951 hermsenmichelle@msn.com. b. Len-Tex Wallcoverings, Distributed by MDC Wallcoverings, Elk Grove Village, IL. -109 7216

Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Coverings

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c. d. e.

1) Contact Peter DeRooy (800) 621-4006 pderooy@mdcwall.com. Lanark Vinyl Wall Covering, Distributed by Tri-Kes Wallcovering Source, Dallas, TX (800) 200-8120 or (972) 484-8120 sales@tri-kes.com. Koroseal Wall Covering, Fairlawn, OH. 1) Contact Paula Graham (800) 752-9334 or (866) 628-2280 pgraham@koroseal.com. Color & Design Commercial Wallcoverings, Distributed by Wall Resources, Salt Lake City, UT (800) 323-8226. 1) Contact Lisa Fratto (801) 243-2797 lfratto@wallresources.com.

B.

Description: 1. Colors / Patterns to be selected from the following options: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. SCHEME Emerald 1 Emerald 2 Emerald 3 Garnet 1 Garnet 2 Garnet 3 Sapphire 1 Sapphire 2 Sapphire 3 ESSEX ACT-8086 ACT-8086 ACT-8086 ACT-8087 ACT 8087 ACT-8088 ACT-8089 ACT-8090 ACT8091 LEN-TEX Alpha 3781 Alpha 3781 Alpha 3781 Alpha 3782 Alpha 3782 Alpha 3781 Alpha 3782 Alpha 3782 Alpha 3475 KOROSEAL Legacy CWS 2730 Mythos Legacy CWS 2634 Mexican Agate Legacy CWS 2730 Mythos Legacy CWS 2634 Mexican Agate Legacy CWS 2634 Mexican Agate Legacy CWS 2717 Avalon Legacy CWS 1395 Sandstone Legacy CWS 2404 Vista Legacy CWS 1314 Tierra Blanca LANARK JFB006 JFB004 JFB004 JFB001 JFB001 JFB004 JFB005 JFB006 JFB002 COLOUR & DESIGN 0510-3319 0510-3319 0510-3319 0510-3320 0510-3320 0510-3321 0510-3319 0510-3319 0510-3321

C.

Materials: 1. Wall Covering: a. Supporting Materials: Cotton cloth, Osnaburg, or other suitable materials that will meet above standards. b. Coating Compound: Formulate from Virgin Polymerized or Copolymerized Vinylchloride resin, plasticized with phosphate or phthalate-ester plasticizers exclusively and be integrally pigmented. c. Top Coating: Meet requirements of Table 1 Fed Spec CCC-W-408 clear virgin polymerized vinyl-chloride resin or modified vinyl chloride resin. 1) Use phosphate or phthalate-ester plasticized exclusively. d. Width: 54 inches (1 350 mm) minimum. e. Minimum Weight: 20 oz per lineal yard (518 g per lineal meter) for 54 inch (1 350 mm) width.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: 1. Use only fungus resistant adhesives. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Roman's Professional Extra Strength by Roman Adhesive Co, Calumet City, IL (800) 4886117 or (708) 891-0770. b. Equal as recommended by Wall Covering Manufacturer and approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.

Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Coverings

-2-

09 7216

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

PREPARATION A. Prime or size surfaces other than gypsum board with material recommended by Wall Covering Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Coverings

-3-

09 7216

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 7226 SISAL WALL COVERING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnishing and installing wall covering 'Type A' as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 4512: Wood trim for sisal wall covering. 2. Section 09 2900: Priming of gypsum board. Products Furnished But not Installed Under This Section: 1. Sisal wall covering used in fixed sound-absorptive panels as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 8413: Fixed Sound-Absorptive Panels.

B.

C.

D.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Flame Spread: The propagation of flame over a surface. 2. Flame Spread Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. 803.1.1, Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish Materials. (2009). b. 803.3.1, Room Corner Test for Textile Wall Coverings and Expanded Vinyl Wall Coverings. 3. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute: a. NFPA 255: Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. b. NFPA 265: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls, 2007 Edition. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. a. UL 723: Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Tenth Edition September 10 2008.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b. Maintenance instructions. c. Color and pattern selection. Informational Submittals: -109 7226

B.

Sisal Wall Covering

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Copies of flame spread certification and 'Room-Corner Test.'

C.

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Cleaning and maintenance instructions. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets. b) Color and pattern selections.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: 1) Wall covering shall have Class A flame spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723 Type 1. a) Class A (Flame spread index 0-25; Smoke-developed index 0-450). b) Flash point: None. 2. Passage of Room-Corner Test' as recognized by AHJ, is required for system. Adhesive cited in test literature is required for installation of wall covering on Project. a. Room Corner Tests: 1) ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2) IBC 803.3.1, Room Corner Test for Textile Wall Coverings and Expanded Vinyl Wall Coverings. (formally UBC 8-2). 3) NFPA 265, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls. 4) UL 723, Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver materials in sealed containers with Manufacturers labels intact. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials in protected area at temperatures below 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above 50 deg F (10 deg C). Keep from freezing. 2. Keep container tightly closed in a well ventilated area, and store upright when not in use. 3. Shelf life: 1 year minimum - Unopened containers.

B.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Apply when the temperature is between 50 deg F (10 deg C) minimum and 100 deg F (38 deg C) maximum and relative humidity is less than 75 percent. 2. Provide good ventilation.

Sisal Wall Covering

-2-

09 7226

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.7 WARRANTY A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide five (5) year warranty against manufacturing defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Contact List: 1. Design Materials Inc, Kansas City, KS www.dmikc.com. 2. Fibreworks, Louisville, KY www.fibreworks.com.

2.2

DESCRIPTION A. Colors to be selected from the following options: 1. Category Four Approved Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. SCHEME Emerald 1 Emerald 2 Emerald 3 Garnet 1 Garnet 2 Garnet 3 Sapphire 1 Sapphire 2 Sapphire 3 Design Materials 0280 Emerald 0250 Jacinth 0280 Emerald 0250 Jacinth 0240 Garnet 0240 Garnet 0230 Sapphire 0230 Sapphire 0270 Topaz Fibreworks 331 Emerald 334 Jacinth 331 Emerald 334 Jacinth 332 Garnet 332 Garnet 333 Sapphire 333 Sapphire 335 Topaz

2.3

MATERIALS A. Sisal Wall Covering: 1. 100 percent fire-treated sisal yarn. 2. 1/4 inch (6 mm) pile height, 48 oz/sq yd (1 627 grams/sq meter) minimum. Sisal to be installed full height on walls shall be furnished in 9 or 13 foot (2.75 or 3.96 meters) wide goods. 3. Reversible weave type, without backing.

2.4

ACCESSORIES A. Wall Covering Adhesive: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. 257 Sisal Adhesive by Fibreworks. b. Sisal Adhesive No. 1-422 by Design Materials. Seam Cement: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 4015 Glue-Down Carpet Seam Adhesive by Roberts Consolidated Industries, Div QEP, Henderson, NV www.robertsconsolidated.com. b. Equal as recommended by Wall Covering Manufacturer with approval of Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

B.

Sisal Wall Covering

-3-

09 7226

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate and verify that it is suitable for installation of sisal wall covering. 2. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. a. Do not install over unsuitable conditions. 3. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Apply wall covering in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, available on DVD from Owner through Architect. Using specified adhesive, glue continuously to surface to be covered with wall covering. Apply adhesive in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Run 'ribs' in weaving horizontally (panel style) when installing wall covering full height. If sisal installed only as wainscotting, 'ribs' may be installed vertically. Install wall covering so it extends to within 1/8 inch (3 mm) of floor slab.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

Sisal Wall Covering

-4-

09 7226

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 8413 FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Factory-built acoustic wall panels. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Sisal wall covering. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 7226: Quality of sisal wall covering.

B.

C.

D.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature showing compliance with Contract Document requirements. b. Color selection. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: Written copy of installation instructions.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Model 03QU3F by A & D Specialties, Leadore, ID www.a-d-acousticalpanels.com. 2. Model B-99 Series by BDL Mill, Salt Lake City, UT www.bdlmill.com. 3. Model CWP by Building Products distributed by Creative West, Salt Lake City, UT www.creativewest.com.

2.2

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Acoustic Wall Panels: 1. Factory-built panels covered with woven sisal to match color specified in Section 09 7226, without backing. 2. Nominal 3 inch (75 mm) depth with 2 inches (50 mm) of 1-1/2 lb (0.68 kg) density fiberglass insulation behind one inch (25 mm) of Tectum or QUASH FR 2000 Foam Plank by Dow. 3. Category Four Approved Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. Colors to be selected from the following options: SCHEME Emerald 1 Emerald 2 Design Materials 0280 Emerald 0250 Jacinth Fibreworks 331 Emerald 334 Jacinth -109 8413

Fixed Sound-Absorptive Panels

Project # 503-6925-11010101 Emerald 3 Garnet 1 Garnet 2 Garnet 3 Sapphire 1 Sapphire 2 Sapphire 3 0280 Emerald 0250 Jacinth 0240 Garnet 0240 Garnet 0230 Sapphire 0230 Sapphire 0270 Topaz

08.29.11 331 Emerald 334 Jacinth 332 Garnet 332 Garnet 333 Sapphire 333 Sapphire 335 Topaz

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.3

ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Hardware: 1. Supply proper mounting hardware for substrate on which panels are to be mounted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Run 'ribs' in weaving horizontally (panel style) to match direction of sisal installed full height on wall directly behind panels (see Section 09 7226).

END OF SECTION

Fixed Sound-Absorptive Panels

-2-

09 8413

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 9001

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common procedures and requirements for field-applied painting and coating. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0503: Quality of shop priming of steel and iron. 2. Section 07 9213: Quality of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 3. Section 09 2900: Priming of gypsum board before texturing. 4. Section 09 6466: Finishing of hardwood flooring and painting of game lines. 5. Section 09 9413: Textured finishing. 6. Divisions 22 and 23: Painting of plumbing and HVAC identification, refrigerant line insulation, and duct interiors. 7. Section 32 1723: Pavement Marking.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Gloss Levels: a. Specified paint gloss level shall be defined as sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with following terms and values, unless specified otherwise for a specific paint system. Gloss Level 1 Gloss Level 2 Gloss Level 3 Gloss Level 4 Gloss Level 5 Gloss Level 6 Gloss Level 7 Traditional matte finish flat High side sheen flat 'velvet-like' finish Traditional 'eggshell-like finish 'Satin-like' finish Traditional semi-gloss Traditional gloss High gloss 0 to 5 units at 60 degrees to 10 units maximum at 85 degrees. 10 units maximum at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and 35 units minimum at 85 degrees. 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. More than 85 units at 60 degrees.

2.

3. 4.

Properly Painted Surface: Surface that is uniform in appearance, color, and sheen and free of foreign material, lumps, skins, runs, sags, holidays, misses, strike-through, and insufficient coverage. Surface free of drips, spatters, spills, and overspray caused by Paint Applicator. Compliance will be determined when viewed without magnification at a distance of 5 feet minimum under normal lighting conditions and from normal viewing position (MPI(a), PDCA P1.92). Damage Caused By Others: Damage caused by individuals other than those under direct control of Painting Applicator (MPI(a), PDCA P1.92). Latent Damage: Damage or conditions beyond control of Painting Applicator caused by conditions not apparent at time of initial painting or coating work.

B.

Reference Standards: 1. Master Painters Institute: -109 9001

Common Painting And Coating Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

MPI(a), Jul 2007, 'Architectural Painting Specification Manual.'

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 09 2900 to review finish requirements of gypsum wallboard. 2. Schedule painting pre-installation conference after delivery of paint but before or at same time as application of field samples. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Review painting schedule. b. Review safety issues.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Include following information for each painting system, arranged in same order as in Project Manual. 1) Manufacturer's cut sheet for each component of each system indicating ingredients and percentages by weight and by volume, environmental restrictions for application, and film thicknesses and spread rates. 2) Copies of appropriate entries from MPI Approved Product List. Products from MPI Approved Product List is mandatory for Sections 09 9112, 09 9123 and 09 9124. If proposed manufacturer has products listed for these three Sections, but not for other Sections, Architect may approve products submitted by proposed manufacturer for other Sections. 3) Confirmation of colors selected and that each area to be painted or coated has color selected for it. 2. Samples: Provide two 4 inch by 6 inch (100 mm by 150 mm) minimum draw-down cards for each paint or coating color selected for this Project. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Manufacturer's substrate preparation instructions and application instruction for each painting system used on Project. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's cut sheet for each component of each system. b) Schedule showing rooms and surfaces where each system was used.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Paint and painting materials shall be free of lead and mercury, and have VOC levels acceptable to local jurisdiction. Field Samples: 1. Before application of any paint system, meet on Project site with Architect, Owner's representative, and Manufacturer's representative. Architect may select one surface for application of each paint system specified. This process will include establishing acceptable substrate conditions required for Project before application of paints and coatings.

B.

Common Painting And Coating Requirements

-2-

09 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2. 3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Apply paint systems to surfaces indicated by Architect following procedures outlined in Contract Documents and Product Data submission specified above. After approval of samples, proceed with application of paint system throughout Project. Approved samples will serve as standard of acceptability.

08.29.11

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver specified products in sealed, original containers with Manufacturer's original labels intact on each container. 2. Deliver amount of materials necessary to meet Project requirements in single shipment. 3. Notify Architect two working days before delivery of coatings. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials in single place. 2. Keep storage area clean and rectify any damage to area at completion of work of this Section. 3. Maintain storage area at 55 deg F (13 deg C) minimum.

B.

1.7

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Perform painting operations at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by Manufacturer for each operation and for each product. 2. Apply painting systems at lighting level of 540 Lux (50 foot candles) minimum on surfaces to be painted. Inspection of painting work shall take place under same lighting conditions as application. If painting and coating work is applied under temporary lighting, deficiencies discovered upon installation of permanent lighting will be considered latent damage as defined in MPI Manual, PDCA P1-92.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Color Levels: 1) Color Level II: a) Number and placement of interior and exterior paint colors and gloss levels shall be as defined by Color Level II from MPI Manual, PDCA P3-93 as modified in following paragraph. b) No more than one paint color or gloss level will be selected for same substrate within designated interior rooms or exterior areas. Materials: 1. Materials used for any painting system shall be from single manufacturer unless approved otherwise in writing by painting system manufacturers and by Architect. Include manufacturer approvals in Product Data submittal. 2. Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, and other painting materials shall be pure, be compatible with other coating materials, bear identifying labels on containers, and be of highest quality of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI manuals. Tinting color shall be best grade of type recommended by Manufacturer of paint or stain used on Project.

B.

Common Painting And Coating Requirements

-3-

09 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Directing applicator to begin painting and coating work will indicate that substrates to receive painting and coating materials have been previously inspected as part of work of other Sections and are complete and ready for application of painting and coating systems as specified in those Sections. Pre-Installation Testing: 1. Before beginning work of this Section, examine, and test surfaces to be painted or coated for adhesion of painting and coating systems. 2. Report in writing to Architect of conditions that will adversely affect adhesion of painting and coating work. 3. Do not apply painting and coating systems until party responsible for adverse condition has corrected adverse condition. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Report defects in substrates that become apparent after application of primer or first finish coat to Architect in writing and do not proceed with further work on defective substrate until such defects are corrected by party responsible for defect.

B.

C.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: 1. Protect other finish work and adjacent materials during painting. Do not splatter, drip, or paint surfaces not intended to be painted. These items will not be spelled out in detail but pay special attention to the following: a. Do not paint finish copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or monel metal except as explicitly specified. b. Keep cones of ceiling speakers completely free of paint. In all cases where painting of metal speaker grilles is required, paint without grilles mounted to speakers and without grilles on ceiling. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements and requirements of Manufacturer for each painting system specified, unless instructed differently in Contract Documents. Bring conflicts to attention of Architect in writing. 2. Fill minor holes and cracks in wood surfaces to receive paint or stain. 3. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of loose dirt. Clean and dust surfaces before painting or finishing. 4. Do no exterior painting while surface is damp, unless recommended by Manufacturer, nor during rainy or frosty weather. Interior surfaces shall be dry before painting. Moisture content of materials to be painted shall be within tolerances acceptable to Paint Manufacturer. 5. Sand woodwork smooth in direction of grain leaving no sanding marks. Clean surfaces before proceeding with stain or first coat application.

B.

3.3

APPLICATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with other trades for materials and systems that require painting before installation. 2. Schedule painting and coating work to begin when work upon which painting and coating work is dependent has been completed. Schedule installation of pre-finished and non-painted items, which are to be installed on painted surfaces, after application of final finishes.

Common Painting And Coating Requirements

-4-

09 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Paint or finish complete all surfaces to be painted or coated as described in Contract Documents, including but not limited to following items. 1. Finish casework and wood trims that are specified to be installed under Section 06 2001 and that are not called out to be factory-or shop-finished. Back prime wood elements to be installed against concrete or masonry or that may be subjected to moisture. 2. Paint mechanical, electrical, and audio/visual items that require field painting as indicated in Contract Documents. These include but are not limited to: a. Gas pipe from gas meter into building. b. Mechanical flues and pipes penetrating roof. c. Electrical panel and disconnect enclosures. d. Metal protective structures for refrigerant lines. 3. Metal reveals at ceiling access doors. 4. Paint inside of chases in occupied spaces flat black for 18 inches (450 mm) or beyond sightline, whichever is greater.

08.29.11

C.

Apply sealant in gaps 3/16 inch (5 mm) and smaller between two substrates that are both to be painted or coated. Sealants in other gaps furnished and installed under Section 07 9213. On wood to receive a transparent finish, putty nail holes in wood after application of stain using natural colored type to match wood stain color. Bring putty flush with adjoining surfaces. In multiple coat paint work, tint each succeeding coat with slightly lighter color, but approximating shade of final coat, so it is possible to check application of specified number of coats. Tint final coat to required color. Spread materials smoothly and evenly. Apply coats to not less than wet and dry film thicknesses and at spreading rates for specified products as recommended by Manufacturer. Touch up suction spots after application of first finish coat. Paint shall be thoroughly dry and surfaces clean before applying succeeding coats. Use fine sandpaper between coats as necessary to produce even, smooth surfaces. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean, sharp, and without overlapping. Finished work shall be a 'Properly Painted Surface' as defined in this Section.

D.

E.

F.

G. H. I. J. K.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Correct deficiencies in workmanship as required to leave surfaces in conformance with 'Properly Painted Surface,' as defined in this Section. 2. Correction of 'Latent Damage' and 'Damage Caused By Others,' as defined in this Section, is not included in work of this Section.

3.5

CLEANING A. General: 1. As work proceeds and upon completion of work of any painting Section, remove paint spots from floors, walls, glass, or other surfaces and leave work clean, orderly, and in acceptable condition. Waste Management: 1. Remove rags and waste used in painting operations from building each night. Take every precaution to avoid danger of fire. 2. Remove debris caused by work of paint Sections from premises.

B.

Common Painting And Coating Requirements

-5-

09 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 END OF SECTION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Common Painting And Coating Requirements

-6-

09 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

ATTACHMENTS

PART 4 - PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE A. Colors to be selected from the following options: 1. Interior: a. Interior Gypsum Board, Plaster: 1) Class One Color Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200. Scheme One Two Three Manufacturer Emerald SW6098 SW6098 SW6098 Sherwin Williams Garnet SW6070 SW6070 SW6098 Sapphire SW6098 SW6098 SW6385 b. Interior Metal: 1) Class One Color Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200. Scheme One Two Three Manufacturer Emerald SW6098 SW6098 SW6098 Sherwin Williams Garnet SW6070 SW6070 SW6098 Sapphire SW6098 SW6098 SW6385 c. Interior Painted Wood: 1) Class One Color Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200. Scheme One Two Three Manufacturer Emerald SW6098 SW6098 SW6098 Sherwin Williams Garnet SW6070 SW6070 SW6098 Sapphire SW6098 SW6098 SW6385 d. Interior Clear Finished Wood: Match other interior clear finished wood building elements. See Section 09 9324. 2. Exterior: a. Exterior Metal: 1) Class One Color Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200. a) Product & color to be selected by Architect from manufacturers full product line. b. Exterior CMU, Concrete: 1) Class One Color Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200. a) Product & color to be selected by Architect from manufacturers full product line. c. Exterior Siding & Trim: 1) Class One Color Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200. a) Product & color to be selected by Architect from manufacturers full product line.

Common Painting And Coating Requirements

-7-

09 9001

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 9112 EXTERIOR PAINTED FERROUS METAL

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting new exterior ungalvanized iron and steel surfaces as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. Description: 1. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) EXT 5.1M Waterborne Light Industrial Coating system . Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Systems specified are in addition to prime coats provided under other Sections of Project Manual. b. Finish Requirements: Use MPI Premium Grade finish requirements for work of this Section. c. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. Materials: 1. Primer Coat: MPI Product 107. 2. Finish Coats: MPI Product 163.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION A. B. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. New Surfaces: Clean metal to be painted of rust, mill scale, grease, oil, and welding spatters, burrs, flux, slag, and fume. If all traces of rust cannot be removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying primer coat.

END OF SECTION

Exterior Painted Ferrous Metal

-1-

09 9112

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTED GALVANIZED METAL

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting new exterior exposed galvanized metal surfaces as Described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. Description: 1. Exposed Miscellaneous Structural Steel: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) EXT 5.3D Pigmented Polyurethane Finish system. 2. All Other: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) EXT 5.3H Latex Finish system Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. b. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. Materials: 1. Polyurethane: a. Vinyl Wash Primer Coat: MPI Product 80. b. Finish Coats: 1) Epoxy MPI Product 101. 2) Polyurethane MPI Product 72. 2. Latex: a. Waterborne Primer Coat: MPI Product 134. b. Finish Coats: MPI Product 11.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION A. B. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. New Surfaces: -109 9113

Exterior Painted Galvanized Metal

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

3. 4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Clean 'passivated' or 'stabilized' galvanized steel as specified in SSPC-SP1. After removal of 'passivated' or 'stabilized' coating or for surfaces without coating, clean surfaces to be painted with mineral spirits or product recommended by Paint Manufacturer. Change to clean rags or wiping cloths regularly to reduce possibility of re-contamination of surface. Apply prime coat. Apply finish coats.

08.29.11

END OF SECTION

Exterior Painted Galvanized Metal

-2-

09 9113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 9123

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing, priming, and finish painting new interior gypsum board and plaster surfaces as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900: Priming new interior gypsum board surfaces to receive sheet wall covering system and texturing. 2. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements. 3. Section 09 9413: Textured finishes.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers and Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. Description: 1. Rest Rooms, Font Rooms, And Custodial Rooms: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 9.2F Waterborne Epoxy Finish system 2. All Other: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 9.2B Latex Finish system. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. b. Gloss / Sheen Required: 1) Rest Rooms, Font Room, And Custodial Rooms: Gloss Level 6. 2) Chapel Ceiling: Gloss Level 1 or 2. 3) Remaining Painted Surfaces: Gloss Level 5. Materials: 1. Primers a. MPI Product 50. 2. Finish Coats: a. Rest Rooms, Font Room, And Custodial Rooms: 1) Buildings with only Gypsum Board surfaces in rooms: a) MPI Product 115. b. Chapel Ceiling: 1) MPI Product 53. c. Remaining Painted Surfaces: 1) MPI Product 141

B.

C.

D.

Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster

-1-

09 9123

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

APPLICATION A. Interface With Other Work: Properly clean and paint light cove interiors before installation of light fixtures. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. New Surfaces: 1. Primer: Apply primer to be covered with other paint coats with roller only, or with spray gun and back-rolled.

B. C.

END OF SECTION

Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster

-2-

09 9123

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 9124 INTERIOR PAINTED METAL

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting new interior metal surfaces as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequencing: 1. Paint brackets furnished under Section 05 5871 before installation of bracket.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. Description: 1. Ferrous Metal: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.1B Waterborne Light Industrial Finish system. 2. Galvanized Metal: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.3J Latex Finish system 3. Aluminum: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.4E Waterborne Light Industrial Finish system. Performance: 1. Design Requirements: a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. b. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. Materials: 1. Primers: a. Ferrous Metal: MPI Product 107. b. Galvanized Metal: MPI Product 134. c. Aluminum: MPI Product 95. 2. Finish Coats: MPI Product 153.

B.

C.

D.

Interior Painted Metal

-1-

09 9124

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

APPLICATION A. General: 1. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. 2. Systems specified are in addition to prime coats furnished under other Sections. New Surfaces: Remove rust spots by sanding and immediately spot prime. If all traces of rust cannot be removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying full primer coat.

B.

END OF SECTION

Interior Painted Metal

-2-

09 9124

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 9125 INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting new woodwork and wood floors not requiring transparent finish, as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. Description: 1. Systems: a. Floors: 1) New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 6.5H Waterborne Epoxy Finish system. b. All Other: 1) New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 6.3T or U Latex Finish system. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. b. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. Materials: 1. Wood Floors: MPI Product 77. 2. Woodwork: a. Primer Coat: MPI Products 39 or 45. b. Finish Coats: MPI Product 153.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION A. B. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. Interface With Other Work: 1. Properly clean and paint light cove interiors before installation of light fixtures. 2. Where back-priming is required, apply one coat of primer.

Interior Painted Wood

-1-

09 9125

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

New Surfaces: 1. Spot prime nail holes, cracks, and blemishes before and after puttying. 2. Apply stain blocker or other product recommended by Paint Manufacturer to knots before applying primer coat.

END OF SECTION

Interior Painted Wood

-2-

09 9125

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 9324 INTERIOR CLEAR-FINISHED HARDWOOD

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and finishing of new interior clear finished hardwood as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2210: Miscellaneous Wood Trim. 2. Section 06 4114: Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets. 3. Section 06 4115: Rostrum Casework. 4. Section 06 4512: Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim. 5. Section 08 1429: Interior Flush Wood Doors. 6. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. Reference Standards: 1. Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association / American National Standards Institute: a. ANSI/KCMA A161.1-2000 (R2005) 23-Jan-2001 Recommended Performance and Construction Standards for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Requirements for samples are specified in Related Requirement Sections listed above. b. Design Criteria: 1) Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Before beginning finish work, submit Finish Manufacturer's literature or certification that finish material meets requirements of ANSI / KCMA A161.1.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Stain: MPI 90. 2. Clear Finish Coats: -109 9324

Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

Field Finished: 1) Chemcraft International Inc: a) First, Second, And Third Coats: 20 Sheen Opticlear Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer. 2) ICI Dulux / Trinity: a) First Coat: ICE Vinyl Sanding Sealer. b) Second And Third Coats: ICI Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer. 3) Lilly / Valspar: a) First, Second, And Third Coats: 20 Sheen Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer 587E208. 4) Sherwin-Williams: a) First Coat: T67F3 Vinyl Sealer. b) Second And Third Coats: T77F38 Sherwood Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer DRE. b. Mill Finished: Architectural Woodwork finished in a mill may use one coat of Vinyl Sealer and two coats of Conversion Varnish or three coats of Conversion Varnish from one of the approved Finish Manufacturers, as recommended by Finish Manufacturer. c. Products meeting testing requirements for finishes of ANSI / KCMA A161.1 may be used upon approval of submission by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. Color: a. Design Criteria: 1) Finish to match Owner selected sample. Finish to be selected from LDS 95 or LDS Cherry. b. LDS 95: 1) Performance standard: Owner provided sample. a) Contact Information: Nancy Black (801) 240-2431 BlackNL@ldschurch.org, Meetinghouse Facilities Department. c. LDS Cherry: 1) Performance standard: Owner provided sample. a) Contact Information: Nancy Black (801) 240-2431 BlackNL@ldschurch.org, Meetinghouse Facilities Department. 2) Elective finishing process: a) Class Two products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (1) LDS Cherry stain: S4XXR1093 by Sherwin Williams. (2) Sealer: V81FH4 by Sherwin Williams. b) Option One Toner: (1) Toner: T7XXN11343 by Sherwin Williams. c) Option Two Toner: (1) 1 qt (0.946 liter) cherry stain. (2) 2 qts (1.893 liter) sealer. (3) 6 qts (5.678 liter) lacquer thinner. (4) Red oxide 42.8 grams. (5) Black 25.0 grams. (6) Medium yellow 30 grams. d) Finish: (1) Finish: V84FF8007 by Sherwin Williams. e) Application: (1) Use quart spray pot. Apply gently and lightly to surface. (2) Use control sample at all times. (3) Spray on stain and let stand five minutes before wiping off. Let dry 16 hours (or overnight). (4) Use sealer and let dry 1 hour. (5) Buff surfaces with 220 grit sanding sponge blocks. (6) Blow off dust. (7) Spray on toner (let dry 30 minutes minimum). (8) Spray on finish.

Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood

-2-

09 9324

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

APPLICATION A. General: 1. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. 2. Sand entire exposed surface of item to be finished lightly with 120 to 150 non-stearated sandpaper and clean before applying dye or stain. 3. Apply stain in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to attain correct color. 4. Scuff sand with 220 non-stearated sandpaper between application of application stain and first finish coat. 5. If wood is finished before installation, finish cut ends and other unfinished, exposed surfaces same as previously finished surfaces after installation of wood. Where back-priming is required, apply one coat of finish material. Architectural Woodwork Door Surfaces: 1. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges before faces. 2. Finish architectural woodwork doors with no hardware applied to doors.

B. C.

END OF SECTION

Interior Clear-Finished Hardwood

-3-

09 9324

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 09 9413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and apply texturing on walls and ceilings as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900: Priming. 2. Section 09 9123: Finish painting.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Drywall Texture: Compound rolled, sprayed, or troweled onto sheetrock after taping and floating of joints is complete. Uses same material as joint compound, but thinned down with water and applied to wall surface: a. Orange Peel: Sprayed texture leaves light to heavy splatter on walls. Resembles peel of orange. If done with fine spray, can be one of the lightest, least noticeable of the texture styles.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: Provide minimum of three (3) 24 inch (600 mm) square control samples on primed gypsum wallboard of light orange peel texture to show possible variations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com. b. U S Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Light Orange Peel. Materials: 1. Class Two Quality Standards: See Section 01 6200. a. ProForm Perfect Spray EM/HF by National Gypsum. b. Sheetrock Wall & Ceiling Texture by U S Gypsum.

B.

C.

Interior Textured Finishing

-1-

09 9413

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

APPLICATION A. After gypsum board is taped, sanded, and primed, apply texture. Closely match samples accepted by Architect.

END OF SECTION

Interior Textured Finishing

-2-

09 9413

D I V I S I O N 10: S P E C I A L T I E S
10 1000 I N F O R M A T I O N S P E C I A L T I E S 10 1113 10 1116 10 1123 10 1200 10 1424 10 1453 10 1495 FIXED CHALKBOARDS FIXED MARKERBOARDS FIXED TACKBOARDS DISPLAY CASES ENGRAVED STONE PANEL SIGNAGE TRAFFIC SIGNAGE MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE

10 2000 I N T E R I O R S P E C I A L T I E S 10 2113 10 2233 10 2813 10 2814 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES BABY-CHANGING STATION

10 4000 S A F E T Y S P E C I A L T I E S 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 5000 S T O R A G E S P E C I A L T I E S 10 5713 HAT AND COAT RACKS 10 7000 E X T E R I O R S P E C I A L T I E S 10 7430 ALUMINUM STEEPLE 10 7431 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED STEEPLE 10 7516 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 10 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 1113 FIXED CHALKBOARDS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Chalkboards and specified hardware: Visual Display Board Type 1. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish Chalkboards. PART 2 of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc., Norcross, GA www.porcelainenamel.com. a. PEI-1002, Manual and Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Writing Surfaces (Whiteboards and Chalkboards) 2002.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. b. Printed cleaning instructions. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Maintenance instructions. 2) Printed cleaning instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Manufacturer Warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturers product literature. b) Color selections.

B.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Letter from Manufacturer certifying Contract Documents have been complied with and guarantee against faulty workmanship and materials for five years.

Fixed Chalkboards

-1-

10 1113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. ADP Lemco Corporation, West Jordan, UT www.adplemco.com. Description: 1. Color: a. Dark Gray. Chalkboard: 1. Face: a. Face shall be steel, 28 ga (0.4 mm) minimum, coated two sides with fused ground coat, and finished one side with vitreous porcelain enamel designed for use with chalk. b. Coating shall meet requirements of PEI-1002. 2. Core: a. Core shall be mat-formed particleboard. 1) 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick medium-density or 2) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick low-density minimum. 3. Backing: a. Backing shall be 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) minimum aluminum foil. 4. Trim: a. Extruded 6063-T5 alloy aluminum with satin etched, natural aluminum anodized finish. b. Extrusions shall match thickness of units without wedging. c. Round all sharp edges. d. 2 inch (50 mm) high map rail. 5. Map Clips: a. Manufacturer's standard. b. Provide map clips on chalkboards as follows: 1) 60 Inches (1 500 mm) And Shorter: Two clips. 2) Over 60 Inches (1 500 mm): Four clips. 6. Mounting Hardware: a. Suitable for wall conditions. Fabrication: 1. Prefabricate units at factory and ship to Project site in one piece, except for chalk trays. 2. Units shall be of first quality and lamination done by approved standards of industry. 3. Furnish printed cleaning instructions with each shipment.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Mount boards square and level. 1. Shim as necessary to provide permanent installation and smooth operation. 2. Anchor boards securely to wall following Manufacturers written installation instructions. 3. Anchor concealed hangers with screws at 24 inches (600 mm) on center. Mounting fasteners shall penetrate framing lumber or blocking 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum. Use toggle bolts or expansion bolts in masonry walls. After attaching map clips, apply permanently attached end cap or screw to prevent removal of map clips.

B.

C.

Fixed Chalkboards

-2-

10 1113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 END OF SECTION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Fixed Chalkboards

-3-

10 1113

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 1116 FIXED MARKERBOARDS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Markerboard units: Visual Display Board Type 3. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish Markerboards. PART 2 of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc., Norcross, GA www.porcelainenamel.com. a. PEI-1002, Manual and Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Writing Surfaces (Whiteboards and Chalkboards) 2002.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. b. Printed cleaning instructions. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Maintenance instructions. 2) Printed cleaning instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Manufacturer Warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturers product literature.

B.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Letter from Manufacturer certifying Contract Documents have been complied with and guarantee against faulty workmanship and materials for five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: -110 1116

Fixed Markerboards

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Platinum Visual Systems, Corona, CA www.pvusa.com.

Description: 1. Color: White. Markerboard: 1. Face shall be steel, 28 ga (0.4 mm) minimum, coated two sides with fused ground coat, and finished one side with vitreous porcelain enamel. 2. Coatings shall meet requirements of PEI-1002: a. All Rooms: 1) Coatings shall be for marker use. 3. Core shall be mat-formed particleboard. a. 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick medium-density. b. 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick low-density minimum. 4. Backing: a. Backing shall be 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) minimum aluminum foil. 5. Trim: a. Extruded 6063-T5 alloy aluminum with satin etched, natural aluminum anodized finish. b. Extrusions shall match thickness of units without wedging. c. Round all sharp edges. d. 2 inch (50 mm) high map rail. 6. Trays: a. Provide 2 inch (50 mm) radius rounded ends on marker trays. b. Marker trays with squared, sharp ends are not acceptable. 7. Map Clips: a. Manufacturer's standard. b. Provide two map clips on markerboards. 8. Mounting Hardware: a. Suitable for wall conditions. Fabrication: 1. Prefabricate units at factory and ship to jobsite in one piece, except for marker trays. 2. Units shall be of first quality and lamination done by approved standards of industry. 3. Furnish printed cleaning instructions with each shipment.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Mount boards square and level. 1. Shim as necessary to provide permanent installation and smooth operation. 2. Anchor boards securely to wall following Manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3. Anchor concealed hangers with screws at 24 inches (600 mm) on center. Mounting fasteners shall penetrate framing lumber or blocking 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum. Use toggle bolts or expansion bolts in masonry walls. After attaching map clips, apply permanently attached end cap or screw to prevent removal of map clips.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

Fixed Markerboards

-2-

10 1116

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 1123 FIXED TACKBOARDS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Tackboards and specified hardware: Visual Display Board Type 2. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish Tackboards. PART 2 of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standard: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E84-09, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. Federal Specifications and Standards: a. FS CCC-W-408D Wall Covering, Vinyl-Coating / 14 Jan 1994 (amended 18 Dec 2003).

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. b. Printed cleaning instructions. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Maintenance instructions. 2) Printed cleaning instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Manufacturer Warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturers product literature. b) Color selection.

B.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Letter from Manufacturer certifying Contract Documents have been complied with and guarantee against faulty workmanship and materials for five years.

Fixed Tackboards

-1-

10 1123

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Manufacturer: 1. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. ADP Lemco Corporation, West Jordan, UT www.adplemco.com. Description: 1. Color: a. Sterling. Tackboard: 1. 1/4 inch (6 mm) natural cork faced with 15 oz (425 gram) cloth supported vinyl meeting requirements of Federal Specifications and Standards FS CCC-W-408 Type 2 (medium duty) and UL rated for 25 flame spread minimum when tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E84. 2. Backing: a. C-D grade plugged and touch sanded plywood or particle board, back primed or foil covered. 3. Trim: a. Extruded 6063-T5 alloy aluminum with satin etched, natural aluminum anodized finish. b. Extrusions shall match thickness of units without wedging. c. Round all sharp edges. d. 2 inch (50 mm) high map rail. 4. Map Clips: a. Manufacturer's standard. b. Provide two map clips on each tackboard. 5. Mounting Hardware: a. Suitable for wall conditions. Fabrication: 1. Prefabricate units at factory and ship to jobsite in one piece. 2. Units shall be of first quality and lamination done by approved standards of industry. 3. Furnish printed cleaning instructions with each shipment.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Mount boards square and level. 1. Shim as necessary to provide permanent installation. 2. Anchor boards securely to wall following Manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3. Anchor concealed hangers with screws at 24 inches (600 mm) on center. Mounting fasteners shall penetrate framing lumber or blocking 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum. Use toggle bolts or expansion bolts in masonry walls. After attaching map clips, apply permanently attached end cap or screw to prevent removal of map clips.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

Fixed Tackboards

-2-

10 1123

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 1200 DISPLAY CASES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Visual Display Cabinets: Visual Display Board Type 4. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish Visual Display Cabinets. PART 2 of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturers product literature.

B.

1.3

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Standard Key Delivery: a. Include keys for locks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. ADP Lemco Corp, West Jordan, UT www.adplemco.com. Description: 1. Size: 48 inches by 48 inches (1 200 mm by 1 200 mm). Missionary Display Cases: 1. Framing: a. Red Oak pre-finished to match color of architectural woodwork. 2. Sliding Glass Doors: a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) tempered polished plate. 3. Tackboard: a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) vinyl impregnated cork laminated to plywood, masonite, or flakeboard base. 4. Locks: a. Standard of Manufacturer. Provide four keys. -110 1200

B.

C.

Display Cases

Project # 503-6925-11010101 5. 6.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Mounting Devices: a. As furnished by Manufacturer for type of wall to receive case. Approved Product: a. MBS-44 by ADP Lemco.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Mount boards plumb and true. 1. Anchor with mounting devices furnished by Manufacturer following printed installation instructions.

END OF SECTION

Display Cases

-2-

10 1200

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 1424 ENGRAVED STONE PANEL SIGNAGE

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Stone logo and visitors welcome sign. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 2113: Installation.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Show details of attachment system.

1.3

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store material on planks clear of ground and protect from damage, dirt, or disfigurement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIAL A. Fabricators: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 01 4301. a. Hans Monument Co, Salt Lake City, UT (801) 484-1594 FAX 801-467-8308 www.hansmonuments.com Contact Debbie Christensen. b. Mark H. Bott Co, Ogden, UT (800) 526-9573 FAX 800-435-0264 www.markhbott.com Contact David E. Bott. Description: 1. Sign Size: 33-1/4 inches (845 mm) high by 55-5/8 inches (1 413 mm) wide by 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick. Finish: Low pressure, 30 lb (13.6 kg), steeled finish on 80 grit honed surface.

B.

C.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners And Anchors: 1. 'Z' bracket system for surface mounting sign on mineral fiber cement siding.

Engraved Stone Panel Signage

-1-

10 1424

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. Set sign using mechanical fasteners provided by Sign Fabricator. Joints shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) wide. Use plastic spacers in wall joints.

3.2

CLEANING A. After sign installation is completed, clean using non-metallic fiber brushes and clean water.

3.3

PROTECTION A. Provide protection for stone meetinghouse sign from masonry cleaning chemicals and other damaging materials until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Engraved Stone Panel Signage

-2-

10 1424

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 1453 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnishing and installing of exterior post-mounted site signage as described in Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Permanently Mounted: 1. Post Foundation Concrete: One cu ft cement, 2 cu ft (0.0566 cu m) sand, 4 cu ft (0.1132 cu m) gravel, and 5 gallons (18.93 liters) minimum to 6 gallons (22.71 liters) maximum of water. 2. Accessible Parking Signs: a. Sign graphics and lettering shall be minimum required by agency having jurisdiction. b. Sign shall have rounded corners. c. Sign shall meet current HEW and ANSI A117.1 accessibility codes. d. Letters shall be Helvetica Medium with 1/4 inch (6 mm) stroke. 3. Posts: a. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Nominal 2 inch (50 mm) outside diameter by 7 feet (2.15 m) high with wall thickness equivalent to Schedule 40 with satin-brushed natural finish for aluminum or factory two-part epoxy paint for steel. 2) 2 inch (50 mm) square 14 ga Quik-Punch or Telespar by Allied Tube & Conduit, Harvey, IL www.alliedtube.com. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 4. Mounting Sleeves: Nominal 2-1/4 inch 56 mm outside diameter pipe, or 2-1/4 inch (57 mm) square 12 ga Quik-Punch, 30 inches (762 mm) long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Permanently Mounted: 1. Locate as shown on Site Plan. 2. Install signs square and plumb. 3. Post Foundations: a. Mix concrete components thoroughly, place in post foundation holes 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter by 36 inches (900 mm) deep, and set mounting sleeves. Sleeves shall extend 2 inches (50 mm) maximum above top of finish concrete elevation. 1) At mow strips, set top of post foundation below grade sufficient to allow for placing of mow strip. 2) Where posts are installed before installation of slabs, measure post foundation depth from top of slab. Extend bottom of slab footing sufficient to allow specified amount of concrete around post.

Traffic Signage

-1-

10 1453

Project # 503-6925-11010101

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 3) Where posts are installed after installation of slabs, core slab 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter minimum to accommodate post foundation. Install post in mounting sleeve so bottom of post is 6 inches (150 mm) from top of sleeve. Rivet post to mounting sleeve or bolt using tamper-proof bolts.

08.29.11

END OF SECTION

Traffic Signage

-2-

10 1453

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 1495 MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Owner-furnished interior signs. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish designated interior signs. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Four Approved Standard Interior Signs. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Visual Identity Office: a. Contact Information: 1) 50 E. North Temple St. Rm. 2350, Salt Lake City, UT 84150-3232. 2) Phone: 1-801-240-1302. 3) Fax: 1-801-240-5997. 4) vidoffice@ldschurch.org. 2. Room Signs: Molded clear acrylic sub-surface graphics sign with set-screw to attach to included mounting bracket. a. Provide tactile / braille features in signage. 3. Cabinet Door Signs: Flat clear acrylic sub-surface graphics sign with mounting adhesive in position. 4. Color: a. Background: Blue. b. Lettering: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Install interior signs square and plumb: 1. Room Signs: a. Install bracket using two screws. Use proper anchor for substrate. b. Attach sign to bracket using set-screw. c. Mount signs as described in Contract Drawings. 2. Cabinet Signs: a. Remove adhesive protective layer. b. Position sign correctly and apply to door. c. Roll sign to secure to door, taking care not to damage sign. d. Mount signs as described in Contract Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Miscellaneous Interior Signage

-1-

10 1495

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 2113 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install metal toilet compartments as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Blocking in wood framing for compartment installation and door bumper. 2. Section 09 2216: Blocking in non-load-bearing metal framing for compartment installation and door bumper. 3. Section 10 2813: Commercial Toilet Accessories.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A167-99(2009), Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. ASTM B86-09b, Standard Specification for Zinc and Zinc-Aluminum (ZA) Alloy Foundry and Die Castings.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Color selection. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b) Color selection.

B.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store and handle in compliance with Manufacturers instructions and recommendations.

B.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturers standard warranty. -110 2113

Metal Toilet Compartments

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Accurate Partitions Inc, Lyons, IL www.accuratepartitions.com. 2. AMPCO Products Inc, Miami, FL www.ampco.com. 3. Flush-Metal Partition Corp, Maspeth, NY www.flushmetal.com. 4. Global Steel Products Corp, Eastanollee, GA www.globalpartitions.com. 5. Hadrian Inc, Mentor, OH www.hadrian-inc.com. 6. Knickerbocker Partitions Corp, Freeport, NY www.knickerbockerpartition.com. 7. Metpar, Westbury, NY www.metpar.com. 8. Equal as Approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

2.2

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Toilet And Miscellaneous Partitions: 1. Floor-mounted, overhead-braced. 2. Panels: a. Galvanized bonderized steel sheets (minimum 0.00015 inch (0.004 mm) zinc coating). b. Edges bound interlocked with drawn molding welded on corners. c. Corners welded and ground smooth. d. Sound deadening honeycomb core. e. Provide wood blocking on all panels that have grab bars. f. Gauge: 1) Doors: 22 ga (0.08 mm) minimum. 2) Panels: 22 ga (one mm) minimum. 3) Pilasters: 20 ga (one mm) minimum. 4) Screens: 20 ga (one mm) minimum. 3. Posts: a. 20 ga (one mm) minimum of same construction and finish as panels. b. One per stall. 4. Headrails: a. Aluminum. b. 20 ga (one mm) minimum of same construction and finish as panels. c. Anti-grip design. d. One per stall. 5. Plinths: a. Type 304 stainless steel, Number 4 finish. b. 3 inch (76 mm) minimum high, secured with concealed clips. 6. Anchorages and fasteners: a. Concealed: Non-corrosive, protective finish. b. Tamper resistant screws. 7. Hardware: a. Each door: 1) Gravity type hinges with double handed, nylon bottom cam, adjustable for partial door closing position, bottom hinge finished flush with door bottom. 2) Sliding or concealed door bolt with emergency access. 3) Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper. 4) Coat hook / door bumper. b. Finish: Chrome plated. c. Meet requirements of ASTM B86, Alloy AG 40A. Urinal Partition: 1. Basic construction same as panels above, floor mounted. 2. Width to be 16 inches (400 mm) minimum.

B.

Metal Toilet Compartments

-2-

10 2113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.3 FINISHES A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Finish And Color: 1. Powder-coated paint finish. 2. Class One Color Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200. Almond 920 Almond 466PC Porcelain Almond 2103 25 Oyster White Almond 603 Almond 1111 Almond 300 White 980 White White 949PC White 2129 63 Off White 504 Linen White White 149

a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Accurate: Ampco: Global: Flush-Metal: Hadrian: Knickerbocker: Metpar:

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Field verify dimensions. 2. Verify that necessary blocking has been installed in framed walls for partition installation and for place where coat hook / door bumper will strike wall.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Install pilasters rigid, plumb, and level. Anchor pilaster to floor with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum threaded studs in expansion shields embedded 2 inches (50 mm) into concrete slab below setting bed. Secure panels to walls with two stirrup brackets minimum attached near top and bottom of each panel. Use fasteners of length to provide one inch (25 mm) embedment into blocking or masonry. Secure overhead brace to face sheets with two fasteners minimum per face. Set door tops parallel with brace. Set door bottom 12 inches (300 mm) above floor. Plinth to be level with and snug to floor.

B.

C.

D.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Replace damaged or severely scratched materials with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.4

ADJUSTING A. B. Lubricate hardware as recommended by Manufacturer. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return to nearly closed position.

Metal Toilet Compartments

-3-

10 2113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Perform final adjustments to pilaster leveling devices, door hardware, and other operating parts of partition assembly just before Substantial Completion.

08.29.11

3.5

CLEANING A. Remove protective masking. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings, and accessories. Touch-up minor scratches and other finish imperfections using materials and methods recommended by Manufacturer.

B.

END OF SECTION

Metal Toilet Compartments

-4-

10 2113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 10 2233 ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Coordination, sequencing, and scheduling of Owner-Furnished partition installation as described in the contract documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will furnish and install partitions. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications. 3. Section 06 1100: Headers and framing required to receive accordion folding partitions. 4. Section 06 4512: Folding partition hardwood jambs and trim. 5. Section 09 9324: Finishing folding partition hardwood jambs and trim.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. b. ASTM E33609, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Attenuation between Rooms in Buildings.' c. ASTM E413-04, 'Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.'

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the efforts of the various trades affected by the Work of this Section. 2. Coordinate completion of folding partition headers. a. Assure accurate installation of header. 3. Coordinate completions of folding partition hardwood jambs and trim. 4. Coordinate completion of finishing of folding partition hardwood jambs and trim. 5. Coordinate completion of folding partition installation with sound system testing so acoustic testing of folding partitions may be performed at same time. Sequencing: 1. Install partitions after the following as been completed: a. Folding partition headers and adjacent walls and ceilings are finished and painted. b. Hardwood jambs and trim installed and finished. c. Carpet flooring has been installed. d. If athletic wood flooring is included on Project, flooring has been installed and properly cured. Scheduling: 1. Notify Manufacturer when partition headers are installed and ready for field measurement. a. Receipt of Notification shall be 8 weeks minimum before start of installation of partitions. 2. Notify Manufacturer two weeks minimum before scheduled start of installation of partitions. -110 2233

B.

C.

Accordion Folding Partitions

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Installation of partitions should be completed within 14 days of commencement.

08.29.11

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b. Color and style selections. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Show attachment to framing and header and interface with adjacent Work. b. Show height from finished floor to bottom side of header. c. Show installation details and layout. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instruction: a. Manufacturers installation details. 2. Manufacturer Reports: a. Provide letter certifying that installation is complete and ready for acoustic testing. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Manufacturer's maintenance instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranty / Certificate stating that installed materials comply with specification. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature. b) Color selections. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Tools: a. Furnish following items if requested by Owners Representative before Final Closeout Review: 1) One maintenance and repair kit.

B.

C.

D.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Sound rated partitions shall have the laboratory sound rating indicated, when tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E90. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Installation shall be performed by Manufacturer trained or authorized personnel according to Manufacturers installation instructions.

B.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: Requirements of Section 01 6600 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. General: a. Delivery is preferred to coincide with partition installation. 2. Contractors Responsibility: a. Supervise unloading and handling. 3. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: -210 2233

Accordion Folding Partitions

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b. c. d. B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Deliver in Manufacturers original, unopened package(s). Handling and unloading. Delivery shall be no more than 14 days before start of installation of partitions. Replace damaged materials at no cost to Owner.

Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Contractors Responsibility: a. Provide secure location protected from the weather and other trades. 2. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Store boxes flat no more than four high.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's covering installation and complete folding partition assembly. a. Warranty covers defects in manufacture and installation of folding partitions, which will not allow them to function for their intended use, for a period of 5 years. b. Warranty covers attachment of internal acoustical barrier for life of partitions. c. Warranty covers adjustment and operation of lead posts for 10 years. d. Provide warranty service within 10 days of receiving request and at no additional cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category One VMR Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Cornell Iron Works Inc, Mountaintop, PA www.cornelliron.com. a. Acoustic Barrier Partition: TranZform Sound. b. Sight Barrier Partition: TranZform Space. 2. Won-Door, Salt Lake City, UT www.wondoor.com. a. Acoustic Barrier Partition: Durasound. b. Sight Barrier Partition: DuraFlex. Description: 1. Operation: a. All units shall be top supported without the use of any floor tracks or single point lock sockets. b. Smooth glide manual push/pull operation is accomplished with ease and minimal force. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Total folding partition assembly shall be repairable at installation location without removal to repair shop or factory. b. Completed acoustic folding partition assembly shall have NIC rating of 30 in Chapel and Cultural Center and 24 in other areas when tested in accordance with ASTM E336 and calculated in accordance with ASTM E413 and when installed on header configuration and surrounding construction shown on Contract Documents. c. Color And Pattern Quality Standards to be selected from the following options: 1) Cornell: Vanilla Cream or Driftwood. 2) WonDoor: White ML-885 or Sandalwood PN-163. Materials: 1. Acoustic Partitions: a. Rollers shall be one inch (25 mm) diameter minimum with double steel race open ball bearings and nylon tires. -310 2233

B.

C.

D.

Accordion Folding Partitions

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3. E.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake b. Panels shall be 24 ga (0.64 mm) steel panels, vinyl-clad exposed side and painted or vinylclad reverse side. c. Provide stabilizer bar and horizontally adjustable lead posts for units greater than 14 feet (4.2 meter) tall partitions: 1) Concealed, internally mounted diagonal support brace that is track supported and connected to the lead post for reinforced vertical alignment during latching and operation. 2) Requires 14 inch (355 mm) wide header. d. Panel assembly shall have inner surface continuously covered with acoustical barrier permanently attached to panels. e. Weight: 5 lbs per sq ft maximum of partition surface area. f. Stacking Depth: 1-3/4 inches (45 mm) maximum per lineal foot of full extended partition, not including jamb and lead post. Sight Barrier Partitions: a. Rollers shall be one inch (25 mm) diameter minimum with double steel race open ball bearings and nylon tires. b. Panels shall be 24 ga (0.64 mm) thick steel panels, vinyl clad both sides. Manufacturer's standard partition tie-backs.

08.29.11

Fabrication: 1. Fabricate partitions according to actual field measurements of fully prepared, finished openings. a. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturer is responsible for field measurements and their accuracy.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers Folding Partition Headers: 1. Stagger joints in plywood. 2. Glue plywood layers together with continuous bead 2 inches (50 mm) in from each edge and every 4 inches (100 mm) on center between. In addition, Screw layers together with 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) screws one inch (25 mm) in from each edge and 12 inches (300 mm) on center for length of header. 3. Flexible Acoustic Barrier: a. Attach continuous flexible acoustic barrier to structural plywood header by nailing through factory-applied tackstrip so no voids or openings exist. b. Drape material 2 inches (50 mm) minimum onto floating plywood header. c. Overlap end joints 4 inches (100 mm) minimum and seal with tape.

2.3

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Sound Transmission Requirements: a. Accordion-type folding products tested for laboratory sound transmission loss performance according to ASTM E90, determined by ASTM E413 and rated for an STC as follows: 1) Sound transmission class (STC) shall be STC 45 minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Openings: 1) Examine openings for adequacy in allowing successful installation and operation. 2) Verify openings are prepared to specified dimensions and are plumb and level. -410 2233

Accordion Folding Partitions

Project # 503-6925-11010101

b. c.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 3) Verify headers are level with required tolerances over entire length of the opening. 4) Verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings. Notify Architect in writing of inadequate conditions. 1) Do not install partitions until conditions have been corrected. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate.

08.29.11

3.2

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Contractors Responsibility: a. Headers shall be leveled with the finished floor to within +/- 1/4 inch (+/- 6 mm) tolerance over the entire length of the opening. 2. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Field measurement of door openings.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Install partitions in accordance with Manufacturers printed instruction. a. Install so track is aligned, level, etc, to eliminate catching or binding of rollers. b. Install tie-backs at all acoustic partitions. Adjust as necessary to keep partition in stacked position.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Sound / Acoustic testing: a. If partitions do not meet specified NIC requirements or if partitions are not ready for testing as a result of partition Manufacturers non performance, make necessary corrections and be responsible for additional fees and expenses required for subsequent testing by Architect's Sound / Acoustic Consultant. 2. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5

ADJUSTING A. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: 1. Following completion of installation, test and adjust partitions for ease of operation.

3.6

CLEANING A. General: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Clean any soiling of partitions as recommended by Manufacturer or any surrounding areas caused by installation of partitions. Building Damage: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Installer responsible for repair of all damaged surfaces to their original condition from partition installation. Waste Management: 1. Contractors Responsibility: -510 2233

B.

C.

Accordion Folding Partitions

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

a. Provide Dumpster as required in Section 01 7400. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times. b. Disposal of rubbish, debris, and packaging materials to Contractor provided Dumpster.

3.7

PROTECTION A. General: 1. Contractors Responsibility: a. Upon completion of partition installation, protect partitions from damage and replace or repair subsequent damage at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION

Accordion Folding Partitions

-6-

10 2233

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 2813 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Selected accessories for Rest Rooms, Mother's Room, and Dressing Areas. 2. Custodial Room accessories. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Soap dispensers, paper towel dispensers, and toilet tissue dispensers furnished and installed by FM Group. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking. 3. Section 06 2001: Installation.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule showing items used, location where installed, and proper attaching devices for substrate. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets.

B.

1.3

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty against rusting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer List: a. A & J Washroom Accessories, New Windsor, NY www.ajwashroom.com. b. American Accessories Inc (AAI), Denison, TX www.aaiusaonline.com. c. American Specialties Inc (ASI), Yonkers, NY www.americanspecialties.com. d. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc, North Hollywood, CA www.bobrick.com e. Bradley Corp, Menomonee Falls, WI www.bradleycorp.com. f. General Accessory Manufacturing Co (GAMCO), Durant, OK www.gamcousa.com. Materials: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. -110 2813

B.

Commercial Toilet Accessories

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

b.

Rest Rooms: 1) Sanitary Napkin Disposal Container: A&J AAI ASI Bobrick Bradley GAMCO U590 NM-10 0852 B-270 4781-15 ND-1 2) Single Robe Hook with Exposed Fasteners: A&J AAI ASI Bobrick Bradley GAMCO UX110B OR-B5153 7340B B-671 9114 5153B 3) Mirrors: Glass with stainless steel channel frame with No. 4 Satin finish. A&J AAI ASI Bobrick Bradley GAMCO U711 CA Series 0620 B-165 700 Series C Series 4) Grab Bars: a) Concealed mount, 18 ga (1.27 mm), type 304 stainless steel, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter, and peened (non-slip) finish in configuration shown on Drawings. 5) Shelf: 18 ga (1.27 mm), stainless steel with No. 4 Satin finish, 6 inches (150 mm) wide. A&J AAI ASI Bobrick Bradley GAMCO U775 WV-6 0692 B-296 756 S-6 Custodial Rooms: 1) Utility Shelf: Size as shown on Drawings. A&J AAI ASI Bobrick Bradley GAMCO UJ13 MN Series 1300 Series B-224 Series 9933 Series US Series

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. Install using mounting devices proper for base structure. Where possible, mount like items in adjoining compartments back-to-back on same partition.

END OF SECTION

Commercial Toilet Accessories

-2-

10 2813

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 2814 BABY-CHANGING STATION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Coordination and sequencing of Owner-Furnished baby-changing station as described in the contract documents. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Baby-changing station. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish baby-changing station. PART 2 PRODUCTS of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's representatives. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking.

B.

C.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the efforts of the various trades affected by the Work of this Section. 2. Coordinate completions of blocking in walls. Sequencing: 1. Install baby-changing stations after the following as been completed: a. Adjacent walls and ceilings are finished and painted.

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Printed installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Bonds: 1) $10,000,000 minimum product liability insurance policy. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets.

B.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's standard 5-year warranty.

Baby-Changing Station

-1-

10 2814

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories. 1. Koala, Denver, CO www.koalabear.com. Baby Changing Station: 1. Molded high impact polyethylene with integral straps for securing baby. 2. Surface mounted.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify that solid blocking has been installed where changing station is to be installed. 2. Do not install unit by any other means other than screws or lag bolts into solid blocking.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with Manufacturer's submitted, written instructions for screws or lag bolts into solid substrate. Install using mounting devices proper for base structure.

END OF SECTION

Baby-Changing Station

-2-

10 2814

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Wall hung extinguishers and brackets. 2. Extinguishers with cabinets. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Blocking in wood-framed walls. 2. Section 06 2001: Installation. 3. Section 09 2216: Blocking in metal-framed walls.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets for cabinets and extinguishers. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Inspecting Reports of Drilled-In Mechanical Anchors / Adhesive Anchors / Screw Anchors.

B.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Fire extinguishers shall be inspected and have annual inspection tag attached before Substantial Completion.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's standard, written warranty on fire extinguisher.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Fire Extinguishers: a. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. -110 4400

Fire Protection Specialties

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1) 2) 3) 4)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

Amerex Corp, Trussville, AL www.amerex-fire.com. Ansul Incorporated, Marinette, WI www.ansul.com. Buckeye Fire Equipment, Kings Mountain, NC www.buckeyef.com. Extinguishers private-labeled by manufacturers approved above are approved, with appropriate documentation. Cabinets And Brackets: a. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) J L Industries, Bloomington, MN www.jlindustries.com. 2) Larsen's Manufacturing Co, Minneapolis, MN www.larsensmfg.com. 3) Modern Metal Products / Technico, Owatonna, MN www.modern-metal.com. 4) National Fire Equipment Ltd, Scarborough, ON www.nationalfire.com. 5) Potter-Roemer, Cerritos, CA www.potterroemer.com. 6) Samson Products Inc, City of Commerce, CA www.samsonproducts.com. 7) Seton Inc, Richmond Hill, ON (905) 764-1122. 8) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

B.

Acceptable Distributors: 1. W.W. Grainger, Inc., Lake Forest, IL www.grainger.com. 2. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Ten pound dry chemical ABC stored pressurized type equipped with pressure gauge and which does not need recharging except after use. 2. Instructions for repairs, maintenance, and recharging shall be attached. 3. Unit shall be tested and approved by UL and have minimum 4A:60-B:C UL rating. UL rating shall appear on extinguisher labels and be attached to and a part of fire extinguisher units. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. Two-piece, semi-recessed or flush type depending on wall thickness, and have white baked enameled steel tubs with white baked enamel return trim and doors, clear acrylic glazing, Safe-TLock, and cylinder locks. 2. Supply each cabinet with one specified fire extinguisher. 3. Design Standard: Ambassador 1017 G10 by J L Industries. Wall-Mounted Brackets: 1. Design Standard: No. 846 by Larsens.

C.

D.

E.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Securely mount cabinets and hangers plumb with wall surfaces. 2. Trim for cabinets shall be neat in appearance.

END OF SECTION

Fire Protection Specialties

-2-

10 4400

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 5713 HAT AND COAT RACKS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Wall-mounted coat racks and hangers. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Blocking. 2. Section 06 2001: Installation. 3. Section 06 2001: Hook strips and hooks.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a. EMCO Specialty Products Inc, Kansas City, KS www.emcospi.com. b. Magnuson Group, Burr Ridge, IL www.magnusongroup.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Materials: 1. Coat Racks: a. Furnish one hanger for each 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) of rack. b. Design Standards: 1) Coat Rooms: EMCO System R1 in Satin. 2) Hangers / Receptacles: EMCO No. 17 ball top hangers and model C receptacles.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Hat And Coat Racks

-1-

10 5713

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 7430 ALUMINUM STEEPLE

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install steeple as described in Contract Documents, including application of sealants. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0503: Quality of metal primer. 2. Section 05 0523: Quality of anchor rods. 3. Section 05 1200: Secondary underlayment and square tube pipe boot at Tower Base. 4. Section 05 1223: Quality of metal support angles. 5. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants. 6. Section 26 4100: Lightning protection system from steeple to ground level.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A36 / A36M-08, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. If required by local authority, shop drawings shall be stamped by engineer registered in state in which Project is located.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Protect components during shipment by means of crates or padding so they arrive at project undamaged. Unload and inspect components for imperfections or for damage incurred during shipping and transit procedures. Replace damaged components at no additional cost to Owner. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Maintain protection during storage on site before installation.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Fabricators. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Campbellsville Industries Inc, Campbellsville, KY www.cvilleindustries.com. b. Munns Manufacturing, Tremonton, UT www.munnsmfg.com. Performance: -110 7430

B.

Aluminum Steeple

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Design Criteria: a. Design and construct steeple to withstand wind force up to 100 mph (161 kph), and built in accordance with UBC Zone 3, NBC Zone 4, IBC Seismic Design Category D seismic requirements minimum unless local code requires greater.

C.

Materials: 1. Base: Structural steel angles engineered and sized for steeple size and meeting requirements of ASTM A36. 2. Steeple: a. Framing: Aluminum extrusions alloy 6061-T6. b. Exterior Covering: 1) Aluminum Cladding: 0.032 inch (0.813 mm) thick minimum, alloy 3003-H14 minimum. c. Louvers: 1) Formed from 0.032 inch (0.813 mm) thick aluminum skin, weatherproof type. 2) Aluminum insect screen backing, 18x18 mesh, held taut with aluminum strapping. 3) Provide water pan at base of louver with proper weepage. 4) Provide formed supports at back of louver blades for widths exceeding 36 inches (900 mm). d. Finial: Formed aluminum of specified size and tapered to point, with spun aluminum ball. e. Lightning Protection: Provide clamp on structural member at bottom of tower or pigtail for connection of lightning protection cable provided under Section 26 4100. Fabrication: 1. Do not use wood or wood products in fabrication of steeple. 2. Base: a. Paint steel elements with two heavy coats of metal primer. b. Isolate aluminum framing in contact with steel with material compatible with both aluminum and steel to prevent electrolysis. c. Secure structural aluminum framing to steel base with appropriate size stainless steel bolts, with lock nuts and washers. 3. Steeple: a. Framing: Fasten aluminum framing together with cold driven rivets, alloy 6061-T6, not loaded in tension and with one inch minimum spacing. b. Exterior Covering: Use lock seams and conceal exterior fasteners as much as possible. c. Cornices: 1) Form true to dimensions with vertical joints kept to a minimum. 2) Reinforced interior cornice profiles to resist wind loading during transit. d. Finial: Formed aluminum of specified size and tapered to point, with spun aluminum ball. e. Lightning Protection: Isolate dissimilar materials or provide components of compatible materials. Finish: 1. Polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVF2) Resin-base finish (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) for coil coating components containing 70 percent minimum PVF2 in resin portion of formula. Thermo-cured two coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and top coat factory applied over properly pre-treated metal. Apply by roll coat method and oven bake. 2. Dip spun or fabricated shapes in caustic etch, coat with etching primer, and finish with exterior vinyl finish. 3. Finish shall be of such quality that shearing or forming encountered during fabrication will not separate finish from aluminum. 4. Color: White

D.

E.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques:

Aluminum Steeple

-2-

10 7430

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2. 3. 4. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Install in accordance with Steeple Manufacturer's handling and erection directions. Secure steel base to roof framing as described in Contract Documents. Isolate dissimilar metals. Caulk seams and bolted connections with specified sealant, applied to clean and dry surfaces.

08.29.11

Interface With Other Work: 1. Install after installation of secondary underlayment, square tube pipe boot, and after inspection to confirm that underlayment is weather tight. 2. If underlayment has been exposed for more than 60 days, apply additional layer of secondary underlayment specified in Section 05 1200.

3.2

CLEANING A. Clean fabrications of foreign material using cleaning methods recommended in writing by Steeple Fabricator.

3.3

PROTECTION A. Protect steeple after installation, as recommended by Steeple Fabricator, until completion of Project.

END OF SECTION

Aluminum Steeple

-3-

10 7430

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 7431 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED STEEPLE

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install steeple, including design and detail of structural connections necessary to attach steeple to building, as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0503: Quality of metal primer. 2. Section 05 0523: Quality of anchor rods. 3. Section 05 1223: Quality of metal support angles. 4. Section 07 3113: Secondary underlayment and square tube pipe boot at Tower Base (asphalt shingles). 5. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants. 6. Section 26 4100: Lightning protection system from steeple to ground level.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D570-98(2010)e1, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics ' b. ASTM D635-10, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.' c. ASTM D790-10, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.' d. ASTM D2583-07, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.' e. ASTM D3841-97(2008)e1, Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Plastic Panels.' f. ASTM E8410, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.' 2. Military Specifications and Standards: a. MIL-R-7575C, Resin, Polyester, Low-Pressure Laminating (April 28, 1977). (Inactive for new design and is no longer used, except for replacement purposes dated July 31, 1996). b. MIL-R-21607E, Resins, Polyester, Low Pressure Lamination, Fire-Retardant. (May 25, 1990).

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. As required for proper handling and erection. b. Show design load parameters, dimensions, adjacent construction, materials, thicknesses, core material thicknesses, fabrication details, required clearances, field jointing, tolerances, colors, finishes, method of support, integration of components, and anchorages. c. Stamped by licensed structural engineer. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Erection instructions and drawings. -110 7431

B.

Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Steeple

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include final, executed copy of warranty.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Fiberglass fabrications shall be Class A fire rated and so labeled. Qualifications. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. Manufacturing Company specializing in architectural fiberglass and plastic fabrication with ten years experience.

B.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Protect components during shipment by means of crates or padding so they arrive at project undamaged. 2. Unload and inspect components for imperfections or for damage incurred during shipping and transit procedures. 3. Replace damaged components at no additional cost to Owner. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Maintain protection during storage on site before installation.

B.

1.6

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide manufacturer's written 20 year guarantee for material, workmanship, and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturer: 1. Category Four Approved Fabricator. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Unlimited Design, Salt Lake City, UT www.unlimitedesign.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Design fabrication and fastening systems to withstand 100 mph (1.6 kph), Exposure C, winds and Seismic Zone Three requirements, unless local code and conditions require greater. b. Design items with sufficient strength for handling stresses. c. Meet requirements of MIL-R-21607E, Grade A. d. Finished laminate shall be as free as commercially practical from defects such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, air bubbles, blisters, pinholes, and delamination. e. Combined Laminate and Gelcoat shall meet requirements of: 1) Self-extinguishing Tests: (on unfilled 25 percent glass laminates) a) ASTM D635, Non-Burning. b) HLT-15 Rating (Intermittent Flame Test): 100. 2) ASTM E84: a) Unfilled: 45. -210 7431

B.

Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Steeple

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

b) 3 percent Antimony Oxide (Class II): 15. c) 5 percent Antimony Oxide (Class I): 15. 3) Up to 3 percent by weight of thixotropic agent may be added to resin for viscosity control. f. Structural Requirements: 1) Provide steel framing and design connections necessary to fasten fiberglass spire to building. 2) Apply lateral and vertical structural loads only at points shown on Structural Drawings. Capacities: a. Laminate shall have Barcol hardness of 45 to 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2583 on Gel-coated surface and on inner surface. b. Cured and sealed material shall have water absorption of not greater than one-tenth of one percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D570. c. Cured material shall have minimum tensile strength as indicated below: 1) 3/16 inch: 9,000 psi (5 mm: 62 MPa). 2) 1/4 inch: 12,000 psi (6 mm: 82.7 MPa). 3) 3/8 inch: 15,000 psi (10 mm: 103.4 MPa). d. Cured material shall have minimum flexural strength as indicated below when tested in accordance with ASTM D790. 1) 3/16 inch: 16,000 psi (5 mm: 110.3 MPa). 2) 1/4 inch: 19,000 psi (6 mm: 131 MPa). 3) 3/8 inch: 22,000 psi (10 mm: 151.7 MPa). e. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity (Tangent) when tested in accordance with ASTM D790. 1) 3/16 inch: 700,000 ( 5 mm: 700,000). 2) 1/4 inch: 800,000 ( 6 mm: 800,000). 3) 3/8 inch: 1,000,000 (10 mm: 1,000,000).

C.

Materials: 1. Resins: a. Base resin for laminate shall be Brominated or Chlorinated polyester formulated by resin manufacturer and shall not be modified by Fabricator except as specified. Physical Characteristics of Laminate Resin: 1) Viscosity, Gardner-Holt at 77 deg F (25 deg C): 4.0 + 0.1 stokes. 2) Viscosity, Brookfield 77 deg F (25 deg C): 6 poises. 3) Specific Gravity at 77 deg F (25 deg C): 1.30. 4) Pounds per Gallon (Approx): 10.8. 5) Acid Number, base resin: Less than 30. b. Base resin for gelcoat shall be one-to-one isophthalic polyester resin formulated by resin manufacturer and shall not be modified by Fabricator except as specified. Gelcoat resin shall provide optimum weathering properties and shall meet requirements of MIL-R-21607E, Grade 1. 2. Laminate: a. Laminate shall consist of gel-coated surface, and successive layers of mat and woven cloth and roving to build laminate thickness of 3/16 inch (5 mm) minimum. Minimum thickness of laminate at point of connection to tower shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Where separate layers such as mat are used, lap layers 4 inches (100 mm) minimum. Stagger laps as much as possible. c. Non-mold surface shall be smooth with no glass exposed. d. Connecting flange shall be integral part of complete laminate and not secondarily bonded. e. Laminate shall consist of outer weather resistant surface and interior layer. 1) Outer surface (Gel-Coat) shall be free of cracks and crazing with smooth finish. 2) Provide between 0.010 and 0.020 inch (0.3 mm and 0.5 mm) of reinforced resin rich surface. This surface shall be reinforced with glass surfacing mat or synthetic fibers (dynel). 3. Gel-Coat: a. Gel-Coat, including veil, shall be 15 mils (0.381 mm) maximum. b. Base resin used in manufacture of gel-coat shall meet or exceed MIL-R-21607E Grade A. c. Finish gel-coat shall be light stabilized (1.2 percent Tinuvin 'P' or equal based on weight of resin) for optimum ultraviolet resistance. 4. Reinforcement: -310 7431

Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Steeple

Project # 503-6925-11010101

5. D.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake a. Surfacing veil and gel-coat shall be 10 mils (0.254 mm) thick minimum in uniform thicknesses. b. Chopper strand mat (no chopper gun allowed) shall be Type E glass, 2 oz (56.7 grams) per sq ft (0.093 sq m) with silane finish and styrene soluble binder. c. Woven roving (18 oz 60 end maximum) shall be Type E glass with R methacrylate chromic chloride or silane type finish. d. Do not use successive layers of roving-on-roving. First layer against veil shall not be roving. e. Minimum glass content shall be 55 percent to 65 percent by weight. Lightning Rod And Cable: UL approved for intended use.

08.29.11

Finish: 1. Color: White. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate fiberglass panels in accordance with ASTM D3841, except where more stringent requirements are specified in this Section. 2. Exposed surfaces shall be 15 mils (0.381 mm) minimum gel-coat thickness. 3. Fabricate steeple with specified core material in thickness determined by Fabricator's engineering to meet wind load requirements and to insure oil canning does not occur. 4. Seal surfaces on reverse side of finished surfaces with resin or gel-coat material. 5. Provide stiffener legs, blind fasteners, and foam insulation coat.

E.

2.2

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Owner reserves right to inspect Fabricator's facilities before and after awarding of Contract. Owner will have right to reject products because of workmanship, dimensional deviations, and quality below that specified at any time. 2. Be fully cured at time of shipping. 3. Contain no visual cracks, resin voids, foreign inclusions, or surface wrinkles that would impair serviceability or aesthetics, as determined by Owner. 4. Contain no color variations or shadowing of selected color resulting from pigmentation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify substrates and structural framing are ready to receive work and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings. 2. Before steeple placement, have support framing inspected by licensed structural engineer acceptable to Owner to insure supporting elements are properly installed. Report problems with installation of supporting elements to Owner in writing before installing steeple.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Install steeple in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and erection drawings. 2. Seal joints between steeple and other substrates with sealants recommended by Steeple Fabricator. Interface With Other Work: 1. Install after installation of secondary underlayment, square tube pipe boot, and after inspection to confirm that underlayment is weather tight.

B.

Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Steeple

-4-

10 7431

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake If underlayment has been exposed for more than 60 days, apply additional layer of secondary underlayment specified in Section 07 3113 (Asphalt Shingles).

08.29.11

C.

Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from vertical: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 20 feet (6.096 m). 2. Maximum variation in position: Centered on ridge within 1/8 inch (3 mm), within 1/2 inch (13 mm) along ridge.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Manufacturer Service: a. Fiberglass Manufacturer shall: 1) Inspect beginning placement of various fiberglass sections. 2) Inspect intermittent placement fiberglass elements. 3) Inspect at completion of work of this Section. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Remove installed steeple that has wrinkled or oil canning appearance, repair or replace and reinstall at no additional cost to Owner.

B.

3.4

CLEANING A. Clean fabrications of foreign material using cleaning methods recommended in writing by Steeple Fabricator.

3.5

PROTECTION A. Protect steeple after installation, as recommended by Steeple Fabricator, until completion of Project.

END OF SECTION

Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Steeple

-5-

10 7431

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 10 7516 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Flagpole, baseplate, and foundation sleeve. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3053: Concrete foundation and installation of base plate and foundation sleeve. 2. Section 06 2001: Installation of flagpole.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: Printed installation instructions and details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Abar Industries, Winnepeg, MB (800) 665-7057. b. American Flagpole, Abingdon, VA www.americanflagpole.com. c. Barisco, Division of Flags Unlimited Inc, Barrie, ON (705) 564-2955. d. Colonial Flag & Specialty, Sandy, UT www.zflags.com. e. Concord Industries, Addison, TX www.flagpoles.com. f. Eder Flag Manufacturing Co Inc, Oak Creek, WI www.ederflag.com. g. EMC, Milwaukee, WI www.olympus-flag,com. h. Ewing Flagpole, Buffalo, NY www.ewingflagpole.com. i. Ewing Flagpole, Toronto, ON www.ewingflagpole.com. j. Flag Shop, Ottawa, ON (613) 789-5456. k. House of Flags, Littleton, CO www.ahouseofflags.com. l. John Ewing & Company Ltd, Agincourt, ON (800) 268-3524. m. Jourplex Ltee Ltd, Verdun, PQ (514) 767-8000. n. L & A Machine Works Ltd, Fredericton, NB (506) 458-1100. o. Morgan-Francis Div, Rushville, IN www.morgan-francis.com. p. Paris Playground Equipment, Inc, Paris, ON (800) 265-9935. q. Pole-LiteLtd, St Philippe, PQ (514) 659-8951. r. Pole-Tech Co Inc, East Setauket, NY www.poletech.com. s. Scythes Inc, Toronto, ON (800) 268-1737. t. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Materials 1. Flagpole: a. Cone tapered aluminum of alloy 6063-T6. b. Dimensions: 1) Wall Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum. 2) Height: 30 feet (9 meters) above ground level. 3) Butt Diameter: 5 inches (125 mm). -110 7516

B.

Ground-Set Flagpoles

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c. d.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

Finish: Natural clear anodized finish. Fittings: 1) Gold anodized aluminum flush seam ball with copper lightning terminal. Ball diameter no larger than pole butt. 2) One 9 inch (230 mm) cast metal cleat, finished to match pole, with cover. 3) One continuous halyard, 5/16 inch (8 mm) polypropylene with metal core. 4) Chrome-plated bronze swivel flag snaps for halyard. 5) Aluminum flash collar. Accessories: a. Foundation tube complete with welded base and support plate, ground spike, and centering wedges, hot-dip galvanized after construction. b. Hardwood wedges for plumbing pole.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Paint portions of pole below grade with heavy coat of bituminous paint.

END OF SECTION

Ground-Set Flagpoles

-2-

10 7516

D I V I S I O N 11: E Q U I P M E N T
11 3000 R E S I D E N T I A L E Q U I P M E N T 11 3114 SERVING AREA RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 5000 E D U C A T I O N A L A N D S C I E N T I F I C EQ U I P M E N T

11 6000 E N T E R T A I N M E N T E Q U I P M E N T

11 6500 A T H L E T I C A N D R E C R E A T I O N A L E Q U I P M E N T 11 6624 BASKETBALL EQUIPMENT OPTION ONE 11 6626 WALL PADDING 11 8000 C O L L E C T I ON A N D D I S P O S A L E Q U I P M E N T

11 9000 O T H E R E Q U I P M E N T

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 11 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 11 3114 RESIDENTIAL SERVING AREA APPLIANCES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Range, refrigerator, and microwave oven. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish specified appliances. PART 2 of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Division 26: Outlets, range cord sets, and electrical service.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature packaged for each appliance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Range: a. Approved Manufacturer: 1) General Electric. Manufactured Units: 1. Range: a. 30 inch (750 mm) free-standing conventional electric range with following features: 1) Two 8 inch (400 mm) and two 6 inch (150 mm) calrod surface heating units. 2) Automatic oven timer. 3) Drip pans. 4) Non-vented. 5) Self-cleaning. 6) Door with black glass window. 7) Backsplash. b. Color: White. 2. Refrigerator / Freezer: a. 16 cu ft (0.45 cu meters) frost free model with top freezer compartment and reversible doors. b. Color: White. 3. Microwave Oven: a. 800 watts. b. Dimensions: 12 inches (300 mm) high by 24 inches (200 mm) wide by 13 inches (325 mm) deep. c. Color: White.

B.

Residential Serving Area Appliances

-1-

11 3114

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

END OF SECTION

Residential Serving Area Appliances

-2-

11 3114

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 11 6624 BASKETBALL EQUIPMENT

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Section Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Coordination, sequencing, and scheduling of Owner-Furnished basketball equipment installation as described in the contract documents. a. Installation of Owner-Furnished Hanger brackets with bolts, nuts, and washers. b. Installation of Owner-Furnished Operating Switch. c. Furnishing and installing of electrical to winch and electrical receptacle. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Hanger brackets with bolts, nuts, and washers. 2. Operating switch. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will furnish and install pre-finished Basketball Standards. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications. 3. Section 06 1100: Installation of hanger brackets with bolts, nuts, and washers. 4. Division 26: a. Conduit, wiring, boxes, etc, to winch and operating switch. b. Furnishing and installing of receptacle. c. Installation of operating switch.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1. FIBA: International Basketball Federation (Fdration Internationale de Basketball). 2. NCAA: National Collegiate Athletic Association. 3. NFHS (NFSHA): National Federation of State High School Associations.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the efforts of the various trades affected by the Work of this Section. 2. Coordinate completion of hanger brackets with bolts, nuts, and washers. a. Assure accurate installation of hanger brackets using Owner-Furnished template. 3. Coordinate completions of operating switch. Sequencing: 1. Install basketball standards after the following as been completed: a. Hanger brackets have been installed. b. Adjacent walls and ceilings are finished c. Building power is available in building for operating switch. Scheduling: 1. Notify Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturer two (2) weeks minimum after installation of hanger brackets. a. Submit shop drawing Watermark B with bracket field dimensions with notification. -111 6624

B.

C.

Basketball Equipment

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Action Submittals: 1. Hanger Brackets: a. Hanger brackets with bolts, nuts, and washers to be installed by Section 06 1100. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Manufacturers installation instructions and template for location of hanger brackets. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Wiring diagrams. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Field dimension of brackets as indicated on Manufactures shop drawings Watermark B after installation by Section 06 1100. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Operating and maintenance instruction. 2) Parts list. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b) Color and style selection. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Touch-up paint.

B.

C.

D.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. The Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturer shall approve installer. a. Installer shall be experienced in installing basketball backstops.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: Requirements of Section 01 6600 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. General: a. Delivery of basketball standard is preferred to coincide with installation. 2. Contractors Responsibility: a. Coordinate delivery with Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturer. b. Supervise unloading and handling. When necessary, provide assistance off-loading product with transportation carrier. c. Verify items received. Note any discrepancies on Delivery Receipt before driver leaves. d. Examine for visible evidence of damage such as holes, tears, or crushed portions of cartons. Note findings on Delivery Receipt before driver leaves. e. Do not refuse any delivery because of damage. 1) Note damage on Delivery Receipt and accept shipment. 2) Notify Project Manager and Purchasing Coordinator to report findings. 3. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Delivery: 1) Deliver in Manufacturers original, unopened package(s) to project site.

Basketball Equipment

-2-

11 6624

Project # 503-6925-11010101

b.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2) Delivery shall be no more than ten (10) days before start of installation of basketball standards. Remove packaging material before installation and open all cartons. 1) Report all damage or shortages to Purchasing Coordinator. 2) Replace damaged materials and shortages.

08.29.11

B.

Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Contractors Responsibility: a. Provide secure location protected from the weather and other trades. b. Do not remove packaging material. c. Replace materials damaged due to job site neglect and damage at no cost to Owner.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's written guarantee of all labor, equipment and materials for a period of all five (5) years from the date of substantial completion of the building. Special Warranty: 1. Limited Lifetime Warranty on glass backboard. a. Warranty shall cover glass backboard against breaking during play of basketball only. b. Warranty does not cover costs required in event of user abuse or neglect. c. If backboard breaks under Warranty, then replacement part will be furnished at no charge to the Owner.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Manufacturer: 1. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. ADP Lemco Inc., West Jordan, UT www.adplemco.com. 1) Phone: 800-575-3626. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Backboard meets all NCAA and NFSHA specifications. b. Bolt On edge padding meets all NCAA, NFHS, and FIBA specifications. c. Complete installation shall meet official basketball rules of NCAA. Materials: 1. Single Pole Design (Rear Fold, Rear Braced): a. Supports, Bracing, Drop Pipes, Sheaves, Etc: 1) Frame shall be rear fold, rear brace unit of single pole design supported adequately to hold backboard in rigid position. 2) When folded, unit will be close to ceiling and will clear folding partition headers and equipment attached to them. 3) Pole Size: a) 6-5/8 inch (168 mm) diameter minimum. 4) Finish: a) Factory primed and painted. b) Color: Pre-selected by Owner. 5) Quality Standard: a) Rear Fold Frame: Series 1312 Compak-Fold by ADP Lemco. b. Electric Winch Electrical Accessories: -311 6624

B.

C.

Basketball Equipment

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c.

d.

e.

Worm gear type: a) Worm shaft shall turn in sealed, precision bearings. b) Worm and gear shall run in sealed oil bath. 2) Motor: a) 60 cycle, 115 volt, single phase with thermal overload protection. b) Motor shall be instantly-reversing, or motor controls will cause pause in operation between movements in either direction. 3) Operating Switch: a) Rocker Arm Switch: Momentary contact, three-position, spring return to center, toggle type switch equal to Pass & Seymour p/n 1251-I. 4) Limit Switch: a) Supply winch with integral pre-wired limit switches to automatically stop standard in up or down position. 5) Connection: a) Supply 48 inch (1 200 mm) long flexible cord, and NEMA L-1420P plug. 6) Quality standard: a) Model 150C by ADP Lemco. Security Strap: 1) Security strap from structural support to center post and backboard bracket and frame. 2) Security strap will provide emergency protection from failures on folding basketball units during any phase of the folding cycle. 3) Security strap is mechanically operated and requires no electric power. 4) Strap can be installed on either manually or electrically operated backboards. 5) Lock is automatically reset and cannot be accidentally set. Units with strings, latches or any other manual reset procedure will not be accepted. 6) Security strap shall consist of a 2 inch (50 mm) wide 6000 pounds (2 725 kg). break strength polypropylene strap attached to the main frame of the basketball unit and housed in a cast aluminum case attached to the superstructure. 7) Quality standard: a) Model 110 by ADP Lemco: Backboards: 1) Provide with aluminum frame. 2) Cushion edge pad. a) Meet all specifications set by the NCAA, NFHS and FIBA. b) Color: Grey. c) Quality standard: d) Model 105 by ADP Lemco. 3) 40 by 54 inch (1 015 by 1 370 mm) rectangular. 4) 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum tempered glass. 5) Quality Standard: a) Model No. 63 by ADP Lemco. Basketball Goal: 1) Standard front mount rim, and Nylon net. Rim shall bear on frame, not on backboard. Mounting bolts shall not protrude on the face side of backboard. 2) Meets all NCAA and NFHS specifications. 3) Finish: a) Goals shall be finished in bright orange enamel paint in accordance with official rules. 4) Quality standard: 5) Model 20 by ADP Lemco.

2.2

ASSESSORIES A. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: 1. Provide hanger brackets with bolts, nuts, and washers.

Basketball Equipment

-4-

11 6624

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Installation shall adhere to manufacturers printed instructions and accepted shop drawings. b. Mount electric winch exposed on standard. 1) Install so motor / winch assembly will not move on pole. c. Apply Touch-up paint as required after installation or standard is completed.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Operate standard sufficient number of times to assure correct adjustment and operation.

3.3

ADJUSTING A. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: 1. Set limit switches so standard stops in proper positions retracted and extended.

3.4

CLEANING A. Building Damage: 1. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. Installer responsible for repair of all damaged surfaces to their original condition from basketball installation. Waste Management: 1. Contractors Responsibility: a. Provide Dumpster as required in Section 01 7400. 2. Owner-Furnished Product Manufacturers Responsibility: a. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times. b. Disposal of rubbish, debris, and packaging materials to Contractor provided Dumpster.

B.

3.5

PROTECTION A. General: 1. Contractors Responsibility: a. Upon completion of basketball installation, protect from damage and replace or repair subsequent damage at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION

Basketball Equipment

-5-

11 6624

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 11 6626 WALL PADDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Safety Wainscot on walls behind basketball backstops. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish Safety Wainscot. This specification establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 06 4512: Hardwood trim.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Color selection. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Maintenance instructions. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturers product literature. b) Color selections.

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. ADP Lemco Corporation, West Jordan, UT www.adplemco.com. Manufacturer: 1. Approved Product: a. Rite-Wall Series 200 by ADP Lemco, West Jordan, UT www.adplemco.com. Description: 1. Size: 24 inches (600 mm) by 72 inches (1 800 mm) by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum thickness. 2. Color to be selected from the following options: a. Emerald '1': Forest Green. b. Emerald '2': Maroon. c. Emerald '3': Forest Green. -111 6626

B.

C.

Wall Padding

Project # 503-6925-11010101 d. e. f. g. h. i. D. Garnet '1': Maroon. Garnet '2': Maroon. Garnet '3': Maroon. Sapphire '1': Grey. Sapphire '2': Grey. Sapphire '3': Biege.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Material: 1. Safety Wainscot: a. Pads shall be 3.5 lb minimum to 4.0 lb maximum (1.6 kg minimum to 1.8 kg maximum) density foam covered with vinyl coated nylon fabric. Bond assembly to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) plywood back.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Wall Padding

-2-

11 6626

D I V I S I O N 12: F U R N I S H I N G S
12 2000 W I N D O W T R E A T M E N T S 12 2200 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 12 6000 M U L T I P L E S E A T I N G

12 9000 O T H E R F U R N I S H I N G S

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 12 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 12 2200 CURTAINS AND DRAPES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install draperies, curtains, and hardware as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute: a. NFPA / ANSI 701-2004, 'Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Flame-proofing literature. 2. Samples: a. 24 inch (600 mm) wide and 48 inch (1 200 mm) high sample including all specified elements of finished curtains, including flame retardant certification tag. Do not fabricate Project drapes until sample has been reviewed and approved by Architect. b. Submit sample with Product Data submittal. Sample will serve as standard by which to evaluate Project curtains. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Certificate of flame-proofing. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Operating and maintenance instructions. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Fabric Supplier's literature or cut sheets on fabric. b) Curtain Rod Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets. c) Color and style selection. d) Certificate of flame-proofing.

B.

C.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Material used shall be inherently flame retardant with a flame spread rating meeting code requirements when tested in accordance with ANSI / NFPA 701. 2. Attach permanent tag to each panel attesting to flame retardant quality of material used.

Curtains And Drapes

-1-

12 2200

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers / Suppliers: 1. Carole, Augusta, GA www.carolefabrics.com. 2. Charles Samulsen, New York City, NY www.csamelson.com. 3. Conso / Wright, West Warren, MI www.conso.com. 4. Coral, Div Charles Samelson, New York City, NY www.coralofchicago.com. 5. Hanes Fabric Co, Conover, NC www.hanesfabric.com. 6. InterSpec, Allenwood, NJ (800) 526-2800 or (732) 938-4114. 7. Kirsch Co, Freeport, IL www.kirsch.com. 8. Rockland Industries Inc, Baltimore, MD www.roc-lon.com. 9. Rowley Co, Gastonia, NC. www.rowleyco.com. 10. Graber Div of Springs Industries, Montgomery, PA www.graberblinds.com. Materials: 1. Fabric: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Off-White Opaque Drapery to be installed in Relief Society Room Only: a) 5th Avenue or Bourbon Street by Coral: Off-White. b) Fayette, Rosette, or Dixie by Interspec: White. 2) Casements to be installed in all other rooms as scheduled: a) Handcart by Carole: White b) Crafty or Dayton by Carole: White c) Snowbird by InterSpec: White. d) Layton by InterSpec: White. 2. Crinoline / Buckram: a. Heavy or Extra Heavy grade, 4 inches (100 mm) wide, woven permanent goods. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) BW74 by R H Rowley Co. 2) 61421 by Conso. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 3. Drapery Hooks: Stainless steel, standard 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) hook with pointed hook top. 4. Drapery Rods: a. Outside Mount: 1) Rods shall be sufficient width, window width plus 1/3, to allow drape to stack clear of window opening but no wider. This requirement may be modified as follows: a) Where Drawings detail differently. b) Where wall, cabinets, mechanical equipment, or other obstruction requires modification. c) Where symmetry of a room would indicate desirability of an exception. Fabrication: 1. Double top and bottom hems unless specifically specified otherwise. 2. Provide necessary weights at seam and side hems. 3. Fullness shall be minimum of 2-1/2 times width of space covered by drape. 4. Space pleats 4 inches (100 mm) maximum center of pleat to center of pleat. 5. Drapes shall have: a. Fabric inspected over back-lite table for flaws. b. Straight, even blind-stitched side and bottom hems. c. Seams hidden beside pleats. d. Joined seams serged and overcast with no puckering. e. 4 inch (100 mm) double bottom hems and headings. f. 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) double side hem. g. 2 inch (50 mm) overlap, total of 4 inches (100 mm) on pair. h. Stack-off of 1/3 of window width. i. Specified woven, permanent crinoline / buckram used in heading. j. Seams match up on bottom hems. -212 2200

B.

C.

Curtains And Drapes

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

6.

k. Corners of bottom hems closed with hand stitching. l. Pleats evenly spaced to size. m. Straight edge across top after pleating. n. Straight, even folds. o. Polyester thread matching fabric color for seams and hems. Panels on doors shall have: a. A rod pocket of 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) on the top and the bottom of the panel with a 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) header. b. Panel will be shirred onto a sash rod and mounted directly to the door. c. The panel will not cover the release bar on the door. It will be necessary to run the panel between the bar and the glass. d. Where the bar is built into the door, two panels (one for each glass) will be necessary. e. 2 1/2 inch (64 mm) fullness is also required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Install tracks, wall or ceiling mount, with mounting device head no larger than No. 6, to yield direct withdrawal strength of 25 lbs (11 kg) minimum. Support spacing to be as recommended in Manufacturer's literature.

B.

3.2

CLEANING A. Tracks to be free of marring, scratches, and foreign material.

END OF SECTION

Curtains And Drapes

-3-

12 2200

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I O N 21: F I R E S U P P R E S S I O N
21 1000 W A T E R - B A S E D F I R E S U P P R E S S I O N S Y S T E M S 21 1313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 21 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 21 1313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install complete wet-pipe fire sprinkler system as specified in Contract Documents. Special Requirements: 1. Include fire sprinklers in any and all combustible concealed spaces that may have been missed on the bid documents. The architect and design team have made every effort to include all areas on the drawings, but some spaces may have been missed. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Firestopping. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 8400: Quality of Firestopping. 2. Section 28 3101: Fire Detection and Alarm Annunciation Panels including connection of tamper switches and flow detectors to alarm system and furnishing and installing of low temperature switch. 3. Section 33 1119: Fire Suppression Utility Water Distribution Piping.

B.

C.

D.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Mechanical Engineers: a. ANSI / ASME B1.20.1-1983 (R2001) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). b. ANSI / ASME B16.1-2005, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.' c. ANSI / ASME B16.3-2006 30-Apr-2007 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.' d. ANSI / ASME B16.4-2006 30-Mar-2007 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250.' e. ANSI / ASME B16.5-2003 01-Dec-2003 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. American National Standards Institute / American Water Works Association: a. ANSI / AWWA C606-06, AWWA Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 3. American National Standards Institute / American Welding Society: a. ANSI / AWA B2.1 / B2.1M-2009, Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification, 5th Edition. 4. ASTM International: a. ASTM A135 / A135M-06, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.' b. ASTM A234 / A234-07, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.' c. ASTM A395 / A395M-99(2004), Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron PressureRetaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. d. ASTM A536-84(2004)e1, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.' e. ASTM A795 / A795M-08, Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. 5. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute: a. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2010 Edition. b. NFPA 24 Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances, 2010 Edition. c. NFPA 25: Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems, 2011 Edition. -121 1313

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

d.

NFPA 101: Life Safety Code, 2009 Edition.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Drawings: a. Size sprinkler system piping shall be sized by Hydraulic Calculation design method based on water supply evaluation performed at building site. b. On submittals, refer to sprinkler heads by sprinkler identification or model number published in appropriate agency listing or approval. Trade names and other abbreviated designations are not acceptable. c. Submittal Procedure: 1) After award of Contract and before purchase of equipment, submit seven sets of shop drawings with specifications and hydraulic calculations to Architect and two sets to local jurisdiction having authority for fire prevention for review. If pipe schedule method is used, submit copies of schedules in NFPA 13 used in sizing pipe. 2) After integrating Architect's and AHJ's comments into drawings, licensed certified fire protection engineer of record who designed fire protection system shall stamp, sign, and date each sheet of shop drawings and first page of specifications and calculations. 3) Submit stamped documents to Owner and to AHJ for fire prevention for final approval. 4) After final approval, submit four copies of approved stamped documents to Architect. 5) Failure of system to meet requirements of authority having jurisdiction and/or approved stamped construction documents shall be corrected at no additional cost to Owner. Closeout Submittals: 1. As-Built Drawings: a. Provide complete marked up as-built drawings showing all changes made to the approved shop drawings. As built drawings shall be submitted in electronic format also. 2. Operation And Maintenance Manual Data: a. Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7800 as follows: 1) Provide master index showing items included. 2) Provide name, address, and phone number of Architect, Architect's Fire Sprinkler Consultant, General Contractor, and Fire Protection subcontractor. 3) Provide operating instructions to include: a) General description of fire protection system. b) Step by step procedure to follow for shutting down system or putting system into operation. 4) Maintenance instructions shall include: a) List of system components used indicating manufacturer, description and model number of each item. b) Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each component installed in Project. Instructions shall include installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication instructions. c) Copy of approved shop drawings. d) Copy of required warranties. e) Copy of Material and Test Certificates for both Aboveground and Underground Equipment. Provide separate copies for Architect and Owner. 3. Inspection: a. Provide Owner with latest version of NFPA 25. Maintenance Material Submittals; 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Spare sprinkler heads in the quantity recommended by NFPA 13 selected in representative proportion to quantity used in Project and in accordance with NFPA 13 (Six spare sprinkler heads minimum). 1) Dry barrel pendent and dry barrel sidewall sprinkler heads are exempt from this requirement.

B.

C.

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

-2-

21 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

b.

Provide spare heads in cabinet with sprinkler head wrench for each type of head used. After approval of cabinet and contents, mount cabinet in convenient location in Riser Room.

D.

Posted System Diagram (Secure to wall inside Riser Room in readily accessible position): 1. Provide single, color-coded floor plan diagram showing total system. Color antifreeze pipe system elements BLUE and wet pipe system elements RED. Indicate locations of antifreeze system drains and sample test station. 2. Include following information on diagram sheet: a. Explanation of how to test an antifreeze system. b. Step by step shut down procedure. c. Step by step system drainage procedure. d. Step by step start-up procedure. e. Step by step procedure for protection of system from freezing. 3. Laminate diagram with plastic and mat or frame suitable for hanging near riser:

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Unless noted otherwise, system shall conform to: a. NFPA / ANSI 13-2010 'Light & Ordinary Hazard Occupancies.' b. NFPA / ANSI 24-2010 'Service Mains and Their Appurtenances, Private.' c. NFPA / ANSI 25-2011 Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance. d. NFPA / ANSI 101-2009 'Life Safety Code.' e. Requirements of all State and Local Codes and Ordinances pertaining to fire protection systems. f. Requirements of local water department and local authority having jurisdiction relative to fire sprinkler systems. g. Underwriter's Laboratories Publication, 'Fire Protection Equipment Directory', current edition at time of Pre-Bid Meeting. h. Comply with backflow prevention requirements and, if required, include device in hydraulic calculations. i. All other applicable rules, regulations, laws, and ordinances. Qualifications: 1. Designer: Licensed fire protection engineer or fire protection system designer certified by NICET to level three minimum who is regularly engaged in design of fire protection systems. Engineer / designer shall: a. Be responsible for overseeing preparation of shop drawings, hydraulic calculations where applicable, and system installation. b. Make complete inspection of installation. c. Provide corrected record drawings to Owner with letter of acceptance. d. Certify that installation is in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. Installer: Licensed by jurisdiction over installed fire protection systems for area of Project. Furnish verified list of similar projects installed during past five years minimum.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Croker Corp, Elmsford, NY www.croker.com. b. Dow Chemical, Midland, MI www.dow.com.

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

-3-

21 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. B.

Gruvlock by Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH www.anvilintl.com. HO Trerice Company, Oak Park, MI www.hotco.com. Kennedy Valve, Elmira, NY www.kennedyvalve.com. Milwaukee Valve Co, New Berlin, WI www.milwaukeevalve.com. Mueller Company, Decatur, IL www.muellerflo.com. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. Notifier by Honeywell, Northford, CT www.notifier.com. Potter Electric Signal Company, St. Louis, MO www.pottersignal.com. Potter-Roemer, Cerritos, CA www.potterroemer.com. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co, Mount Vernon, NY www.reliablesprinkler.com. System Sensor, St Charles, IL www.systemsensor.com. TYCO Fire & Building Products, Lansdale, PA www.tyco-fire.com. Victualic Company of America, Easton, PA or Victualic Company of Canada, Rexdale, ON www.victaulic.com. Viking Corp, Hastings, MI www.vikingcorp.com.

System Description: 1. Automatic wet-pipe fire sprinkler system starting at flange in Fire Riser Room and extending throughout all portions of building including attic areas and roof overbuild areas over Entry Lobbies and Vestibules. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Area of Application and Corresponding Design Density: 1) Serving Area and Mechanical, Electrical, and Janitorial Areas: a) Ordinary Hazard Group 1. b) Design density = 0.15 gpm per sq ft over 1500 sq ft. 2) Storage Areas: a) Ordinary Hazard Group 2. b) Design density = 0.20 gpm per sq ft over 1500 sq ft. 3) All Other Areas: a) Light Hazard. b) Design density = 0.10 gpm per sq ft over 1500 sq ft. 4) Increase remote areas by 30 percent where ceiling / roof is sloped more than 2 inches per ft. 5) Remote areas may be reduced within parameters indicated in NFPA 13 for use of quick response sprinklers throughout. Components: 1. General: Use only domestically manufactured cast iron pipe fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, and other components. a. Pipe of foreign manufacture that meets ASTM Standards is acceptable. b. Ductile iron fittings of foreign manufacture are acceptable. 2. Pipe: a. Schedule 40 Welded Steel: 1) Exterior, Above Ground: Schedule 40 hot-dip galvanized welded steel meeting requirements of ASTM A135 or ASTM A795. 2) Interior, Above Ground: Schedule 40 black welded steel meeting requirements of ASTM A135 or ASTM A795. 3) Connections: a) 2 inches And Smaller: Screwed, flanged, or roll grooved coupling system. b) 2-1/2 inches And Larger: Flanged or roll grooved coupling system. 3. Fittings: a. Usage: 1) 2 inches And Smaller: Welded, screwed, flanged, or roll grooved coupling system. For use with schedule 40 carbon steel pipe. 2) 2-1/2 inches And Larger: Welded, flanged, or roll grooved coupling system. b. Types And Quality: 1) Screwed: -421 1313

C.

D.

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2) 3)

4)

Cast iron meeting requirements of ANSI B 16.4 or ductile iron meeting requirements of ANSI B16.3 and ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. b) Threaded fittings and pipe shall have threads cut to ANSI B1.20.1. c) Do not extend pipe into fittings such that it may reduce waterway. d) Ream pipe after cutting to remove burrs and fins. Flanged: Steel meeting requirements of ANSI B16.5. Welded: a) Carbon steel meeting requirements of ASTM A234. b) Weld pipe using methods complying with AWS B2.1, level AR-3. Welding procedures and performance of welders shall comply with AWS B2.1, level AR3. Roll Grooved Pipe Coupling System: a) Ductile iron meeting requirements of ASTM A395 and ASTM A536, and UL listed. b) Grooved products used on Project shall be from same manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be as recommended by manufacturer of grooved products. c) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories. Gruvlok Tyco (Grinnell) Victaulic Rigid Couplings 7401 772 Style 005 Flexible Couplings 1 7000 705 Style 75 Flange Adaptors 2 7012 71 Style 744 Grooved Coupling Gaskets 3 E EPDM Grade E EPDM E EPDM 4
1 2

a)

Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Class 125 or 150. 3 Temperature rated 30 to 150 deg F. NSF-61 certified. 4 Grade A 4. Valves: a. Butterfly Valves: 1) UL / CASA approved. 2) Indicating type. 3) Integral supervisory switch. a) Supervisory switch is not required on drain valves. 4) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Milwaukee: (1) Model BB-SCS02 threaded ends with tamper switch One to 2 inches. (2) Model BBVSCS02 Grooved ends with tamper switch 2 to 2-1/2 inches. b) Nibco: (1) Model WD3510-8 Wafer type with valve tamper switch. (2) Model GD4765-8N Grooved type with valve tamper switch, 2-1/2 to 8 inches. c) Tyco (Grinnell): (1) Model BFV-N wafer. (2) Model BFV-N grooved. d) Victaulic: Series 705W Grooved end type with internal supv. switches. e) Kennedy: (1) Model 01W wafer. (2) Model G300 grooved. b. Gate Valves: 1) UL / CASA approved. 2) Outside Screw and Yoke Type (O.S.&Y). 3) Class 150 psi. 4) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Nibco: (1) T-104-0 with Threaded Ends 1/2 to 2 inches. (2) F-637-31 Flanged Ends. b) Mueller: R-2360-6 Flanged Ends. c) Victaulic: Series 771 Grooved Ends c. Ball Valves: 1) UL / CASA approved. 2) Valve supervisory switch. -521 1313

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

d.

e.

f.

g.

a) Supervisory switch is not required on drain valves. Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Milwaukee: BB-SCS02 with threaded ends. b) Nibco: KT-505 with threaded ends. c) Nibco: KG-505 with grooved ends. d) Victaulic: Series 728 with grooved or threaded ends. Swing Check Valves: 1) 1/2 to 3 inch horizontal check. a) Regrinding type. b) Renewable disk. c) Bronze Class 125 with threaded ends. d) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. e) Nibco: KT-403-W. f) Victaulic: Series 712. 2) 2 to 4 inch Horizontal check: a) Grooved ends. b) Ductile iron body. c) Rated 300 psi. d) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. e) Tyco (Grinnell): CV-1F Grooved ends. f) Victaulic: Series 712. g) Viking: E-1 Grooved ends. 3) 3 to 12 inch Horizontal check: a) Bolted bonnet. b) Raised face flanges. c) Bronze mounted with ductile iron body. d) 125 lb Class A. e) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (1) Nibco: F-938-31. (2) Mueller: A-2120-6. (3) Viking: F-1 grooved and flanged. Wafer Type Check Valves: 1) 4 to 8 inch cast iron body. 2) 175 psi minimum working pressure. 3) Rubber Seat. 4) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Nibco: KW-900-W. b) Mueller: A-2102. c) Kennedy: Fig.706. Grooved-End Check Valves: 1) UL / CASA listed and approved to 250 psi maximum operating pressure. 2) 2-1/2 to 12 inch ductile iron body. 3) Disc And Seat: a) 2-1/2 And 3 Inch: Aluminum bronze disc with mounted elastomer seal and PPS (polyphenylene sulfide) coated seat. b) 4 Inch and Larger: Elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc with welded in nickel seat. 4) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Nibco: KG-900-W grooved ends. b) Victaulic: Series 717. c) Kennedy: Fig.426. Alarm Check Valves (if required by local jurisdiction): 1) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Reliable: E with gauges and drain. b) Tyco (Grinnell): Model AV-1-300. c) Victaulic: Series 751 with gauges and drain. 3) -621 1313

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

5.

d) Viking: J-1 with gauges and drain. Backflow Preventer: Make and model shown on Drawings or as required by local codes. Retard Chamber: 1) Self-draining. 2) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Reliable: E-1. b) Victaulic: Series 752. c) Viking: C-1. j. Inspector's Test Valve: 1) Bronze body with threaded or grooved ends. 2) Combination sight glass / orifice. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Tyco (Grinnell): Model F350. b) Victaulic: Testmaster Alarm Test Module Style 720. c) AGF: Model 1011A. Sprinkler Heads: a. Color and finish: 1) Use white sprinklers, escutcheons, and cover plates in all finished areas. 2) Use rough brass finishes sprinklers in attic, mezzanine, and all mechanical areas. b. Concealed Pendant: 1) Adjustable cover. 2) UL / CASA listed and approved. 3) Coordinate concealed cover finish with Architect. 4) Type One Acceptable Products: a) Wet Pendant, Flat Profile: (1) Reliable: F4FR. (2) Victaulic: Model 3802. (3) Viking: Model VK462. (4) Tyco (Grinnell): Model RF11. (5) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. b) Dry Pendant: Flat Profile: (1) Tyco (Grinnell): DS-C. (2) Victaulic: V3618. (3) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. c. Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler: 1) UL / CASA listed and approved. 2) Recess adjustable. 3) Where guards are required, use chrome sprinkler guards that are listed, that are approved by Sprinkler Manufacturer for use with head, and that are supplied by Sprinkler Manufacturer. 4) Type One Acceptable Products: a) Wet Sidewall Sprinkler: (1) Reliable: F1FR. (2) Tyco (Grinnell): Model TY-FRB. (3) Victualic: Model V2710. (4) Viking: VK305. (5) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. b) Dry Sidewall Sprinkler: (1) Reliable: F3QR. (2) Tyco (Grinnell): DS-1. (3) Victualic: Model V3610. (4) Viking: VK162. (5) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. d. Attic Sprinklers, Upright: 1) UL / CASA listed and approved. 2) Approved for use in roof structures, combustible and non-combustible, with ceiling below. 3) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Tyco: BB, SD, or HIP. h. i. -721 1313

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Pendant Sprinklers: 1) UL / CASA listed and approved. 2) Where guards or escutcheons are required, use chrome plated sprinkler guards and escutcheons that are listed, that are approved by Sprinkler Manufacturer for use with head, and that are supplied by Sprinkler Manufacturer. 3) Type One Acceptable Products: a) Reliable: F1FR. b) Tyco: TY-FRB. c) Victaulic: Model V2704. d) Viking: VK302. e) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. f. Upright Sprinklers: 1) UL / CASA listed and approved. 2) Type One Acceptable Products: a) Reliable: F1FR. b) Tyco: TY-FRB. c) Victaulic: Models V2704. d) Viking: VK300. e) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 6. Water Flow Alarm: a. Electric Flow Alarm: 1) UL/CASA listed and approved. 2) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Potter Electric: Horn Strobe, SASH-120, 120VAC. b) System Sensor: Horn Strobe, P2RHK-120, 120 VAC. 7. Pressure Gauges: a. Mechanical Water Pressure Gauges: 1) UL / CASA listed and approved. 2) 3-1/2 inch diameter dial. 3) 0 to 300 psi in 5 psi increments. 4) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Reliable: UA. b) HO Trerice: 500. c) Viking: 01124A. 8. Waterflow Detectors: a. Electrical Water Flow Switch: 1) UL / CASA listed. 2) Switch activates with flow of 10 gpm or more. 3) Two single pole double throw switches. 4) Automatic reset. 5) Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Potter-Roemer: Model 6201 thru 6208. b) System Sensor: WFD20 thru WFD80. c) Viking: VSR-F. 9. Tamper Switch a. Weather and Tamper Resistant Switch. 1) UL / CASA listed. 2) Mount to monitor valve and not interfere with operation. 3) Shall operate in horizontal and vertical position. 4) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Control Valves, Butterfly Valves, Post Indicator Valves: (1) Potter Electric: Model PCVS. (2) Notifier: Model PIBV2. (3) System Sensor: Model PIBV2. b) O.S. & Y Valves: (1) Potter Electric: Model OSYSU. (2) System sensor: Model OSY2. 10. Automatic Drain Device: a. Straight Design, 1/2 inch. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems -821 1313

e.

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

11.

12.

13.

14.

Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Nibco: Ball-Drip. 2) Potter-Roemer: Figure 5982. 3) Viking: B-1. Fire Department Connection: a. Two-way Inlet with single clapper. b. Rough Brass finish. c. Class One Quality Standards: See Section 01 6200. 1) Round 'AUTO SPKR' identification plate, rough brass by Potter-Roemer Fig. 5962. d. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Croker: 6405. 2) Potter-Roemer: Fig. 5710. Post Indicating Valve: a. Red enamel finish. b. Supervisory switch. c. Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) As required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Riser Manifold Assembly: a. Groove x Groove Manifold Body. b. Water Flow Alarm Switch, VSC with Vane, UL / CASA listed and approved. c. 300 psi / 2000 kPa Water Pressure Gauge. d. Test and Drain Valve with Manifold Drain Trim and 1/2 inch diameter test Orifice. e. Pressure Relief Valve, 175 psi, non adjustable, pipe discharge to test Drain Valve. f. Category Four Approved Products: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Tyco: Model 513. 2) Victaulic: Style 747P. Propylene Glycol, if required: a. Category Four Approved Product: See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories. 1) Dow Frost by Dow Chemical.

b.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH www.anvilintl.com. b. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.b-line.com. Hangers, Rods, And Clamps: 1. Galvanized, unless specified otherwise, and UL / CASA approved for service intended. 2. Class One Quality Standard: a. Hangers and accessories shall be Anvil numbers specified or equals by Cooper B-Line. b. Pipe Ring Hangers: Equal to Anvil Fig 69. c. Riser Clamps: Equal to Anvil Fig. 261.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLERS A. Acceptable Installers: Band Fire Protection 539 W 9460 South Sandy, UT 84070 (801) 566-0895

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

-9-

21 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Chaparral Fire Protection 71 North Hwy 89 North Salt Lake, Utah 84054 (801) 295-1189 Delta Fire Systems, Inc. 1507 Pioneer Salt Lake City, UT 84104 (801) 972-4500 Fire Services, Inc. 9520 S Jordan Gateway Sandy, UT 84070 (801) 565-8874 Fire Systems Specialists 2715 N Mule Ranch Cir Corinne, UT 84307 (435) 734-0902 Intermountain Fire Protection 1544 West 300 North Spanish Fork, UT 84660 (801) 798-2350 Kimco Fire Protection 532 S 1325 W Orem, UT 84058 (801) 221-1888 Western Automatic Sprinkler Corp 2510 S West Temple Salt Lake City, UT 84115 (801) 484-3531 B. Equal approved by Architect bidding. See Section 01 4301.

3.2

EXAMINATION A. Drawings: 1. Fire Protection Drawings show general arrangement of piping. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. Install system so it drains. 2. Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These Drawings take precedence over Fire Protection Drawings. 3. Because of small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions and to enable system to drain.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Connect system to flange provided under Section 33 1119. After installation of riser, fill annular space between pipe and slab with flexible mastic.

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

- 10 -

21 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

B.

Install sprinkler systems in accordance with requirements of latest editions of NFPA 13 and as specified below: 1. Provide maintenance access to equipment 2. Conceal sprinkler lines installed in occupied areas. In Mezzanine areas, route pipe to side of Mezzanine walkway. Do not impede egress from Attic. 3. Install to enable drainage of system. a. Install main drain from riser according to NFPA 13, paragraph 8.17.4. 4. Install wet pipe system so it will not be exposed to freezing temperatures. 5. Do not use dropped, damaged, or used sprinkler heads. 6. Install tamper switches and flow detectors where located by Architect. 7. Except for Siamese connection, install automatic ball drip device in lowest point of piping to fire department connection and drain to floor drain or to exterior of building. 8. Brace and support system to meet seismic zone requirements for building site. Flush system at full design flow rate for minimum five minutes. Route water to outside of building. Protect landscaping and other exterior elements from damage during flow tests.

C.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Pressure Test: a. Hydrostatically test system to 200 psi minimum for 2 hours as required by 'Contractor's Material And Testing certificate for Above Ground Piping' NFPA-13, Figure 16.1 (2002 Edition) or Figure 24.1 (2007) Edition). b. If system or part of system is to have a glycol solution, hydrostatic test is to be performed using approvable glycol solution. Do not hydrostatically test any section of system that is to be filled with a glycol solution with plain water. 2. Water Flow Test: a. Test to determine static and residual pressures and corresponding flow rate at point of connection to utility water main. b. Adjust water flow test data for seasonal fluctuations and future growth as recommended by Water Utility and AHJ. c. At point of connection to utility water main, combine inside and outside hose stream allowances. 3. Check piping in relation to insulation envelope to be certain piping and auxiliary drains are properly enclosed inside building insulation envelope. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Architect. 4. Tests shall be witnessed by Architect and representative of local jurisdiction over fire prevention.

3.5

CLOSE-OUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction of Owner: 1. Instruction Sessions: a. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system utilizing Operation and Maintenance Manual when so doing. Minimum instruction period shall be four hours. b. Instruction sessions shall occur after Substantial Completion inspection when system is properly working and before final payment is made. Training: 1. Installer required to provide FM Training from latest version of NFPA 25 with checklist and brief explanation of following inspections: a. Weekly Inspection. b. Monthly Inspection. c. Quarterly Inspection. d. Semi-Annual Inspection. e. Annual Inspection.

B.

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

- 11 -

21 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

END OF SECTION

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

- 12 -

21 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D I V I S I O N 22: P L U M B I N G
22 0000 P L U M B I N G 22 0501 22 0529 22 0553 22 0719 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

22 1000 P L U M B I N G P I P E S A N D P U M P S 22 1116 22 1119 22 1313 22 1319 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS FACILITY SANITARY SEWER SPECIALTIES

22 3000 P L U M B I N G E Q U I P M E N T 22 3413 INSTANTANEOUS, TANKLESS, GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 4000 P L U M B I N G F I X T U R E S 22 4213 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS AND URINALS 22 4216 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS 22 4700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 22 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 0501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common requirements and procedures for plumbing systems. 2. Responsibility for proper operation of electrically powered equipment furnished under this Division. 3. Furnish and install sealants relating to installation of systems installed under this Division. 4. Furnish and install Firestop Penetration Systems for plumbing systems penetrations as described in Contract Documents. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment for plumbing systems installed under other Sections. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3053: Exterior concrete pads and bases for mechanical equipment. 2. Section 05 0523: Quality and requirements for welding. 3. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 4. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants used at building exterior. 5. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of plumbing items requiring field painting. 6. Section 13 4800: Sound, Vibration, And Seismic Control. 7. Division 26: Raceway and conduit, unless specified otherwise, and line voltage wiring. 8. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials. 9. Division 33: Piped utilities.

B.

C.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1) Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include Manufacturer's catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to show compliance with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data underlined. 2) Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data (Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7800): 1) At beginning of PLUMBING section of Operations And Maintenance Manual, provide master index showing items included: a) Provide name, address, and phone number of Architect, Architect's Mechanical Engineer, General Contractor, and Plumbing subcontractor. b) Identify maintenance instructions by using same equipment identification used in Contract Drawings. Maintenance instructions shall include: (1) List of plumbing equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and nameplate data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item. -122 0501

B.

Common Plumbing Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101

b.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake (2) Manufacturers maintenance instructions for each piece of plumbing equipment installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance instructions. c) Provide operating instructions to include: (1) General description of fire protection system. (2) Step by step procedure to follow for shutting down system or putting system into operation. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copies of warranties required in individual Sections of Division 22.

08.29.11

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of Plumbing Codes applicable to Project. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances. 2. In case of differences between building codes, laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Notify Architect in writing of such differences before performing work affected by such differences. Identification: 1. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL / ULC and AGA / CGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner.

B.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. 2. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01, stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by Architect until installed. 2. Store items subject to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces.

B.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment made out in favor of Owner. Special Warranty: 1. Guarantee plumbing systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. If plumbing sub-contractor with offices located more than 150 miles (240 km) from Project site is used, provide service / warranty work agreement for warranty period with local plumbing subcontractor approved by Architect. Include copy of service / warranty agreement in warranty section of Operation And Maintenance Manual.

B.

Common Plumbing Requirements

-2-

22 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Components shall bear Manufacturer's name and trade name. Equipment and materials of same general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform appearance, operation, and maintenance. Pipe And Pipe Fittings: 1. Weld-O-Let and Screw-O-Let fittings are acceptable. 2. Use domestic made pipe and pipe fittings on Project, except non-domestic made cast iron pipe and fittings by MATCO-NORCA are acceptable. Sleeves: 1. In Framing And Suspended Floor Slabs: Standard weight galvanized iron pipe, Schedule 40 PVC, or 14 ga (2 mm) galvanized sheet metal two sizes larger than bare pipe or insulation on insulated pipe. 2. In Concrete And Masonry: Sleeves through outside walls, interior shear walls, and footings shall be schedule 80 black steel pipe with welded plate. Valves: 1. Valves of same type shall be of same manufacturer.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLERS A. Acceptable Installers. See Section 01 4301: 1. To be determined. 2. Approved Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall be pre-approved in accordance with Supplementary Conditions and included in Construction Documents by Addendum.

3.2

EXAMINATION A. Drawings: 1. Plumbing Drawings show general arrangement of piping, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. 2. Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over Plumbing Drawings. 3. Because of small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine premises to understand conditions that may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which plumbing work is dependent for efficiency and report work that requires correction. 2. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. If approval is received by Addendum or Change Order to use other than originally specified items, be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available. -322 0501

B.

Common Plumbing Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordinate with Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions.

08.29.11

3.3

PREPARATION A. Changes Due To Equipment Selection: 1. Where equipment specified or otherwise approved requires different arrangement or connections from that shown in Contract Documents, submit drawings showing proposed installations. 2. If proposed changes are approved, install equipment to operate properly and in harmony with intent of Contract Documents. Make incidental changes in piping, ductwork, supports, installation, wiring, heaters, panelboards, and as otherwise necessary. 3. Provide additional motors, valves, controllers, fittings, and other equipment required for proper operation of systems resulting from selection of equipment. 4. Be responsible for proper location of rough-in and connections provided under other Divisions.

3.4

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to installer of electrical system. 2. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in sufficient time to be incorporated into construction as work proceeds. Locate these items and confirm that they are properly installed. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to previously installed or existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses. Locating Equipment: 1. Arrange pipes and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, unions, traps, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. 2. Adjust locations of pipes, equipment, and fixtures to accommodate work to interferences anticipated and encountered. 3. Install plumbing work to permit removal of equipment and parts of equipment requiring periodic replacement or maintenance without damage to or interference with other parts of equipment or structure. 4. Determine exact route and location of each pipe before fabrication. a. Right-Of-Way: 1) Lines that pitch shall have right-of-way over those that do not pitch. For example, plumbing drains shall normally have right-of-way. 2) Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. b. Offsets, Transitions, and Changes in Direction: 1) Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on Drawings. 2) Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and devices as required to effect these offsets, transitions, and changes in direction. Penetration Firestops: 1. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at plumbing systems penetrations through walls, ceilings, roofs, and top plates of walls. Sealants: 1. Seal openings through building exterior caused by penetrations of elements of plumbing systems.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Common Plumbing Requirements

-4-

22 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Furnish and install acoustical sealant to seal penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and ceilings.

08.29.11

F.

Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control entire apparatus: 1. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper installation of plumbing systems. 2. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings: a. Arrange so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles. b. Provide accessible flanges or ground joint unions, as applicable for type of piping specified, at connections to equipment and on bypasses. 1) Make connections of dissimilar metals with di-electric unions. 2) Install valves and unions ahead of traps and strainers. Provide unions on both sides of traps. c. Do not use reducing bushings, bull head tees, close nipples, or running couplings. Street elbows are allowed only on potable water pipe 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter and smaller. d. Install piping systems so they may be easily drained e. Install piping to insure noiseless circulation. f. Place valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access. Valves shall be regulated, packed, and glands adjusted at completion of work before final acceptance. 3. Do not install piping in shear walls. 4. Cut piping accurately to measurements established at site. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes. 5. Work piping into place without springing or forcing. Make piping connections to pumps and other equipment without strain at piping connection. Remove bolts in flanged connections or disconnect piping to demonstrate that piping has been so connected, if requested. 6. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. 7. Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe: a. Provide for expansion in every 30 feet (9 meters) of straight run. b. Provide 12 inch (300 mm) offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof. 8. Expansion of PEX Pipe: Allow for expansion and contraction of PEX pipe as recommended by Pipe Manufacturer. Sleeves: 1. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete slabs on grade. 2. Provide sleeves around pipes passing through concrete or masonry floors, walls, partitions, or structural members. Seal sleeves with specified sealants. Follow Pipe Manufacturers recommendations for PEX pipe penetrations through studs and floor slabs. 3. Sleeves through floors shall extend 1/4 inch (6 mm) above floor finish in mechanical equipment rooms above basement floor. In other rooms, sleeves shall be flush with floor. 4. Sleeves through floors and foundation walls shall be watertight. Escutcheons: 1. Provide spring clamp plates where pipes run through walls, floors, or ceilings and are exposed in finished locations of building. Plates shall be chrome plated heavy brass of plain pattern and shall be set tight on pipe and to building surface. Cleanout Covers: Provide covers as directed in 22 1313 as well as covers for cleanouts that are located inside of cabinets (ie serving room sinks, sac prep areas, etc.).

G.

H.

I.

3.5

REPAIR / RESTORATION A. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it:

Common Plumbing Requirements

-5-

22 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.

08.29.11

3.6

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Perform tests on plumbing piping systems. Furnish devices required for testing purposes. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Replace material or workmanship proven defective with sound material at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Repeat tests on new material, if requested.

B.

3.7

CLEANING A. Remove dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from each length of piping before installation: 1. After each section of piping used for movement of water or steam is installed, flush with clean water, except where specified otherwise. 2. Arrange temporary flushing connections for each section of piping and arrange for flushing total piping system. 3. Provide temporary cross connections and water supply for flushing and drainage and remove after completion of work. Clean exposed piping, equipment, and fixtures. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves.

B.

3.8

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction of Owner: 1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Stake Physical Facilities Representative in operation and maintenance of plumbing systems utilizing Operation And Maintenance Manual when so doing. 2. Conduct instruction period after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made.

3.9

PROTECTION A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials.

END OF SECTION

Common Plumbing Requirements

-6-

22 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 0529

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common hanger and support requirements and procedures for plumbing systems. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0523: Quality and requirements for welding. 2. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 3. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of mechanical items requiring field painting. 4. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH www.anvilintl.com. b. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.b-line.com. c. Unistrut, Wayne, MI www.tyco-unistrut.com. Materials: 1. Hangers, Rods, And Inserts a. Galvanized and UL approved for service intended. b. Support horizontal piping from hangers or on roller assemblies with channel supports, except where trapeze type hangers are explicitly shown on Drawings. Hangers shall have double nuts. 1) Support insulated pipes 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter and smaller with adjustable swivel ring hanger with insulation protection shield. Gauge and length of shield shall be in accordance with Anvil design data. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Swivel Ring Hanger: Anvil Fig. 69. (2) Insulation Protection Shield: Anvil Fig. 167. (3) Equals by Cooper B-Line. 2) Support insulated pipes 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) in diameter and larger with clevis hanger or roller assembly with an insulation protection shield. Gauge and length of shield shall be according to Anvil design data. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Clevis Hanger: Anvil Fig. 260. (2) Roller Assembly: Anvil Fig. 171. -122 0529

B.

Hangers and Supports for Plumbing

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c.

d.

(3) Insulation Protection Shield: Anvil Fig. 167. (4) Equals by Cooper B-Line. 3) Support uninsulated copper pipe 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter and smaller from swivel ring hanger, copper plated and otherwise fully suitable for use with copper tubing. Support non-copper uninsulated pipes from swivel ring hanger. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Swivel Ring Hanger For Copper Pipe: Anvil Fig. CT-69. (2) Swivel Ring Hanger For Other Pipe: Anvil Fig. 69. (3) Equals by Cooper B-Line. 4) Support uninsulated copper pipe 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) in diameter and larger from clevis hanger, copper plated hangers and otherwise fully suitable for use with copper tubing. Support non-copper uninsulated pipes from clevis hanger. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Clevis Hanger For Copper Pipe: Anvil Fig. CT-65. (2) Clevis Hanger For Other Pipe: Anvil Fig. 260. (3) Equals by Cooper B-Line. Support rods for single pipe shall be in accordance with following table: Rod Diameter Pipe Size Rod Diameter Pipe Size 3/8 inch 2 inches and smaller 10 mm 50 mm and smaller 1/2 inch 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches 13 mm 64 mm to 88 mm 5/8 inch 4 to 5 inches 16 mm 100 mm to 125 mm 3/4 inch 6 inches 19 mm 150 mm 7/8 inch 8 to 12 inches 22 mm 200 mm to 300 mm Support rods for multiple pipe supported on steel angle trapeze hangers shall be in accordance with following table: Rods Number of Pipes per Hanger for Each Pipe Size Number Diameter 2 Inch 2.5 Inch 3 Inch 4 Inch 5 Inch 6 Inch 8 Inch 2 3/8 Inch Two 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1/2 Inch Three Three Two 0 0 0 0 2 5/8 Inch Six Four Three Two 0 0 0 2 5/8 Inch Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 0 2 5/8 Inch Twelve Nine Seven Five Three Two Two Rods Number of Pipes per Hanger for Each Pipe Size Number Diameter 50mm 64mm 75mm 100mm 125mm 150mm 200mm 2 10 mm Two 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 13 mm Three Three Two 0 0 0 0 2 16 mm Six Four Three Two 0 0 0 2 19 mm Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 0 2 22 mm Twelve Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 1) Size trapeze angles so bending stress is less than 10,000 psi (69 MPa). Riser Clamps For Vertical Piping: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Anvil Fig. 261. b) Equals by Cooper B-Line. Concrete Inserts: 1) Individual Inserts: a) Suitable for special nuts size 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) through 7/8 inch (22 mm) with yoke to receive concrete reinforcing rods, and with malleable iron lugs for attaching to forms. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Anvil Fig. 282. (2) Equals by Cooper B-Line. 2) Continuous Inserts: a) Class Two Quality Standard: Equal to Unistrut P-3200 series. Steel Deck Bracket: 1) Class Two Quality Standard: Equal to Unistrut P1000 with clamp nut, minimum 6 inch (150 mm) length.

e.

f.

g.

Hangers and Supports for Plumbing

-2-

22 0529

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Piping: 1. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. a. Except for underground pipe, suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls using Unistrut and clamps. Do not hang pipe from other pipe, equipment, or ductwork. Laying of piping on any building element is not allowed. b. Supports For Horizontal Piping: 1) Support metal piping at 96 inches (2 400 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) or larger and 72 inches (1 800 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1-1/8 inch (29 mm) or less. 2) Support thermoplastic pipe at 48 inches (1 200 mm) on center maximum. 3) Support PEX pipe at 32 inches (800 mm) minimum on center. 4) Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required. c. Supports for Vertical Piping: 1) Place riser clamps at each floor or ceiling level. 2) Securely support clamps by structural members, which in turn are supported directly from building structure. 3) Provide clamps as necessary to brace pipe to wall. d. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape.

END OF SECTION

Hangers and Supports for Plumbing

-3-

22 0529

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 0553

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install identification of plumbing piping and equipment as described in Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Paint: a. One Coat Primer: 1) 6-2 Quick Drying Latex Primer Sealer over fabric covers. 2) 6-205 Metal Primer under dark color paint. 3) 6-6 Metal Primer under light color paint. b. Finish Coats: Two coats 53 Line Acrylic Enamel. c. Performance Standard: Paints specified are from Pittsburgh Paint & Glass (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA www.pittsburghpaints.com or PPG Canada Inc, Mississauga, ON (800) 2634350 or (905) 238-6441. d. Type Two Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200. 1) Paint of equal quality from following Manufacturers may be submitted for Architect's approval before use. Maintain specified colors, shades, and contrasts. a) Benjamin Moore, Montvale, NJ www.benjaminmoore.com or Toronto, ON (800) 304-0304 or (416) 766-1176. b) ICI Dulux, Cleveland, OH or ICI Paints Canada Inc, Concord, ON www.dulux.com. c) Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH www.sherwin-williams.com.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION A. Painting: 1. Only painted legends, directional arrows, and color bands are acceptable. 2. Locate identifying legends, directional arrows, and color bands at following points on exposed piping of each piping system: a. Adjacent to each item of equipment. b. At point of entry and exit where piping goes through wall. c. On each riser and junction. d. Every 25 feet (7.6 m) on long continuous lines. e. Stenciled symbols shall be one inch high and black.

3.2

ATTACHMENTS A. Schedules: 1. Pipe Identification Schedule: -122 0553

I. D. For Plumbing Pipes And Equipment

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Apply stenciled symbols as follows: Pipe Use Domestic Cold Water Domestic Hot Water

Abbreviation CW HW

END OF SECTION

I. D. For Plumbing Pipes And Equipment

-2-

22 0553

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install insulation on all hot and cold water lines, fittings, valves, and accessories as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 1116: Domestic Water Piping.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Armacell, Mebane, NC www.armaflex.com. b. Childers Products Co, Eastlake, OH www.fosterproducts.com. c. IMCOA, Youngsville, NC www.nomacokflex.com. d. Johns-Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com. e. Knauf, Shelbyville, IN www.knauffiberglass.com. f. Manson, Brossard, PQ, Canada www.isolationmanson.com. g. Nomaco Inc, Yopungsville, NC www.nomacokflex.com. h. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH www.owenscorning.com. i. Speedline Corp, Solon, OH www.speedlinepvc.com. Materials: 1. Above Grade Metal Piping: a. Insulation For Piping: 1) Snap-on glass fiber or melamine foam pipe insulation, or heavy density pipe insulation with factory vapor jacket. 2) Insulation Thickness: Service Water Temperature Pipe Sizes Up to 1-1/4 In 1-1/2 to 2 In Over 2 In 170 - 180 Deg F One In 1-1/2 In 2 In 140 - 160 Deg F 1/2 In One In 1-1/2 In 45 - 130 Deg F 1/2 In 1/2 In One In Pipe Sizes Up to 32 mm 38 to 50 mm 77 - 82 Deg C 25 mm 38 mm 60 - 71 Deg C 13 mm 25 mm 7 - 54 Deg C 13 mm 13 mm Performance Standards: Fiberglas ASJ by Owens-Corning. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Childers Products. b) Knauf. c) Manson. d) Owens-Corning. e) Johns-Manville. -1Service Water Temperature

B.

Over 50 mm 50 mm 38 mm 25 mm

3) 4)

Plumbing Piping Insulation

22 0719

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake f) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. b. Fitting, Valve, And Accessory Covers: 1) PVC. 2) Performance Standard: Zeston by Johns-Manville. 3) Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Knauf. b) Speedline. c) Johns-Manville. d) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Pex Piping, Above And Below Grade: a. Insulation: 1) 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2) Category Four Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: a) SS Tubolit by Armacell. b) ImcoLock by Imcoa. c) Nomalock or Therma-Cel by Nomaco. b. Joint Sealant: 1) Category Four Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: a) Armacell 520. b) Nomaco K-Flex R-373.

08.29.11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION A. Above Grade Piping: 1. Apply insulation to clean, dry piping with joints tightly butted. 2. Install insulation in manner to facilitate removal for repairs. Place sections or blocks so least possible damage to insulation will result from inspection or repairs of piping or equipment. 3. Piping up to 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) Diameter: a. Adhere 'factory applied vapor barrier jacket lap' smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps with white vapor barrier adhesive. b. Adhere 3 inch (76 mm) wide self-sealing butt joint strips over end joints. 4. Piping 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) Diameter And Larger: a. Use broken-joint construction in application of two-layer covering. b. Fill cracks and depressions with insulating cement mixed to thick plastic paste. 1) Apply by hand in several layers to make up total specified thickness. 2) Final layer shall have smooth uniform finish before application of covering. 5. Fittings, Valves, And Accessories: a. Do not apply insulation over flanged joints or victaulic couplings until piping has been brought up to operating temperature and flange bolts have been fully tightened. Insulate valves so wheel, stem, and packing nut are exposed. b. Insulate with same type and thickness of insulation as pipe, with ends of insulation tucked snugly into throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe insulation tufted and tucked in. c. Piping Up To 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm) Diameter: 1) Cover insulation with one piece fitting cover secured by stapling or taping ends to adjacent pipe covering. 2) Alternate Method: a) Insulate fittings, valves, and accessories with one inch of insulating cement and vapor seal with two 1/8 inch (3 mm) wet coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric extending 2 inches (50 mm) onto adjacent insulation. d. Piping 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) To 2 Inches (50 mm): 1) Insulate with hydraulic setting insulating cement or equal, to thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. 2) Apply final coat of fitting mastic over insulating cement. e. Piping 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) And Larger: 1) Insulate with segments of molded insulation securely wired in place and coated with skim coat of insulating cement. -222 0719

Plumbing Piping Insulation

Project # 503-6925-11010101

6.

7.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2) Apply fitting mastic, fitting tape and finish with final coat of fitting mastic. Pipe Hangers: a. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers. b. Provide 16 ga (1.64 mm) by 6 inch (150 mm) long galvanized shields at each pipe hanger to protect pipe insulation from crushing by clevis hanger. c. Provide 22 ga (0.85 mm) by 6 inch (150 mm) long galvanized shield at each pipe hanger to protect insulation from crushing by Unistrut type hanger. Protect insulation wherever leak from valve stem or other source might drip on insulated surface, with aluminum cover or shield rolled up at edges and sufficiently large in area and of shape that dripping will not splash on surrounding insulation.

08.29.11

B.

Below Grade Piping: 1. Slip underground pipe insulation onto pipe and seal butt joints. 2. Where slip-on technique is not possible, slit insulation, apply to pipe, and seal seams and joints.

END OF SECTION

Plumbing Piping Insulation

-3-

22 0719

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavating and backfilling required by work of this Section. 2. Furnish and install potable water piping complete with necessary valves, connections, and accessories inside building and connect with outside utility lines 5 feet (1 50 m) from building perimeter as described in Contract Documents. 3. Water system inside building will be completely new. 4. Existing water system will be completely removed. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 0501: Common Piping Requirements. 2. Section 22 0583: Plumbing Piping Insulation. 3. Section 31 2316: Criteria for performance of excavation. 4. Section 31 2323: Criteria for performance of backfill. 5. Section 33 1116: Domestic water piping from 5 feet (1 50 m) from building perimeter to main.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Sanitary Engineers: a. ANSI / ASSE 1017-2009, Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution Systems. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM B88-09, 'Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.'

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. PP-R pipe: 1) Certified by NSF International. 2. Installers Qualifications: a. PP-R pipe: 1) Certified by Manufacturer. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.

B.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's Literature: 1) PEX pipe and PEX pipe fittings. 2) PP-R pipe and PP_R pipe fittings. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Piping Layout: -122 1116

Domestic Water Piping

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1) 3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Piping layout redesign showing PEX manifold and distribution piping for optimization of cost.

08.29.11

Samples: a. PEX pipe fitting.

B.

Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Written report of sterilization test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Aquatherm, Inc., Orem, UT www.aquathermpipe.com. b. Cash Acme, Cullman, AL www.cashacme.com c. Cla-Val Company, Costa Mesa, CA or Cla-Val Canada Ltd, Beamsville, ON www.claval.com. d. Conbraco Industries Inc, Matthews, NC www.conbraco.com or Conbraco (Honeywell Ltd), Scarborough, ON (416) 293-8111. e. Hammond Valve, New Berlin, WI www.hammondvalve.com. f. Handy & Harmon Products Div, Fairfield, CT www.handyharmon.com or Handy and Harmon of Canada Ltd, Rexdale, ON (800) 463-1465 or (416) 675-1860. g. Harris Products Group, Cincinnati, OH www.harrisproductsgroup.com. h. Honeywell Inc, Minneapolis, MN www.honeywell.com. i. Leonard Valve Co, Cranston, RI www.leonardvalve.com. j. Milwaukee Valve Co, New Berlin, WI www.milwaukeevalve.com. k. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. l. Rehau, Leesburg, VA www.rehau-na.com. m. Sloan Valve Co, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com. n. Spence Engineering Co, Walden, NY www.spenceengineering.com. o. Symmons Industries, Braintree, MA www.symmons.com. p. Uponor Inc, Apple Valley, MN www.uponor-usa.com. q. Viega ProPress, Wichita, KS www.viega-na.com. r. Watts Regulator Co, Andover, MA www.wattsreg.com. s. Wilkins Operation, Paso Robles, CA www.zurn.com. Materials: 1. Pipe: a. Copper: 1) Above-Grade: a) Meet requirements of ASTM B88, Type L. 2) Below-Grade: a) Meet requirements of ASTM B88, Type K. 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum under slabs. b) 2 inches (50 mm) And Smaller: Annealed soft drawn. c) 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) And Larger: Hard Drawn. b. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX): 1) Certified with NSF International against NSF Standards 14 and 61 and NSF Protocol 171. 2) Copper tube size (CTS) outside dimensions and Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of 9. 3) Pressure rated for 160 psi (1.10 MPa) at 73 deg F (22.8 deg C), 100 psi (0.69 MPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and 80 psi (0.552 MPa) at 200 deg F (93 deg C). 4) Marked with Manufacturer's name, design pressure and temperature ratings, and third party certification stamp for NSF-PW. 5) Manufactured by Engel or peroxide method (PEX-A) or by silane method (PEX-B). 6) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:

B.

Domestic Water Piping

-2-

22 1116

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3.

4.

5.

a) Raupex by Rehau. b) Wirsbo Aquapex by Uponor. c) ViegaPEX by Viega. c. Polypropylene-Random (PP-R): 1) Above-Grade: a) Meet requirements of ASTM F2389 and be certified by NSF International per ASTM F2389, NSF 14, and NSF 61. b) SDR 7.4 Greenpipe faser for domestic hot water and SDR 7.4 or SDR 11 greenpipe for domestic cold water. Aquatherm Lilac SDR 11 purple piping for recycled/reclaimed water systems. 2) Below-Grade: a) Meet requirements of ASTM F2389 and be certified by NSF International per ASTM F2389, NSF 14, and NSF 61. b) SDR 7.4 Greenpipe faser for domestic hot water and SDR 7.4 or SDR 11 greenpipe for domestic cold water. Aquatherm Lilac SDR 11 purple piping for recycled/reclaimed water systems. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Aquatherm Greenpipe, Greenpipe faser, and Lilac by Aquatherm. Fittings: a. For Copper Pipe: Wrought copper. b. For PEX Pipe: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Everloc by Rehau. b) Propex by Uponor including EP flow-through multiport tees. c) F877 bronze fitting with stainless steel press sleeve by Viega. c. For PP-R Pipe: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Greenpipe by Aquatherm. Connections For Copper Pipe: a. Above-Grade: 1) Sweat copper type with 95/5 or 96/4 Tin-Antimony solder, Bridgit solder, or Silvabrite 100 solder. Use only lead-free solder. 2) Viega ProPress System b. Below Grade: 1) Brazed using following type rods: a) Copper to Copper Connections: (1) AWS Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6 percent silver). (2) AWS Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15 percent silver). 2) Copper to Brass or Copper to Steel Connections: AWS Classification BAg-5 Silver (45 percent silver). 3) Do not use rods containing Cadmium. 4) Brazing Flux: a) Approved Products: (1) Stay-Silv white brazing flux by Harris Product Group. (2) High quality silver solder flux by Handy & Harmon. 5) Joints under slabs acceptable only if allowed by local codes. Connections For PP-R Pipe: a. Above-Grade: 1) Socket-fusion, fusion-outlet, electrofusion, buttwelding, and mechanical transition fittings including threaded adapters, groove adapters, and flanges. b. Below-Grade: 1) All joints shall be fusion-welded PP-R except that flanges may be used when connecting to other piping systems. Mechanical fittings shall not be used below grade. 2) Joints under slabs acceptable only if allowed by local codes. Ball Valves: a. Use ball valves exclusively unless otherwise specified. Ball valves shall be by single manufacturer from approved list below. b. Valves shall be two-piece, full port for 150 psi (1.03 MPa) SWP. 1) Operate with flow in either direction, suitable for throttling and tight shut-off.

Domestic Water Piping

-3-

22 1116

Project # 503-6925-11010101

6.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2) Body: Bronze, 150 psig (1.03 MPa) wsp at 350 deg F (177 deg C) and 400 psig (2.76 MPa) wog. 3) Seat: Bubble tight at 100 psig (0.69 MPa) under water. c. Class One Quality Standard: Nibco T585 or S585. 1) Equal by Conbraco 'Apollo,' Hammond, Milwaukee, or Watts. d. PP-R piping if used: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) PP-R fusion-weld ball valves by Aquatherm. Combination Pressure Reducing Valve / Strainer: a. Integral stainless steel strainer, or separate 'Y' strainer installed upstream of pressure reducing valve. b. Built-in thermal expansion bypass check valve. c. Class One Quality Standard: Watts U5B: 1) Equal by Cash Acme, Cla-Val Hi Capacity, Conbraco 36C, Honeywell-Braukmann, Spence Hi Capacity, Watts, or Wilkins. See Section 01 6200.

08.29.11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Locate cold water lines a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) from hot water line.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Before pipes are covered, test systems in presence of Architect at 125 psig (0.86 MPa) hydrostatic pressure for 4 hours and show no leaks. 2. Disconnect equipment not suitable for 125 psig (0.86 MPa) pressure from piping system during test period. 3. PP-R Piping: a. Test in accordance with Manufacturers instructions prior to covering. 1) Provide documentation.

3.3

CLEANING A. Sterilize potable water system with solution containing 200 parts per million minimum of available chlorine and maintaining pH of 7.5 minimum. Introduce chlorinating materials into system in manner approved by Architect. Allow sterilization solution to remain for 24 hours and open and close valves and faucets several times during that time. After sterilization, flush solution from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is less than 0.2 parts per million. Water system will not be accepted until negative bacteriological test is made on water taken from system. Repeat dosing as necessary until such negative test is accomplished.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

Domestic Water Piping

-4-

22 1116

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install miscellaneous potable water piping specialties as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 0501: Common Plumbing Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Ashcroft, Stratford, CT www.ashcroftinc.com. b. Chicago Faucet Co, Des Plaines, IL www.chicagofaucets.com. c. ConBraco Industries, Matthews, NC www.conbraco.com. d. Febco, Denver, CO www.repmasters.com. e. H O Trerice, Oak Park, MI www.hotco.com. f. IPS Corporation, Compton, CA www.ipscorp.com. g. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.josam.com. h. Jay R. Smith Maufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.jrsmith.com. i. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Chicago, IL www.mifab.com. j. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. k. Oatey, Cleveland, OH www.oatey.com. l. Precision Plumbing Products, Portland, OR www.pppinc.net. m. Proset Systems Inc., Lawrenceville, GA www.prosetsystems.com. n. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co, Peculiar, MO www.siouxchief.com. o. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com. p. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.watts.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON, Canada www.wattscda.com. q. Weiss Instruments, Inc., Holtsville, NY www.weissinstruments.com. r. Woodford Manufacturing, Colorado Springs, CO www.woodfordmfg.com. s. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA www.zurn.com. Materials: 1. Trap Guard Trap Seal: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Trap Guard by Proset: a) Install per Manufacturers recommendations. 2. Pressure Reducing Station: a. Pressure Gauges: 1) Gauges shall have following features: a) Cast aluminum case. b) Chrome plated ring. c) Impact resistant window. d) Phosphor bronze alloy steel bourdon tube. e) 1/2 percent scale range accuracy. -122 1119

B.

Domestic Water Piping Specialties

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

f) 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) diameter dial face. g) Range 0 to 100 psig. 2) Class One Quality Standard: 500X by H O Trerice. a) Equal by Ashcroft or Weiss. See Section 01 6200. b. Brass Gauge Cocks: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) 1092 by Ashcroft. b) 865 by H O Trerice. Exterior Hydrants: a. Provide with integral anti-siphon device. Key-operated. b. Non-freeze. c. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Josam: 71050. 2) J. R. Smith: 5609-QT. 3) Wade: W-8600. 4) Watts: HY-725. 5) Woodford: 75. 6) Zurn: Z-1310.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Gauges: Connect to pipe with 1/4 inch (6 mm) connections utilizing gauge cocks.

END OF SECTION

Domestic Water Piping Specialties

-2-

22 1119

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 1313 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within building and connect with outside utility lines 5 feet (1.5 m) out from building where applicable. 2. Perform excavation and backfill required by work of this Section. Related Requirements: 1. Sections Under 07 3000 Heading: Furnishing and installing of roof jacks and pipe flashing at roof. 2. Section 07 8400: Quality of firestopping material. 3. Section 22 0501: Common Plumbing Requirements. 4. Section 31 2316: Criteria for performance of excavation. 5. Section 31 2323: Criteria for performance of backfill. 6. Section 33 3313: Sewage piping from 5 feet (1.5 m) out from building to main.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.

1.3

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: a. ASTM D2321-08, Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.' b. ASTM D2564-04e1, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.' c. ASTM D303408, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.' d. ASTM F65608, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. e. ASTM F89107, Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core.'

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Minimum size of waste piping installed under floor slab on grade shall be 2 inches (50 mm). Materials: 1. Piping And Fittings: PVC Schedule 40 cellular core plastic pipe and pipe fittings meeting requirements of ASTM F891, joined using cement primer meeting requirements of ASTM F656 and pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2564. a. Furnish wall cleanouts with chrome wall cover and screw. -122 1313

B.

Facility Sanitary Sewers

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings. 2. Excavate to required depth and grade to obtain fall required. Grade soil and waste lines within building perimeter 1/4 inch (6 mm) fall in one foot (300 mm) in direction of flow. 3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required. 4. Remove debris from trench before laying of pipe. 5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect. Thermoplastic Pipe And Fittings: 1. General: Piping and joints shall be clean and installed according to Manufacturer's recommendations. Break down contaminated joints, clean seats and gaskets and reinstall. 2. Above Grade: Locate pipe hangers every 4 feet (1.2 m) on center maximum and at elbows. 3. Below Grade: a. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2321. b. Stabilize unstable trench bottoms. c. Bed pipe true to line and grade with continuous support from firm base. 1) Bedding depth: 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm). 2) Material and compaction to meet ASTM standard noted above. d. Excavate bell holes into bedding material so pipe is uniformly supported along its entire length. Blocking to grade pipe is forbidden. e. Trench width at top of pipe: 1) Minimum: 18 inches (450 mm) or diameter of pipe plus 12 inches (300 mm), whichever is greater. 2) Maximum: Outside diameter of pipe plus 24 inches (600 mm). f. Do not use backhoe or power equipment to assemble pipe. g. Initial backfill shall be 12 inches (300 mm) above top of pipe with material specified in referenced ASTM standard. h. Minimum cover over top of pipe not under building slab: 1) 36 inches (900 mm) before wheel loading. 2) 48 inches (1 200 mm) before compaction. Install piping so cleanouts may be installed as follows: 1. Where shown on Drawings and near bottom of each stack and riser. 2. At every 135 degrees of accumulative change in direction for horizontal lines. 3. Every 100 feet (30 meters) of horizontal run. 4. Extend piping to accessible surface. Do not install piping so cleanouts must be installed in carpeted floors. In such locations, configure piping so wall type cleanouts may be used. Each fixture and appliance discharging water into sanitary sewer or building sewer lines shall have seal trap in connection with complete venting system so gasses pass freely to atmosphere with no pressure or syphon condition on water seal. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Join lines together in fewest practicable number before projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley. Vent line terminations shall be: 1. 6 inches (150 mm) minimum above roof and 12 inches (300 mm) minimum from any vertical surface. 2. Same size as vent pipe. 3. In areas where minimum design temperature is below 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or where frost or snow closure may be possible: a. Vent line terminations shall be same size as vent pipe, except no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Facility Sanitary Sewers

-2-

22 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Vents shall terminate 10 inches (250 mm) minimum above roof or higher if required by local codes.

08.29.11

F.

Furnish and install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated structures as required under Sections 07 8400 and 22 0501.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect before testing. 2. Thermoplastic Pipe System: a. Before backfilling and compacting of trenches, Fill waste and vent system with water to roof level or 10 feet (3 meters) minimum, and show no leaks for two hours. Correct leaks and defective work. b. After backfilling and compacting of trenches is complete but before placing floor slab, re-test as specified above. Uncover pipe and correct leaks and defective work. Re-backfill and compact and re-test.

END OF SECTION

Facility Sanitary Sewers

-3-

22 1313

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 1319 FACILITY SANITARY SEWER SPECIALTIES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install miscellaneous sanitary sewer specialties as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 0501: Common Plumbing Requirements. 2. Section 22 1119: Domestic Water Piping Specialties.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. H-M Company, Cincinnati, OH www.draintroughs.com. b. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.josam.com. c. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.jrsmith.com. d. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Chicago, IL www.mifab.com. e. Proset Systems, Lawrenceville, GA www.prosetsystems.com. f. Scherping Systems, Winstead, MN www.scherpingsystems.com. g. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co, Peculiar, MO www.siouxchief.com. h. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com. i. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.watts.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON, Canada www.wattscda.com. j. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA www.zurn.com. Components: 1. Drains And Drain Accessories: a. Floor Drain FD-1: 1) Approved types with deep seal trap and chrome plated strainer. 2) Trap guard by Proset Systems. Provide model number to match floor drain. 3) Provide funnel for reception of condensate where indicated on the Plumbing Plans. 4) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Josam: 30000-50-Z-5A. b) J. R. Smith: 2010-A. c) Sioux Chief: 832. d) Wade: 1100. e) Watts: FD-200-A. f) Zurn: Z-415.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Facility Sanitary Sewer Specialties

-1-

22 1319

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 22 3413 INSTANTANEOUS, TANKLESS, GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install gas-fired tankless water heaters as described in Contract Documents. 2. Water Heater shall be convertible for use with Propane Fuel (not reflected in Model Numbers) 3. There is the possibility that natural gas will be provided to this location at a later date. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 0501: Common Plumbing Requirements. 2. Section 22 1116: Domestic Water Piping.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1785-06, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.' b. ASTM D2564-04e1, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.' c. ASTM D2661-08, Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.' d. ASTM D2665-08b, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.'

1.3

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Direct Vent Water Heater: a. 10 year factory warranty on heat exchanger and 3 years on other parts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Direct Vent Water Heaters: 1. Sealed combustion type, AGA rated, factory assembled and tested. 2. Rated at 3.9 GPM (14.8 LPM) water flow with rise of 80 deg F (27 deg C). Minimum water flow rate shall be 0.7 GPM (2.6 LPM). 3. Copper coil integral fin and tube construction with quick release brass or bronze waterways. 4. Aluminized stainless steel burners. 5. Include isolation valves. 6. Safety Features: a. Built-in freeze protection. b. Spark ignition and sensor system. c. In-line fusing. -122 3413

Instantaneous, Tankless, Gas Water Heaters

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

d. Pressure relief valve. e. High Limit switch. f. Vent pressure switch. g. Modulating / Proportional gas valve. 7. Integral Solid State Controls: a. Monitor incoming and outgoing temperature with factory-installed themisters. b. Sense and control flow rate to maintain set point temperature. c. Control air / gas mixture input to maintain thermal combustion efficiency. 8. Remote controller with wall mounting bracket. 9. Include vent package and direct vent termination kit for complete vent installation. 10. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: (shall be convertible for use with Propane Fuel) a. A. O. Smith, Ashland City, TN www.hotwater.com. 1) Without Font: Model ATI-505N. b. Bosch, Londonderry, NH www.boschpro.com. 1) Model GWH C800ES. c. Noritz-Kato Inc, Ogden, UT Attn: Kay Kato www.hotwater4you.com. 1) Model NCC-199-DV. d. Rinnai-MJM Associates Inc, Herriman, UT Attn: Colin Schmidt www.foreverhotwater.com. 1) Model RC98HPi. e. State Water Heaters, Ashland, TN www.statewaterheaters.com 1) Model GTS-705-NIA. f. Takagi, Irvine, CA www.takagi.com. 1) Model T-K3-PRO.

2.2

ASSESORIES A. PVC Flue Piping (Instantaneous Tankless Water Heaters): 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Armaflex by Armacell, Mebane, NC www.armaflex.com. b. Nomaco, Youngsville, NC www.nomacokflex.com. 2. Flue: (Sidewall Termination) a. Air Piping: Schedule 40 pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D1785, ASTM D2661, or ASTM D2665. b. Piping Primer And Cement. a) Meet requirements of ASTM D2564. c. Flexible Foamed Pipe Insulation: 1) Thickness: a) 1/2 inch (13 mm) for 2 through 3 inch (50 through 75 mm) outside diameter pipe. b) 1/2 inch (13 mm) sheet for fittings as recommended by Manufacturer. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Tubolit by Armaflex. b) ImcoLock or Therma-Cel by Nomaco K-Flex. d. Insulation Joint Sealer:

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Water Heaters: 1. Water heaters shall each have relief valve sized to match heat input and set to relieve at 120 psi (827 kPa). 2. Install temperature-pressure relief valve on hot water heater and pipe discharge directly above funnel of floor drain. Vent:

B.

Instantaneous, Tankless, Gas Water Heaters

-2-

22 3413

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Vent package and direct vent termination to be installed per Manufacturers recommendations. PVC Flue Piping: a. General: 1) Run individual vent and individual combustion intake piping from each water heater to wall termination as recommended by Water Heater Manufacturer. Slope lines downward toward water heater. 2) Slope combustion chamber exhaust drain downward to floor drain. b. Support: 1) Support termination kit at wall per manufacturer requirements with 20 ga (0.95 mm) sheet metal straps as detailed on Drawings. 2) Support horizontal sections of pipe in accordance with requirements of Section 23 0501. Anchor securely to structure, not allowing pipe to sway. c. Insulation: 1) General: a) Install insulation in snug contact with pipe and in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. b) Slip insulation on piping before piping sections and fittings are assembled keeping slitting of insulation to a minimum. c) Joints: (1) Place 'slit' joint seams of insulation exposed outside building on bottom of pipe. (2) Stagger joints on layered insulation. (3) Seal joints in insulation. d) Paint exterior exposed insulation with two coats of finish recommended by Insulation Manufacturer, color selected by Architect.

08.29.11

3.2

ADJUSTING A. Adjust gas input pressure to be between 6 and 7 inches (150 and 180 mm) of water column at regulator inlet. Adjust burner manifold pressure to 4.3 inches (110 mm) of water column on down stream side of gas regulator.

END OF SECTION

Instantaneous, Tankless, Gas Water Heaters

-3-

22 3413

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 4213

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS AND URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9213: Sealants used between fixtures and other substrates. 2. Section 22 0501: Common Mechanical Requirements. 3. Section 22 1116: Domestic Water Piping.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. American Standard Brands, Piscataway, NJ www.americanstandard-us.com or American Standard Canada, Mississauga, ON www.americanstandard.ca. b. AMTC - Advanced Modern Technologies Corp, Woodland Hills, CA www.amtcorporation.com. c. Bemis Manufacturing Co, Sheboygan Falls, WI www.bemismfg.com. d. Beneke by Sanderson Plumbing Products, Columbus, MS www.sppi.com. e. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co, Novi, MI or BrassCraft Canada Ltd, St Thomas, ON www.brasscraft.com. f. Cambridge Brass, Cambridge, ON www.cambridgebrass.com. g. Chicago Faucet Co, Des Plaines, IL www.chicagofaucets.com. h. Church Seat Co, Sheboygan Falls WI www.churchseats.com. i. Delany Flush Valves, Charlottesville, VA www.delanyproduct.com. j. Crane Plumbing, Evanston, IL www.craneplumbing.com or Crane Canada Ltd, Plumbing Div, Montreal, PQ www.craneplumbing.ca. k. Dearborn Brass, Cleveland, OH www.dearbornbrass.com. l. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC, Woodridge, IL www.gerberonline.com. m. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.josam.com. n. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co, Montgomery, AL www.jrsmith.com. o. Kohler Co Plumbing Div, Kohler, WI www.us.kohler.com. p. McGuire Manufacturing Co, Cheshire, CT www.mcguiremfg.com. q. Olsonite Corp, Newnan, GA www.olsonite.net or Olsonite Co Ltd, Tilbury, ON (519) 6821240. r. Sloan Valve Co, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com. s. South Fork Manufacturing, Coalville, UT (801) 953-3001 www.dirt-grabber.com. t. Toto U.S.A., Inc., Morrow, GA www.totousa.com u. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com. v. Zurn Commercial Brass, Sanford, NC www.zurn.com or Zurn Industries Ltd, Mississuaga, ON (905) 795-8844. w. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA www.zurn.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria:

B.

Commercial Water Closets and Urinals

-1-

22 4213

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim, including trim behind custom casework doors, shall be chrome plated.

08.29.11

C.

Materials: 1. Water Closets: a. General: Maximum water usage of 1.6 gallons (6 liters) per flush. b. Standard Fixture: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) American Standard: Cadet 3 Elongated 2383.012. b) Gerber: Avalanche 21-812. c) Kohler: Wellworth K-3574. d) Toto: 'Drake' CST744S. c. Handicap Accessible Fixture: 1) 18 inch (450 mm) maximum rim height. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) American Standard: Cadet 3 Right Height Elongated 2386.012. b) Gerber: Avalanche 21-818. c) Kohler: Highline K-3611. d) Toto: 'ADA Drake' CST744SL. 2. Urinals: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) American Standard: Washbrook 6501.010. 2) Gerber: Monitor 27-780. 3) Kohler: Bardon K-4960-ET. 4) Toto: UT447. 3. Water Closet Accessories: a. Seats: 1) Provide split front type with check hinge. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Standard And Handicap Accessible Fixtures: b) Bemis: 1655SSC. c) Beneke: 527 SS. d) Church: 9500SSC. e) Kohler: K-4731-C. f) Olsonite: 95SSC. g) Toto SC534. b. Supply Pipe And Stop: 1) Provide chrome plated quarter-turn brass ball valve, 12 inch (300 mm) braided stainless steel riser, and chrome-plated steel flange. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) McGuire: BV2166CC. b) Zurn: Z8804 CRQ-PC. c. Flush Valve Filter: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) SFDG1 'Dirt Grabber' by South Fork Manufacturing. 4. Urinal Accessories: a. Carrier / Support: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Josam. b) Jay R. Smith. c) Wade. b. Flush Valve: 1) Low flow, 1 gallon (4 liters) per flush maximum. 2) Proximity sensor type. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Delany: I1451-1-OB. b) Gerber: 44-902. c) Moen: 8312 d) Sloan: 186-SMO with override button. e) Zurn: ZR-6003-AV with maintenance override button. -222 4213

Commercial Water Closets and Urinals

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Flush Valve Filter: 1) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) SFDG1 'Dirt Grabber' by South Fork Manufacturing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. Install each fixture with separate vent line. Do not circuit vent. Ensure provisions are made for proper support of fixtures and that rough-in piping is accurately set and protected from movement and damage. 1. Seal wall-mounted fixtures around edges to wall with sealant specified in Section 07 9213. 2. Attach wall-hung fixtures to carriers. 3. Support fixture hanger or arm free of finished wall. Adjust flush valves for proper flow. Unless otherwise noted, provide each individual fixture supply with chrome-plated stop valve with hand wheel. Install fixtures with accessible stop or control valve in each branch supply line. Mounting: 1. Urinals: a. Standard: 24 inches (610 mm) from floor to bottom lip. b. Handicap Accessible: 17 inches (432 mm) maximum from floor to bottom lip. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or caulked securely to waste pipe. Make joints between fixtures and floor flanges tight with approved fixture setting compound or gaskets. Caulk between fixtures and floor with sealant specified in Section 07 9213. Point edges. Flush Valve Filters: 1. Install in Delany, Sloan, and Zurn flush valves. 2. Install after water lines have been flushed out, but before turning water into flush valve.

C. D.

E. F.

G.

H.

3.2

CLEANING A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.

END OF SECTION

Commercial Water Closets and Urinals

-3-

22 4213

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 4216 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9213: Sealants used between fixtures and other substrates. 2. Section 22 0501: Common Mechanical Requirements. 3. Section 22 1116: Domestic Water Piping.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. American Standard Brands, Piscataway, NJ www.americanstandard-us.com or American Standard Canada, Mississauga, ON www.americanstandard.ca. b. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co, Novi, MI or BrassCraft Canada Ltd, St Thomas, ON www.brasscraft.com. c. Brocar Products Inc, Cincinnati, OH www.brocar.com. d. CECO, Huntington Park, CA www.cecosinks.com. e. Chicago Faucet Co, Des Plaines, IL www.chicagofaucets.com. f. Dearborn Brass, Tyler, TX www.dearbornbrass.com. g. Delta Faucet Co, Indianapolis, IN www.deltafaucet.com or Delta Faucet Canada, London, ON (519) 659-3626. h. EBC / Just Manufacturing Co, Franklin Park, IL www.justmfg.com. i. Elkay Manufacturing Co, Oak Brook, IL www.elkay.com. j. Fiat Products, Evanston, IL www.craneplumbing.com or Fiat Products Ltd, Winnepeg, MB www.fiat.ca. k. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC, Woodridge, IL www.gerberonline.com. l. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.josam.com. m. Jay R. Smith Maufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.jrsmith.com. n. Just Manufacturing Co, Franklin Park, IL www.justsinks.com. o. Keeney Manufacturing Co, Newington, CT www.keeneymfg.com. p. Kohler Co Plumbing Div, Kohler, WI www.us.kohler.com. q. McGuire Manufacturing Co, Cheshire, CT www.mcguiremfg.com. r. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Amherst, NY www.mifab.com. s. Moen Incorporated, North Olmsted, OH, or Moen Canada, Oakville, ON www.moen.com. t. Omni Flow Controls, Harbor City, CA www.chronomite.com or www.omniflowcontrols.com. u. Sloan Valve Co, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com. v. Speakman Company, New Castle, DE www.speakmancompany.com. w. Stern-Williams, Shawnee Mission, KS www.sternwilliams.com. x. Symmons, Braintree, MA www.symmons.com. y. T & S Brass & Bronze Works Inc, Travelers Rest, SC www.tsbrass.com. z. TrueBro Inc, Collierville, TN www.truebro.com. aa. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com. bb. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.wattsdrainage.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON, Canada www.wattscda.com. -122 4216

Commercial Lavatories And Sinks

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake cc. Zurn Commercial Brass, Sanford, NC www.zurn.com or Zurn Industries Ltd, Mississuaga, ON (905) 795-8844. dd. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA www.zurn.com.

08.29.11

B.

Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim, including trim behind custom casework doors, shall be chrome plated. Components: 1. Lavatories And Fittings: a. Standard Self Supporting Lavatories: 1) Size: 20 by 18 inches (500 by 450 mm). 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) American Standard: Lucern 0355.012. b) Gerber: Monticello II 12-654. c) Kohler: Greenwich K-2023. 3) Carrier / Support: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Josam: 17100. (2) Jay R. Smith: 0700. (3) Wade: 520-M36. b. Lavatory Fittings: 1) Faucet and Grid Strainer For Standard Sinks: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) American Standard: Monterrey Two-Handle Centerset Lavatory Faucet with Vandal-Resistant Wrist Blade handles and grid strainer drain 5502.140. (2) Chicago: 802CP with 327XCP. (3) Delta: 2529HDF. (4) Gerber: C4-44-412. (5) Kohler: K-7404-5A with K-7715 strainer. (6) Moen: 8215 with 14750 grid strainer. (7) Speakman: SC 3074. (8) T & S: B-0890 with B-0899 Grid Strainer. (9) Zurn: Z81104 with McGuire 155A Grid Strainer. 2) Flow Control Fitting: a) Provide vandal-proof type in place of aerator. Flow shall be 1.5 gpm. b) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Omni A-200 Series by Chronomite Laboratories. 3) Supply pipes with stops: a) Provide chrome plated quarter-turn brass ball valve, 12 inch long braided stainless steel riser, and chrome-plated steel flange. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) McGuire: BV2165CC. (2) Zurn: Z8804 LRQ-PC. 4) Trap: a) 17 gauge (1.4 mm) tube 'P' trap, chrome plated. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Dearborn. (2) Engineered Brass Company (EBC). (3) Keeney Manufacturing. (4) McGuire. (5) Zurn. 5) Safety Covers for Handicap Accessible Lavatories: a) Provide protection on water supply pipes and on trap. -222 4216

C.

Commercial Lavatories And Sinks

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Trapwrap by Brocar Products Inc. (2) Pro Wrap by McGuire Products. (3) Handi Lav-Guard by TrueBro. Stainless Steel Sinks And Fittings: a. Self-rimming, 18 gauge (1.2 mm) stainless steel, satin finish. b. Double Compartment Sinks: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Elkay: LR 3319. b) Just: DL-1933-A-GR. c. Stainless Steel Sink Fittings: 1) Faucets for Standard Double and Single Compartment Sinks: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) American Standard: Heritage Kitchen Faucet with Lever Handles 7270.342H. (2) Chicago: 1888CP. (3) Delta: 27C2243-S6 (4) Kohler: K-7761-K with handles K-16012-5. (5) Moen: 8227. (6) Speakman: SC-5724. (7) Zurn Commercial Brass: Z-831J3. 2) Supply pipes with stops: a) Provide chrome plated quarter-turn brass ball valve, 12 inches (300 mm) long braided stainless steel riser, and chrome-plated steel flange. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) McGuire: BV2165CC. (2) Zurn: Z8804 LRQ-PC. 3) Flow Control Fitting: a) Provide vandal-proof type in place of aerator. Flow shall be 2.0 gpm. b) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Omni A-200 Series by Chronomite Laboratories. 4) Waste For Standard Stainless Steel Sinks: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Elkay: LK-99. (2) Kohler: K8801. (3) McGuire: 151. (4) Zurn Z-8740-PC. 5) Trap: a) 17 gauge (1.4 mm) tube 'P' trap, chrome plated. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Dearborn. (2) Engineered Brass Company (EBC). (3) Keeney Manufacturing. (4) McGuire: MCT150075NCZN. (5) Zurn. Miscellaneous Sinks And Fittings: a. Service Sink: 1) Floor Type, enameled cast iron, 28 inches (711 mm) square with vinyl coated rim guard or 24 inches (610 mm) square with Stainless Steel rim guard. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) American Standard: Florwell Enameled Cast Iron 7741.000 with vinyl rim guard 7745.811. b) CECO: 871 c) Gerber: 12-905. -322 4216

08.29.11

Commercial Lavatories And Sinks

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3)

d) Kohler: Whitby K-6710. e) Zurn: 5850. Service Sink Fittings: a) Supply: (1) Mounting height of 42 inches (1 050 mm). (2) Provide 48 inch (1 200 mm) hose and clamp unless spout is threaded. (3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (a) American Standard: Exposed Yoke Wall-Mount Utility Faucet with top brace 8344.112 with threaded spout. (b) Chicago: 897 CP. (c) Delta: 28T9 with 28T911 hose and bracket. (d) Gerber: C4-44-654. (d) Kohler: K-8928. (e) Moen: 8124. (f) Speakman: SC-5812. (g) T&S: B-0665-BSTP. (h) Zurn: Z-843M1. b) Drain and Strainer: (1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (a) American Standard: Stainless Steel Sink Strainer Drain 4320.024. 7721.038. (b) Kohler: K-9146, 3 inch IPS. c) Trap: Cast iron, PVC, or ABS to match piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. Install each fixture with separate vent line. Do not circuit vent. Ensure provisions are made for proper support of fixtures and that rough-in piping is accurately set and protected from movement and damage. Seal wall-mounted fixtures around edges to wall and counter top fixtures to countertop with sealant specified in Section 07 9213. Unless otherwise noted, provide each individual fixture supply with chrome-plated stop valve with hand wheel. Install fixtures with accessible stop or control valve in each hot and cold water branch supply line. Self-Supporting Lavatories: Install using carriers. Support carrier free of finished wall.

C.

D.

E. F.

3.2

CLEANING A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.

END OF SECTION

Commercial Lavatories And Sinks

-4-

22 4216

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 22 4700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install drinking water cooling system units as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 0501: Common Plumbing Requirements. 2. Section 22 1116: Domestic Water Piping.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Acorn Aqua, City of Industry, CA www.acornaqua.com. b. Elkay Manufacturing Co, Oak Brook, IL www.elkay.com. c. Halsey Taylor, Oak Brook, IL www.halseytaylor.com. d. Haws, Drinking Faucet Co, Sparks, NV www.hawsco.com. e. Oasis, Tri Palm International, Columbus OH www.oasiswatercoolers.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim shall be chrome plated. b. Do not use flexible water piping. Materials: 1. Handicap Accessible Bi-Level Fountain: a. Include accessory fountain. Vandal proof operating bar on front and both sides. 7.8 GPH (29.5 LPH) minimum of 50 deg F (10 deg C) water with 90 deg F (32 deg C) room temperature, 1/5 horsepower motor, 120 V, 60 Hz, single phase. Flexi-guard or chrome plated brass bubbler. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) AcornAqua: AquaAccess A112108F. 2) Elkay: Model EZSTL8C. 3) Halsey Taylor: HAC8FSBL-Q. 4) Haws: HWUACO8L 5) Oasis: PG8ACSL.

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. Install fixtures with accessible stop or control valve. Mounting: 1. General: -122 4700

Drinking Fountains And Water Coolers

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake a. Coordinate location of fountain with location and height of electrical outlet to ensure concealment of outlet by fountain. b. Anchor bottom of fountain to wall. c. Install 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) IPS union connection and Chicago No. 441 stop to building supply line. d. Install 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) IPS slip cast brass 'P' trap. Install trap so it is concealed. Handicap Accessible Bi-Level Fountain: Top surfaces to be 40 and 32 inches (1 016 and 813 mm) above floor unless required otherwise by local code.

08.29.11

3.2

CLEANING A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.

END OF SECTION

Drinking Fountains And Water Coolers

-2-

22 4700

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D I V I S I O N 23: H E A T I N G, V E N T I L A T I N G, A N D AIR-CONDITIONING
23 0000 H E A T I N G, V E N T I L A T I N G, A N D A I R - C O N D I T I O N I N G 23 0501 23 0529 23 0553 23 0713 23 0719 23 0933 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT DUCT INSULATION HVAC PIPING INSULATION ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC

23 1000 F A C I L I T Y F U E L S Y S T E M S 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 2000 H V A C P I P I N G A N D P U M P S 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2600 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING 23 3000 H V A C A I R D I S T R I B U T I O N 23 3001 23 3114 23 3300 23 3346 23 3400 23 3713 23 3714 COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS LOW-PRESSURE METAL DUCTS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES FLEXIBLE DUCTS HVAC FANS DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES LOUVERS AND VENTS

23 4000 H V A C A I R C L E A N I N G D E V I C E S 23 4100 AIR FILTERS 23 5000 C E N T R A L H E A T I N G E Q U I P M E N T 23 5135 AIR PIPING 23 5417 GAS-FIRED FURNACES 23 6000 C E N T R A L C O O L I N G E Q U I P M E N T 23 6213 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 23 8000 D E C E N T R A L I Z E D H V A C E Q U I P M E N T 23 8333 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 23 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 0501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common requirements and procedures for HVAC systems. 2. Responsibility for proper operation of electrically powered equipment furnished under this Division. 3. Interface with Testing And Balancing Agency. 4. Furnish and install sealants relating to installation of systems installed under this Division. 5. Furnish and install Firestop Penetration Systems for HVAC system penetrations as described in Contract Documents. 6. Furnish and install sound, vibration, and seismic control elements. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Sleeves, inserts, and equipment for mechanical systems installed under other Sections. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3053: Exterior concrete pads and bases for mechanical equipment. 2. Section 05 0523: Quality and requirements for welding. 3. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 4. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants used at building exterior. 5. Section 07 9219: Quality of acoustical sealants. 6. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of mechanical items requiring field painting. 7. Section 26 2913: Magnetic starters and thermal protective devices (heaters) not factory mounted integral part of mechanical equipment. 8. Division 26: Raceway and conduit, unless specified otherwise, line voltage wiring, outlets, and disconnect switches. 9. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials. 10. Sections Under 33 5000 Heading: Fuel Distribution Utilities.

B.

C.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1) Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include Manufacturer's catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to show compliance with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data underlined. 2) Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Schematic control diagrams for each separate fan system, heating system, control panel, etc. Each diagram shall show locations of all control and operational components and devices. Mark correct operating settings for each control device on these diagrams. b. Diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items such as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. Include drawings showing electrical power requirements and connection locations.

Common HVAC Requirements

-1-

23 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c. d. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components in panels and their function. Other shop drawings required by Division 23 trade Sections.

08.29.11

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data (Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7800): 1) At beginning of HVAC section of Operations And Maintenance Manual, provide master index showing items included. a) Provide name, address, and phone number of Architect, Architect's Mechanical Engineer, General Contractor, and HVAC, Sheet Metal, Refrigeration, and Temperature Control subcontractors. b) Identify maintenance instructions by using same equipment identification used in Contract Drawings. Maintenance instructions shall include: (1) List of HVAC equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and nameplate data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item. (2) Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of HVAC equipment installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication instructions. (3) Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment, location, and type and frequency of lubrication. (4) Manual for Honeywell T7350 thermostat published by Honeywell. c) Provide operating instructions to include: (1) General description of each HVAC system. (2) Step by step procedure to follow in putting each piece of HVAC equipment into operation. (3) Provide diagrams for electrical control system showing wiring of items such as smoke detectors, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copies of warranties required in individual Sections of Division 23. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Copies of approved shop drawings.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of Gas Ordinances applicable to Project. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances. 2. In case of differences between building codes, laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Notify Architect in writing of such differences before performing work affected by such differences. Identification: 1. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL / ULC and AGA / CGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner.

B.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01: a. Stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by Architect until installed.

B.

Common HVAC Requirements

-2-

23 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake b. Store items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, in dry, heated spaces. c. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. d. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. Protect bearings during installation. Thoroughly grease steel shafts to prevent corrosion.

08.29.11

1.5

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment made out in favor of Owner. Clearly record 'start-up' date of each piece of equipment on certificate. Special Warranty: 1. Guarantee HVAC systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. If HVAC sub-contractor with offices located more than 150 miles (240 km) from Project site is used, provide service / warranty work agreement for warranty period with local HVAC subcontractor approved by Architect. Include copy of service / warranty agreement in warranty section of Operation And Maintenance Manual.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Components shall bear Manufacturer's name and trade name. Equipment and materials of same general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform appearance, operation, and maintenance. Pipe And Pipe Fittings: 1. Use domestic made pipe and pipe fittings on Project. 2. Weld-O-Let and Screw-O-Let fittings are acceptable. Sleeves: 1. In Framing: Standard weight galvanized iron pipe, Schedule 40 PVC, or 14 ga (2 mm) galvanized sheet metal two sizes larger than bare pipe or insulation on insulated pipe. 2. In Concrete And Masonry: Sleeves through outside walls, interior shear walls, and footings shall be schedule 80 black steel pipe with welded plate. Valves: 1. Valves of same type shall be of same manufacturer.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLERS A. Acceptable Installers. See Section 01 4301. 1. To be determined. 2. Approved HVAC Sub-Contractor shall be pre-approved in accordance with Supplementary Conditions and included in Construction Documents by Addendum.

3.2

EXAMINATION A. Drawings: -323 0501

Common HVAC Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1. 2.

3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake HVAC Drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over HVAC Drawings. Because of small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions.

08.29.11

B.

Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine premises to understand conditions that may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is dependent for efficiency and report work that requires correction. 2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. 3. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. If approval is received by Addendum or Change Order to use other than originally specified items, be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available. 4. Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordinate with Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner.

3.3

PREPARATION A. Changes Due To Equipment Selection: 1. Where equipment specified or otherwise approved requires different arrangement or connections from that shown in Contract Documents, submit drawings, if requested by Architect, showing proposed installations. 2. If proposed changes are approved, install equipment to operate properly and in harmony with intent of Contract Documents. Make incidental changes in piping, ductwork, supports, installation, wiring, heaters, panelboards, and as otherwise necessary. 3. Provide any additional motors, valves, controllers, fittings, and other additional equipment required for proper operation of system resulting from selection of equipment. 4. Be responsible for the proper location of roughing-in and connections provided under other Divisions.

3.4

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in sufficient time to be incorporated into construction as work proceeds. Locate these items and see they are properly installed. 2. Electrical: Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to installer of electrical system. 3. Testing And Balancing: a. Put HVAC systems into full operation and continue their operation during each working day of testing and balancing. b. Make changes in pulleys, belts, fan speeds, and dampers or add dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by Testing And Balancing Agency and at no additional cost to Owner. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to previously installed or existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses.

B.

Common HVAC Requirements

-4-

23 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Locating Equipment: 1. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, unions, traps, filters, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. 2. Adjust locations of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, and equipment to accommodate work to interferences anticipated and encountered. 3. Install HVAC work to permit removal of equipment and parts of equipment requiring periodic replacement or maintenance without damage to or interference with other parts of equipment or structure. 4. Determine exact route and location of each pipe and duct before fabrication. a. Right-Of-Way: 1) Lines that pitch shall have right-of-way over those that do not pitch. For example, steam, steam condensate, and drains shall normally have right-of-way. 2) Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. b. Offsets, Transitions, and Changes in Direction: 1) Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes and ducts as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on Drawings. 2) Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and devices as required to effect these offsets, transitions, and changes in direction. Piping: 1. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control entire apparatus. a. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect. b. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. 1) Arrange so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles. 2) Provide accessible flanges or ground joint unions, as applicable for type of piping specified, at connections to equipment and on bypasses. a) Make connections of dissimilar metals with di-electric unions. b) Install valves and unions ahead of traps and strainers. Provide unions on both sides of traps. 3) Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, bull head tees, close nipples, or running couplings. 4) Install piping systems so they may be easily drained. Provide drain valves at low points and manual air vents at high points in hot water heating and cooling water piping. 5) Install piping to insure noiseless circulation. 6) Place valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access. Valves shall be regulated, packed, and glands adjusted at completion of work before final acceptance. c. Do not install piping in shear walls. 2. Properly make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. a. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes. b. Work piping into place without springing or forcing. Make piping connections to pumps and other equipment without strain at piping connection. Remove bolts in flanged connections or disconnect piping to demonstrate that piping has been so connected, if requested. c. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. d. Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe: 1) Provide for expansion in every 30 feet (9 meters) of straight run. 2) Provide 12 inch (300 mm) offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof. 3. Provide sleeves around pipes passing through concrete or masonry floors, walls, partitions, or structural members. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete floors on grade. Seal sleeves with specified sealants. a. Sleeves through floors shall extend 1/4 inch (6 mm) above floor finish in mechanical equipment rooms above basement floor. In other rooms, sleeves shall be flush with floor. b. Sleeves through floors and foundation walls shall be watertight.

D.

Common HVAC Requirements

-5-

23 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101 4.

5.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Provide spring clamp plates (escutcheons) where pipes run through walls, floors, or ceilings and are exposed in finished locations of building. Plates shall be chrome plated heavy brass of plain pattern and shall be set tight on pipe and to building surface. Remove dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from each length of piping before installation. a. After each section of piping used for movement of water or steam is installed, flush with clean water, except where specified otherwise. b. Arrange temporary flushing connections for each section of piping and arrange for flushing total piping system. c. Provide temporary cross connections and water supply for flushing and drainage and remove after completion of work.

08.29.11

E.

Penetration Firestops: Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at HVAC system penetrations through walls, ceilings, roofs, and top plates of walls. Sealants: 1. Seal openings through building exterior caused by penetrations of elements of HVAC systems. 2. Furnish and install acoustical sealant to seal penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and ceilings.

F.

3.5

REPAIR / RESTORATION A. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it. 1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. 2. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.

3.6

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Perform tests on HVAC piping systems. Furnish devices required for testing purposes. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Replace material or workmanship proven defective with sound material at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Repeat tests on new material, if requested.

B.

3.7

SYSTEM START-UP A. Off-Season Start-up: 1. If Substantial Completion inspection occurs during heating season, schedule spring start-up of cooling systems. If inspection occurs during cooling season, schedule autumn start-up for heating systems. 2. Notify Owner seven days minimum before scheduled start-up. 3. Time will be allowed to completely service, test, check, and off-season start systems. During allowed time, train Owner's representatives in operation and maintenance of system. 4. At end of off-season start-up, furnish Owner with letter confirming that above work has been satisfactorily completed. Preparations that are to be completed before start up and operation include, but are not limited to, following: 1. Dry out electric motors and other equipment to develop and properly maintain constant insulation resistance. 2. Make adjustments to insure that: a. Equipment alignments and clearances are adjusted to allowable tolerances. b. Nuts and bolts and other types of anchors and fasteners are properly and securely fastened. -623 0501

B.

Common HVAC Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake c. Packed, gasketed, and other types of joints are properly made up and are tight and free from leakage. d. Miscellaneous alignings, tightenings, and adjustings are completed so systems are tight and free from leakage and equipment performs as intended. Motors and accessories are completely operable. Inspect and test electrical circuitry, connections, and voltages to be properly connected and free from shorts. Adjust drives for proper alignment and tension. Make certain filters in equipment for moving air are new and of specified type. Properly lubricate and run-in bearings in accordance with Manufacturer's directions and recommendations.

08.29.11

3.8

CLEANING A. B. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, and equipment. No more than one week before Final Inspection, flush out bearings and clean other lubricated surfaces with flushing oil. Provide best quality and grade of lubricant specified by Equipment Manufacturer. Replace filters in equipment for moving air with new filters of specified type no more than one week before Final Inspection.

C.

3.9

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction Of Owner: 1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Stake Physical Facilities Representative in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operation And Maintenance Manual when so doing. a. Minimum Instruction Periods: 1) HVAC: Eight hours. 2) Temperature Control: Six hours. 3) Refrigeration: Four hours. b. Conduct instruction periods after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another.

3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials. Do not operate pieces of equipment used for moving supply air without proper air filters installed properly in system. After start-up, continue necessary lubrication and be responsible for damage to bearings while equipment is being operated up to Substantial Completion.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

Common HVAC Requirements

-7-

23 0501

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 0529

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common hanger and support requirements and procedures for HVAC systems. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0523: Quality and requirements for welding. 2. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 3. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of mechanical items requiring field painting. 4. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Class Two Quality Standard Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200: a. Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH www.anvilintl.com. b. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.cooperbline.com. c. Erico International, Solon, OH www.erico.com. d. Hilti Inc, Tulsa, OK www.hilti.com. e. Minerallac, Hampshire, IL www.minerallac.com. f. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.superstrut.com. g. Unistrut, Wayne, MI www.unistrut.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Support rods for single pipe shall be in accordance with following table: Rod Diameter Pipe Size Rod Diameter Pipe Size 3/8 inch 2 inches and smaller 10 mm 50 mm and smaller 1/2 inch 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches 13 mm 63 mm to 88 mm 5/8 inch 4 to 5 inches 16 mm 100 mm to 125 mm 3/4 inch 6 inches 19 mm 150 mm 7/8 inch 8 to 12 inches 22 mm 200 mm to 300 mm b. Support rods for multiple pipes supported on steel angle trapeze hangers shall be in accordance with following table: Rods Number of Pipes per Hanger for Each Pipe Size No. Diameter 2 Inch 2.5 Inch 3 Inch 4 Inch 5 Inch 6 Inch 8 Inch 2 3/8 Inch Two 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1/2 Inch Three Three Two 0 0 0 0 2 5/8 Inch Six Four Three Two 0 0 0 2 5/8 Inch Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 0 2 5/8 Inch Twelve Nine Seven Five Three Two Two Rods Diameter Number of Pipes per Hanger for Each Pipe Size 63mm 75mm 100mm 125mm 150mm

B.

No.

50mm

200mm

Hangers and Supports for HVAC

-1-

23 0529

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2 10 mm Two 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 13 mm Three Three Two 0 0 0 0 2 16 mm Six Four Three Two 0 0 0 2 19 mm Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 0 2 22 mm Twelve Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 1) Size trapeze angles so bending stress is less than 10,000 psi (69 Mpa).

08.29.11

C.

Materials: 1. Hangers, Rods, Channels, Attachments, And Inserts: a. Galvanized and UL approved for service intended. b. Support horizontal piping from clevis hangers or on roller assemblies with channel supports, except where trapeze type hangers are explicitly shown on Drawings. Hangers shall have double nuts. c. Class Two Quality Standards: 1) Support insulated pipes with clevis hanger equal to Anvil Fig 260 or roller assembly equal to Anvil Fig 171 with an insulation protection shield equal to Anvil Fig 167. Gauge and length of shield shall be in accordance with Anvil design data. 2) Except uninsulated copper pipes, support uninsulated pipes from clevis hanger equal to Anvil Fig 260. Support uninsulated copper pipe from hanger equal to Anvil Fig CT-65 copper plated hangers and otherwise fully suitable for use with copper tubing. d. Riser Clamps For Vertical Piping: 1) Class Two Quality Standard: Anvil Figure 261.

EXECUTION

2.2

INSTALLATION A. Piping: 1. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. a. Except for underground pipe, suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls using support channels and clamps. Do not hang pipe from other pipe, equipment, or ductwork. Laying of piping on any building element is not allowed. b. Supports For Horizontal Piping: 1) Support metal piping at 96 inches (2 400) mm on center maximum for pipe 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) or larger and 72 inches (1 800 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1-1/8 inch (28 mm) or less. 2) Support thermoplastic pipe at 48 inches (1 200 mm) on center maximum. 3) Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required. c. Supports for Vertical Piping: 1) Place riser clamps at each floor or ceiling level. 2) Securely support clamps by structural members, which in turn are supported directly from building structure. 3) Provide clamps as necessary to brace pipe to wall. d. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape. e. Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe: 1) Provide for expansion in every 30 feet (9 meters) of straight run. 2) Provide 12 inch (300 mm) offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof.

END OF SECTION

Hangers and Supports for HVAC

-2-

23 0529

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 0553

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install identification of HVAC equipment and piping as described in Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Description: 1. Abbreviations for Pipe Stencils and Equipment Identification and Band Colors for Pipe Identification: a. Apply stenciled symbols and continuous painting as follows: Pipe Type Pipe Color Symbol Gas Yellow GAS Materials: 1. Paint: a. Paints specified are from Pittsburgh Paint & Glass (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA www.ppgaf.com or PPG Canada Inc, Mississauga, ON (800) 263-4350 or (905) 238-6441. b. One Coat Primer: 1) 6-2 Quick Drying Latex Primer Sealer over fabric covers. 2) 6-205 Metal Primer under dark color paint. 3) 6-6 Metal Primer under light color paint. c. Finish Coats: Two coats 53 Line Acrylic Enamel. d. Class Two Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200. 1) Paint of equal quality from other Manufacturers may be used. 2) Maintain specified colors, shades, and contrasts. 2. Labels: a. Equipment Identification: 1) Black formica, with white reveal when engraved. 2) Lettering to be 3/16 inch (5 mm) high minimum.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION A. Labels: 1. Identify following items with specified labels fastened to equipment with screws (unless noted otherwise): a. Thermostats and control panels in mechanical spaces (attach label to wall directly above or below thermostats). b. Furnaces. c. Condensing units. d. Electric Wall Heaters. e. Accessible exhaust fans. -123 0553

I. D. For HVAC Piping And Equipment

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Painting: 1. Leave equipment in like-new appearance. 2. Only painted legends, directional arrows, and color bands are acceptable. 3. Locate identifying legends, directional arrows, and color bands at following points on exposed piping of each piping system: a. Adjacent to each item of equipment. b. At point of entry and exit where piping goes through wall. c. On each riser and junction. d. Every 25 feet (7.620 m) on long continuous lines. e. Stenciled symbols shall be one inch high and black.

END OF SECTION

I. D. For HVAC Piping And Equipment

-2-

23 0553

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install thermal wrap duct insulation as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 3113: Low-Pressure Metal Ducts. 2. Section 23 3300: Acoustic duct liner.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Contact List: 1. Certainteed St Gobain, Valley Forge, PA www.certainteed.com. 2. Johns-Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com. 3. Knauf Fiber Glass, Shelbyville, IN www.knauffiberglass.com or Toronto, ON (416) 593-4322. 4. Manson Insulation Inc, Brossard, QB www.isolationmanson.com. 5. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH or Owens-Corning Canada Inc, Willowdale, ON www.owenscorning.com.

2.2

MATERIALS A. Thermal Wrap Duct Insulation: 1. 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) or 3 inch (76 mm) thick fiberglass with factory-laminated, reinforced aluminum foil scrim kraft facing and density of 0.75 lb / per cu ft (12 kg / per cu m). 2. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU in/HR SF deg F at 75 deg F (24 deg C) maximum. 3. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Type 75 standard duct insulation by Certainteed St Gobain. b. Microlite FSK by Johns-Manville. c. Duct Wrap FSK by Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Alley Wrap FSK by Manson Insulation Inc. e. FRK by Owens-Corning. f. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Thermal Wrap Duct Insulation: 1. Install insulation as follows: a. Within Building Insulation Envelope: 1) 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick on outside air ducts and combustion air ducts. b. Outside Building Insulation Envelope: 1) 3 inch (76 mm) thick on round supply and return air ducts. 2) 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) thick on rectangular, acoustically lined, supply and return air ducts. -123 0713

Duct Insulation

Project # 503-6925-11010101 2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Wrap insulation tightly on ductwork with circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped minimum 2 inches (50 mm). a. Do not compress insulation except in areas of structural interference. Minimum thickness at corners shall be one inch (25 mm) thick. b. Remove insulation from lap before stapling. c. Staple seams at approximately 16 inches (400 mm) on center with outward clenching staples. d. Seal seams with foil vapor barrier tape or vapor barrier mastic. Seal penetrations of facing to provide vapor tight system.

08.29.11

B.

Insulate outside of ceiling diffusers, diffuser drops, and duct silencers same as ductwork.

END OF SECTION

Duct Insulation

-2-

23 0713

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install insulation on above ground refrigerant piping and fittings as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 0501: General Mechanical Requirements.

B.

1.2

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Keep materials and work dry and free from damage. 2. Replace wet or damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Armacell, Mebane, NC www.armaflex.com. b. Childers Products Co, Eastlake, OH www.fosterproducts.com. c. Foster Products Corp, Oakdale, MN www.fosterproducts.com. d. Johns-Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com. e. Knauf, Shelbyville, IN www.knauffiberglass.com. f. Manson, Brossard, BC, Canada www.isolationmanson.com. g. Nitron Industries, Thousand Oaks, CA www.nitronindustries.com. h. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH www.owenscorning.com or Owens-Corning Canada Inc, Willowdale, ON (416) 733-1600. i. Ramco, Lawrenceville, NJ www.ramco.com. j. Nomac, Zebulon, NC www.nomaco.com. k. Speedline Corp, Solon, OH www.speedlinepvc.com. Materials: 1. Refrigeration Piping System: a. Thickness: Pipe Size, Outside Diameter One inch and smaller 1-1/8 to 2 inch 2-1/8 inches and larger

B.

Insulation Thickness 1/2 Inch 3/4 Inch One inch or two layers of 1/2 inch

Pipe Size, Outside Diameter Insulation Thickness 25 mm and smaller 13 mm 29 to 50 mm 19 mm 54 mm and larger 25 mm or two layers of 13 mm 1) One inch (25 mm) sheet for fittings as recommended by Manufacturer. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. HVAC Piping Insulation -123 0719

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

b.

c.

d.

a) AP Armaflex 25/50 by Armacell. b) Nitrolite by Nitron Industries. White only for exterior. c) Nomaco K-Flex. Joint Sealer: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Armacell 520 by Armacell. b) Namaco K-Flex R-373. Insulation Tape: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Armaflex AP Insul Tape by Armacell. b) FT182 Tape by Nitron Industries. c) Elastomeric Foamtape by Nomac K-Flex. Exterior Finish: 1) For application to non-white, exterior insulation. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) WB Armaflex Finish by Armacell. b) R-374 Protective Coating by Nomaco K-Flex.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Before application of insulating materials, brush clean surfaces to be insulated and make free from rust, scale, grease, dirt, moisture, and any other deleterious materials. Use drop cloths over equipment and structure to prevent adhesives and other materials spotting the work.

B.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Refrigeration System Piping System: 1. General: a. Install insulation in snug contact with pipe. 1) Insulate flexible pipe connectors. 2) Insulate thermal expansion valves with insulating tape. 3) Insulate fittings with sheet insulation and as recommended by Manufacturer. b. Slip insulation on tubing before tubing sections and fittings are assembled keeping slitting of insulation to a minimum. c. Do not install insulation on lines through clamp assembly of pipe support. Butt insulation up against sides of clamp assembly. d. Stagger joints on layered insulation. Seal joints in insulation. e. Install insulation exposed outside building so 'slit' joint seams are placed on bottom of pipe. f. Paint exterior exposed, non-white insulation with two coats of specified exterior finish. 2. System Requirements: a. Condensing Units: Install insulation on above ground refrigerant suction piping and fittings, including thermal bulb, from thermal expansion valve.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Method of installing insulation shall be subject to approval of Architect. Sloppy or unworkmanlike installations are not acceptable.

HVAC Piping Insulation

-2-

23 0719

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.4 CLEANING A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Leave premises thoroughly clean and free from insulating debris.

3.5

PROTECTION A. Protect insulation wherever leak from valve stem or other source might drip on insulated surface, with aluminum cover or shield rolled up at edges and sufficiently large in area and of shape that dripping will not splash on surrounding insulation.

END OF SECTION

HVAC Piping Insulation

-3-

23 0719

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 23 0933 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install automatic temperature control system as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install conductors and make connections to control devices, motors, and associated equipment. 3. Assist in air test and balance procedure. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements. 2. Section 23 0593: Air test and balance. 3. Section 23 3300: Furnishing and installing of temperature control dampers. 4. Division 26: a. Furnishing and installing of raceway, conduit, and junction boxes, including pull wires, for temperature control system except as noted above. b. Power wiring to magnetic starters, disconnect switches, and motors. c. Motor starters and disconnect switches, unless integral with packaged equipment.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Statements: Submit document from Approved Distributor confirming contractor sponsorship. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Leave with O&M Manual specified in Section 23 0501. 2) Provide two CD copies with fully commissioned LonSpec database.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Installer: a. Before bidding, obtain sponsorship from a local, Approved Distributor specified under PART 2 PRODUCTS. Initial requirements for sponsorship are: 1) Be one of following Honeywell supported partners: a) Honeywell Authorized Control Integrator (ACI). b) Honeywell-Automation Control Specialist (ACS). c) Honeywell-Commercial Automation Contractor (CAC). 2) Receive product training from and exhibit LCBS system skills to sponsoring Approved Distributor.

Electric And Electronic Control System for HVAC

-1-

23 0933

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Air Products & Controls Ltd, Pontiac, MI www.ap-c.com. b. Fire-Lite Alarms, Northford, CT www.firelite.com. c. Honeywell Inc, Minneapolis, MN www.honeywell.com. d. ICCA Firex, Carol Stream, IL www.icca.invensys.com. e. System Sensor, St Charles, IL www.systemsensor.com. f. Zimmerman Technologies, Renton, WA (425) 255-1906. Distributors: 1. Obtain WebStat Building Manager, RP panels, thermostats, and other control equipment from following Sponsoring Approved Distributors. See Section 01 4301: 2. Utah: a. Wilson-Mohr, Inc: (801) 486-8791. kmurphy@wilsonmohr.com Kathy Murphy b. Control Equipment Co: (800) 452-1457. rhowe@controlequiputah.com Ray Howe c. RSD Total Control: (801) 523-6430. lguiver@rsd.net Larry Guiver Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Automatic Temperature Control System design concept utilizes communicating thermostats located near furnace, with electronic sensors and electric / electronic actuation of dampers and with thermostats connected with Echelon approved communication cable. A WebStat Building Manager will interface with the thermostats to provide access via internet browser. b. Network communications and control devices will be LonWorks compliant. System shall include HVAC control, WebStat Building Manager to provide maintenance management functions related to normal building operations. Components: 1. Thermostats And Sensors: a. Thermostat and Sensor Kit: 1) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Part Number Y7335H1009 consisting of following: (1) Communicating Thermostat: Low voltage type provided with automatic change-over feature for both heating and cooling stages, seven-day / 365 day program with two starts and stops per day, and provisions for damper operators. Honeywell T7350H1009. (2) Push-Button Remote Room Sensor: Honeywell T7771A1005 with three push buttons, OVERRIDE, WARMER, COOLER, and with selectable ohm resistance, 10k or 20k. (3) Discharge Air Sensor: Honeywell C7041B2005, 6 inch b. Plain Face Remote Room Sensor: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Honeywell TR21-A, plain face, 10k ohms. b) Honeywell TR21, plain face, 20k ohms. 2. Guard For Cultural Center Sensors: a. Match color of sensor. b. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) MSI-244 Sensor Guard with integral wood base by Zimmerman Technologies. 3. Duct Smoke Detectors: a. Duct mounted smoke detector in systems with airflow greater than 2000 CFM. b. Intelligent low flow photoelectric duct smoke detector with flash scan. c. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) System Sensor Model D4120. 4. Transformer: a. 120 / 24 V, 50VA Honeywell AT150F. -223 0933

B.

C.

D.

Electric And Electronic Control System for HVAC

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

5.

6.

7.

8.

b. 120 / 24 V, 75VA Honeywell AT175F. Damper Actuators: a. Electric type equipped for Class I wiring. b. Shall not consume power during UNOCCUPIED cycle or use chemicals or expandable media. c. Have built in spring return. d. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Honeywell MS8105A1030/U. 2) Honeywell MS8105A1130 w/ End switch. Conductors: a. Color-coded and No. 16 and No. 12 AWG Type TWN, TFN, or THHN, stranded. b. Thermostat Cable: 12, 8, or 4 conductor, 18AWG solid copper wire, insulated with highdensity polyethylene. Conductors parallel enclosed in brown PVC jacket (22 AWG cable not allowed). c. Communicating Cable: 1) Class Two Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200: a) CAT 4, 22 gauge (0.025 in) (0.645 mm), twisted pair, non-plenum and nonshielded cable. Local Relay (RP) Panels For Chapel And Cultural Center Systems: a. 16-ga (1.59 mm) screw cover, painted sheet metal. Box with cover and knockouts, prewired terminal strips, relay, and transformer. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Standard: LDS Models RP-1 or RP-5. 2) Dehumidification: LDS Model RP-5DH. Web based building manager: a. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Honeywell Webstat: Model W7350A1000.

E.

Operation Sequences: 1. Programmable thermostat shall control unoccupied and occupied status of fan system based on adjustable seven day program and remote room sensor / push button. Fan shall run continuously in occupied mode and cycle in unoccupied mode. 2. Adjustable heating and cooling set points shall control space temperature by activating either heating or cooling equipment. Programmable thermostat provides automatic change over between heating and cooling. 3. Remote room sensor provides optional override of thermostat program by allowing three hour timed override of thermostat program at any time by pushing ON / OFF button on remote room sensor cover. This shall activate thermostat to occupied mode and system shall control to occupied set point. 4. Minimum outside air damper, spring return type, shall open in occupied mode and remain closed in unoccupied mode in zones using outside air. 5. Two Sensor Averaging, Bishop Zone: a. Sensors shall control zone HVAC equipment by averaging temperature in spaces containing sensors. b. Third dummy sensor, typically located in unlocked common space, is place-holder for OVERRIDE, WARMER, and COOLER buttons and does not sense temperature. 6. Two Sensor Averaging: One sensor has OVERRIDE, WARMER, COOLER buttons. Set jumper to appropriate setting necessary to average with another sensor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLERS A. Acceptable Installers. See Section 01 4301: 1. To be determined. 2. Approved Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall be pre-approved in accordance with Supplementary Conditions and included in Construction Documents by Addendum.

Electric And Electronic Control System for HVAC

-3-

23 0933

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.2 INSTALLATION A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Interface With Other Work: 1. Calibrate room thermostats as required during air test and balance. Insulate sensor J-box with fiberglass insulation; expandable/ foam insulation is NOT acceptable 2. Instruct air test and balance personnel in proper use and setting of control system components. 3. Install low voltage electrical wiring in accordance with Division 26 of these Specifications. Communication Cable: 1. Network communicating thermostats and WebStat Building Manager together with specified communicating cable. 2. Do not bundle communication cables with cables of other systems. Maintain 12 inches minimum distance from wires of other systems, except communication cable may cross other low-voltage wiring if done perpendicularly. Safety Controls: Interlock duct smoke detectors to keep heating, cooling, and system fan from operating when detector is energized. Mount damper actuators and actuator linkages external of airflow. Make certain dampers operate freely without binding or with actuator housing moving. Paste copy of record control wiring diagram on back of relay panel door cover for each multiple furnace system.

B.

C.

D.

E.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Calibrate, adjust, and set controls for proper operation, operate systems, and be prepared to prove operation of any part of control system. This work is to be completed before presubstantial completion inspection. 2. Test each individual heating, cooling, and damper control for proper operation using control system.

3.4

SYSTEM STARTUP A. For systems with WebStat Building Manager. 1. Contractor is responsible for a fully functioning control system accessible via internet web browser. Contractor is responsible to coordinate Network start up with assistance from local IT technician. Local IT technician shall provide Static, IP address, Network Mask, Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server, Local Host Name, Local Domain Name. 2. Contractor is responsible configuring all thermostats with proper zone names, zone scheduling, proper Church conference / holiday scheduling, all to be coordinated with local FM manager. Set proper clock setting including day/month/year. Use WebStat as network time master from System tab in WebStat. 3. Set remote sensor to T7771. 4. Set remote humidity to none unless using remote humidity sensor on DH systems. 5. Set Occupancy sensor to None. 6. Set Discharge Air Temp sensor to Remote. 7. Set Heating / Cooling to proper stages 8. Set heat cycle rates to 9 cph and cooling to 4 cph. Set discharge high limit to 110 degrees but do not activate (check) the high limit option. This is only to be used later by owner if equipment experiences issues with system overshoot. 9. Set Aux relay to Time of Day. 10. Set fan switch operation to ON. 11. Set minimum UnOcc start time for all days. No days shall be scheduled Unconfigured. 12. Set occupied start times to match meeting start times; provided by local FM manager.

Electric And Electronic Control System for HVAC

-4-

23 0933

Project # 503-6925-11010101 13. 14. 15. 16. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Place all zone over-ride durations to 1 hour except for Bishop and Stake area which shall be set to 2 hours. Set Occupied default heating setpoints to 70 degrees, cooling setpoints to 74 degrees. Set UnOccupied default heating setpoint to 60 degrees, cooling setpoints to 90 degrees. Set each zone to applicable Holiday scheduling for General & Stake Conferences.

08.29.11

WebStat settings 1. Obtain from IT a LAN / WAN SMTP email server name for system alarming; where applicable. 2. Create alarm setpoint of 55 degrees low limit / 92 degrees high limit for all zones. 3. Create separate Administrative User level for Local FM Manager.

3.5

ADJUSTING A. Program minimum of one days operation into thermostat memory function.

3.6

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction Of Owner: 1. Include as part of training required in Section 23 0501, following training: a. Training shall be by personnel of installing company and utilize operators manuals and asbuilt documentation. b. Provide training in two sessions including WebStat for up to six hours total. First session will occur between system completion and Substantial Completion. Second session will occur within 45 days of Substantial Completion when agreed upon by Owner. c. Training shall include sequence of operation review, selection of displays, modification of schedules and setpoints, troubleshooting of sensors, etc, as follows: 1) Control System Overview: a) Show access to system through both individual thermostats and Internet browser via WebStat and how network works. Demonstrate scheduling for Stake and General Conferences. 2) Thermostat Programming From Keypad: Instructions on developing setpoints and schedules and adjusting local zone temperatures. 3) Thermostat Operation: a) Identify and explain use of buttons on thermostat face, I.E. 'i' or information button, warmer button, and cooler button. b) Identify and explain buttons under thermostat cover. c) Provide training for Thermostat Palm Program. 4) WebStat training with local Facilities Manager during two sessions. a) Review all features accessible from the Overview tab including individual zone details, setpoints and fan, show schedule, edit configuration. b) Review all features accessible from schedules including multiple schedules, zone assignments, holiday scheduling/ conference scheduling. c) Review alarm configurations, alarm assignments, alarm priority. d) Review user levels and creating users. e) Review thermostat editing and configuration. Explain each thermostat programming option. Explain download pending, download, & commissioning. f) Review System backup configuration, restore configuration, reboot WebStat, Network Time Master, time and date setting and Local Weather option. No OAT is associated. g) Review system User Log in and User Log Out process.

END OF SECTION

Electric And Electronic Control System for HVAC

-5-

23 0933

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavation and backfill required for work of this Section. 2. Furnish and install gas piping and fittings within building and from building to future meter location as described in Contract Documents. 3. Building will be served by Propane Fuel Tank with primary and secondary pressure regulators as needed. 4. Natural Gas may be provided to this building in the future. System shall be compatible with both Natural Gas and Propane Fuel Related Requirements: 1. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of exterior piping. 2. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements. 3. Section 31 2316: Procedure and quality of excavation. 4. Section 31 2323: Procedure and quality of backfill and compaction. 5. Section 33 5100: Gas line from meter to main.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A53-07, 'Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.' b. ASTM A234-07, 'Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.' c. ASTM D2513-08b, 'Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings.'

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Welders: a. Welders shall be certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days before commencing work on project. If there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Owner's Representative may require welder to take another test. This shall be done at no cost to Owner. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other approved authority. 2. Pipe Installers: a. Polyethylene pipe installers shall be properly trained and certified in procedure for joining polyethylene pipe.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Do not store polyethylene pipe so it is exposed to sunlight.

Facility Natural-Gas Piping

-1-

23 1123

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. BrassCraft, Novi, MI www.brasscraft.com. b. Cimberio Valve Co Inc, Malvern, PA www.cimberio.com. c. ConBraCo Industries, Inc, Matthews, NC www.conbraco.com or ConBraCo / Honeywell Ltd, Scarborough, ON (416) 293-8111. d. Dormont Manufacturing Company, Export, PA www.dormont.com. e. Jenkins-NH-Canada, Brantford, ON www.jenkins-nh-canada.com. f. Jomar International, Madison Heights, MI www.jomar.com. g. KOSO by Pacific Seismic Products Inc, Lancaster, CA www.psp4gasoff.com. h. Watts Regulator Co, North Andover, MA www.wattsreg.com or Watts Industries (Canada) Inc, Burlington, ON (888) 208-8927. Materials: 1. Above-Ground Pipe And Fittings: a. Black carbon steel, butt welded, Schedule 40 pipe meeting requirements of ASTM A53. b. Welded forged steel fittings meeting requirements of ASTM A234 or standard weight malleable iron screwed. 2. Below-Ground Pipe And Fittings: Polyethylene pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D2513 with No. 14 coated copper trace wire. 3. Valves: a. 125 psi (862 kPa) bronze body ball valve, UL listed. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) CIM 102.1 by Cimbrio Valve. 2) Apollo Series 80-100 by ConBraCo. 3) 'Red Cap' R602 by Jenkins NH Canada. 4) Model T-204 by Jomar International. 5) Model B-6000-UL by Watts Regulator. 4. Cocks: a. Gauge Cocks: Conbraco 41-560 bronze gauge cock. 5. Flexible Connector: a. Type 304 stainless steel corrugated tube coated for corrosion protection. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Dormont Supr-Safe. 2) BrassCraft Procoat.

B.

E 6. Seismic Valves: a. Natural gas seismic shut-off valves. 1) Rate at maximum 20 psi (138 kPA) pressure with positive seating from minus 40 deg F to plus 150 deg F (minus 40 deg C to plus 66 deg C) for exterior mounting near gas meter.

E 2) 3) UL listed valve, factory set for IBC Seismic Design Category D, E, or F. Size to be determined by total cu ft per hour gas flow requirement of building and following conditions: 0.1 inch water column maximum allowable pressure-drop through valve with available pressure of 4 oz. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) KOSO HPF Series.

4)

Facility Natural-Gas Piping

-2-

23 1123

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Steel pipe installed through air plenums, in walls, and pipes 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) and larger shall have welded fittings and joints. Other steel pipe may have screwed or welded fittings. Lay underground pipe in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and local gas utility company regulations and specifications. 1. Provide 24 inch (610 mm) minimum steel pipe between vertical rise of riser and end of polyethylene line if anode-less riser is not used. Use plastic-to-steel transition or compression fitting between end of polyethylene line and steel meter riser. Provide cathodic protection for steel riser or use anode-less riser. 2. Place tracer wire along side of polyethylene pipe from meter to point where pipe rises inside building. 3. Place 4 inches (100 mm) of sand around gas line buried underground. 4. Do not install gas piping under building floor slabs-on-grade. On lines serving gas-fired equipment, install gas cocks adjacent to equipment outside of equipment cabinet and easily accessible. Install 6 inch (150 mm) long minimum dirt leg, with pipe cap, on vertical gas drop serving each gasfired equipment unit. Use fittings for changes of directio n in pipe and for branch runouts. Install seismic valve in 24 inch (610 mm) long pipe section anchored to building wall at each end.

B.

C.

D.

E. F.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests: 1. Subject all portions of gas piping system, in sections or in entirety, to air pressure of 75 psig and prove airtight for 4 hours. 2. Disconnect equipment not suitable for 75 psig pressure from piping system during test period.

END OF SECTION

Facility Natural-Gas Piping

-3-

23 1123

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install piping and specialties for refrigeration systems as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements. 2. Section 23 0719: Refrigerant Piping Insulation. 3. Section 23 6213: Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A36-08, 'Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.' b. ASTM B280-08, 'Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.' 2. American Welding Society / American National Standards Institute: a. AWS / ANSI A5.8-2004, 'Specification for Brazing and Braze Welding.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Show each individual equipment and piping support. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Statements: Technician certificate for use of CFC and HCFC refrigerants.

B.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: Refrigerant piping shall be installed by a refrigeration subcontractor licensed by State and by technicians certified in use of CFC and HCFC refrigerants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Airtec, Fall River, MA, www.noventcaps.com. b. Cush-A-Clamp by ZSI Manufacturing, Canton, MI www.cushaclamp.com. c. Elkhart Products Corp, Elkhart, IN www.elkhartproducts.com. d. Emerson Climate Technologies, St Louis, MO www.emersonflowcontrols.com. e. Handy & Harman Products Division, Fairfield, CT www.handy-1.com. -123 2300

Refrigerant Piping

Project # 503-6925-11010101 f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Harris Products Group, Cincinnati, OH www.harrisproductsgroup.com. Henry Valve Co, Melrose Park, IL www.henrytech.com. Hilti Inc, Tulsa, OK www.hilti.com. Hydra-Zorb Co, Auburn Hills, MI www.hydra-zorb.com. Mueller Steam Specialty, St Pauls, NC www.muellersteam.com. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. Packless Industries, Waco, TX www.packless.com. Parker Corp, Cleveland, OH www.parker.com. Sporlan Valve Co, Washington, MO www.sporlan.com. Sherwood Valves, Washington, PA www.sherwoodvalve.com. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.superstrut.com. Unistrut Corp, Wayne, MI www.unistrut.com. Universal Metal Hose, Chicago, IL www.universalmetalhose.com. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Bloomingdale, NJ www.vmc-kdc.com. Virginia KMP Corp, Dallas, TX www.virginiakmp.com.

08.29.11

Materials: 1. Refrigerant Piping: a. Meet requirements of ASTM B280, hard drawn straight lengths. Soft copper tubing not permitted. b. Do not use pre-charged refrigerant lines. 2. Refrigerant Fittings: a. Wrought copper with long radius elbows. b. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Mueller Streamline. 2) Nibco Inc. 3) Elkhart. 3. Suction Line Traps: a. Manufactured standard one-piece traps. b. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Mueller Streamline. 2) Nibco Inc. 3) Elkhart. 4. Connection Material: a. Brazing Rods in accordance with ANSI / AWS A5.8: 1) Copper to Copper Connections: a) Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6 percent silver). b) Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15 percent silver). 2) Copper to Brass or Copper to Steel Connections: Classification BAg-5 Silver (45 percent silver). 3) Do not use rods containing Cadmium. b. Flux: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Stay-Silv White Brazing Flux by Harris Products Group. b) High quality silver solder flux by Handy & Harmon. c) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 5. Valves: a. Expansion Valves: 1) For pressure type distributors, externally equalized with stainless steel diaphragm, and same refrigerant in thermostatic elements as in system. 2) Size valves to provide full rated capacity of cooling coil served. Coordinate selection with evaporator coil and condensing unit. 3) Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Emerson Climate Technologies. b) Henry. c) Mueller. d) Parker. e) Sporlan. b. Manual Refrigerant Shut-Off Valves: -223 2300

Refrigerant Piping

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

6.

7.

8.

9.

Ball valves designed for refrigeration service and full line size. Valve shall have cap seals. Valves with hand wheels are not acceptable. Provide service valve on each liquid and suction line at compressor. If service valves come as integral part of condensing unit, additional service valves shall not be required. 6) Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Henry. b) Mueller. c) Sherwood. d) Virginia. Filter-Drier: a. On lines 3/4 inch (19 mm) outside diameter and larger, filter-drier shall be replaceable core type with Schraeder type valve. b. On lines smaller than 3/4 inch (19 mm) outside diameter, filter-drier shall be sealed type with brazed end connections. c. Size shall be full line size. d. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Emerson Climate Technologies. 2) Mueller. 3) Parker. 4) Sporlan. 5) Virginia. Sight Glass: a. Combination moisture and liquid indicator with protection cap. b. Sight glass shall be full line size. c. Sight glass connections and sight glass body shall be solid copper or brass, no coppercoated steel sight glasses allowed. d. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) HMI by Emerson Climate Technologies. Flexible Connectors: a. Designed for refrigerant service with bronze seamless corrugated hose and bronze braiding. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Vibration Absorber Model VAF by Packless Industries. 2) Vibration Absorbers by Virginia KMP Corp. 3) Anaconda 'Vibration Eliminators' by Universal Metal Hose. 4) Style 'BF' Spring-flex freon connectors by Vibration Mountings. Refrigerant Piping Supports: a. Base, Angles, And Uprights: Steel meeting requirements of ASTM A 36. b. Securing Channels: 1) At Free-Standing Pipe Support: a) Class One Quality Standard: P-1000 channels by Unistrut. b) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, Thomas & Betts. c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 2) At Wall Support: a) Class One Quality Standard: P-3300 channels by Unistrut. b) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, Thomas & Betts. c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 3) At Suspended Support: a) Class One Quality Standard: P-1001 channels by Unistrut. b) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, Thomas & Betts. c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 4) Angle Fittings: a) Class One Quality Standard: P-2626 90 degree angle by Unistrut. b) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, Thomas & Betts. c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. c. Pipe Clamps: 1) Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hydra-Zorb. -323 2300

Refrigerant Piping

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

b) ZSI Cush-A-Clamp. c) Hilti Cush-A-Clamp. d) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. d. Protective Cover: 18 ga (1.2 mm) steel, hot-dipped galvanized. 10. Locking Refrigerant Cap: a. Provide and install on charging valves: 1) Class One 2) Class One Quality Standard: No Vent locking refrigerant cap. 3) Acceptable Manufacturers: Airtec. 4) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Refrigerant Lines: 1. Install as high in upper mechanical areas as possible. Do not install underground or in tunnels. 2. Slope suction lines down toward compressor one inch/10 feet (25 mm in 3 meters). Locate traps at vertical rises against flow in suction lines. Connections: 1. Refrigeration system connections shall be copper-to-copper, copper-to-brass, or copper-to-steel type properly cleaned and brazed with specified rods. Use flux only where necessary. No soft solder (tin, lead, antimony) connections will be allowed in system. 2. Braze manual refrigerant shut-off valve, sight glass, and flexible connections. 3. Circulate dry nitrogen through tubes being brazed to eliminate formation of copper oxide during brazing operation. Specialties: 1. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations. Install refrigeration distributors and suction outlet at same end of coil. 2. Install thermostatic bulb as close to cooling coil as possible. Do not install on vertical lines. 3. Install equalizing line in straight section of suction line, downstream of and reasonably close to thermostatic bulb. Do not install on vertical lines. 4. Provide flexible connectors in each liquid line and suction line at both condensing unit and evaporator on systems larger than five tons. Anchor pipe near each flexible connector. Refrigerant Supports: 1. Support Spacing: a. Piping 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) And Larger: 8 feet (2.450 m) on center maximum. b. Piping 1-1/8 inch (28.5 mm) And Smaller: 6 feet (1.80 m) on center maximum. c. Support each elbow. 2. Isolate pipe from supports and clamps with Hydrozorb or Cush-A-Clamp systems. 3. Run protective cover continuous from condensing units to risers or penetrations at building wall.

B.

C.

D.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Make evacuation and leak tests in presence of Architect's Engineer after completing refrigeration piping systems. Positive pressure test will not suffice for procedure outlined below. a. Draw vacuum on each entire system with two stage vacuum pump. Draw vacuum to 300 microns using micron vacuum gauge capable of reading from atmosphere to 10 microns. Do not use cooling compressor to evacuate system nor operate it while system is under high vacuum. b. Break vacuum with nitrogen and re-establish vacuum test. Vacuum shall hold for 30 minutes at 300 microns without vacuum pump running. -423 2300

Refrigerant Piping

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c. d.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

Conduct tests at 70 deg F (21 deg C) ambient temperature minimum. Do not run systems until above tests have been made and systems started up as specified. Inform Owner's Representative of status of systems at time of final inspection and schedule start-up and testing if prevented by outdoor conditions before this time. e. After testing, fully charge system with refrigerant and conduct test with Halide Leak Detector. f. Recover all refrigerant in accordance with applicable codes. Do not allow any refrigerant to escape to atmosphere. If it is observed that refrigerant lines are being or have been brazed without proper circulation of nitrogen through lines, all refrigerant lines installed up to that point in time shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION

Refrigerant Piping

-5-

23 2300

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 2600 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Coordinate installation of condensate drain piping with Section 22 0501 as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 0501: Common Plumbing Requirements. 2. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Materials: 1. Condensate Drains: a. Schedule 40 PVC for condensate drains from furnace combustion chambers and furnace cooling coils. b. Schedule 40 PVC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Condensate Drains: 1. Support piping and protect from damage. 2. Do not combine PVC condensate drain piping from furnace combustion chamber with condensate drain piping from cooling coil.

END OF SECTION

Condensate Drain Piping

-1-

23 2600

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 3001 COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General procedures and requirements for ductwork. 2. Repair leaks in ductwork, as identified by duct testing, at no additional cost to Owner. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4316: Duct testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork. 2. Section 07 9219: Quality of acoustic sealant. 3. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule conference immediately before installation of ductwork.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Specification data on sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork. 2. Samples: Sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Installation manuals providing detailed instructions on assembly, joint sealing, and system pressure testing for leaks.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Standard Ducts: Construction details not specifically called out in Contract Documents shall conform to applicable requirements of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Materials: 1. Duct Hangers: a. One inch (25 mm) by 18 ga (1.27 mm) galvanized steel straps or steel rods as shown on Drawings, and spaced not more than 96 inches (2 400 mm) apart. Do not use wire hangers. b. Attaching screws at trusses shall be 2 inch (50 mm) No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails not allowed.

B.

Common Duct Requirements

-1-

23 3001

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. During installation, protect open ends of ducts by covering with plastic sheet tied in place to prevent entrance of debris and dirt. Make necessary allowances and provisions in installation of sheet metal ducts for structural conditions of building. Revisions in layout and configuration may be allowed, with prior written approval of Architect. Maintain required airflows in suggesting revisions. Hangers And Supports: 1. Install pair of hangers as required by spacing indicated in table on Drawings. 2. Install upper ends of hanger securely to floor or roof construction above by method shown on Drawings. 3. Attach strap hangers to ducts with cadmium-plated screws. Use of pop rivets or other means will not be accepted. 4. Secure vertical ducts passing through floors by extending bracing angles to rest firmly on floors without loose blocking or shimming. Support vertical ducts, which do not pass through floors, by using bands bolted to walls, columns, etc. Size, spacing, and method of attachment to vertical ducts shall be same as specified for hanger bands on horizontal ducts.

B.

C.

3.2

CLEANING A. Clean interior of duct systems before final completion.

END OF SECTION

Common Duct Requirements

-2-

23 3001

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 3114 LOW-PRESSURE METAL DUCTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install above-grade low-pressure steel ducts and related items as described in Contract Documents. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Duct smoke detectors. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4316: Duct, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 2. Section 23 0713: Thermal Insulation for ducts, plenum chambers, and casings. 3. Section 23 3001: Common Duct Requirements. 4. Section 23 0933: Temperature control damper actuators and actuator linkages. 5. Section 23 0933: Furnishing of duct smoke detectors.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A653-08, 'Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.' 2. SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal, and Flexible, Third Edition 2005.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Sheet Metal: a. Fabricate ducts, plenum chambers and casings of zinc-coated, lock-forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A653, with G 60 coating. 2. Duct Sealer For Interior Ducts: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Duct Butter or Butter Tak by Cain Manufacturing Co Inc, Pelham, AL www.cainmfg.com. 2) DP 1010 by Design Polymerics, Fountain Valley, CA www.designpoly.com. 3) SAS by Duro Dyne, Bay Shore, NY or Duro Dyne Canada, Lachine, QB www.durodyne.com. 4) Iron Grip 601 by Hardcast Inc, Wylie, TX www.hardcast.com. 5) 15-325 by Miracle / Kingco, Div ITW TACC, Rockland, MA www.taccint.com. 6) 44-39 by Mon-Eco Industries Inc, East Brunswick, NJ www.mon-ecoindustries.com. 7) Airseal Zero by Polymer Adhesive Sealant Systems Inc, Weatherford, TX www.polymeradhesives.com. 8) Airseal #22 Water Base Duct Sealer by Polymer Adhesive Sealant Systems Inc, Weatherford, TX www.polymeradhesives.com. 3. Duct Sealer For Exterior Ducts: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: -123 3114

Low-Pressure Metal Ducts

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1)

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Hardcast DT Tape and RTA-50 liquid adhesive by Hardcast Inc, Wylie, TX www.hardcast.com.

08.29.11

B.

Fabrication: 1. General: a. Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished. b. Duct drops to diffusers shall be round, square, or rectangular to accommodate diffuser neck. Drops shall be same gauge as branch duct. Seal joints air tight. 2. Standard Ducts: a. General: 1) Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside acoustic duct liner. Dimensions shown on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed. b. Round Duct: 1) Spiral Seam: 28 ga (0.4 mm) minimum for ducts up to and including 14 inches (355 mm) in diameter. 2) Longitudinal Seam: a) 28 ga (0.4 mm) minimum for ducts up to and including 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter. b) 26 ga 0.48 mm minimum for ducts over 8 inches (200 mm) and up to 14 inches (355 mm) in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: Reseal transverse joint duct leaks and seal longitudinal duct joint leaks discovered during air test and balance procedures specified in Section 23 0593, at no additional cost to Owner. Install internal ends of slip joints in direction of flow. Seal transverse and longitudinal joints air tight using specified duct sealer. Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior ducts with two layers of specified tape installed with specified adhesive. Securely anchor ducts and plenums to building structure with specified duct hangers attached with screws. Do not hang more than one duct from a duct hanger. Brace and install ducts so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation. Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members. Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black. Properly flash where ducts protrude above roof. Under no conditions will pipes, rods, or wires be allowed to penetrate ducts.

B.

C.

D. E. F. G.

END OF SECTION

Low-Pressure Metal Ducts

-2-

23 3114

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install duct accessories in specified ductwork as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 0933: Temperature control damper actuators and actuator linkages. 2. Section 23 3001: Common Duct Requirements.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A653-08, 'Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.' b. ASTM C1071-05e1, 'Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material).' c. ASTM C1338-08, Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. AGM Industries, Brockton, MA www.agmind.com. b. Air Balance Inc, Holland, OH www.airbalance.com. c. Air Filters Inc, Baltimore, MD www.afinc.com. d. Air-Rite Manufacturing, Bountiful, UT (801) 295-2529. e. American Warming & Ventilating, Holland, OH www.american-warming.com. f. Arrow United Industries, Wyalusing, PA www.arrowunited.com. g. Cain Manufacturing Company Inc, Pelham, AL www.cainmfg.com. h. C & S Air Products, Fort Worth, TX www.csairproducts.com. i. CertainTeed Corp, Valley Forge, PA www.certainteed.com. j. Cesco Products, Florence, KY www.cescoproducts.com. k. Daniel Manufacturing, Ogden, UT (801) 622-5924. l. Design Polymerics, Fountain Valley, CA www.designpoly.com. m. Ductmate Industries Inc, East Charleroi, PA www.ductmate.com. n. Duro Dyne, Bay Shore, NY www.durodyne.com. o. Dyn Air Inc. Lachine, QB www.dynair.ca p. Elgen Manufacturing Company, Inc. East Rutherford, NJ www.elgenmfg.com q. Flexmaster USA Inc, Houston, TX www.flexmasterusa.com. r. Greenheck Corp, Schofield, WI www.greenheck.com. s. Gripnail Corp, East Providence, RI www.gripnail.com. t. Hardcast Inc, Wylie, TX www.hardcast.com. u. Honeywell Inc, Minneapolis, MN www.honeywell.com. v. Industrial Acoustics Co, Bronx, NY www.industrialacoustics.com. -123 3300

Air Duct Accessories

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

w. Johns-Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com. x. Kees Inc, Elkhart Lake, WI www.kees.com. y. Knauf Fiber Glass, Shelbyville, IN www.knauffiberglass.com. z. Manson Insulation Inc, Brossard, QB www.isolationmanson.com. aa. Metco Inc, Salt Lake City, UT (801) 467-1572 www.metcospiral.com. bb. Miracle / Kingco, Rockland, MA www.taccint.com. cc. Mon-Eco Industries Inc, East Brunswick, NJ www.mon-ecoindustries.com. dd. Nailor Industries Inc, Houston, TX www.nailor.com. ee. Owens Corning, Toledo, OH www.owenscorning.com. ff. Polymer Adhesive Sealant Systems Inc, Irving, TX www.polymeradhesives.com. gg. Pottorff Company, Fort Worth, TX www.pottorff.com. hh. Ruskin Manufacturing, Kansas City, MO www.ruskin.com. ii. Sheet Metal Connectors Inc, Minneapolis, MN www.smconnectors.com. jj. Techno Adhesive, Cincinnati, OH www.technoadhesives.com. kk. Titus, Richardson, TX (972) 699-1030. www.titus-hvac.com ll. McGill AirFlow, Groveport, OH www.mcgillairflow.com. mm. McGill AirSeal, Columbus, OH www.mcgillairseal.com. nn. Utemp Inc, Salt Lake City, UT (801) 978-9265. oo. Ventfabrics Inc, Chicago, IL www.ventfabrics.com. pp. Young Regulator Co, Cleveland, OH www.youngregulator.com. B. Materials: 1. Acoustical Liner System: a. Duct Liner: 1) One inch (25 mm) thick, 1-1/2 lb (0.68 kg) density fiberglass conforming to requirements of ASTM C1071. Liner will not support microbial growth when tested in accordance with ASTM C1338. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) ToughGard by CertainTeed. b) Duct Liner E-M by Knauf Fiber Glass. c) Akousti-Liner by Manson Insulation. d) Quiet R by Owens Corning. e) Permacote Linacoustic HP by Johns-Manville. b. Adhesive: 1) Category Four Approved Water-Based Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Cain: Hydrotak. b) Design Polymerics: DP2501 or DP2502 (CMCL-2501). c) Duro Dyne: WSA. d) Elgen Manufacturing: A-410-WB. e) Hardcast: Coil-Tack. f) Miracle / Kingco: PF-101. g) Mon-Eco: 22-67 or 22-76. h) Polymer Adhesive: Glasstack #35. i) Techno Adhesive: 133. j) McGill Airseal: Uni-tack. 2) Category Four Approved Solvent-Based (non-flammable) Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Cain: Safetak. b) Duro Dyne: FPG. c) Hardcast: Glas-Grip 648-NFSE. d) Miracle / Kingco: PF-91. e) Mon-Eco: 22-24. f) Polymer Adhesive: Q-Tack. g) Techno Adhesive: 'Non-Flam' 106. 3) Category Four Approved Solvent-Based (flammable) Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Cain: HV200. b) Duro Dyne: MPG. c) Hardcast: Glas-Grip 636-SE. -223 3300

Air Duct Accessories

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3.

4.

d) Miracle / Kingco: PF-96. e) Mon-Eco: 22-22. f) Polymer Adhesive: R-Tack. g) Techno Adhesive: 'Flammable' 106. c. Fasteners: 1) Adhesively secured fasteners not allowed. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) AGM Industries Inc: 'DynaPoint' Series RP-9 pin. b) Cain. c) Duro Dyne. d) Gripnails may be used if each nail is installed by 'Grip Nail Air Hammer' or by 'Automatic Fastener Equipment' in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Flexible Equipment Connections: a. 30 oz closely woven UL approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. b. Fire retardant, waterproof, air-tight, resistant to acids and grease, and withstand constant temperatures of 200 deg F (93 deg C). c. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Cain: N-100. 2) Duro Dyne: MFN. 3) Dyn Air: CPN with G-90 galvanized off-set seam 4) Elgen: ZLN / SDN. 5) Ventfabrics: Ventglas. 6) Ductmate: ProFlex. Duct Access Doors: a. General: 1) Factory built insulated access door with hinges and sash locks, as necessary. Construction shall be galvanized sheet metal, 24 ga (0.635 mm) minimum. 2) Fire and smoke damper access doors shall have minimum clear opening of 12 inches (300 mm) square or larger as shown on Drawings. b. Rectangular Ducts: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Air Balance: Fire/Seal FSA 100. b) Air-Rite: Model HAD-2. c) Cesco: HDD. d) Elgen Manufacturing: TAB Type / Hinge and Cam. e) Flexmaster: Spin Door. f) Kees Inc: ADH-D. g) Nailor: 085H-01. h) Pottorff: 60-HAD. i) Ruskin: ADH-24. c. Round Ducts: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Ductmate: Sandwich Access Door. b) Elgen Manufacturing: Sandwich Access Door. c) Kees Inc: ADL-R. d) Nailor: 0809. e) Pottorff: RAD. f) Ruskin: ADR. Dampers And Damper Accessories: a. Locking Quadrant Damper Regulators: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Duro Dyne: KS-385. b) Dyn Air: QPS-385. c) Elgen Manufacturing: EQR-4. d) Ventfabrics: Ventline 555. e) Young: No. 1. b. Concealed Ceiling Damper Regulators: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Cain. -323 3300

Air Duct Accessories

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

c.

d.

b) Duro Dyne. c) Elgen Manufacturing. d) Metco Inc. e) Ventfabrics: 666 Ventlok. f) Young: 301. Volume Dampers: 1) Rectangular Duct: a) Factory-manufactured 16 ga (1.6 mm) galvanized steel, single blade and opposed blade type with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) axles and end bearings. Blade width 8 inches (200 mm) maximum. Blades shall have 1/8 inch (3 mm) clearance all around. b) Damper shall operate within acoustical duct liner. c) Provide channel spacer equal to thickness of duct liner. d) Dampers above removable ceiling and in Mechanical Rooms shall have locking quadrant on bottom or side of duct. Otherwise, furnish with concealed ceiling damper regulator and cover plate. e) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Air-Rite: Model CD-2. (2) American Warming: VC-2-AA. (3) Arrow: OBDAF-207. (4) C & S: AC40. (5) Cesco: AGO. (6) Daniel: CD-OB. (7) Greenheck: VCD-20. (8) Nailor: 1810 or 1820. (9) Pottorff: CD-42. (10) Ruskin: MD-35. (11) Utemp: CD-OB. 2) Round Duct: a) Factory-manufactured 20 ga (1.0 mm) galvanized steel, single blade with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) axles and end bearings. b) For use in outside air ducts. c) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Air Balance: Model AC-22. (2) Air-Rite: Model CD-5. (3) American Warming: V-22. (4) Arrow: Type-70. (5) C & S: AC21R. (6) Cesco: MGG. (7) Nailor: 1890. (8) Pottorff: CD-21R. (9) Ruskin: MDRS-25. Motorized Outside Air Dampers: 1) General: a) Low leakage type. AMCA certified. b) Make provision for damper actuators and actuator linkages to be mounted external of air flow. 2) Rectangular Ducts: a) Damper Blades: (1) Steel or aluminum airfoil type with mechanically locked blade seals, 8 inch (200 mm) blade width maximum measured perpendicular to axis of damper. (2) Jamb seals shall be flexible metal compression type. (3) Opposed or single blade type. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Air Balance: AC 526. (2) American Warming: AC526. (3) Arrow: AFD-20. (4) C & S: AC50. -423 3300

Air Duct Accessories

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

5.

6.

7.

(5) Cesco: AGO3. (6) Honeywell: D-643. (7) Nailor: 2020. (8) Pottorff: CD-52. (9) Ruskin: CD-60. 3) Round Ducts: a) Damper Blades: (1) Steel with mechanically locked blade seals. (2) Blade seals shall be neoprene or polyethylene. (3) Single blade type. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Air Balance: AC 25. (2) American Warming: VC25. (3) Arrow: Type 70 or 75. (4) C & S: AC25R. (5) Cesco: AGG. (6) Honeywell: D-690. (7) Nailor: 1090. (8) Pottorff: CD-25R. (9) Ruskin: CD25. e. Backdraft Dampers: 1) Backdraft blades shall be nonmetallic neoprene coated fiberglass type. 2) Stop shall be galvanized steel screen or expanded metal, 1/2 inch (13 mm) mesh. 3) Frame shall be galvanized steel or extruded aluminum alloy. 4) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Air-Rite: Model BDD-3. b) American Warming: BD-15. c) C & S: BD30. d) Cesco: FBD 101. e) Daniel: FBD-H/V. f) Pottorff: 50FBD. g) Ruskin: NMS2. h) UTEMP: BFEA. Duct Silencers: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Air Filters Inc.: AIRSAN. 2) Industrial Acoustic Co. 3) Titus Products Div. 4) McGill AirsealCorp. Air Turns: a. Single thickness vanes. Double thickness vanes not acceptable. b. 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) wide vane rail. Junior vane rail not acceptable. Branch Tap for Flexible Ductwork: a. Factory-manufactured rectangular-to-round 45 degree leading tap fabricated of 24 ga (0.635 mm) zinc-coated lock-forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A653, with G-90 coating. b. One inch wide mounting flange with die formed corner clips, pre-punched mounting holes, and adhesive coated gasket. c. Manual Volume Damper: 1) Single blade, 22 ga (0.79 mm) minimum 2) 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum square rod with brass damper bearings at each end. 3) Heavy-duty locking quadrant on 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) high stand-off mounting bracket attached to side of round duct. d. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) ST-1HD by Air-Rite. 2) STO by Flexmaster. 3) HET by Sheet Metal Connectors.

C.

Fabrication: -523 3300

Air Duct Accessories

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

Duct Liner: a. Install mat finish surface on airstream side. Secure insulation to cleaned sheet metal duct with continuous 100 percent coat of adhesive and with 3/4 inch (19 mm) long mechanical fasteners 12 inches (300 mm) on center maximum unless detailed otherwise on Drawings. Pin all duct liner. b. Accurately cut liner and thoroughly coat ends with adhesive. Butt joints tightly. Top and bottom sections of insulation shall overlap sides. If liner is all one piece, folded corners shall be tight against metal. Ends shall butt tightly together. c. Coat longitudinal and transverse edges of liner with adhesive. Air Turns: a. Permanently install vanes arranged to permit air to make abrupt turn without appreciable turbulence, in 90 degree elbows of above ground supply and return ductwork. b. Quiet and free from vibration when system is in operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Duct Liner: 1. Furnish and install acoustic lining in following types of ducts: a. Supply air. b. Return air. c. Mixed air. d. Transfer air. e. Relief air. f. Exhaust air. g. Elbows, fittings, and diffuser drops greater than 12 inches (300 mm) in length. Flexible Connections: Install flexible inlet and outlet duct connections to each furnace. Access Doors In Ducts: 1. Install at each manual outside air damper and at each motorized damper. Locate doors within 6 inches (150 mm) of installed dampers. 2. Install within 6 inches (150 mm) of fire dampers and in Mechanical Room if possible. Install on side of duct that allows easiest access to damper. Dampers And Damper Accessories: 1. Install concealed ceiling damper regulators. a. Paint cover plates to match ceiling tile. b. Do not install damper regulators for dampers located directly above removable ceilings or in Mechanical Rooms. 2. Provide each take-off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch. a. Anchor dampers securely to duct. b. Install dampers in main ducts within insulation. c. Dampers in branch ducts shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of duct, and be securely fastened. Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal. d. Where concealed ceiling damper regulators are installed, provide cover plate. 3. Install motorized dampers.

B. C.

D.

END OF SECTION

Air Duct Accessories

-6-

23 3300

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 3346 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install supply air branch duct runouts to diffusers as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 3001: Common Duct Requirements.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute: a. NFPA 90A: Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2009 Edition. 2. Underwriters Laboratories / AmericanNationalStandardsInstitute: a. UL / ANSI 181, Factory-Made Ducts and Air Connectors (revised October 27, 2008). b. UL / ANSI 181B, Closure Systems for Use With Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors (revised October 27, 2008).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Anco Products Inc, Elkhart, IN www.ancoproductsinc.com. b. Thermaflex by Flexible Technologies, Abbeville, SC or Mississauga, ON www.thermaflex.net. c. Flexmaster USA Inc, Houston, TX www.flexmasterusa.com or Flexmaster Canada Ltd, Richmond Hill, ON (905) 731-9411. Materials: 1. Ducts: a. Formable, flexible, circular duct which shall retain its cross-section, shape, rigidity, and shall not restrict airflow after bending. b. Insulation: Nominal 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), 3/4 lb per cu ft (12 kg per cu m) density fiberglass insulation with air-tight, polyethylene or polyester core, sheathed in seamless vapor barrier jacket factory installed over flexible assembly. c. Assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet Class I requirement of NFPA 90A and be UL 181 rated, with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or under. d. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) ANCO-FLEX 4625 by Anco Products. 2) M-KC by Thermaflex by Flexible Technologies. 3) Type 4m Insulated by Flexmaster. 2. Cinch Bands: Nylon, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) removable and reusable type.

B.

Flexible Ducts

-1-

23 3346

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Install duct in fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using 72 inch (1 800 mm) maximum lengths. Make duct connections by coating exterior of duct collar for 3 inches (75 mm) with duct sealer and securing duct in place over sheet metal collar with specified cinch bands.

B.

END OF SECTION

Flexible Ducts

-2-

23 3346

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 3400 HVAC FANS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install exhaust fans as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 3001: Common Duct Requirements. 2. Division 26: Control device and electrical connection.

B.

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Bear AMCA seal and UL label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Contact List: 1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corp, Muskogee, OK www.acmefan.com. 2. Breidert Air Products, Jacksonville, FL www.breidert.com. 3. Carnes Co, Verona, MI www.carnes.com. 4. Greenheck Corp, Schofield, WI www.greenheck.com. 5. Loren Cook Co, Springfield, MO www.lorencook.com. 6. PennBarry, Richardson, TX (215) 464-8900 www.pennbarry.com.

2.2

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Ceiling Mounted Exhaust Fans: 1. Acoustically insulated housings. Sound level rating of 4.6 sones maximum for fan RPM and CFM listed on Drawings. 2. Include chatterproof integral back-draft damper with no metal-to-metal contact. 3. True centrifugal wheels. 4. Entire fan, motor, and wheel assembly shall be easily removable without disturbing housing. 5. Suitably ground motors and mount on rubber-in shear vibration isolators. 6. Provide wall or roof cap, as required. 7. Class One Quality Standards: a. Greenheck SP. b. PennBarry Zephyr. 8. Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200. a. Acme, Breidert, Broan, Carnes, Cook-Gemini, Greenheck, PennBarry. In-line Exhaust Fan: 1. Design Standard: Broan L150L. See schedule for additional information.

B.

HVAC Fans

-1-

23 3400

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Anchor fan units securely to structure.

END OF SECTION

HVAC Fans

-2-

23 3400

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install diffusers, registers, and grilles connected to ductwork as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 3001: General Duct Requirements.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Tools: Leave tool for removing core of each different type of grille for building custodian.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Contact List: 1. Carnes Co, Verona, MI www.carnes.com 2. J & J Register, Grand Rapids, MI www.jandjreg.com. 3. Krueger Air System Components, Richardson, TX www.krueger-hvac.com. 4. Metal*Aire by Metal Industries Inc, Clearwater, FL www.metalaire.com. 5. Nailor Industries Inc, Houston, TX or Weston, ON www.nailor.com. 6. Price Industries Inc, Suwanee, GA www.price-hvac.com or E H Price Ltd, Winnipeg, MB (204) 669-4220. 7. Titus, Richardson, TX www.titus-hvac.com. 8. Tuttle & Bailey, Richardson, TX www.tuttleandbailey.com.

2.2

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Supply Grilles And Registers: 1. Finish: Off-white baked enamel. 2. Removable core. 3. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Carnes: RVEA. b. J & J: 2815. c. Krueger: 5815. d. Metal*Aire: 42C. e. Nailor: 51RCD. f. Price: LBMR/DV1. g. Titus: 1707. h. Tuttle & Bailey: VF5. Ceiling Return And Transfer Grilles: 1. Finish: Off-white baked enamel. 2. 1/2 inch 13 mm spacing. -123 3713

B.

Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Carnes: RSLA. b. J & J: S90H. c. Krueger: S85H. d. Metal*Aire: SRH. e. Nailor: 6155H. f. Price: 535. g. Titus: 355RL or 355 RS. h. Tuttle & Bailey: T70D.

08.29.11

C.

High Side Wall Return Grilles: 1. Finish: Off-white baked enamel. 2. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Carnes: RHEA. b. J & J: 2810. c. Metal*Aire: 41C. d. Krueger: 5810. e. Nailor: 51RC. f. Price: LBMR. g. Titus: 1700. h. Tuttle & Bailey: VF. Floor / Toe Space Return Grilles: 1. Finish: Clear anodized. 2. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Carnes: CCJB (with mitered corners welded on face and sanded). b. J & J: 2500 with Frame 10. c. Krueger: 1500F. d. Metal*Aire: 2000F. e. Nailor: 49-240-FN-MM. f. Price: LBP-25B. g. Titus: CT-540. h. Tuttle & Bailey: LFD. Low Sidewall Return Grilles: 1. Finish: Off-white baked enamel. 2. 38 or 45 degree deflection. 3. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Carnes: RSHA. b. J & J: S-590. c. Krueger: S480H. d. Metal*Aire: HD-RH. e. Nailor: 6145H-HD. f. Price: 90-L. g. Titus: 33RL or 33RS. h. Tuttle & Bailey: T110. Soffit Grilles: 1. Finish: Baked enamel. Match soffit color. 2. Aluminum with aluminum mesh insect screen. 3. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Carnes: RAAA. b. J & J: ALS95H. c. Krueger: S585H. d. Metal*Aire: RHE. e. Nailor: 5155-IS. f. Price: 635. g. Titus: 355FL. h. Tuttle & Bailey: A70D-5.

D.

E.

F.

Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles

-2-

23 3713

Project # 503-6925-11010101 G.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Finish: Off-white baked enamel. 2. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Carnes: SKSA. b. J & J: R-1400. c. Krueger: SH. d. Metal*Aire: 5500S. e. Nailor: 65OOB. f. Price: SMD-6. g. Titus: TDC-6. h. Tuttle & Bailey: MS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Anchor securely into openings. Secure frames to ductwork by using four sheet metal screws, one per side. Level floor registers and anchor securely into floor.

3.2

ADJUSTING A. Set sidewall supply register blades at 15 degrees upward deflection.

END OF SECTION

Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles

-3-

23 3713

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 3714 LOUVERS AND VENTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install louvers connected to ductwork as described in Contract Documents. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Architectural louvers not connected to ductwork. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation of architectural louvers not connected to ductwork. 2. Section 23 3001: General Duct Requirements.

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List: 1. Airolite Co, Marietta, OH www.airolite.com or EH Price Ltd, Winnipeg, MB. 2. Air-Rite Manufacturing, Bountiful, UT (801) 295-2529. 3. American Warming & Ventilating, Holland, OH www.awv.com. 4. Arrow United Industries, Wyalusing, PA www.arrowunited.com or Arrow United Industries / Canmech Sales, Weston, ON (900) 226-6324. 5. Carnes Co, Verona, WI www.carnes.com. 6. Industrial Louvers Inc, Delano, MN www.industriallouvers.com. 7. Ruskin Manufacturing, Kansas City. MO www.ruskin.com or Ruskin / ASL (Tomkins) Ltd, Brampton, ON (905) 793-6608. 8. United Enertech Corporation, Chattanooga, TN www.unitedenertech.com. 9. Vent Products Co Inc, Chicago, IL www.ventprod.com. 10. SF435 by Western Ventilation Products Ltd, Calgary, AB www.westvent.com. 11. Wonder Metals Corp, Redding, CA www.wondermetals.com.

2.2

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Louvers: 1. General: a. Extruded aluminum, with blades welded or screwed into frames. b. Frames shall have mitered corners. c. Louvers shall be recessed, flanged, stationary, or removable as noted on Drawings. d. Finish: 1) Polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVF2) Resin-base finish (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) containing 70 percent minimum PVF2 in resin portion of formula. Thermo-cured two coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and top coat factory applied over properly pre-treated metal. 2) Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Louvers Connected To Ductwork: a. 1/2 inch (13 mm) mesh 16 ga (1.59 mm) aluminum bird screen. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) K638 by Airolite. -123 3714

Louvers And Vents

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

2) LE-1 by Air-Rite Manufacturing. 3) LE48 by American Warming & Ventilating. 4) EA-405 by Arrow United Industries. 5) FKDA by Carnes. 6) 455-XP by Industrial Louvers. 7) ELF81S30 by Ruskin. 8) FL-D-4 by United Enertech. 9) 2740-31 by Vent Products. 10) EX by Wonder Metals. Architectural Louvers: a. Aluminum bug screen. b. Class One Quality Standards: 1) T608 by Airolite. 2) LE57 by American Warming & Ventilating. 3) Equals by Arrow United Industries, Carnes, or Industrial Louvers as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. B. Anchor securely into openings. Where louvers touch masonry or dissimilar metals, protect with heavy coat of asphaltum paint.

END OF SECTION

Louvers And Vents

-2-

23 3714

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 4100 AIR FILTERS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install filters used in mechanical equipment. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 3001: Common Duct Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. B. Furnace Filters: One inch (25 mm) thick throw-away type as recommended by Furnace Manufacturer. Fan Coil Unit Filters: One inch (25 mm) thick throw-away type as recommended by Fan Coil Unit Manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Provide ample access for filter removal.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: At date of Substantial Completion, air filters shall be new, clean, and approved by Owner's representative.

END OF SECTION

Air Filters

-1-

23 4100

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 23 5135 AIR PIPING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install heating equipment exhaust piping and combustion air intake piping as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting. 2. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1785-06, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.' b. ASTM D2564-04(2009)e1, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.' c. ASTM D2661-08, Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.' d. ASTM D2665-09, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.'

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Armaflex by Armacell, Mebane, NC www.armaflex.com. b. Nomaco, Youngsville, NC www.nomacokflex.com. Materials: 1. Air Piping: Schedule 40 pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D1785, ASTM D2661, or ASTM D2665. 2. Piping Primer And Cement: a. Meet requirements of ASTM D2564. b. . 3. Flexible Foamed Pipe Insulation: a. Thickness: 1) 1/2 inch (13 mm) for 2 through 3 inch (50 through 75 mm) outside diameter pipe. 2) 1/2 inch (13 mm) sheet for fittings as recommended by Manufacturer. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Tubolit by Armaflex. 2) ImcoLock or Therma-Cel by Nomaco K-Flex. 4. Insulation Joint Sealer:

B.

Air Piping

-1-

23 5135

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Installation For Condensing Furnaces: 1. Run individual vent and individual combustion intake piping from each furnace to sidewall termination kit. Slope lines downward toward furnace. 2. Slope combustion chamber drain downward to funnel drain. Anchor to wall with wall clamps, allowing free movement through clamp for expansion. 3. Install vent and combustion air intake piping at clearance and distances required by Furnace Manufacturer. 4. Attach factory-supplied neoprene coupling to combustion-air inlet connection and secure with clamp. 5. Ensure that factory-supplied perforated metal disc is installed in flexible coupling, unless its removal is required. Installation For Condensing Water Heaters: 1. Run individual vent and individual combustion intake piping from each water heater to sidewall termination as recommended by Water Heater Manufacturer. Slope lines downward toward water heater. 2. Slope combustion chamber exhaust drain downward to floor drain. Support: 1. Support concentric roof termination kit at ceiling line with 20 ga (0.912 mm) sheet metal straps as detailed on Drawings. 2. Support horizontal and sloping sections of pipe with 1 inch (25 mm) wide 20 ga (1.0058 mm) galvanized steel straps. Anchor securely to structure, not allowing pipe to sway. Insulation: 1. General: a. Install insulation in snug contact with pipe and in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. b. Slip insulation on piping before piping sections and fittings are assembled keeping slitting of insulation to a minimum. c. Joints: 1) Place 'slit' joint seams of insulation exposed outside building on bottom of pipe. 2) Stagger joints on layered insulation. 3) Seal joints in insulation. d. Paint exterior exposed insulation with two coats of finish recommended by Insulation Manufacturer, color selected by Architect. 2. Install specified insulation on PVC air piping serving mechanical equipment as follows a. Combustion air PVC piping in truss space and in attic. b. Combustion vent PVC piping in attic, in truss space, and above roof. c. Insulate fittings with sheet insulation and as recommended by Manufacturer.

B.

C.

D.

END OF SECTION

Air Piping

-2-

23 5135

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 23 5417 GAS-FIRED FURNACES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Furnish and install horizontal/vertical gas-fired condensing furnaces as described in Contract Documents 2. Furnaces shall be convertible for use with Propane Fuel (not reflected in Model Numbers) 3. There is the possibility that natural gas will be provided to this location at a later date. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements. 2. Section 23 1123: Natural Gas Piping System. (Propane Fuel will be used until natural gas is brought to this location system must be compatible with both fuels) 3. Section 23 2300: Refrigerant Piping System. 4. Section 23 4100: Air Filters.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Reports: Equipment check-out sheets.

1.3

WARRANTY A. Manufacturers Warranty: 1. Provide 15 year minimum limited warranty of heat exchanger and 5 year limited warranty on parts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturer: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Carrier Corporation: Carrier National: Steven L. Ament 317-240-2938 steve.l.ament@carrier.utc.com Carrier Utah: Matt Smith 801-224-1020 msmith@mtncom.net b. Lennox Industries: For pricing and information contact Lennox National Account @ 1-800367-6285. c. Trane: Salt Lake Trane, attention: Jason Bradford (801) 486-0500 www.Jason.Bradford@trane.com. d. York International: David E. Carey 405-419-6536 david.e.carey@jci.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Rated at 93 percent minimum AFUE (Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency) calculated in accordance with DOE test procedures.

B.

Gas-Fired Furnaces

-1-

23 5417

Project # 503-6925-11010101 C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Manufactured Units: 1. Furnaces: a. Factory assembled units certified by CSA complete with blower section, furnace section, steel casing, piped, and wired. b. Blower section shall consist of cabinet, blower, and motor. 1) Cabinet shall be of 22 ga (0.8 mm) minimum cold rolled steel and have finish coat of baked-on enamel. 2) Blower shall be Class 1, full DIDW, statically and dynamically balanced. c. Automatic controls shall consist of: 1) Manual gas shut-off valve. 2) Operating automatic gas valve. 3) Solid-state type fan and thermal limit controls. 4) 24-volt transformer. 5) Hot surface ignition system. d. Blower shall be driven by multi-speed direct driven motor. e. Furnace section shall be enclosed in 22 ga (0.8 mm) minimum enameled steel casing lined with foil covered insulation. f. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel. g. Gas Burners: Aluminized steel. h. PVC intake of outside air and PVC combustion product exhaust, with sealed combustion, direct vent system. i. Sidewall termination kit for sidewall mounting. 2. Approved Products: (Furnaces shall be convertible for use with Propane Fuel (not reflected in Model Numbers will be converted back to natural gas at a later date) a. 1) Standard Furnaces: a) Carrier: 58MXB. b) Lennox: G51MP. c) York: TG9S. 2) Two Stage Heat with PSC motor: a) Carrier: 58MTB-2PD. b) Lennox: G61MP. c) York: TM9T. 3. Cooling Coil: a. Cooling coil shall consist of heavy gauge steel cabinet with baked-on enamel finish to match furnace. 1) Coil shall have aluminum fins bonded to seamless copper or aluminum tubing. 2) Coil shall be ARI rated. Provide drain pans with connections at one end. 3) Use thermal expansion valve. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Vertical: a) Carrier: CNPVP. b) Lennox: CX34. c) York: FC.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Filter Frame: 1. Build filter frame external to furnace as detailed on Drawings. Vibration Isolators: 1. Vertical Installation: 4 inches (100 mm) square by 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick minimum neoprene type vibration isolation pads.

B.

Gas-Fired Furnaces

-2-

23 5417

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Vibration Isolators: 1. Install vibration isolator under each corner of vertical furnace.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Manufacturer Services: a. Furnace installer shall: 1) Verify proper gas orifice size. 2) Verify that equipment is converted for Propane Fuel use. 3) Clock gas meter for rated input. 4) Verify and set gas pressure at furnace. 5) Check and measure temperature rise. 6) Check safety controls for proper operation. 7) Check combustion vent sizes and combustion air sizes. b. In addition, furnace installer shall start up, check out, and adjust furnaces using equipment check-out sheet provided by Manufacturer. Complete and sign all items on sheet.

END OF SECTION

Gas-Fired Furnaces

-3-

23 5417

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 23 6213 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install condensing units as described in contract documents. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements. 2. Section 23 2300: Refrigerant Piping System.

B.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Tests and Evaluation Reports: a. Manufacturer Reports: Equipment check-out sheets. 2. Qualification Statements: a. Technician certificate for use of CFC, HFC, and HCFC refrigerants.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Each unit shall be UL / ULC labeled. Qualifications. Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Installer: Refrigerant piping shall be installed by refrigeration contractor licensed by State and by technicians certified in use of CFC and HCFC refrigerants.

B.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Manufacturers Warranty: 1. Provide 10 year limited warranty on compressor and 5 year limited warranty on parts from date of start-up. 2. Record start-up date on warranty certificate for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturer: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Carrier Corporation: Carrier National: Steven L. Ament 317-240-2938. steve.l.ament@carrier.utc.com Carrier Utah: Matt Smith 801-224-1020 msmith@mtncom.net. b. Lennox Industries: For pricing and information call Lennox National Account @ 1-800-3676285. -123 6213

Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c. B.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake York International: David E. Carey 405-419-6536 david.e.carey@jci.com.

08.29.11

Performance: 1. Capacities: SEER rating as defined by ARI shall be 13.0 or greater. Manufactured Units: 1. Condensing Units: a. General: 1) Units shall be operable down to 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) outdoor temperature. 2) Use R-410a refrigerant. 3) Only one liquid line, one suction line, and one power connection shall be made to each compressor. Provide charging valves. b. Condenser Coils: 1) Aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes or Spine Fin trade mark system which has aluminum fins epoxy bonded to aluminum tubes or microchannel. 2) Provide stamped louver coil guard for unit. c. Fans: 1) Direct driven propeller type. 2) Fan motor shall be single or two speed, thermostatically controlled, permanently lubricated, and designed with permanent protection. 3) Motors shall be resiliently mounted. 4) Each fan shall have a safety guard. d. Compressor: 1) Each condenser unit shall have only one compressor. 2) Design with following features: a) Externally mounted brass service valves with charging connections. b) Crankcase heater. c) Resilient rubber mounts. d) Compressor motor-overload protection. e) Single speed. e. Controls: 1) Factory wired and located in separate enclosure. 2) Following three paragraphs may not be factory installed and will therefore have to be field installed. 3) Safety devices: a) High and low pressure cutout. b) Condenser fan motor-overload devices. 4) Anti-cycle timers to prevent units from starting up again for five minutes after any power interruption. 5) Head pressure type low ambient kit. f. Casing: 1) Fully weatherproof for outdoor installation. Finish shall be weather resistant. g. Openings shall be provided for power and refrigerant connections. h. Panels shall be removable for servicing. i. Approved Products: 1) Standard: a) Carrier: 24ACB3. b) Lennox: XC13. c) York: YCHD or YCJD.

C.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Vibration Isolators: 1. 4 inches (100 mm) square by 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick minimum neoprene type vibration isolation pads.

Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers

-2-

23 6213

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Set condensing units level on concrete slab on vibration isolation pads located at each corner of unit. This does not apply to condensing units that have a composite non-metal bottom. Do not use capillary tube and piston type refrigerant metering devices.

B.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer Services: 1. Condensing units shall be started up, checked out, and adjusted by condensing unit installer. 2. Use equipment checkout sheet provided by Manufacturer. Complete and sign all items on sheet.

END OF SECTION

Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers

-3-

23 6213

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 23 8333 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wall heaters as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 0501: Common HVAC Requirements. 2. Division 26: Electrical service and connections.

B.

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Units shall be UL listed and comply with NEC.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Berko, Marley Electric Co, Bennettsville. SC www.berkomeh.com. b. QMark, Marley Electric Co, Bennettsville, SC www.qmarkmeh.com. c. Raywall, Johnson, TN www.raywall.com. Wall Heaters. 1. Fan type for recess mounting in wall. 2. 20 ga (0.95 mm) minimum sheet metal casing. 3. Heating element shall be encased in steel finned casting and protected by thermal switch. 4. Fan motor shall be heavy duty enclosed and permanently lubricated. 5. Fan shall be precision balanced and fan-motor assembly mounted to be vibration free. 6. Units shall be controlled automatically by integral thermostat when heater is in 'ON' position. 7. Heater shall have built-in fan delay. 8. Finish: Baked-on enamel. 9. Design Standard: AWH-4000 by Q-Mark.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

Electric Radiant Heaters

-1-

23 8333

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I O N 26: E L E C T R I C A L
26 0000 ELECTRICAL COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES LINE-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES HEATING CABLES WALKWAY SNOW MELT CABLE CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CABLES GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHT SCHEDULE

26 0501 26 0503 26 0519 26 0520 26 0521 26 0523 26 0526 26 0533 26 0613

26 2000 L O W (LINE) V O L T A G E D I S T R I B U T I O N 26 2417 CIRCUIT-BREAKER PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 4000 L I G H T N I N G P R O T E C T I O N 26 4100 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 5000 L I G H T I N G 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5200 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 26 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0501 Common Electrical Requirements PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General electrical system requirements and procedures. 2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in Contract Documents. 3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 2316: Criteria for performance of excavating. 2. Section 31 2323: Criteria for performance of backfilling.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate with Owner for equipment and materials to be removed by Owner. Sequencing: 1. Include detailed sequence of individual electrical demolition operations on Construction Schedule specified in Section 01 3200.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Provide following information for each item of equipment: 1) Catalog Sheets. 2) Assembly details or dimension drawings. 3) Installation instructions. 4) Manufacturer's name and catalog number. 5) Name of local supplier. b. Furnish such information for following equipment: 1) Sections 26 2417 / 8: Panelboards. 2) Section 26 2816: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 3) Section 26 5100: Interior lighting fixtures. 4) Section 26 5200: Emergency battery units. 5) Section 26 2726: Wiring Devices devices. c. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Submit on following equipment: 1) Panelboards. b. Indicate precise equipment to be used, including all options specified. Indicate wording and format of nameplates where applicable. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Provide operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment submitted under Product Data. -126 0501

B.

C.

Common Electrical Requirements

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

b.

Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: (a) Manufacturer's literature. (b) Include copy of approved shop drawings. (c) Provide in addition to product data required for Section 26 5100 interior lighting fixtures, tabulation for each tritium exit sign installed on Project including following: (1) Serial number. (2) Expiration number. (3) Installed building location (example - chapel north rear exit, north corridor east end, main west foyer, etc.).

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is available.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Materials and equipment provided under following Sections shall be by same Manufacturer: 1) Section 26 2417: Panelboards. 2) Section 26 2816: Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. Include such work without additional cost to Owner.

B.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Disconnect equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in completed work. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, extend, or repair raceways, conductors, outlets, and apparatus to allow continued use of electrical system. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. Perform drilling, cutting, block-offs, and demolition work required for removal of necessary portions of electrical system. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, trusses, or columns without prior written permission from Architect.

B.

C.

Common Electrical Requirements

-2-

26 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D.

Remove concealed wiring abandoned due to demolition or new construction. Remove circuits, conduits, and conductors that are not to be re-used back to next active fixture, device, or junction box. Patch, repair, and finish surfaces affected by electrical demolition work, unless work is specifically specified to be performed under other Sections of the specifications.

E. 3.3

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations for proper installation. 2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served before installation or rough-in. a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work. b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and functional. 3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable Sections.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architect before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance is completed for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full-load nameplate current rating and size of thermal overload unit installed for each motor.

3.5

CLEANING A. Remove obsolete raceways, conductors, apparatus, and lighting fixtures promptly from site and dispose of legally.

3.6

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Training: 1. Provide competent instructor for three days to train Owner's maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection. END OF SECTION

Common Electrical Requirements

-3-

26 0501

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0503 Electrical Utility Services PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install service as described in Contract Documents and as required by local serving agency. 2. Complete cost of service. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 2. Local utility shall furnish and install primary underground service including transformer, conductors, current transformers, metering conductors, and meter.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with serving agency on all items, especially service entrance fittings, meter sockets, and current transformer (C/T) boxes where required. END OF SECTION

Electrical Utility Services

-1-

26 0503

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0519 Line-Voltage Power Conductors and Cables PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. B. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 0933: Conductors and cables for temperature control system. 2. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.

1.2

REFERENCES A. definitions. 1. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Line Voltage Conductors: 1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown: a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise. b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. 2. Insulation: a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C). b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg C). c. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes. 3. Colors: a. 208 / 120 V System: 1) Black: Phase A. 2) Red: Phase B. 3) Blue: Phase C. 4) Green: Ground. 5) White: Neutral. b. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed. c. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or taped band or color tag color-coded as specified above. Line Voltage Cables: 1. Metal Clad Cable (MC) may be used as restricted below: a. Copper conductors b. Sizes #12 through #8 c. Use only in indoor dry locations where: 1) Not subject to damage. 2) Not in contact with earth. 3) Not in concrete. Standard Connectors: 1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors. 2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs.

B.

C.

Line-Voltage Power Conductors and Cables

-1-

26 0519

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non-hardening sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATIONS A. General: 1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. 2. Do not use direct burial cable. Line Voltage Conductors: 1. Install conductors in raceway where indicated on drawings. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits. 2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings. 3. Neutrals: a. On single-phase, 3-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits. b. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings. c. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. Pulling Conductors: a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors. c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants. Line Voltage Cables: 1. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting and numbering shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. 2. Support cables using approved staples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar fittings, spaced as required. 3. Where installing in framing, do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 4. Conceal cables within ceilings and walls of finished areas. Cables may be exposed in unfinished areas but not run on floors of mechanical equipment spaces or in such a way that they obstruct access to, operation of, or servicing of equipment. 5. Install exposed cables parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. 6. Keep cables 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes. 7. Do not support cables from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. 8. Prohibited procedures: a. Boring holes for installation of cables in vertical truss members. b. Notching of structural members for installation of cables. END OF SECTION

B.

C.

Line-Voltage Power Conductors and Cables

-2-

26 0519

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0520 Heating Cables PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install heating cable system for rain gutters and down spouts as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout spacing and cable sizing required by Cable Manufacturer for site conditions. Provide watts per lin ft at required volts AC of cable to be used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Bylin Engineered Systems, El Dorado Hills, CA www.bylinusa.com b. Chromalox Precision Heat & Control, Pittsburgh, PA www.chromalox.com or Chromalox / Dimplex North America Ltd, (800) 668-6663 or (519) 650-3630. c. Easy Heat, East Granby, CT www.easyheat.com or EasyHeat Ltd, Waterloo, ON (800) 794-3766 or (519) 885-2850. d. Nelson Heat Tracing Systems, East Granby, CT www.nelsonheaters.com. e. Pass & Seymour, Syracuse, NY or Pass & Seymour Canada Inc, Concord, ON www.passandseymour.com. f. Raychem Corporation, Menlo Park, CA www.tycothermal.com or Raychem Canada Ltd, Toronto, ON (800)988-5171 or (416) 234-0886. g. Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.us.squared.com or Square D Co / Schneider Electric, Toronto, ON (800) 565-6699 or (416) 752-8020. h. Technitrace Inc, Murray, UT www.technatrace.com. i. Thermon Manufacturing Co, San Marcos, TX www.thermon.com. j. WarmZone Inc, Salt Lake City, UT www.warmzone.com. Materials: 1. Rain Gutter And Roof Eave Heaters: a. Cable: 1) Class One Quality Standard: Chromalox TW6-CR. b. Temperature And Moisture Sensitive Controller: 1) Design Standard: Chromalox GIT-3B. c. Contactor: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (a) Easy Heat: PC series. (b) Square 'D': Class 8502. d. Pilot Light: 1) Include plate with engraved text, 'ROOF HEATING CABLE.' 2) Class Two Quality Standard: Pass & Seymour 2151 Red. e. Factory prepared, UL / ULC recognized splice and termination kits by Cable Manufacturer.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION -126 0520

Heating Cables

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

A.

Rain Gutter And Down Spout Heaters: 1. Install moisture probe for controller in rain gutter. 2. Install pilot light in corridor or foyer to indicate when cables are operating. 3. Terminate raceway on exterior of building at heat cable location with weatherproof junction box. 4. Install cable using approved spacers and without penetrating rain gutter or roofing material. END OF SECTION

Heating Cables

-2-

26 0520

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0521 Walkway Snow Melt Cable PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish and install an engineered surface snowmelt system complete with layout drawings, UL Listed heating cable and components and control panel with snow sensor and ground fault protection equipment. Heating cable must be suitable for direct burial in concrete or asphalt. The heat tracing system shall conform to IEEE Standard 515.1. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions in its entirety. No deviations are allowed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HEATING CABLE A. B. C. The heating cable and termination components shall be UL Listed specifically as electric deicing and snow-melting equipment. The heating cable shall be of parallel resistance construction capable of being cut-to-length and terminated in the field. Series resistance, constant wattage cables or mats shall not be allowed. The cable shall provide the heat necessary to melt snow and ice through a power limiting coiled resistor alloy element helically wound around two (2) fluoropolymer insulated 12 AWG stranded nickel-plated copper bus conductors. The heater will be covered by a fluoropolymer dielectric jacket, fiberglass cushion braids for impact resistance, a nickel-plated copper braid for grounding purposes and an overall silicone outer jacket for added protection during installation. The heating cable must reduce power output at elevated temperatures to prevent overheating and system damage if accidentally energized during ambient temperatures exceeding 400F. Heating cable must be of the power-limiting type so as not to require circuit breaker oversizing as is required when using self-regulating type cables. The cable must avoid elevated cold start currents at temperatures below +500F that would require oversizing power distribution and circuit breakers. Heating cables that exhibit high inrush current shall not be allowed. The heater shall operate on a line voltage of 208 Vac without the use of transformers. Voltage rating of the dielectric insulation shall be 600 Vac. Power connections and end seal terminations shall be made in junction boxes as described under Part 6, Installation. Power connections and end seal terminations are not to be buried in concrete or asphalt. Acceptable products and manufacturers: 1. SMB Power Limiting Heating Cable as manufactured by Bylin Engineered Systems, El Dorado Hills, CA (1-888-313-5666) 2. Equal as approved by Architect

D.

E.

F. G.

H.

2.2

CONTROL SYSTEM A. The control system shall include a remote snow sensor located outdoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and control panel containing branch circuit breakers, ground fault protection, contactors, power on light and an auto, on, off control switch. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Bylin Engineered Systems, El Dorado Hills, CA (1-888-313-5666). 2. Equal as approved by Architect.

B.

2.3

DESIGN CRITERIA

Walkway Snow Melt Cable

-1-

26 0521

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

A. B. 2.4

Heating cable spacing shall be based on: 1. Manufacturer's snow melting design guide for a critical area with heavy snowfall level. System performance shall be based on heated surface temperatures of 320F (minimum) during the snow melting process. Start up in cold concrete shall be used for circuit breaker sizing only.

BYLIN ENGINEERED SYSTEMS A. The supplier shall demonstrate experience designing and engineering snow and ice melting systems and shall have at least 5 years experience in the custom engineering, design and supply of complete surface snowmelt systems. The supplier shall be Bylin Engineered Systems, El Dorado Hills, CA (1-888-313-5666) or approved equal.

PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL A. B. C. Heating cable shall be installed: 1. Concrete--Poured in place within 2-4 of the finished surface. Installer shall follow supplier's installation instructions and design guide for proper installation and layout methods. Power connections and end seal terminations shall be located in Nema 4 or 4X junction boxes. The heating cable located between the junction boxes and concrete shall be encased in rigid metal conduit (with protective bushings at each end) that extend 12 into the concrete, asphalt or substrate. Contractor shall provide and install: power wiring to the control panel, from the control panel to the heating circuit power termination boxes and from the snow sensor to the control panel. Locate the automatic snow detector sensor as indicated on systems drawings provided by the supplier. All installations and terminations must be made to conform to the NEC and any applicable other national or local code requirements. Circuit breakers supplying power to the heat tracing must be equipped with 30 mA minimum ground-fault equipment protection or equivalent ground fault protection system (5mA GFCI shall not be used as nuisance tripping may result).

D.

E. F.

3.2

TESTING A. Heating cable should be tested with a 2,500 Vdc megohmeter (megger) between the heating cable bus wires and the heating cable's metallic braid. While a 2,500 Vdc megger test is recommended, the minimum acceptable level for testing is 1,000 Vdc. This test should be performed a minimum of four times: 1. While the cable is still on the reel, prior to installation. 2. After installation of cable and completion of circuit fabrication kits but prior to concrete, asphalt or paver placement. 3. During the placement of concrete. (ABSOLUTE REQUIREMENT!) 4. Note: Should the cable be damaged during the concrete pour, the pour shall stop, the electrician and concrete foreman shall locate the damaged cable, repair the cable with an approved splice kit, reinstall the cable on the rebar or wire grid, retest the repaired cable before the concrete pour can continue. 5. Upon completion of placement of concrete or asphalt. 6. The minimum acceptable level for the megger readings is 20 megohms, regardless of the circuit length.

Walkway Snow Melt Cable

-2-

26 0521

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

7.

The Construction Manager for the project or authorized representative should witness megger tests. Results of the megger readings should be recorded and submitted to the Construction Manager. END OF SECTION

Walkway Snow Melt Cable

-3-

26 0521

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0523 Control-Voltage Electrical Cables PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. B. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install control-voltage electrical cables as described in Contract Documents. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 1000: Owner will terminate building telephone cables at terminal board. 2. Section 23 0933: Cables for Temperature Control System. 3. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Control Voltage: 70 Volts and under

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Alpha Wire Co, Elizabeth, NJ www.alphawire.com. b. Belden Wire & Cable Co, Richmond, IN www.belden.com. c. Liberty Wire & Cable, Colorado Springs, CO www.libertycable.com. d. West Penn Wire Corp, Washington, PA www.westpenn-cdt.com.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Cables shall be continuous and without splices from source to outlet. 2. Conceal cables within ceilings and walls of finished areas. Cables may be exposed in unfinished areas but not run on floors of mechanical equipment spaces or in such a way that they obstruct access to, operation of, or servicing of equipment. 3. Run exposed cables parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. 4. Keep cables 6 inch (150 mm) minimum from hot water pipes. 5. Support cables using approved staples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar fittings spaced every 3 feet (900 mm). 6. Where installing in framing, do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches (600 mm) of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. Holes shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter maximum. 7. Bundle only cables of same systems together. 8. Pulling cables into conduit: a. Do not pull cables until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling cables. c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants. 9. Prohibited procedures: a. Boring holes for installation of cables in vertical truss members. b. Notching of structural members for installation of cables. Sound Systems Cables: -126 0523

B.

Control-Voltage Electrical Cables

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

1. 2. 3.

4.

Label cables at each end with cable markers for use of sound sound system installers. Run separate insulated No. 6 grounding conductor from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use intermediate connections or splices. Extend cables 18 inches from wall or ceiling at all outlets and speaker locations. Extend cables and grounding conductors to twice vertical length of cabinet at each cabinet location. For cables not installed in raceway, do not run cables within 10 inches of line voltage conductors / raceways. Also, maintain 10 inches minimum between following exposed cable groups: a. Microphone cables. b. CAT-6, sound system control, telephone, video, or ATC cables. c. Loudspeaker cables. END OF SECTION

Control-Voltage Electrical Cables

-2-

26 0523

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents except as excluded below. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.

B. 1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. SYSTEM Manufacturers: 1. Type One Acceptable Products: a. 'Cadweld' by Erico International, Solon, OH www.erico.com. b. 'ThermOweld' by Continental Industries, Tulsa, NE www.conind.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes. Materials: 1. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation. 2. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps listed for such use. 3. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices: Make by exothermic process.

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be continuous from terminal to terminal without splice. Provide grounding for following. 1. Electrical service, its equipment and enclosures. 2. Conduits and other conductor enclosures. 3. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system. 4. Main panelboard, power and lighting panelboards. 5. Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller cabinets, instrument cases, and lighting fixtures. Grounding connection to main water supply shall be accessible for inspection and made within 6 inches of point of entrance of water line to building. Provide bonding jumpers across water meter and valves to assure electrical continuity. Ground identified common conductor of electrical system at secondary side of main transformer supplying building. Ground identified grounded (neutral) conductor of electrical system on supply side of main service disconnect. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches in length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment. -126 0526

B.

C.

D.

Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

E. F. G.

Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances into panelboards and equipment enclosures. Bond conduit grounding bushings to enclosures with minimum #10 AWG conductor. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground. 1. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG. 2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings. Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use intermediate connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet. On motors, connect ground conductors to conduit with approved grounding bushing and to metal frame with bolted solderless lug. END OF SECTION

H. I.

Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems

-2-

26 0526

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0533 Raceway and Boxes For Electrical Systems PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project but furnished under other Divisions. 2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under other Divisions. 3. Furnish and install main telephone service raceway as described in Contract Documents and to comply with telephone company requirements. 4. Furnish and install main electrical service raceway to comply with electrical utility company requirements. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements. 2. Section 26 0503: Local electrical utility company shall furnish and install primary underground service.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.b-line.com. b. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com. c. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. d. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. e. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. f. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, WV (800) 240-2601. g. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: All aspects of design of sound system have been included as requirements of Owner. Do not make changes to any aspects of installation, design, or equipment pertaining to sound system without Owner's approval through Architect and Sound Consultant. Materials: 1. Raceway And Conduit: a. Sizes: 1) 3/4 inch for exterior use, unless indicated otherwise. 2) 1/2 inch for interior use, unless indicated otherwise. b. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product. 1) Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and galvanized IMC conduit and fittings completely with vinyl tape. 2) Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Flexible Steel Conduit: (a) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is: (1) Not subject to damage. (2) Not in contact with earth. (3) Not in concrete. (b) For metal conduit systems, flexible steel conduit is required for final connections to indoor mechanical equipment. -126 0533

B.

C.

Raceway and Boxes For Electrical Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3.

Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: (a) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC elbows and risers. 4) Listed, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: (a) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36 inches. 5) Pre-wired 3/8 Inch Flexible Fixture Whips: Allowed only for connection to recessed lighting fixtures, lengths not to exceed 72 inches. c. Prohibited Raceway Materials: 1) Aluminum conduit. 2) Armored cable type AC (BX) cable. Raceway And Conduit Fittings: a. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use. b. EMT: 1) Compression type. 2) Steel set screw housing type. c. PVC Conduit: 1) PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes. 2) PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer. d. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type. e. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type. f. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper. g. Prohibited Fitting Materials: 1) Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type fittings. 2) Cast set-screw fittings for EMT. 3) Spray (aerosol) PVC cement. Outlet Boxes: a. Galvanized steel of proper size and shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following: 1) Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box. 2) Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required. 3) Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to bring box flush with finish surface. b. Plastic boxes may be used only in low voltage systems where conductors are not installed in conduit. c. Telephone / data outlet boxes shall be single device outlet boxes. d. HVAC Instrumentation And Control: 1) Junction boxes in mechanical equipment areas shall be 4 inches square. 2) Boxes for remote temperature sensor devices shall be recessed single device. 3) Boxes for thermostats shall be 4 inches square with raised single device cover.

3)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC equipment. 2. Before rough-in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly located for purpose intended. a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22. -226 0533

Raceway and Boxes For Electrical Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3. B.

Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before roughin. Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be installed under other Divisions.

b.

Conduit And Raceway: 1. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes. 2. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting. a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not effectively reduced. b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC. 3. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have accumulated. 4. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger, and on all raceways where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints. 5. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable accessible area and cap for future use. 6. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply PVC adhesive only by brush. 7. Installation In Framing: a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 8. Underground Raceway And Conduit: a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum. b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches deep at point of exit from planting areas. 9. Conduit And Raceway Support: a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required. b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by: 1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry. 2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units. 3) Wood screws on wood. 4) Metal screws on metal. 10. Prohibited Procedures: a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports, boxes, cabinets, or other equipment. b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed. c. Use of torches for bending PVC. d. Spray applied PVC cement. e. Boring holes in truss members. f. Notching of structural members. g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires. h. Nail drive straps or tie wire for supporting raceway. Telephone / Data Systems: 1. Install main service raceway as directed by Telephone Company. Leave pull wire in raceway. 2. Install raceway from terminal board to each telephone and data outlet unless indicated -326 0533

C.

Raceway and Boxes For Electrical Systems

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

otherwise on Drawings. D. Boxes: 1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover. 2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back. 3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets. 4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb. 5. Support switch boxes larger than two-gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed walls. 6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future use. 7. Location: a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and report discrepancies to Architect before rough-in. Distance of box from jamb shall be within 6 inches of door jamb. b. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and consistent with architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines with each other, if possible. c. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile. Support factory-fabricated speaker enclosures from structure or ceiling suspension system. END OF SECTION

E.

Raceway and Boxes For Electrical Systems

-4-

26 0533

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 0613 Electrical Equipment Mounting Heights PART 1 - GENERAL: NOT USED PART 2 - PRODUCTS: NOT USED PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION A. B. Unless otherwise indicated, mount center of outlets or boxes at following heights above finish floor. Refer special conditions to Architect before rough-in and locate outlet under his direction. Mounting Heights: 1. HVAC: a. Temperature Control Junction Boxes: As indicated on Drawings. b. Thermostats: As indicated on Drawings. c. Remote Temperature Sensors: 1) Wall-Mounted 50 inches to top. d. Other Motor Disconnects: 60 inches. e. Motor Controls: 60 inches. 2. Plumbing: a. Electric Water Cooler Outlets: Mount so outlet and cord are hidden by water cooler. 3. Electrical: a. Distribution Panels: 72 inches to top. b. Receptacles: 18 inches. c. Wall Switches: 42 inches. d. Wall-Mounted Exit Lights: 90 inches. e. Emergency Lighting Units: 60 inches. 4. Communications a. Sound Distribution System Components: As indicated on Drawings. b. Computer and TV: 18 inches. c. Telephone / Data Terminal Boards: 72 inches to top. d. Telephones (wall type): 60 inches. e. Telephones (desk type): 18 inches. END OF SECTION

Electrical Equipment Mounting Heights

-1-

26 0613

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 2417 Circuit-Breaker Panelboards PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. B. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install circuit-breaker panelboards as described in Contract Documents. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Cutler-Hammer Inc, Pittsburgh, PA www.eatonelectric.com. b. General Electric Industrial Systems, Charlotte, NC www.geindustrial.com. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Alphrata, GA www.sea.siemens.com. d. Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.us.squared.com. Performance: 1. Capacities: a. Panelboard: 1) Minimum integrated equipment short circuit rating of 22,000 amperes for 120 / 240 Volts. 2) Rated for use as service entrance equipment. b. Lighting And Appliance Panelboards: 1) Minimum integrated equipment short circuit rating of 10,000 amperes for 120 / 240 Volts. c. Load Centers: 1) 125 Amp main lugs, 120 / 240 Volt, single-phase. 2) Minimum integrated equipment short circuit rating of 10,000 Amps. Material: 1. Circuit-breaker type. 2. Galvanized steel cabinets 3. Bussing and lugs arranged as required. 4. Multi-pole circuit-breakers shall be common trip. 5. Circuit-breakers shall be molded case thermal magnetic type with inverse time characteristics. 6. Main Panelboard: a. Surface-mounted and front accessible. b. Enclosures: 1) NEMA / CEMA Type 1. c. Minimum dimensions of 32 inches wide by 8 inches deep. d. Space designation on Drawings indicates bus hardware and panelboard capacity for future acceptance of one 100 Amp, three-pole circuit-breaker. e. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Type PRL4B by Cutler-Hammer. 2) Spectra Series by General Electric. 3) Type P4 by Siemens. 4) I-Line by Square D. 7. Lighting And Appliance Panelboards: a. Plug-on or bolt-on breakers. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip. b. Cabinets shall be locking type with no exposed latches or screws when door is closed. -126 2417

B.

C.

Circuit-Breaker Panelboards

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

8.

Key panels alike and provide minimum of three keys. Minimum dimensions of 20 inches wide by 5-3/4 inches deep. Space designation on Drawings indicates bus hardware and panelboard capacity for future acceptance of one 20 Amp, single-pole circuit-breaker. e. Breakers specified to be shunt trip and shall include shunt trip accessories to remotely trip breaker using separate 120 V power source. Trip coil shall include coil-clearing contact to break coil current when breaker opens. f. Use equipment from same manufacturer as main panelboard. g. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Type PRL1a by Cutler-Hammer. 2) Type AL or AQ by General Electric. 3) Type P1 by Siemens. 4) Type NQOD by Square D. Load Centers: a. Surface-mounted, outdoor NEMA Type 3R enclosure with padlocking provisions. 121/2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep minimum. b. HACR type circuit breakers. c. Use equipment from same manufacturer as main panelboard. d. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Type CH by Cutler-Hammer. 2) Type PowerMark Plus by General Electric. 3) Type EQ by Siemens. 4) Type QO by Square D. c. d.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Label panelboards, load centers, and each breaker in main panelboard with 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick laminated plastic composition material with contrasting color core. Engraved letters shall be 1/4 inch high. Provide typewritten circuit schedules in lighting and distribution panelboards and load centers to identify panelboard and load served by each branch breaker. Arrange conductors neatly within panelboards and load centers. Secure to structure in accordance with requirements of Project seismic design category.

B. C. D. 3.2

PROTECTION A. Protect panelboards, load centers, and interior components from paint, gypsum board compound, dirt, dust, and other foreign matter during construction. END OF SECTION

Circuit-Breaker Panelboards

-2-

26 2417

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 2726 Wiring Devices PART 1 - GENERAL -1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wiring devices complete with plates as described in Contract Documents. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 2. Section 27 1116: 'Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames, and Enclosures'. 3. Section 27 1501: Cables for Telephone and Data Systems.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.1 COMPONENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Cooper Wiring Devices, Peachtree City, GA www.cooperwiringdevices.com. b. General Electric Industrial Systems, Charlotte, NC www.geindustrial.com. c. Hubbell Building Automation, Austin, TX www.hubbell-automation.com. d. Hubbell Inc, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com or Hubbell Canada Inc, Pickering, ON (800) 263-4622 or (905) 839-4332. e. Hunt Control Systems Inc, Fort Collins, CO www.huntdimming.com. f. Intermatic Inc, Spring Grove, IL www.intermatic.com. g. Leviton Manufacturing Co, Little Neck, NY www.leviton.com or Leviton Manufacturing of Canada Ltd, Pointe-Claire, QB (800) 461-2002 or (514) 954-1840. h. Lightolier Controls, Dallas, TX www.lolcontrols.com or Lightolier CFI, Lachine, QB (800) 565-5486 or (514) 636-0670. i. Lutron Electronics Co Inc, Coopersburg, PA www.lutron.com. j. Novitas Inc, Peachtree City, GA www.novitas.com. k. Ortronics, New London, CT www.ortronics.com. l. Paragon Electric Co Inc, Carol Stream, IL www.icca.invensys.com/paragon or Paragon Electric, Mississauga, ON (800) 951-5526 or (905) 890-5956. m. Pass & Seymour, Syracuse, NY www.passandseymour.com or Pass & Seymour Canada Inc, Concord, ON (905) 738-9195. n. Red Dot div of Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnbcom. o. Siemon Company, Watertown, CT www.siemon.com. p. Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. q. Suttle, Hector, MN www.suttleonline.com. r. Tork Inc, Mount Vernon, NY www.tork.com. s. Watt Stopper Inc, Santa Clara, CA www.wattstopper.com. 2. Product Options: a. Faces shall be nylon where available. b. Devices of single type shall be from same Manufacturer. c. Devices are listed as white. Use white devices on light colored walls and brown on dark walls. Switches: 1. Standard Style: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) 20 AMP, single pole for furnace disconnect: (a) Cooper: 2221V (b) Hubbell: HBL1221-I -126 2726

B.

Wiring Devices

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

(c) Pass & Seymour: 20AC1-I (d) Leviton: 1221-2I. 2) Two Pole: (a) Cooper: 2222V (b) Hubbell: HBL1222-I (c) Pass & Seymour: 20AC2-I (d) Leviton: 1222-2I 3) Three Way: (a) Cooper: 2223V (b) Hubbell: HBL1223-I (c) Pass & Seymour: 20AC3-I (d) Leviton: 1223-2I 4) Four Way: (a) Cooper: 2224V (b) Hubbell: HBL1224-I (c) Pass & Seymour 20AC4-I (d) Leviton: 1224-2I 5) Pilot Switch: (a) Hubbell: HBL1221-PL (b) Pass & Seymour: 20AC1-RPL (c) Leviton: 1221-PLR 6) Lighted Toggle Switch: (a) Single Pole: (1) Cooper: 2221-LTV (2) Hubbell: HBL1221-IL (3) Pass & Seymour: 20AC1-ISL (4) Leviton: 1221-LHI (b) Three Way: (1) Cooper: 2223-LTV (2) Hubbell: HBL1223-IL (3) Pass & Seymour: 20AC3-ISL Digital Time/Timer Switch: a. As shown in small Storage, Mechanical and Electrical Rooms. b. Automatic countdown type: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (a) Leviton: LTT60-1L. (b) Hubbell: TD200. (c) Pass & Seymour: RT1W. (d) Tork: SSA100. (e) Watt Stopper: TS-400-W.

C.

Receptacles: 1. Standard Style: a. 15 AMP, specification grade, back and side wired, self grounding. b. Verified by UL to meet Fed Spec WC-596F. c. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Cooper: 5252V 2) Hubbell: HBL5252I 3) Leviton: 5252-I 4) Pass & Seymour: 5252-I 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): a. 15 AMP, specification grade. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Cooper: GF15W. 2) Hubbell: GF5252WA. -226 2726

Wiring Devices

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3) 4) D.

Leviton: 8599-W. Pass & Seymour: 1594-W.

Plates: 1. Standard Cover Plates: a. Office / Occupied Areas: 1) Nylon or high impact resistant thermoplastic. 2) Color shall match wiring device. b. All Other: Stainless Steel. c. Ganged switches shall have gang plates. d. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Cooper. 2) Hubbell. 3) Leviton. 4) Pass & Seymour. 2. Weatherproof In-Use Receptacle Covers: a. NEMA 3R rated. b. Cast aluminum. c. Compatible with GFCI receptacles. d. Complete with weather resistant gaskets and stainless steel screws. e. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Hubbell: WP26MH, horizontal; WP26M, vertical. 2) Intermatic: WP1010HMC, horizontal; WP1010MC, vertical. 3) Red Dot: CKMG, horizontal; CKMGV, vertical. Occupancy Sensors: 1. Ceiling, ultrasonic type. a. Complete with sensor and combined relay / control transformer. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Leviton: (a) Sensor: OSC10-U (b) Relay / Transformer: OSP20-ODO 2) Hubbell: (a) Sensor: OMNI-US500. (b) Relay / Transformer: 120 V: MP 120 A. 3) Novitas: (a) Sensor: 01-083. (b) Relay / Transformer: 120 / 277 V, 13-0511. 4) Pass & Seymour: 120 V. (a) Sensor: US1001. (b) Relay / Transformer: PWP120. 5) Tork: (a) Sensor: SC20. (b) Relay / Transformer: 120 V: TRP1. 6) Watt Stopper: (a) Sensor: W-500A. (b) Relay / Transformer: 120 V: B120E-P. 2. Wall switch, passive infrared type. a. Features include sensitivity and time delay adjustments. b. Manual ON / auto OFF capability. c. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Leviton: ODS10-IDW. 2) Hubbell: LHIRS1W. 3) Sensor Switch: WDS-SA-V-W. 4) Square D: SLSPWS1277UW. 5) Watt Stopper: PW-100-W.

E.

Wiring Devices

-3-

26 2726

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

F.

Secondary Surge (Lightning) Arresters: 1. Protection from Category C level transient surges as defined in IEE / ANSI C62.11 and C62.41. UL approved for exterior application. 2. Parallel metal oxide varistors, MOV, from each line to ground. 120 / 240 VAC. UV resistant construction with epoxy encapsulation of electrical connections. 3. Include 1/2 inch mounting nipple and locknut. 4. Category Four approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. ASZ175B2 by Cooper Power Systems. b. 9L15FCB001 by General Electric. c. AG2401C by Intermatic. d. 54175-SSA by Leviton. e. SDSA1175 by Square D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.1 INSTALLATION A. B. Install devices flush with walls, straight, and solid to box. Install secondary surge arrestor in knock-out of junction box installed on bottom of automatic sprinkler controller. END OF SECTION

Wiring Devices

-4-

26 2726

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 2816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install disconnects as described in Contract Documents, except those provided integral with equipment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Disconnects: Same as Manufacturer of Project's main panelboard. 1) Fuses. (a) Cooper Bussmann, Ellisville, IL www.cooperbussmann.com . (b) Edison Fuse, Ellisville, IL (314) 391-3443. (c) Ferraz Shawmut, Newburyport, MA www.ferrazshawmut.com. (d) Littelfuse Inc, Des Plaines, IL www.littelfuse.com. 2. Disconnects: a. Heavy-duty quick-make, quick-break type, non-fused unless indicated otherwise. b. Provide interlock to prevent opening of door when switch is in ON position. c. Provide means to lock switch in OFF position with padlock. d. Disconnects for motor circuits shall be horsepower rated. e. Disconnects For Furnace Units And Unit Heaters: Provide manual starter with thermal overload relay. Provide overload relay to match motor full load amps. f. Enclosures: 1) Interior: NEMA / CEMA Type 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Label disconnects to indicate equipment served, such as Condensing Unit CU-1. Use 1/16 inch 1.5 mm thick laminated plastic composition material with contrasting color core. Engraved letters shall be 1/4 inch 6 mm high. Attach labels with screws. END OF SECTION

Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

-1-

26 2816

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 4100 Facility Lightning Protection PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. B. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install lightning protection system as described in Contract Documents. Related Sections: 1. Section 10 7429: Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Steeple. 2. Section 10 7429: Aluminum Steeple / Tower. 3. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements.

1.2

REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute: 1. NFPA / ANSI 780-2004, 'Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Show layout of system on building, installation details, and items to be used in system.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with latest edition of NFPA 780 and other local governing codes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Erico International, Solon, OH www.erico.com <http://www.erico.com>. 2. Harger Lightning And Grounding, Grayslake, IL www.harger.com <http://www.harger.com>. 3. Independent Protection Company (IPC), Goshen, IN www.ipclp.com <http://www.ipclp.com>. 4. Preferred Lightning Protection, Maryville, MO www.preferredlp.com <http://www.preferredlp.com>. 5. Robbins Lightning Protection Company, Maryville, MO www.robbinslightning.com <http://www.robbinslightning.com>. 6. Thompson Lightning Protection, St Paul, MN www.tlpinc.com <http://www.tlpinc.com>. 7. VFC Inc, Woods Cross, UT www.vfcinc.com <http://www.vfcinc.com>. 8. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Components: 1. Lightning protection equipment provided under this Section shall be from same manufacturer. 2. Class One Quality Standards: a. Smooth weave copper cables, minimum 32 strands of 17 gauge: IPC No. 32S. b. Bronze ground clamps for 3/4 inch rod: IPC No. 28U. c. 3/4 inch by 10 foot ground rods, copperweld: IPC No. 579. d. Bonding Plate: 1) Bi-Metallic for connection to aluminum steeple / tower elements: IPC No. A183. 2) Bronze for connection to steel steeple / tower elements: IPC No. 238B. e. Pressure Cable Clamp: IPC No. 297A. f. Copper Cable Fastener: IPC No. 121A. -126 4100

B.

Facility Lightning Protection

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

g.

Right Angle Through-Roof Connector: 1) IPC No. 597X, bronze, for use with copper cable in steeple. 2) IPC No. A597X, aluminum, for use with aluminum cable in steeple.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. B. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with steeple / tower fabricator. Ground Rods: 1. Drive ground rods 3 feet minimum away from building or any part of building. Drive each rod until top is a minimum of one foot below finish grade. 2. Connect cable to ground rods with ground clamps. 3. Over each ground rod, install PVC inspection / access well with cover flush with finish grade. Cable: 1. Install lightning cable with continuous horizontal or downward course, free from down and up pockets. 2. Radius of bends shall not be less than 8 inches and never tighter than 90 degree angle. 3. Install cable supports every 36 inches along run through building using specified cable fasteners. END OF SECTION

C.

Facility Lightning Protection

-2-

26 4100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 5100 Interior Lighting PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install lighting system as described in Contract Documents, complete with lamps. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. Reference Standards: 1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): a. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 1) FCC 47 CFR Part 18, 'Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment.' 2. Institute of Electrical and. Electronics Engineers (IEEE) / American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. IEEE / ANSI C62.41.1-2002, 'Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.'

B. C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Advance Transformer Co, Rosemont, IL www.advancetransformer.com. b. General Electric Lighting, Hendersonville, NC www.gelighting.com/na. c. Howard Lighting Products, Laurel, MS www.howard-ind.com. d. Novitas Inc, Peachtree City, GA www.novitas.com. e. Osram Sylvania, Danvers, MA www.sylvania.com. f. Philips Lighting Co, Somerset, NJ www.lighting.philips.com/nam. g. Universal Lighting Technologies, Nashville, TN www.universalballast.com. h. Venture Lighting International, Solon, OH www.venturelighting.com. i. Watt Stopper Inc, Santa Clara, CA www.wattstopper.com. j. Westinghouse Lighting Corp, Philadelphia, PA www.westinghouseli ghtbulbs.com. 2. Product Options: When several lighting fixtures are specified by name for one use on Drawings, select any one of those specified. Do not mix fixtures from different manufacturers specified for one use. Materials 1. Lighting Fixtures: a. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) See Fixture Schedule on Drawings for acceptable manufacturers and models. 2) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2. Fluorescent Ballasts: a. Energy saving electronic for T8 lamps. 1) Instant start. 2) Parallel circuit type. 3) Minimum power factor of 95 percent. 4) Maximum total harmonic distortion of 10 percent. 5) Operation of lamps in compliance with Lamp Manufacturer's recommendations. 6) Minimum starting temperature 0 deg F for T8 lamps. 7) Class A sound rating. 8) Transient protection in accordance with IEEE / ANSI C62.41.1, Category A. 9) Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 18. -126 5100

B.

Interior Lighting

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

10) 11) 12) 13) 14)

Ballast factor of 0.78. Maximum crest factor of 1.7. Five year full replacement warranty including labor allowance for replacement. Input voltage to match system voltage. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (a) ROP-LWSC or VOP-LWSC by Advance. (b) GE-MAX-L/ULTRA by General Electric. (c) B-IUNVEL-A by Universal Lighting Technologies. (d) QHE-UNV-ISL-SC by Osram / Sylvania.

3.

Lamps: a. T8 Fluorescent Lamps: 1) Minimum initial output 0f 3100 Lumens. 2) Rated life of 24,000 hrs at 3 hrs per start for lamps operated on instant start ballasts. 3) Minimum CRI 85 4) Meet Federal TCLP criteria. 5) Category Four approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (a) General Electric. (b) North American Philips. (c) Osram / Sylvania. (d) Westinghouse b. Other Lamps: 1) Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (a) General Electric. (b) North American Philips. (c) Osram / Sylvania. (d) Westinghouse

C.

Factory Assembly: 1. Fixtures shall be fully assembled complete with necessary wiring, sockets, lamps, reflectors, ballasts, auxiliaries, plaster frames, recessing boxes, hangers, supports, lenses, diffusers, and other accessories essential for complete working installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Sections under 09 5000 heading to obtain symmetrical arrangement of fixtures in acoustic tile ceiling. 2. In mechanical equipment rooms, coordinate locations of light fixtures with equipment locations to provide proper room illumination without obstruction. Suspend fixtures that must be mounted below pipes, ducts, etc, with chains or other Architect approved method. Securely mount fixtures. Support fixtures weighing 50 lbs 23 kg or more from building framing or structural members. Where fluorescent fixtures are shown installed end to end, provide suitable connectors or collars to connect adjoining units to appear as a continuous unit.

B. C.

Interior Lighting

-2-

26 5100

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D.

Where recessed fixtures are to be installed, provide openings, plaster rings, etc, of exact dimensions for such fixtures to be properly installed. Coordinate fixture installation with ceiling type and thickness. Terminate circuits for recessed fixtures in an extension outlet box near fixture and connect with specified flexible conduit. Do not locate incandescent fixtures in closet or storage areas within 18 inches 450 mm and fluorescent fixtures within 6 inches 150 mm of shelves.

E. 3.2

ADJUSTMENT A. Repair scratches or nicks on exposed surfaces of fixtures to match original undamaged conditions. END OF SECTION

Interior Lighting

-3-

26 5100

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 5200 Emergency Lighting PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. B. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install emergency battery units as described in Contract Documents. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer List: a. Bodine Emergency Lighting, Collierville, TN www.bodine.com b. Dual-Lite, Cheshire, CT www.dual-lite.com. c. Iota Engineering Co, Tucson, AZ www.iotaengineering.com d. Lightolier, Fall River, MA www.lightolier.com. e. Lithonia Lighting, Conyers, GA www.lithonia.com. f. McPhilbin / Day-Brite Lighting, Tupelo, MS www.mcphilben.com. g. Sure-Lites / Cooper Lighting, Elk Grove, IL www.cooperlighting.com. Materials: 1. Battery Packs: a. General: 1) Batteries shall be long life nickel cadmium type. 2) Complete with charging indicator light and test switch. 3) Factory-installed in lighting fixture, or capable of being field-installed to same standards. b. Standard Linear Fluorescent Fixtures: 1) Shall operate one lamp of fluorescent lighting fixture at approximately 600 lumens initially and 60 percent minimum of initial lumens after 90 minutes. 2) Charger shall be capable of full recharge in 24 hours.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Battery Packs: 1. General: a. Wire so unit can be tested with lights on. b. Wire so lamps in normal mode are switched off with other lighting in area. Connect unit to unswitched conductor of normal lighting circuit. 2. Other Fluorescent Fixtures: a. Install in ballast channel of fixture with charging indicator light and test switch mounted on fixture end, or visible and accessible through lens. END OF SECTION

Emergency Lighting

-1-

26 5200

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 26 5600 Exterior Lighting PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. B. C. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install exterior lighting system as described in Contract Documents. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchor bolts. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3053: Concrete bases for light poles and installation of anchor bolts. 2. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Cutler-Hammer Inc, Milwaukee, WI www.cutler-hammer.eaton.com <http://www.cutler-hammer.eaton.com> or Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Yale Ltd, Burlington, ON (905) 333-6442. b. General Electric Industrial Systems, Charlotte, NC or G E Lighting Canada Inc, Mississauga, ON www.geindustrial.com <http://www.geindustrial.com>. c. Intermatic Inc, Spring Grove, IL www.intermatic.com <http://www.intermatic.com>. d. Paragon Electric Co Inc, Carol Stream, IL www.icca.invensys.com/paragon <http://www.icca.invensys.com/paragon> or Paragon Electric / Maple Chase, Mississauga, ON (800) 951-5526 or (905) 890-5956. e. Siemens Energy & Automation, Alphrata, GA www.sea.siemens.com <http://www.usa.siemens.com> or Siemens Canada, Mississauga, ON (905) 8198000. f. Square D Co, Palatine, IL or Square D / Schneider Electric, Toronto, ON www.squared.com <http://www.squared.com>. g. Tork Inc, Mount Vernon, NY www.tork.com <http://www.tork.com>. Materials: 1. Exterior Fixtures: a. Finish shall be high quality polyester powder coating: 1) Finish process shall consist of cleaning, electrostatically applying power coat, and thermal curing. 2) Weather, scratch, UV, and fade resistant. b. Color shall be Manufacturer's standard white, natural aluminum, or medium bronze as selected by Architect before bidding. 1) Type One Acceptable Products: (a) As indicated on Fixture Schedule. Do not mix fixtures from different manufacturers for one use. (b) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2. Parking Area Poles: a. Designed for wind loading required for Project location as determined by Architect. b. Aluminum hinged base type with matching aluminum anchor bolt cover secured to base. c. Include hand hole with cover at pole base. d. Finish And Color: Match parking area fixtures. 3. Exterior Lighting Control: a. Dial Time Switch: -126 5600

B.

Exterior Lighting

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

b.

24-hour dial time switch, 120 volts, NEMA 1 enclosure. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (a) Intermatic: T101. (b) Paragon: 4001-00. (c) Tork: 1101. Photo Cell: 1) 120 volts. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (a) Paragon: CW201-00. (b) Tork: 2101. 3) Lighting Contactor: (a) 120 volt coil, 20 amps, 2 pole, NEMA 1 enclosure. (b) By same manufacturer as main panelboard. (c) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. (1) Cutler Hammer: CN35. (2) General Electric: CR260L-21CA22. (3) Siemens: LEN01B200120A. (4) Square D: Class 8903, Type LG-20.

1) 2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate location of anchor bolts and conduit in concrete bases so pole will be properly mounted and centered on base. 2. Install hinged light pole bases so poles can be completely lowered to ground without obstruction out into parking area. Lighting Control: 1. Install time switches, manual bypass switches, and contactor inside building to control parking area and building exterior lighting. Label each component to identify lighting controlled, I.E. 'PARKING LIGHTING' or 'BUILDING LIGHTING.' Label with 1/16 inch thick laminated plastic composition material with contrasting color core. Engraved letters shall be 1/4 inch high. 2. Locate photocell outside building under soffit and away from any light source and direct sunlight. 3. Wire photocell and time switch in series for photo cell ON, time switch OFF operation. END OF SECTION

B.

Exterior Lighting

-2-

26 5600

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D I V I S I O N 27: C O M M U N I C A T I O N S
27 1000 S T R U C T U R E D C A B L I N G 27 1116 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 27 1501 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 5000 D I S T R I B U T E D C O M M U N I C A T I O N S A N D M O N I T O R I N G S Y S T E M S 27 5117 SOUND SYSTEM END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 27 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 27 1116 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Selection Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install communications cabinets, racks, frames, and enclosures as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 0526 Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems. 2. Section 27 1501: Communications Horizontal Cabling. 3. Section 27 5117: Sound System. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Cable Management, Vertical Cable Management, and Horizontal Cable Management.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. British Standards Institution (BSI): a. BS EN 50310:2006, Application of Equipotential Bonding and Earthing in Buildings with Information Technology Equipment. 2. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BISCI: th a. Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM) (5 Edition). th b. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) (12 Edition). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 1100-2005 Emerald Book, Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electric Equipment. 4. Telecommunications Industry Association: a. TSB-162, Telecommunication Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access Points (March 2006). Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association: a. ANSI/J-STD-607-A (October 2002), Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. b. ANSI/TIA-758-A (August 2004), Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunication Infrastructure Standard. c. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 (February 2009), Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premise. d. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 (February 2009), Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. e. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 (April 2010), Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard. f. ANSI/TIA-569-B (October 2004), Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. g. ANSI/TIA-606-A-1 (January 2009), Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure. h. ANSI/TIA-942-2 (March 2010), Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers. i. ANSI/TIA-1152 (September 2009), Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling. 27 1116

B.

Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames & Enclosures- 1 -

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3.

4.

5.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 802.3-2009 IEEE Standard for Information Technology Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications - Amendment 2: Ethernet Organizationally Specific Type, Length, Value (TLVs). International Electrotechnical Commission: a. IEC 60603-7:2008, Connectors for electronic equipment Part 7 Detail specification for 8way, unshielded, free and fixed connectors. International Organization for Standardization: a. ISO 11801:2002/Amd 2:2010, Information Technology-Generic Cabling for Customer Premises. National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 702008, National Electrical Code.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Provide Manufacturers documentation and descriptive information on each piece of equipment to be used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Atlas Sound, Phoenix, AZ www.atlassound.com. b. Lowell Manufacturing Co., Pacific, MO www.lowellmfg.com c. Middle Atlantic Products, Fairfield, NJ www.middleatlantic.com.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLERS A. Approved Installers. Specified installers are to both furnish and install components of sound system. See Section 01 4301. 1. Same Approved Installer shall install Section 27 5117.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Equipment Cabinet: 1. See Section 27 5117 Sound System for installation of Sound Equipment. Equipment Cabinet: 1. Install vent panels at top and bottom of equipment cabinets and between components where possible for maximum ventilation. Locate amplifiers at top of cabinet. Locate equalizers below amplifiers, separated by several vent panels. 2. Securely fasten equipment plumb and square in place. Utilize all fastening holes in front of cabinet. 3. Securely fasten in place equipment that is not rack mounted, including relays and other small components. Do not use sticky-back tape. 27 1116

B.

Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames & Enclosures- 2 -

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

4. 5. 6. 7.

Install balancing / isolation transformer when balanced and unbalanced components are connected. Wire XLR-type connections with pin 2 hot, pin 1 shield. Connect powered components to 120 VAC outlets on voltage suppressor power bars. Do not connect to outlets on other components. Identification: a. Legibly identify user-operated system controls and system input / output jacks using engraved, permanently attached laminated plastic plates or imprinted Lexan labels. Label equipment and controls within equipment cabinets using similar labels or printed labels from a label maker or laser printer. b. Affix label to rack panel inside cabinet listing name and telephone number of installer. Appropriate warranty instructions may be included.

C.

Communications Racks, Frames and Enclosures: 1. Racks shall be installed as per Manufacturers recommendations. 2. Racks shall be securely attached to concrete floor with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum hardware or as required by local codes. 3. Place racks with 36 inches (900 mm) minimum clearance front and back from walls and 28 inches (710 mm) clear on one side of rack. When mounted in row, maintain 36 inches (900 mm) minimum from wall behind and in front of row of racks and from wall at each end of row. 4. Racks shall be grounded to telecommunications ground bus bar as per Section 26 0526 Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems. 5. Rack mount screws not used for installing patch panels and other hardware shall be bagged and left with rack upon completion of installation. 6. Mounted termination block fields shall be mounted on Terminal Board in Technology Room provided by Electrical as shown in Contract Documents. a. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be installed with lowest edge of Terminal Board.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with Contract Document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames & Enclosures- 3 -

27 1116

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 27 1501 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish, install, and test communications horizontal cabling as described in Contract Documents including following: a. Cables and related terminations. b. Patch cords and modular connectors. c. Surface raceway and outlet poles. d. Support and grounding hardware. e. UPT Cable. f. UPT Patch cords. g. UTP Connector Modules. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26: Outlets and surface boxes. 2. Section 07 8400: Furnishing and installation of Firestopping. 3. Section 26 0526 Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems for installation and termination. 4. Section 27 1116: Installation of Communications Cabinet, Racks, Frames, and Enclosurers.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. British Standards Institution (BSI): a. BS EN 50310:2006, Application of Equipotential Bonding and Earthing in Buildings with Information Technology Equipment. 2. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BISCI: th a. Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM) (5 Edition). th b. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) (12 Edition). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 1100-2005 Emerald Book, Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electric Equipment. 4. Telecommunications Industry Association: a. TSB-162, Telecommunication Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access Points (March 2006). Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association: a. ANSI/J-STD-607-A (October 2002), Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. b. ANSI/TIA-758-A (August 2004), Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunication Infrastructure Standard. c. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 (February 2009), Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premise. d. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 (February 2009), Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. e. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 (April 2010), Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard. f. ANSI/TIA-569-B (October 2004), Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

B.

Communications Horizontal Cabling

-1-

27 1501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

ANSI/TIA-606-A-1 (January 2009), Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure. h. ANSI/TIA-942-2 (March 2010), Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers. i. ANSI/TIA-1152 (September 2009), Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 802.3-2009 IEEE Standard for Information Technology Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications - Amendment 2: Ethernet Organizationally Specific Type, Length, Value (TLVs). International Electrotechnical Commission: a. IEC 60603-7:2008, Connectors for electronic equipment Part 7 Detail specification for 8way, unshielded, free and fixed connectors. International Organization for Standardization: a. ISO 11801:2002/Amd 2:2010, Information Technology-Generic Cabling for Customer Premises. National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 702008, National Electrical Code.' Underwriters Laboratories: a. UL 94: The Standard for Safety of Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances Testing. 1) 94HB, Horizontal Burn Test.

g.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Provide Manufacturers documentation, installation instructions, and descriptive information on each piece of equipment to be used. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Provide (3) copies three labeling system reflecting approved label scheme for cable installation for racks, cables, panels, and outlets. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Provide Installer certificates of qualifications required. 2. Design Data: a. Identification and labeling: 1) Provide labeling system for cable installation to be approved by Owner. a) Clearly identify all components of system: racks, cables, panels and outlets. b) Designate cables origin and destination and unique identifier for cable within facility by room number and port count. c) Racks and patch panels shall be labeled to identify location within cable system infrastructure. b. After system installation, provide three (3) full documentation sets to Consulting Engineer/Architect for approval. 3. Tests And Evaluation Reports: a. Submit documentation within ten (10) working days of completion of each testing phase. This is inclusive of all test results and record drawings. b. Draft drawings may include annotations done by hand. Final copies of all drawings shall be submitted within thirty (30) working days of completion of each testing phase. c. At request of Consulting Engineer, provide copies of original test results. 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Architect will provide floor plans in paper and electronic formats on which record documentation information can be recorded. 5. Qualification Statements: a. Letter from Manufacturer certifying level of training and experience of Installer. -227 1501

B.

Communications Horizontal Cabling

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

C.

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following information in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Provide operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment submitted under Product Data. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b) Include (3) copies approved shop drawings 2) Tests and evaluation reports. 3) As-built Documentation: a) Provide record document to include cable routes and outlet locations. (1) Sequential number shall identify outlet locations. (2) Numbering, icons, and drawing conventions used shall be consistent throughout all documentation. (3) Provide labeling system information.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. System shall meet approval of authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). NEC and State and/or local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Meet all TIA/EIA commercial building wiring standards. th 3. Meet Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) (12 Edition) requirements for installation and testing. 4. All Networks shall be installed per applicable standards and manufacturer's guidelines. 5. Cable assemblies shall be UL / CE Listed and CSA Certified. Cables shall be a distinctive green or green/yellow in color, and all jackets shall be UL, VW-1 flame rated. 6. Grounding shall conform to all required Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, Electrical Codes, and Manufacturers grounding requirements. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Provide single source for all products of system: 1) KeyConnect by Belden. 2) Netkey by Panduit. 3) System 6 by Siemon. 4) Uniprise Media 6 by CommScope. 2. Installers Qualifications: a. Approved and Certified by Manufacturer (installation and maintenance trained: 1) Beldon Certified System Vendor (CSV). 2) CommScope Certified Business Partner. 3) Panduit Certified Installer (PCI). 4) Siemon Certified Installers (CI). b. Three (3) year experience with similar projects. Provide documentation.

B.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Cabling System: a. Provide warranty for permanent link cabling system to meet Category 6 standard requirements for structured cabling system for 20 years.

Communications Horizontal Cabling

-3-

27 1501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers and Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Belden, St. Louis, MO www.belden.com. b. Panduit Corporation, Tinley Park IL www.panduit.com. c. Systimax Solutions, a CommScope Company, Hickory, NC www.systimax.com. d. The Siemon Company, Watertown, CT www.siemon.com. Design Criteria: 1. Must install single manufacture as complete permanent link. a. Category 6 minimum compliance margin on all parameters beyond category 6 and Power Sum ACR out to 250 MHz. 2. Entire Category 6 system to be provided by single approved Manufacturer throughout. 3. Install structured cabling system that will be able to support interconnections to active telecommunications equipment for voice and data applications in multi vendor, multi product environment. Structured cabling system should adhere to ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, ANSI/TIA-606-A; ANSI/J-STD-607-A, and ANSI/TIA-942-2 standards with respect to pathways, distribution, administration, and grounding of the system. 4. Each room drop will consist of two drops each consisting of two terminations can be interoperable to accommodate either voice or data applications. Provide convenience phone drops that will consist of single termination that will be installed in proper faceplate for each locations phone. 5. Install, terminate, test, and guarantee each drop according to customer all applicable standards and customer preferences. 6. Horizontal cables will be rated Category 6 (250 MHz) in performance and rated to comply with ANSI/TIA-568 to connector outlets at Work Area. Horizontal cables will home run back to Technology Room (Entrance Facility / Main Cross Connect) and will terminate on individual Category 6 rated jacks to populate modular 48 port angled patch panel on open or flat patch panel inside enclosures. All cables will be patched at cutover as interconnection into floor serving active equipment using RJ45 modular equipment cables rated to Category 6. 7. Match additions to horizontal raceway to complete system according to ANSI/TIA-568 where suspension and protection gaps exist. Components Work Area Subsystem: 1. Provide connectivity equipment used to connect horizontal cabling subsystem and equipment in work area. Both copper and fiber media shall be supported. Connectivity equipment shall include following options: a. Patch (equipment) cords and modular connectors. b. Outlets and surface mount boxes. c. Surface raceway and outlet poles. d. Consolidation point / MUlO. 2. Patch Cords and Modular Connectors: a. Match horizontal cabling medium and rating. Same Manufacturer shall provide modular connectors and patch cords. Total patch cord length at work area is not to exceed 10 feet (3.0 m). b. Copper Connectivity: 1) Network Cabling System: a) Provide for Work Area subsystem, including all modular connectors. b) Modular connectors shall support of high-speed networks and applications designed for implementation on copper cabling. c) Outlets shall utilize fully interchangeable and individual connector modules that mount side-by-side to facilitate quick and easy moves, adds and changes. 2) Modular Connections: a) Data Modules shall be Category 6:

B.

C.

Communications Horizontal Cabling

-4-

27 1501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

4.

Eight position modules required in all work areas and shall exceed connector requirements of TIA Category 6 standard. (2) Prove termination cap with strain relief on cable jacket, ensure cable twists are maintained to within 1/8 inch (3 mm) and include wiring scheme label. Wiring scheme label shall be available with ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 wiring schemes. b) Terminations shall use for ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 wiring scheme. c) Modules shall terminate 4 pair 23 100-ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable. d) Modules shall meet ISO 11801 standard including complying with intermateability standard IEC 60603-7 for backward compatibility. e) Category 6 modules shall have UL and CSA approval. f) Modules shall have ETL verified Category 6 performance and ISO 11801 Class E performance in both basic and channel links. g) Modules shall be universal in design, accepting 2, 3, or 4 pair modular plugs without damage to outer jack contacts. h) Modules shall be able to be re-terminated minimum of 10 times and be available in 11 standard colors for color-coding purposes. i) Jack shall snap into all outlets and patch panels. j) Module shall include black base to signify Category 6 400 MHz performance. 3) Patch Cords: a) Category 6 patch cords 'shall be factory terminated with modular plugs featuring one-piece, tangle-free latch design and strain-relief boots to support easy moves, adds. and changes. b) Constructed with Category 6 23-AWG stranded UTP cable. c) Each patch cord shall be 100% performance tested at factory in channel test to TIA Category 6 standard. d) Patch cords shall come in standard lengths of 3, 5, 7, 9, 14 and 20 feet (0.90, 1.50, 2.15, 2.75, 4.20 and 6.1 meters) and 6 standard colors of Blue or White. Outlets and Surface Mount Boxes: a. Outlets and surface mount boxes shall support network system by providing high-density inwall, surface mount cabling applications. b. Provide faceplates for flush mount: 1) Outlets faceplates shall be manufactured from high-impact thermoplastic material with UL 94 flammability rating of 94 HB or better. Copper Cable: a. Design Criteria: 1) Performance exceeds all ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, and ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 and ISO 11801 for Class E cable requirements. 2) ETL tested and verified for Category 6 component performance. 3) Conductors are twisted in pairs with four pairs contained in flame retardant PVC jacket separated by a spline. 4) Performance tested to 650 MHz. 5) Plenum (CMP) and non-plenum/riser (CMR) flame rated. 6) Maximum installation tension of 25 lbs (110 N). 7) Installation temperature range: 32 deg F (0 deg C) to 140 deg F (60 deg C). 8) Operating temperature range: 14 deg F (minus 10 deg C) to 140 deg F (60 deg C). 9) Cable diameter: Riser 0.26 inch (6.604 mm) 0.260"; Plenum 0.25 inch (6.35 mm). 10) Easy payout, reel-in-a-box and descending length markings on cable speed installation. 11) Supports following applications: Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet) and 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet); 1.2Gb/s ATM; Token Ring 4/16; digital video; and broadband/baseband analog video.

(1)

D.

Horizontal Distribution Cabling: 1. General: a. Horizontal distribution cabling system is portion of telecommunications cabling system that extends from work area telecommunications outlet/connector to horizontal cross-connect in Technology Room (Entrance Facility / Main Cross Connect). 1) Horizontal cabling in office should terminate in Technology Room (Entrance Facility / Main Cross Connect) located on same floor as Work Area being served. -527 1501

Communications Horizontal Cabling

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2) 3) E.

Horizontal cabling is installed in star topology (home run). Bridged taps and splices are not permitted as part of copper horizontal cabling.

Components Technology Room (Entrance Facility / Main Cross Connect): 1. General: a. Connect networking equipment to horizontal and backbone cabling subsystems: 1) Termination hardware (connectors and patch cords), racks, cable management products and cable routing products. 2) Cable termination hardware. b. Terminate each horizontal or backbone cabling run using appropriate connectors or connecting blocks depending upon cable type: 1) Matching patch cords will be used to perform cross-connect activities or to connect into the networking/voice hardware: a) Category 6 Enhanced Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP). c. Four-pair Category 6 UTP cabling shall be terminated onto four-pair Category 6 module: 1) All modules shall be terminated using 568-B wiring scheme. 2) Eight position module shall exceed connector requirements of TIA Category 6.standard. 3) Jack termination to 4-pair, 100 ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall be by use of forward motion termination cap and shall not require use of punchdown or insertion tool. 2. Rack, Cabinet, and Cabling Management Enclosure: a. Cable Management: 1) Cable Management System shall be used to provide neat and efficient means for routing and protecting fiber and copper cables and patch cords on telecommunication racks and enclosures. 2) Provide complete cable management system comprised of vertical and horizontal cable managers to manage cables on both front and rear of rack. 3) System shall protect network investment by maintaining system performance, controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain relief. b. Vertical Cable Management: 1) General: a) Vertical cable managers include components that aid in routing, managing and organizing cable to and from equipment. b) Panels shall protect network equipment by controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain relief. 2) Provide panels with universal design mounting to 19 inches (480 mm) rack and constructed of steel bases with PVC duct attached. 3) Covers shall be able to hinge from either side yet still be easily removed to allow for quick moves, adds, and changes. c. Horizontal Cable Management: 1) General: a) Horizontal cable managers include components that aid in routing managing and organizing cable to and from equipment. b) Panels shall protect network equipment by controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain relief. 2) Provide panels with universal design mounting to 19 inches (480 mm) rack and constructed of steel bases with PVC duct attached. 3) Duct fingers shall include retaining tabs to retain cables in place during cover removal. 4) Covers shall be able to hinge from either side yet still be easily removed to allow for quick moves, adds, and changes. 3. Patch Cords: a. Provide patch cords between modular patch panels configured as cross-connect or between patch panel and networking hardware when patch is used as interconnect. b. Patch cords shall be factory terminated with modular plugs featuring one-piece, tangle-free latch design and black strain-relief boots to support easy moves, adds and changes. c. Construct patch cords with Category 6 24-AWG stranded UTP cable. d. Patch cords shall be 100% performance tested at factory in channel test to Category 6 standard. 4. Patch Panels: -627 1501

Communications Horizontal Cabling

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

5.

6.

Four-pair Category 6 UTP cabling shall be terminated onto four-pair-punch-down style connecting hardware mounted to rear of integral patch panels and routed to Category 6 modules on front face of patch panel. b. Patch panels shall be universal for 568-B wiring configurations. c. Patch panels shall have removable 6-port design that allows 6-port module to be removed without disrupting other ports. d. Integral cable tie mounts shall be included in panel for cable management on back of panel. e. Port and panels shall be easy to identify with write-on areas and optional label holder for color-coded labels. f. Rack mountable patch panels shall mount to standard 19 inches (480 mm) rack. Grounding and Bonding: a. Provide Telecommunications Bonding Backbone: 1) Ground all telecommunications cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware that has potential to act as current carrying conductor. 2) Install telecommunication Bonding Backbone independent of buildings electrical and building ground. 3) Designed in accordance with recommendations contained in ANSI/J-STD-607-A Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Standard. b. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with green insulation: 1) Non-insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point with wrap of green tape. 2) All cables and bus bars shall be identified and labeled as required. Firestopping: Furnish and install firestopping as per Section 07 8400.

a.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install communications system in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, and complying with applicable portions of NEC 'Standard of Installation.' Work Area Outlets: 1. Cables shall be coiled in in-wall or surface-mount boxes if adequate space is present to house cable coil without exceeding Manufacturers bend radius. a. No more than 12 inches (300 mm) of UTP slack shall be stored in in-wall box, modular furniture raceway, or insulated walls. b. Excess slack shall be loosely configured and stored in ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in outlet box to store slack cable. 2. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Manufacturer's recommendations, and best industry practices. 3. Pair untwist at termination shall not exceed 0.125 inch (3.175 mm). 4. Bend radius of cable in termination area shall not be less than 4 times outside diameter of cable. 5. Cable jacket shall be maintained to within one inch (25 mm) of termination point. 6. Data / voice jacks, unless otherwise noted in Contract Documents, shall be located on each faceplate. 7. Horizontal Cabling: a. Data jacks in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy rightmost position(s). b. Voice jacks shall occupy the top position(s) on the faceplate. Voice jacks in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy the left-most position(s). Horizontal Cross Connect: 1. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Manufacturer's recommendations, and best industry practices. 2. Pair untwist at termination shall not exceed 0.125 inch (3.175 mm).

B.

C.

Communications Horizontal Cabling

-7-

27 1501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

4. 5.

6.

Bend radius of cable in termination area shall not be less than 4 times outside diameter of cable. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. a. Each panel or block shall be fed by individual bundle separated and dressed back to point of cable entrance into rack or frame. Cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to termination point. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on cable jacket behind patch panel at location that can be viewed without removing bundle support ties. a. Cables labeled within bundle, where label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable. Horizontal Cabling: a. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any conduit. b. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than required by ANSI/TIA-569-B maximum fill for particular raceway type. c. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices) except for transition points, or consolidation points. d. Where transition points or consolidation points are allowed, they shall be located in accessible locations and housed in enclosure intended and suitable for purpose. e. Cables minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded. f. If J-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles, all horizontal cables shall be supported at 48 inch (1 200 mm) to 60 inches (1 500 mm) maximum intervals. At no point shall cable(s) rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. g. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of no more than 25 cables. Cable bundle quantities in excess of 25 cables may cause deformation of bottom cables within bundle and degrade cable performance. h. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. Cable system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices. i. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires. Where support for horizontal cable is required, install appropriate carriers to support cabling. j. Cables shall be identified by self-adhesive label and meet requirements of ANSI/TIA-606-A1. Cable label shall be applied to cable behind faceplate on section of cable that can be accessed by removing cover plate. k. Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends smaller than four times the cable outside diameter at any point in run and at termination field. l. Pulling tension on 4-pair UTP cables shall not exceed 25 lbf (111 N) for a four-pair UTP cable.

a.

D.

Vertical Outlet Pole And Surface Raceway: 1. Horizontal Cabling: a. General: 1) Vertical outlet poles and Surface Raceway refers to surface raceway system used for branch circuit wiring and/or data network, voice, video and other low-voltage cabling. Surface raceway shall be used in solid wall applications or for applications where moves, additions and changes are very typical to workflow. b. Raceway system shall consist of raceway, appropriate fittings and accessories to complete installation per electrical Contract Documents. Non-metallic surface raceway is to be utilized in dry interior locations only as covered in Article 352, part B of the NEC, as adopted by the NFPA and as approved by the ANSI. Copper Termination Hardware: 1. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Manufacturer's recommendations, and best industry practices. 2. Pair untwist at termination shall not exceed 0.125 inch (3.175 mm). a. Bend radius of cable in termination area shall not be less than 4 times outside diameter of cable. 3. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. a. Each panel or block shall be fed by individual bundle separated and dressed back to point of cable entrance into rack or frame. -827 1501

E.

Communications Horizontal Cabling

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

4. 5.

Cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to termination point. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on cable jacket behind patch panel at location that can be viewed without removing bundle support ties. a. Cables labeled within bundle, where label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.

F.

Grounding System: 1. Where required, Telecommunications Bonding Backbone shall be designed and/or approved by qualified Installer. 2. Follow requirements of ANSI/J-STD-607-A. Identification and Labeling: 1. Apply machine generated approved labeling for racks, cables, panels and outlets: a. Designate cables origin and destination and unique identifier for cable by room name and/or number and port count. b. Racks and patch panels shall be labeled to identify location within cable system infrastructure. 2. Place labeling within view at termination point on each end. 3. Outlet, patch panel and wiring block labels shall be installed on, or in, space provided on device.

G.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Provide testing upon completion of installation. a. General: 1) Testing to be in accordance with ANSI/TIA standards and Manufacturers system warranty guidelines and best industry practice. a) If any of these are in conflict, discrepancies shall be brought to attention of Architect/Consulting Engineer for clarification and resolution. b. Cables and termination hardware: 1) Test complete system for defects in installation. 2) Verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C: a) All pairs of each installed cable shall be verified prior to system acceptance. b) Any defect in cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed. c. Copper channel testing: 1) All twisted-pair copper cable links shall be tested for compliance to requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C) for appropriate Category of cabling installed. 2) Backbone multimode fiber cabling shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm. d. UTP Cables and Links testing: 1) UTP cabling channel must be tested at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz for internal channel performance parameters as defined in IEEE 802.3 and ANSI/TIA 568-C.0-2. Certifications shall include following parameters for each pair of each cable installed: a) Wire map (pin to pin connectivity). b) Length (in feet or millimeters). c) Near End Crosstalk (NEXT). d) Far End Crosstalk (FEXT). e) ELFEXT. f) Attenuation/Crosstalk Ration (ACR). g) Return Loss. h) Propagation Delay. i) Delay Skew. j) Test equipment shall provide electronic and printed record of these tests. 2) Test each pair of cable for opens, shorts, grounds, and pair reversal. a) Correct short or grounded and reversed pairs.

Communications Horizontal Cabling

-9-

27 1501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

e.

f.

g.

h.

Examine open and shorted pairs to determine if problem is caused by improper termination. c) If termination is proper, tag bad pairs at both ends and note on termination sheets. d) If horizontal cable contains bad conductors, remove and replace cable. Testing Equipment: 1) Comply with requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C. a) Appropriate level III tester shall be used to verify Category 6 cabling systems. 2) UTP Cables and Links test equipment: a) Category Four Approved Testing Equipment. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Fluke Networks DTX-1800 with firmware version 2.04 or later. (a) Test lead to be P/N DTX-PLA001 or PLA002 universal permanent link interface adapter. (2) Agilent Wirescope Pro N2640A with firmware version 2.1.9 or later. (a) Test lead to be P/N N2644A-101 universal CAT6A link smart probes. Re-Testing: 1) Consulting Engineer may request 10% random field re-test to be conducted on cable system, at no additional cost to Owner, to verify documented findings. a) Tests shall be repeat of those defined above. b) If findings contradict documentation submitted, additional testing can be requested to extent determined necessary by Consulting Engineer, including 100% re-test at no additional cost to Owner. Tests And Evaluation Reports: 1) Printouts generated for each cable by wire test instrument shall be submitted as part of documentation package. Installer may furnish this information in electronic form. a) Media shall contain electronic equivalent of test results as defined by the Section along with software necessary to view and evaluate test reports. 2) Submit documentation within ten (10) working days of completion of each testing phase. This is inclusive of all test results and record drawings. 3) Draft drawings may include annotations done by hand. Final copies of all drawings shall be submitted within thirty (30) working days of completion of each testing phase. 4) If requested by Consulting Engineer, provide copies of original test results. Test Documentation: 1) Provide electronic format documentation within three (3) weeks after completion of project. 2) Documentation shall be clearly marked on outside front cover with following: a) "Project Test Documentation". b) Project name. c) Date of completion (month and year). 3) Test results shall include following: a) Record of test frequencies. b) Cable type. c) Conductor pair and cable (or outlet) I.D. d) Measurement direction. e) Reference setup. f) Crew member name(s). g) Test equipment name, manufacturer, model number, serial number, software version. h) Last calibration date: (1) Unless Manufacturer specifies more frequent calibration cycle, annual calibration cycle is required on all test equipment used on project. (2) Document shall detail test method used and specific settings of equipment during test as well as software version being used in field test equipment.

b)

B.

Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

Communications Horizontal Cabling

- 10 -

27 1501

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3. 4.

Any defect in cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed at no additional cost to the Owner. Correct deviation and repeat applicable testing at no additional cost to the Owner. Correct any work found defective or not complying with Association Publications and TDMM requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. a. Document all problems found and corrective action taken. b. Include both failed and passed test data.

END OF SECTION

Communications Horizontal Cabling

- 11 -

27 1501

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 27 5117 SOUND SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install complete and operational sound system as described in Contract Documents. 2. Assist Sound / Acoustical Consultant with final inspection and equalization of system and provide necessary test equipment for sound system and partition noise isolation tests. Correct problems found at time of final inspection of system. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2221: Field-fabricated speaker enclosures with fiberglass insulation. 2. Division 26: a. Raceways, equipment and control cabinets, pre-fabricated speaker enclosures, fittings, and audio cables. b. Power to equipment location and power relay wiring. 3. Section 27 1116. Installation of Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames, and Enclosures. 4. Sound / Acoustical Consultant will perform final inspection, system balance, equalization, and instruct local leaders in operation of system.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate final inspection schedule with Sound / Acoustical Consultant two weeks minimum before Consultant's final inspection.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Reports: a. Itemized list of equipment to be supplied. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Equipment Manufactures manual: a) Sound system operation and maintenance instructions. b) List of equipment provided, including portable equipment, showing make, model, and serial number. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Software and Programming: Copies of all manufacturers software used for programming various components and functions of the system shall be furnished to the Owner: a) Original source codes and compiled codes used for system control, audio setup and any other computerized functions of the system including screen layout generation, configuration and layouts and any other related computer files shall also be furnished to the Owner.

B.

Sound System

-1-

27 5117

Project # 503-6925-11010101 b)

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake In each and every case, all programming, code generation, configuration files, layout files and any other software and/or code written and generated of the setup and operation of this system are the property of the Owner of the system and not of the consultant, contractor or integrator.

08.29.11

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: 1. Installers Qualifications: a. Approved by Manufacturer.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide complete warranty repair or replacement for one year at no cost to Owner, except in case of obvious abuse. 2. If failure causes Chapel or Cultural Center sound system to be inoperative or unusable for its intended purpose, Installer, when notified of problem before Wednesday, shall repair system so it will be operational and usable by following Sunday. If defective components cannot be repaired in time, furnish and install temporary loaner equipment as required. 3. Honor component warranties for term established by Manufacturer, if greater than one year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers Contact List: 1. Category Four components as shown on Drawings from following Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories. a. Atlas Sound, Phoenix, AZ www.atlassound.com. b. Audio-Technica US Inc, Stow, OH www.audio-technica.com. c. Belden Wire & Cable Co, Richmond, IN www.belden.com. d. BSS Audio, Sandy, UT www.bssaudio.com. e. COMTEK Inc, Salt Lake City, UT www.comtek.com. f. Conquest Sound Co, Tinley Park, IL www.conquestsound.com. g. Crown Audio Inc, Elkhart, IN www.crownaudio.com. h. EIKI International, Laguna Nigel, CA www.eiki.com. i. Electro-Voice Inc, Burnsville, MN www.electro-voice.com. j. Emtech Electronics Inc, Orem, UT www.emtechelectronics.com. k. HellermannTyton, Milwaukee, WI www.hellermann.tyton.com. l. Hubbell Inc, Orange, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com. m. IVIE Technologies Inc, Lehi, UT www.ivie.com. n. JBL Professional, Northridge, CA www.jblpro.com. o. Leviton Manufacturing Co, Little Neck, NY www.leviton.com. p. Lowell Manufacturing Co, Pacific, MO www.lowellmfg.com. q. Middle Atlantic Products, Fairfield, NJ www.middleatlantic.com. r. Neutrik USA Inc, Lakewood, NJ (732) 901-9488. www.neutrikusa.com. s. Newark Electronics, Sola and Triad, Chicago, IL www.newark.com. t. QSC Audio Products, Costa Mesa, CA www.qscaudio.com. u. Radio Design Labs, Carpenteria, CA www.rdlnet.com. v. Rane Corp, Mukilteo, WA www.rane.com. w. Shure Brothers, Evanston, IL www.shure.com. x. SoundTech, Mundelein, IL www.soundtech.com. y. Switchcraft, Chicago, IL www.switchcraft.com. z. TOA Electronics, South San Francisco, CA www.toaelectronics.com.

Sound System

-2-

27 5117

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

aa. Wireworks Corp, Hillside, NJ www.wireworks.com. B. Performance: 1. Capabilities: a. Installations with equalizers shall meet following performance parameters: 1) From 100 Hz to 2 kHz, flat within plus or minus 2 dB. 2) Above 2 kHz, slope down along an approximate 3 dB per octave slope to 8 kHz. b. No noise, hum, RFI pickup or distortion shall be audible under normal operating conditions. c. Sound systems shall reproduce program material at level of 80 to 85 dBA without audible distortion. d. All input levels shall be pre-set so system may be operated without going into feedback under normal conditions. e. Seat-to-seat variations in the 4kHz octave band shall not exceed plus or minus 2 dB in the Chapel or Cultural Center. f. Sound masking system: 1) Sound masking system shall provide adequate speech privacy in Corridor when set between 42 dBA and 46 dBA at ear-height under speaker so conversation in Office at slightly raised voice levels cannot be understood in Corridor. a) Lowell CN-4M. 2) Loudspeaker Mounting Bracket - Atlas Sound TR411.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLERS A. Approved Installers. Specified installers are to both furnish and install components of sound system. See Section 01 4301: 1. General Communications: (801) 266-5731. 2. Marshall Industries: (801) 266-2428. 3. Poll Sound: (801) 261-2500. 4. Professional Systems Technology: (801) 649-6696. 5. TPI: (801) 702-8242 Same Approved Installer shall install Section 27 1501.

B.

3.2

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify compliance with following items before beginning work of this Section. a. No cables spliced. b. Isolated ground run back to electrical panel from all equipment cabinets. c. Specified conduit, cables, speaker enclosures and equipment cabinets are properly installed. d. Location and angle of speaker cabinets. 2. Ensure that no solid structural or decorative member impedes sound propagation from speakers and that no member with cross section greater than 3/4 inch (19 mm) is placed in front of speakers. 3. Verify installation of fiberglass insulation in all speaker enclosures.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Speakers: 1. Maintain uniform polarity in speakers and wiring. 2. Employ no positive stop in rotation of speaker volume controls. Controls shall be capable of continuous rotations in either direction.

Sound System

-3-

27 5117

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3. 4. 5.

6.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Mount transformers with screws securely to speaker brackets or enclosures. Adjust torsion springs as necessary to securely support speaker assembly. Neatly mount speaker grilles, panels, connector plates, control panels, etc., tight, plumb, and square unless indicated otherwise on drawings. Provide brackets, screws, adapters, springs, rack mounting kits, etc, recommended by manufacturer for correct assembly and installation of speaker assemblies and electronic components. Line factory-fabricated speaker back boxes with one inch (25 mm) minimum fiberglass if not done by Back box Manufacturer.

08.29.11

B.

Pulpit: 1. Install pulpit microphone pre-amplifier to be accessible below lectern. Do not alter factory supplied microphone cable and connectors. 2. Install pulpit microphone so tip of microphone head is 2 inches (50 mm) inside edge of lectern when microphone is tilted down to maximum extent. Cables: 1. Leave sufficient service loops of uniform length on cables to allow for future equipment replacement. 2. Make parallel connections or splices on standard barrier terminal blocks using spade lugs, or on equipment terminals using appropriate connection type. Do not attach more than three spade lugs under any one screw terminal. 3. Strip wires installed in Euroblock or Phoenix connectors so 1/16 inch (2 mm) of wire is exposed outside connector when wire contacts back of connector: a. Secure wires using screwdriver with blade of same width as screw slot and handle 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum diameter and of length to allow applying sufficient torque to prevent wires from becoming disconnected. 4. Terminate conductors with proper mating connectors: a. Do not use adapters. b. Use proper crimp tool as recommended by Connector Manufacturer. c. Use controlled duty cycle ratcheting crimp tools of proper size for spade lugs and Molex pins. 5. Male CAT-6 connectors shall be grey-smoked or blue-smoked RJ-45's. a. After installing RJ-45 connectors, test CAT-6 cables for shorts, opens, and cross-pairing with two-piece wire-mapping continuity tester. 6. Secure cables to equipment cabinet with wire ties to ensure neat installation: a. Secure sticky-back wire tie mounts with screw. b. Keep speaker cables and video cables separate from other cable types. 7. Ground both ends of each shielded cable within equipment cabinet only. Ground microphone cables only at mixer. 8. Label both ends of cables with source and destination. Use HellermannTyton Tag 49L-105 or similar label types. a. Example 1: PULPIT MIC: MIXER IN 1. b. Example 2: DSP OUT B: CC1 AMP IN.

C.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Installer Testing: a. After completion of installation but before inspection by Sound / Acoustical Consultant, perform following: 1) Conduct system tests and make necessary corrections for proper system operation including, but not limited to, following: a) Output level uniformity. b) Polarity. c) Shock, strain excited hum, and oscillation. d) Clipping, hum, noise, and RFI in all system configurations. e) Speaker line impedances. f) Loose parts and poor workmanship or soldering. -427 5117

Sound System

Project # 503-6925-11010101

b.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2) Sweep speaker systems with high-level sine wave or 1/3 octave pink noise source. Correct causes of buzzes or rattles related to speakers or enclosures. Notify Contractor and Sound / Acoustical Consultant of external causes of buzzes or rattles. 3) Rough Balance: Balance system well enough that it can be used for meetings before final inspection. Complete documentation required by Sound / Acoustical Consultant and submit to consultant within 5 days of Substantial Completion.

08.29.11

B.

Field Inspections: 1. Sound / Acoustical Consultant Inspection And Equalization: a. Coordinate final inspection schedule with Sound / Acoustical Consultant two weeks minimum before Consultant's final inspection. b. Have copy of redlined record documents available at time of inspection. c. Have loose equipment (microphones, cables, etc.) available at time of inspection. d. Assist Sound / Acoustical Consultant in final inspection of completed system. e. Assist Sound / Acoustical Consultant in noise isolation testing of folding partitions and office doors. f. Provide following test equipment in good working order: 1) Laptop computer, 100 MHz Pentium or better, with 16 bit sound card, software, and interfacing adapters for microprocessor controlled equipment in system. 2) 1/3 octave real-time audio spectrum analyzer with SPL meter, and precision microphone. 3) Digitally generated random pink noise generator, 20Hz-20KHz, minimum 2 hour repetition rate or 10 minutes minimum of equivalent signal recorded on compact disc. 4) Direct reading audio impedance meter, minimum 3 frequencies, and 10 percent accuracy. 5) Digital Volt-Ohmmeter. 6) Audio oscillator, variable frequency, 20Hz-20KHz. 7) Compact disc player, or equal, with pre-recorded speech and music program material. 8) Necessary chargers, cables, test leads, adapters, and other accessories for test equipment. 9) Tools and spare parts for making adjustments and corrections to system. 10) Blank cassette tape for testing cassette recorder. 11) CAT-5 / RJ-45 continuity tester similar to Ideal 62-200 or Amprobe DCT-300. g. Correct minor items so Sound / Acoustical Consultant may certify satisfactory completion during his visit.

END OF SECTION

Sound System

-5-

27 5117

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I O N 28: E L E C T R O N I C S A F E T Y A N D S E C U R I T Y
28 1000 E L E C T R O N I C A C C E S S C O N T R O L A N D I N T R U S I O N D E T E C T I O N

28 3000 D E T E C T I O N A N D A L A R M 28 3101 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 28 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Section 28 3101 Fire Detection and Alarm System PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install fire alarm and detection system as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install raceway, cable and conductors, boxes, and miscellaneous items necessary for complete system. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26: Quality of and installation standards for wiring, raceway, conduit, and boxes.

B. 1.2

REFERENCES A. B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 72, 'National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.' (2010 Edition). Underwriters Laboratories / American National Standards Institute: 1. UL / ANSI 268, 'Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems' (8-14-2009). 2. UL / ANSI 464, 'Audible Signal Appliances' (8-4-2009). 3. UL / ANSI 521, 'Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems' (10-4-2009). 4. UL / ANSI 864, 'Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems' (10-20-2009). 5. UL / ANSI 1480, 'Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional' (12-12-2006). 6. UL / ANSI 1971, 'Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired' (10-15-2008). Underwriters Laboratories: 1. UL 1481, 'Power Supplies for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems' (12-12-2006).

C. 1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Prepared by authorized factory representative and including: 1) Single line diagram of actual system. Typical riser diagrams are not acceptable. 2) Complete wiring diagrams. 3) Manufacturer's original catalog data and descriptive information on each piece of equipment to be used. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: Certificate of completion, from Manufacturer's Representative, in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operations And Maintenance Manual Data: a. Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7000 as follows: 1) Provide operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment submitted under Product Data. Provide instruction manual from Manufacturer that explains what is to be done in event of various indications. 2) Include copy of approved shop drawings.

B.

C.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. System shall meet approval of authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Equipment, devices, and cable shall be UL or Factory Mutual listed for use in fire alarm systems. -128 3101

Fire Detection and Alarm System

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Northford, CT www.firelite.com. b. GE Security - EST, Bradenton, FL www.gesecurity.net. c. Mircom / Summit Systems Technologies, Cheektowaga (Buffalo), NY, Vaughan (Toronto), Ontario www.mircom.com / www.summit-st.net. d. Silent Knight Security Systems, Maple Grove, MN www.silentknight.com. e. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Automatic fire alarm system consisting of control panel, power supplies, alarm initiating devices, notification appliances, and off-site communicating devices. System shall be non-coded, zoned or addressable, and monitored for integrity of conductors. b. Class B (Style B) initiating device circuits and Class B (Style W) notification appliance circuits including end-of-line devices. c. Equipment and accessories furnished under this Specification shall be standard products of single manufacturer, or include written statement by Control Panel Manufacturer confirming compatibility of components and inclusion of these components under system warranty. Operation: 1. Operation Sequences: a. Operation of manual station or automatic activation of any smoke detector, heat detector, or sprinkler flow device shall: 1) Indicate zone in alarm on control panel. 2) Initiate elevator recall. 3) Initiate off-site alarm notification system. b. System shall return to normal when operated device is returned to normal and control panel is manually reset, except alarms may be silenced as specified below. c. Alarm may be silenced by switch in control panel. 1) Ring Back Feature: When silenced, this shall not prevent the resounding of subsequent alarms if another zone should alarm. d. When alarms are silenced, zone indicating red LEDs on control panel and remote annunciator shall remain indicated until operated device is returned to normal and control panel is manually reset. e. Green pilot LED, or other visual annunciation, shall normally be on indicating that system is receiving normal power. In addition, failure of normal power be annunciated. f. Trouble alarm and annunciation, operating together, shall signal trouble condition. 1) Following conditions shall signal trouble condition: 2) Failure of normal power. 3) Opens or short circuits on indicating circuits. 4) Disarrangements in system wiring. 5) Control panel circuit board removal. 6) Ground faults. 7) Trouble silencing switch shall silence trouble alarm, but visual annunciation shall remain on until system is restored to normal. As ring-back feature, trouble alarm shall resound as reminder to return silencing switch to normal position. Components: 1. Control Panel: a. Listed under UL Standard 864. b. Solid-state modular design with flush or semi-flush mounting. -228 3101

B.

C.

D.

Fire Detection and Alarm System

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

3.

Control functions shall be behind locked door with annunciating devices visible through door. Single key shall operate all keyed functions in system. Provide three keys. d. Each zone shall be electrically supervised in accordance with wiring style specified. e. Provide integral surge protection. f. Make provisions for connection to off-site alarm notification system. Provide separate dry contacts for alarm and supervisory/trouble alarms. g. Power Supply: 1) Provide indication of normal power supply. 2) Loss of normal power shall activate trouble alarm. 3) Meet requirements of and size in accordance with UL Standard 1481 and NFPA 72. 4) Include standby batteries, charger, and automatic transfer equipment. h. Visual Annunciation: 1) Separate indication on each zone for alarm, trouble, or supervisory conditions. 2) Visual indication shall be by LED lights or other easily identifiable method. 3) On zoned system, permanently custom label zones by zone name, not number. 4) Fault or trouble condition on any zone shall not affect any other zone. Off-Site Alarm Notification System a. Provide two telephone lines from telephone terminal board to fire alarm control panel. b. Provide dialer system equipment compatible with Owner selected monitoring service. c. Owner will arrange for dialer system equipment and for monitoring connection contract. Alarm Initiating Devices: a. Smoke Detectors: 1) Photoelectric type. 2) Listed under UL Standard 268. 3) Provide visual indication of alarm on unit when normally pulsed supervisory LED glows continuously. b. Heat Detectors: 1) Non-settable 135 deg F fixed temperature. 2) Provide visible indication that device has operated. 3) Listed under UL Standard 521.

c.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fire alarm and detection systems as indicated, in accordance with Equipment Manufacturer's written instructions, and complying with applicable portions of NEC, NFPA, and NECA's 'Standard of Installation.' 1. Mounting Heights: a. Unless otherwise indicated, mount center of outlets or boxes at following heights above finish floor: 1) Control Panel: 72 inches. Identification: 1. Post copy of wire identification list inside fire alarm panel door or other area accessible to fire alarm service personnel. 2. Print location of circuit disconnecting means inside panel. Conductors: 1. Install conductors in conduit. 2. Fire alarm system conductors from different zones may be combined in common conduit. Make certain that raceway size and wire quantity, size, and type is suitable for equipment supplied and is within NEC standards. Label pull and junction boxes 'FIRE ALARM.' 3. Loop wires through each device on zone for proper supervision. Tee-taps not permitted. 4. Minimum conductor size shall be 14 AWG unless otherwise specified. -328 3101

B.

C.

Fire Detection and Alarm System

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofiled Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

D. 3.2

Do not install ceiling mounted detectors within 36 inches of air discharge grilles. Do not install manual fire alarm boxes close to light switches. Coordinate with other trades as required.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Provide factory-trained representative to perform complete system testing in presence of Owner's representative and local fire department personnel upon completion of installation. a. Test each initiating and annunciating device for proper operation, except fixed temperature heat detectors. b. Test operation of trouble annunciation on each circuit. c. Perform complete testing of control panel functions.

3.3

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction Of Owner: Instruct Owner's representative in proper operation and maintenance procedures.

3.4

PROTECTION A. B. Provide dust protection for installed smoke detectors until finish work is completed and building is ready for occupancy. Protect conductors from cuts, abrasion and other damage during construction. END OF SECTION

Fire Detection and Alarm System

-4-

28 3101

D I V I S I O N 31: E A R T H W O R K
31 0000 EARTHWORK

31 0501 COMMON EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS 31 1000 S I T E C L E A R I N G 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 1123 AGGREGATE BASE 31 1413 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 31 2000 E A R T H M O V I N G 31 2213 31 2216 31 2316 31 2323 31 2500 ROUGH GRADING FINE GRADING EXCAVATION FILL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS

31 3000 E A R T H W O R K M E T H O D S

31 6000 S P E C I A L F O U N D A T I O N S A N D L O A D - B E A R I N G E L E M E N T S

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 31 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 31 0501 COMMON EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited to: 1. General procedures and requirements for earthwork. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 1100: Clearing and Grubbing. 2. Section 31 1123: Aggregate Base. 3. Section 31 1413: Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling. 4. Section 31 2213: Rough Grading and pre-installation conference held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 5. Section 31 2216: Fine Grading. 6. Section 31 2316: Excavation. 7. Section 31 2323: Fill. 8. Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving. 9. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Earthwork (sequence order): a. Excavation: Removal of soil from project site or cavity formed by cutting, digging or scooping on project site. b. Rough Grading (RG): Grading, leveling, moving, removal and placement of existing or imported soil to its generally required location and elevation. Cut and fill is part of rough grading. c. Compacted Fill: Placement of soils on building site placed and compacted per Contract Documents. Used to replace soils removed during excavation or to fill in low spot on building site. d. Fine Grading (FG): Preparation of subgrade preceding placement of surfacing materials for contour of building site required. Fine Grading is conducted to ensure that earth forms and surfaces have been properly shaped and subgrade has been brought to correct elevations. It is performed after placement of rough grading and compacted fill. e. Aggregate Base: Layer of granular material immediately below concrete and asphalt paving or miscellaneous site concrete (sidewalks, curbs, etc) and below interior concrete slabs on grade. 2. Grade: a. Building Grading: sloping of grounds immediately adjacent to building. Proper grading causes water to flow away from a structure. Grading can be accomplished either with machinery or by hand. b. Finish Grading: Completed surface elevation of landscaping areas for seeding, sodding, and planting (ground cover) on a building site. c. Natural Grade: Undisturbed natural surface of ground. d. Subgrade: Grade established in preparation for top surfacing of roads, lawns, etc.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences:

Common Earthwork Requirements

-1-

31 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 2213 Rough Grading and held in conjunction with all of the following sections: a. Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete. b. Section 31 1123: Aggregate Base. c. Section 31 2316: Excavation. d. Section 31 2323: Fill. e. Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving. f. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading.

08.29.11

B.

General Earthwork Sequencing: 1. Excavation. 2. Rough Grading. 3. Compacted Fill. 4. Fine Grading. 5. Aggregate Base or Landscape Grading.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 A.

EXAMINATION Verification Of Conditions: 1. Forty eight (48) hours minimum before performing any work on site, contact Blue Stakes of Utah to arrange for utility location services. 2. Perform minor, investigative excavations to verify location of various existing underground facilities at sufficient locations to assure that no conflict with the proposed work exists and sufficient clearance is available to avoid damage to existing facilities. 3. Perform investigative excavating ten (10) days minimum in advance of performing any excavation or underground work. 4. Upon discovery of conflicts or problems with existing facilities, notify Architect by phone or fax within twenty four (24) hours. Follow telephone or fax notification with letter and diagrams indicating conflict or problem and sufficient measurements and details to evaluate problem.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Spillage: a. Avoid spillage by covering and securing loads when hauling on or adjacent to public streets or highways. b. Remove spillage and sweep, wash, or otherwise clean project, streets, and highways. 2. Dust Control: a. Take precautions necessary to prevent dust nuisance, both on-site and adjacent to public and private properties. b. Correct or repair damage caused by dust. 3. Existing Plants And Features: a. Do not damage tops, trunks, and roots of existing trees and shrubs on site that are intended to remain. b. Do not use heavy equipment within branch spread. c. Interfering branches may be removed only with permission of Architect. d. Do not damage other plants and features that are to remain.

Common Earthwork Requirements

-2-

31 0501

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.3 REPAIR / RESTORATION A. B. C.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Adjust existing covers, boxes, and vaults to grade. Replace broken or damaged covers, boxes, and vaults. Independently confirm size, location, and number of covers, boxes, and vaults that require adjustment.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Owner reserves right to require additional testing to re-affirm suitability of completed work including compacted soils that have been exposed to adverse weather conditions. Field Inspections: 1. Notify Architect forty eight (48) hours before performing excavation or fill work. 2. If weather, scheduling, or any other circumstance has interrupted work, notify Architect twenty four (24) hours minimum before intended resumption of grading or compacting. Non-Conforming Work: 1. If specified protection precautions are not taken or corrections and repairs not made promptly, Owner may take such steps as may be deemed necessary and deduct costs of such from monies due to Contractor. Such action or lack of action on Owner's part does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper protection of The Work.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

Common Earthwork Requirements

-3-

31 0501

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform clearing and grubbing as necessary to prepare site for rough grading and structure excavation as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PERFORMANCE A. Tree And Brush Removal: 1. Cut off trees, shrubs, brush, and vegetative growth 12 inches (300 mm) maximum above ground. 2. Do not pull up or rip out roots of trees and shrubs that are to remain. If excavation through roots is required, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. Make clean, smooth, sloping cuts. 3. Cut roots 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in diameter only with Architect's written permission. Grubbing: 1. Grub out stumps and roots 12 inches (300 mm) minimum below original ground surface, except as follows: a. Under buildings, remove roots one inch and larger entirely. b. Entirely remove roots of plants that normally sprout from roots, as identified by Architect.

B.

3.2

CLEANING A. Remove from site trees, shrubs, uprooted stumps, vegetative layer, and surface debris and dispose of legally. Do not bury cuttings, stumps, roots, and other vegetative matter or burnt waste material on site.

B.

END OF SECTION

Clearing And Grubbing

-1-

31 1100

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 31 1123 AGGREGATE BASE

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install aggregate base as described in Contract Documents for following: a. Miscellaneous cast-in-place concrete and equipment pads. b. Concrete paving. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Interior slabs on grade: a. Under-slab vapor retarder and seam tape. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 6200: Administrative and procedural requirements for product options. 7. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 8. Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete. 9. Section 07 2616: Furnishing of vapor retarder and seam tape. 10. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements. 11. Section 31 2213: Rough Grading and pre-installation conference held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 12. Section 31 2216: Subgrade procedures. 13. Section 31 2323: Compaction procedures and tolerances. 14. Section 32 1313: Concrete paving.

B.

C.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions: 1. Gravel (Concrete Paving): a. Gravel: Material passing 75-mm (3-inch) sieve and retained on 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. b. Coarse Gravel: Material passing 75-mm (3-inch) sieve and retained on 19.0-mm (3/4-inch) sieve. c. Fine Gravel: Material passing 19.0-mm (3/4-inch) sieve and retained on 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. d. Maximum Size (of aggregate) - in specifications for, or description of aggregate, smallest sieve opening through which entire amount of aggregate is required to pass.

B.

Aggregate Base

-1-

31 1123

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake e. Nominal Maximum Size (of aggregate) - in specifications for, or description of aggregate, smallest sieve opening through which entire amount of aggregate is permitted to pass. Sand (Concrete Paving): a. Sand: Material passing 4.75-mm sieve (No. 4) and retained on 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve. b. Coarse Sand: Material passing 4.75-mm sieve (No. 4) and retained on 2.00-mm (No. 10) sieve. c. Medium Sand: Material passing 2.00-mm sieve (No. 10) and retained on 0.475-mm (No. 40) sieve. d. Find Sand: Material passing 0.475-mm (No. 40) sieve and retained on 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve. e. Maximum Size (of aggregate) - in specifications for, or description of aggregate, smallest sieve opening through which entire amount of aggregate is required to pass. f. Nominal Maximum Size (of aggregate) - in specifications for, or description of aggregate, smallest sieve opening through which entire amount of aggregate is permitted to pass.

08.29.11

C.

Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 4. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 5. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 6. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 7. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation. They are not samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which the Work will be judged. 8. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 9. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. 10. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 11. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.. 12. Relative Compaction: Ratio of field dry density as determined by ASTM D6938 or ASTM D2216, and laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. 13. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections.

Aggregate Base

-2-

31 1123

Project # 503-6925-11010101 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. D.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C29/C29M-09, Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in Aggregate. b. ASTM C117-04, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. c. ASTM C131-06, 'Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.' d. ASTM C136-06, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. e. ASTM C1077-10d, Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. f. ASTM D8-02, Standard Terminology Relating to Materials for Roads and Pavements. g. ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). h. ASTM D1556-07, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. i. ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). j. ASTM D2216-10, 'Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass.' k. ASTM D2419-09, Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate. l. ASTM D2487-10, 'Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).' m. ASTM D3666-09a, Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials. n. ASTM D3740-10, Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. o. ASTM D6938-10, 'Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). p. ASTM E11-09e1, Standard Specification for Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes. q. ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. r. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. s. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies. t. ASTM E1643-10, 'Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.'

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 2213. 2. Schedule pre-installation conference before rough grading. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and 31 2213, review following: -331 1123

Aggregate Base

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b. c. d. e. f.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Review aggregate base installation requirements. Review vapor retarder installation requirements. Review proposed miscellaneous exterior concrete schedule. Review proposed concrete paving schedule. Review safety issues. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review frequency of testing and inspections.

B.

Scheduling: 1. Miscellaneous exterior concrete: a. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing concrete for exterior site work concrete (sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc.), footings, foundation walls, and building slabs. 2. Concrete Paving: a. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing aggregate base.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of aggregate base.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for aggregate base: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not perform work during unfavorable conditions as specified below: a. Presence of free surface water. b. Over-saturated sub base materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Aggregate Base: 1. Miscellaneous exterior concrete (Section 03 3053): a. New Aggregate Base: 1) Road Base type gravel or crushed stone, graded as follows: a) Sieve Percent of Weight Passing (1) 1 inch (25.4 mm) 100 (2) 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) 85 - 100 (3) No. 4 (4.750 mm) 45 - 60 (4) No. 10 (2.000 mm) 30 - 50 (5) No. 200 (0.075 mm) 5 - 10 (non-plastic) 2. Concrete paving (Section 32 1313): a. New Aggregate Base: -431 1123

Aggregate Base

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Road Base type gravel or crushed stone, graded as follows: a) Sieve Percent of Weight Passing (1) 1 inch (25.4 mm) 100 (2) 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) 85 - 100 (3) No. 4 (4.750 mm) 45 - 60 (4) No. 10 (2.000 mm) 30 - 50 (5) No. 200 (0.075 mm) 5 - 10 (non-plastic)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation (Miscellaneous Exterior Concrete): 1. Subgrade: a. Finish grade to grades required by Contract Documents. b. Compact subgrade as specified in Section 31 2323. c. S Surface Preparation (Concrete Paving): 1. Subgrade: a. Fine grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents. b. Compact sub grade as specified in Section 31 2323.

B.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Aggregate Base: 1. Miscellaneous exterior concrete: a. Except under mow strips, place 4 inches (100 mm) minimum of aggregate base, level, and compact as specified in Section 31 2323. 2. Concrete paving: a. Compact to 95 percent minimum density as determined by ASTM D1557. b. Remove or repair improperly prepared areas as directed by Architect. Tolerances: 1. Concrete paving areas: a. Finished base course shall be 6 inches (152 mm) thick minimum after compaction and true to line and grade within plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 meters).

B.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Aggregate Base a. Miscellaneous exterior concrete areas: 1) Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for exterior aggregate base. 2) Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. 3) Testing Agency will test compaction of base in place according to ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at following frequency: a) Sitework Areas: One test for every 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or less of exterior pads area but no fewer than three tests. b. Concrete paving area: 1) Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for exterior aggregate base. 2) Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect.

Aggregate Base

-5-

31 1123

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3)

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Testing Agency will test compaction of base in place according to ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at following frequency: a) Sitework Areas: One test for every 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or less of exterior pads area but no fewer than three tests.

08.29.11

END OF SECTION

Aggregate Base

-6-

31 1123

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 31 1413 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Strip and stockpile acceptable topsoil as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements. 2. Section 31 2213: Pre-installation conference held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 3. Section 32 9113: Soil preparation for imported topsoil and soil amendments into topsoil. 4. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading for landscaping and planting areas and grading of existing topsoil stored on site.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Existing topsoil: Defined as total amount of soil stripped and stored for reuse, less vegetation layer stripped and disposed of as specified in Paragraphs below.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PERFORMANCE A. Strip existing vegetation layer 12 inches (305 mm) deep minimum from areas of site to receive buildings, landscaping, and paving and remove from site before stripping topsoil for storage and reuse. After stripping vegetation layer, strip existing topsoil additional 6 inches (152 mm) deep minimum from areas of site to receive buildings and paving and store on site for later use. 1. Existing topsoil is property of Contractor with restriction that topsoil is to be used first for Project landscape topsoil requirements and second for non-structural fill and backfill. 2. After Project fill, backfill, and landscape topsoil requirements are satisfied, remove excess existing topsoil from site. Do not remove existing topsoil from site without Architect's written approval.

B.

END OF SECTION

Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling

-1-

31 1413

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform rough grading work required to prepare site for construction as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. Preinstallation conferences held in conjunction with following sections: 2. Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements. 4. Section 31 1123: Aggregate Base. 5. Section 31 1413: Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling. 6. Section 31 2216: Fine Grading. 7. Section 31 2316: Excavation. 8. Section 31 2323: Fill. 9. Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving. 10. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule conference after completion of site clearing but before beginning grading work. 2. Pre-installation conference to be held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Identify benchmark to be used in establishing grades and review Contract Document requirements for grades, fill materials, and topsoil. b. Examine site to pre-plan procedures for making cuts, placing fills, and other necessary work. c. Review additional agenda items from each Division 31 and Division 32 specification. d. Review additional agenda items from Section 03 3053.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Materials used for fill shall be as specified for backfill in Section 31 2323.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: 1. When existing grade around existing plants to remain is higher than new finish grade, perform regrading by hand. 2. Do not expose or damage shrub or tree roots. -131 2213

Rough Grading

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Surface Preparation: 1. Before making cuts, remove topsoil over areas to be cut and filled that was not previously removed by stripping specified in Section 31 1413. Stockpile this additional topsoil with previously stripped topsoil.

3.2

PERFORMANCE A. Special Techniques: 1. Compact fills as specified in Section 31 2323. 2. If soft spots, water, or other unusual and unforeseen conditions affecting grading requirements are encountered, stop work and notify Architect. Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot (28 mm).

B.

END OF SECTION

Rough Grading

-2-

31 2213

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 31 2216 FINE GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform fine grading work required to prepare site for paving finish grading and for landscape finish grading as described in Contract Documents. 2. Prepare subgrade as described in Contract Documents to receive aggregate base for concrete paving. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 31 0501: Common Site Construction Requirements. 8. Section 31 1123: Aggregate Base. 9. Section 31 1413: Stripping and storing of existing topsoil. 10. Section 31 2213: Rough Grading and pre-installation conference held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 11. Section 31 2316: Excavation. 12. Section 31 2323: Fill. 13. Section 32 1313: Finish grading for concrete paving. 14. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading for landscaping and planting areas.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 229R-99, Controled Low-Strength Materials (Reapproved 2005). 2. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 3. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner.

B.

Fine Grading

-1-

31 2216

Project # 503-6925-11010101 4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

18.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Relative Compaction: Ratio of field dry density as determined by ASTM D6938 or ASTM D2216, and laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for fill and aggregate base testing): a. ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). b. ASTM D1556-07, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. c. ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). d. ASTM D2167-08, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. e. ASTM D2216-05, 'Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass.' f. ASTM D2487-10, 'Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).' g. ASTM D3666-09a, Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials. -231 2216

Fine Grading

Project # 503-6925-11010101 h.

i. j. k. l.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake ASTM D3740-08, Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. ASTM D6938-08a, 'Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies.

08.29.11

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 2213. 1. Schedule pre-installation conference before rough grading. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and 31 2213, review following: a. Review backfill requirements. b. Review geotechnical report. c. Review safety issues. d. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review frequency of testing and inspections. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before installation of fill / engineered fill to allow inspection. 2. Allow special inspector to review all subgrades and excavations to determine if site has been prepared in accordance with geotechnical report prior to placing any fill (or concrete). 3. Allow inspection and testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after inspections and test results for previously compacted work comply with requirements.

B.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of fill / engineered fill.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for fill / engineering fill: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: Protect utilities and site elements from damage. -331 2216

Fine Grading

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Surface Preparation: 1. Landscaping and Planting Areas: a. Before grading, dig out weeds from planting areas by their roots and remove from site. Remove rocks larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in size and foreign matter such as building rubble, wire, cans, sticks, concrete, etc. b. Remove imported paving base material present in planting areas down to natural subgrade or other material acceptable to Architect. 2. Concrete Paving: a. Survey and stake parking surfaces to show grading required by Contract Documents. b. Subgrade: 1) Fine grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents. 2) Compact subgrade as specified in Section 31 2323.

3.2

PERFORMANCE A. Interface With Other Work: Do not commence work of this Section until grading tolerances specified in Section 31 2213 are met. General: 1. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots. Tolerances: 1. Site Tolerances: a. Subgrade: 0.00 inches (0.00 mm) high. Measure using string line from curb to curb, gutter, flat drainage structure, or grade break. b. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot (28 mm). 2. Aggregate Base (Concrete paving) Tolerances: a. Finished base course shall be 6 inches (152 mm) thick minimum after compaction and true to line and grade within plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m). 3. Landscaping and Planting Tolerances: a. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot (28 mm). b. To allow for final finish grades as specified in Section 32 9119 of planting areas, fine grade elevations before placing topsoil and mulch are: 1) Sod Areas: 7 inches (175 mm) below top of walk or curb. 2) Seeded Areas: 6 inches (150 mm) below top of walk or curb. 3) Ground Cover Areas: 7 inches (180 mm) below top of walk or curb. 4) Tree And Shrub Areas: 4 inches (100 mm) below top of walk or curb. 4. Slope grade away from building as specified in Section 32 9119.

B.

C.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Fill / Engineered Fill: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for fine grading. b. Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. c. Testing Agency is to provide one moisture-maximum density relationship test for each type of fill material. 2. Site preparation: a. Prior to placement of engineered fill, inspector shall determine that site has been prepared in accordance with geotechnical report. b. Footing subgrade: At footing subgrades, Certified Inspector is to verify that soils conform to geotechnical report.

END OF SECTION

Fine Grading

-4-

31 2216

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 31 2316 EXCAVATION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform Project excavating and trenching as described in Contract Documents, except as specified below. 2. Procedure and quality for excavating and trenching performed on Project under other Sections unless specifically specified otherwise. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements. 2. Section 31 1100: Clearing and Grubbing. 3. Section 31 1123: Aggregate Base. 4. Section 31 1413: Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling. 5. Section 31 2213: Rough Grading and pre-installation conference held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 6. Section 31 2216: Fine Grading. 7. Section 31 2323: Fill. 8. Performance of excavating inside and outside of building required for electrical and mechanical work is responsibility of respective Section doing work unless arranged differently by Contractor.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 2213.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Carefully examine site and available information to determine type soil to be encountered. 2. Discuss problems with Architect before proceeding with work.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Protection of Existing Utilities: 1. Protect existing utilities identified in Contract Documents during excavation. 2. If existing utility lines not identified in Contract Documents are encountered, contact Architect before proceeding.

3.3

PERFORMANCE A. Excavation: 1. Building Footings And Foundations: -131 2316

Excavation

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

3.

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake a. Excavate as necessary for proper placement and forming of footings and foundations. b. Bottom of excavations to receive footings shall be undisturbed soil. c. Excavation Carried Deeper Than Required: 1) Under Footings: Fill with concrete specified for footings. Pavement And Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete: a. Excavate as necessary for proper placement and forming of concrete site elements and pavement structure. Remove vegetation and deleterious material and remove from site. b. Backfill over-excavated areas with compacted base material specified in Section 31 2324. c. Remove and replace exposed material that becomes soft or unstable. Utility Trenches: a. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be open cut. Short sections of trench may be tunneled if pipe or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly tamped in tunnel sections and if approved by Architect. b. Excavate to proper alignment, depth, and grade. Excavate to sufficient width to allow adequate space for proper installation and inspection of utility piping. c. If trenches are excavated deeper than required, backfill until trench bottom is proper depth with properly compacted native material. d. Pipe 4 Inches (100 mm) In Diameter Or Larger: 1) Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its length. 2) Except where rock is encountered, take care not to excavate below depths indicated. a) Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock with minimum over-depth of 4 inches (100 mm) below required trench depths. b) Backfill over-depths in rock excavation and unauthorized over-depths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly compacted. 3) Whenever wet or unstable soil incapable of properly supporting pipe, as determined by Architect, occurs in bottom of trench, remove soil to depth required and backfill trench to proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel, or other suitable material acceptable to Architect. If unusual excavating conditions are encountered, stop work and notify Architect.

08.29.11

3.4

REPAIR / RESTORATION A. Repair damage to other portions of the Work resulting from work of this Section at no additional cost to Owner. On new work, arrange for damage to be repaired by original installer.

3.5

CLEANING A. Debris and material not necessary for Project are property of Contractor and are to be removed before completion of Project. However, if material necessary for Project is hauled away, replace with specified fill / backfill material.

END OF SECTION

Excavation

-2-

31 2316

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 31 2323 FILL

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform Project backfilling and compacting as described in Contract Documents, except as specified below. 2. Procedure and quality for backfilling and compacting performed on Project under other Sections unless specifically specified otherwise. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements. 8. Section 31 1100: Clearing and Grubbing. 9. Section 31 1123: Aggregate Base. 10. Section 31 1413: Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling. 11. Section 31 2213: Rough Grading and pre-installation conference held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 12. Section 31 2216: Fine Grading. 13. Section 31 2316: Excavation. 14. Division 32: Compaction of subgrade under walks and paving. 15. Performance of backfilling and compacting inside and outside of building required for electrical and mechanical work is responsibility of respective Section doing work unless arranged differently by Contractor.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 229R-99, Controled Low-Strength Materials (Reapproved 2005). 2. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 3. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to.

B.

Fill

-1-

31 2323

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

18.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Relative Compaction: Ratio of field dry density as determined by ASTM D6938 or ASTM D2216, and laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for fill and aggregate base testing): a. ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). b. ASTM D1556-07, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. c. ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). d. ASTM D2167-08, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. e. ASTM D2216-05, 'Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass.' f. ASTM D2487-10, 'Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).' -231 2323

Fill

Project # 503-6925-11010101 g. h.

i. j. k. l. m.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake ASTM D3666-09a, Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials. ASTM D3740-08, Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. ASTM D6938-08a, 'Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

08.29.11

ASTM E329-09: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. ASTM E543-09, Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. ASTM E1212-09, Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies.

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 2213. 2. Schedule pre-installation conference before rough grading. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and 31 2213, review following: a. Review backfill requirements. b. Review geotechnical report. c. Review safety issues. d. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review frequency of testing and inspections. Sequencing: 1. Do not backfill against bituminous dampproofing for 24 hours after application of dampproofing. 2. Before backfilling, show utility and service lines being covered on record set of Drawings. Do not backfill until utilities involved have been tested and approved by Architect and until instructed by Architect. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before installation of fill / engineered fill to allow inspection. 2. Allow special inspector to review all subgrades and excavations to determine if site has been prepared in accordance with geotechnical report prior to placing any fill (or concrete). 3. Allow inspection and testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after inspections and test results for previously compacted work comply with requirements.

B.

C.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of fill / engineered fill.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for fill / engineering fill: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

Fill

-3-

31 2323

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

MATERIALS A. Site Material: 1. Some existing excavated material on site is suitable for use as fill and backfill to meet Project requirements. Near surface clay and silt soils are not suitable for use as structural fill, but underlying gravel soils might be. Screen gravel soils to eliminate larger particles (cobbles) in accordance with the specifications given below for imported fill / backfill. Imported Fill / Backfill: 1. Well graded material conforming to ASTM D2487 free from debris, organic material, frozen materials, brick, lime, concrete, and other material which would prevent adequate performance of backfill. a. Under Building Footprint And Paved Areas: Fill shall comply with soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, or SM. Fill shall meet the following requirements: 1) Maximum particle size: 4 inches (100 mm) diameter 2) Percent retained on the 3/4 inch sieve (coarse gravel): 30 percent maximum 3) Percent passing the No. 200 sieve (fines): 15 percent maximum 4) Liquid Limit of fines: 35 percent maximum 5) Plasticity Index of fines: 15 percent maximum. b. Under Landscaped Areas: 1) Fill more than 36 inches (900 mm) below finish grade shall comply with soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, or SM. Fill may not contain stones over 6 inches (150 mm) diameter and 90 percent minimum of fill shall be smaller than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in any direction. 2) Fill less than 36 inches (900 mm) below finish grade shall comply with soil classification groups SW, SP, SM, or SC. Fill may not contain stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any direction and 90 percent minimum of fill shall be smaller than 3/8 inch (4.7 mm) in any direction.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Before placing fill, base, or finish work, prepare subgrade as follows: 1. Do not place fill or base over frozen subgrade. 2. Under Building Slabs / Pads, Concrete Site Elements, And Concrete Driveways And Parking Areas: Scarify subgrade 6 inches (150 mm) deep, moisture condition to uniform moisture content of between optimum and 4 percent over optimum, and mechanically tamp 6 inches (150 mm) deep to 90 percent minimum of relative compaction. 3. Under Asphalt Driveways And Parking Areas: Scarify subgrade 6 inches (150 mm) deep, moisture condition to uniform moisture content between optimum and 4 percent over optimum, and mechanically tamp to 95 percent minimum of relative compaction. 4. Landscape Areas: Compact subgrade to 90 percent relative compaction.

3.2

PERFORMANCE A. Fill / Backfill: 1. General: a. Around Buildings And Structures: Slope grade away from building as specified in Section 31 2216. Hand backfill when close to building or where damage to building might result. b. Site Utilities: 1) In Landscape Areas: Use backfill consisting of on-site soil.

Fill

-4-

31 2323

Project # 503-6925-11010101

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2) Under Pavement and Concrete Site Elements: Extend excavatable flowable fill / backfill to elevation of subgrade. Do not place base material until excavatable flowable fill / backfill has cured 72 hours. c. Do not use puddling or jetting to consolidate fill areas. Compacting: a. Fill / Backfill And Base: 1) Under Building Slabs or Pads, Driveways, And Parking Areas: Place in 4 inch (100 mm) maximum layers when using hand operated equipment, 6 inch (150 mm) maximum layers for most trench compactors and 8 inch (200 mm) maximum layers for larger rollers, moisture condition to plus or minus 2 percent of optimum moisture content, and mechanically tamp to 95 percent minimum of maximum density as established by ASTM D1557. 2) Under Concrete Site Elements And Around Foundation Walls: Place in 8 inch (200 mm) maximum layers, dampen but do not soak, and mechanically tamp to 90 percent minimum of maximum density as established by ASTM D1557. 3) Utility Trenches: a) Site: Place fill in 12 inch (300 mm) layers and moisture condition to plus or minus 2 percent of optimum moisture content. Compact fill to 90 percent minimum relative compaction to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Compact fill above 12 inches (300 mm) to 85 percent relative compaction. b) Under Slabs: Place fill in 6 inch (150 mm) layers, moisture condition to plus or minus 2 percent of optimum moisture content, and compact to 95 percent minimum relative compaction to within 4 inches (100 mm) of finish grade. Final 4 inches (100 mm) of fill shall be aggregate base as specified in Section 31 1123. 4) Fill Slopes: Compact by rolling or using sheepsfoot roller. 5) Backfill Under Footings: Not allowed. 6) Other Backfills: Place other fills in 12 inch (300 mm) layers and compact to 90 percent relative compaction.

08.29.11

3.3

REPAIR / RESTORATION A. Repair damage to other portions of the Work resulting from work of this Section at no additional cost to Owner. On new work, arrange for damage to be repaired by original installer.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Fill / Engineered Fill: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for fill. b. Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. c. Testing Agency is to provide one moisture-maximum density relationship test for each type of fill material. d. Prior to placement of engineered fill, inspector shall determine that site has been prepared in accordance with geotechnical report. e. Footing subgrade: At footing subgrades Certified Inspector is to verify that soils conform to geotechnical report. f. Testing Agency will test compaction of soils according to ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Lift thicknesses shall comply with geotechnical report. Inspector shall determine that in-place dry density of engineered fill material complies with geotechnical report. Tests will be performed at following locations and frequencies: 1) Paved Areas: At each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or less of paved area but in no case less than three tests. 2) Building Slab Areas: At each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least on test for every 2,500 sq. ft. (232 sq. m) or less of building slab area but in no case less than three tests.

Fill

-5-

31 2323

Project # 503-6925-11010101

g.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 3) Foundation Wall/Continuous Footing Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 40 linear feet (12 linear m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 4) Trench Backfill: At each 12 inch (305 mm) compacted lift for each 100 linear feet (30.5 linear m) or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests. 5) Sidewalks, Curbs, Gutters, Exterior Pads: Minimum of 1 test for each lift for each 40 lineal feet (12 linear m) or 1 test for every 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) or less of pad area but no fewer than three tests. Required verification and inspection of soils as referenced in 2009 IBC Table 1704.7. Periodic and continuous inspections include: 1) Verify materials below shallow foundations are adequate to achieve design bearing capacity (periodic). 2) Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material (periodic). 3) Perform classification and testing of compacted fill materials (periodic). 4) Verify use of proper materials, densities and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of compacted fill (continuous). 5) Prior to placement of compacted fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly (periodic).

08.29.11

3.5

CLEANING A. Debris and material not necessary for Project are property of Contractor and are to be removed before completion of Project. However, if material necessary for Project is hauled away, replace with specified fill / backfill material.

END OF SECTION

Fill

-6-

31 2323

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 31 2500 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Provide permanent erosion and sedimentation controls as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 5700: Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 2. Section 02 4113: Selective Site Demolition. 3. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements. 4. Section 31 1100: Clearing and Grubbing. 5. Section 31 1413: Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling. 6. Section 32 9300: Sections under heading.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. References: 1. United States Environmental Protection Agency: a. EPA Document 832/R-92-005 (Sep 1992), Storm Water Management for Construction Activities.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Delegated Design Submittals: a. Sediment and erosion control plan, specific to site, meeting following objectives: 1) Prevent loss of soil, including soil stockpiled for reuse, by storm water runoff and wind erosion. 2) Prevent sedimentation of storm sewers and receiving streams. 3) Prevent air pollution by dust and particulate matter.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Sediment and erosion control shall conform to EPA Document 832/R-92-005, Chapter 3, or local erosion and sedimentation control standards, whichever is more stringent. Qualifications: 1. Supervisor of erosion control operations shall be thoroughly familiar with types of erosion control materials being installed and best methods for their installation. Supervisor shall be present when work of this Section is being performed and shall direct work performed under this Section. 2.

B.

Erosion And Sedimentation Controls

-1-

31 2500

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

SYSTEM A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: Protect and maintain areas disturbed by the Work, so erosion is adequately controlled and silt and sediments are not allowed to flow into any watercourse, onto adjacent properties, or into storm drains. Materials: 1. Hay And Straw Mulch: a. General: 1) Reasonably free from swamp grass, weeds, twigs, debris and other deleterious materials, and free from rot, mold, primary noxious weed seeds, and rough or woody materials. 2) Mulches containing mature seed of species which would volunteer and be detrimental to permanent seeding, or would result in over-seeding, or would produce growth which is aesthetically unpleasing, is not permitted. b. Hay Mulch: 1) Properly aired native hay, Sudan grass hay, broom sedge hay, legume hay, or similar hay or grass mowings. 2) Apply at 2 to 3 tons (2.03 to 3.05 metric tons) per acre unnetted or stabilized, or at 1.5 tons (1.52 metric ton) per acre when net or mulch stabilizer is used. When air-dried and in loose state, contents of representative bale shall lose not more than 15 percent of resulting air-dry weight of bale. c. Straw Mulch: 1) Threshed plant residue of oats, wheat, barley, rye, or rice from which grain has been removed. 2) Apply at 2 to 3 tons (2.03 to 3.05 metric tons) per acre unnetted or stabilized, or at 1.5 tons (1.52 metric ton) per acre (4 047 cu m) when net or mulch stabilizer is used. d. Matting: 1) Jute Matting: a) Undyed and unbleached jute yarn woven into uniform open, plain weave mesh and furnished in rolled strips. Matting shall conform to following physical requirements: b) 48 inch (1 200 mm) wide, plus or minus one inch (25 mm). c) 78 warp ends per width of cloth. d) 41 weft ends per yard. e) 1.22 lbs to 1.80 lbs (0.55 kg to 0.82 kg) per lineal yard, plus or minus 5 percent. e. Excelsior Matting: 1) Uniform web of interlocking wood excelsior fibers with a backing of mulch net fabric on one side only and furnished in rolled strips. Mulch net shall be woven of either twisted paper or cotton cord. Matting shall conform to following physical requirements: a) 36 inches (900 mm) wide, plus or minus one inch (25 mm). b) 0.8 lbs (0.36 kg) per sq yd, plus or minus 5 percent. f. Soil Erosion Matting: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products. a) 'Enkamat Type 7020' by American Enka Company. b) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. g. Erosion Control Mulching Blanket: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products. a) 'Hold/Gro' by Gulf States Paper Corp. b) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 2. Seed And Sod For Erosion Control: a. For Temporary Control: Annual or perennial ryegrass. b. For Permanent Control: See Sections under 32 9300 heading. 3. Hay Bales For Erosion Control: a. Rectangular shaped bales of hay or straw, weighing at least 40 lbs (18 kg) per bale, free from primary noxious weed seeds and rough or woody materials. -231 2500

B.

Erosion And Sedimentation Controls

Project # 503-6925-11010101 4.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Silt Fences: a. Type Two Acceptable Products 1) 'Geofab Silt Fence' by Mercantile Development Inc. 2) 'Mirafi 100X by Celanese Fibers Marketing Co. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. For Mulch: 1. Mulch Stabilizers: a. Type Two Acceptable Products 1) 'Curasol' applied at 40 gallons (152 liters) per acre (4 047 cu m). 2) Dow 'Mulch Binder' applied at 45 gallons (170 liters) per acre (4 047 cu m). 3) Asphalt binder meeting requirements of AASHTO M140, Type SS-1 or RS-1 as applicable and applied at 400 gallons (1 514 liters) per acre (4 047 cu m). 4) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 2. Temporary Type Mulch Nets: Paper yarn, approximately 0.05 inches (1.27 mm) in diameter, woven into net with openings of approximately 7/8 inch (22 mm) by 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) and weight of approximately 0.2 lbs (0.091 kg) per sq yd (0.84 cu m). 3. Permanent Type Mulch Nets: a. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) 'Vexar' or 'Erosion-Net' plastic or nylon mesh netting with openings of approximately 3/8 inch to 3/4 inch (9.5 mm to 19 mm). 2) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. For Matting / Blankets: 1. Staples: 11 ga (3.05 mm) minimum plain iron wire, made from 12 inch (305 mm) minimum lengths of wire bent to form 'U' of 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches (38 mm to 50 mm) in width with equal legs of 5 inch to 5-1/4 inches (125 mm to 133 mm). Use longer staples for loose soils or where otherwise required.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Take every reasonable precaution to avoid erosion and to prevent silting of rivers, streams, lakes, reservoirs, impoundments, and drainage ditches and swales. 2. Keep exposure of uncompleted cut slopes, embankments, trench excavations, and site graded areas as short as possible. Initiate seeding and other erosion control measures on each segment as soon as reasonably possible. 3. Should it become necessary to suspend construction for any length of time, shape excavated and graded areas so runoff will be intercepted and diverted to points where minimal erosion will occur. Provide and maintain temporary erosion and sediment control measures, such as berms, dikes, slope drains, silt stops, and sedimentation basins, until permanent drainage facilities or erosion control features have been completed and are operative. 4. Handle and treat fine material placed or exposed during The Work so as to minimize possibility of it reaching surface waters. Use diversion channels, dikes, sediment traps, or other effective control measures. 5. Provide silt stops wherever erosion control measures may not be totally capable of controlling erosion, such as in drainage channels and where steep slopes may exist. 6. Before water is allowed to flow in any ditch, swale, or channel, install permanent erosion control measures in waterway so waterway will be safe against erosion. 7. Take precautions in using construction equipment to minimize erosion. Do not leave wheel tracks where erosion might begin.

Erosion And Sedimentation Controls

-3-

31 2500

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 8. Unless specifically required in Contract Documents, operation of mechanized equipment in watercourses is not permitted. Where work is required in watercourses, minimize movement of equipment in the water and remove false work, pilings, debris, and other temporary work as soon as construction will allow. 9. Wherever crossings of live streams are necessary, provide temporary culverts or bridges to allow equipment to cross them without fording. Disturbance of lands and waters outside limits of construction is prohibited, except as may be found necessary and approved in writing by Architect. 10. Mulching shall follow seeding operations by no more than 24 hours. 11. Continue erosion control measures until permanent measures have been sufficiently established and are capable of controlling erosion on their own. Hay And Straw Mulching: 1. Install hay or straw mulch immediately after areas have been properly prepared. a. When permanent seed or seed for temporary erosion control is sown prior to placing mulch, place mulch on seeded areas within 24 hours after seeding. b. Architect may authorize blowing of chopped mulch provided that 95 percent of mulch fibers will be 6 inches (150 mm) or more in length and that mulch can be applied in so there will be a minimum amount of matting that would retard plant growth. c. Hay mulch should cover ground enough to shade it, but should not be so thick that a person standing cannot see ground through mulch. d. Remove matted mulch or branches. 2. Where mild winds that may blow mulch are probable, when ground slopes exceed 15 percent, or when otherwise required to maintain mulch firmly in place, apply a system of pegs and strings, a chemical stabilizer, or temporary type netting to mulch. Unless otherwise directed, remove strings and netting prior to acceptance of the Work. 3. Where high winds or heavy rainstorms are likely, where ground surfaces are steeper than 15 percent, or where other conditions require, apply temporary type netting over mulch and take whatever other measures are necessary to maintain mulch firmly in place. 4. Unless otherwise specified, use of permanent type netting is not permitted without prior written approval of Architect.

08.29.11

B.

C.

Matting: 1. General: a. Use of mulch with matting is not permitted. However, 4 to 6 inch (100 to 150 mm) overlap of mulch over edge of matting is allowed. b. Prepare surfaces of ditches and slopes to conform to grades, contours, and cross sections shown on Drawings. Finish to smooth, even condition with debris, roots, stone, and lumps raked out and removed. Loosen soil surface sufficient to permit bedding of matting. Unless otherwise noted, place seed prior to placement of matting. c. Unroll matting parallel to direction of water flow and loosely drape, without folds or stretching, so continuous ground contact is maintained. d. In ditches and swales and on slopes, place each upslope and each downslope end of each piece of matting in 6 inch trench, stapled at 12 inches (300 mm) on center, backfilled, and tamped. Similarly, bury edges of matting along edges of catch basins and other structures. Architect may require that other edges exposed to more than normal flow of water be buried in similar fashion. e. Tightly secure matting to soil with staples driven approximately vertically into ground, flush with matting surface. Do not form depressions or bulges in matting surface with staples. f. Increase specified spacing of staples when factors such as season of year or amount of water encountered or anticipated require additional anchoring. 2. Jute Matting: a. Where strips are laid parallel or meet, as in a tee, overlap 4 inches (100 mm) minimum. Overlap ends 6 inches (150 mm) minimum, shingle fashion. b. Space check slots built at right angles to direction of water flow so one check slot or one end occurs within each 50 feet (15 meters) of slope length. Construct check slots by placing tight fold of matting 6 inches (150 mm) minimum vertically into ground. Tamp these same as upslope ends. c. Press jute matting onto ground with light lawn roller or other satisfactory means.

Erosion And Sedimentation Controls

-4-

31 2500

Project # 503-6925-11010101

3.

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake d. On slopes flatter than 4:1, place staples 36 inches (900 mm) apart maximum in three rows for each strip, with one row along each edge and one row alternately spaced down center. On grades 4:1 or steeper, place staples in the same three rows, but spaced 24 inches (600 mm) apart. On lapping edges, reduce spacing of staples by half. At ends of matting and at required check slots, space staples 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Staple matting placed adjacent to boulders or other obstructions with no spaces between staples. e. Spread additional seed over jute matting, particularly those locations disturbed by building of slots. Excelsior Matting: a. Where strips of excelsior matting are laid end-to-end, butt adjoining ends. b. When adjoining rolls of excelsior matting are laid parallel to one another, butt matting snugly. c. On slopes flatter than 4:1, place staples 36 inches (900 mm) maximum apart in three rows for each strip, with one row along each edge and one row alternately spaced down center. On grades 4:1 or steeper, place staples in same three rows, but spaced 24 inches (600 mm) apart. Space staples in ends of matting 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Staple matting placed adjacent to boulders or other obstructions with no spaces between staples. Erosion Control Mulching Blanket: a. Where one roll ends and second roll begins, bring end of upslope piece over end of downslope roll so there is 12 inch (300 mm) overlap. Place overlap in 4 inch (100 mm) deep trench, staple at 12 inches (300 mm) on center, and backfill and tamp. b. On slopes where two or more widths of blanket are applied, overlap edges 4 inches (100 mm) and staple at 12 inch (300 mm) intervals along exposed edge of lap joint. c. Staple body of blanket in grid pattern with staples 36 inches (900 mm) on center, each way.

08.29.11

D.

Seed For Erosion Control: 1. Seeding for permanent erosion control shall be carried out in accordance with appropriate Section under 32 9300 heading. 2. Areas that will be regraded or otherwise disturbed later during construction may be seeded with rye grass to obtain temporary control. Sow seed at one lb (0.45 kg) per 1,000 sq ft (93 sq m), on pure live seed basis. Hay Bales And Silt Fences: 1. Provide hay bales or silt fences, as required, for temporary control of erosion and to stop silt and sediment from reaching surface waters, adjacent properties, or entering catch basins, or damaging the Work. 2. Stake hay bales firmly in place. Use sufficient number of bales to accommodate runoff without causing flooding and to adequately store any silt, sediment, and debris reaching them. 3. Erect silt fences and bury bottom edge in accordance with Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Provide sufficient length of fence to accommodate runoff without causing flooding and to adequately store any silt, sediment, and debris reaching it.

E.

3.2

REPAIR / RESTORATION A. If any staple becomes loosened or raised, if any matting becomes loose, torn, or undermined, or if any temporary erosion and sediment control measures are disturbed, repair them immediately. If seed is washed out before germination, repair damage, refertilize, and reseed. Maintain mulched and matted areas, silt stops, and other temporary control measures until permanent control measures are established and no further erosion is likely.

B. C.

END OF SECTION

Erosion And Sedimentation Controls

-5-

31 2500

BLANK PAGE

D I V I S I O N 32: E X T E R I O R I M P R O V E M E N T S
32 1000 B A S E S, B A L L A S T S, A N D P A V I N G 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 3000 S I T E I M P R O V E M E N T S 32 3113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 8000 I R R I G A T I O N 32 8423 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 9000 P L A N T I N G 32 9001 32 9113 32 9119 32 9223 32 9300 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS SOIL PREPARATION LANDSCAPE GRADING SODDING PLANTS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 32 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Prepare pavement sub-base as described in Contract Documents to receive pavement base and paving. 2. Furnish and install pavement base as described in Contract Documents. 3. Furnish and install Portland cement concrete paving as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination for pre-installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: Quality Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspecting Services for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout Submittals. 7. Section 03 3111: Mix Type concrete mixes and admixtures. 8. Section 03 3923: Membrane Concrete Curing. 9. Section 07 9213: Elastomeric Joint Sealants for quality of joint sealants including other contractual and installation requirements. 10. Section 31 1123: Aggregate Base. 11. Section 31 2323: Fill for Compaction procedures and tolerances.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI CP-1-08, Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1 (Jan 01, 2008). b. ACI Flatwork Finisher Certification Program. c. ACI Field Technician Certification Program. 2. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 3. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Contract Documents: Engineering and Architectural Drawings and Specifications issued for construction, plus clarification drawings, addenda, approved change orders and contractor designed elements.

B.

Concrete Paving

-1-

32 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101 4. 5. 6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

18.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards. Inspection is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special inspection is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. Owners Representative: Owners Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owners approval or authorization. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. Test is not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. Special test is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.

08.29.11

C.

Reference Standards: 1. American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials: a. AASHTO M 153-06, Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 2. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 117-06: Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. 3. ASTM International: a. ASTM C33/C33M-08, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. ASTM C39/C39M-10, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. c. ASTM C78-09, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). d. ASTM C94/C94M-09a, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. e. ASTM C125-09a, Standard Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates.

Concrete Paving

-2-

32 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake f. ASTM C140-10, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. g. ASTM C1688/?C1688M-08, Standard Test Method for Density and Void Content of Freshly Mixed Pervious Concrete. h. ASTM D1752-04a(2008), Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. i. ASTM D3549-03, Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens. Corps of Engineers: a. CRD-C 508 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

08.29.11

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 2213. 2. Schedule pre-installation conference before rough grading. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and 31 2213, review following: a. Review surveying and staking of parking areas and installation of sleeves. b. Review joint layout. c. Review membrane concrete curing requirements. d. Review concrete joint layout and joint sealant requirements. e. Review fill and compaction requirements. f. Review proposed aggregate base schedule. g. Review concrete mix design. h. Review safety issues. i. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review frequency of testing and inspections. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing concrete paving.

B.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Joint layout plan for written approval before starting work on this Section. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Installers: 1) Certification for National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA). 2) Certification for ACI-certified Flatwork Finishers and Technicians. 2. Design Data: a. Mix Design: 1) Furnish proposed mix design to Architect for review prior to commencement of Work. a) Include density (unit weight) and void content determined per ASTM C1688/C1688M for fresh mixed properties and per ASTM C140 for hardened concrete properties. b) Mix design shall show proposed admixture, amount, usage instructions, and justification for proposed use. b. Ready-Mix Supplier: 1) Require mix plant to furnish delivery ticket for each batch of concrete. Keep delivery tickets at job-site for use of Owner or his representatives. Tickets shall show following: a) Name of ready-mix batch plant. b) Serial number of ticket.

B.

Concrete Paving

-3-

32 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101 c) d) e) f)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

4.

Date and truck number. Name of Contractor. Name and location of Project. Specific class or designation of concrete conforming to that used in Contract Documents. g) Amount of concrete. h) Amount and type of cement. i) Total water content allowed by mix design. j) Amount of water added at plant. k) Sizes and weights of sand and aggregate. l) Time loaded. m) Type, name, manufacturer, and amount of admixtures used. n) Design Data. 2) Provide certificates with supporting testing reports verifying compliance with Contract Document requirements and that materials provided are from single source for following: a) Cement. b) Aggregate. c) Fly Ash. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Concrete mix design. See Section 03 3111 Normal Weight Structural Concrete for mix type submittal. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Curing plan.

C.

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of concrete paving.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: 1. Installers And Installation Supervisor: a. ACI-certified Flatwork Finishers and Technicians. 2. Ready-Mix Supplier: a. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M requirements and be certified according to NRMCA's 'Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.' 3. Testing Agencies: a. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technicians, Grade I. b. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Laboratory Testing Technicians, Grade I, and laboratory supervisor shall be ACI-certified Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. Testing and Inspection: 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for Cast-In-Place Retaining Walls: a. See Section 01 1200: Multiple Contract Summary.

B.

1.6

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not perform work during unfavorable conditions as specified below: a. Temperature below 50 deg F (10 deg C). b. Presence of free surface water. c. Over-saturated base and sub-base materials.

Concrete Paving

-4-

32 1313

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

MATERIALS A. Aggregate: 1. Conform to applicable requirements specified in Section 03 3111 for concrete aggregate. Concrete: 1. Conform to applicable requirements specified in Section 03 3111 for Mix Type concrete mix and admixtures with following modifications and additions: a. Air Entrainment: 6-1/2 percent, plus or minus one percent. b. Water-Cement Ratio: 0.49 maximum by weight. c. Curing: Curing compounds may be used instead of moist curing.

B.

C. Expansion Filler Material: 1. Recycled PVC Joint Filler: a. Design Criteria: 1) Expansion joint filler manufactured from 100 percent recycled vinyl material meeting requirements of ASTM D1752 and AASHTO M-153. 2) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick. 3) Compressive/Recovery: a) Meet requirements for ASTM D1752 recover minimum of 90 percent of original thickness. 4) Light gray color. b. Type One Approved Products: 1) Proflex by Oscoda Plastics Inc, Oscoda, MI www.oscodaplastics.com. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Survey and stake parking surfaces to show grading required by Contract Documents. 2. SubGrade: a. Fine grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents. b. Compact as specified in Section 31 2323.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Paving Placement: 1. Place, strike off, and consolidate concrete with mechanical finishing machine or vibrating screed. a. Hand finishing methods may be used if approved by Architect. b. If screed is used, carry 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete minimum in front of screed for full width of pavement. c. Concrete may also be placed with slipform paver designed to spread, consolidate, screed, and float-finish concrete in one pass. 2. Finish: Skid-resistant finish made with burlap drag or broom. 3. Curing: Apply specified curing compound. 4. Joints: a. Control: 1) Depth shall be 1/4 slab thickness. 2) Complete before shrinkage cracking occurs. 3) Make continuous across slab unless interrupted by expansion joint. Extend through adjoining curbs, gutters, and sidewalks. -532 1313

Concrete Paving

Project # 503-6925-11010101

b.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 4) Space not more than 12-1/2 feet (3.8 meters) apart in any direction. 5) Control Jointing Methods: a) Sawing: Begin sawing joints as soon as concrete has hardened enough to permit sawing without raveling. b) Hand-Formed: Maximum edge radius shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm). c) Pre-molded joint former. 6) Do not seal control joints unless detailed on Drawings. Expansion: 1) Use to isolate fixed objects abutting or within paved area. Joints shall contain premolded joint filler for full depth of slab. 2) Space not more than 65 feet (20 meter) apart in any direction. 3) Clean and seal before opening parking area to traffic.

08.29.11

B.

Tolerances: 1. Paving shall be 5 inches (125 mm) thick minimum.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Concrete Paving: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for Concrete Paving. See Section 03 3111 for Testing and Inspection requirements. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Rejection and Removal of Concrete Paving: a. Reject concrete paving that does not meet requirements of Section 03 3111. b. Remove concrete paving found defective after installation and install acceptable product at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Acceptance: a. General: 1) Opening paved surface to traffic does not constitute acceptance. b. Strength: 1) General: a) Lot is acceptable if strength test deviations are within Pay Factor 1.00 limits. b) At Project Managers discretion, after consulting with design team, a Lot with test deviation greater than Reject may stay in place at 50% cost. 2) Compression: ASTM C39/C39M. Lot size - 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m): a) Pay Factor: (1) 1.00 for 0 psi (0 kPA) below 28 day compressive strength required. (2) 0.90 for 1 psi (6.895 kPA) to 100 psi (690 kPA) below 28 day compressive strength required. (3) 0.80 for 101 psi (0.96 MPa) to 200 psi (1.38 MPa) below 28 day compressive strength required. (4) 0.70 for 201 psi (1.39 MPa) to 300 psi (2.07 MPa) below 28 day compressive strength required. (5) 0.60 for 301 psi (2.08 MPa) to 400 psi (2.75 MPa) below 28 day compressive strength required. (6) Reject for 401 psi (2.76 MPa) or more below 28 day compressive strength required. 3) Flexural: ASTM C78. Lot size - 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m): a) Pay Factor: (1) 1.00 for 0 psi (0 kPA) less than 28 day flexural strength required. (2) 0.95 for 1 psi (6.895 kPA) to 29 psi (200 kPA) below 28 day flexural strength required. (3) 0.85 for 30 psi (207 kPA) to 60 psi (415 kPA) below 28 day flexural strength required. (4) Reject for 61 psi (420 kPA) or more below 28 day flexural strength required. c. Thickness: -632 1313

B.

Concrete Paving

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2) 3) 4) 5)

6)

General: a) At Project Managers discretion, after consulting with design team, payment may be made for areas deficient in thickness by more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) at 50 percent. If not, remove and replace at no additional cost to the Owner. Paving thickness shall be as indicated in Tolerances above. Grade: 1/8 inch (3.175 mm) in 10 foot (3 meter) parallel to centerline. Cross Slope: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in 10 foot (3 meter) perpendicular to centerline except at cross section grade breaks. Thickness will be determined on ASTM D3549 cored or sawed specimens. Acceptance will be based on the average of all Lot thickness tests: a) Pay Factor: (1) 1.00 for 0.00 inches (0.00 mm) to 0.25 inches (6.35 mm) less than specified thickness. (2) 0.90 for 0.26 inch (6.60 mm) to 0.50 inches (12.70 mm) less than specified thickness. (3) 0.70 for 0.51 inches (12.95 mm) to 0.75 inches (19.05 mm) less than specified thickness. (4) 0.50 for 0.76 inches (19.30 mm) to 1.00 inches (25.4 mm) less than specified thickness. When thickness measurement is less than specified by more than 1 inch (25.4 mm), actual thickness of pavement will be determined by taking additional cores at intervals less than 10 foot (3 meter) parallel to centerline in each direction from affected location, until in each direction core is found which is not deficient by more than 1 inch (25.4 mm). Exploratory cores for deficient thickness will not be used in averages for price adjustments.

3.4

PROTECTION A. Traffic: 1. Do not open pavement to traffic for three days or until concrete reaches compressive strength of 1800 psi (12.4 MPa) minimum, whichever is longer. 2. Restrict traffic to passenger cars and light trucks for seven days. 3. In all cases, obtain approval from Architect before allowing access to parking area by traffic.

END OF SECTION

Concrete Paving

-7-

32 1313

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish material and apply pavement and curb markings as described in Contract Documents.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Reflectorization: Material, treatment or process to enable incident light to be returned in high proportions in the general direction of the light source. Reference Standards: 1. U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration: a. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD).

B.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Paint handicap spaces to conform to ADA Standards and local code requirements.

1.4

FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Apply only on dry surfaces, during favorable weather, and when damage by rain, fog, or condensation not anticipated. 2. Latex Paint: a. Atmospheric temperature above 50 deg F (10 deg C). b. When temperature is not anticipated to drop below 50 deg F (10 deg C) during drying period. 3. Alkyd or Chlorinated Rubber Paint: a. Atmospheric temperature above 40 deg F (4 deg C). b. When temperature is not anticipated to drop below 40 deg F (4 deg C) during drying period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIAL A. Paint: 1. Non-reflectorized. 2. Types: a. Acrylic Latex for uncured paving. b. Alkyd or chlorinated rubber for cured paving. 3. Colors: a. Yellow: Lane lines, edge lines, transverse lines, arrows, words, symbol markings, speed bump markings, parking space markings, cross-hatching in medians, cross hatching in -132 1723

Pavement Marking

Project # 503-6925-11010101

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake safety zones separating opposing traffic flows, crosswalk stripes, safety markings, centerlines, edge lines along the left edge of a one-way roadway or one way ramp. b. Blue And White: In parking spaces specifically designated as reserved for the disabled. c. Red: Fire lanes, no parking zones, special raised pavement markers that are placed to be visible to wrong-way drivers. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 442XX Traffic Marking Paint by ICI Devoe, Cleveland, OH www.devoepaint.com. b. Set-Fast Traffic Marking Paint by Sherwin-Williams, Cleveland, OH www.sherwinwilliams.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before application. See Section 01 6200.

08.29.11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. B. C. D. Do not apply acrylic latex system until paving has cured 7 days minimum. Do not apply alkyd or chlorinated rubber systems until paving has cured 3 months minimum. Surfaces shall be dry and free of grease and loose dirt particles. Perform layout with chalk or lumber crayon only.

3.2

APPLICATION A. Tolerances: 1. General: Make lines parallel, evenly spaced, and with sharply defined edges. 2. Line Widths: a. Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) variance on straight segments. b. Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) variance on curved alignments. Coverage: 1. Apply a single coat to parking lots which are being re-striped and where no surface treatments are being applied. 2. Apply a single coat to an emulsion seal coat. 3. Apply two coats to a slurry seal coat. Apply a single coat and then wait 30-45 days and after ravel sweeping to apply the second coat. 4. Apply two coats to new parking lots and new overlays. 5. Apply each coat at 150 sq ft (14 sq m) per gal. 6. Apply second coat after three hours minimum or when first coat is thoroughly dried, whichever is longer.

B.

3.3

CLEANING A. Remove drips, overspray, improper markings, and paint material tracked by traffic by sand blasting, wire brushing, or other method approved by Architect before performance.

END OF SECTION

Pavement Marking

-2-

32 1723

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 32 3113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install complete fence and gates as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3053: Mow strips at fencing and setting sleeves in retaining walls. 2. Section 05 0503: Priming and galvanizing repair. 3. Section 05 0523: Welding requirements.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A123 / A123M-08, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. ASTM A153 / A153M-05, 'Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.' c. ASTM A392-07, 'Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.' d. ASTM A1011 / A1011M-08, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. e. ASTM F1043-08, Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework.' f. ASTM F1083-08, 'Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures.'

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: Types of vision slats and colors for Architect's selection. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Vision Slats: a) Final, executed copy of Warranty.

B.

1.4

WARRANTY A. Vision Slats: 1. Manufacturers fifteen (15) year, pro-rata limited Warranty.

Chain Link Fences And Gates

-1-

32 3113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

ASSEMBLIES A. Materials: 1. Fabric: a. Chain link fabric of 9 ga (3.7 mm) wire, galvanized before or after weaving with 1.2 ounce (34 grams) zinc coating conforming to requirements of ASTM A392, Class I. b. Mesh: 1) With Visual Privacy / Security slats: a) 2 inch (50 mm) square mesh required by specified vision slat. c. Knuckle both selvages. 2. Framework: a. Posts and rails shall be roll-formed, self-draining shapes meeting strength requirements of ASTM F1043, Table 3, and with 2 ounce (56.7 grams) zinc coating per 1 sq ft (0.0929 sq meter) of surface area conforming to ASTM A123. b. Line Posts: 1) Line Posts 8 feet (2.45 meter) and under: a) 1.875 by 1.625 inch (48 by 41 mm) C-section roll formed from steel conforming to ASTM A1011, Grade 45, with minimum theoretical bending strength of 247 lbs (112 kg) under 6 foot (1.80 m) cantilever load. b) 2.375 inch (60 mm) outside diameter Schedule 40 tubular section weighing 3.65 lbs (1.6 kg) per lineal 1 ft (305 mm) meeting requirements of ASTM F1083. c) 2.375 inch (60 mm) outside diameter Schedule 40 tubular section weighing 3.12 lbs (1.42 kg) per lineal 1 ft (305 mm) formed from steel meeting requirements of ASTM A1011. c. Terminal And Gate Posts: 1) Gate posts and gate posts for gate leaves under 6 feet (1.80 meter) wide: a) 3.5 by 3.5 inch (89 by 89 mm) roll formed section with minimum theoretical bending strength of 486 pounds under 6 foot (1.80 m) cantilever load. b) 3 inch (76 mm) outside diameter Schedule 40 pipe weighing 5.79 lbs (2.63 kg) per lineal 1 ft (305 mm) meeting requirements of ASTM F1083. c) 3 inch (76 mm) outside diameter Schedule 40 tubular section weighing 4.64 lbs (2.11 kg) per lineal 1 ft (305 mm) formed from steel meeting requirements of ASTM A1011. 2) Gate Posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double gate installation, for nominal gate widths over 6 feet (1.80 meter): Leaf Width Over 6 ft (1.80 m) to 13 ft (3.96 m) Over 13 ft (3.96 m) to 18 ft (5.49 m) Over 18 ft (5.49 m) d. Post Outside Diameter 4 inches (100 mm) 6.625 inches (168 mm) 8.925 inches (227 mm) Lbs / lin ft (305 mm) 9.11 (4.13 kg) 18.97 (8.60 kg) 28.55 (12.95 kg)

3.

Top And Brace Rail: 1) 1.625 by 1.25 inch (41 by 32 mm) roll formed section of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) yield strength channel shaped rail with minimum theoretical bending strength of 247 lbs (112 kg) on 10 foot (3.050 m) midpoint load. 2) 1.660 inch 42 mm outside diameter Schedule 40 pipe weighing 2.27 lbs (1.03 kg) per lineal 1 ft (305 mm) meeting requirements of ASTM F1083. 3) 1.660 inch 42 mm outside diameter Schedule 40 tubular section weighing 1.84 lbs (0.83 kg) per lineal 1 ft (305 mm) formed from steel meeting requirements of ASTM A1011. e. Fittings: 1) Pressed steel or malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized conforming to ASTM A153. 2) Tie wires shall be 12 ga (2.05 mm) minimum galvanized steel or 9 ga (3 mm) minimum aluminum wire. f. Tension Wire: 7 ga (3.66 mm) minimum galvanized spring steel. Gate Leafs Wider Than 6 Feet (1.80 Meters):

Chain Link Fences And Gates

-2-

32 3113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

b. c.

d. e.

f.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Fabricate perimeter frames from metal and finish to match fence framework. Assemble frames by welding or with special fittings and rivets, for rigid connections, providing security against removal or breakage connections. 1) Provide same fabric as for fence. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges and at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers bars to frame at not more than 15 inches (380 mm) on center. 2) Install diagonal cross-bracing consisting of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter adjustable length truss rods to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. Swing Gates: Fabricate perimeter frames of minimum 1.90 inches (48.26 mm) OD pipe. Gate Hardware: Provide hardware and accessories for each gate, galvanized per ASTM A153, and in accordance with following: 1) Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180 degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6 foot (1.80 m) nominal height. 2) Latch At Paving: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as integral part of latch. Keeper: Provide keeper for vehicle gates, which automatically engages gate leaf and holds it in open position until manually released. Double Gates: 1) Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. 2) Include locking device and padlock eyes as integral part of latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with single padlock. Sliding Gates: Provide Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty inverted channel track, ball-bearing hanger sheaves, overhead framing and supports, guides, stays, bracing, hardware, and accessories as required.

08.29.11

B.

Mixes: 1. Post Foundation Concrete: a. One cu ft cement, 2 cu ft (0.0566 cu m) sand, 4 cu ft (0.1132 cu m) gravel, and 5 gallons (18.93 liters) minimum to 6 gallons (22.71 liters) maximum water. b. Mix thoroughly before placing.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Vision Slats: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. PrivacyLink, Hyde Park, UT www.eprivacylink.com. 2. Design Criteria: a. Description: 1) High-density polyethylene (HDPE), double-walled, self-locking or with locking feature that prevents slats from being removed. 3. Visual Privacy / Security: a. When installed, slats will provide 75 percent minimum visual privacy / security. 1) Mesh: 2 inch x 2 inch (50 mm x 50 mm). 2) Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers standard colors. 3) Slats: pre-woven, pre-inserted inserted into chain link fabric: 4) Type Two Acceptable Product: a) SlatLink by PrivacyLink. b) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200: 4. Color: a. As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors.

Chain Link Fences And Gates

-3-

32 3113

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Fence shall be installed by mechanics skilled and experienced in erecting fences of this type and in accordance with Contract Documents. 1. When general ground contour is to be followed, make changes of grade in gradual, rolling manner. 2. Evenly space posts in line of fence a maximum of 10 feet (3.050 meter) center to center. Post Foundations: 1. Set posts with concrete post foundations as specified below: a. Line Posts Diameter 8 inches Depth 36 inches. b. Gate, End, And Corner Posts Diameter 12 inches Depth 42 inches. c. At mow strips, set top of post foundation below grade sufficient to allow for placing of mow strip. Measure post foundation depth from top of mow strip. d. Where fences are incorporated into slabs, measure post foundation depth from top of slab. Extend bottom of slab footing sufficient to allow specified amount of concrete around post. At existing slabs, install fence outside perimeter of slab. e. For fences on retaining walls, provide 12 inch long sleeves to be cast into retaining wall. Set pipe in sleeve and grout space between sleeve and post full. Fence: 1. After posts have been permanently positioned and concrete cured for one week minimum, install framework, braces, and top rail. Join top rail with 6 inch (150 mm) minimum couplings at not more than 21 foot (6.40 meter) centers. 2. Stretch fabric by attaching one end to terminal post and supplying sufficient tension to other end of stretch so slack is removed. a. Fasten fabric to line posts with tie wires. Pass ties over one strand of fabric and hook under line post flange. b. Place one tie as close to bottom of fabric as is possible with additional ties equally spaced between top and bottom band on approximately equal spacing not to exceed 14 inches (355 mm) on center. c. Attach fabric to roll formed terminals by weaving fabric into integral lock loops formed in post. Attach fabric to tubular terminals with tension bars and bands. d. Hold fabric approximately 2 inches (50 mm) above finish grade line. e. On top rail, space tie wires at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) on center. f. Securely attach fittings and firmly tighten nuts. 3. Slats may either be installed by hand, or pre-inserted in fabric during manufacture. Gates: 1. Weld gate frames and provide for free and easy operation. 2. Provide gate latching device with padlocking capabilities. Provide cane bolt to engage sleeve set in concrete at double gates. 3. Align top bar of gates with top rail of fence. 4. Gates shall be plumb and on same plane as fence, both vertically and horizontally. 5. Set gate stops and other catches in concrete.

B.

C.

D.

3.2

CLEANING A. Spread dirt from foundation excavations evenly around surrounding area unless otherwise directed. Leave area free of excess dribbles of concrete, pieces of wire, and other scrap materials.

END OF SECTION

Chain Link Fences And Gates

-4-

32 3113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

SECTION 32 8423 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install planting irrigation system as described in Contract Documents complete with accessories necessary for proper function. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications. 2. Section 22 1116: Stop and waste valve. 3. Section 31 2323: Fill. 4. Section 32 9113: Soil Preparation. 5. Section 32 9223: Sodding. 6. Section 32 9300: Plants. 7. Division 26: Controller conduit and power to controller.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Automated Self Flushing Wye Strainer: Wye strainer located immediately downstream from point of connection in-lieu of backflow prevention device for irrigation systems that utilize non-potable, secondary and/or reclaimed water that is automatically self flushing to control unwanted debris from infiltrating remaining irrigation system. 2. Dielectric Fittings: Special type of fitting used between dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action from causing corrosion failure. 3. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. 4. Non-Pressure Lateral Line: Downstream from electric control valves to pop-up spray heads and drip valve assemblies to emitters. Piping or tubing is under pressure during flow. In areas where potable or secondary water are used, pressure supply line shall be white. In areas where nonpotable or reclaimed water are used, pressure supply line shall be purple. 5. Peak Flow: Maximum required flow for given month based on six (6) day week, nine (9) hour day watering window to be used for irrigation system design and to be used in hydraulic analysis. 6. Point of Connection: Location where meter for irrigation system is located. 7. Pressure Supply Line: Downstream from point of connection to electric control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure when activated by master valve or hydrometer. In areas where potable or secondary water are used, pressure supply line shall be white. In areas where non-potable or reclaimed water are used, pressure supply line shall be purple. 8. SMART Controllers: Smart controllers are irrigation clocks that automatically adjust irrigation run times in response to environmental changes using sensors and weather information to manage watering times and frequency. As environmental conditions vary, controller increases or decreases irrigation. Smart controllers have ability to turn off your sprinklers automatically during rain, high wind or low temperature. 9. Static Water Pressure: Pressure at point of connection when system is not operable. 10. Two Wire Path: Conducts power to solenoid valves, and also conducts communications signals from SMART controller to each device on system. Sensors receive instructions to take readings, transmit data and perform other tasks; solenoid valves and other devices also receive commands from controller over same wires used to carry power to valves. For new construction, total length of wire in system is limited to 10,000 ft (3 048 m); maximum distance from any system device to controller is 4000 ft (1 220 m). Wire loops are permissible, but length of wire in loop is limited to -132 8423

Underground Sprinklers

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 2000 ft (610 m). For normal installation, it is recommended that paired wire be installed with 1 in 5 foot (0.305 in 1.500 m) twist to reduce effects of nearby noise sources on communications. Heavy electromagnetic fields such as produced by overhead high tension power lines or near-by generator, transformers or large pump motors can interfere with data signals and generate communications errors over the cable. In such conditions, it is imperative that wire receive 1 in 5 foot (0.305 in 1.500 m) twist when installed. 11. Working Pressure: Pressure at point of connection when system is operable.

08.29.11

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Provide Coordination for required tests and inspections as described under Field Quality Control in Part 3 EXECUTION for the following: a. Manufacturers Field Service: Provide necessary manufacturers field service. b. Pressure Test: In the presence of Architect provide a pressure test. c. Walk Through for Substantial Completion: In the presence of Architect, plan and provide walk through for Substantial Completion after Contractor has completed all Work. d. Final Walk Through: In the presence of the Architect, plan and provide final walk through after Contractor has completed all work listed on substantial completion walk through punch list provided by Architect. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference before irrigation system installation begins. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following: a. Landscape architect or designated landscape consultant shall demonstrate or describe method to be used to maintain head spacing from concrete and to stabilize heads. b. Within the field yard, provide one installed example of each type of irrigation detail for review and approval by the architect and owner prior to beginning work in the field. Sequencing: 1. Install sleeves before installation of cast-in-place concrete site elements and paving.

B.

C.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's cut sheets for each element of system. b. Parts list for operating elements of system. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Acceptance certificate of irrigation system. 1) Upon acceptance of irrigation system, reviewer will provide signed acceptance certificate. 2) Certificate will include name and signature of reviewer, reviewer's company, date of review, and reviewer's telephone number. 2. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Results of mainline service pressure test before beginning work on system should be submitted as a report following the testing and before burial of the mainline. b. Provide the following from Main Line Irrigation test and observation: 1) Record and submit documentation of Irrigation Main Line tests, issues, and measure taking to correct problems. 3. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed literature on operation and maintenance of operating elements of system. b. Instruction Manual:

B.

Underground Sprinklers

-2-

32 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 1) Includes complete directions for system operation and maintenance, including winterizing, controller program worksheet and annual service and scheduling calendar based on local site specific conditions. c. Complete instructions on how to drain entire backflow preventer to prevent freezing. Qualification Submittals: a. Irrigation Installer: 1) Provide documentation of the following: a) Firm experience in irrigation projects (minimum of five years) b) Financial stability. c) Comply with specifications and contract documents. d) Agree to complete reporting documents, including: (1) Use only certified installers for SMART controller technology. (2) Assist landscape architect in completing the Watering Schedule for Meetinghouse Site Management Plan (MSMP).

08.29.11

C.

Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Maintenance Contracts: 1) See Meetinghouse Site Management Plan (MSMP) for Establishment Period Maintenance and Irrigation System Operation. b. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) Include one copy in Operations and Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800. Also include one copy to be included in Site Management Plan. Include the following information: 2) Instruction Manual. 3) Manufacturer's printed literature. 4) Manufacturer's cut sheets for each element of system. 5) Manufacturers parts list. 6) Main Line Irrigation observation report. 7) Freezing prevention instructions. 8) Controller Program Schedule: a) See Meetinghouse Site Management Plan (MSMP) for Watering Schedule. c. Record Documentation: 1) Certificates: a) Acceptance certificate of irrigation system. 2) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Mainline Pressure Test. b) Main Line Irrigation test and observation. 3) Record drawings: As installation occurs, prepare accurate record drawing to be submitted before final inspection, including: a) Detail and dimension changes made during construction. b) Significant details and dimensions not shown in original Contract Documents. c) Field dimensioned locations of valve boxes, manual drains, quick-coupler valves, control wire runs not in mainline ditch, soil moisture sensors (if soil moisture sensor technology is selected for the site) and both ends of sleeves. d) Take dimensions from permanent constructed surfaces or edges located at or above finish grade. e) Take and record dimensions at time of installation. f) Reduced copy of record drawings to 11 by 17 inches (275 by 425 mm), with color key circuits and laminated both sides with 5 mil thick or heavier plastic. Mount on 12 x 18 inch (300 by 450 mm) hard board drilled with (2) two 1/2 inch (13 mm) holes at top of board and hang on hooks in Custodial Room or location designated by Owners Representative. g) Two (2) additional reduced copies of record drawings to 11 by 17 inches (275 by 425 mm), with color key circuits, unlaminated, and unmounted to be given to Owners Representative. 2. Final payment for system will not be authorized until Closeout Submittals are received and accepted by Architect and landscape consultant. Maintenance Material Submittals: -332 8423

D.

Underground Sprinklers

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Tools: a. Furnish following items before Final Closeout Review: 1) One heavy-duty key for stop and waste or main shut-off valve. 2) One quick coupler key with brass hose swivel.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Work and materials shall be in accordance with latest rules and regulations, and other applicable state or local laws. 2. Nothing in Contract Documents is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. Installer Qualifications: a. General: 1) Perform installation under direction of foreman or supervisor with five (5) years minimum experience in sprinkling system installations. b. Automatic SMART controller: 1) Factory trained certified personnel familiar with required irrigation system and SMART controller installation procedures. Follow requirements as described under Installers in PART 3 EXECUTION. Mockups: 1. Provide Mock-Ups of each detail within a valve box at the staging area for review by Landscape Architect prior to installation of the irrigation system. 2. These mock-ups may be installed without solvent weld cement so that they can later be used in the field. 3. Mock-ups shall include a complete installation included filter fabric, gravel sump, equipment assembly, valve box placement and branding in conformance with these specifications.

B.

C.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Storage and handling during installation, protect materials from damage and prolonged exposure to sunlight.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Standard one year guarantee stipulated in General Conditions Article 12.2 shall include: a. Filling and repairing depressions and replacing plantings due to settlement of irrigation system trenches. b. Adjusting system to supply proper coverage of areas to receive water. c. Ensuring system can be adequately drained. 2. Automatic SMART Controller: a. Provide Manufacturers extended warranty for five (5) years to be free of design, materials and workmanship defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List (for reference only): -432 8423

Underground Sprinklers

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3M, Austin, TX www.3m.com/elpd. Acclima, Inc. Meridian, ID www.acclima.com. Action Machining Inc, Bountiful, UT www.actionfilters.com. Amiad www.amiadusa.com. Carson Industries LLC, Glendora, CA www.carsonind.com. Hunter Industries, San Marcos, CA www.hunterindustries.com. HydroRain, North Salt Lake, UT www.hydrorain.com. King Innovation, St Charles, MO www.kinginovation.com. Netafim, Inc. www.netafimusa.com. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. Paige Electric, Union, NJ www.paigewire.com. Rain Bird Sprinkler Manufacturing Corp, Glendora, CA www.rainbird.com. Salco by Weathermatic Irrigation Products, Garland, TX www.weathermatic.com. Toro Company, Irrigation Div, Riverside, CA www.toro.com. Valve and Filter Corporation, Arvada, CO www.valveandfilterlcom. Weathermatic Irrigation Products, Garland, TX www.weathermatic.com.

Distributors: 1. Category Four Approved Distributors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 2. Acclima, Inc. Meridian, ID www.acclima.com. a. Preferred Distributor: 1) First Contact: Brad Nuffer (208) 887-1470 brad@acclima.com. 2) Second Contact: Scott Anderson (208) 887-1470 scott@acclima.com. 3. HydroPoint Data Systems, Inc. (makers of Weather TRAK) Petaluma, CA www.hydropoint.com. a. Preferred Distributor: 1) California Northern: a) WaterSavers Irrigation, Chad Sutton (925)-989-3373 chads@watersaversinc.com. 2) California Central / Southern: a) Kern Turf and Supply, Tom Seville (661) 978-5314 tseville@kernturfsupply.com. 3) California Southern: a) HydroScape Products, Erik Anderson (949) 279-5752 erik.anderson@hydroscape.com. 4) Colorado: a) Colorado Pump and Supply CPS: (1) Denver: Dave Cooper (303) 548-5004 cooperd@cpsdistributors.com. (2) Colorado Springs: Steve Broom (719) 491-5136 broomes@cpsdistributors.com. 5) Hawaii: a) HydroScape Products, Erik Anderson (949) 279-5752 erik.anderson@hydroscape.com. 6) Idaho: a) United Pipe and Supply, Paul Woodman (208) 786-3053 pwoodman@unitedpipe.com. 7) Montana: a) United Pipe and Supply, Paul Woodman (208) 786-3053 pwoodman@unitedpipe.com. 8) North Carolina: a) Smith Turf and Irrigation Mike Young (704) 909-3357 mike.young@smithturf.com. 9) Oregon: a) United Pipe and Supply: (1) Portland: Kelly Duncan (503) 793-6745 kduncan@unitedpipe.com. (2) Eugene/Bend: Rob Minster (541) 688-6511 rminster@unitedpipe.com. 10) South Carolina: a) Smith Turf and Irrigation Mike Young (704) 909-3357 mike.young@smithturf.com. 11) Tennessee: a) Smith Turf and Irrigation Mike Young (704) 909-3357 mike.young@smithturf.com. 12) Utah: a) Sprinkler Supply - West Jordan, UT, Contact: Joe Jackson (801) 404-1371 (801) 566-8172 joe@sprinklersupplyco.com. 13) Washington: -532 8423

Underground Sprinklers

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a)

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

4.

United Pipe and Supply, Paul Woodman (208) 786-3053 pwoodman@unitedpipe.com. 14) Wyoming: a) Colorado Pump and Supply CPS: Greg Kent (970) 7972. 15) States other than listed above: a) Sprinkler Supply - West Jordan, UT, Contact: Joe Jackson (801) 404-1371 (801) 566-8172 joe@sprinklersupplyco.com. Rain Master, Simi Valley, CA www.rainmaster.com. a. Preferred Distributor: John Deere Green Tech. 1) California, Hawaii, Nevada and Arizona Area: a) Contact: Scott Caringella - 949-254-358 - scaringella@johndeeregreentech.com. 2) Texas, Florida, South East and North East United States Area: a) Contact: Brian Quill - 831-917-3711 - bquill@johndeeregreentech.com. 3) Utah, Colorado, New Mexico, Mid-west United States Area: a) Contact: Fritz Law - 303-598-5428 - flaw@johndeeregreentech.com.

C.

Materials: 1. Rock-Free Soil: a. Backfill soil around PVC pipe. b. Soil having rocks no larger than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension. 2. Pea Gravel: a. For use around drains, valves, and quick couplers. b. 1/2 inch (13 mm) maximum dimension, washed rock. 3. Sand: Fine granular material naturally produced by rock disintegration and free from organic material, mica, loam, clay, and other deleterious substances. 4. Native Material: Soil native to project site free of wood and other deleterious materials and rocks over 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Topsoil: Remove rocks, roots, sticks, clods, debris, and other foreign matter over 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) longest dimension encountered during trenching. 6. Pipe, Pipe Fittings, And Connections: a. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with Manufacturer's name, size, schedule, type, and working pressure. b. Pipe sizes shown on Drawings are minimum. Larger sizes may be substituted if at no additional cost to Owner. c. Southern Climate Zone Pipe: 1) Pressure Lines: Schedule 40 PVC. 2) Lateral Lines: Schedule 40 PVC. 3) Backflow Assembly Piping: Galvanized steel. 4) Quick Coupler Piping: Galvanized steel. d. Fittings: Same material as pipe, except where detailed otherwise. e. Sleeves: 1) Under Parking Area And Driveway Paving: Schedule 40 PVC Pipe. 2) All Other: Class 200 PVC Pipe. 3) Sleeve diameter shall be two times larger than pipe installed in sleeve. 7. Sprinkler Heads: a. Each type of head shall be product of single manufacturer. b. Shrub Head Bubblers: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: S-8A, S-16A series (stream spray), PCN, PCB, MSBN series. b) Hydro-Rain: 5400 series. c) Rainbird: 5 Series stream bubbler, FB series (flood bubbler). d) Toro: SB series (stream bubbler). e) Weathermatic: 102 Series, 106 series. c. Spray Heads in Shrub and Ground Cover Areas: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: PROS 04, 06, and 12 Series with MPR nozzles or with shrub adapter on Schedule 80 PVC nipple. CV optional. b) Hydro-Rain: 200 series, 04, 06, 12 Model PRHS with shrub adapter No. 94525.

Underground Sprinklers

-6-

32 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101

8.

9.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake c) Rainbird: 1804, 1806, and 1812 PRS Series with MPR nozzles or with PA-8S shrub adapter. SAM optional. d) Toro: 570 MPR series with shrub adapter. e) Weathermatic: LX series with MPR Nozzle and LXS (shrub adapter). d. Spray Heads in Lawn Areas: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: PROS 04, Pro-Spray Series with MPR nozzles, optional with CV; INST 04 Institutional Series with MPR nozzles, optional with CV. b) Hydro-Rain: HRS 200 Series, 04, 06 Model PRHS with MPR nozzle. c) Rainbird: 1804 PRS Series with MPR nozzles. SAM optional. d) Toro: 570 Z series/ 570PR series with MPR spray nozzles. e) Weathermatic: LX series with MPR nozzles e. Stream Heads, 16 to 22 foot (4.90 to 6.70 m) in Lawn and Shrub Areas: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter Sprinkler: MP Rotator. b) Rainbird: PA-8S, 16F-SLA, 16H-SLA, 16Q-SLA, 22F-SS, 22H-SS, 22Q-SS. c) Toro: SS series stream spray. f. Gear Driven Rotor Pop-ups: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: PGS Series (shrub), PGP Series (30 to 52 feet), I-10 Shrub Series, I-20 Series (17 to 45 feet), I-25, I-40 Series (40 to 70 feet). b) Orbit: 5500 series PR, 5300 series c) Rainbird: 5000/5000 plus MPR series, 25-35, R-50 series (21-50), 5500 Series (33-55). d) Toro: Mini 8 series, Super 700 Series (2152), Super 800 (28-50) series with 5 inch pop, TR50 Series with 5 inch pop. e) Weathermatic: T3, T3S series (28-53), CT-70 series, (49-74). Sprinkler Risers: a. All stationary spray heads shall have Rain Bird model SA125050; Blu-lock model BLJ-050SS-12 pre-manufactured swing assemblies or equal as approved by Architect before installation. Swing assembly shall be 1/2" x 1/2" x 12" (13 mm x 13 mm x 300 mm) NPT/Blulock. b. All 3/4" inlet rotor pop-up sprinklers shall have an adjustable pre-assembled swing assembly riser. Swing assemblies shall be Rain Bird model TSJ-12075; Blu-lock model BLJ-075-TT12 or equal as approved by Architect before installation. Swing assemblies shall be 3/4" x 12" (19 mm x 300 mm) and shall be threaded both ends. c. All 1" (25 mm) inlet rotor pop-up sprinklers shall have an adjustable pre-assembled double swing joint riser. Swing joints shall be Rain Bird TSJ-12; Blu-lock model BLJ-100-TT-12 or equal as approved by Architect before installation. Swing joints shall be 1" x 12" (25 mm x 300 mm) and shall be threaded both ends. d. Pop-up rotor sprinkler heads shall have adjustable riser assembly, three ell swing joint assembly, unless detailed otherwise on Drawings. These swing joint fittings shall be of schedule 40 PVC plastic and nipples schedule 80 gray PVC unless otherwise designated on Drawings. Horizontal nipple parallel to side of lateral line shall be 8 inches (200 mm) long minimum. All other nipples on swing joint riser shall be of length required for proper installation of sprinkler heads. e. Pop-up sprinkler heads, shrub spray heads, bubbler heads, and stationary spray sprinkler heads shall have risers made up one of the following ways: 1) Three schedule 40 street ells or Marlex street ells connected to lateral tee to form an adjustable riser or pop-up riser as detailed. 2) Risers for sprinkler heads 14 inches (355 mm) long minimum and 24 inches (610 mm) maximum. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: b) Hunter: SJ series with barbed fittings. c) Hydro-Rain: Blu-lock Swing pipe & fittings??? d) Rainbird: Swing Pipe with barbed fittings. e) Toro: Super Funny Pipe with barbed fittings, SPFA-5125, SPFA-51275. f) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Automatic Irrigation Control Wiring And Controller:

08.29.11

Underground Sprinklers

-7-

32 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b.

c.

d.

e.

f. g.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Control wire shall be UF-UL listed, color coded PVC insulated copper conductor direct burial size 14 or PE insulated 14 AWG color coded wire. Do not use green color coded wire. Waterproof Wire Connectors: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) DBY or DBR by 3M b) 'One Step' 20111SP by King Inovation. c) DB 57905, 57505 by Orbit. d) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200: Automatic controllers: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: (1) 3 to 15 Stations: PRO-C Series. (2) 8 to 32 Stations: ICC Series. b) Rainbird: (1) (2) 6 to 24 Stations: ESP-LX Modular. (2) 8 to 40 Stations: ESP-MC Series. c) Weathermatic: 4 to 30 Stations: LMC Series. Automatic Rain Sensors: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: MINI-CLIK, RAIN-CLIK, WRC, WRFC. b) Orbit: RX-1, RX1.5, RX-2 (solar powered, remote). c) Rainbird: WRC (wireless rain sensor), RSD-BEx (w/bracket). d) Toro: TWRS (wireless). e) Weathermatic : 955 Rain Sense. Automatic Rain Sensors: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: MINI-CLIK, RAIN-CLIK, WRC, WRFC. b) Hydro-Rain: HRC-100-RS-RF (wireless); HRC-100-RS-HW (wired). c) Toro: TWRS (wireless). d) Weathermatic: 955 Rain Sense. Lightning Arrestor: Paige Electric Cadweld Connection.

08.29.11

10. Valves: a. Manual Drain Valves: 1) PVC ball valve with 'T' handle on main lines and in valve boxes on lateral lines. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Rainbird: BV Series, 1/2 inch. b. Automatic Valves: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: PGV, ICV series. b) Hydro-Rain: HRB series. c) Rainbird: DVFUU Series, PGA series, PEB series, PESB series. d) Toro: 252E Series. e) Weathermatic: 21000 CR series, 11000 CR series. c. Isolation Valves: 1) PVC ball valves, size to match pipe size (use in warm climates- eco-regions 6.0, 7.0, 8.2, 9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.0, 12.0, 13.0, 14.0, 15.0). 2) Nibco T-113 non-rising stem gate valve, size to match pipe size (use in cold, northern climates- eco-regions 6.0, 9.1 and 10.1). 3) Class Two Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200. a) Rainbird: BV Series. b) Salco d. Backflow Preventer: Make and Model shown on Drawings or as required by local code. e. Secondary Water Filter: 1) Filter: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Amiad: Brushaway Filter M/N 1-2221-2151-4030. (2) Amiad: Electric Filter TAF750. Underground Sprinklers -832 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

(3) Valve and Filter: V-200P. Valve Boxes And Extensions: a) Lid Colors: (1) Green: Lawn areas (potable and secondary water). (2) Brown: Bare soil and rock areas (potable and secondary water). (3) Purple: Reclaimed water. b) Valve Box: (1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (2) Model 1730 Valve Box by Carson Industries. f. Hydrometer: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Netafim: (1) Acclima: LHM15TG1-MEL, LHM2TG1-MEL. (2) Rain Master: LHM15TG1-MEL, LHM2TG1-MEL. (3) HydroPoint WeatherTRAK: LHM15TG1-MEL, LHM2TG1-MEL. g. Pressure Reducing Valve: Make and model shown on Drawings or as required by local code. h. Quick Coupling Valves and Keys: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: HQ-3, HQ4 Series with HK-3, HK-4 key and HS-100 hose swivel. b) Orbit: 51029 with 51031 brass key. c) Rainbird: 33DRC, 33DLRC, 33DK with SH-O swivel. d) Toro: 470 Series with single lug key. e) Weathermatic: QV75 with CH-75 key and 10SHL hose swivel. 11. Valve Accessories: a. Valve manifolds: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products. a) Action: 1800 Series, Models 18001, and 18002, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 inch (25, 38, and 50 mm) sizes. b) Hydro-Rain: HRM Series. c) Rainbird: MS Series. d) Equals as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. b. Valve Boxes And Extensions: 1) Lid Colors: a) Green: Lawn areas (potable and secondary water). b) Brown: Bare soil and rock areas (potable and secondary water). c) Purple: Reclaimed water. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Rainbird: VB-STD, VB-JMB, VB-STDT or VB-JMT Series, VB-STDP or VB-JMBP Series, VB-MAX series. b) Orbit: 53983, 53993, 53753, 53985, 53755, 53995 (with extension boxes). c) Carson Industries: Model 1419-12, Model 1419-18, Model 1730-18 Jumbo. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. c. Valve ID tags: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Rainbird: VID1Y24, VID24Y48, VID1P24, VID24P48. b) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. c) Valve Box Supports: Standard size fired clay paving bricks without holes or compacted gravel base. 12. Drip System: a. Drip Valve Assembly: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: PCZ 101 Series, ICZ 101 Series. b) Netafim: (1) Over 4 GPM: LVCZ10075-HF. (2) Under 4 GPM: LVCZ10075-LF. c) Rainbird: (1) Over 6 GPM: XCZ-150-PRB-COM series (15-40 gpm). (2) Over 4 GPM: XCZ-100-B COM series (3-20 gpm). 2) Underground Sprinklers -932 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

(3) Under 4 GPM: XCZ-075-PRF series. d) Toro: DZK-EZF model. b. Distribution Tubing: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Salco: PVC-AR flex hose with fittings. b) Rainbird: Swing Pipe with barbed fittings. c) Hunter: SJ Series with barbed fittings. d) Toro: Super Funny Pipe with barbed fittings, SPFA-5125, SPFA-51275. c. Drip Emitters 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Rainbird: XBT Series. b) Salco: PST drip emitters, DMT multi-outlet emitters, wye strainers, filters, PVC fittings, distribution tubing, and tubing stakes. c) Rainbird: Dripline series tubing, air relief valves, flush valves, and fittings. d) Netafim: Techline CV tubing, flush valves, and fittings. d. Valve Boxes: 1) Lid Colors: a) Green: Lawn areas (potable and secondary water). b) Brown: Bare soil and rock areas (potable and secondary water). c) Purple: Reclaimed water. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Rainbird 12 Inch 300 mm Standard: VB-STD, VB-STDT, or VB-STDP Series. b) Hydro-Rain: ProSeries 12 Standard Series with extensions. c) Carson Industries 12 Inch (300 mm) Standard Series: Model 1419-12, Model 1419-18. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. e. Emitter Boxes: 1) Lid Colors: a) Green: Lawn areas (potable and secondary water). b) Brown: Bare soil and rock areas (potable and secondary water). c) Purple: Reclaimed water. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Hydro-Rain 10 inch (250 mm) Round Series. b) Rainbird VB 10 Inch (250 mm) Round Series: 10RND, 10 RNDT. c) Carson Industries Model 1910-10. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 13. Other Components: a. Recommended by Manufacturer and subject to Architect's review and acceptance before installation. b. Provide components necessary to complete system and make operational.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Perform pressure test at stub-out on main water line provided for irrigation system, or at near-by fire hydrant. 2. Notify Architect if pressures over 70 psi (480 kPA) or under 55 psi (379 kPA) are found to determine if some re-design of system is necessary before beginning work on system.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protection Of In-Place Conditions:

Underground Sprinklers

- 10 -

32 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a. b.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Repair or replace work damaged during course of the Work at no additional cost to Owner. If damaged work is new, installer of original work shall perform repair or replacement. Do not cut existing tree roots measuring over 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter in order to install irrigation lines.

08.29.11

B.

Surface Preparation: 1. Layout of Irrigation Heads: a. Location of heads and piping shown on Drawings is approximate. Actual placement may vary slightly as is required to achieve full, even coverage without spraying onto buildings, sidewalks, fences, etc. b. During layout, consult with Architect to verify proper placement and make recommendations, where revisions are advisable. c. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to avoid existing fixed obstructions. d. Make certain changes from Contract Documents are shown on record drawings.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Trenching And Backfilling: 1. Pulling of pipe is not permitted. 2. Excavate trenches to specified depth. Remove rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in any direction from bottom of trench. Separate out rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in any direction uncovered in trenching operation from excavated material and remove from areas to receive landscaping. 3. Cover pipe both top and sides with 2 inches (50 mm) of rock-free soil as specified under PART 2 PRODUCTS. Remainder of backfill to within 5 inches (125 mm) of finish grade shall be as specified in Section 31 2323. Top 5 inches (125 mm) of backfill shall be topsoil as specified in Section 32 9113. 4. Do not cover pressure main, irrigation pipe, or fittings until Architect has inspected and approved system. Sleeving: 1. Sleeve water lines and control wires under walks and paving. Extend sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) minimum beyond walk or pavement edge. Cover sleeve ends until pipes and wires are installed to keep sleeve clean and free of dirt and debris. 2. Position sleeves with respect to buildings and other obstructions so pipe can be easily removed. Grades And Draining: 1. In localities where winterization is required, grade piping so system can be completely drained or blown out with compressed air. If system is not designed to be blown out with compressed air: a. Slope pipe to drain to control valve box where possible. b. Where this is not possible, slope pipe to a minimum number of low points. At these low points, install: 1) 3/4 inch (19 mm) brass ball valve for manual drain. Do not use automatic drain valves. 2) Install 2 inch (50 mm) Class 200 PVC pipe over top of drain and cut at finish grade. 3) Provide rubber valve cap marker. 4) Provide one cu ft (0.03 cu m) pea gravel sump at outlet of each drain. c. Slope pipes under parking areas or driveways to drain outside these areas. d. Provide and install quick-coupling valve or valves in location for easy blowout of entire system. Install quick coupler valves with 4 lineal feet (1.20 m) minimum of Schedule 80 PVC pipe between valve and main line. Installation of Pipe: 1. Install pipe in manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, install main lines and lateral lines connecting pop-up rotor and impact sprinklers with minimum cover of 18 inches (450 mm) based on finished grade. Install remaining lateral lines, including those connecting drip tubing, with minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of cover based on finish grade.

B.

C.

D.

Underground Sprinklers

- 11 -

32 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Install pipe and wires under driveways or parking areas in specified sleeves 18 inches (450 mm) below finish grade or as shown on Drawings. Locate no sprinkler head closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from building foundation. Heads immediately adjacent to mow strips, walks, or curbs shall be one inch (25 mm) below top of mow strip, walk, or curb and have one to 3 inches 75 mm clearance between head and mow strip, walk, or curb. Cut plastic pipe square. Remove burrs at cut ends before installation so unobstructed flow will result. Make solvent weld joints as follows: a. Do not make solvent weld joints if ambient temperature is below 35 deg F (2 deg C). b. Clean mating pipe and fitting with clean, dry cloth and apply one coat of P-70 primer to each. c. Apply uniform coat of 711 solvent to outside of pipe. d. Apply solvent to fitting in similar manner. e. Give pipe or fitting a quarter turn to insure even distribution of solvent and make sure pipe is inserted to full depth of fitting socket. f. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before applying pressure to PVC pipe. Tape threaded connections with teflon tape. If pipe is larger than 3 inches (75 mm), install concrete thrust blocks wherever change of direction occurs on PVC main pressure lines.

08.29.11

E.

Control Valves And Controller: 1. Install valves in plastic boxes with reinforced heavy duty plastic covers. Locate valve boxes within 12 inches (300 mm) of sidewalks and shrub bed edges with tops at finish grade. Do not install more than two valves in single box. 2. Place 3 inches (75 mm) minimum of pea gravel below bricks supporting valve boxes to drain box. Set valve boxes over valve so all parts of valve can be reached for service. Set cover of valve box even with finish grade. Valve box cavity shall be reasonably free from dirt and debris. 3. Wiring: a. Tape control wire to side of main line every 10 feet (3.050 m). Where control wire leaves main or lateral line, enclose it in gray conduit. b. Use waterproof wire connectors consisting of properly-sized wire nut and grease cap at splices and locate all splices within valve boxes. c. Use white or gray color for common wire and other colors for all other wire. Each common wire may serve only one controller. d. Run one spare control wire from panel continuously from valve to valve throughout system similar to common wire for use as a replacement if a wire fails. Spare wire shall be different color than other wires, except use of green wire is not acceptable. Mark spare control wire in control box as an unconnected wire. Extend spare control wires 24 inches (600 mm) and leave coiled in each valve box. Backflow Preventer: 1. Install 24 inches (600 mm) minimum from structures or hardscaping. 2. When installed adjacent to any structure, mount test cocks on side away from structure. 3. After installation, remove handles and turn over to Owner together with extra maintenance materials. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Set sprinkler heads and quick-coupling valves perpendicular to finish grade. 2. Do not install sprinklers using side inlets. Install using base inlets only. 3. Set sprinkler heads at a consistent distance from existing walks, curbs, and other paved areas and to grade by using specified components or other method demonstrated in Pre-Construction Conference. Drip Assembly: 1. Install pipe providing for expansion and contraction as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Cut tubing square and remove burrs at cut ends. 3. Distribution tubing shall be between 14 inches (350 mm) minimum and 48 inches (1 200 mm) maximum long. Layout PVC lateral lines as necessary to keep distribution tubing lengths within specified tolerances. 4. Locate drip emitter on uphill side of plant within rootball zone. - 12 32 8423

F.

G.

H.

Underground Sprinklers

Project # 503-6925-11010101 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Layout in-line tubing for trees as indicated on Drawings. Layout in-line tubing for shrubs and groundcovers so plants receive water within rootball zones. Locate in-line tubing on top of soil but under bark mulch and filter fabric. Staple in-line tubing to ground at 6 foot (1 800 mm) maximum intervals and within 12 inches (300 mm) of ends and intersections. Assembly Using Solvent Weld Joints: a. Do not make solvent weld joint if ambient temperature is below 35 deg F (2 deg C). b. Clean mating pipe and fitting with clean, dry cloth. Apply uniform coat of Weld-On PVC 795 solvent to outside of pipe and inside socket of fitting. Give joint quarter turn and make certain pipe is inserted to full depth of fitting socket. c. Allow joints to set 24 hours minimum before applying pressure to pipe. Assembly Using Funny Pipe Type Joints: a. Connect distribution tubing to lateral line using barbed ell fitting. b. Connect fitting to distribution tubing using straight barbed fitting with 1/2 inch (13 mm) threaded end.

08.29.11

I. Before installation of sprinkler heads and drip emitters, open control valves and use full head of water to flush out system. J. Arrange valve stations to operate in an easy-to-view progressive sequence around building. Tag valves with waterproof labels showing final sequence station assignments.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Main Line: a. Before backfilling main line, test pressure at 100 psi (690 kPA) minimum for two (2) hours minimum and make certain there are no leaks. 1) A report of the test results along with photographs of the testing process are to be provided by the landscape architect or his authorized representative at completion of testing. 2) This report shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual along with the acceptance certificate at the end of the project. 3) Notify Architect two (2) working days minimum before conducting test. b. Test report: 1) Report of test results along with photographs of testing process are to be provided by Landscape Architect or his authorized representative at completion of testing. 2) This report shall be included in Operations and Maintenance Manual along with acceptance certificate at end of Project. c. Notify Architect two (2) working days minimum before conducting test. Field Inspections: 1. Architect's irrigation design consultant, or certified water auditor recommended by consultant and approved in writing by Architect, will review irrigation system before substantial completion. 2. Installations completed after water source has been turned off for season, as determined by Architect, will be accepted following spring, after system can be checked for proper operation. 3. Upon acceptance of irrigation system, reviewer will provide signed acceptance certificate. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Automatic SMART Controller: a. Correct or replace any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

B.

C.

Underground Sprinklers

- 13 -

32 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.5 ADJUSTING A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Adjust sprinkler heads to proper grade when turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it without appreciable harm. Such lowering and raising of sprinkler heads shall be part of original contract with no additional cost to Owner. Adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution and trim so spray does not fall on building. Adjust watering time of valves to provide proper amounts of water to plants.

B. C.

3.6

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Training: 1. After system is installed and approved, instruct Owner's designated personnel in complete operation and maintenance procedures using the Meetinghouse Site Management Plan (MSMP) on new construction projects.

END OF SECTION

Underground Sprinklers

- 14 -

32 8423

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 32 9001 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common procedures and requirements for landscaping work. 2. Provide maintenance for new landscaping as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance Qualifications. 2. Section 32 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements. 3. Section 31 2213: Rough Grading and pre-installation conference held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 4. Section 31 2216: Fine Grading. 5. Section 32 8423: Underground Sprinklers. 6. Section 32 9113: Soil Preparation. 7. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading for landscaping and planting areas.

B.

1.2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 2213. 2. Schedule planting pre-installation conference after completion of Fine Grading specified in Section 31 2216, but before beginning landscape work. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following: a. Establish responsibility for maintenance of new landscaping during all phases of construction period. b. Prepare two typical landscape planting excavations and conduct percolation test to verify that water drains away within two hours. Discuss results of percolation tests with Architect and Owner's representative.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) At completion of landscape work, submit two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year after contract maintenance period ends.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. Installer: a. Use trained personnel familiar with required planting procedures and with Contract Documents. b. Planting shall be performed under direction of foreman or supervisor with minimum five years experience in landscape installations.

Common Planting Requirements

-1-

32 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of Manufacturer. 2. Deliver sod, plants, trees, and shrubs in healthy and vigorous condition. 3. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store in location on site where they will not be endangered and where they can be adequately watered and kept in healthy and vigorous condition. 2. Protect materials from deterioration while stored at site.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1

POST-EMERGENT WEED CONTROL: A. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1. Enide by Upjohn. 2. Dymid by Elanco. 3. Treflan or Surflan by Dow Agrosciences. 4. Eptan by Syngenta. 5. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Inspect site and Contract Documents to become thoroughly acquainted with locations of irrigation, ground lighting, and utilities.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Before proceeding with work, verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and site to Architect before proceeding with landscape work. 1. Plant totals are for convenience of Contractor only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Drawings. 2. All planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise. Protection: 1. Take care in performing landscaping work to avoid conditions that will create hazards. Post signs or barriers as required. 2. Provide adequate means for protection from damage through excessive erosion, flooding, heavy rains, etc. Repair or replace damaged areas. 3. Keep site well drained and landscape excavations dry.

B.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work:

Common Planting Requirements

-2-

32 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Do not plant trees and shrubs until major construction operations are completed. Do not commence landscaping work until work of Section 31 2216 and Section 32 8423 has been completed and approved.

08.29.11

B.

Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill or adverse drainage conditions, notify Architect before planting.

C. D. E.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: 1. Architect will inspect landscaping installation approximately two (2) weeks before Substantial Completion. Non-Conforming Work. Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears dead as directed by Architect within ten (10) days of notification and before Substantial Completion at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Replace damaged plantings at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Repair damage to irrigation, ground lighting, and utilities and other items adjacent to landscaping caused by work of this Section or replace at no additional cost to Owner.

B.

3.5

CLEANING A. Waste Management: 1. Immediately clean up soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of deleterious materials.

3.6

PROTECTION A. Protect planted areas against traffic or other use immediately after planting is completed by placing adequate warning signs and barricades. Provide adequate protection of planted areas against trespassing, erosion, and damage of any kind. Remove this protection after Architect has accepted planted areas.

B.

3.7

MAINTENANCE A. General: 1. Before beginning maintenance period, plants shall be in at least as sound, healthy, vigorous, and in approved condition as when delivered to site, unless accepted by Architect in writing at final landscape inspection. 2. Maintain landscaping from completion of landscape installation to thirty (30) days after Substantial Completion Meeting. Areas sodded or seeded after November 1st will be accepted following spring approximately one month after start of growing season, May 1st or as determined by Architect, if specified conditions have been met. 3. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears unhealthy or non-vigorous as directed by Architect before end of maintenance period. Make replacements within ten (10) days of notification. Lawn

Common Planting Requirements

-3-

32 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake that does not live and has to be replaced shall be guaranteed and maintained an additional thirty (30) days from date of replacement.

08.29.11

B.

Sodded Lawn: 1. Maintain sodded lawn areas until lawn complies with specified requirements and throughout maintenance period. 2. Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at required frequency to maintain sub-soil immediately under sod continuously moist 3 to 4 inches (75 to 100 mm) deep. 3. Cut grass first time when it reaches 3 inches (75 mm) high. Continue to mow at least once each week throughout maintenance period. Remove clippings. 4. Apply weed killer as necessary to maintain weed-free lawn. Apply weed killer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions during calm weather when air temperature is between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C). 5. At end of thirty (30) day maintenance period, fertilize lawns as recommended in Section 32 9113. Trees, Shrubs, And Plants: 1. Maintain by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy growth. 2. Restore planting basins. 3. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical positions as required. 4. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 5. Provide supplemental water by hand as needed in addition to water from sprinkling system.

C.

END OF SECTION

ATTACHMENTS

Common Planting Requirements

-4-

32 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

BLANK PAGE

Common Planting Requirements

-5-

32 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Topsoil Testing Report


DTA Area Office Date This form should be given to the person or lab doing the testing each time a soils test is requested. Date Requested: By Whom: Contact Phone #: Fax #: Property Number

Ward/Branch City Stake/Mission Site Street Address 1. The architect is to determine, by investigation, the quality and quantity of topsoil on a site before the Owners review. All information on this form must be provided. A horticultural topsoil test is recommended at each site. The costs for the testing and report will be paid by the Owner. Copies of the report shall be made available to the landscape architect and the DTA Area Office. Report location where soil is from and a history of its use on the back of this form. 1. State

2. 3. 4. 5.

2.

At least two test samples shall be made of the topsoil on the project site and each anticipated topsoil source. If the site soil profile or borrow pit are not uniform, additional samples shall be taken. Uniform composite samples may also be used if properly acquired and documented. The soil report must provide interpretation and recommendations for soil amendments, fertilizers, and soil conditioners for use by the architect and the landscape architect.

(Acceptable Levels refers to the allowable soil specifications prior to being amended)
EC Mmhos/cm
(1)

Sample No.

pH(1)

SAR

(1)

% Sand

% Silt

% Clay

Text Class

(2)

% OM

(3)

NO3(4) N ppm

P ppm

(5)

K ppm

(5)

Fe Ppm

(5)

Acceptable Level(s)

5.58.0

<3.0

<6.0

15-60

10-60

5-30

(2)

>1.0

>20

>11

>130

>10

( Specification Section 32-9113 Finish Grading and Soil Preparation) Fertile, loose, friable soil, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. Clean and free from toxic minerals & chemicals, noxious weeds, weed seeds and rock (coarse fragments) or other objectionable/construction materials. Remove any such objects. No more than 2% by volume of soil measuring over 2.0mm.

Composition in Percent Sand Silt Clay

Acceptable %

15-60

10-60

5-30

Common Planting Requirements

-6-

32 9001

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Soil Sample No.

Description of location where sample was taken

History of Use of the soil

Name of Soil Lab performing the analysis . *To the nearest 1/10 of an inch. (1) saturated soil paste 1:1 soil:water method (please Indicate) (2) hydrometer method (Acceptable soil- sand:15-60%, silt:1060%, clay-5-30%) (3) potassium dichromate method (Walkey-Black) or loss of ignition (4) chromotropic acid method (5) AB-DTPA method --If other methods are used for NO3-N, P, K, and Fe, then note. Changes in acceptable levels shall also be made by the testing laboratory. Address Phone Number Fax Number Sample No. Infiltration Rate: Inches/Hour Inches/Hour Inches/Hour Inches/Hour

Common Planting Requirements

-7-

32 9001

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform soil preparation work as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and apply soil additives as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: Common Site Construction Requirements. 2. Section 31 1413: Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling. 3. Section 31 2213: Rough Grading and pre-installation conference held in conjunction with other Division 31 and Division 32 specifications. 4. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading for landscaping and planting areas.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 2213. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following: a. Review soil amendments and fertilizer requirements.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Product literature and chemical / nutrient analysis of soil amendments and fertilizers. 2. Samples: a. Sample of soil conditioner for approval before delivery to site. Include product analysis list. Informational Submittals: 1. Installer Reports: a. Delivery slips indicating amount of soil conditioner delivered to Project site.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil used in landscaped areas, whether imported or from site, shall be fertile, loose, friable soil meeting following criteria: -132 9113

Soil Preparation

Project # 503-6925-11010101 a.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

b.

Chemical Characteristics: 1) Acidity / alkalinity range: pH 5.5 to 8.0. 2) Soluble Salts: less than 3.0 mmhos/cm. 3) Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR): less than 6.0. 4) Organic Matter: greater than one percent. Physical Characteristics: 1) Gradation as defined by USDA triangle of physical characteristics as measured by hydrometer. a) Sand: 15 to 60 percent. b) Silt: 10 to 60 percent. c) Clay: 5 to 30 percent. 2) Clean and free from toxic minerals and chemicals, noxious weeds, rocks larger than 11/2 inch (38 mm) in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. 3) Soil shall not contain more than 2 percent by volume of rocks measuring over 3/32 inch (2 mm) in largest size.

B.

Soil Amendments: 1. Incorporate following soil amendments into topsoil used for Project. Do not apply additional fertilizer if GroPower Plus soil conditioner is used: a. Acceptable Soil Amendments, Soil Conditioners, And Application Rates. (Choose one): 1) 'Soil Pep:' 2) EPA Class 'A' co-compost or compost with SAR less than 3.0, EC less than 4.0, and CN ratio of 15 to 25:1 passing through 1/2 inch (13 mm) mesh screen: 3) Other amendments and conditioners as specified by topsoil Testing Report, such as lime, gypsum, Axis, etc: Equals as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 4) Soil Testing Report is forthcoming. b. Acceptable Fertilizers And Application Rates: 1) GroPower Plus soil conditioner by GroPower Inc, Chino, CA www.gropower.com. Apply as directed on package. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PERFORMANCE A. Soil Amendments: 1. Add specified soil amendments at specified rates to lawn areas. 2. Roto-till or otherwise mix amendments evenly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of topsoil. 3. Incorporate and leach soil amendments which require leaching, such as gypsum, within such time limits that soil is sufficiently dry to allow proper application of fertilizer and soil conditioners.

END OF SECTION

Soil Preparation

-2-

32 9113

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform topsoil placement and finish grading work required to prepare site for installation of landscaping as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and apply soil additives as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: Common Site Construction Requirements. 2. Section 31 1413: Stripping and storing of existing topsoil. 3. Section 31 2219: Finish Grading for landscaping and planting areas.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 2213.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Product literature and chemical / nutrient analysis of soil amendments and fertilizers. 2. Samples: a. Sample of soil conditioner for approval before delivery to site. Include product analysis list. Informational Submittals: 1. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit tests on imported and site topsoil by licensed laboratory before use, using Owner Form Topsoil Test Report: 1) Before use, topsoil shall meet minimum specified requirements and be approved by Architect. 2) If necessary, submit proposed amendments and application rates necessary to bring topsoil up to minimum specified requirements. b. Submit report stating location of source of imported topsoil and account of recent use. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Topsoil Test Report.

B.

C.

Landscape Grading

-1-

32 9119

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until grading tolerances specified in Section 31 2216 are met.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: 1. Protect utilities and site elements from damage. Surface Preparation: 1. Disk, till, or aerate with approved agricultural aerator to depth of 6 inches (150 mm). 2. Seven days maximum before beginning seeding and planting: a. Loosen area 4 inches (100 mm) deep, dampen thoroughly, and cultivate to properly break up clods and lumps. b. Rake area to remove clods, rocks, weeds, roots, debris or other material 1 inch (25 mm) or more in and dimension. c. Grade and shape landscape area to bring surface to true uniform planes free from irregularities and to provide drainage and proper slope to catch basins. 3. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet (1.80 m from building or other permanent structures. Use hand held tillers for preparation of subsoil in areas closer then 6 feet (1.80 m).

B.

3.3

PERFORMANCE A. General: 1. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet (1.80 meter) from building or other permanent structures. 2. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots. Finish Grade Tolerances (As shown on General Planting Details in Contract Documents): 1. Total topsoil depth of 5 inches (125 mm) minimum in lawn and groundcover planting areas. No topsoil as defined in this Section required over tree and shrub planting areas. 2. Finish grade of planting areas before planting and after addition of soil additives shall be specified distances below top of adjacent pavement of any kind: a. Sodded Areas: 2 inches (50 mm) below. b. Ground Cover Areas: 2 inches (50 mm) below. Existing Topsoil: 1. Redistribute approved existing topsoil stored on site as a result of work of Section 31 1413. a. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. b. Provide additional approved imported topsoil required to bring surface to specified elevation relative to concrete site elements. c. Do not place topsoil whose moisture content makes it prone to compaction during placement process. d. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. Grading:

B.

C.

D.

Landscape Grading

-2-

32 9119

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Slope grade away from building for 12 feet (3.60 m) minimum from walls at slope of 1/2 inch in 12 inches (13 mm in 300 mm) minimum unless otherwise noted. a. High point of finish grade at building foundation shall be 6 inches (150 mm) minimum below finish floor level. b. Direct surface drainage in manner indicated on Contract Documents by molding surface to facilitate natural run-off of water. c. Fill low spots and pockets with topsoil and grade to drain properly.

08.29.11

E.

Immediately before planting lawn and with topsoil in semi-dry condition, roll areas that are to receive lawn in two directions at approximately right angles with water ballast roller weighing 100 to 300 lbs (45 to 135 kg), depending on soil type. 1. Rake or scarify and cut or fill irregularities that develop as required until area is true and uniform, free from lumps, depressions, and irregularities.

3.4

PROTECTION A. After landscape areas have been prepared, take no heavy objects over them except lawn rollers.

END OF SECTION

Landscape Grading

-3-

32 9119

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 32 9223 SODDING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sodded lawn as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 8423: Irrigation system. 2. Section 32 9001: Common Planting Requirements.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Crop Coefficients and Hydro-Zones: Crop coefficients (Kc) are used with ETo to estimate specific plant evapotranspiration rates. The crop coefficient is a dimensionless number (between 0 and 1.2) that is multiplied by the ETo value to arrive at a plant ET (ETc) estimate. Plants grouped by water needs, organized into one irrigation zone. 2. Eco-Region Irrigation Design: A bio-regional approach to irrigation and planting design that is relevant to the geographic area for which the planting plan and irrigation system is designed. These geographic areas are defined by the Environmental Protection Agency and have been modified by the LDS church into 15 geographical areas throughout North America, and the Hawaiian Islands. 3. Hardiness Zone: A hardiness zone is a more precisely geographically-defined zone within an Eco-Region in which a specific category of plant life is capable of growing, as defined by temperature hardiness, or ability to withstand the minimum temperatures of the zone. Hardiness Zones may be defined by one of two sources: a. Sunset Western Garden Book Maps. b. USDA Hardiness Zone Map. Plant Hardiness zone sources shall be listed by the architect through the planting and irrigation design process. 4. Hydro-Zone: Plants grouped by water needs (similar Crop Coefficients (Kc), organized into one irrigation zone. 5. Reference Evapotranspriation (ETo): The total water lost from the soil (evaporation) and from the plant surface (transpiration) over some period.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Written certification confirming lawn seed quality and mix. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Maintenance Contracts: 1) See Site Management Plan (SMP) for Establishment Period Maintenance.

B.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: -132 9223

Sodding

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

2.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod in accordance with requirements of Turfgrass Producers International (TPI) (formally American Sod Producers Association) Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting / Installing. Schedule deliveries to coincide with topsoil operations and laying. Keep storage at job site to minimum without causing delays. a. Deliver, unload, and store sod on pallets within 24 hours of being lifted. b. Do not deliver small, irregular, or broken pieces of sod.

08.29.11

B.

Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Cut sod in pieces approximately 3/4 to one inch (19 to 25 mm) thick. Roll or fold sod so it may be lifted and handled without breaking or tearing and without loss of soil. 2. During wet weather, allow sod to dry sufficiently to prevent tearing during lifting and handling. 3. During dry weather, protect sod from drying before installation. Water as necessary to insure vitality and to prevent excess loss of soil in handling. Sod that dries out before installation will be rejected.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Description: 1. Superior sod grown from certified, high quality, seed of known origin or from plantings of certified grass seedlings or stolons: a. Assure satisfactory genetic identity and purity. b. Assure over-all high quality and freedom from noxious weeds or an excessive amount of other crop and weedy plants at time of harvest.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Sections 32 9113 and 32 9300 has been completed and approved. Tolerances: 1. Final grade of soil after sodding of lawn areas is complete shall be one inch (25 mm below top of adjacent pavement of any kind. Laying of Sod: 1. Lay sod during growing season and within 48 hours of being lifted. 2. Lay sod while top 6 inches (150 mm) of soil is damp, but not muddy. Sodding during freezing temperatures or over frozen soil is not acceptable. 3. Lay sod in rows perpendicular to slope with joints staggered. Butt sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife. 4. Lay sod flush with adjoining existing sodded surfaces. 5. Do not sod slopes steeper than 3:1. Consult with Architect for alternate treatment. After Laying of Sod Is Complete: 1. Roll horizontal surface areas in two directions perpendicular to each other. 2. Repair and re-roll areas with depressions, lumps, or other irregularities. Heavy rolling to correct irregularities in grade will not be permitted. 3. Water sodded areas immediately after laying sod to obtain moisture penetration through sod into top 6 inches (150 mm) of topsoil. -232 9223

B.

C.

D.

Sodding

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Field Inspection: 1. Sodded areas will be accepted at Project closeout if: a. Sodded areas are properly established. b. Sod is free of bare and dead spots and is without weeds. c. No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Sodded areas have been mowed a minimum of twice.

END OF SECTION

Sodding

-3-

32 9223

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 32 9300 PLANTS

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install landscaping plants as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 8423: Irrigation system. 2. Section 32 9001: Common Planting Requirements. 3. Section 32 9113: Soil Preparation. 4. Section 32 9223: Sodding.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Crop Coefficients and Hydro-Zones: Crop coefficients (Kc) are used with ETo to estimate specific plant evapotranspiration rates. The crop coefficient is a dimensionless number (between 0 and 1.2) that is multiplied by the ETo value to arrive at a plant ET (ETc) estimate. Plants grouped by water needs, organized into one irrigation zone. 2. Eco-Region Irrigation Design: A bio-regional approach to irrigation and planting design that is relevant to the geographic area for which the planting plan and irrigation system is designed. These geographic areas are defined by the Environmental Protection Agency and have been modified by the LDS church into 15 geographical areas throughout North America, and the Hawaiian Islands. 3. Hardiness Zone: A hardiness zone is a more precisely geographically-defined zone within an Eco-Region in which a specific category of plant life is capable of growing, as defined by temperature hardiness, or ability to withstand the minimum temperatures of the zone. Hardiness Zones may be defined by one of two sources: a. Sunset Western Garden Book Maps. b. USDA Hardiness Zone Map. Plant Hardiness zone sources shall be listed by the architect through the planting and irrigation design process. 4. Hydro-Zone: Plants grouped by water needs (similar Crop Coefficients (Kc), organized into one irrigation zone. 5. Reference Evapotranspriation (ETo): The total water lost from the soil (evaporation) and from the plant surface (transpiration) over some period. Reference Standards: 1. American Nursery & Landscape Association / American National Standards Institute: a. ANLA / ANSI Z60.1-2004, 'American Standard for Nursery Stock.'

B.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Top dressing mulch for approval before delivery to site. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Maintenance Contracts: -132 9300

B.

Plants

Project # 503-6925-11010101

b.

c.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake 1) See Site Management Plan (SMP) for Establishment Period Maintenance. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) Installer Instructions: a) Provide written instructions covering maintenance requirements by Owner for one year beyond Contract maintenance period specified in Section 32 9001. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include final, executed copy of warranty.

08.29.11

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. 2. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Architect. 3. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. 4. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. 5. Provide protective covering during delivery. Storage And Handling Requirements; 1. Handle balled stock by root ball or container. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery. 2. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set planting materials in shade and protect from weather and mechanical damage. 3. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, saw dust, or other acceptable material approved by Architect. Do not place on pavement. 4. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 5. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with fine spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in moist condition. Do not allow plant foliage to dry out.

B.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide written warranties as follows: a. Guarantee shrubs, ground covers, and vines to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and healthy condition for 90 days minimum from date landscape installation is accepted as complete. b. Guarantee trees to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and healthy condition for one year from date landscape installation is accepted as complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A. Plants: 1. Conform to requirements of Plant List and Key on Drawings and to ANLA / ANSI Z60.1. 2. Nomenclature: a. Plant names used in Plant List conform to 'Standardized Plant Names' by American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature except in cases not covered. In these instances, follow custom of nursery trade. Plants shall bear a tag showing the genus, species, and variety of at least 10 percent of each species delivered to site. 3. Quality: a. Plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, free from plant disease, insect pests or their eggs, noxious weeds, and have healthy, normal root systems. Container stock shall be well established and free of excessive root-bound conditions. b. Do not prune plants or top trees prior to delivery. -232 9300

Plants

Project # 503-6925-11010101

4.

5.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake c. Plant materials shall be subject to approval by Architect as to size, health, quality, and character. d. Bare root trees are not acceptable. e. Provide plant materials from licensed nursery or grower and that is approved by a governing authority. Measurements: a. Measure height and spread of specimen plant materials with branches in their normal position as indicated on Drawings or Plant List. b. Measurement should be average of plant, not greatest diameter. For example, plant measuring 15 inches (375 mm) in widest direction and 9 inches (225 mm) in narrowest would be classified as 12 inch (300 mm) stock. c. Plants properly trimmed and transplanted should measure same in every direction. d. Measure caliper of trees 6 inches (150 mm) above surface of ground. e. Where caliper or other dimensions of plant materials are omitted from Plant List, plant materials shall be normal stock for type listed. f. Plant materials larger than those specified may be supplied, with prior written approval of Architect, and: 1) If complying with Contract Document requirements in all other respects. 2) If at no additional cost to Owner. 3) If sizes of roots or balls are increased proportionately. Shape and Form: a. Plant materials shall be symmetrical or typical for variety and species and conform to measurements specified in Plant List. b. Well grown material will generally have height equal to or greater than spread. However, spread shall not be less than 2/3's of height.

08.29.11

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Planting Mix: 1. Mixture of three parts topsoil mix as specified in Section 32 9113 and one part well rotted composted manure, or approved commercial mix. Planting Tablets: 1. 21 gram Agriform 20-10-5. Tree Stakes: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 2 inch (50 mm) diameter Lodgepole Pine. b. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Tree Staking Ties: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 32 inch (800 mm) Cinch-Tie tree ties by V.I.T. Products Inc, Escondido, CA www.vitproducts.com. b. Flex strap Tree Ties by Aquarius Brands Inc, Ontario, CA www.aquariusbrands.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Tree Guys: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Duckbill Model 68DTS guying kit. b. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Chipco Dimension Granular by The Andersons Inc, Maumee, IL www.andersonsinc.com. b. Elanco XL2G granular by Crop Data Management Systems, Marysville, CA www.cdms.net. c. Ronstar G granular by Bayer Crop Science, Monheim, Germany www.bayercropscience.com.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

Plants

-3-

32 9300

Project # 503-6925-11010101 d. e. G.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Surflan AS liquid by United Phosphorous Inc, Trenton, NJ www.upi-usa.com. Oryzalin 4 A.S. liquid by FarmSaver, Seattle, WA www.farmsaver.com.

08.29.11

Weed Barrier: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. DeWitt 4.1 oz (121 ml) 20 year woven polypropylene weed barrier. b. Western Landscape geotextile Polyspun 3.5 oz (103 ml) polyester fabric. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Bark Or Wood Top Dressing Mulch: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Medium size Fir bark. b. Medium or large size Redwood bark. c. Shredded pine bark. d. Shredded Cedar. e. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Rock Mulch: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Southtowne Cobble available from Nephi Sandstone b. Approved alternate. c. Size: 1) No rock should be less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in size. 2) For slopes 3:1 or less 3/4 inch (19 mm) to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 3) For steep slopes greater than 3:1: Size can be larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). d. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.

H.

I.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and site to Architect before proceeding with work of this Section. 2. Plant totals are for convenience only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Drawings. All planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas. Secure Architect's acceptance before planting. Make minor adjustments as may be requested.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Section 32 9113 has been completed and approved. Excavation: 1. If underground construction work or obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting holes, Architect will select alternate locations. 2. Plant Excavation Size: a. Diameter: Twice diameter of root ball or container minimum. b. Depth: Equal to container or rootball depth. -432 9300

B.

Plants

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3. 4. 5.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Unless excavated material meets topsoil requirements as specified in Section 32 9113, remove from landscape areas and do not use for landscaping purposes. Roughen sides and bottoms of excavations. With approval of Architect, select five typical planting excavations throughout site for drainage testing. a. Fill selected excavations with water and verify that water drains away at rate of 3 inches (75 mm) per hour minimum. Inform Architect in writing of excavations where water does not drain properly. b. Select three excavations approximately 5 feet (1 500 mm) away from each non-draining excavation and repeat tests. Continue testing process until non-draining areas have been identified. c. In excavations located in identified non-draining areas, auger 6 inch (150 mm) diameter hole 4 feet (1 200 mm) deep in low point of each excavation and fill with tamped planting mix. d. Do not plant trees or shrubs in holes that do not properly drain.

08.29.11

C.

Planting: 1. Removing Binders And Containers: a. Remove top one / third of wire basket and burlap binders. b. Remove plastic and twine binders from around root ball and tree trunk. c. Remove wood boxes from around root ball. Remove box bottoms before positioning plant in hole. After plant is partially planted, remove remainder of box without injuring root ball. 2. Plant immediately after removing binding material and containers. Place tree and shrub rootballs on undisturbed soil. After watering and settling, top of tree root balls shall be approximately two inches (50 mm) higher than finished grade and trunk flare is visible. Shrub root balls shall be approximately one inch (25 mm) higher than finished grade 3. Properly cut off broken or frayed roots. 4. Center plant in hole, remove remaining wire basket, and backfill with specified planting mix. Except in heavy clay soils, make ring of mounded soil around hole perimeter to form watering basin. 5. Add planting tablets in plant pit as follows. Place tablets in relation to root ball as recommended by Manufacturer. a. One Gallon (4.5 L) Shrub: 1 tablet. b. 5 Gallon (23 L) Shrub / Tree: 3 tablets. c. 15 Gallon (68 L) Tree: 4 tablets. d. 24 inch600 mm) Box Tree: 6 Tablets. 6. Fill landscape excavations tamped planting mix. Settle by firming and watering to ensure top of ball one inch higher than surrounding soil. 7. Do not use muddy soil for backfilling. 8. Make adjustments in positions of plants as directed by Architect. 9. Thoroughly water trees and shrubs immediately after planting. 10. At base of each tree, leave 36 inch (900 mm) diameter circle free of any grass. Supports for New Trees: 1. Provide new supports for trees noted on Drawings to be staked. a. Remove nursery stakes delivered with and attached to trees. b. Support shall consist of at least two tree stakes driven into hole base before backfill so roots are not damaged. Place stakes vertically and run parallel to tree trunk. Install stakes so 3 feet (900 mm) of stake length is below finish grade. c. Place tree ties 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) below crotch of main tree canopy. Second set of tree ties may be required 18 to 24 inches (450 to 600 mm) above finish grade, if directed by Architect. d. Remove tops of tree stakes so top of stake is 6 inches (150 mm) below main tree canopy to prevent damage to tree branches and canopy growth. 2. Provide root guying kits to support 24 inch (600 mm) box, 3 inch (75 mm) caliper and larger trees. Vines: 1. Remove from stakes, untie, and securely fasten to wall or fence next to which they are planted. Ground Covers:

D.

E.

F.

Plants

-5-

32 9300

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake Container-grown unless otherwise specified on Drawings. Space evenly to produce a uniform effect, staggered in rows and intervals shown.

08.29.11

G.

Post Planting Weed Control: 1. Apply specified pre-emergent herbicide to shrub and ground cover planting areas and grass-free areas at tree bases after completion of planting. 2. Areas shall be free of existing weed growth before application of herbicide. Weed Barrier Fabric: 1. After planting and application or herbicide in shrub beds, apply covering of specified weed barrier fabric. 2. Achieve 100 percent coverage over ground areas. 3. Overlap seams 6 inches (150 mm) minimum. 4. Staple at 5 feet (1500 mm) on center each way and within 3 inches (75 mm) of edge of shrub bed, with two at each corner. Mulching: 1. After application of herbicide, mulch shrub and ground cover planting areas with 3 inches (75 mm) deep layer of specified top dressing or rock mulch. 2. Cover grass-free area at tree bases with weed barrier and 3 inches (75 mm) of top dressing mulch or rock mulch. 3. Place mulch to uniform depth and rake to neat finished appearance.

H.

I.

END OF SECTION

Plants

-6-

32 9300

D I V I S I O N 33: U T I L I T I E S
33 1000 W A T E R U T I L I T I E S 33 1116 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 1119 FIRE SUPPRESSION UTILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 2000 W E L L S

33 3000 S A N I T A R Y S E W E R A G E U T I L I T I E S 33 3313 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE 33 4000 S T O R M D R A I N A G E U T I L I T I E S 33 4116 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 5000 F U E L D I S T R I B U T I O N U T I L I T I E S 33 5613 ABOVE-GROUND FUEL-STORAGE TANKS: LPG

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

-1-

Document 33 0000

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 33 1116 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform trenching and backfilling required for work of this Section. 2. Furnish and install piping for domestic water supply from water main to within 5 feet (1.50 meter) of building as described in Contract Documents complete with meter, shut-off valve, and connections. 3. Furnish and install piping for non-domestic water supply from water main to the sprinkler system stub shown on the Contract Documents complete with meter, shut-off valve, and connections. 4. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 2316: Procedure and quality of excavating. 2. Section 31 2323: Procedure and quality of backfilling and compacting.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American Welding Society / American National Standards Institute: a. AWS / ANSI A5.8-2004, 'Specification for Brazing Filler Metals.' 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM B88-03, 'Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.'

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Pipe: Type K copper meeting requirements of ASTM B88 with wrought copper, brazed fittings. 2. Water Meter: As required by local agency furnishing water. 3. Connection Material: a. Brazing Rods In accordance with ANSI / AWS A5.8: 1) Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6 percent silver). 2) Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15 percent silver). 3) Classification BAg-5 Silver (45 percent silver). 4) Do not use rods containing Cadmium. b. Flux: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Stay-Silv white brazing flux by J W Harris Co, Cincinnati, OH www.jwharris.com. b) High quality silver solder flux by Handy & Harman, Fairfield, CT www.handyharman.com. c) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 4. Stop And Waste Valves: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Mueller: Mark II Oriseal stop and waste valve H10288. 2) Mueller: Buffalo screw type curb box H-10350 complete with lid and H-10349 enlarged base.

Site Water Utility Distribution Piping

-1-

33 1116

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 3 - EXECUTION

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings. 2. Excavate to required depth. 3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required. 4. Remove debris from trench before laying pipe. 5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect. 6. Excavate trenches so outside pipe will be 12 inches (300 mm) minimum below frost line. 7. Backfill only after pipe lines have been tested and inspected, and approved by Architect. Install piping system so it may contract and expand freely. Completely eliminate cross connections, backflow, and water hammer. Install shut-off valve at meter.

B.

C.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests 1. Sterilization And Negative Bacteriological Test: a. Sterilize potable water system with solution containing 200 parts per million minimum of available chlorine and maintaining a pH of 7.5 minimum. Introduce chlorinating materials into system in manner approved by Architect. Allow sterilization solution to remain for 24 hours and open and close valves and faucets several times during that time. b. After sterilization, flush solution from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is less than 0.2 parts per million. c. Water system will not be accepted until negative bacteriological test is made on water taken from system. Repeat dosing as necessary until such negative test is accomplished. 2. Pressure Test: Before covering pipes, test system in presence of Architect or governing agency at 100 psi hydrostatic pressure for two hours and show no leaks.

3.3

CLEANING A. Remove excess earth from site or place as directed by Architect.

END OF SECTION

Site Water Utility Distribution Piping

-2-

33 1116

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 33 1119

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

FIRE SUPPRESSION UTILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavation and backfill required for installation of work of this Section. 2. Furnish and install fire water system as described in Contract Documents. 3. Furnish and install connection to water main. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 1113: Installation of sleeve where piping penetrates slab. 2. Section 21 1313: Wet-pipe sprinkler system. 3. Section 31 2316: Procedure and quality of excavating. 4. Section 31 2323: Procedure and quality of backfilling and compacting

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / American Water Works Association: a. ANSI / AWWA C110-08, AWWA Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.' b. ANSI / AWWA C111/A21.11-07, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.' c. ANSI / AWWA C150-A21.50-08, Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.' d. ANSI / AWWA C151/A21.51-09, Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.' e. ANSI / AWWA C502-05 Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants.' 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. AWWA Manual M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2009 edition. 3. ASTM International: a. ASTM A126-04, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.' b. ASTM A197 / A197M-00(2006), Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron.' c. ASTM A307-07b, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.' d. ASTM A506-05, Standard Specification for Alloy and Structural Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled.' e. ASTM A575-96(2007), Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, MGrades.' 4. National Fire Protection Association / American National Standards Institute: a. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2007 Edition. b. NFPA 24 Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances, 2007 Edition.'

1.3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals:

Fire Suppression Water Distribution Piping

-1-

33 1119

Project # 503-6925-11010101 1.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Certificates: a. Submit certification required by field test.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Install exterior fire water system according to NFPA 13, NFPA 24, and AWWA Manual M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings Procedures unless specified otherwise below. 2. Install hydrant in accordance with ANSI / AWWA C502. 3. Install exterior fire water system up to and including pipe flange 12 inches (300 mm) above floor inside building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Ipex Inc, Englewood, CO www.ipexinc.com. b. Mueller Company, Decatur, IL www.muellerflo.com. c. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. d. Potter Electric Signal Company, St Louis, MO www.pottersignal.com. e. Potter-Roemer, Santa Ana, CA www.potterroemer.com. Materials: 1. Pipe: a. Ductile iron pipe in accordance with ANSI / AWWA C151/A21.51and ANSI / AWWA C150A21.50. b. Blue-Brut by Ipex Inc. c. Fittings: Ductile iron pipe fitting in accordance with ANSI / AWWA C110 and rubber gaskets joints in accordance with ANSI / AWWA C111/A21.11. 2. Hydrants: a. Dry-barrel fire hydrant (base valve type) complying with ANSI / AWWA C150-A21.50, with 150 psi working pressure with two 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) hose connections and one 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) pumper connection with caps and chains. Nozzle cap nuts to match operating stem nuts. b. Class Two Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200: 1) Hydrants accepted by authority having jurisdiction are approved. 3. Gate Valves: a. Cast iron body with bolted bonnet. b. Indicator post pattern. c. Non-rising stem. d. 175 psi working pressure. e. Approved Products: 1) Nibco: a) Model M-609 with mechanical connection. b) Model F-609 with flanged connection. 2) Mueller: a) Model A-2052-5 with mechanical connection. b) Model A-2052-6 with flanged connection. 4. Indicator Post Valve: a. UL / ULC / FM Approved. b. Adjustable type. c. Cast iron body. d. Approved Products: 1) Nibco: Model NIP1A Vertical Post. -233 1119

B.

Fire Suppression Water Distribution Piping

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

5.

6.

7.

2) Mueller: Model A-20800 Tamper Switch: a. UL / ULC / FM Approved. b. Weather and tamper resistant. c. Single Pole Double Throw Switch. d. Approved Product: 1) Potter Electric Signal: Model PCVS. Anchorages: a. Provide anchorages for tees, plugs, caps, bends, and hydrants in accordance with NFPA 24. b. Miscellaneous Fittings: 1) Clamps, Straps, And Washers: Steel, meeting requirements of ASTM A506. 2) Rods: Steel, meeting requirements of ASTM A575. 3) Rod Couplings: Malleable iron, meeting requirements of ASTM A197. 4) Bolts: Steel, meeting requirements of ASTM A307. 5) Cast Iron Washers: Meeting requirements of ASTM A126, Class A. 6) Thrust Block: 2500 psi (17.92 MPa) concrete. Pipe Sleeve at slab penetration: a. Any material rigid enough to resist deformation when concrete poured. b. Size: Provide 2 inch (50 mm) space between piping assembly and sleeve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Before installation, inspect pipe for defects and cracks. Do not use defective, damaged, or unsound pipe.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings. 2. Excavate to required depth. 3. Grade to obtain fall required. 4. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required. 5. Remove debris from trench prior to laying of pipe. 6. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect. 7. Excavate trenches so outside pipe will be 12 inches (300 mm) minimum below frost line or 48 inches (450 mm) minimum below finish grade, whichever is deeper. 8. Cover pipe only after testing is complete and accepted by Architect.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. When work is not in progress, close open ends of pipe and fittings so no trench water, soil, or other substances will enter pipes or fittings. 2. Keep trenches free from water until pipe jointing material has set. Do not lay pipe when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. Placing And Laying of Underground Pipe: 1. Deflections from straight line or grade, as required by vertical curves, horizontal curves, or offsets, shall not exceed 6/D inches per linear foot (12 500/D mm per m) of pipe where D represents nominal diameter of pipe expressed in inches (mm). 2. Deflections to be determined between center lines extended of two connecting pipes.

B.

Fire Suppression Water Distribution Piping

-3-

33 1119

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.

4.

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake If alignment requires deflection in excess of these limitations, provide special bends or sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe to provide angular deflections within limits approved by Architect. Laying: a. Shape trench bottom to give substantially uniform circumferential support to lower third of each pipe. b. Pipe laying shall proceed up-grade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe pointing in direction of flow. c. Lay each pipe true to line and grade and in such manner as to form close concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets of flow line. d. Support fittings at bends in pipe line by concrete thrust blocks firmly wedged against vertical face of trench. Blocks shall be at least two cu ft (0.06 cu m) in size. e. As work progresses, clear interior of pipe of dirt and superfluous materials. Where cleaning after laying is difficult because of small pipe, keep suitable swab or drag in pipe and pull forward past each joint immediately after jointing has been completed.

08.29.11

C.

Make joints between ductile iron and cast iron pipe and other types of pipe with standard manufactured cast-iron adapters and fittings. Provide cast iron valve box for fire protection valve. Encase valve box in concrete. Install ductile iron pipe to flange connection 12 inches (300 mm) above floor. Provide 2 inch (50 mm) minimum clearance around pipe at penetration through floor. Fill clearance with mastic. Make joints between ductile iron and other types of pipe with standard manufactured adapters and fittings. Make connections between new work and existing mains using specials fittings to suit actual conditions. Incidental Items of Work: 1. Valve, plug, or cap, as directed by Architect, where pipe ends are left for future connections. 2. Make key for unlocking valve handle identical to key used to open doors to building.

D. E.

F.

G.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Test system according to 'Contractor's Material & Test Certification for Underground Piping' NFPA 13 2007, figure 10-10.1.

END OF SECTION

Fire Suppression Water Distribution Piping

-4-

33 1119

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 33 3313 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavating and backfilling required for work of this Section. 2. Furnish and install sanitary sewage system as described in Contract Documents beginning at 5 feet (1.50 meter) from where it enters building and connecting to serving sewer system. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 1313: Sanitary sewage system within building and within 5 feet (1.50 meter) of building. 2. Section 31 2316: Procedure and quality of excavating. 3. Section 31 2323: Procedure and quality of backfilling and compacting.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A74-09, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.' b. ASTM C564-08, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.' c. ASTM D2235-04, Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-ButadieneStyrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.' d. ASTM D2321-08, Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.' e. ASTM D2564-04e1, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.' f. ASTM D2661-08, Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.' g. ASTM D2665-08b, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.' h. ASTM D303408, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.' i. ASTM F65608, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.'

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals 1. Install cleanouts in accordance with local governing authority and State codes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe And Fittings: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM A74, Service Grade:

Sanitary Utility Sewerage

-1-

33 3313

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.

a. Cast iron for bell and spigot fittings. b. Cast iron for no-hub joints. Approved Joint Material And Manufacturers: a. For Bell And Spigot Pipe: Rubber gaskets meeting requirements of ASTM C564 and compatible with pipe used. b. For No-Hub Pipe: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) SuperGrip 304 American Brass & Iron (AB&I), Oakland, CA www.abifoundry.com. b) Husky SD 4000 coupling by Anaco-Husky, Corona, CA www.anaco-husky.com. c) Neoprene gaskets with type 304 stainless steel clamp and 24 ga type 304 stainless steel housing by Clamp-All Corp, Haverhill, MA www.clampall.com. d) MG Coupling by MG Piping Products Co, Stanton, CA www.mgcoupling.com.

B.

ABS: 1. ABS Schedule 40 solid wall plastic pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D2661 joined with pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2235. PVC: 1. Schedule 40 solid wall plastic pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D2665 joined using cement primer meeting requirements of ASTM F656 and pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2564. 2. Gasket joint gravity sewer pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D3034. Joints shall be integral wall and elastomeric gasket.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Before installation, inspect pipe for defects and cracks. 2. Do not use defective, damaged, or unsound pipe.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and 2323 with following additional requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings. 2. Excavate to required depth and grade to obtain fall required. 3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required. 4. Remove debris from trench before laying pipe. 5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect. 6. Excavate trenches so outside pipe will be 12 inches (300 mm) minimum below frost line.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. General: 1. When work is not in progress, close open ends of pipe and fittings so no trench water, soil, or other substances will enter pipes or fittings. 2. Keep trenches free from water until pipe jointing material has set. Do not lay pipe when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. 3. Trench width at top of pipe: a. Minimum: 18 inches (450 mm) or diameter of pipe plus one foot (305 mm), whichever is greater. b. Maximum: Outside diameter of pipe plus two feet (610 mm).

Sanitary Utility Sewerage

-2-

33 3313

Project # 503-6925-11010101 B.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Placing And Laying of Underground Pipe: 1. Deflections from straight line or grade, as required by vertical curves, horizontal curves, or offsets, shall not exceed 6/D inches per linear foot (12 500/D mm per m) of pipe where D represents nominal diameter of pipe expressed in inches mm 2. Deflections to be determined between center lines extended of two connecting pipes. 3. If alignment requires deflection in excess of these limitations, provide special bends or sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe to provide angular deflections within limits approved by Architect. 4. Laying: a. Pipe laying shall proceed up-grade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe pointing in direction of flow. b. Lay each pipe true to line and grade and in such manner as to form close concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets of flow line. c. As work progresses, clear interior of pipe of dirt and superfluous materials. Where cleaning after laying is difficult because of small pipe, keep suitable swab or drag in pipe and pull forward past each joint immediately after jointing has been completed. 5. Make joints between cast iron pipe and other types of pipe with standard manufactured cast-iron adapters and fittings. 6. Valve, plug, or cap, as directed by Architect, where pipe ends are left for future connections. Cast Iron Pipe And Fittings: 1. Shape trench bottom to give substantially uniform circumferential support to lower third of each pipe. Provide depression under bell of each joint to maintain even bearing of sewer pipe. 2. Connect to street main as required by local authorities. 3. Use jacks to make-up gasketed joints. Thermoplastic Pipe And Fittings: 1. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2321. 2. Stabilize unstable trench bottoms. 3. Bed pipe true to line and grade with continuous support from firm base. a. Bedding depth: 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm). b. Material and compaction to meet ASTM standard noted above. 4. Excavate bell holes into bedding material so pipe is uniformly supported along its entire length. Blocking to grade pipe is forbidden. 5. Piping and joints shall be clean and installed according to Manufacturer's recommendations. Break down contaminated joints, clean seats and gaskets and reinstall. 6. Do not use back hoe or power equipment to assemble pipe. 7. Initial backfill shall be 12 inches (305 mm) above top of pipe with material specified in referenced ASTM standard. 8. Minimum cover over top of pipe: a. 36 inches (915 mm) before allowing vehicular traffic over pipe. b. 48 inches (1 200 mm) before use of compaction equipment other than hand or impact tampers.

C.

D.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Failure to install joints properly shall be cause for rejection and replacement of piping system.

END OF SECTION

Sanitary Utility Sewerage

-3-

33 3313

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 33 4116 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavating and backfilling required for work of this Section. 2. Furnish and install storm drainage system as described in Contract Documents from point of water collection to terminating point. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 2316: Procedure and quality of excavating. 2. Section 31 2323: Procedure and quality of backfilling and compacting.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American Association Of State Highway And Transportation Officials: a. AASHTO M252-09, 'Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe.' b. AASHTO M294-09, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500mm Diameter. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A74-09, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.' b. ASTM A536-84(2004)e1, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.' c. ASTM A929 / A929M-01(2007), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe.' d. ASTM C14-07, Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.' e. ASTM C76-08a, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.' f. ASTM C564-08, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.' g. ASTM D2321-08, Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.' h. ASTM D303408, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.' i. ASTM D321207, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.' j. ASTM F79403, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.' k. ASTM F133607, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gasketed Sewer Fittings.'

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Bedding Material: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) crushed gravel. 2. Catch Basins, Curb Inlets, Etc: a. Concrete: -133 4116

Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

8.

1) Construct of 4000 psi (27.57 MPa) minimum concrete. 2) Include cover inlet with cast iron frame and grate as shown on Drawings. b. PVC: 1) Comply with requirements of ASTM D3212. ASTM F794, and ASTM F1336. 2) Metal grates, Frames, and hoods shall comply with ASTM A536, Grade 70-50-05. 3) Type One Acceptable Products: a) Nyloplast-ADS, Buford, GA (866) 888-8479. www.nyloplast-us.com. b) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Concrete Pipe: a. Non-Reinforced: Meet requirements of ASTM C14. b. Reinforced: 1) Meet requirements of ASTM C76, plain end. 2) Determine class of pipe by depth of cover over pipe at rough-graded elevations as follows: a) Depth Of Cover Class Of Pipe b) Under 2 feet (0.610 m) V c) 2 feet to 3 feet (0.610 to 0.915 m) IV d) 3 feet to 6 feet (0.915 to 1.800 m) III e) Over 6 feet (1.800 mm) II PVC Pipe And Fittings: a. Meet requirements of ASTM D3034, SDR 35. b. Fittings: Slip Joint type with elastomeric seals. Fittings: Slip Joint type with elastomeric seals Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe And Fittings: a. Meet requirements of AASHTO M-252 or AASHTO M-294, Type S. 1) Corrugated, helical or annular, exterior with smooth interior and gasketed connectors. 2) Corrugated, annular, with silt and watertight joints for storm sewers. Corrugated Metal Pipe: a. Meet requirements of ASTM A929. b. 16-ga (1.6 mm), standard round, galvanized with 2 oz (56.7 g) zinc per sq ft (0.0929 sq m) sheet steel. c. Corrugations: 1) 6 to 10 Inch (150 to 255 mm) Pipe: 1-1/2 by 1/4 inch (38 by 6 mm) depth helical corrugations. 2) 12 to 60 Inch (300 to 1 500 mm) Pipe: 2-2/3 by 1/2 inch (17 by 12.7 mm) depth helical corrugations. Cast Iron Soil Pipe And Fittings: a. Meet requirements of ASTM A74. b. Joint Material: Rubber gaskets meeting requirements of ASTM C564 and compatible with pipe used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Section 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings. 2. Excavate to required depth. 3. Grade to obtain fall required. 4. Remove debris from trench before laying bedding and pipe. 5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect. 6. Backfill only after pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and approved by Architect.

Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping

-2-

33 4116

Project # 503-6925-11010101 3.2 INSTALLATION A.

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Concrete Pipe: 1. Provide 3 inches (75 mm) of uncompacted bedding material below pipe. 2. After installation of pipe, provide additional bedding material up to springline of pipe. PVC / Polyethylene Pipe: 1. Install in accordance with ASTM D2321. 2. Minimum cover for corrugated polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be 12 inches (300 mm) for H-20 load. Use jacks to make-up gasketed joints.

B.

C.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Failure to install joints properly shall be cause for rejection and replacement of piping system.

3.4

CLEANING A. Remove excess earth from site or place as directed by Architect.

END OF SECTION

Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping

-3-

33 4116

BLANK PAGE

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 SECTION 33 5613 ABOVE-GROUND FUEL-STORAGE TANKS: LPG

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavation and backfill required for work of this Section. 2. Furnish and install liquefied petroleum (lp) gas piping and fittings from storage tank to secondary regulator valve as described in Contract Documents. 3. Provide, make necessary arrangements for, and pay necessary fees to local liquefied petroleum gas company for gas service, tanks, and proper size regulator valves. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will arrange for leasing of tank and having it installed on concrete pad provided under Section 03 3053. 2. Section 03 3053: Concrete base for tank. 3. Section 05 0523: Welding standards and requirements. 4. Section 31 2323: Procedure and quality of backfilling and compacting.

B.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A53 / A53M-07, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, ZincCoated, Welded and Seamless.' b. ASTM A234 / A234-07, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.' c. ASTM D2513-08b, Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings.'

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Lay underground pipe in accordance with federal pipeline safety regulations and local gas utility company regulations and specifications. Qualifications: 1. Installers: a. Polyethylene pipe installers: 1) Properly trained and certified in procedure for joining polyethylene pipe. 2. Welders: a. Certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days before commencing work on project. b. If there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Owner's Representative may require welder to take another test. This shall be done at no cost to Owner. c. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other approved authority.

B.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Do not store polyethylene pipe so it is exposed to sunlight.

Above-ground Fuel-Storage Tanks: LPG

-1-

33 5613

Project # 503-6925-11010101 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

08.29.11

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

2.1

COMPONENTS A. Aboveground Pipe And Fittings: 1. Black carbon steel, butt-welded, Schedule 40 pipe meeting requirements of ASTM A53. 2. Welded forged steel fittings meeting requirements of ASTM A234. 3. Provide yellow jacketed gas piping where required by AHJ. Belowground Pipe And Fittings: 1. Polyethylene pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D2513 with No. 14 coated copper tracer wire. Storage Tank(s): 1. 1000 Gallon (3 785 Liter) Liquefied Petroleum (LPG) storage tank complete with accessories for ready to use gas supply system. Tanks for above ground installation only. Buried LPG tanks are prohibited. Secondary Pressure Reducing Regulator: Sized for pressure reduction from 10 psig (0.069 MPa) to 11 inches (280 mm) WG.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings. 2. Excavate to required depth. 3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required. 4. Remove debris from trench before laying pipe. 5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect. 6. Place 4 inches (100 mm) of sand around pipe before trench is backfilled. 7. Bury outside pipe 12 inches (305 mm) minimum below frost line or 18 inches (450 mm) minimum below finish grade, whichever is deeper. 8. Backfill only after pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and approved by Architect. General installation shall be as specified in Division 23: 1. Steel pipe 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) and larger shall have welded fittings and joints. 2. Provide 24 inch (610 mm) minimum steel pipe between vertical rise of riser and end of polyethylene line if anode-less riser is not used. Use plastic-to-steel transition or compression fitting between end of service line and steel meter riser. Provide cathodic protection for steel riser or use anode-less riser. 3. Place tracer wire along side of polyethylene pipe from meter to main. Set tank on concrete base. Provide seismic protection for tank as described in Contract Documents. Provide necessary protection against damage for tank and accessories.

B.

C. D.

3.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Before pipes are buried or concealed from view, air test systems in Architect's presence at 60 psig (0.41 MPa) for four hours and show no drop in pressure.

Above-ground Fuel-Storage Tanks: LPG

-2-

33 5613

Project # 503-6925-11010101

08.29.11 END OF SECTION

Scofield Bldg. Addition Helper UT Stake

Above-ground Fuel-Storage Tanks: LPG

-3-

33 5613

BLANK PAGE

Potrebbero piacerti anche